Omron Industrial Automation Guide 2015

Industrial Automation Guide 2015
Industrial Products & Systems
industrial.omron.eu
Targeted Technologies
Creating maximum output with minimum input
By identifying the many ways of innovation in specific
industries we developed the targeted technologies
concept. Its a way of thinking about technology
in a prioritized format. Prioritized according to our
customers most pressing needs. The result? A set of
solutions that make immediate impact on the core of
our customers businesses. A set of solutions that hit
the target every time. Take a look at the examples on
our website.
industrial.omron.eu/technologies
Welcome to our world

Our best-in-class devices for your automation system
Welcome to Omrons world of advanced industrial automation.
The INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION GUIDE is your essential tool
to select best-in-class devices for your automation system.
It highlights our core competences in sensing, control,
visualisation, motion and panel components.
Of course, Omron offers a much larger range of products than
you can find on the attached DVDs. For more information on
services and company competence visit our website.
Here you will find:
Latest product news
Technical product specifications
2D / 3D CAD Library
Customer references
Technology concepts
Supporting product documentation
Knowledge Base - myOmron
Events Calendar
Contact information
Find information fast!
Quick Links shortens your search. Quick Links are
unique codes assigned to Omron products listed
in this guide. Enter Quick Link codes in the search
box on industrial.omron.eu to access detailed
information on products in this guide.
NS5
NS5
Handheld
N538
Page 69
N539
Page 70
Quick Link
industrial.omron.eu
>
Industrial Automation Guide 2015

Omron at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The 361 Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
4
6
Automation systems
Machine automation controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable logic controllers (PLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Human machine interfaces (HMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O cables and terminal blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet cables and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
16
44
58
72
81
Motion & Drives

Motion controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Servo systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Frequency inverters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Sensing
Photoelectric sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mark and color sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lightcurtains and area sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber optic sensors and amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inductive sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mechanical sensors/Limit switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotary encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
172
214
222
230
262
282
298
306
Quality control & Inspection

Inspection & Ident systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Measurement sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Safety
Control- and Signalling devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety limit switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety door switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety control systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
402
426
434
462
492
Control components
Temperature controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital panel indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
512
538
554
564
574
582
Switching components
Electromechanical relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solid state relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low voltage switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pushbutton switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
594
608
618
634
662
Software
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Outline of Major Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
To the machine the work of the machine,

to man the thrill of further creation.
Kazuma Tateisi, founder of Omron
Omron at a glance
Listed in Top 2000 largest companies of the globe
Omron Corporation NASDAQ: OMRNY
Top ranking in Dow Jones Sustainability Index
Thomson Reuters Top 100 Global Innovators
200.000 products ranging

input, logic and output
Sensing, Control Systems, Visualization, Drives, Robots,
Safety, Quality Control & Inspection, Control and
Switching Components
7%
Innovation track
record of 80 years
Top 150 global patent assignee
1.200 employees dedicated to R&D
Investment in Research & Development
36.500
Employees worldwide
210
11.000 + issued and pending patents
Working for the

benefit of society
Industrial Automation
40%
Automotive
15%
Components
13%
Social Systems
11%
Healthcare
11%
Environmental
10%
Locations worldwide
22
Countries in EMEA
Sysmac Automation Platform

One control for the entire machine or production cell
Harmony between machine and people
Open communication and open programming standards
The 361 Approach
Your needs, our focus

Solutions perfectly matching your needs
We asked ourselves: What do you need in sensors and components? Well, rst you need reliability. Then a variety and
choice of performance levels. You may also want advanced functionality, with special features dened by you or
you may want standardized solutions, with highly competitive prices.
Whatever it is, it can all add up to a wish list that is dicult to full. Until now. Thats because our new 361 Approach
not only provides a complete all-round oer without gaps, it also puts you at the very centre of the product selection
process. Its an approach that leads to a Perfect Match one with the extra degree of condence that comes from
choosing Omron.
361 in one view
Quality
++
Line-up
++
Specs
++
Application
Customisation
Quality
++
Quality
++
Line-up
Line-up
++
Specs
Specs
++
Application
Application
++
Customisation
++
N.A.
ers
om
ust
rc
so
Customisation
designed for spe

cic
ap
p
lica
tio
n
uality
od q
o
g
ve,
cti
e
e
nger lifetime, m
rget lo
ore
d fo
n
fea
a
l
l
tur
a
st
es
in
co
st
Three distinct lines

361 Approach oers three distinct lines within each sensor or component product category. LITE products are
cost-eective without any compromise in quality. PRO products represent the install & forget option, oering
longer lifetime, higher protection, and more features. While PROplus products are designed for specic applications
or customer demands.
The extra degree of advantage

Three distinct lines of sensors and components
Optimized reliability
All three lines are backed by the Omron commitment
to quality, so even when you need a price-competitive
advantage, you can be condent that they will never
let you down.
Solutions that perfectly match your needs
The 361 Approach ensures that you can quickly and
easily identify the perfect match solution to your needs
nothing more, nothing less.
Optimized costs
Your sensor and component costs are also minimized
because it eliminates over-specication.
Why an extra 1?
The extra degree is what you get when you do business with Omron, and that means dierent things to
dierent customers all depending on their needs.
For example, if you need specication advice, the extra
degree is service. But ultimately, to everyone it means
an extra degree of condence in the perfect match.
Quality refers to the

standard of manufacturing and the materials
used this translates into
reliability.
Line-up refers to the

number of model types.
Application indicates the

complexity of the automation.
Specs refers to the choice

of performance levels.
Customization is the
possibility to modify the
product.
Product selection table
Automation systems
10
Machine automation
controller
16
Programmable logic
controllers (PLC)
44
Remote I/O
Motion & Drives
86
Motion controllers
102
Servo systems
150
Frequency inverters
Sensing
172
Photoelectric sensors
214
Mark and color sensors
222
Quality control &

Inspection
310
Inspection & Ident systems
366
Measurement sensors
Safety
402
Control- and Signalling

devices
426
Safety limit switches
Control components
512
Temperature controllers
538
594
Electromechanical relays
608
Software
674
Software
58
Human machine interfaces

(HMI)
Lightcurtains and area

sensors
230
Fiber optic sensors and

amplifiers
434
Safety door switches
462
Safety sensors
Power supplies
554
Timers
564
Counters
Solid state relays
618
Low voltage switchgear
634
Monitoring products
72
Cables and accessories
262
Inductive sensors
492
Safety control systems
574
Programmable relays
662
Pushbutton switches
282
Mechanical sensors/Limit
switches
582
Digital panel indicators
298
Rotary encoders
306
Cable connectors
Automation systems
S5
NS5
Handheld
38
e 69
N539
Page 70

8
Quick Link
Machine automation controller

Product overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Machine controller
NJ-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Human machine interfaces (HMI)

10
13
14
Programmable logic controllers (PLC)

Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact PLC
CPM2C CPU units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPM2C expansion units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP1E CPU units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP1L CPU units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP1H CPU units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP1W expansion units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modular PLC
CJ-Series CPU units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CJ-Series power supplies, expansions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CJ-Series digital I/O units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CJ-Series analog I/O and control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CJ-Series motion/position control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CJ-Series communication units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack PLC
CS-Series CPU units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS-Series power supplies, backplanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS-Series digital I/O units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS-Series analog and process I/O units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS-Series position/motion control units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS-Series communication units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
18
20
21
22
24
26
27
28
30
31
32
34
36
37
38
39
40
42
43
Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integrated HMI
NA7/9/12/15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scalable HMI
NS15/NS12/NS10/NS8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NS5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NS5 handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integrated controller/Scalable HMI
Accessories NS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact HMI
NB series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function-key HMI
NT11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NT2S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
60
62
64
65
66
67
68
70
71

I/O cables and terminal blocks
I/O cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O terminal blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet cables and accessories
Ethernet cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wireless communication
WE70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72
80
81
82
83
Remote I/O
Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote I/O
NX-series modular I/O system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SmartSlice I/O system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact I/O GX-series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact I/O DRT2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact I/O CRT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact I/O SRT2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field I/O DRT2-_C_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field I/O SRT2-_C_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
47
48
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
Automation systems
Content
Automation systems

NJSERIES MACHINE AUTOMATION CONTROLLER
Complete and robust machine automation
The NJ-Series Machine A utomation Controller is at the heart of the new Sysmac platform. One in tegrated machine controller that o ffers speed, f lexibility
and s calability of software centric architecture without compromising on the traditional reliability and robustness that you have come to expect from
Omron PLCs. The NJ-Series is de signed to meet extreme machine control requirements in terms of motion control speed and ac curacy, communication,
security and robust system. You just create
Integration of logic and motion in one Intel CPU
Scalable control: CPUs for 4, 8, 16, 32 and 64 axes
EtherCAT and EtherNet/IP ports embedded
Fully conforms to IEC 61131-3 standards
Certified PLCopen function blocks for motion control
Linear, circular and spiral (helical) interpolation
CPU units with SQL client and robotic functionality
10
Please find our full online catalogue on: http://omron.me/iag2015EU
Type of CPU needed?
Standard NJ
Sequence
Motion
Vision
Safety
NJ Robotics
Sequence
Motion
Vision
Safety
Robotics
up to 8 axes
up to 64 axes
NJ3 series
NJ5 series
NJ Database connection
Sequence
Motion
Vision
Safety
Database connection
NJ5
NJ5 Robotics
NJ5 Database connection
H245
Page 14
H248, H246, H252

Page 14
11
12
Selection table

Model
NJ5
NJ5 Robotics
NJ5 with Database connection
NJ3
Description
NJ5 series Machine Controller with

Sequence and Motion functionality

Sequence, Motion and Robotics
functionality

Sequence, Motion and Database
connection functionality

Sequence and Motion functionality
Task
Multi-tasking program
Software
Sysmac Studio
Programming
Ladder
Structured Text
In-Line ST
Standard programming
IEC 61131-3
PLCopen Function Blocks for Motion Control
Program capacity
20 MB
SD Memory Card
SD and SDHC Memory card
5 MB
Built-in port
EtherNet/IP
EtherCAT
USB 2.0
EtherCAT slaves
192
Number of axes
64, 32, 16
Servo Drive
Accurax G5/EtherCAT
Motion Control
Axes groups interpolation

and single axis moves
Electronic cams and gearboxes
Direct position control
for axis and group
Local I/O
(Compatible
CJ series units)
Remote I/O
8, 4
for axis and group
Up to 8 Delta Robot control
Digital I/O units

CJ1W-IA201
CJ1W-IA111
CJ1W-ID201
CJ1W-ID211
CJ1W-ID211(SL)
CJ1W-ID212
CJ1W-INT01
CJ1W-IDP01
CJ1W-ID231
CJ1W-ID232
CJ1W-ID233
CJ1W-ID261
CJ1W-ID262
CJ1W-OA201
CJ1W-OC201
CJ1W-OC201(SL)
CJ1W-OC211
CJ1W-OC211(SL)
CJ1W-OD201
CJ1W-OD203
CJ1W-OD211
CJ1W-OD211(SL)
CJ1W-OD213
CJ1W-OD231
CJ1W-OD233
CJ1W-OD234
CJ1W-OD261
CJ1W-OD263
CJ1W-OD202
CJ1W-OD204
CJ1W-OD212
CJ1W-OD212(SL)
CJ1W-OD232
CJ1W-OD262
CJ1W-MD232
CJ1W-MD231
CJ1W-MD233
CJ1W-MD261
CJ1W-MD263
CJ1W-MD563

for axis and group
Analog I/O units
Special I/O units
Communication units
ID sensor units
CJ1W-AD04U
CJ1W-AD04U(SL)
CJ1W-AD041-V1
CJ1W-AD041-V1(SL)
CJ1W-AD042
CJ1W-AD081-V1
CJ1W-AD081-V1(SL)
CJ1W-DA021
CJ1W-DA021(SL)
CJ1W-DA041
CJ1W-DA041(SL)
CJ1W-DA042V
CJ1W-DA08V
CJ1W-DA08V(SL)
CJ1W-DA08C
CJ1W-DA08C(SL)
CJ1W-MAD42
CJ1W-MAD42(SL)
CJ1W-PH41U
CJ1W-PDC15
CJ1W-TS561
CJ1W-TS561(SL)
CJ1W-TS562
CJ1W-TS562(SL)
CJ1W-TC003
CJ1W-TC004
CJ1W-TC103
CJ1W-TC104
CJ1W-CT021
CJ1W-CTL41-E
CJ1W-SCU22
CJ1W-SCU32
CJ1W-SCU42
CJ1W-EIP21
CJ1W-DRM21
CJ1W-CRM21
CJ1W-PRM21
CJ1W-PRT21
CJ1W-PNT21
CJ1W-CIF11
CJ1W-V680C11
CJ1W-V680C12
NX I/O units/EtherCAT
Mounting
DIN rail
Global standards
CE, cULus, NK, LR
Page/Quick Link
14
13
NJ-Series
Machine controller
Complete and robust machine automation
The NJ-Series is designed to meet extreme machine control requirements in terms of
motion control speed and accuracy, communication, security and robustness.
Fully conforms to IEC 61131-3 standards
Certified PLCopen function blocks for motion control
CPU units with database connection and robotic functionality
Ordering information
NS HMI
SQL Database
Sysmac Studio
Remote access
Industrial Switching Hubbs

Ethernet cable
NJ-Series
End cover
(included
with the CPU)
NJ-Series
Power Supply
Unit
NJ-Series
CPU Unit
CJ-Series
Units
EtherCAT cable
Accurax G5
Servo Drive
ADR
ADR
NX I/O
NX Safety
EtherCAT
Junction
Slave
MX2 inverter
FH vision
Accurax G5
Servo Motors
14
Accurax
Linear Motors
NJ-Series
Machine controller
Type
Output capacity
at 5 VDC
100 to 240 VAC 6.0 A
Output capacity Max. output Features

at 24 VDC
power
Size in mm (H W D)
Order code
1.0 A
90 70 90
NJ-PA3001
30 W
Run output
Power supply
NJ-PD3001
24 VDC
CPU
Series
Description
Max. Digital I/O

points
Program
capacity
Variables capacity Max. I/O units
5 VDC current Size in mm

consumption (H W D)
NJ5 series
Sequence and
motion functionality
2,560
20 MB
2 MB: Retained
CPU rack: 10 units max. 1.90 A
4 MB: Not retained Expansion rack:
40 units max.
(up to 3 expansion racks)
Number
of axes
Order code
90 90 90 64
NJ501-1500
32
NJ501-1400
16
NJ501-1300
64
NJ501-4500
32
NJ501-4400
16
NJ501-4300
Sequence, motion and

robotics functionality
NJ501-4310*1
Sequence, motion and
database connection
functionality
NJ3 series
*1
Sequence and
motion functionality
5 MB
0,5 MB: Retained

2 MB: Not retained
64
NJ501-1520
32
NJ501-1420
16
NJ501-1320
NJ301-1200
NJ301-1100
The NJ501-4310 CPU unit only supports one delta robot.
Note: The end cover unit CJ1W-TER01 is included with the CPU unit.
Accessories
Type
Remarks
Size in mm (H W D)
Order code
EtherCAT branching unit
3 ports, 24 VDC, DIN rail mounting
90 25 78
GX-JC03
90 48 78
GX-JC06
90 25 78
W4S1-03B
90 48 78
W4S1-05B
5 ports, 24 VDC, failure detection, DIN rail mounting
90 48 78
W4S1-05C
Industrial switching hub
2 GB
HMC-SD291
4 GB
HMC-SD491
Length: 0.5 m, height: 7.3 mm
PFP-50N
Length: 1 m, height: 7.3 mm
PFP-100N
Length: 1 m, height: 16 mm
PFP-100N2
End plate to secure the units on the DIN track
2 pieces are included with the CPU unit and I/O interface unit
PFP-M (2 pcs.)
Battery for NJ-series CPU unit
The battery is included with the CPU unit
CJ1W-BAT01
End cover
The end cover is included with each CPU unit and I/O interface unit
CJ1W-TER01
SD memory card
DIN track
Computer software
Specifications
Order code
Sysmac Studio
SYSMAC-SE2___
15

KNOW ONE ... KNOW THEM ALL!
Whether your automation requires a simple and economical solution, or your target is advanced, high-speed control,
you can find what you need in Omron's line-up of Programmable Controllers.
And if your systems grow, or change due to market demand, you will find that only Omron offers a full range of Compact PLCs and Modular PLCs that
share the same architecture. Therefore your programs are fully upward compatible, both in memory allocation and instruction set.
One scalable PLC family to always match exactly with your application
Transparent communication routing through different networks
The best size/performance ratio in the industry
Compact
Max. I/O size?
16
up to 180
up to 180
up to 192
up to 320
Expansion units
CP1E
CP1L
CPM2C
CP1H
CP1W
H234
Page 22
H226
Page 24
H232
Page 20
H225
Page 26
H235
Page 27
PLC
Type of PLC needed?
Modular
Rack
Max. I/O size?
Max. I/O size?
up to 640
up to 2560
up to 5120
Dual
redundancy
High-speed
synchronous I/O
CJ1M
CJ2M
CJ2H
CS1G/H
CS1D
H238
Page 28
H243
Page 28
H242
Page 28
H247
Page 37
H223
Page 37
17
Selection table
Compact PLC series
Model
CPM2C
CP1E
CP1L
CP1H
Max digital I/O points*1
192
180
180
320*2
Built-in
Digital I/O
10 to 32
10 to 60
10 to 60
20 or 40
Interrupt inputs
2 or 4
4 or 6
2, 4, or 6
6 or 8
Counter inputs
2 or 4
5 or 6
2 or 4
Pulse outputs*1
2 or 4
CPU features*1
Compact size
Expansion units
Quick-response inputs
High-speed counter
Pulse output with PWM
RS-232C port
Real time clock
USB port
Expansion I/O units
High-speed counter
RS-232C port
RS-485 port
Real time clock
2 Analog adjusters
See Analog I/O section
USB or Ethernet port

Expansion I/O units
High-speed counter
Up to 2 serial option boards
Real time clock
1 Analog adjuster
USB port
Expansion I/O units
CJ-series Special I/O Units
CJ-series CPU Bus Units
High-speed counter
RS-232C port
Option board slots
Real time clock
1 Analog adjuster
LED display, 2 digit
Instruction Execution time

(bit instruction)
0.64 s
1.19 s
0.55 s
0.10 s
Program memory
4K words
2 or 8K steps
5 or 10K (+10K Function block) steps 20K steps
Data memory
2K words
2 or 8K words
10 or 32K words
32K words
External memory
Expansion memory unit
Memory cassette
Memory cassette
Analog I/O
Analog I/O unit

Temperature sensor unit
Built-in for E-NA model (2 in + 1 out) Built-in for EL/EM model (2 inputs)
Analog I/O Expansion Units
Temperature Input Expansion Units Temperature Input Expansion Units
Special function units
Fieldbus master
ModBus
Ethernet
ModBus
Ethernet
EtherNet/IP
Controller Link
DeviceNet
PROFIBUS-DP
PROFINET
ModBus
CompoNet
CompoBus/S
CAN (freely configurable)
Fieldbus I/O
CompoBus/S
DeviceNet
PROFIBUS-DP
CompoBus/S
DeviceNet
PROFIBUS-DP
CompoBus/S
DeviceNet
PROFIBUS-DP
CompoBus/S
DeviceNet
Page/Quick Link
20
22
24
26
*1
*2
18
Built-in for XA model (4 in + 2 out)

Temperature Input Expansion Units
CJ Analog I/O Units
CJ Temperature Units
CJ-series Special I/O Units
CJ-series CPU Bus Units
Some features listed are not available for all CPU types within each series. Please review specifications for more information on CPU features and performance.
Represents local I/O capacity. If a fieldbus master is used more I/O is possible.

Rack PLC series
PLC
Modular PLC series
Model
CJ1M/G
CJ2M
CJ2H
CS1G/H
CS1D
Max. digital I/O points*1
1280
2560
2560
5120
5120
Built-in*1
Digital I/O
16
Interrupt inputs
Counter inputs
Pulse outputs
CPU features*1
Compact size
No backplane required
Large program capacity
Easy backups
Built-in pulse I/O
Loop control CPU type
Real time clock
USB port
Ethernet/IP port
High-speed I/O units
Option board plug-in
Structures and arrays
Tag data links
Compact size
Function Block memory
Easy backups
Real time clock
USB port
Ethernet/IP port
High-speed I/O units
Structures and arrays
Tag data links
Synchronous I/O
Compact size
Extra Large program capacity
Easy backups
Real time clock
High I/O capacity

Inner board support
Backwards compatible
Easy backups
Real time clock
Redundant CPU
Redundant power supply
Hot swapping
High I/O capacity
Inner board support
Backwards compatible
Easy backups
Real time clock
Instruction Execution time

(bit instruction)
0.10/0.04 s
0.04 s
0.016 s
0.04/0.02 s
0.04/0.02 s
Program memory
5 to 60K steps
5 to 60K steps
50 to 400K steps
10 to 250K steps
10 to 250K steps
Data memory
32 to 128K words
64 to 160K words
160 to 832K words
64 to 448K words
64 to 448K words
Temperature control
High-speed counters (500 kHz)
SSI encoder input
Position control
Protocol macro
RFID sensor unit
High-speed I/O
Synchronised Position
Data collection & storage unit
Temperature control
SSI encoder input
Position control
Motion control
Process control
Protocol macro
RFID sensor unit
CompactFlash memory
Up to 512 MB
Analog I/O
Analog I/O unit

Temperature sensor unit
Temperature control unit
Special function units
Temperature control
SSI encoder input
Position control
Protocol macro
RFID sensor unit
Weighing unit
Fieldbus master
Ethernet
EtherNet/IP
Controller Link
DeviceNet
PROFIBUS-DP
PROFINET
ModBus
CompoNet
CompoBus/S
Fieldbus I/O
DeviceNet
PROFIBUS-DP
Page/Quick Link
28
*1
37
Some features listed are not available for all CPU types within each series. Please review specifications for more information on CPU features and performance.
19
CPM2C CPU units
Compact PLC
The versatile slim-line controller
An extensive range of models ensures efficient machine control in an ultra-compact
package. CPU units are available with relay or transistor output, terminal block or various connector options, and an optional real-time clock function. Select the output
type, number of I/O points and other specifications to meet your needs. Expansion I/O
units with 8 to 32 I/O points make it possible to configure a control system with a maximum of 192 I/O points.
Space-saving slim outline, high-density I/O
10-32 I/O points per CPU, transistor or relay outputs
20 kHz counter input, two 10 kHz pulse outputs integrated
Two communication ports built-in, freely accessible
Digital, analog, and fieldbus expansion units
Input
points
6 points
Output
points
Program
capacity
Data
memory
capacity
Logic
execution
speed
Size in mm
(H W D)
I/O Connectors
4 points 4K words
2K words
0.64 s
90 33 65
2 Terminal blocks Relay

2 Fujitsu (24 pt)
2 MIL (20 pt)
12 points
8 points 4K words
2K words
0.64 s
90 33 65
0.64 s
90 33 65
Real time
clock
Order code
1 Encoder input (20 kHz)
CPM2C-10CDR-D
Yes
CPM2C-10C1DR-D

2 Pulse output (10 kHz)
CPM2C-10CDT1C-D
Yes
CPM2C-10C1DT1C-D
Transistor
(source type)

CPM2C-10CDT1M-D
Yes
CPM2C-10C1DT1M-D
CPM2C-20CDR-D
Yes
CPM2C-20C1DR-D
Transistor
(source type)

CPM2C-20CDT1C-D
Yes
CPM2C-20C1DT1C-D
Transistor
(source type)

CPM2C-20CDT1M-D
Yes
CPM2C-20C1DT1M-D
2 Fujitsu (24 pt)
Transistor
(source type)

CPM2C-32CDT1C-D
2 MIL (20 pt)
Transistor
(source type)

CPM2C-32CDT1M-D
2 MIL (20 pt)

2K words
Built-in functions
Transistor
(source type)
2 Terminal blocks Relay

2 Fujitsu (24 pt)
16 points 16 points 4K words
Output method
6 points
4 points 4K words
2K words
0.64 s
90 40 65
1 Fujitsu (24 pt)
Transistor
(source type)

Programmable Slave with
DeviceNet slave and
CompoBus/S Master
Yes
CPM2C-S110C-DRT
6 points
4 points 4K words
2K words
0.64 s
90 40 65
1 Fujitsu (24 pt)
Transistor
(source type)

CompoBus/S Master
Yes
CPM2C-S110C
Note: All CPU's are available only with DC supply voltage (CPM2C-PA201 can be used as power supply).
CPU's with sourcing transistor outputs are also available with sinking transistor outputs.
MIL = connector according to MIL-C-83503 (compatible with DIN 41651/IEC 60603-1).
For I/O Cables and Terminal Blocks, see page 72
20
CPM2C expansion units
Compact PLC
Expand the capacity of your CPM2C PLC
PLC
Expansion I/O units with 8 to 32 I/O points make it possible to configure a control system with a maximum of 192 I/O points
Unit
Output type
I/O Connectors
Inputs
Outputs
Order code
Expansion I/O units
1 Fujitsu (24 pt)
CPM2C-8EDC
16
CPM2C-8EDM
1 MIL (20 pt)
1 Fujitsu (24 pt)
Relay
1 Terminal block
Transistor output (source type)
1 Fujitsu (24 pt)

1 Fujitsu (24 pt)
CPM2C-8ER
CPM2C-8ET1C
CPM2C-8ET1M
1 MIL (20 pt)

CPM2C-16EDC
CPM2C-16EDM
1 MIL (20 pt)
16
CPM2C-16ET1C
CPM2C-16ET1M
1 MIL (20 pt)

Relay
2 Terminal blocks
CPM2C-10EDR
Relay
2 Terminal blocks
12
CPM2C-20EDR
2 Fujitsu (24 pt)
16
CPM2C-24EDT1C
16
16
CPM2C-24EDT1M
2 MIL (20 pt)

2 Fujitsu (24 pt)
CPM2C-32EDT1C
CPM2C-32EDT1M
2 MIL (20 pt)

Analog I/O units
Analog (resolution 1/6,000)
2 Terminal blocks
CPM2C-MAD11
Temperature sensor units
Thermocouple input
1 Terminal block
CPM2C-TS001
Platinum resistance input
1 Terminal block
CPM2C-TS101
CompoBus/S I/O link unit
1 Terminal block
I/O link of 8 input bits and 8 output bits
CPM2C-SRT21
RS-232C and RS422 adapter units
1 D-sub 9-pin
RS-232C
CPM2C-CIF01-V1
1 Terminal block and

1 D-sub 9-pin
RS-232C and RS422
CPM2C-CIF11
Note: Expansion I/O units with sourcing transistor outputs are also available with sinking transistor outputs.
21
CP1E CPU units
Compact PLC
Maximum functionality at minimum cost
Omrons CP1E series targets a lean automation solution, but still offers all functionality you need to control relatively simple applications, including outstanding positioning capability. The CP1E comes with 10, 14, 20, 30, 40 or 60 I/O built-in and can be
expanded with a wide range of CP1W expansion units up to 180 I/O points. It uses a
standard USB port for programming and monitoring. The CP1E-N CPU types have a
RS232 serial communication port embedded and offer an extra serial communication
port that can be used to connect frequency inverters or temperature controllers. As the
CP1E series shares the same architecture as the CP1L, CP1H, CJ, and CS1 series, programs are compatible for memory allocations and instructions.
CP1E CPU
Digital Digital Max. I/O

Communication Input/output
input output points (incl. ports
functions
expansions)
Output type Power supply Expandability Program Data

capacity memory
capacity
Logic
Order code
execution
speed
E-type with
10 I/O points
Relay
1.19 s
10
5 Encoder inputs
(10 kHz)
4 Interrupts/counters
Transistor
(sinking)
84 to 264 VAC
2K steps 2K words
CP1E-E10DT-D
CP1E-E10DT1-D
Transistor
(sourcing)
E-type with
14 I/O points
14
E-type with
20 I/O points
12
20
E-type with
30 I/O points
18
12
150
E-type with
40 I/O points
24
16
160
N-type with
14 I/O points
14
N-type with
20 I/O points
12
NA-type with 12
20 I/O points
and analog
I/O
22
20
140
6 Encoder inputs
(10 kHz)
Relay
CP1E-E14SDR-A
84 to 264 VAC
CP1E-E20SDR-A
CP1E-E30SDR-A
Up to
3 expansion
units*1
RS-232C port
CP1E-E10DR-A
CP1E-E10DR-D
20.4 to
26.4 VDC
84 to 264 VAC
CP1E-E40SDR-A
6 Encoder inputs
(2 100 kHz,
4 10kHz)
Relay
6 Encoder inputs
(2 100 kHz,
4 10kHz)
2 Pulse outputs
(100 kHz)
Transistor
(sinking)
CP1E-N14DT-D
Transistor
(sourcing)
CP1E-N14DT1-D
20.4 to
26.4 VDC
8K steps 8K words
CP1E-N14DR-A
CP1E-N14DR-D
6 Encoder inputs
(2 100 kHz,
4 10kHz)
Relay
84 to 264 VAC
CP1E-N20DR-A
20.4 to
26.4 VDC
CP1E-N20DR-D
6 Encoder inputs
(2 100 kHz,
4 10kHz)
2 Pulse outputs
(100 kHz)
Transistor
(sinking)
CP1E-N20DT-D
Transistor
(sourcing)
CP1E-N20DT1-D
6 Encoder inputs
(2 100 kHz,
4 10kHz)
2 analog inputs
(1/6,000)
1 analog output
(1/6,000)
Relay
84 to 264 VAC Up to
3 expansion
units*1
CP1E-NA20DR-A
6 Encoder inputs
(2 100 kHz,
4 10kHz)
2 Pulse outputs
(100 kHz)
2 analog inputs
(1/6,000)
1 analog output
(1/6,000)
Transistor
(sinking)
20.4 to
26.4 VDC
CP1E-NA20DT-D
Transistor
(sourcing)
CP1E-NA20DT1-D
Compact PLC
CP1E CPU

Communication Input/output
input output points (incl. ports
functions
expansions)
Output type Power supply Expandability Program Data

capacity memory
capacity
N-type with
30 I/O points
18
6 Encoder inputs
(2 100 kHz,
4 10kHz)
Relay
6 Encoder inputs
(2 100 kHz,
4 10kHz)
2 Pulse outputs
(100 kHz)
Transistor
(sinking)
CP1E-N30DT-D
Transistor
(sourcing)
CP1E-N30DT1-D
6 Encoder inputs
(2 100 kHz,
4 10kHz)
Relay
84 to 264 VAC
CP1E-N30S1DR-A
6 Encoder inputs
(2 100 kHz,
4 10kHz)
2 Pulse outputs
(100 kHz)
Transistor
(sinking)
20.4 to
26.4 VDC
CP1E-N30S1DT-D
6 Encoder inputs
(2 100 kHz,
4 10kHz)
Relay
6 Encoder inputs
(2 100 kHz,
4 10kHz)
2 Pulse outputs
(100 kHz)
Transistor
(sinking)
CP1E-N40DT-D
Transistor
(sourcing)
CP1E-N40DT1-D
6 Encoder inputs
(2 100 kHz,
4 10kHz)
Relay
84 to 264 VAC
CP1E-N40S1DR-A
6 Encoder inputs
(2 100 kHz,
4 10kHz)
2 Pulse outputs
(100 kHz)
Transistor
(sinking)
20.4 to
26.4 VDC
CP1E-N40S1DT-D
6 Encoder inputs
(2 100 kHz,
4 10kHz)
Relay
6 Encoder inputs
(2 100 kHz,
4 10kHz)
2 Pulse outputs
(100 kHz)
Transistor
(sinking)
CP1E-N60DT-D
Transistor
(sourcing)
CP1E-N60DT1-D
6 Encoder inputs
(2 100 kHz,
4 10kHz)
Relay
84 to 264 VAC
CP1E-N60S1DR-A
6 Encoder inputs
(2 100 kHz,
4 10kHz)
2 Pulse outputs
(100 kHz)
Transistor
(sinking)
20.4 to
26.4 VDC
CP1E-N60S1DT-D
12
150
RS-232C port
RS-232C port
RS-485 port
(half-duplex)
N-type with
40 I/O points
24
16
160
RS-232C port
RS-232C port
RS-485 port
(half-duplex)
N-type with
60 I/O points
36
24
180
RS-232C port
RS-232C port
RS-485 port
(half-duplex)
*1
84 to 264 VAC Up to
3 expansion
20.4 to
units*1
26.4 VDC
8K steps 8K words
Logic
Order code
execution
speed
1.19 s
CP1E-N30DR-A
CP1E-N30DR-D
CP1E-N30S1DT1-D
Transistor
(sourcing)
84 to 264 VAC
CP1E-N40DR-A
20.4 to
26.4 VDC
CP1E-N40DR-D
Transistor
(sourcing)
CP1E-N40S1DT1-D
84 to 264 VAC
CP1E-N60DR-A
20.4 to
26.4 VDC
CP1E-N60DR-D
Transistor
(sourcing)
CP1E-N60S1DT1-D
There is no restriction on the possible combination of CP1W expansion units. All expansion units can be combined with each other up to the maximum number of expansions.
Note: The CP1E E-type has no real-time clock and therefore no battery. The N/NA-type has one optional battery for the real-time clock.
The CP1E-N/NA-type has 6 Interrupts/counters.
The CP1E-NxxS1 CPU types do not support serial option boards.
Accessories
Type
Remarks
Order code
USB programming cable
A-type male to B-type male (length: 1.8 m)
CP1W-CN221
RS-232C option board
D-Sub, 9 pins, female (15 m max.)
CP1W-CIF01
RS-422A/485 option board
Terminal block (50 m max.)
CP1W-CIF11
RS-422A/485 (isolated) option board
CP1W-CIF12
Ethernet option board
100/10Base-TX (Auto-MDIX)
CP1W-CIF41*1
Battery for CP1E-N/NA type
To retain time of clock
CP1W-BAT01
*1
Only firmware v2.0
23
PLC
CP1E CPU units
CP1L CPU units
Compact PLC
The compact machine controller
When it comes to controllers for compact machines, Omrons CP1L series offers the
compactness of a micro-PLC with the capability of a modular PLC. It provides all the
functionality you need to control your machine, including outstanding positioning capability. The CP1L comes with 14, 20, 30, 40, or 60 I/O built-in and can be expanded
with a wide range of CP1W expansion units up to 180 I/O points. It uses a standard USB
port for programming and monitoring and offers two optional plug-in serial communication ports, of which one can be used for a display or Ethernet option as well. As the
CP1L series shares the same architecture as the CP1E, CP1H, CJ1, and CS1 series, programs are compatible for memory allocations and instructions.
CP1L CPU

Input/output functions
input output points (incl.
expansions)
L-type with
10 I/O points
10
Output type Power supply PLC port Expandability Program Data

capacity memory
capacity
4 Encoder inputs (100 kHz) Relay

4 Encoder inputs (100 kHz) Transistor
2 Pulse outputs (100 kHz) (sinking)
Transistor
(sourcing)
L-type with
14 I/O points
54

Transistor
(sourcing)
L-type with
20 I/O points
12
60

Transistor
(sourcing)
84 to 264 VAC USB
M-type with
30 I/O points
18
12
150
CP1L-L10DR-A
CP1L-L10DR-D
CP1L-L10DT-D
CP1L-L10DT1-D
84 to 264 VAC
Up to
1 expansion
units*1
20.4 to
26.4 VDC
CP1L-L14DR-A
CP1L-L14DR-D
CP1L-L14DT-D
CP1L-L14DT1-D
84 to 264 VAC
CP1L-L20DR-A
20.4 to
26.4 VDC
CP1L-L20DR-D
CP1L-L20DT-D
CP1L-L20DT1-D
Ethernet
5K
(+10K FB)
steps
CP1L-EL20DR-D
CP1L-EL20DT-D
Transistor
(sourcing)
CP1L-EL20DT1-D

Transistor
(sourcing)
2 Analog inputs (1/1,000)
24
0.55 s
Transistor
(sinking)

4 Encoder inputs (100 kHz)

2 Pulse outputs (100 kHz)
5K steps 10K words
20.4 to
26.4 VDC

Logic
Order code
execution
speed
84 to 264 VAC USB

20.4 to
26.4 VDC
Up to
3 expansion
units*1
10K steps 32K words
CP1L-M30DR-A
CP1L-M30DR-D
CP1L-M30DT-D
CP1L-M30DT1-D
Ethernet
10K
(+10K FB)
steps
CP1L-EM30DR-D
Transistor
(sinking)
CP1L-EM30DT-D
Transistor
(sourcing)
CP1L-EM30DT1-D
CP1L CPU units
Compact PLC

expansions)
M-type with
40 I/O points
24
16
160

capacity memory
capacity

Transistor
(sourcing)
84 to 264 VAC USB

20.4 to
26.4 VDC
M-type with
60 I/O points
36
24
180
0.55 s
CP1L-M40DR-A
CP1L-M40DR-D
CP1L-M40DT-D
Ethernet
10K
(+10K FB)
steps
CP1L-EM40DR-D
Transistor
(sinking)
CP1L-EM40DT-D
Transistor
(sourcing)
CP1L-EM40DT1-D

Transistor
(sourcing)
*1
10K steps 32K words
CP1L-M40DT1-D

Up to
3 expansion
units*1
Logic
Order code
execution
speed
PLC
CP1L CPU
84 to 264 VAC USB

20.4 to
26.4 VDC
10K steps
CP1L-M60DR-A
CP1L-M60DR-D
CP1L-M60DT-D
CP1L-M60DT1-D
There is no restriction on the possible combination of CP1W expansion units. All expansion units can be combined with each other up to the maximum number of expansions.
Accessories
Type
Remarks
Order code
Memory cassette
512K words (upload/download program)
CP1W-ME05M
CP1W-CN221
CP1W-CIF01
CP1W-CIF11
CP1W-CIF12
CP1W-CIF41
LCD display
4 rows 12 characters
CP1W-DAM01
Analog I/O option board (only for CP1L-EL/EM)
2 inputs, 0 to 10 V/0 to 20 mA
CP1W-ADB21
2 outputs, 0 to 10 V
CP1W-DAB21V
2 inputs, 0 to 10 V/0 to 20 mA + 2 outputs 0 to 10 V
CP1W-MAB221
Battery
For replacement purpose
CJ1W-BAT01
Note: CP1L-10 I/O points CPU does not support option boards.
CP1L-30/40/60 I/O points CPUs support two option boards.
For Ethernet Cables and Accessories, see page 81.
25
CP1H CPU units
Compact PLC
The all-in-one PLC
Designed for compact machines, it combines the size of a micro PLC and the power of
a modular PLC. Four built-in high-speed counters and four pulse outputs are ideal for
multi-axis positioning control. The CP1H-XA comes with 4 analog inputs and 2 analog
outputs built-in. This makes it suitable for simple loop control, using the PLC's advanced PID control function with auto-tuning. The CP1H can be expanded with CP1W
I/Os and supports up to 2 CJ1 special I/O units. This means that it is open to popular
fieldbuses and supports all communication units of the CJ1 series.
Up to 1 MHz for inputs/outputs
CJ1M compatible instruction set and execution speed
4 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs for the XA model
USB port for easy communication, programming and configuration
Supports PROFIBUS, DeviceNet, CAN and Ethernet
CP1H CPU

expansions)

capacity memory
capacity
Y-type with
20 I/O points
12
300
4 Encoder inputs
(2 1 MHz +
2 100 kHz)
4 Pulse outputs
(2 1 MHz +
2 100 kHz)
Transistor
(sinking)
X-type with
40 I/O points
24
16
320

84 to 264 VAC
CP1H-X40DR-A

Transistor
(sourcing)
20.4 to
26.4 VDC
CP1H-X40DT-D

2 Analog outputs (1/12,000)
84 to 264 VAC
CP1H-XA40DR-A

2 Analog outputs (1/12,000)
20.4 to
26.4 VDC
CP1H-XA40DT-D
XA-type with
40 I/O points
and analog
I/O
*1
Transistor
(sinking)
20.4 to
26.4 VDC
USB
Up to
7 expansion
units*1
20K steps 32K words
Logic
Order code
execution
speed
0.1 s
CP1H-Y20DT-D
CP1H-X40DT1-D
Transistor
(sourcing)
CP1H-XA40DT1-D
CP1H CPU series can be expanded with CP1W expansion units (up to 7 units) and CJ1 Special I/O units (up to 2 units).
Note: Some expansion units count for 2 unit numbers (eg. CP1W-AD041, CP1W-DA041, CP1W-TS002 and CP1W-TS102) but only 7 expansion unit numbers can be allocated
in a CP1H PLC's configuration.
Accessories
Type
Remarks
Order code
Memory cassette
512K words (upload/download program)
CP1W-ME05M
CP1W-CN221
CP1W-CIF01
CP1W-CIF11
CP1W-CIF12
CP1W-CIF41
LCD display
4 rows 12 characters
CP1W-DAM01
Expansion I/O connecting cable
80 cm cable to connect CP1W expansion units
CP1W-CN811
CJ1 expansion unit adapter
Unit to connect CJ1 Special I/O units
CP1W-EXT01
Battery
For replacement purpose
CJ1W-BAT01
26
CP1W expansion units
Compact PLC
Expand the capacity of your compact PLC
PLC
A wide variety of expansion units such as Digital I/O, Analog I/O and Remote I/O
are available to create the application you need. These CP1W expansion units can be
used for CP1E-, CP1L-, and CP1H series PLC.
Expansion unit
Inputs
Outputs
Max I/O points
Input/output type Size in mm

(H W D)
Digital I/O units
8 points
8 Inputs
90 66 50
CP1W-8ED
8 Outputs
Relay
90 66 50
CP1W-8ER
Transistor (sinking) 90 66 50
CP1W-8ET
Transistor
(sourcing)
CP1W-8ET1
12
24
90 66 50
No. of unit
Order code
numbers
allocated
(CP1H only)*1
16
16 points
16 Outputs
Relay
90 86 50
CP1W-16ER
20 points
12 Inputs/8 outputs
Relay
90 86 50
CP1W-20EDR1
Transistor (sinking) 90 86 50
CP1W-20EDT
Transistor
(sourcing)
90 86 50
CP1W-20EDT1
Relay
16
40 points
24 Inputs/16 outputs
90 150 50 1
CP1W-40EDR
Transistor (sinking) 90 150 50 1
CP1W-40EDT
Transistor
(sourcing)
90 150 50 1
CP1W-40EDT1
4 analog points
4 Analog inputs (resolution 1/6,000)
Analog
90 86 50
CP1W-AD041
4 analog points
4 Analog outputs (resolution 1/6,000)
Analog
90 86 50
CP1W-DA041
2 analog points
2 Analog outputs (resolution 1/6,000)
Analog
90 86 50
CP1W-DA021
3 analog points
2 Analog inputs (resolution 1/6,000)

1 Analog output (resolution 1/6,000)
Analog
90 86 50
CP1W-MAD11

(K, J)
2 analog points
2 Thermocouple inputs (K or J)
90 86 50
CP1W-TS001
4 analog points
4 Thermocouple inputs (K or J)
90 86 50
CP1W-TS002

(Pt100, JPt100)
2 analog points
2 Platinum resistance thermometer inputs (Pt100 or JPt100)
90 86 50
CP1W-TS101
4 analog points
4 Platinum resistance thermometer inputs (Pt100 or JPt100)
90 86 50
CP1W-TS102
CompoBus/S I/O link unit
8 points
8 points
16 points
I/O link of 8 input bits and 8 output bits CompoBus/S

communication
90 66 50
CP1W-SRT21
PROFIBUS-DP I/O link unit
16 points
16 points
32 points
I/O link of 16 input bits and 16 output

bits
PROFIBUS-DP
communication
90 66 50
CPM1A-PRT21
DeviceNet I/O link unit
32 points
32 points
64 points
I/O link of 32 input bits and 32 output

bits
DeviceNet
communication
90 66 50
CPM1A-DRT21
Analog I/O units
*1
Some expansion units count for 2 unit numbers (eg. CP1W-AD041, CP1W-DA041, CP1W-TS002 and CP1W-TS102) but only 7 expansion unit numbers can be allocated in a CP1H PLC's configuration.
27
CJ-Series CPU units
Modular PLC
Fast and powerful CPUs for any task
The family of CJ2 CPUs range from very small CPUs for simple sequence control to
powerful and fast models that offer total machine control which can handle up to
2,560 I/O points. This enables you to modularize or slice your machine into logical
sections without changing PLC series.
All CPU units support IEC61131-3 Structured text, Sequential Function Charts and ladder language. Omron's extensive function block library helps to reduce your programming effort, while you can create your own function blocks to suit your specific needs.
All CJ2M CPU units can be equipped with pulse I/O option modules to perform position
control for up to 4 axes, using dedicated instructions.
Max. digital
I/O points
Program
capacity
Data memory Logic execution

capacity
speed
Max. I/O units Width
5 V current
Built-in functions
consumption
Order code
2,560
400 K
832 K
16 ns
40
80 mm
820 mA
USB + EtherNet/IP + RS-232C
CJ2H-CPU68-EIP
2,560
250 K
512 K
16 ns
40
80 mm
820 mA
CJ2H-CPU67-EIP
2,560
150 K
352 K
16 ns
40
80 mm
820 mA
CJ2H-CPU66-EIP
2,560
100 K
160 K
16 ns
40
80 mm
820 mA
CJ2H-CPU65-EIP
2,560
50 K
160 K
16 ns
40
80 mm
820 mA
CJ2H-CPU64-EIP
2,560
60 K
160 K
40 ns
40
62 mm
700 mA
USB + EtherNet/IP, serial comm. option slot
CJ2M-CPU35
2,560
30 K
160 K
40 ns
40
62 mm
700 mA
CJ2M-CPU34
2,560
20 K
64 K
40 ns
40
62 mm
700 mA
CJ2M-CPU33
2,560
10 K
64 K
40 ns
40
62 mm
700 mA
CJ2M-CPU32
2,560
5K
64 K
40 ns
40
62 mm
700 mA
CJ2M-CPU31
2,560
400 K
832 K
16 ns
40
49 mm
420 mA
USB + RS-232C
CJ2H-CPU68
2,560
250 K
512 K
16 ns
40
49 mm
420 mA
USB + RS-232C
CJ2H-CPU67
2,560
150 K
352 K
16 ns
40
49 mm
420 mA
USB + RS-232C
CJ2H-CPU66
2,560
100 K
160 K
16 ns
40
49 mm
420 mA
USB + RS-232C
CJ2H-CPU65
2,560
50 K
160 K
16 ns
40
49 mm
420 mA
USB + RS-232C
CJ2H-CPU64
2,560
60 K
160 K
40 ns
40
31 mm
500 mA
USB + RS-232C
CJ2M-CPU15
2,560
30 K
160 K
40 ns
40
31 mm
500 mA
USB + RS-232C
CJ2M-CPU14
2,560
20 K
64 K
40 ns
40
31 mm
500 mA
USB + RS-232C
CJ2M-CPU13
2,560
10 K
64 K
40 ns
40
31 mm
500 mA
USB + RS-232C
CJ2M-CPU12
2,560
5K
64 K
40 ns
40
31 mm
500 mA
USB + RS-232C
CJ2M-CPU11
1,280
60 k
128 k
40 ns
40
69 mm
1,060 mA
Loop control engine (300 blocks) with Gradient CJ1G-CPU45P-GTC

Temperature Control
1,280
60 k
128 k
40 ns
40
69 mm
1,060 mA
Loop control engine (300 blocks)
CJ1G-CPU45P
1,280
30 k
64 k
40 ns
40
69 mm
1,060 mA
CJ1G-CPU44P
960
20 k
64 k
40 ns
30
69 mm
1,060 mA
CJ1G-CPU43P
960
10 k
64 k
40 ns
30
69 mm
1,060 mA
CJ1G-CPU42P
28
CJ-Series CPU units
Modular PLC
Description
Remarks
Order code
High-speed data collection and storage unit, with CF card slot and Ethernet port
CPU bus unit
CJ1W-SPU01-V2
Pulse I/O option module for CJ2M CPU Units, 2 encoder inputs, 2 pulse outputs
NPN (sinking) outputs
CJ2M-MD211
Pulse I/O option module for CJ2M CPU Units, 2 encoder inputs, 2 pulse outputs
PNP (sourcing) outputs
CJ2M-MD212
CompactFlash memory card, 128 MB, for all models (not required for operation)
Industrial grade
HMC-EF183
Industrial grade
HMC-EF283
Industrial grade
HMC-EF583
CompactFlash PC-Card adapter
HMC-AP001
I/O terminal block (40-pt.) for CJ1M-CPU2_/CJ2M-MD21_
Push-in
XW2R-P40G-T
Clamp
XW2R-E40G-T
M3 Screws
XW2R-J40G-T
Connection cable between I/O terminal block and CJ1M-CPU2_/CJ2M-MD21_ ( _ _ _ _ = length in cm)
MIL (40 pt)
XW2Z-____FF-L
Servo unit terminal block for 1 axis
XW2B-20J6-8A
Servo unit terminal block for 2 axes
XW2B-40J6-9A
SMARTSTEP cable for CJ1M-CPU2_/CJ2M-MD21_, cable length: 1 m
XW2Z-100J-A26
W-series servo cable for CJ1M-CPU2_/CJ2M-MD21_, cable length: 1 m
XW2Z-100J-A27
CX-One, integrated software for programming and configuration of all Omron control system components
CX-ONE-AL_ _ C-E
Connection cable, D-Sub 9-pin PC serial port to PLC peripheral port (length: 2.0 m)
CS1W-CN226
Connection cable, D-Sub 9-pin PC serial port to PLC peripheral port (length: 6.0 m)
CS1W-CN626
USB to serial conversion cable
CS1W-CIF31
RS-232C Option Board*1
CP1W-CIF01
RS-422A/485 Option board*1
CP1W-CIF11
RS422A/485 (isolated) Option board*1
CP1W-CIF12
Battery Set*2
CJ1W-BAT01
USB Programming cable
CP1W-CN221
*1
*2
PLC
Accessories
Only used with CJ2M-CPU3_

Included with the CPU unit
Note: -MIL = connector according to MIL-C-83503 (compatible with DIN 41651/IEC 60603-1).
-More accessories are available. Please refer to CJ-Series Data Sheets and Operation Manuals for details
For Ethernet Cables and Accessories, see page 81
29
CJ-Series power supplies, expansions
Modular PLC
Power and flexibility
CJ systems can operate on 24 VDC power supply, or on 100 to 240 VAC mains. For
small-scale systems with mainly digital I/O a low cost, small capacity power supply
can be used. For systems with many analog I/Os and control/communication units, it
may be necessary to use a larger power supply unit.
Depending on the CPU type, up to 3 expansions can be connected to the CPU 'rack',
giving a total capacity of 40 I/O units. The total length of the expansion cables of one
system may be up to 12 m.
Power supply
Input range
Power
consumption
Output capacity at
5 VDC
Output capacity at
24 VDC
Max. output
power
Features
Width
Order code
21.6 to 26.4 VDC
35 W max.
2.0 A
0.4 A
16.6 W
27 mm
CJ1W-PD022
19.2 to 28.8 VDC
50 W max.
5.0 A
0.8 A
25 W
60 mm
CJ1W-PD025
85 to 264 VAC
47 to 63 Hz
50 VA max.
2.8 A
0.4 A
14 W
45 mm
CJ1W-PA202
100 VA max.
5.0 A
0.8 A
25 W
Run output (SPST relay)
80 mm
CJ1W-PA205R
Maintenance status display
80 mm
CJ1W-PA205C
Width,
Length
Order code
Note: The CJ1W-PD022 has no galvanic isolation
I/O expansion
Type
Description
I/O control unit
Required unit on CPU 'rack' to connect I/O expansions
20 mm
CJ1W-IC101
I/O interface unit
Start unit for each I/O expansion 'rack'. Requires a power supply unit.
31 mm
CJ1W-II101
I/O expansion cable
Connects CJ1W-IC101 or -II101 to the next expansion rack's -II101
0.3 m
CS1W-CN313
0.7 m
CS1W-CN713
2.0 m
CS1W-CN223
3.0 m
CS1W-CN323
5.0 m
CS1W-CN523
10 m
CS1W-CN133
12 m
CS1W-CN133-B2
30
CJ-Series digital I/O units
Modular PLC
Digital I/O units serve as the PLC's interface to achieve fast, reliable sequence control.
A full range of units, from high-speed DC inputs to relay outputs, let you adapt CJ1 to
your needs.
CJ1 units are available with various I/O densities and connection technologies. Up to
16 I/O points can be wired to units with detachable M3 screw terminals or screwless
clamp terminals. High-density 32- and 64- point I/O units are equipped with standard
40-pin flat cable-connectors. Prefabricated cables and wiring terminals are available
for easy interfacing to high-density I/O units.
Points
Type
Rated voltage
Rated current
Width
Remarks
Connection type*1
Order code
16
AC input
120 VAC
7 mA
31 mm
M3
CJ1W-IA111
AC input
240 VAC
10 mA
31 mm
M3
CJ1W-IA201
DC input
24 VDC
10 mA
31 mm
M3
CJ1W-ID201
16
DC input
24 VDC
7 mA
31 mm
M3
Screwless
CJ1W-ID211
CJ1W-ID211(SL)
16
DC input
24 VDC
7 mA
31 mm
Fast-response (15 s ON, 90 s OFF)
M3
CJ1W-ID212
16
DC input
24 VDC
7 mA
31 mm
Inputs start interrupt tasks in PLC program
M3
CJ1W-INT01
16
DC input
24 VDC
7 mA
31 mm
Latches pulses down to 50 s pulse width M3
CJ1W-IDP01
32
DC input
24 VDC
4.1 mA
20 mm
1 Fujitsu
CJ1W-ID231
32
DC input
24 VDC
4.1 mA
20 mm
1 MIL*1 (40 pt)
CJ1W-ID232
32
DC input
24 VDC
4.1 mA
20 mm
1 MIL*1 (40 pt)
CJ1W-ID233
64
DC input
24 VDC
4.1 mA
31 mm
2 Fujitsu
CJ1W-ID261
64
DC input
24 VDC
4.1 mA
31 mm
2 MIL*1 (40 pt)
CJ1W-ID262
Triac output
250 VAC
0.6 mA
31 mm
M3
CJ1W-OA201
Relay output
250 VAC
2A
31 mm
M3
Screwless
CJ1W-OC201
CJ1W-OC201(SL)
16
Relay output
250 VAC
2A
31 mm
M3
Screwless
CJ1W-OC211
CJ1W-OC211(SL)
DC output (sink)
12 to 24 VDC
2A
31 mm
M3
CJ1W-OD201
DC output (source)
24 VDC
2A
31 mm
With short-circuit protection, alarm
M3
CJ1W-OD202
DC output (source)
24 VDC
0.5 A
31 mm
M3
CJ1W-OD204
16
DC output (sink)
12 to 24 VDC
0.5 A
31 mm
M3
Screwless
CJ1W-OD211
CJ1W-OD211 (SL)
16
DC output (source)
24 VDC
0.5 A
31 mm
M3
Screwless
CJ1W-OD212
CJ1W-OD212 (SL)
16
DC output (sink)
24 VDC
0.5 A
31 mm
M3
CJ1W-OD213
32
DC output (sink)
12 to 24 VDC
0.5 A
20 mm
1 Fujitsu
CJ1W-OD231
32
DC output (source)
24 VDC
0.3 A
20 mm
1 MIL*1 (40 pt)
CJ1W-OD232
32
DC output (sink)
24 VDC
0.5 A
20 mm
1 MIL*1 (40 pt)
CJ1W-OD234
64
DC output (sink)
12 to 24 VDC
0.3 A
31 mm
2 Fujitsu
CJ1W-OD261
64
DC output (source)
24 VDC
0.3 A
31 mm
2 MIL*1 (40 pt)
CJ1W-OD262
16+16
DC in+out (source)
24 VDC
0.5 A
31 mm
2 MIL*1 (20 pt)
CJ1W-MD232
32+32
DC in+out (sink)
24 VDC
0.3 A
31 mm
2 MIL*1 (40 pt)
CJ1W-MD263
32+32
DC in+out (TLL)
5 VDC
35 mA
31 mm
2 MIL*1 (40 pt)
CJ1W-MD563
*1
Note: All digital I/O units are designated as basic I/O units.
Accessories
Description
Connection type
Order code
Replacement 18-point screwless terminal blocks for I/O units, pack of 5 pcs.
Screwless
CJ-WM01-18P-5
Replacement 18-point screw terminal blocks for I/O units, pack of 5 pcs.
M3
CJ-OD507-18P-5
31
PLC
8 to 64 points per unit input, output or mixed
CJ-Series analog I/O and control units
Modular PLC
From basic analog I/O to advanced temperature control
The CJ-series offers a wide choice of analog input units, fit for any application, from
low-speed, multi-channel temperature measurement to high-speed, high-accuracy
data acquisition. Analog outputs can be used for accurate control or external indication.
Advanced units with built-in scaling, filtering and alarm functions reduce the need for
complex PLC programming. High-accuracy process I/O units support an extensive
range of sensors, for fast and accurate data acquisition. Temperature control units relieve the PLC CPU of PID calculations and alarm monitoring. These functions are handled autonomously by the unit, offering control performance and auto-tuning
functions similar to stand-alone temperature controllers.
Accuracy*1
Points Type
Ranges
Resolution
Universal analog
input
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
K, J, T, L, R, S, B
Pt100, Pt1000,
JPt100
V / I: 1/12,000 V: 0.3%
T/C: 0.1C
I: 0.3%
RTD: 0.1C
T/C: 0.3%
RTD: 0.3%
250 ms/4 point 31 mm Universal inputs, with zero/span adjust- M3

ment, configurable alarms, scaling, sensor Screwless
error detection
CJ1W-AD04U
Analog input
0 to 5 V,
0 to 10 V,
10 to 10 V,
1 to 5 V,
4 to 20 mA
1/8,000
V: 0.2%
I: 0.4%
250 s/point
M3
CJ1W-AD041-V1
Screwless
CJ1W-AD041-V1 (SL)
Conversion
time
Width
Remarks
31 mm Offset/gain adjustment, peak hold,

moving average, alarms
Connection
type
Order code
CJ1W-AD04U(SL)
High-speed
analog input
1 to 5 V,
0 to 10 V,
5 to 5 V,
10 to 10 V,
4 to 20 mA
1/40,000
V: 0.2%
I: 0.4%
35 s/4 points 31 mm Direct conversion (CJ2H special instruction)
M3
CJ1W-AD042
Analog input
1 to 5 V,
0 to 5 V,
0 to 10 V,
10 to 10 V,
4 to 20 mA
1/8,000
V: 0.2%
I: 0.4%
250 s/point
M3
CJ1W-AD081-V1
Screwless
CJ1W-AD081-V1 (SL)
0 to 5 V,
0 to 10 V,
10 to 10 V,
1 to 5 V,
4 to 20 mA
1/4,000
V: 0.3%
I: 0.5%
1 ms/point
1 to 5 V,
0 to 5 V,
0 to 10 V,
10 to 10 V,
4 to 20 mA
1/4,000
V: 0.3%
I: 0.5%
1 ms/point
Analog output
Analog output
31 mm Offset/gain adjustment, peak hold,

31 mm Offset/gain adjustment, output hold
High-speed
analog output
1 to 5 V,
0 to 10 V,
10 to 10 V
1/40,000
0.3%
35 s/4 points 31 mm Direct conversion (CJ2H special instruction)
Voltage output
0 to 5 V,
0 to 10 V,
10 to 10 V,
1 to 5 V
1/8,000
0.3%
250 s/point
4 to 20 mA
1/8,000
8
4+2
Current output
Analog in + output 1 to 5 V,
0 to 5 V,
0 to 10 V,
10 to 10 V,
4 to 20 mA
1/8,000
Universal analog
input
DC voltage,
DC current,
Thermocouple,
Pt100/Pt1000,
potentiometer
Process input
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V,
10 to 10 V,
0 to 5 V,
5 to 5 V,
1 to 5 V,
0 to 1.25 V,
1.25 to 1.25 V
32
0.3%
250 s/point
in: 0.2%
out: 0.3%
1 ms/point
1/256,000
0.05%
60 ms/4 points 31 mm All inputs individually isolated, configurable alarms, maintenance functions,
user-defined scaling, zero/span adjustment
1/64,000
0.05%
5 ms/point
M3
CJ1W-DA021
Screwless
CJ1W-DA021 (SL)
M3
CJ1W-DA041
Screwless
CJ1W-DA041 (SL)
M3
CJ1W-DA042V
M3
CJ1W-DA08V
Screwless
CJ1W-DA08V (SL)
M3
CJ1W-DA08C
Screwless
CJ1W-DA08C (SL)
31 mm Offset/gain adjustment, scaling, peak hold, M3

moving average, alarms, output hold
Screwless
CJ1W-MAD42
CJ1W-MAD42 (SL)
M3
CJ1W-PH41U
31 mm Configurable alarms, maintenance

M3
functions, user-defined scaling, zero/span
adjustment, square root, totaliser
CJ1W-PDC15
Modular PLC
Accuracy*1
Conversion
time
Width
B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, 1/64,000
U, WRe5-26, PLII,
100 to 100 mV
0.05%
5 ms/point
31 mm Configurable alarms, maintenance functions
Thermocouple
Input
B, J, K, L,
R, S, T
0.1C
0.3%
Resistance thermometer input
Pt100, JPt100
0.1C
Thermocouple
input
K-type
(200 to
1,300C)
J-Type
(100 to 850C)
0.1C
Resistance thermometer input
Pt100
(200 to 650C)
Pt1000
(200 to 650C)
0.1C
Points Type
Ranges
Thermocouple
input
Resolution
Connection
type
Order code
M3
CJ1W-PTS15
62.5 ms/point 31 mm 4 configurable alarm outputs
M3
CJ1W-PTS51
0.3%
62.5 ms/point 31 mm 4 configurable alarm outputs
M3
CJ1W-PTS52
0.5%
40 ms/point
0.5%
40 ms/point
Remarks
31 mm Basic I/O unit, setup by DIP switches,

adjustable filtering 10/50/60 Hz
M3
CJ1W-TS561
Screwless
CJ1W-TS561 (SL)
31 mm Basic I/O unit, setup by DIP switches,

adjustable filtering 10/50/60 Hz
M3
CJ1W-TS562
Screwless
CJ1W-TS562 (SL)
Temperature con- B, J, K, L,
trol loops, Ther- R, S, T
mocouple
0.1C
0.3%
500 ms total
31 mm 4 control outputs: PNP open

collector, 100 mA max.
M3
CJ1W-TC002
Temperature con- B, J, K, L,
trol loops, Ther- R, S, T
mocouple
0.1C
0.3%
500 ms total

collector, 100 mA max., 2 current transformer inputs for heater burnout detection.
M3
CJ1W-TC004
Temperature con- Pt100, JPt100

trol loops, RTD
0.1C
0.3%
500 ms total

collector, 100 mA max.
M3
CJ1W-TC102
Temperature con- Pt100, JPt100

trol loops, RTD
0.1C
0.3%
500 ms total

collector, 100 mA max., 2 current transformer inputs for heater burnout detection.
M3
CJ1W-TC104
Load Cell Interface 10 VDC or 2.5 VDC, 24 bit, 0.1V/ Linearity error: 0.33 ms
unit
max. four 350 load count
<0.02% FS
cells.
31 mm Self-contained unit designed for fast

weight and force measurement.
Low-pass filter adjustable 3 Hz - 1 kHz.
Made by Unipulse Co.
M3
CJ1W-F130
Weighing unit
31 mm Self-contained unit designed for feed

M3
weighing, discharge weighing, hopper
scales, packing scales, bag filling, etc. Made
by Unipulse Co.
CJ1W-F159
*1
10 VDC, max. four

350 load cells
24 bit, 0.3V/ Linearity error: 2 ms

count
<0.01% FS
PLC
CJ-Series analog I/O and control units
Accuracy for Voltage and Current Inputs/Outputs as percentage of full scale and typical value at 25C ambient temperature (Consult the operation manual for details)
Accuracy for Temperature Inputs/Outputs as percentage of process value and typical value at 25C ambient temperature (Consult the operation manual for details)
Note: All Analog I/O units are designated as Special I/O units, except TS561/TS562, which are Basic I/O units (cannot be used with CP1H).
Accessories
Description
Connection
type
Order code
Replacement 18-point screwless terminal blocks for I/O units, pack of 5 pcs.
Screwless
CJ-WM01-18P-5
Replacement 18-point screw terminal blocks for I/O units, pack of 5 pcs.
M3
CJ-OD507-18P-5
33
CJ-Series motion/position control units
Modular PLC
Add motion control to any CJ-Series PLC
From simple position measurement to multi-axis synchronised motion control, the CJSeries offers a full range of units:
Counter units gather position information from SSI- or incremental encoders.
Actual positions are compared with internally stored target values.
CJ2M CPU Units have dedicated positioning functions that can be used by installing
up to 2 Pulse I/O option modules.
Position Control units are used for point-to-point positioning with servo drives or
stepper motors. Target data and acceleration/deceleration curves can be adjusted
on-the-fly.
Position- and Motion Control units equipped with EtherCAT or MECHATROLINK-II
interface can control multiple drives through a single high-speed link. Message
routing through multiple communication layers allows the attached drives to be
configured from any point in the control network.
Channels/ Type
Axes
Signal type
Unit class
Width
Remarks
Connection type
Order code
SSI inputs (absolute

position data)
Synchronous
serial protocol
Special I/O unit
31 mm
Baud rate, encoding type, data length,

etc. can be set per channel
M3 screw
CJ1W-CTS21-E
500 kHz Counter
24 V, line driver
Special I/O unit
31 mm
2 configurable digital inputs + outputs
1 Fujitsu (40 pt)
CJ1W-CT021
100 kHz Counter
Line driver, 24 V via

terminal block
Special I/O unit
31 mm
Target values trigger interrupt to CPU
1 MIL (40 pt)
CJ1W-CTL41-E
DC Motor Control unit
PWM (24 V/4 A)
Special I/O unit
31 mm
4 configurable digital inputs + 50 kHz counter in- 3 Screwless

put
CJ1W-DCM11-E
Pulse I/O option module 24 V, line driver

for CJ2M CPU
CPU Option Module 20 mm
100 kpps encoder inputs and pulse outputs,

NPN (sinking), interrupt / fast response inputs
1 MIL (40 pt)
CJ2M-MD211
Pulse I/O option module 24 V, line driver

for CJ2M CPU
CPU Option Module 20 mm
100 kpps encoder inputs and pulse outputs,

PNP (sourcing), interrupt / fast response inputs
1 MIL (40 pt)
CJ2M-MD212
Position Control unit
24 V open collector
Special I/O unit
31 mm
500 kpps pulse outputs, inputs for origin,

limit switches, stop, interrupt
1 Fujitsu (40 pt)
CJ1W-NC113
24 V open collector
Special I/O unit
31 mm

1 Fujitsu (40 pt)
CJ1W-NC213
24 V open collector
Special I/O unit
31 mm

2 Fujitsu (40 pt)
CJ1W-NC413
Position Control Unit

High speed type
24 V open collector
Special I/O Unit
51 mm
500 kpps pulse outputs, built-in feedback pulse

counters, synchronous multi-axis control
MIL
CJ1W-NC214

High speed type
24 V open collector
Special I/O Unit
62 mm
500 kpps pulse outputs, built-in feedback pulse

counters, synchronous multi-axis control
MIL
CJ1W-NC414
EtherCAT
CPU bus unit
31 mm
Position, speed and torque control,

access to all drive parameters
RJ45
CJ1W-NC281
EtherCAT
CPU bus unit
31 mm

RJ45
CJ1W-NC481
EtherCAT
CPU bus unit
31 mm

RJ45
access to all drive parameters,
supports up to 64 general purpose EtherCAT slaves
CJ1W-NC482
EtherCAT
CPU bus unit
31 mm

RJ45
CJ1W-NC881
EtherCAT
CPU bus unit
31 mm

RJ45
access to all drive parameters,
supports up to 64 general purpose EtherCAT slaves
CJ1W-NC882
16
EtherCAT
CPU bus unit
31 mm

RJ45
CJ1W-NCF81
MECHATROLINK-II
CPU bus unit
31 mm

ML-II
CJ1W-NC271
MECHATROLINK-II
CPU bus unit
31 mm

ML-II
CJ1W-NC471
16
MECHATROLINK-II
CPU bus unit
31 mm

ML-II
CJ1W-NCF71
30
Advanced Motion Control MECHATROLINK-II,

unit
Encoder I/O, digital I/O
CPU bus unit
49 mm
Trajexia Motion Controller on the CJ-series
ML-II, 9-pin D-Sub,

screwless push-in
CJ1W-MCH72
Note: Line driver signal type units also available.
34
CJ-Series motion/position control units
Modular PLC
Accessories
Connection type
Order code
Push-in
XW2G-40G7-E
General purpose I/O connection cable for I/O units with 40-pt. Fujitsu connector ( _ _ _ _ = length in cm)
Fujitsu (40 pt.) to

MIL (40 pt.)
XW2Z-_ _ _ _ BF-L
General purpose I/O connection cable for I/O units with 40-pt. MIL connector ( _ _ _ _ = length in cm)
2 MIL (40 pt)
XW2Z-_ _ _ _ FF-L
Servo relay unit 1-Axis position control unit
XW2B-20J6-1B
Servo relay unit 2-Axes position control unit
XW2B-40J6-2B
Cable connecting servo relay unit to Position control unit CJ1W-NC113, cable length 1 m. For Accurax G5 servo drives.
XW2Z-100J-A14
Cable connecting servo relay unit to Position control unit CJ1W-NC213/413, cable length 1 m. For Accurax G5 servo drives.
XW2Z-100J-A15
Cable connecting servo relay unit to Position control unit CJ1W-NC113, cable length 1 m. For SmartStep 2 servo drives.
XW2Z-100J-A14
Cable connecting servo relay unit to Position control unit CJ1W-NC213/413, cable length 1 m. For SmartStep 2 servo drives.
XW2Z-100J-A15
Cable connecting servo relay unit to Position control unit CJ1W-NC133, cable length 1 m. For Accurax G5 servo drives.
XW2Z-100J-A18
Cable connecting servo relay unit to Position control unit CJ1W-NC233/433, cable length 1 m. For Accurax G5 servo drives.
XW2Z-100J-A19
Cable connecting servo relay unit to Position control unit CJ1W-NC133, cable length 1 m. For SmartStep 2 servo drives.
XW2Z-100J-A18
Cable connecting servo relay unit to Position control unit CJ1W-NC233/433, cable length 1 m. For SmartStep 2 servo drives.
XW2Z-100J-A19
Cable connecting servo relay unit to Accurax G5 servo drives, cable length 1 m.
XW2Z-100J-B25
Cable connecting servo relay unit to SmartStep 2 servo drive, cable length 1 m.
XW2Z-100J-B29
PLC
Description
Screwless terminal block for connecting 24 V or Line driver encoders to CJ1W-CTL41-E
Note: For General-purpose I/O Cables and Terminal Blocks, see page 72
35
CJ-Series communication units
Modular PLC
Open to any communication
The CJ-Series offers both standardised open networks interfaces, and cost-efficient
high-speed proprietary network links. Datalinks between PLCs, or to higher-level information systems can be made using serial or Ethernet links, or the easy-to-use controller link network.
Omron supports the 2 major field networks, DeviceNet and PROFIBUS-DP. For highspeed field I/O, Omron's own CompoBus/S offers an unsurpassed ease of installation.
Fully user-configurable serial and CAN-based communication can be used to emulate
a variety of application-specific protocols. EtherNet/IP units provide data link functions to share large amounts of data between PLCs. The new PROFINET-IO controller
together with the SmartSlice modular I/O system offers Ethernet based I/O with controller- and network redundancy.
Type
Ports
Serial
2 RS-232C
Serial
2 RS-232C
Serial
Data transfer Protocols
Unit class
Width
Connection type
Order code
CompoWay/F, Host link, NT link, Modbus, User-defined
CPU bus unit
31 mm
9-pin D-Sub
CJ1W-SCU21-V1
CPU bus unit
31 mm
9-pin D-Sub
CJ1W-SCU22
2 RS-422A/RS-485
CPU bus unit
31 mm
9-pin D-Sub
CJ1W-SCU31-V1
Serial
2 RS-422A/RS-485 High-speed
CPU bus unit
31 mm
9-pin D-Sub
CJ1W-SCU32
Serial
1 RS-232C +
1 RS-422/RS-485
CPU bus unit
31 mm
9-pin D-Sub
CJ1W-SCU41-V1
Serial
1 RS-232C +
1 RS-422/RS-485
CPU bus unit
31 mm
9-pin D-Sub
CJ1W-SCU42
Ethernet
1 100 Base-Tx
UDP, TCP/IP, FTP server,SMTP (e-mail), SNTP (time adjust), CPU bus unit
FINS routing, socket service
31 mm
RJ45
CJ1W-ETN21
EtherNet/IP
1 100 Base-Tx
EtherNet/IP, UDP, TCP/IP, FTP server, SNTP, SNMP
CPU Bus unit
31 mm
RJ45
CJ1W-EIP21
Controller
link
2-wire twisted pair
Omron proprietary
CPU bus unit
31 mm
2-wire screw + GND
CJ1W-CLK23
DeviceNet
1 CAN
High-speed
High-speed
DeviceNet
CPU bus unit
31 mm
5-p detachable
CJ1W-DRM21
PROFIBUS-DP 1 RS-485 (Master)
DP, DPV1
CPU bus unit
31 mm
9-pin D-Sub
CJ1W-PRM21
PROFIBUS-DP 1 RS-485 (Slave)
DP
Special I/O unit 31 mm
9-pin D-Sub
CJ1W-PRT21
PROFINET-IO 1 100 Base-Tx
PROFINET-IO Controller, FINS/UDP
CPU Bus unit
31 mm
RJ45
CJ1W-PNT21
CAN
1 CAN
User-defined, supports 11-bit and 29-bit identifiers
CPU bus unit
31 mm
5-p detachable
CJ1W-CORT21
CompoNet
4-wire, data +
power to slaves
(Master)
CompoNet (CIP-based)
4-p detachable IDC or screw
CJ1W-CRM21
Omron proprietary
2-wire screw + 2-wire power CJ1W-SRM21
CompoBus/S 2-wire (Master)
Accessories
Description
Connection type
Order code
RS-232C to RS-422/RS-485 signal converter. Mounts directly on serial port.
9-pin D-sub to screw clamp terminals
CJ1W-CIF11
Controller link PCI board with support software
PCI, wired CLK
3G8F7-CLK23-E
Controller link repeater unit (wire to wire)
Screw - Screw
CS1W-RPT01
Controller link repeater unit (wire to HPCF fiber)
Screw - HPCF connector
CS1W-RPT02
Controller link repeater unit (wire to graded-index glass fiber)
Screw - ST connector
CS1W-RPT03
PROFIBUS DP to RS-422/RS-485 Serial Gateway. User-configurable, with Omron protocols built-in.
9-pin D-sub to screw clamp terminals
PRT1-SCU11
PROFINET IO + ModBus/TCP to Modbus/RTU (RS-485) Gateway.
3 RJ45 to screw clamp terminals
EJ1N-HFU-ETN
Note: For Ethernet Cables and Accessories, see page 81
36
CS-Series CPU units
Rack PLC
Omron's CS1-series CPUs are available in two processor speeds, each in various memory capacities. Besides the basic CPU models, versions are available for dual redundant
operation, supporting I/O hot-swapping. All CPUs have one dedicated board slot with
a direct CPU-bus connection, in which a serial communication board or a loop control
board can be mounted. All CPU units support IEC61131-3 structured text and ladder
language.
Omron's extensive function block library helps to reduce your programming effort,
while you can create your own function blocks to suit your specific needs.
Max. Digital I/O Program
points
capacity
Data memory
capacity
Logic execution
speed
Max. I/O units
Additional functions
Order code
5120
448K words
20 ns
80
CS1H-CPU67H
71
Supports duplex power supply and I/O hot-swapping
CS1D-CPU67S
68
CPU for full dual-redundancy
CS1D-CPU67H
CPU for full dual-redundancy, with loop control board
CS1D-CPU67P
250K steps
120K steps
256K words
80
CS1H-CPU66H
60K steps
128K words
80
CS1H-CPU65H
71
CS1D-CPU65S
68
CPU for full dual-redundancy
CS1D-CPU65H
CPU for full dual-redundancy, with loop control board
CS1D-CPU65P
CS1H-CPU64H
CS1H-CPU63H
CS1G-CPU45H
40
CS1G-CPU44H
35
CS1D-CPU44S
30
CS1G-CPU43H
CS1G-CPU42H
CS1D-CPU42S
30K steps
64K words
80
20K steps
60K steps
1280
960
40 ns
30K steps
20K steps
10K steps
26
Accessories
Description
Remarks
Order code
High-speed data collection and storage unit, with CF card slot and Ethernet port
CPU bus unit
CS1W-SPU01-V2
High-speed data collection and storage unit, with CF card slot and 2 Ethernet ports
CPU bus unit
CS1W-SPU02-V2
Duplex unit, required for CS1D-CPU6_H systems
CS1D-DPL01
Serial communication option board, 2 x RS-232C
CS1W-SCB21-V1
Serial communication option board, 1 x RS-232C + 1 x RS422/RS-485
CS1W-SCB41-V1
Loop control option board
50 control blocks max.
CS1W-LCB01
Loop control option board
300 control blocks max.
CS1W-LCB05
Replacement battery set, for all CS1 CPUs
CS1W-BAT01
Compact Flash memory card, 128 MB, for all models (not required for operation)
Industrial grade
HMC-EF183
Industrial grade
HMC-EF283
Industrial grade
HMC-EF583
Compact Flash PC-Card adapter
HMC-AP001
CX-One, integrated software for programming and configuration of all Omron control system
components
CX-ONE-AL_ _ C-E
Connection cable, D-Sub 9-pin PC serial port to PLC peripheral port
length: 2.0 m
CS1W-CN226
Connection cable, D-Sub 9-pin PC serial port to PLC peripheral port
length: 6.0 m
CS1W-CN626
USB to serial conversion cable
CS1W-CIF31
37
PLC
Fast and powerful CPUs for any task
CS-Series power supplies, backplanes
Rack PLC
Expand with up to 7 racks
CS1 systems can operate on 24 VDC power supply, or on 100-240 VAC mains. For smallscale systems with mainly digital I/O a low cost, small capacity power supply can be
used. For systems with many analog I/Os and control/communication units, it may be
necessary to use a larger power supply unit.
PLC racks are available in several sizes, from 2 to 10 slots wide. Special backplanes are
required for duplex systems. Depending on the CPU type, up to 7 expansions can be
connected to the CPU rack, giving a total capacity of 80 I/O units. The total length of
the expansion cables of one system may be up to 12 m.
Power supplies
Input range
Power
consumption
Output capacity
5 VDC
Output capacity 26
VDC
19.2 to 28.8 VDC
40 W max.
6.6 A
0.62 A
4.3 A
0.56 A
5.3 A
1.3 A
40 W
55 VA max.
Max. output
power
Extra functions
Order code
30 W
C200HW-PD024
28 W
Power supply for dual-redundant system CS1D-PD024

C200HW-PD025
Power supply for dual-redundant system CS1D-PD025

85 to 264 VAC
50/60 Hz
120 VA max.
4.6 A
0.62 A
30 W
85 to 132 VAC,
170 to 264 VAC,
50/60 Hz
Maintenance status display
C200HW-PA204C
C200HW-PA204
Service output 24 VDC, 0.8 A
C200HW-PA204S
Run status output (SPST relay)
C200HW-PA204R
C200HW-PA209R
180 VA max.
9.0 A
1.3 A
45 W
Run status output (SPST relay)
150 VA max.
7.0 A
1.3 A
35 W
Power supply for dual-redundant system CS1D-PA207R
Backplanes
Type
Slots
Expansion connector Width
Special functions
Order code
CPU backplane
No
200 mm
CS1W-BC023
CPU backplane
Yes
260 mm
CS1W-BC033
CPU backplane
Yes
330 mm
CS1W-BC053
CPU backplane
Yes
435 mm
CS1W-BC083
CPU backplane
10
Yes
505 mm
CS1W-BC103
Expansion backplane
Yes
260 mm
CS1W-BI033
Expansion backplane
Yes
330 mm
CS1W-BI053
Expansion backplane
Yes
435 mm
CS1W-BI083
Expansion backplane
10
Yes
505 mm
CS1W-BI103
CPU backplane
Yes
505 mm
For Duplex CPU + Power supplies
CS1D-BC052
CPU backplane
Yes
505 mm
For Duplex Power supplies
CS1D-BC082S
Expansion backplane
Yes
505 mm
For Duplex Power supplies
CS1D-BI092
Accessories
Type
Remarks
Order code
I/O Expansion cable to connect 0.3 m

CS1 CPU backplane or
0.7 m
Expansion backplane to next
2.0 m
Expansion backplane.
3.0 m
CS1W-CN313
5.0 m
CS1W-CN523
10.0 m
CS1W-CN133
12.0 m
CS1W-CN133-B2
38
CS1W-CN713
CS1W-CN223
CS1W-CN323
CS-Series digital I/O units
Rack PLC
Digital I/O units serve as the PLC's interface to achieve fast, reliable sequence control.
A full range of units, from high-speed DC inputs to relay outputs, let you adapt CS1 to
your needs.
CS1 units are available with various I/O densities and connection technologies. Up to
16 I/O points can be wired to units with detachable M3 screw terminals directly. Highdensity 32- and 64- point I/O units are equipped with standard 40-pin connectors.
Prefabricated cables and wiring terminals are available for easy interfacing to highdensity I/O units.
Points
Type
Rated voltage
Rated
current
Remarks
Connection type
Order code*1
16
AC or DC input
120 VAC or VDC
10 mA
M3
CS1W-IA111
16
AC input
240 VAC
10 mA
M3
CS1W-IA211
16
DC input
24 VDC
7 mA
M3
CS1W-ID211
16
DC input
24 VDC
7 mA
Inputs start interrupt tasks in PLC program
M3
CS1W-INT01
16
DC input
24 VDC
7 mA
Latches pulses down to 50 s pulse width
M3
CS1W-IDP01
32
DC input
24 VDC
6 mA
1 40 pt Fujitsu
CS1W-ID231
64
DC input
24 VDC
6 mA
2 40 pt Fujitsu
CS1W-ID261
96
DC input
24 VDC
5 mA
2 56 pt Fujitsu
CS1W-ID291
Triac output
250 VAC
1.2 A
M3
CS1W-OA201
16
Triac output
250 VAC
0.5 A
M3
CS1W-OA211
Relay output
250 VAC
2.0 A
M3
CS1W-OC201
16
Relay output
250 VAC
2.0 A
M3
CS1W-OC211
16
DC output (sink)
12 to 24 VDC
0.5 A
M3
CS1W-OD211
16
DC output (source)
24 VDC
0.5 A
M3
CS1W-OD212
32
DC output (sink)
12 to 24 VDC
0.5 A
1 40 pt Fujitsu
CS1W-OD231
32
DC output (source)
24 VDC
0.5 A
1 40 pt Fujitsu
CS1W-OD232
64
DC output (sink)
12 to 24 VDC
0.3 A
2 40 pt Fujitsu
CS1W-OD261
64
DC output (source)
24 VDC
0.3 A
2 40 pt Fujitsu
CS1W-OD262
96
DC output (sink)
12 to 24 VDC
0.1 A
2 56 pt Fujitsu
CS1W-OD291
96
DC output (source)
24 VDC
0.1 A
2 56 pt Fujitsu
CS1W-OD292
32+32
DC output (sink)
12 to 24 VDC
0.3 A
2 40 pt Fujitsu
CS1W-MD261
32+32
DC in+out (source)
24 VDC
0.3 A
2 40 pt Fujitsu
CS1W-MD262
48+48
DC output (sink)
12 to 24 VDC
0.1 A
2 56 pt Fujitsu
CS1W-MD291
48+48
DC in+out (source)
12 to 24 VDC
0.1 A
2 56 pt Fujitsu
CS1W-MD292
*1
C200H I/O units can also be mounted, except on CS1D systems.
Note: All Digital I/O units are designated as Basic I/O units.
Accessories
Description
Connection type
Order code
Connection cable between I/O terminal block and I/O unit with 40-pt Fujitsu connector ( _ _ _ = length in cm)
Fujitsu (40pt)
XW2Z-___B
I/O terminal block for input unit with 40-pt Fujitsu connector
Push-in
XW2R-P34G-C1
I/O terminal block for output unit with 40-pt Fujitsu connector
Push-in
XW2R-P34G-C3
Clamp
XW2R-E34G-C1
Clamp
XW2R-E34G-C3
M3 Screws
XW2R-J34G-C1
M3 Screws
XW2R-J34G-C3
Note: For I/O Cables and Terminal Blocks, see page 72
39
PLC
Up to 96 I/O points per unit input, output or mixed
CS-Series analog and process I/O units
Rack PLC
From basic analog I/O to process control
CS1 offers a wide choice of analog input units, fit for any application, from low-speed,
multi-channel temperature measurement to high-speed, high-accuracy data acquisition. Analog outputs can be used for accurate control or external indication.
Advanced units with built-in scaling, filtering and alarm functions reduce the need for
complex PLC programming. High-accuracy process I/O units support an extensive
range of sensors, for fast and accurate data acquisition. All process and temperature
I/O units provide isolation between all individual channels.
Points
Type
Ranges
Resolution Accuracy*1
Conversion
time
Remarks
Analog input
250 s/point
Analog input
Offset/gain adjustment, peak hold,

16
Analog input
0 to 5 V,
0 to 10 V,
10 to 10 V,
1 to 5 V,
4 to 20 mA
1/8,000
Analog output
0 to 5 V,
0 to 10 V,
10 to 10 V,
1 to 5 V,
4 to 20 mA
1/4,000
Voltage output
0 to 5 V,
0 to 10 V,
10 to 10 V,
1 to 5 V
Current output
4 to 20 mA
4+4
Analog in + output
0 to 5 V,
0 to 10 V,
10 to 10 V,
1 to 5 V
(4 to 20 mA input)
1/8,000
V in: 0.2% of PV
I in: 0.4% of PV
out: 0.3% of PV
1 ms/point
Process input
4 to 20 mA,
0 to 20 mA,
0 to 10 V,
10 to 10 V,
0 to 5 V,
5 to 5 V,
1 to 5 V,
1 to 1.25 V,
1.25 to 1.25 V
1/64,000
0.05% of PV
5 ms/point
Configurable alarms, maintenance

M3
functions, user-defined scaling, zero/
span adjustment, square root, totaliser.
CS1W-PDC11
Process input
10 to 10 V,
0 to 5 V,
1 to 5 V,
4 to 20 mA
1/16,000
0.3% of PV
62.5 ms/point
Configurable alarms, zero/span adjust- M3

ment, square root
CS1W-PDC55
Thermocouple input
B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T,
U, WRe5-26, PLII,
100 to 100 mV
1/64,000
0.05% of PV
5 ms/point
Configurable alarms (absolute +

rate-of-change), peak hold,
maintenance functions
M3
CS1W-PTS11
Resistance thermometer in- Pt50, Pt100 JPt100,

put
Ni508.4
1/64,000
0.05% of PV
5 ms/point
Configurable alarms (absolute +

rate-of-change), peak hold,
maintenance functions
M3
CS1W-PTS12
Thermocouple input
0.1C
0.3% of PV
62.5 ms/point
4 configurable alarm outputs
M3
CS1W-PTS51
Resistance thermometer in- Pt100, JPt100

put
0.1C
0.3% of PV
62.5 ms/point
4 configurable alarm outputs
M3
CS1W-PTS52
Thermocouple input
B, J, K, L, R,S, T
0.1C
0.3% of PV
31.2 ms/point
Configurable alarms per channel
M3
CS1W-PTS55
Resistance thermometer in- Pt100, JPt100

put
0.1C
0.3% of PV
31.2 ms/point
Configurable alarms per channel
M3
CS1W-PTS56
2-Wire transmitter input
1 to 5 V,
4 to 20 mA
1/4,096
0.2% of FS
25 ms/point
Built-in power supply for transmitter, M3

configurable alarms, square root,
rate-of-change, etc.
CS1W-PTW01
Power transducer input
1 to 1 mA,
0 to 1 mA
1/4,096
0.2% of FS
25 ms/point
Inrush current limiter, configurable

alarms, averaging, etc.
M3
CS1W-PTR01
Power transducer input
100 to 100 mV,

0 to 100 mV
1/4,096
0.2% of FS
25 ms/point
Inrush current limiter, configurable

alarms, averaging, etc.
M3
CS1W-PTR02
Pulse rate input
20000 pps, voltage,

up to
open collector, contact 1/32,000
25 ms/point
Averaging, totaliser
M3
CS1W-PPS01
40
B, J, K, L, R, S, T
V: 0.2% of PV
I: 0.4% of PV
Order code
M3
CS1W-AD041-V1
M3
CS1W-AD081-V1
2 MIL (34p.) CS1W-AD161
0.2% of PV
V: 0.3% of PV
I: 0.5% of PV
Connection
type
1 ms/point
0.3% of PV
Offset/gain adjustment
M3
CS1W-DA041
Offset/gain adjustment, output hold
M3
CS1W-DA08V
M3
CS1W-DA08C
Offset/gain adjustment, scaling, peak M3

hold, moving average, alarms, output
hold
CS1W-MAD44
0.5% of PV
Rack PLC
Points
Type
Ranges
Resolution Accuracy*1
Conversion
time
Remarks
Isolated control output
1 to 5 V,
4 to 20 mA
1/4,000
I: 0.1% of FS
V: 0.2% of FS
25 ms/point
Output readback, high/low/rate limit- M3

ing, disconnection alarm, zero/span
adjustment
CS1W-PMV01
Isolated control output
10 to 10 V,
0 to 10 V,
5 to 5 V,
0 to 5 V,
1 to 1 V,
0 to 1 V
1/4,000
0.1% of FS
10 ms/point
High/low/rate limiting, output hold,

zero/span adjustment
CS1W-PMV02
*1
Connection
type
M3
Order code
PLC
CS-Series analog and process I/O units
Accuracy for Voltage and Current Inputs/Outputs as percentage of full scale and typical value at 25C ambient temperature (Consult the operation manual for details)
Accuracy for Temperature Inputs/Outputs as percentage of process value and typical value at 25C ambient temperature (Consult the operation manual for details)
Note: All analog I/O units are designated as special I/O units
41
CS-Series position/motion control units
Rack PLC
Add motion control to any CS1 PLC
From simple position measurement to multi-axis synchronised motion control, CS1 offers a full range of units:
Counter units gather position information from SSI- or incremental encoders.
Actual positions are compared with internally stored target values.
Position control units are used for point-to-point positioning with servo drives or
stepper motors. Target data and acceleration/deceleration curves can be adjusted
on-the-fly.
Position- and motion control units equipped with MECHATROLINK-II interface can
control multiple drives through a single high-speed link. Message routing through
multiple communication layers allows the attached drives to be configured from
any point in the control network.
Channels/
Axes
Type
Signal type
Unit class
Remarks
Connection type
Order code
SSI inputs
(absolute position data)
Synchronous
serial protocol
Special I/O unit
Baud rate, encoding type, data length,

etc. can be set per channel
2 digital outputs, NPN/PNP selectable.
M3 screw
CS1W-CTS21
500 kHz Counter
24 V, 12 V, line driver
Special I/O unit
4 configurable digital inputs +

4 configurable digital outputs
Target values trigger interrupt to CPU
1 Fujitsu (40 pt)
CS1W-CT021
2 Fujitsu (40 pt)
CS1W-CT041
Position control unit
24 V open collector
Special I/O unit

1 Fujitsu (40 pt)
CS1W-NC113
24 V open collector
Special I/O unit

1 Fujitsu (40 pt)
CS1W-NC213
24 V open collector
Special I/O unit

2 Fujitsu (40 pt)
CS1W-NC413
Line driver
Special I/O unit

1 Fujitsu (40 pt)
CS1W-NC133
Line driver
Special I/O unit

1 Fujitsu (40 pt)
CS1W-NC233
Line driver
Special I/O unit

2 Fujitsu (40 pt)
CS1W-NC433
Motion control unit
Analog
Special I/O unit
Closed loop with automatic trapezoid or

S-curve acceleration/deceleration
Snap-on connectors (3M)
CS1W-MC221-V1
Motion control unit
Analog
Special I/O unit
Closed loop with automatic trapezoid or

S-curve acceleration/deceleration
Snap-on connectors (3M)
CS1W-MC421-V1
Accessories
Description
Connection type
Order code
Servo relay unit 1-Axis position control unit
XW2B-20J6-1B
Servo relay unit 2-Axes position control unit
XW2B-40J6-2B
Cable connecting servo relay unit to Position control unit CS1W-NC113, cable length 1 m. For Accurax G5 servo drives.
XW2Z-100J-A6
Cable connecting servo relay unit to Position control unit CS1W-NC213/413, cable length 1 m. For Accurax G5 servo drives.
XW2Z-100J-A7
Cable connecting servo relay unit to Position control unit CS1W-NC113, cable length 1 m. For SmartStep 2 servo drives.
XW2Z-100J-A6
Cable connecting servo relay unit to Position control unit CS1W-NC213/413, cable length 1 m. For SmartStep 2 servo drives.
XW2Z-100J-A7
Cable connecting servo relay unit to Position control unit CS1W-NC133, cable length 1 m. For Accurax G5 servo drives.
XW2Z-100J-A10
Cable connecting servo relay unit to Position control unit CS1W-NC233/433, cable length 1 m. Accurax G5 servo drives.
XW2Z-100J-A11
Cable connecting servo relay unit to Position control unit CS1W-NC133, cable length 1 m. For SmartStep 2 servo drives.
XW2Z-100J-A10
Cable connecting servo relay unit to Position control unit CS1W-NC233/433, cable length 1 m. For SmartStep 2 servo drives.
XW2Z-100J-A11
Cable connecting servo relay unit to Accurax G5 servo drives, cable length 1 m.
XW2Z-100J-B25
Cable connecting servo relay unit to SmartStep 2 servo drive, cable length 1 m.
XW2Z-100J-B29
Note: For General-purpose I/O Cables and Terminal Blocks, see page 72
42
CS-Series communication units
Rack PLC
CS1 provides both standardised open networks interfaces, and cost efficient, highspeed proprietary network links. Datalinks between PLCs, or to higher-level information systems can be made using Serial or Ethernet links, or the easy-to-use Controller
Link network.
Omron supports the 2 major field networks, DeviceNet and PROFIBUS-DP. For highspeed field I/O, Omron's own CompoBus/S offers an unsurpassed ease of installation.
Fully user-configurable serial and CAN-based communication can be used to emulate
a variety of application-specific protocols. EtherNet/IP units provide data link functions to share large amounts of data between PLCs. The PROFINET-IO controller together with the SmartSlice modular I/O system offers ethernet-based I/O with
controller- and network redundancy.
Type
Ports
Protocols
Remarks
Connection type
Order code
Serial
2 RS-232C
CompoWay/F, Host Link, NT link, Modbus, CPU bus unit

User-defined
Unit class
9-pin D-Sub
CS1W-SCU21-V1
Serial
2 RS-232C/RS-485
CompoWay/F, Host Link, NT link, Modbus, CPU bus unit

User-defined
9-pin D-Sub
CS1W-SCU31-V1
Serial
2 RS-232C
CompoWay/F, Host Link, NT link, Modbus, CPU option board

User-defined
9-pin D-Sub
CS1W-SCB21-V1
Serial
1 RS-232C +
1 RS-422/RS-485
CompoWay/F, Host Link, NT link, Modbus, CPU option board

User-defined
9-pin D-Sub
CS1W-SCB41-V1
GP-IB
Master/Slave selectable
GP-IB instrument
communication
Special I/O unit
GP-IB
CS1W-GPI01
Ethernet
1 100 Base-Tx
UDP, TCP/IP, FTP server,

SMTP (e-mail), SNTP (time adjust),
FINS routing, socket service
CPU bus unit
RJ45
CS1W-ETN21
Controller link
2-wire twisted pair
Omron proprietary
CPU bus unit
2-wire screw + GND
CS1W-CLK23
Optical HPCF
2 HPCF connector
CS1W-CLK13
Optical graded-index fiber
4 ST connector
CS1W-CLK53
EtherNet/IP
1 100 Base-Tx
EtherNet/IP, UDP, TCP/IP, FTP server,

SNTP, SNMP
CPU Bus unit
31 mm
RJ45
CS1W-EIP21
DeviceNet
1 CAN
DeviceNet
CPU bus unit
5-p detachable
CS1W-DRM21-V1
CompoNet
4-wire, data + power to slaves CompoNet (CIP-based)

(Master)
Special I/O unit
4-p detachable IDC

or screw
CS1W-CRM21
CompoBus/S
2-wire (Master)
Special I/O unit
2-wire screw +
2-wire power
CS1W-SRM21
PROFIBUS-DP
1 RS-485 (Master)
DP, DPV1
CPU bus unit
9-pin D-Sub
CS1W-PRM21
CAN
1 CAN
CANopen, User-defined
CPU bus unit
5-p detachable
CS1W-CORT21
PROFINET IO
1 100 Base-Tx
PROFINET IO controller
FINS UDP
CPU bus unit
RJ45
CS1W-PNT21
PROFIBUS-DP
1 RS-485 (Slave)
DP
C200H special
I/O unit
C200H units cannot be

used on CS1D systems
9-pin D-Sub
C200HW-PRT21
Description
Connection type
Order code
RS-232C to RS-422/RS-485 signal converter. Mounts directly on serial port.
9-pin D-sub to screw clamp CJ1W-CIF11

terminals
PCI, wired CLK
3G8F7-CLK23-E
PCI, HPCF connectors
3G8F7-CLK13-E
PCI, ST connectors
3G8F7-CLK53-E
Controller link repeater unit (wire to wire)
Screw - Screw
CS1W-RPT01
Controller link repeater unit (wire to HPCF fiber)
Screw - HPCF connector
CS1W-RPT02
Controller link repeater unit (wire to graded-index glass fiber)
Screw - ST connector
CS1W-RPT03
PROFIBUS DP to RS-422/RS-485 Serial Gateway. User-configurable, with Omron protocols built-in.
9-pin D-sub to screw clamp PRT1-SCU11

terminals
PROFINET IO + ModBus/TCP to Modbus/RTU (RS-485) Gateway.
3 RJ45 to screw clamp

terminals
Omron proprietary
Accessories
EJ1N-HFU-ETN
43
PLC
Open to any communication, standard or user-defined
Remote I/O
I/O SYSTEMS TO MEET EVERY NEED
Choose by network, style and flexibility
Compact remote I/O units combine a fixed number of I/O points in a space-saving housing. Built-in
smart monitoring functions for voltage level, broken wire, actuator and cycle time will assist in planning preventive
maintenance for machines and eliminating costly downtime. Compact smart slaves are available for the open EtherCAT,
DeviceNet and CompoNet networks, and Omrons CompoBus/S offers
a more simple and cost-efficient solution.
Modular remote I/O systems offer the possibility to install just the right number and type of I/O's where
you need them. I/O modules range from basic and economical digital I/O's to high-performance modules with intelligent
functions. With a choice of communication couplers for various open networks, you can adapt to existing installations and
end-user demands, or make the right trade-off between performance and ease-of-use. Besides EtherCAT as main machine
automation network, Omron offers connectivity to EtherNet/IP, DeviceNet, CompoNet, PROFINET IO, PROFIBUS DP, and
MECHATROLINK-II.
DeviceNet
44
EtherNet/IP
EtherCAT
IP20
IP20
IP67
IP20
Compact
Compact
DRT2-_C_
DRT2
NX-series
GX
K247
Page 56
K234
Page 53
H249
Page 48
K246
Page 52
Modular
High-speed
modular
High-speed
modular
Compact
Modular
Remote I/O
Remote I/O
MECHATROLINK-II
PROFIBUS-DP
PROFINET IO
CompoNet
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
Modular
Modular
Modular
CompoBus/S
IP20
IP67
Compact
Compact
Compact
SmartSlice
CRT1
SRT2
SRT2-_C_
K224
Page 51
K227
Page 54
K248
Page 55
K252
Page 57
Modular
45
46
Selection table
Remote I/O
Compact I/O
SmartSlice
Model
NX-series
Network connection
EtherCAT in- and outgoing

DeviceNet, CompoNet,
connections by RJ45 ethernet PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET I/O,
ports, EtherNet/IP with built-in EtherCAT, MECHATROLINK-II
Ethernet switch and 2 RJ45
ports
EtherCAT in- and outgoing

DeviceNet with open-style
connections by RJ45 ethernet push-in terminal block
plug
CompoNet, unshielded 4-wire

flat cable and IDC connectors,
or general-purpose 2-wire
cable by screw terminals
I/0 types
Digital standard and highspeed synchronous, analog

standard and high-speed,
temperature, encoders, pulse
output, safety I/O
8 DI + 8 DO
16 DI+extension
16 DO+extension
16 relay out
4 AI (V/I)
2 AO (V/I)
Incremental encoder
(24 V/line driver)
8/16 DI+extension,
8/16 DO+extenstion,
8 DI + 8 DO
16 relay out,
4 AI (V/I, TC, Pt100),
2 AO (V/I),
8/16 DI+extension,
8/16 DO+extenstion,
8 DI + 8 DO
4 AI, 2 AO, 2 DI, 2 DO
I/0 Connection technology
Push-in wiring on removable Push-in wiring on removable

terminal block, MIL connectors terminal block
M3 screw terminals
(1- or 3-wire DI)
M3 screw terminals
(1- or 3-wire DI)
M3 screw terminals
Smart features
Synchronous I/O and timeI/O and power supply

stamping on EtherCAT, safety diagnostics, operation timers
I/O
and counters per I/O point
Automatic or fixed address

allocation
I/O and power supply

diagnostics, operation timers
and counters per I/O point,
analog value calculations and
alarms
I/O and power supply

and counters for each I/O
point, analog value
calculations and alarms
Ingress Protection class
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
(DIN rail mounting in cabinets) (DIN rail mounting in cabinets) (DIN rail mounting in cabinets) (DIN rail mounting in cabinets) (DIN rail mounting in cabinets)
Page/Quick Link
48
51
Compact I/O
Field I/0
Model
SRT2
DRT2-_C_
SRT2-_C_
Network connection
CompoBus/S,
(2-wire + power)
by M3 screw terminals
DeviceNet with M12 micro

connector
CompoBus/S, by 4-wire M12

connector, unshielded
I/0 types
4/8/16 DI,
4/8/16 DO,
8/16 relay out,
4 AI (V/I) 2 AO (V/I)
8/16 DI, 8/16 DO, 8DI + 8 DO
4/8 DI, 4/8 DO
I/0 Connection technology
M3 screw terminals
(1- or 3-wire DI)
M12, 1 or 2 I/O signals per

connector, 7/8" I/O Power
connector
M12 connectors,
one I/O point per connector
Smart features
I/O isolation, status indication I/O and power supply

and counters per I/O point
I/O isolation, status indication
Ingress Protection class
IP20
IP67,
(DIN rail mounting in cabinets) flat mounting by
two M5 screws
IP67,
flat mounting by
three M5 screws
Page/Quick Link
55
57
Digital I/O, analog I/O,

temperature inputs,
high-speed counter with
control outputs
56
GX
52
DRT2
Remote I/O
Modular I/O
53
CRT1
54
47
NX-series modular I/O system
Remote I/O
Performance and practicality for machine control
Modern machine control requires system-wide synchronisation of motion axes with
microsecond accuracy. The NX I/O system offers this timing accuracy and repeatability for a
wide variety of in- and outputs. Its ultra-fast internal bus system is synchronised with
the Distributed Clock of the EtherCAT network, resulting in system-wide deterministic
I/O operation.
Alternatively, NX-series I/O can be used in non-synchronous Free Run mode on
EtherNet/IP, the open CIP-based network supported by our CJ2-series PLC's.
NX-series I/O covers a full range of units, including standard and high-speed digital
I/O's, various performance levels in analog I/O, encoder inputs and pulse outputs. The
series continues to expand with time-stamped I/O, safety I/O and application-specific
modules.
Ideal match with Sysmac machine automation controllers and CJ2-series PLC's
Synchronous I/O updates, system-wide, with less than 1 s jitter using EtherCAT
High density: up to 16 digital or 8 analog signals in 12 mm width
Removable wiring terminals for easy system assembly and testing
Communication and Control Units
Module Type
Protocol
Communication Coupler EtherCAT Slave
EtherNet/IP Slave
Safety Controller
48
FSoE Protocol
Connection
Specification
Width
Order Code
2 RJ45 ports
(in + out)
Up to 63 I/O units.
Max. 1,024 bytes in + 1,024 bytes out
Supports Distributed Clock
I/O Power Supply up to 10 A
46 mm
NX-ECC202
2 RJ45 ports
with built-in switch
Up to 63 I/O units.
Max. 512 bytes in + 512 bytes out
Supports local safety communication
Free run I/O refresh mode only
I/O Power Supply up to 10 A
46 mm
NX-EIC202
128 Safety Connections
For up to 1,024 Safety I/O points
30 mm
NX-SL3500
32 Safety Connections
For up to 256 Safety I/O points
30 mm
NX-SL3300
Remote I/O
Digital I/O Units

Channels, Signal type
Performance*1, I/O Refresh Mode Connection type*2
Width
Order Code
NPN-type*3
AC Digital Input
4 inputs, 200 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Free Run
Screwless push-in (NX-TBA082)
12 mm
NX-IA3117
Safety Digital Input
4 inputs + 2 test outputs
Free Run
12 mm
NX-SIH400
8 inputs + 2 test outputs
Free Run
12 mm
NX-SID800
4 inputs, 3-wire connection
High-speed Synchronous Time

Stamp
12 mm
NX-ID3444
NX-ID3344
High-speed Synchronous/Free Run Screwless push-in (NX-TBA122)
12 mm
NX-ID3443
NX-ID3343
Synchronous/Free Run
12 mm
NX-ID3417
NX-ID3317
12 mm
NX-ID4442
NX-ID4342
12 mm
NX-ID5442
NX-ID5342
1 20-pin MIL connector
30 mm
NX-ID5142-5
same
30 mm
NX-ID6142-5
same
DC Digital I/O
16 inputs + 16 outputs 0.5 A,

1-wire connection + common
30 mm
NX-MD6256-5 NX-MD6121-5
DC Digital Output
2 outputs 0.5 A, 3-wire connection
High-speed Synchronous
Time Stamp
12 mm
NX-OD2258
NX-OD2154
High-speed Synchronous/Free Run Screwless push-in (NX-TBA122)
12 mm
NX-OD3257
NX-OD3153
12 mm
NX-OD3256
NX-OD3121
12 mm
NX-OD4256
NX-OD4121
16 outputs 0.5 A, 1-wire connection Synchronous/Free Run
12 mm
NX-OD5256
NX-OD5121
30 mm
NX-OD5256-5 NX-OD5121-5
32 outputs 0.5 A, 1-wire connection Synchronous/Free Run
30 mm
NX-OD6256-5 NX-OD6121-5
2 outputs, 2.0 A
Free Run
12 mm
NX-SOH200
4 outputs, 0.5 A
Free Run
12 mm
NX-SOD400
2 outputs, N.O., 2.0 A
Free Run
12 mm
NX-OC2633
2 outputs, N.O.+ N.C., 2.0 A
Free Run
12 mm
NX-OC2733
Width
Order Code
NPN-type*3
DC Digital Input
Safety Digital Output

Relay Digital Output
Remote I/O
Module type
Position Control Units

Module type
Channels, Signal type
Performance, I/O Refresh Mode
Connection type*2
Encoder Input
1 SSI encoder, 2 MHz
12 mm
NX-ECS112
2 SSI encoders, 2 MHz
12 mm
NX-ECS212
1 incremental encoder line driver

4 MHz + 3 Digital Inputs (1 s)
Screwless push-in (NX-TBA122 +

NX-TBB122)
24 mm
NX-EC0142
NX-EC0132
1 incremental encoder open collec- Synchronous/Free Run

tor 500 kHz + 3 Digital Inputs (1 s)
12 mm
NX-EC0122
NX-EC0112
2 incremental encoders open collec- Synchronous/Free Run

tor 500 kHz
12 mm
NX-EC0222
NX-EC0212
1 Pulse Up/Down or Pulse/Direction Synchronous

open collector 500 kHz + 2 Digital
Inputs + 1 Digital Output (1 s)
12 mm
NX-PG0122
NX-PG0112
Pulse Output
*1
Digital I/O performance

Digital I/O performance
Input
PNP
Standard
High Speed
ON delay
OFF delay
ON delay
OFF delay
0.02 ms
0.4 ms
100 ns
100 ns
NPN
Output
AC
10 ms
40 ms
N.A.
N.A.
PNP
0.5 ms
1.0 ms
300 ns
300 ns
NPN
0.1 ms
0.8 ms
Relay
15 ms
15 ms
N.A.
N.A.
*2
Units with screwless push-in connections are supplied with the appropriate terminal
connector. Units with MIL connectors are supplied without matching plugs; for connecting
cables see page 72
*3 Order codes are for PNP-type signals (positive switching, 0V common). Most models are
also available as NPN-type (negative switching, 24V common). Inputs of MIL-connector
versions can be used as NPN or PNP.
49
Remote I/O
Analog I/O Units

Module type
Signal type
Performance, I/O Refresh Mode
Channels
Connection type *1
Width
Order Code
Temperature Sensor
Input
Thermocouple type
B,E,J,K,L,N,R,S,T,U,WRe5-26,PLII
0.1C resolution, 200 ms/unit

Free Run
Screwless push-in terminal block(s)

with cold junction sensor, calibrated
individually at the factory
12 mm
NX-TS2101
24 mm
NX-TS3101
12 mm
NX-TS2102
24 mm
NX-TS3102
12 mm
NX-TS2104
24 mm
NX-TS3104

Free Run
Free Run
RTD type
Pt100 (3-wire), Pt1000, Ni508.4
Analog Input
4 to 20 mA
single ended
4 to 20 mA
differential
10 to 10 V
differential
12 mm
NX-TS2201

NX-TBB162)
24 mm
NX-TS3201

Free Run
12 mm
NX-TS2202

NX-TBB162)
24 mm
NX-TS3202

Free Run
12 mm
NX-TS2204

NX-TBB162)
24 mm
NX-TS3204
1/8000 resolution, 250 s/channel

Free Run
12 mm
NX-AD2203
12 mm
NX-AD3203
12 mm
NX-AD4203
12 mm
NX-AD2204
12 mm
NX-AD3204
12 mm
NX-AD4204
12 mm
NX-AD2208
12 mm
NX-AD3208
12 mm
NX-AD4208
12 mm
NX-AD2603
12 mm
NX-AD3603
12 mm
NX-AD4603
12 mm
NX-AD2604
12 mm
NX-AD3604
12 mm
NX-AD4604
12 mm
NX-AD2608
12 mm
NX-AD3608
12 mm
NX-AD4608
Screwless push-in (NX-TBA082)i
12 mm
NX-DA2203
12 mm
NX-DA3203
12 mm
NX-DA2205
12 mm
NX-DA3205
12 mm
NX-DA2603
12 mm
NX-DA3603
12 mm
NX-DA2605
12 mm
NX-DA3605

Free Run

Free Run
Free Run
1/30000 resolution,10 s/channel
Analog Output
4 to 20 mA

Free Run
10 to 10 V

Free Run

10 to 10 V
single ended

Free Run
Other Units
Module type
Description
Connection type*1
Width
Order Code
Power Unit
NX bus power supply unit, 24 V DC input, non-isolated
Screwless push-in (NX-TBC082)
12 mm
NX-PD1000
I/O power feed unit, for separation of power groups, up to 10 A
12 mm
NX-PF0730
I/O power connection unit, 16 IOV
12 mm
NX-PC0020
I/O power connection unit, 16 IOG
12 mm
NX-PC0010
I/O power connection, 8 IOV + 8 x IOG
12 mm
NX-PC0030
Grounding terminal, 16 points
Screwless push-in (NX-TBC162)
12 mm
NX-TBX01
End cover (included with Communication Coupler)
12 mm
NX-END01
Replacement front connector with 8 wiring terminals (marked A+B)
Screwless push-in
12 mm
NX-TBA082
Screwless push-in
12 mm
NX-TBA122
Screwless push-in
12 mm
NX-TBA162
Replacement front connector with 12 wiring terminals (marked C+D)
Screwless push-in
12 mm
NX-TBB122
Replacement front connector with 16 wiring terminals (marked C+D)
Screwless push-in
12 mm
NX-TBB162
Replacement front connector with 8 wiring terminals (marked A+B+FG)
Screwless push-in
12 mm
NX-TBC082
Replacement front connector with 16 wiring terminals (marked A+B+FG)
Screwless push-in
12 mm
NX-TBC162
DIN rail insulation spacers, set of 3 pcs
NX-AUX01
30 Unit pins + 30 Terminal keying pins, to prevent mismatch of unit and terminal block (one set is enough for 10 units)
NX-AUX02
System Units and

Accessories
*1
50
Units with screwless push-in connections are supplied with the appropriate terminal connector.
SmartSlice I/O system
Remote I/O
Omron's SmartSlice I/O system is compact, intelligent and easy. When used with Omron's CS1/CJ1 DeviceNet master units it is plug-and-work, no configuration tool is required. By using built-in functions such as pre-scaling, totalising, differentiation and
alarming in analog I/O units, PLC programming can be minimised. Preventive maintenance data can be accessed using CX-Integrator software, standard PLC function
blocks or NS-series Smart Active Parts.
Most compact in the market (84 mm high)
Easy set-up, backup and restore functions
Diagnostics and preventive maintenance data at I/O level
Detachable terminal blocks allow hot-swapping without re-wiring
3-wire connection with 'push-in' technology, no screwdriver required for
installation
Model
Function
Interface units DeviceNet interface unit
I/O units
Specifications
Size in mm
(HWD)
Order code
For up to 64 I/O units
845870
GRT1-DRT
CompoNet interface unit
For up to 64 I/O units (limited to 32 byte in + 32 byte out)
845870
GRT1-CRT
PROFIBUS-DP interface unit
845870
GRT1-PRT
PROFINET-IO interface unit
845870
GRT1-PNT
MECHATROLINK-II interface unit
For up to 64 I/O units (slave to Trajexia motion controller)
845870
GRT1-ML2
EtherCAT interface unit
For up to 64 I/O units (slave to Trajexia and Sysmac controller)
845870
GRT1-ECT
End plate
One unit required per bus interface
842058
GRT1-END
End plate with memory function
Supports toolless replacement of PROFINET-IO interface unit
842058
GRT1-END-M
4 NPN inputs
24 VDC, 6 mA, 3-wire connection
841574
GRT1-ID4
4 PNP inputs
841574
GRT1-ID4-1
8 NPN inputs
24 VDC, 4 mA, 1-wire connection + 4G
841574
GRT1-ID8
8 PNP inputs
24 VDC, 4 mA, 1-wire connection + 4V
841574
GRT1-ID8-1
4 AC inputs
110 VAC, 2-wire connection
841574
GRT1-IA4-1
4 AC inputs
841574
GRT1-IA4-2
4 NPN outputs
841574
GRT1-OD4
4 PNP outputs
841574
GRT1-OD4-1
4 PNP outputs with short-circuit protection 24 VDC, 500 mA, 3-wire connection
841574
GRT1-OD4G-1
4 PNP outputs with short-circuit protection 24 VDC, 2 A, 2-wire connection
841574
GRT1-OD4G-3
8 NPN outputs
24 VDC, 500 mA, 1-wire connection + 4V
841574
GRT1-OD8
8 PNP outputs
24 VDC, 500 mA, 1-wire connection + 4G
841574
GRT1-OD8-1
8 PNP outputs with short-circuit protection 24 VDC, 500 mA, 1-wire connection + 4G
841574
GRT1-OD8G-1
2 relay outputs
240 VAC, 2A, normally-open contacts
841574
GRT1-ROS2
60 kHz Counter unit, NPN
A+B encoder inputs + 1 Z/control input + 1 output (NPN-type)
841574
GRT1-CT1
60 kHz Counter unit, PNP
A+B encoder inputs + 1 Z/control input + 1 output (PNP-type)
841574
GRT1-CT1-1
100 kHz Counter / Positioner unit
A+B+Z encoder inputs (line driver or 24 V selectable) + 1 control input + 2 outputs (PNP-type) 841574
GRT1-CP1-L
2 analog inputs, current/voltage
10 V, 0-10 V, 0-5 V, 1-5 V, 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA
841574
GRT1-AD2
2 analog outputs, voltage
10 V, 0-10 V, 0-5 V, 1-5 V
841574
GRT1-DA2V
2 analog outputs, current
0-20 mA, 4-20 mA
841574
GRT1-DA2C
2 Pt100 inputs
Pt100, 2-wire or 3-wire connection
841574
GRT1-TS2P
2 Pt1000 inputs
841574
GRT1-TS2PK
2 Thermocouple inputs
Types B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T, U, W, PL2, with cold junction compensation
841574
GRT1-TS2T
Size in mm
(HWD)
Order code
Model
Description
Other units
I/O power feed unit, separates power supply between groups of I/O units
841574
GRT1-PD2
I/O power feed unit with electronic overload protection, separates power supply between groups of I/O units
841574
GRT1-PD2G
I/O power feed and distribution unit, separates power supply between groups of I/O units, 8V + 4G
841574
GRT1-PD8
I/O power feed and distribution unit, separates power supply between groups of I/O units, 4V + 8G
841574
GRT1-PD8-1
I/O power connection unit, 8V + 4G
841574
GRT1-PC8
I/O power connection unit, 4V + 8G
841574
GRT1-PC8-1
Turnback unit, right-hand side
842058
GRT1-TBR
Turnback unit, left-hand side
845870
GRT1-TBL
Turnback cable, one meter
1m
GCN2-100
Accessories
Description
Order code
Replacement front connectors, pack of 5 pcs.
GRT1-BT1-5
PROFIBUS-DP connector, 9-pin D-sub
PROFIBUS Connector 839550
PROFIBUS-DP connector, 9-pin D-sub, with bus termination
PROFIBUS Term. Conn. 846086
PROFINET RJ45 connector
IE-PS-RJ45-FH-BK
CompoNet connectors
See page 54
51
Remote I/O
The smartest modular I/O system
Compact I/O GX-series
Remote I/O
When speed counts: EtherCAT I/O
EtherCAT is an extremely fast industrial automation network, which uses standard
ethernet cabling. It makes very efficient use of the standard Ethernet transmission
frame, with each node accessing the entire frame on the fly. This reduces the delay in
each slave to microsecond level.
Its deterministic nature makes EtherCAT extremely suitable for motion control. Omron
provides PLC-based as well as stand-alone motion control solutions based on EtherCAT.
The GX-series I/O units provide the basic in- and outputs for such systems, including
high-speed encoder inputs which can feed position information into the controller.
Unit Type
Specification
Size in mm
(HWD)
Remarks
Order code
16-point NPN input unit
24 VDC, 6 mA per point
5213557
Expandable with one XWT unit
GX-ID1611
16-point NPN input unit
5220069
3-tier connection for direct sensor wiring
GX-ID1612
16-point PNP input unit
5213557
GX-ID1621
5220069
GX-ID1622
16-point relay output unit
2 A per point, max. 8 A per common
5216058
with easy-to-replace relays, expandable with one XWT

unit
GX-OC1601
16-point NPN output unit
24 VDC, 0.5 A per point
5213557
GX-OD1611
16-point NPN output unit
5220069
GX-OD1612
16-point PNP output unit
5213557
GX-OD1621
5220069
GX-OD1622
8-point input + 8-point output unit (NPN) 24 VDC, input 6 mA, output 0.5 A per point
5213557
GX-MD1611
8-point input + 8-point output unit (NPN) 24 VDC, input 6 mA, output 0.5 A per point
5220069
GX-MD1612
8-point input + 8-point output unit (PNP) 24 VDC, input 6 mA, output 0.5 A per point
5213557
GX-MD1621
5220069
GX-MD1622
4-Channel analog input unit
1 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA,
5213557
Resolution 1/6000, conversion time 4 ms (4 inputs)
GX-AD0471
2-Channel analog output unit
5213557
Resolution 1/6000, conversion time 2 ms (2 outputs)
GX-DA0271
1-Channel incremental encoder input

(24V)
Open collector, up to 125 kHz
5221569
A, B, Z, 2 Latch, Reset inputs
GX-EC0211
1-Channel incremental encoder input

(line driver)
RS422 signal level, up to 1 MHz
5221569
A, B, Z, 2 Latch, Reset inputs
GX-EC0241
Unit Type
Specification
Size in mm
(HWD)
Remarks
Order code
8-point PNP input expansion unit
506650
Expansion unit for GX, DRT2 and CRT1 series
XWT-ID08-1
509450
XWT-ID16-1
8-point PNP output expansion unit
506650
XWT-OD08-1
509450
XWT-OD16-1
3 port branching uni
24 VDC, 3 x RJ45
902578
EtherCAT junction box for T-branching
GX-JC03
6 port branching unit
24VDC, 6 x RJ45
904878
EtherCAT junction box for star branching
GX-JC06
Expansion units
Note: To order models with NPN (sinking) outputs and corresponding inputs (+V common), omit the 1 from the model code.
52
Compact I/O DRT2
Remote I/O
Compact DeviceNet I/O units with extensive diagnostic functions. Data regarding
power supply status, I/O response times, operation counters and on-time are continuously recorded and checked against user-defined limits. Any deviation is reported to
the control system, as indication to perform machine maintenance and prevent unplanned downtime. Smart DeviceNet I/Os are supported by PLC Function Blocks and
HMI Smart Active Parts, allowing program-less visualisation and monitoring from the
CJ1 PLCs and NS operator terminals.
Compact size IP20 housing
Expandable digital I/Os
Built-in diagnostics and preventive maintenance functions
Detachable I/O terminal blocks
Analog I/O with data pre-processing and alarm functions
Unit type
Specifications
Size in mm
(HWD)
Remarks
Order code
5011550
DRT2-ID08-1
5011550
DRT2-ID16-1
5018058
DRT2-ID16TA-1
5011550
DRT2-OD08-1
5011550
DRT2-OD16-1
5018058
3-tier connection for direct actuator wiring
DRT2-OD16TA-1
2 A per point, max. 8 A per common
5012552
with easy-to-replace relays, expandable with one XWT

unit
DRT2-ROS16
5011550
DRT2-MD16-1
5018058
3-tier connection for direct sensor/actuator wiring
DRT2-MD16TA-1
4 to 20 mA
5011550
DRT2-AD04
4 to 20 mA
5011550
DRT2-AD04H
4 to 20 mA
5011550
DRT2-DA02
4-Channel temperature input unit
Platinum Resistance Thermometer types Pt100, JPt100 5011550
0.3% accuracy, conversion time 250 ms (4 inputs)
DRT2-TS04P
4-Channel temperature input unit
Thermocouple types R, S, K, J, T, B, L, E, U, N, W,
and PL2
5011550
DRT2-TS04T
Specifications
Size in mm
(HWD)
Remarks
Order code
506650
XWT-ID08-1
509450
XWT-ID16-1
506650
XWT-OD08-1
509450
XWT-OD16-1
Expansion units
Unit type
Note: To order models with NPN (sinking) outputs and corresponding inputs (+V common), omit the -1 from the model code.
Accessories
Type
Order code
Power supply tap with 2 fuses, 2 bus connectors and termination resistor
DCN1-1P
T-branch tap with 3 bus connectors (screw clamp) and terminating resistor
DCN1-1C
T-branch tap with 3 bus connectors (screwless)
DCN1-1NC
T-branch tap with 5 bus connectors (screw clamp) and terminating resistor
DCN1-3C
T-branch tap with 5 bus connectors (screwless)
DCN1-3NC
Terminating resistor with screw terminals
DRS1-T
53
Remote I/O
Smart DeviceNet I/O
Compact I/O CRT1
Remote I/O
Smart CompoNet I/O
Combining the smart features of DRT2 DeviceNet I/O and the speed and ease of use of
CompoBus/S, CompoNet is ideal for high-speed machine control with a flexible and
expandable architecture. The special flat cable and IDC connectors make installation
quick and easy. The use of repeaters allows wide-area networks with free topology,
ideal for conveyor- and warehouse automation.
Compact size IP20 housing
Expandable digital I/Os with detachable terminal blocks
Easy network wiring with IDC connections
Built-in diagnostics and preventive maintenance functions
Analog I/O with data pre-processing and alarm functions
Unit type
Specifications
Size in mm
(HWD)
Remarks
Order code
248020
Screwless I/O connector, power supply via CompoNet cable
CRT1B-ID04SL-1-300
5011557.6
Screw terminals, common power terminals per 8 points
CRT1-ID08-1
509660
3 push-in terminals per I/O point (signal + power)
CRT1-ID08SL-1
5011550
Expandable with one XWT unit.
CRT1-ID16-1
5218069
3 terminals per I/O point (for power distribution)
CRT1-ID16TA-1
248020
CRT1B-OD04SL-1-300
5011557.6
CRT1-OD08-1
509660
CRT1-OD08SL-1
5011550
Expandable with one XWT unit.
CRT1-OD16-1
5218069
CRT1-OD16TA-1
8-point SSR output unit
265 V AC, 0.3 A per point
509557.6
CRT1-ROF08
250 VAC, 2 A per point, 8 A per common 509557.6
CRT1-ROS08
250 VAC, 2 A per point, 8 A per common 5014057.6
8 outputs per common
CRT1-ROS16
2-point input + 2-point output unit, PNP
248020
CRT1-MD04SL-1-300
5011557.6
Screw terminals, common power terminals
CRT1-MD16-1
5017060
CRT1-MD16SL-1
8-point input + 8-point output unit PNP
5218069
CRT1-MD16TA-1
0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V,
0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
5011550
CRT1-AD04
0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V,
0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
5011550
CRT1-DA02
4-Channel Temperature input unit
Platinum Resistance Thermometer type

Pt100
5011550
CRT1-TS04P
4-Channel Temperature input unit
Thermocouple types R, S, K, J, T, B, L, E, U, 5011550

N, W and PL2
CRT1-TS04T
Unit type
Specifications
Remarks
Order code
506650
XWT-ID08-1
509450
XWT-ID16-1
506650
XWT-OD08-1
509450
XWT-OD16-1
Expansion units
Size in mm
(HWD)
Accessories
Unit type
Specifications
Size in mm
(HWD)
Remarks
Order code
CompoNet Repeater unit
1 upstream port + 1 downstream port
509543
For extending CompoNet trunk lines, or creating branch lines CRS1-RPT01
CompoNet 4-wire flat cable
For IP20 use
100 m
For power supply + communication, use with DCN4-connectors DCA4-4F10
CompoNet Branch connector for trunk line For IP20 use
To create a branching point on a trunk line
DCN4-TR4
CompoNet Branch line end connector
For IP20 use
To connect a branch line to a trunk line
DCN4-BR4
CompoNet Y-connector
For IP20 use
To connect two line connectors to one slave unit
DCN4-MD4
CompoNet Screw terminal connector
For IP20 use
To provide conventional screw terminals for masters or slaves DCN4-TB4
CompoNet Terminator
For IP20 use
Plugs in to DCN4-MD4 or DCN4-TR4
DCN4-TM4
CompoNet connector tool
For DCN4-connectors
To attach DCN4-connectors to DCA4-4F10 flat cable
DWT-A01
CompoNet Screw terminal connector
For IP20 use, box of 10 pcs
To provide conventional screw terminals for 4-point bit slaves HCN-TB4LMZG-B10+
Bit slave flat cable plug
For CRT1B-_D04SL-1-300 slaves
Allows mounting bit slaves directly on flat cable
DCN4-MR4
Bit slave mounting plate
For CRT1B-_D04SL-1-300 slaves
Mount with two screws, bit slave clips in place
CRT1-ATT03
54
Compact I/O SRT2
Remote I/O
Omron's unique CompoBus/S is the original I/O bus for machine automation. With free
topology and up to 500 m bus length in long-distance mode, it can be used as a remote
I/O system. In high-speed mode (100 m max.) the guaranteed sub-millisecond cycle
time makes it ideal for efficient machine control. Used with the compact CPM2C-S PLC
as master, your machine control system will fit in the smallest spaces.
Compact size in IP20 housing
Fast cycle time; less than 1 ms per 256 I/O points
Easy set-up; no software required
Choice of 4- 8- and 16-point Digital I/O; transistor-, and relay models
Analog In/Outputs and customisable modules available
Unit type
Specifications
Size in mm (HWD)
Remarks
Order code
488050
Compact IP20 I/O
SRT2-ID04-1
488050
Compact IP20 I/O
SRT2-ID08-1
4810550
Compact IP20 I/O
SRT2-ID16-1
5018059
SRT2-ID16T-1
488050
Compact IP20 I/O
SRT2-OD04-1
488050
Compact IP20 I/O
SRT2-OD08-1
4810550
Compact IP20 I/O
SRT2-OD16-1
5018059
3-tier connection for direct sensor/actuator wiring
SRT2-OD16T-1
5018059
3-tier connection for direct actuator wiring
SRT2-MD16T-1
Max. 3 A per point
5010050
with easy-to-replace relays
SRT2-ROC08
Max. 3 A per point
5015550
with easy-to-replace relays
SRT2-ROC16
0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V,
0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
4810550
SRT2-AD04
0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V,
0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
4810550
SRT2-DA02
Accessories
Type
Order code
CompoBus/S 4-wire flatcable for power and communication (100 m)
SCA1-4F10
CompoBus/S branch connector (IDC) for flatcable
SCN1-TH4
CompoBus/S termination connector (IDC) for flatcable
SCN1-TH4T
CompoBus/S termination block (screw connection)
SRS1-T
55
Remote I/O
Fast and easy over CompoBus/S
Field I/O DRT2-_C_
Remote I/O
DeviceNet I/O for harsh environments
Rugged I/O units for field mounting. The DRT2 slave units feature internal diagnostic
and maintenance data collection, which can be accessed over the network. Power supply status, I/O response times, operation counters and on-time monitor data is available at all times, and is internally checked against user-defined limits. Maintenance
warnings will be generated when limits are exceeded. Using CX-One or NS-series HMI
with Smart Active Parts for visualisation, this allows more efficient system setup, commissioning and troubleshooting without any additional programming.
IP67 protection, DRT2 versions are also oil- and welding-spatter proof
Internal circuits powered by DeviceNet; fewer connections means less installation
errors
Smart Slave functions for diagnostics and preventive maintenance
Indication of broken wire and short-circuit in I/O signals
M12 connectors for fast installation
Unit type
Specifications
Size in mm Remarks
(HWD)
24 V, 6 mA
1236044 Separate I/O power supply connection DRT2-ID04CL-1
24 V, 6 mA
1756044 Separate I/O power supply connection DRT2-ID08CL-1
24 V, 11 mA, with power short-circuit and sensor disconnection detection 1756038 Unit power supply via DeviceNet cable DRT2-ID08C-1
24 V, 6 mA, 2 inputs per M12 connector
1756044 Separate I/O power supply connection DRT2-HD16CL-1
24 V, 11 mA, 2 inputs per M12 connector,

with power short-circuit and sensor disconnection detection
1756038 Unit power supply via DeviceNet cable DRT2-HD16C-1
24 V, 0.5 A per point
1236044 Separate I/O power supply connection DRT2-OD04CL-1
1756044 Separate I/O power supply connection DRT2-OD08CL-1
24 V, 1.5 A per point (8 A total), with short-circuit protection + indication 1756044 Separate I/O power supply connection DRT2-OD08C-1
24 V, 0.5 A per point, 2 points per M12 connector
8-point input + 8-point PNP output unit 24 V, 6 mA input, 0.5 A output per point, 2 points per M12 connector
Order code
1756044 Separate I/O power supply connection DRT2-WD16CL-1

1756044 Separate I/O power supply connection DRT2-MD16CL-1
Accessories
Unit type
Specifications
Order code
DeviceNet thin cable
with one M12 socket connector (female), 1 m
DCA1-5CN01F1
DCA1-5CN02F1
DCA1-5CN05F1
with one M12 socket connector (female) and one M12 plug connector (male), 1 m
DCA1-5CN01W1
DCA1-5CN02W1
DCA1-5CN05W1
DeviceNet T-connector for thin cable
with two M12 socket connectors (female) + one M12 plug connector (male)
DCN2-1
DeviceNet terminator
with M12 plug connector
DRS2-1
Power supply cable
with one 7/8 inches socket connector (female), 2 m
XS4F-D421-102-A
Power supply cable
with one 7/8 inches socket connector (female), 5 m
XS4F-D421-105-A
Power supply cable
with one 7/8 inches socket connector (female) and one 7/8 inches plug connector (male), 2 m
XS4W-D421-102-A
Power supply cable
with one 7/8 inches socket connector (female) and one 7/8 inches plug connector (male), 5 m
XS4W-D421-105-A
Power supply T-connector
with two 7/8 inches socket connectors (female) + one 7/8 inches plug connector (male)
XS4R-D424-5
4-wire I/O connection cable
with one M12 plug connector (male), 1 m
XS2H-D421-C80-A
XS2H-D421-D80-A
XS2H-D421-G80-A
XS2W-D421-C81-A
XS2W-D421-D81-A
XS2W-D421-G81-A
Y-connector for 16-point I/O units
Splits the 2 I/O points per M12 connector to two M12 connectors
XS2R-D426-1
Y-connector cable for 16-point I/O units
Splits the 2 I/O points per M12 connector to two M12 connectors, 1 m
XS2R-D426-C11-F
M12 connector
M12 plug connector (male), solder type
XS2G-D421
M12 connector
M12 socket connector (female), solder type
XS2C-D421
IP67 cap for M12 sockets
Metal cap for unused I/O connections
XS2Z-12
56
Field I/O SRT2-_C_
Remote I/O
Rugged I/O units for field mounting. Omron's unique CompoBus/S is the most efficient
I/O bus for machine automation. With free topology and up to 500 m bus length in
long-distance mode, it can be used as a remote I/O system. In high-speed mode (100
m max.) the guaranteed sub-millisecond cycle time makes it ideal for efficient machine control. With IP67 slave modules distributed throughout the machine, the need
for protective enclosures is minimised.
IP67 protection against dust and water
Fast cycle time; less than 1 ms for 256 I/O points
Easy setup; no software required
Choice of 4- and 8-point Digital I/O
M12 connectors for easy field wiring
Unit type
Specifications
Size in mm (HWD)
Order code
24 V, 6 mA
1145445
SRT2-ID04CL-1
24 V, 6 mA
1145445
SRT2-ID08CL-1
1145445
SRT2-OD04CL-1
1145445
SRT2-OD08CL-1
Accessories
Unit type
Specifications
Remarks
Order code
CompoBus/S terminator
with M12 plug connector
SRS2-1
M12 connector
M12 plug connector (male), screw type
For CompoBus/S 4-wire round cable XS2G-D4S7
M12 connector
M12 socket connector (female), screw type
For CompoBus/S 4-wire round cable XS2C-D4S7
M12 T-connector (4-wire)
with two M12 socket connectors (female) + one M12 plug connector (male)
XS2R-D427-5
XS2H-D421-C80-A
XS2H-D421-D80-A
XS2H-D421-G80-A
XS2W-D421-C81-A
XS2W-D421-D81-A
XS2W-D421-G81-A
Y-connector for 16-point I/O units
Splits the 2 I/O points per M12 connector to two M12 connectors
XS2R-D426-1
Y-connector cable for 16-point I/O units
Splits the 2 I/O points per M12 connector to two M12 connectors, 1 m
XS2R-D426-C11-F
M12 connector
M12 plug connector (male), solder type
XS2G-D421
M12 connector
M12 socket connector (female), solder type
XS2C-D421
IP67 cap for M12 sockets
Metal cap for unused I/O connections
XS2Z-12
57
Remote I/O
Dust- and waterproof CompoBus I/O

NA AND NB SERIES
If you are looking for a smart and dependable HMI for use with our compact and modular PLCs, look no further than the NB series.
It offers you - among various other features an LED backlighted TFT LCD, a portrait and landscape mode and USB memory stick
support. It is available with screen sizes from 3.5 to 10 inches.
For faster, more efficient control and monitoring, the scalable NA series HMI offers a more natural, proactive machine/operator
environment that will evolve to meet your ever-changing needs. Based on the Sysmac Platform, the NA series is fully aware of the
total machine and brings together all areas of automation including: logic, motion, vision, safety and visualization. It gives you a
clear view in one integrated project. The high resolution wide screens are available in 7 and 9 (800 480 pixel ) as well as 12
and 15 (1280 800 pixel)
Touch screen
58
Integrated
Scalable HMI
Display size
Display size
15 inch
12 inch
9 inch
7 inch
15 inch
12.1 inch/
10.4 inch
8.4 inch
5.7 inch
5.7 inch
NA15
NA12
NA9
NA7
NS15
NS12/NS10
NS8
NS5
NS5
Handheld
N554
Page 62
N554
Page 62
N554
Page 62
N554
Page 62
N537
Page 64
N536, N535
Page 64
N542
Page 64
N538
Page 65
N539
Page 66
HMI
Interaction type
Function keys
Compact HMI
4 lines
2 lines
Display size
10.1 inch
7 inch
5.6 inch
3.5 inch
NB10W
NB7W
NB5Q
NB3Q
NT11
NT2S
N547
Page 68
N548
Page 68
N549
Page 68
N552
Page 68
N526
Page 70
N527
Page 71
59
Selection table
Integrated
Model
NA15
NA12
NA9
NA7
Display
15 inch widescreen TFT color
Resolution
1280 800 pixels
1280 800 pixels
800 400 pixels
800 400 pixels
Colors
24 bit
24 bit
24 bit
24 bit
Communication
3 USB
2 Ethernet
1 RS-232
SD Card
24 VDC
3 USB
2 Ethernet
1 RS-232
SD Card
24 VDC
3 USB
2 Ethernet
1 RS-232
SD Card
24 VDC
3 USB
2 Ethernet
1 RS-232
SD Card
24 VDC
Dimensions in mm (HWD)
420291
391267 (cut-out)
340244
309220 (cut-out)
290190
260165 (cut-out)
236165
196140 (cut-out)
Page/Quick Link
62
Scalable HMI
Model
NS15
NS12
NS10
NS8
NS5
NS5 handheld
Display
15 inch TFT color
12.1 inch TFT color
10.4 inch TFT color
8.4 inch TFT color
5.7 inch TFT color
5.7 inch STN color
Resolution
1024 768 pixels (XGA) 800 600 pixels (SVGA) 640 480 pixels (VGA)
640 480 pixels (VGA)
320 240 pixels (QVGA) 320 240 pixels (QVGA)
Number of colors
256
256
256
256
256
256
(32,768 for image data) (32,768 for image data) (32,768 for image data) (32,768 for image data) (32,768 for image data) (4,096 for image data)
Memory Size
60 MB screen memory
60 MB screen memory,
32,768 words +
32,768 bits internal
memory and
8192 words + 8192 bits
retentative memory
32,768 words +
memory and
retentative memory
32,768 words +
memory and
retentative memory
Options
Controller Link,
Video input board
(NS-CA002)
Ethernet, Controller
Link,
Video input board
(RGB/Composite)
Ethernet, Controller
Link,
Video input board
(RGB/Composite)
Ethernet, Video input

Ethernet
board (RGB/Composite)
RS-232 or RS-422
communication
depending on cable
30040080
24131548.5
24131548.5
17719548.5
14219554
17622370.5
(excl. emergency
button)
Page/Quick Link
64
65
66
60
32,768 words +
memory and
retentative memory
32,768 words +
memory and
retentative memory
Model
NB10W
NB7W
NB5Q
NB3Q
Display
10.1 inch Wide TFT LCD
7 inch Wide TFT LCD
5.6 inch TFT LCD
3.5 inch TFT LCD
Resolution
800 480 pixels
800 480 pixels
320 234 pixels
320 240 pixels
Number of colors
65,536
65,536
65,536
65,536
Memory
128 MB (including system area)
Communicati Serial
on ports
Communication
1 RS-232C &
1 RS-232C/422A/485
1 RS-232C &
1 RS-232C/422A/485
1 RS-232C &
1 RS-232C/422A/485
1 RS-232C/422A/485
1 USB Host & 1 USB Slave
USB (USB Host only 1 USB Host & 1 USB Slave

on TW01 model)
1 Ethernet
1 Ethernet (TW01 model)
Ethernet
210.8268.854.0
14820246
14218446
103.8129.852.8
Page/Quick Link
68
HMI
Compact HMI
Function-key HMI
Model
NT11
NT2S
Type of Display
LED backlight LCD
LED backlight LCD
Number of F-keys
22
6 or 20 depending on model
Number of characters
20 4 lines
16 2 lines
Printer connection
Yes
Depending on model
Number of screens
250
65,000 (limited by memory)
Size in mm (HWD)
11321838.2
6 F-keys 6010943
20 F-keys 10710743
Page/Quick Link
70
71
61
NA7/9/12/15
Integrated HMI
Bringing technology to life
An HMI that is dynamic, intuitive and predictive makes industrial machines more
attractive and competitive. Our Sysmac HMI enables faster, more efficient control and
monitoring and a more natural, proactive relationship between operator and
machine.
Complete functionality scalable with widescreen across 7, 9, 12, 15 range
Available in black or silver
High resolution (1280 800 pixel for 12 and 15, 800 480 pixel for 7 and 9)
Machine interface
Display
Colors
Resolution
Frame color
Order code
15.4 inch wide screen, TFT LCD
24 bit full color
1280 800 pixels
Silver
NA5-15W101S
Black
NA5-15W101B
Silver
NA5-12W101S
Black
NA5-12W101B
Silver
NA5-9W001S
Black
NA5-9W001B
Silver
NA5-7W001S
Black
NA5-7W001B
12.1 inch wide screen, TFT LCD
1280 800 pixels
9 inch wide screen, TFT LCD
800 480 pixels
7 inch wide screen, TFT LCD
800 480 pixels
Accessories
Type
Specifications
Order code
SD memory card
2 GB
HMC-SD291
4 GB
HMC-SD491
2 GB
FZ-MEM2G
8 GB
FZ-MEM8G
USB memory
Replacement battery
Battery life: 5 years (at 25C). This Battery is provided as an accessory.
Anti-reflection sheets
Attach a Sheet to the screen to protect against diffused reflections and dirt.
The entire Sheet is colorless and transparent. Five Sheets are provided in one
set.
CJ1W-BAT01
For NA5-15W
NA-15KBA04
For NA5-12W
NA-12KBA04
For NA5-9W
NA-9KBA04
For NA5-7W
NA-7KBA04
Computer software
Specifications
Order code
Sysmac Studio version 1.10 or higher
SYSMAC-SE2___
62
NA7/9/12/15
Integrated HMI
Specifications
Item
Specification
NA5-15W_
Rated supply voltage
NA5-12W_
NA5-9W_
NA5-7W_
45 W max.
40 W max.
35 W max.
24 VDC
Allowable power supply voltage range 19.2 to 28.8 VDC (24 VDC 20%)
47 W max.
Ambient operating temperature
0 to 50C *1 *2
Ambient storage temperature
20 to +60C *3
Ambient operating humidity
10 to 90% *2
Must be no condensation.
Atmosphere
Must be free from corrosive gases.
Pollution degree
2 or less: JIS B 3502, IEC 61131-2
Noise immunity
2 kV on power supply line (Conforms to IEC 61000-4-4.)
HMI
Power consumption
Vibration resistance (during operation) Conforms to IEC 60068-2-6.

5 to 8.4 Hz with 3.5 mm half amplitude and 8.4 to 150 Hz with 9.8 m/s2 for 100 minutes each in X,Y, and Z directions
(Time coefficient of 10 minutes coefficient factor of 10 = total time of 100 min.)
Shock resistance (during operation)
Conforms to IEC 60028-2-27.

147 m/s2 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Dimensions (WHD)
420 291 69 mm
Panel cutout dimensions
392 0 268 0 mm
(horizontal vertical)
Panel thickness: 1.6 to 6.0 mm
310 0 221 0 mm
261 0 166 0 mm
197 0 141 0 mm
Weight
3.2 kg max.
2.3 kg max.
1.7 kg max.
1.3 kg max.
Degree of protection
Front-panel controls: IP65 oil-proof type, UL type 4X
Battery life
Battery life: 5 years at 25C

The RTC will be backed up for 5 days after the battery runs low. The RTC will be backed up by a super capacitor for 5 minutes after removing the old
battery.
(This assumes that the power is first turned ON for at least 5 minutes and then turned OFF.)
International standards
UL 508/CSA standard C22.2 No.142 *4

EMC Directive (2004/108/EC) EN 61131-2:2007
Shipbuilding standards LR, DNV, and NK
IP65 oil-proof, UL type 4X (front panel only)
ANSI 12.12.01 Class 1 Division 2/CSA standard C22.2
RoHS Directive (2002/95/EC)
KC Standards KN 61000-6-2:2012-06 for EMS and KN 61000-6-4:2012-06 for EMI
RCM
*1
+1
340 244 69 mm
+1
+1
290 190 69 mm
+1
+1
236 165 69 mm
+1
The ambient operating temperature is subject to the following restrictions, depending on the mounting angle.
The ambient operating temperature is 0 to 40C when the mounting angle is 0 or more and less than 45 to the horizontal.
The ambient operating temperature is 0 to 50C when the mounting angle is 45 or more and 90 or less to the horizontal.
The ambient operating temperature is 0 to 50C when the mounting angle is 90 or more and 135 or less to the horizontal.
50C
+0.5
+0.5
50C
50C
50C
50C
90 to
45 to
135
90
40C
0 to 45
40C
*4
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
-10
Operating
temperaturehumidity range
10
20
30
40
Temperature [C]
Operating
50
60
*3
Store the Programmable Terminal within the following temperature and humidity ranges.
Humidity [%]
Use the Programmable Terminal within the following temperature and humidity ranges.
Humidity [%]
*2
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
-20 -10
Storage
10
20 30 40 50
Temperature [C]
60
100
90
80
70
60
50 Storage
40 temperature30 humidity range
20
10
0
70
Use power supply Class 2 to conform to UL Standards.
63
NS15/NS12/NS10/NS8
Scalable HMI
One-touch machine management
The NS-series is our advanced HMI series that covers a large range from
5.7" Monochrome STN to 15" TFT. Easily programmed it offers advanced features like,
multiple communication possibilities, good synergy with our PLC's and other devices
with Ladder monitor, Smart Active Parts and proven reliability.
Perfect clarity and fast switching screens
Extremely long backlight life (up to 50,000 hours)
Support all European languages, Asian and Cyrillic
Easy data logging on compact flash
Large Memory size (60 MB)
Support for several non-Omron PLC's
Type
TFT, 15", 1024 x 768 pixels
TFT, 12", 800 x 600 pixels
Order Code
with Ethernet
no Ethernet
with Ethernet
TFT, 10", 640 x 480 pixels
no Ethernet
with Ethernet
TFT, 8.4", 640 x 480 pixels
no Ethernet
with Ethernet
Black
NS15-TX01B-V2
Silver
NS15-TX01S-V2
Black
NS12-TS00B-V2
Ivory
NS12-TS00-V2
Black
NS12-TS01B-V2
Ivory
NS12-TS01-V2
Black
NS10-TV00B-V2
Ivory
NS10-TV00-V2
Black
NS10-TV01B-V2
Ivory
NS10-TV01-V2
Black
NS8-TV00B-V2
Ivory
NS8-TV00-V2
Black
NS8-TV01B-V2
Ivory
NS8-TV01-V2
Note: For the accessories, please refer to page 67
Specifications
Item
NS15
NS12
NS10
NS8
Display type
15 inch color TFT
12 inch color TFT
10 inch color TFT
8 inch color TFT
Display resolution
1024768 (XGA)
800600 (SVGA)
640480 (VGA)
Number of colors
256 (32.768 for image data)
Backlight
2CCFL
Backlight lifetime
Min. 50000 hours
View angle
Left/right 85, Top 70, Bottom 80 Left/right 60, Top 45, Bottom 75 Left/right 60, Top 35, Bottom 65 Left/right 65, Top 50, Bottom 60
1LED
Touch panel
Analog resistive touch
Number of functional keys
30440575.8
24131548.5
17723248.5
Weight
4.2 kg max.
2.5 kg max.
2.0 kg max.
Screen data capacity
60 MB
Internal memory
Bit memory: 32,767 bits, Word memory: 32,767 words, Retentative memory: 8,192 bits and 8,192 words.
Memory card interface
1 slot ATA Compact Flash card
Printer connection
PictBridge support
Serial (COM1)
1RS-232
Serial (COM2)
1RS-232/422/485
USB Slave
For programming & printing
Ethernet
IEEE 802.3u 10Base-T/100Base-TX
Expansion module
Optional network/video unit
Line voltage
24 VDC 15%
Matrix resistive touch
1RS-232
Optional video unit
Power consumption
45 W max.
Battery
CJ1W-BAT01
Battery lifetime
5 years (at 25C)
Enclosure rating (front side)
IP65F (equivalent to NEMA4)
Obtained standards
UL 1604 Class 1 Diff. 2, cUL, CE, Lloyds, DNV
Operating environment
No corrosive gases
Noise immunity
Conforms to IEC61000-4-4, 2 KV (power lines)

0 to 50C*1
35% to 85% (0 to 40C) with no condensation, 35% to 60% (40 to 50C) with no condensation
*1
64
see manual for details.
25 W max.
NS5
Scalable HMI
The smallest NS HMI is available in two brightness variations, both with a vivid color
TFT touchscreen. It is equipped with a USB connection for project download/upload
and the possibility to communicate over Ethernet. One great advantage with the NS is
that you can make use of Omrons unique Smart Active Parts (SAP) that save you time
when configuring, commissioning and maintaining your machine. SAP are pre-programmed, pre-tested visualisation objects with embedded communication code,
bringing 'drag and drop' simplicity to HMI design.
Perfect clarity and fast switching screens
Extremely long backlight life (up to 75,000 hours)
Support all European languages, Asian and Cyrillic
Easy data logging on compact flash
Large Memory size (60 MB)
Support for several non-Omron PLCs
Type
NS5-TQ
Order Code
TFT, 5.7'', 320240 pixels
no Ethernet
with Ethernet
NS5-SQ
TFT, 5.7'', 320240 pixels
no Ethernet
with Ethernet
Black
NS5-TQ10B-V2
Ivory
NS5-TQ10-V2
Black
NS5-TQ11B-V2
Ivory
NS5-TQ11-V2
Black
NS5-SQ10B-V2
Ivory
NS5-SQ10-V2
Black
NS5-SQ11B-V2
Ivory
NS5-SQ11-V2
Note: For the accessories, please refer to page 67
Specifications
Item
NS5-TQ
Display type
5.7 inch color TFT
Display resolution
340240 (QVGA)
Number of colors
256 (32.768 for image data)
Backlight
LED
Backlight lifetime
Min. 75000 hours
View angle
Left/right 80, Top 80, Bottom 60
Touch panel
Matrix resistive touch
Number of functional keys
14219554
Weight
1.0 kg max.
Screen data capacity
60 MB
Internal memory
Bit memory: 32,767 bits, Word memory: 32,767 words, Retentative memory: 8,192 bits and 8,192 words.
Printer connection
PictBridge support
Serial (COM1)
1RS-232
Serial (COM2)
1RS-232
USB Slave
For programming & printing
Ethernet
IEEE 802.3u 10Base-T/100Base-TX
Expansion module
Line voltage
24 VDC 15%
Power consumption
15 W max.
Battery
CJ1W-BAT01
Battery lifetime
5 years (at 25C)
IP65F (equivalent to NEMA4)
Obtained standards
UL 1604 Class 1 Diff. 2, cUL, CE, Lloyds, DNV
No corrosive gases
Noise immunity
Conforms to IEC61000-4-4, 2 KV (power lines)

0 to 50C*1
35% to 85% (0 to 40C) with no condensation, 35% to 60% (40 to 50C) with no condensation
*1
NS5-SQ
See manual for details.
65
HMI
More power, smaller size
NS5 handheld
Scalable HMI
NS5 handheld, suitable for use in harsh conditions
The NS series has evolved into a mobile format. Based on the standard 5.7 TFT color
version, we can offer a handheld version of the NS series. Offering 10 Function keys for
the most used functions and with a protection degree of IP65 it is the product to use
in harsh environment where freedom of movement is needed.
10 Function keys, 4 hardwired for inching
Emergency switch on front plus enable switch on back of unit
Well protected against water, IP65
Compact Flash, Serial and USB interface
Type
NSH5
Order code
TFT, 5.7", 320240 pixels
Black
NSH5-SQR10B-V2
Accessories
Type
Order code
Bracket NS handheld protecting emergency button from accidental activation
NSH5-ATT01
Bracket NS handheld for wall mounting
NSH5-ATT02
Cable NS handheld, RS-422, 10m UL
NSH5-422UL-10M
NSH5-232UL-10M
NSH5-232UL-3M
Specifications
Serial (COM1)
1RS-232/RS-422A
USB Slave
For programming
Line voltage
24 VDC 15%
Power consumption
10 W max.
Battery
CJ1W-BAT01
Battery lifetime
5 years (at 25C)
Enclosure rating
IP65*1
Obtained standards
UL 1604 Class 1 Diff. 2, cUL, CE, NEMA equivalent
No corrosive gases
Noise immunity
Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4: 2 kV (power supply line)
0 to 40C
35% to 85% max. (with no condensation)
Vibration resistance (during operation)
10 to 57 Hz with amplitude of 0.075 mm, 57 to 150 Hz with acceleration of 9.8 m/s2 three minutes each in X, Y, and Z directions
Shock resistance (during operation)
147 m/s2 three times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Drop test*1
Dropped from 1 m. Conforming to JIS B 3502/IEC61131-2
*1
66
see manual for details.
Accessories NS
Integrated controller/Scalable HMI
Type
Description
Order code
Cable
Serial programming cable
XW2Z-S002
CP1W-CN221
USB programming cable, 2 m

PT-to-PLC
Connecting Cable
PT connection: 9 pins
PLC connection: 9 pins
Length: 2 m
XW2Z-200T
Length: 5 m
XW2Z-500T
Accessories
Video input
Inputs: 4 channels NTSC / PAL
NS-CA001
Inputs: 2 channels NTSC / PAL, 1 channel RGB
NS-CA002
HMI
F150-VKP (2 m)
Cable to connect NS-CA00_ to Video console unit
F150-VKP (5 m)
Controller link interface unit
NS-CLK21
RS-422A/485 adapter (50 m)
CJ1W-CIF11
NS-AL002
RS-422A adapter (500 m)

NS15
NS15-KBA04
NS12/10
NS12-KBA04
NS8
NS7-KBA04
NS5
NT30-KBA04
NS12/10
NS12-KBA05
NS8
NS7-KBA05
NS5
NT31C-KBA05
NS15 (1 cover)
NS15-KBA05N
NS12/10
NS12-KBA05N
NS8
NS7-KBA05N
NS5
NT31C-KBA05N
Chemical-resistant cover (1 cover)
NS5
NT30-KBA01
Attachment adapter
(NT625C/631/631C series to NS12 series)
NS12-ATT01
(NT625C/631/631C series to NS12 series) Black
NS12-ATT01B
(NT620S/620C/600S series to NS8 series)
NS8-ATT01
(NT600M/600G/610G/612G series to NS8 series)
NS8-ATT02
128 MB
HMC-EF183
256 MB
HMC-EF283
512 MB
HMC-EF583
Anti-reflection sheets (5 sheets)
Anti-reflection protective covers (5 pack)
Transparent protective covers (5 pack)
Memory card
Memory card adapter for PC
HMC-AP001
Battery
CJ1W-BAT01
67
NB series
Compact HMI
The feature-rich, cost-effective HMI
The combination of high quality and rich features add up to give outstanding value for
an HMI in the economy class. The NB-Designer software to create your HMI application
is free of charge and can be downloaded from our website.
More than 65,000 display colors TFT touch screen
Available in sizes ranging from 3.5 to 10 inches
Long-life LED backlight
Serial, USB or Ethernet communication
USB memory stick support (TW01 model only)
128 MB internal memory
Vector and bitmap graphics
HMI panels
Product name
Specifications
Order code
NB3Q
3.5 inch, TFT LCD, Color, 320 240 dots
NB3Q-TW00B
3.5 inch, TFT LCD, Color, 320 240 dots, USB Host, Ethernet
NB3Q-TW01B
5.6 inch, TFT LCD, Color, 320 234 dots
NB5Q-TW00B
NB5Q-TW01B
7 inch, TFT LCD, Color, 800 480 dots
NB7W-TW00B
7 inch, TFT LCD, Color, 800 480 dots, USB Host, Ethernet
NB7W-TW01B
NB10W-TW01B
Product item
Specifications
Order code
NB-to-PLC Connecting cable
For NB to PLC via RS-232C (CP/CJ/CS), 2m
XW2Z-200T
For NB to PLC via RS-232C (CP/CJ/CS), 5m
XW2Z-500T
For NB to PLC via RS-422A/485, 2m
NB-RSEXT-2M
Supported Operating Systems: Windows 7, Windows Vista, Windows XP*1 (SP1 or higher).
Download from the Omron website.
NB-Designer*2
NB5Q
NB7W
NB10W
Options
Software
Display protective sheets
Attachment
*1
*2
For the NB3Q contains 5 sheets
NB3Q-KBA04
For the NB5Q contains 5 sheets
NB5Q-KBA04
For the NB7W contains 5 sheets
NB7W-KBA04
For the NB10W contains 5 sheets
NB10W-KBA04
Mounting bracket for NT31/NT31C series to NB5Q series
NB5Q-ATT01
Except for Windows XP 64-bit version

The NB5Q-TW01B and NB7W-TW01B are supported by NB-Designer version 1.10 or higher.
The NB3Q-TW0_B and NB10W-TW01B are supported by NB-Designer version 1.20 or higher.
Model
Panel cutout (H V mm)
NB3Q
119.0 (+0.5/0) 93.0 (+0.5/0)
NB5Q
172.4 (+0.5/0) 131.0 (+0.5/0)
NB7W
191.0 (+0.5/0) 137.0 (+0.5/0)
NB10W
258.0 (+0.5/0) 200.0 (+0.5/0)
Note: Applicable panel thickness: 1.6 to 4.8 mm.
68
NB series
Compact HMI
Specifications
HMI
Specifications
NB3Q
TW00B
NB5Q
TW01B
NB7W
TW00B
TW01B
TW00B
NB10W
TW01B
TW01B
3.5 inch TFT LCD
5.6 inch TFT LCD
7 inch TFT LCD
10.1 inch TFT LCD
Display resolution (HV)
320240
320234
800480
800480
Number of colors
65,536
Backlight
LED
Backlight lifetime
50,000 hours of operating time at the normal temperature (25C)*1
Touch panel
Analog resistive membrane, resolution 10241024, life: 1 million touch operations
103.8129.852.8
Weight
310 g max.
*1
14218446
315 g max.
HMI
Display type
14820246
620 g max.
625 g max.
710 g max.
210.8268.854.0
715 g max.
1,545 g max.
This is the estimated time when the luminous intensity is decreased by 50% per LED at room temperature and humidity. It is a typical value.
Functionality
Specifications
NB3Q
TW00B
NB5Q
TW01B
NB7W
TW01B
TW00B
TW01B
TW01B
USB
Memory
USB
Memory
USB
Memory
10/100 base-T
10/100 base-T
Internal memory
128MB (including system area)
Memory interface
Serial (COM1)
RS-232C/422A/485 (not isolated),

Transmission distance:
15m Max. (RS-232C),
500m Max. (RS-422A/485),
Connector: D-Sub 9-pin
RS-232C,
Transmission distance: 15 m Max.,
Serial (COM2)
RS-232C/422A/485 (not isolated),

Transmission distance: 15m Max. (RS-232C),
500m Max. (RS-422A/485),
USB Host
Equivalent to USB 2.0 full speed, type A, Output power 5V, 150mA
USB Slave
Equivalent to USB 2.0 full speed, type B, Transmission distance: 5m
Printer connection
PictBridge support
Ethernet
USB
Memory
10/100 base-T
NB10W
TW00B
10/100 base-T
General
Specifications
NB3Q
TW00B
NB5Q
TW01B
NB7W
TW01B
TW00B
TW01B
TW01B
6W
10 W
7W
11 W
14 W
Line voltage
20.4 to 27.6 VDC (24 VDC 15 to 15%)
Power consumption
5W
Battery lifetime
5 years (at 25C)
Front operation part: IP65 (Dust proof and drip proof only from the front of the panel)
Obtained standards
EC Directives, KC, cUL508
No corrosive gases.
Noise immunity
Compliant with IEC61000-4-4, 2KV (Power cable)
0 to 50C
10% to 90% RH (without condensation)
9W
NB10W
TW00B
Applicable Controllers
Brand
Series
Brand
Series
OMRON
Omron C Series Host Link
Schneider
Schneider Modicon Uni-TelWay
Omron CJ/CS Series Host Link

Mitsubishi
Schneider Twido Modbus RTU
Omron CP Series
Delta
Delta DVP
Mitsubishi Q_QnA (Link Port)
LG (LS)
LS Master-K Cnet
Mitsubishi FX-485ADP/485BD/422BD (Multi-station)
LS Master-K CPU Direct
Mitsubishi FX0N/1N/2N/3G
LS Master-K Modbus RTU
Mitsubishi FX1S
LS XGT CPU Direct
Mitsubishi FX2N-10GM/20GM
LS XGT Cnet
Mitsubishi Q series (CPU Port)
GE Fanuc Automation*1 GE Fanuc Series SNP

GE SNP-X
Mitsubishi Q00J (CPU Port)
Modbus
Mitsubishi FX3U
Modbus ASCII
Mitsubishi Q06H
Modbus RTU
Panasonic
FP series
Modbus RTU Slave
Siemens
Siemens S7-200
Modbus RTU Extend
Siemens S7-300/400 (PC Adapter Direct)
Modbus TCP
Allen-Bradley*1
(Rockwell)
*1
AB DF1
AB CompactLogix/ControlLogix
AB and GE will be supported by NB-Designer version 1.20 or higher.
Note: For details, refer to NB Series Host Connection Manual (Cat.No V108).
69
NT11
Function-key HMI
HMI with four text lines and 22 F-keys
The NT11 is a Function key HMI with four text lines that can each hold up to 20 characters. It has a parallel printer connection next to a serial port for connection to a PLC.
It has a LED backlight that has a life expectancy of at least 50,000 hours.
Easy programming software.
Small size and installation depth.
Customisable F-Keys
Printer connection.
Cost effective solution.
Type
STN monochrome
Order code
Ten-key type
Ivory
NT11-SF121-EV1
Black
NT11-SF121B-EV1
Accessories
Type
Description
Cables
For screen transfer

For PLC connection
Order code
XW2Z-S002
PT: 9-pin
PLC: 9-pin
PT: 9-pin
PLC: Mini-peripheral
Cable length: 2 m
XW2Z-200T
Cable length: 5 m
XW2Z-500T
Cable length: 2 m
NT-CN221
Software
Type
Order code
NTST Version 4.8
NTZJCAT1EV4
Upgrade NTST Version 4.8
NTZJCAT1EV4S
Specifications
Size in mm (HWD)
11321838.2
Effective display area
10040mm (16064 pixels)
Line voltage
24 VDC 15%
Function keys
22 keys
Touch panel
Obtained standards
CE, cULus
No. of display characters

(standard characters)
20 characters 4 lines
No. of registered screens
250
Screen data capacity (standard)
32 KB
Expansion memory
Printer connection
Supported
Backlight life
50,000 hours average
70
NT2S
Function-key HMI
The NT2S is the smallest HMI that we can offer you. It is based on a 16 2 lines LCD
display with 6 or 20 Function keys. It offers IP65 protection, an optional RTC and printer connection.
Easy and free programming software.
Small size and installation depth.
Real Time Clock (depending on model).
Printer connection (depending on model).
Cost effective solution.
Type
STN monochrome
Order code
Programmable
6-key type, Black
NT2S-SF121B-EV2
NT2S-SF122B-EV2
NT2S-SF123B-EV2
PLC controlled
Programmable
20-key type, Black
NT2S-SF125B-E
NT2S-SF126B-E
PLC controlled
NT2S-SF127B-E
Accessories
Type
Description
Order code
NT2S-SF121/125 and NT3S
peripheral port CPM series except CPM2C, 2 m
NT2S-CN212-V1
NT2S-CN215-V1
NT2S-SF122/SF123/SF126/SF127
NT2S-CN222-V1
NT2S-SF122/SF123/SF126/SF127
NT2S-CN225-V2
mini-peripheral port CJ1/CS1 and CPM2C series, 2 m
NT2S-CN223-V2
NT2S-SF122/SF123/SF126/SF127
mini-peripheral port CJ1/CS1 and CPM2C series, 2 m
NT2S-CN224-V1
serial port CJ1/CS1/CP1/CPM2/CQM1(H), 2 m
NT2S-CN232-V1
NT2S-CN235-V1
NT2S-SF122/SF126
NT2S-CN242-V1
All NT2S and NT3S models
serial programming cable, 2 m
NT2S-CN002
Software
Type
Order code
This software is provided free of charge and features Windows fonts, a Multi language import/export utility, a character map to design your own characters NTXS
and can be used to place bitmaps in your application.
Specifications
Size in mm (HWD)
6010943 (6 F-keys), 10710743 (20 F-keys)
Effective display area
5611 mm
Line voltage
24 VDC 10%
Touch panel
Obtained standards
CE, cULus
No. of display characters (standard characters) 16 characters x 2 lines

No. of registered screens
65,000 max.
Screen data capacity (standard)
24 KB in Programmable models
Expansion memory
Internal memory
1K words data, 1K words retentative memory
Printer connection
Supported
Multi-Vendor support
Supported for several non-Omron PLCs. *1
Backlight life
LED, min. 50,000 hours
*1
Please contact Omron for a list of available drivers.
71
HMI
HMI with two text lines, 6 or 20 F-keys

and up to two serial ports
I/O cables
I/O cables
Shape
PLC connection
FCN24
FCN40
FCN56
Terminal connection
Straight
XW2Z-[....]AD-L
n. a.
XW2Z-[....]AL-L
Straight
XW2Z-[....]BH-L01
Reverse
XW2Z-[....]BH-L02
75
100 150 200 250 300 400 500
MIL20
Open ends
MIL20 2
MIL40
Straight
XW2Z-[....]BF-L
Open ends
n. a.
XW2Z-[....]BN-L
MIL20 3
Straight
XW2Z-[....]CJ-L01
Reverse
XW2Z-[....]CJ-L02
Straight
XW2Z-[....]CK-L01
Reverse
XW2Z-[....]CK-L02
MIL20
Open ends
Fork terminals
MIL34
MIL34
MIL40
MIL20 2
Note: For [.] fill in the 4-digit length in cm
Order code
50
MIL60
MIL20
Wiring
30
MIL20 + MIL40
72
Length in cm
Straight
XW2Z-[....]CG-L
Straight
XW2Z-[....]DD-L
n. a.
XW2Z-[....]DL-L
n. a.
XW2Z-[....]DM-L
Straight
XW2Z-[....]EE-L
Reverse
XW2Z-[....]FH-L01
Straight
XW2Z-[....]FH-L02
MIL40
Straight
XW2Z-[....]FF-L
Open ends
n. a.
XW2Z-[....]FN-L
I/O cables
I/O cables XW2Z

XW2Z-_AD-L
Terminal connection
Wiring
Length in cm (L)
30
24-pin FCN Connector
20-pin MIL Connector
Straight
A SIDE
(40)
A1
B1
B12
75
100 150 200 250 300 400 500
XW2Z-0050AD-L
XW2Z-0100AD-L
XW2Z-0200AD-L
XW2Z-0300AD-L
20
19
(100)
(40)
B SIDE
(20)
(20)
A12
Order code
50
PLC connection
(45)
(45)
L
XW2Z-_AL-L
PLC connection
Terminal connection
24-pin FCN
Wiring
Loose Wires
Length in cm (L)
Straight
Order code
30
50
75
100 150 200 250 300 400 500
XW2Z-0100AL-L
XW2Z-0200AL-L
XW2Z-0300AL-L
A SIDE
B1
(40)
A1
B12
(100)
(20)
(200)
A12
(45)
L
XW2Z-_BH-L01
PLC connection
40-pin FCN
Terminal connection
Two 20-pin MIL
Wiring
Length in cm (L1)
Straight
Length in cm (L2)
Order code
100 150 200 300 400 500 75
125 175 275 375 475
XW2Z-0100BH-L01
XW2Z-0150BH-L01
XW2Z-0200BH-L01
XW2Z-0300BH-L01
XW2Z-0400BH-L01
XW2Z-0500BH-L01
20
19
CN3
(250)
(15)
CN1
(40)
A1
(100)
CN3
B1
(YELLOW)
(20)
(15)
1 20
CN2
19
CN2
B20
A20
(45)
(BLACK)
L2
L1
(500)
73
I/O cables
XW2Z-_BH-L02
PLC connection
40-pin FCN
Terminal connection
Wiring
Two 20-pin MIL
Length in cm (L1)
Reverse
Length in cm (L2)
Order code
100 150 200 300 400 500 75
125 175 275 375 475
XW2Z-0100BH-L02
XW2Z-0150BH-L02
XW2Z-0200BH-L02
XW2Z-0300BH-L02
XW2Z-0400BH-L02
XW2Z-0500BH-L02
20
19
CN2
(250)
(15)
CN1
(40)
A1
(100)
CN2
B1
(BLACK)
(20)
(15)
CN3
19
1 20
CN3
B20
A20
(45)
(YELLOW)
(500)
L2
L1
XW2Z-_BF-L
PLC connection
Terminal connection
Wiring
Length in cm (L)
30
40-pin FCN
40-pin MIL
Straight
A SIDE
B1
B20
(40)
A1
50
Order code
100 150 200 250 300 400 500
XW2Z-0050BF-L
XW2Z-0100BF-L
XW2Z-0150BF-L
XW2Z-0200BF-L
XW2Z-0300BF-L
XW2Z-0500BF-L
(100)
(40)
40
39
B SIDE
(20)
(20)
A20
75
(45)
(45)
L
XW2Z-_BN-L
PLC connection
40-pin FCN
Terminal connection
Wiring
Loose Wires
Length in cm (L)
Straight
Order code
30
50
75
100 150 200 250 300 400 500
XW2Z-0100BN-L
XW2Z-0200BN-L
XW2Z-0300BN-L
XW2Z-0500BN-L
A SIDE
B1
B20
(40)
A1
A20
(100)
(20)
(200)
(45)
L
74
I/O cables
XW2Z-_CJ-L01
Terminal connection
Wiring
Length in cm (L1)
Length in cm (L2)
100 150 200 300 400 500 75

56-pin FCN
Three 20-pin MIL
Straight
Order code
125 175 275 375 475
XW2Z-0150CJ-L01
XW2Z-0200CJ-L01
XW2Z-0300CJ-L01
(500)
CN4
(GRAY)
CN1
B1
(40)
A1
(100)
CN4
19
20
(15)
(250)
(20)
PLC connection
19
20
(15)
CN3
CN3
(YELLOW)
B28
A28
(15)
(45)
CN2
19
1 20
CN2
(BLACK)
2
(500)
L2
L1
XW2Z-_CJ-L02
PLC connection Terminal
connection
56-pin FCN
Wiring
Length in cm (L1)
Length in cm (L2)
100 150 200 300 400 500 75
Three 20-pin MIL Reverse
Length in cm (L3)
Order code
125 175 275 375 475 50
100 150 250 300
XW2Z-0150CJ-L02
XW2Z-0200CJ-L02
XW2Z-0300CJ-L02
L1
(750)
20
(15)
CN4
(GRAY)
CN1
B1
(40)
A1
(100)
(500)
(20)
20
(15)
A28
(15)
(45)
19
CN3
CN3
(YELLOW)
B28
CN4
19
20
2
19
CN2
CN2
(BLACK)
(250)
L3
L2
75
I/O cables
XW2Z-_CK-L0_
PLC connection
Terminal connection
Wiring
Length in cm (L1)
Length in cm (L2)
100 150 200 300 400 500 75

56-pin
40-pin MIL
Order code
125 175 275 375 475
Straight
XW2Z-0150CK-L01
Reverse
XW2Z-0150CK-L02
Straight
XW2Z-0200CK-L01
Reverse
XW2Z-0200CK-L02
(250)
(15)
20
19
(YELLOW)
CN3
CN3
CN1
B1
(100)
(20)
1
40
(15)
CN2
39
CN2
B28
(40)
A1
A28
(45)
(BLACK)
(500)
L2
L1
XW2Z-_CG-L
PLC connection
56-pin FCN
Terminal connection
Wiring
60-pin MIL
Length in cm (L)
Straight
A SIDE
(40)
A1
B1
B28
50
75
XW2Z-0100CG-L
XW2Z-0200CG-L
XW2Z-0300CG-L
100 150 200 250 300 400 500
60
59
(40)
(100)
B SIDE
(20)
(20)
A28
Order code
30
(45)
(45)
L
XW2Z-_DD-L
PLC connection
Terminal connection
Wiring
Length in cm (L)
30
20-pin MIL
20-pin MIL
Straight
(40)
A SIDE
1
19
75
Order code
100 150 200 250 300 400 500
XW2Z-0050DD-L
XW2Z-0100DD-L
XW2Z-0200DD-L
(40)
(100)
(20)
(20)
20 (45)
(45)
L
76
50
B SIDE
20
19
I/O cables
XW2Z-_DL-L
Terminal connection
Wiring
Length in cm (L1)
30
20-pin MIL
Loose Wires
Straight
A SIDE
19
(40)
Order code
50
75
100 150 200 250 300 400 500
XW2Z-0050DL-L
XW2Z-0100DL-L
XW2Z-0150DL-L
XW2Z-0200DL-L
XW2Z-0300DL-L
XW2Z-0500DL-L
PLC connection
(100)
(20)
(200)
20 (45)
L
XW2Z-_DM-L
PLC connection
Terminal connection
Wiring
Length in cm (L1)
30
20-pin MIL
Loose Wires with Fork Terminals
Straight
Order code
50
75
100 150 200 250 300 400 500
XW2Z-0050DM-L
XW2Z-0100DM-L
XW2Z-0150DM-L
XW2Z-0200DM-L
XW2Z-0300DM-L
XW2Z-0500DM-L
A SIDE
B SIDE
1
(40)
(40)
(100)
19
(20)
(20)
20 (45)
20
(300)
L
XW2Z-0200EE-L
PLC connection
34-pin MIL
Terminal connection
Wiring
34-pin MIL
Length in cm (L1)
Straight
(40)
A SIDE
1
33
Order code
30
50
75
100 150 200 250 300 400 500
(40)
(100)
(20)
(20)
34 (45)
(45)
34
33
XW2Z-0200EE-L
B SIDE
77
I/O cables
XW2Z-_FH-L01
PLC connection
40-pin MIL
Terminal connection
Two 20-pin MIL
Wiring
Length in cm (L1)
Reverse
Length in cm (L2)
75
100 200 300 400 500 50
Order code
75
175 275 375 475
XW2Z-0075FH-L01
XW2Z-0100FH-L01
XW2Z-0200FH-L01
XW2Z-0300FH-L01
XW2Z-0500FH-L01
20
19
(250)
(15)
(40)
(20)
(YELLOW)
(100)
CN3
CN3
CN1
2
(15)
1 20
19
CN2
CN2
39
40
(45)
(BLACK)
(500)
L2
L1
XW2Z-_FH-L02
PLC connection
Terminal connection
Wiring
Length in cm (L1)
75
40-pin MIL
Two 20-pin MIL
Straight
Length in cm (L2)
100 200 300 400 500 50
75
Order code
175 275 375 475
XW2Z-0075FH-L02
XW2Z-0100FH-L02
XW2Z-0200FH-L02
XW2Z-0300FH-L02
XW2Z-0500FH-L02
20
19
CN2
(250)
(40)
(20)
(BLACK)
(100)
CN2
(15)
CN1
2
(15)
1 20
19
CN3
CN3
39
40
(45)
(YELLOW)
(500)
L2
L1
78
I/O cables
XW2Z-_FF-L
Terminal connection
Wiring
Length in cm (L1)
30
40-pin MIL
40-pin MIL
Straight
A SIDE
39
(40)
50
Order code
75
100 150 200 250 300 400 500
XW2Z-0030FF-L
XW2Z-0050FF-L
XW2Z-0100FF-L
XW2Z-0150FF-L
XW2Z-0200FF-L
XW2Z-0300FF-L
XW2Z-0500FF-L
(40)
(100)
40 (45)
B SIDE
39
40
(20)
(20)
(45)
PLC connection
XW2Z-_FN-L
PLC connection
40-pin MIL
Terminal connection
Wiring
Loose Wires
Length in cm (L1)
Straight
Order code
30
50
75
100 150 200 250 300 400 500
XW2Z-0100FN-L
XW2Z-0150FN-L
XW2Z-0200FN-L
XW2Z-0250FN-L
XW2Z-0300FN-L
XW2Z-0500FN-L
A SIDE
1
39
(40)
(100)
(20)
(200)
40 (45)
L
79
I/O terminal blocks
I/O terminal blocks

General purpose I/O terminals
Shape
Connection type
Number of points
Order code
Push-in
20 pt
XW2R-P20G-T
34 pt
XW2R-P34G-T
40 pt
XW2R-P40G-T
50 pt
XW2R-P50G-T
60 pt
XW2R-P60G-T
20 pt
XW2R-E20G-T
34 pt
XW2R-E34G-T
40 pt
XW2R-E40G-T
50 pt
XW2R-E50G-T
60 pt
XW2R-E60G-T
20 pt
XW2R-J20G-T
34 pt
XW2R-J34G-T
40 pt
XW2R-J40G-T
50 pt
XW2R-J50G-T
60 pt
XW2R-J60G-T
Connection type
I/O unit type
Order code
Push-in
32 inputs Fujitsu (FCN)
XW2R-P34G-C1
32 inputs MIL
XW2R-P34G-C2
32 outputs Fujitsu (FCN)
XW2R-P34G-C3
32 outputs MIL
XW2R-P34G-C4
XW2R-E34G-C1
32 inputs MIL
XW2R-E34G-C2
XW2R-E34G-C3
32 outputs MIL
XW2R-E34G-C4
XW2R-J34G-C1
32 inputs MIL
XW2R-J34G-C2
XW2R-J34G-C3
32 outputs MIL
XW2R-J34G-C4
Clamp
Screw
Omron PLC I/O terminals

Shape
Clamp
Screw
80
Ethernet cables
Ethernet patch cables, standard RJ45 connectors

Connector 1 Connector 2 Material Cable
Color
Length in cm
Order code
20
30
50
100 150 200 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000
RJ45 std.
RJ45 std.
LSZH
Cat6a S/FTP Blue

4 pairs
XS6W-6LSZH8SS[...]CM-B
RJ45 std.
RJ45 std.
LSZH
Cat6a S/FTP Yellow

4 pairs
XS6W-6LSZH8SS[...]CM-Y
RJ45 std.
RJ45 std.
LSZH
Cat6a S/FTP Green

4 pairs
XS6W-6LSZH8SS[...]CM-G
RJ45 std.
RJ45 std.
PUR
Cat5e S/FTP Green

4 pairs
XS6W-5PUR8SS[...]CM-G
Note: For [] fill in the length in cm.
Ethernet patch cables, RJ45/M12 connectors

Shape
Connector 1 Connector 2 Material Cable
Color
Length in cm
Order code
30
50
100 200 300 500 1000 1500
PVC
Cat5e Shielded Quad
Light Blue
XS5W-T421-[.]MD-K
M12 straight M12 straight PVC
Cat5e Shielded Quad
Light Blue
XS5W-T421-[.]M2-K
M12 straight RJ45
PVC
Cat5e Shielded Quad
Light Blue
XS5W-T421-[.]MC-K
M12 angled M12 angled PVC
Cat5e Shielded Quad
Light Blue
XS5W-T422-[.]M2-K
M12 angled RJ45
Cat5e Shielded Quad
Light Blue
XS5W-T422-[.]MC-K
RJ45
RJ45
PVC
Note: For [.] fill in the 1-character length code.
Specifications
Item
XS6W-6LSZH8SS_CM-_
Rated current
1 A (at 50C)
XS6W-5PUR8SS_CM-G
Withstand voltage
1,000 VDC for 60 s (leakage current: 1 mA max.)
20 to 60C
40 to 85C
20 to 60C
40 to 85C
Ambient installation temperature
0 to 50C
10 to 60C
Protective structure
IP20
IP20
81
Shape
Accessories
Accessories
Type
Connector
Specification
Color
Length
Order code
Ethernet installation cable
none
CAT 5, SF/UTP, 4 2 AWG 24/1

(solid core), Polyurethane (PUR)
Green
100 m
WM IE-5IC4x2xAWG24/1-PUR
Ethernet installation cable
none
CAT 5, SF/UTP, 4 2 AWG 26/7

(stranded core), Polyurethane (PUR)
100 m
WM IE-5CC4x2xAWG26/7-PUR
Ethernet socket
RJ45 socket
DIN-rail mount socket to terminate

installation cable in the cabinet
Grey
60 17.5 67 mm
WM IE-TO-RJ45-FJ-B
Ethernet field-mount plugs
Metal RJ45
for AWG22 to AWG26
Chrome
52 mm
WM IE-PS-RJ45-FH-BK
Ethernet field-mount plugs
Plastic RJ45
for AWG22 to AWG24
Black
52 mm
XS6G-T421-1
Industrial switching hubs

Shape
Functions
Ports
Failure detection
Power supply voltage
Order code
Quality of Service (QoS):

EtherNet/IP control data priority
Failure detection:
Broadcast storm and LSI error detection
10/100BASE-TX, Auto-negotiation
24.0 VDC5%
W4S1-03B
W4S1-05B
W4S1-05C
EtherCAT junction slave

Shape
Functions
Ports
Order code
Creation of star- and tree topologies

in EtherCAT networks.
Distributed Clock (DC) is supported.
20.4 to 28.8 VDC

(24 VDC 15% to 20%)
GX-JC03
82
GX-JC06
WE70
Wireless communication
WE70 utilises spread-spectrum modulation technology based on radio waves to
enable communication between devices in a limited area. This gives users the mobility
to move around within a broad coverage area and still be connected to the network.
The smart roaming function enables high speed roaming therefore moving equipment
and mobile objects can communicate reliably at high speed.
Conforms to IEEE 802.11a/b/g.
Same noise and environment resistance level as a PLC.
Features Omron's original security system.
Signals can be observed with LED indicators.
Conforms to radio wave standards for the USA, Europe, and China.
Area
Type
Order code
Europe
Access Point (Master)
WE70-AP-EU
Client (Slave)
WE70-CL-EU
WE70-AP-US
Client (Slave)
WE70-CL-US
WE70-AP-CN
Client (Slave)
WE70-CL-CN
Type
Specifications
Order code
Directional Magnetic-base Antenna
1 set with two Antennas, 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Dual-band compatible
WE70-AT001H
USA
China
Accessories
Type
Order code
DIN Rail Mounting Bracket (for TH35 7.5)
WT30-FT001
DIN Rail Mounting Bracket (for TH35 15)
WT30-FT002
Antenna Extension Cable (5 m)
WE70-CA5M
83
Industrial Wireless LAN unit
Motion & Drives
S5
NS5
Handheld
38
e 69
N539
Page 70

84
Quick Link
Motion controllers
Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Machine controller
NJ-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control via EtherCAT
Trajexia stand-alone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CJ1W-NC_8_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control via interface
Trajexia 2.5 axes motion controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control via MECHATROLINK-II
Trajexia stand-alone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trajexia-PLC CJ1W-MC472/MCH72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CJ1W-NC_71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control via pulses
CJ1W-NC_3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CJ1W-NC_4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
89
14
90
95
93
90
97
99
100
101
Servo systems
Product overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Servo drives
Accurax G5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
G-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
SmartStep 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Rotary servo motors
Accurax G5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
G-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Frequency inverters
Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Frequency inverters
RX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
MX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
JX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SX (400 V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SX (690 V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150
151
151
85
Motion & Drives
Content
Motion & Drives
Motion controllers
NJ-Series Machine Controller
Which motion architecture do you need?
Machine controller
86
Indexer
functionality
into the drive
Stand-alone
controller
Sequence, Motion, Vision, Safety,

Robotics and Database connection
functionality
2 axes + 1 axis pulse

train output
EtherCAT, MECHATROLINK-II,
analog output and
pulse train output
NJ Series
Trajexia 2.5 axes

motion controller
Trajexia
motion controller
Integration of logic and motion

in one Intel CPU, advanced motion,
up to 64 axes
Advanced motion,
e-cam,
2 axes synchronisation
Advanced motion,
e-cam,
multi-axis
synchronization
H245, H248, H246, H252

Page 14
F422
Page 93
F422
Page 90
Accurax G5
EtherCAT
Accurax G5
A/P
G-Series
A/P
SmartStep2
Accurax G5
ML2
G-Series
ML2
50 W to 15 kW
50 W to 15 kW
50 W to 1.5 kW
50 to 750 W
50 W to 5 kW
50 W to 1.5 kW
Trajexia with EtherCAT

Perfect control of 64 axes
Scalability with EtherCAT masters for 4, 16 and 64 axes
Supports servos, inverters, vision systems and distributed I/O modules
Motion controllers
CJ-Series PLC with EtherCAT

Position control unit CJ1W-NC with EtherCAT
Support for up to 16 axes and 64 inverters, vision
systems and distributed I/O modules
Based in
OMRON PLC
Drive control method?
MECHATROLINK-II
EtherCAT
Pulse train output
NC EtherCAT
Trajexia-PLC
NC MECHATROLINK-II
NCs
Single to multi-axis
PTP applications
with linear and circular
interpolation
Advanced motion,
e-cam,
multi-axis
synchronization
PTP applications
Up to 4-axis
PTP applications
F434
Page 95
F425
Page 97
F426
Page 99
F429, F432
Page 100/101
Accurax G5
EtherCAT
Accurax G5
ML2
G-Series
ML2
Accurax G5
A/P
G-Series
A/P
SmartStep2
50 W to 15 kW
50 W to 5 kW
50 W to 1.5 kW
50 W to 15 kW
50 W to 1.5 kW
50 to 750 W
87
88
Selection table
Motion controllers
Motion controllers
NJ Series machine controller
Trajexia stand-alone
Sequence, Motion, Robotics and

Database connection functionality
The advanced stand-alone

motion controller
NC EtherCAT
Axes control method
EtherCAT
2 axes for position, speed and torque EtherCAT
analog output and pulse-train output control and 1 axis for pulse train
output in open loop
Number of axes
4, 8, 16, 32, 64
4, 16, 64
Applicable servo drive
Accurax G5
Accurax G5 and G-Series
Accurax-G5
Accurax G5
Application
Advance motion including robotics
Advanced motion, e-cam, ELS,

Phase shift, Registration

From simple PTP to multi axis PTP

with linear and circular interpolation
Trajexia 2.5 axes motion controller
16-axis point-to-point
positioning controller
2, 4, 8, 16
Servo control mode
Position, speed and torque
PLC series
NJ Series machine controller
Stand-alone motion controller:

Serial and Ethernet/IP built-in,
PROFIBUS-DP, DeviceNet and
CANopen communication options
Stand-alone motion controller:

Serial and EtherNet/IP built-in,
PROFIBUS-DP, DeviceNet and
CANopen communication options
CJ
Page/Quick Link
14
90
93
95
Trajexia-PLC
NC MECHATROLINK-II
CJ1W-NC_ _ 3
CJ1W-NC_ _ 4
Advanced multi-axes
motion controller in a PLC
16-axis point-to-point
positioning controller
4-axis point-to-point positioning

controller
4-axis point-to-point positioning

controller with synchronization
Axes control method
MECHATROLINK-II
MECHATROLINK-II
Pulse train output
Pulse train output
Number of axes
4, 30
2, 4, 16
1, 2, 4
2, 4
SmartStep 2 and Accurax G5
SmartStep 2 and Accurax G5
Application

From simple PTP to multi axis PTP

coordinated systems
Point to point applications
Point-to-point with complex

interpolations
Servo control mode
Open loop position with linear

interpolation
Open loop position with linear and

circular interpolation
PLC series
CJ
CJ and CS1
CJ an CS1
CJ
Page/Quick Link
97
99
100
101
Motion controllers
Model
89
Motion controllers
Model
Control via EtherCAT/MECHATROLINK-II

Stand-alone advanced motion controller over EtherCAT
Perfect motion control of up to 64 axes. Scalability with EtherCAT masters
for 4, 16 and 64 axes
Supports position, speed and torque control
Multi-tasking controller capable of running up to 22 tasks simultaneously
Advanced motion control such as linear, circular, helical or spherical interpolation,
electronic cams and gearboxes via simple motion commands
Control of servos, inverters, vision systems and distributed I/Os over a single
EtherCAT network
Support for EtherNet/IP communications
Advanced debugging tools including data trace and oscilloscope functions
Open communication: Serial and EtherNet/IP built-in, PROFIBUS-DP, DeviceNet
and CANopen
CJ-series PLC
Personal computer software:

CX-One (CX-Motion Pro)
Trajexia Studio
NS-series
HMI
PROFIBUS-DP
Master
Ethernet
DeviceNet
Master
CANopen
Devices
Digital I/Os
Fieldbus
Host-link
Motion controller
Accurax G5
Servo drive
ADR
ADR
ADR
ADR
GRT1-ML2
SW1
SW2
CN2
CN1
A/B
SmartSlice IOs
Input
Accurax G5
Servo motors
Fast registration
inputs, home and
limits switches ...
MX2 inverter
Trajexia motion controller

Name
Order code
Trajexia motion controller Unit, up to 64 axes. (Trajexia end cover unit TJ1-TER is included)
TJ2-MC64
Trajexia motion controller unit, up to 16 axes. (Trajexia end cover unit TJ1-TER is included)
TJ1-MC16
Trajexia motion controller unit, up to 4 axes. (Trajexia end cover unit TJ1-TER is included)
TJ1-MC04
Power supply for Trajexia system, 100 to 240 VAC
CJ1W-PA202
Power supply for Trajexia system, 24 VDC
CJ1W-PD022
Trajexia axes control modules

Name
Order code
Trajexia EtherCAT master unit (up to 64 servo drives)*1
TJ2-ECT64
Trajexia EtherCAT master unit (up to 16 servo drives)
TJ2-ECT16
Trajexia EtherCAT master unit (up to 4 servo drives)
TJ2-ECT04
Trajexia MECHATROLINK-II master unit (up to 16 stations)*2
TJ1-ML16
Trajexia MECHATROLINK-II master unit (up to 4 stations)*2
TJ1-ML04
Trajexia flexible axis unit (for 2 stations)
TJ1-FL02
*1
*2
90
The number of servo drives is currently limited to 32 when using TJ2-MC64 motion controller with firmware 2.0132.
The TJ1-ML04 and TJ1-ML16 supported by the TJ2-MC64 motion controller are V2 (Version 2) and lot number equal or above Lot. No.091019 (YYMMDD).
Trajexia communication modules

Name
Order code
Trajexia DeviceNet slave unit
TJ1-DRT
Trajexia PROFIBUS-DP slave unit
TJ1-PRT
Trajexia CANopen unit
TJ1-CORT
EtherCAT related devices

Servo system and frequency inverters
Name
Order code
R88D-KN_ _ _-ECT
Accurax G5 servo drive EtherCAT built-in

MX2 inverter with EtherCAT option board
Frequency inverter
3G3MX2-A_
EtherCAT option board
3G3AX-MX2-ECT
Motion controllers
Note: Refer to servo systems and frequency inverter sections for detailed specs and ordering information
SmartSlice IOs system

Function
Specification
Order code
SmartSlice Interface unit
SmartSlice EtherCAT inteface unit
GRT1-ECT
GRT1-END
End plate, one unit required per bus interface

4 NPN inputs
GRT1-ID4
4 PNP inputs
GRT1-ID4-1
8 NPN inputs
24 VDC, 4 mA, 1-wire connection + 4xG
GRT1-ID8
8 PNP inputs
24 VDC, 4 mA, 1-wire connection + 4xV
GRT1-ID8-1
4 AC inputs
GRT1-IA4-1
4 AC inputs
GRT1-IA4-2
4 NPN outputs
GRT1-OD4
4 PNP outputs
GRT1-OD4-1
4 PNP outputs with short-circuit protection
GRT1-OD4G-1
24 VDC, 2 A, 2-wire connection
GRT1-OD4G-3
8 NPN outputs
GRT1-OD8
8 PNP outputs
GRT1-OD8-1
GRT1-OD8G-1
2 relay outputs
240 VAC, 2 A, normally-open contacts
GRT1-ROS2
10 V, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
GRT1-AD2
10 V, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V
GRT1-DA2V
0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
GRT1-DA2C
2 Pt100 inputs
GRT1-TS2P
2 Pt1000 inputs
GRT1-TS2K
Types B, E, J , K, N, R, S, T, U, W, PL2, with cold junction compensation
GRT1-TS2T
Note: Refer to Automation systems catalogue for detailed specs and accesories information
GX-Series I/O Blocks

Name
Order code
16 NPN inputs
24 VDC, 6 mA, 1-wire connection, expandable
GX-ID1611
16 PNP inputs
GX-ID1621
16 NPN outputs
GX-OD1611
16 PNP outputs
GX-OD1621
8 inputs and 8 outputs, NPN
24 VDC, 6 mA input, 500 mA output, 1-wire connection
GX-MD1611
8 inputs and 8 outputs, PNP
GX-MD1621
16 NPN inputs
GX-ID1612
16 PNP inputs
GX-ID1622
16 NPN outputs
GX-OD1612
16 PNP outputs
GX-OD1622
GX-MD1612
GX-MD1622
16 relay outputs
250 VAC, 2 A,1-wire connection, expandable
GX-OC1601
10 V, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA
GX-AD0471
2 analog outputs, current/voltage
10 V, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA
GX-DA0271
2 encoder open collector inputs
500 kHz Open collector input
GX-EC0211
2 encoder line-driver inputs
4 MHz Line driver input
GX-EC0241
Note: The GX-Series I/O blocks are only supported by the T2-MC64 motion controller and with official firmware release above 2.0132.
Vision system
Name
Specification
Order code
Vision system with EtherCAT interface
NPN
FZM1-350-ECT
PNP
FZM1-355-ECT
NPN/Color camera
FQ-MS120-ECT
NPN/Monocrome camera
FQ-MS120-M-ECT
PNP/Color camera
FQ-MS125-ECT
PNP/Monocrome camera
FQ-MS125-M-ECT
Smart camera with EtherCAT interface
Note: The vision systems are only supported by the T2-MC64 motion controller and with official firmware release above 2.0132.
91
MECHATROLINK-II related devices

Servo system and frequency inverters
Name
Order code
Accurax G5 servo drive ML-II built-in
R88D-KN_ _ _ -ML2
G-Series servo drive ML-II built-in
R88D-GN_ _ H-ML2
MX2 inverter with MECHATROLINK-II option board Frequency inverter

ML2 option board
3G3MX2-A_
3G3AX-MX2-MRT
SmartSlice IOs system

Function
Specification
Order code
SmartSlice Interface unit
SmartSlice MECHATROLINK-II inteface unit
GRT1-ML2*1
GRT1-END
End plate, one unit required per bus interface

4 NPN inputs
GRT1-ID4
4 PNP inputs
GRT1-ID4-1
8 NPN inputs
GRT1-ID8
8 PNP inputs
GRT1-ID8-1
4 AC inputs
GRT1-IA4-1
4 AC inputs
GRT1-IA4-2
4 NPN outputs
GRT1-OD4
4 PNP outputs
GRT1-OD4-1
GRT1-OD4G-1
24 VDC, 2 A, 2-wire connection
GRT1-OD4G-3
8 NPN outputs
GRT1-OD8
8 PNP outputs
GRT1-OD8-1
GRT1-OD8G-1
2 relay outputs
240 VAC, 2 A, normally-open contacts
GRT1-ROS2
10 V, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
GRT1-AD2
10 V, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V
GRT1-DA2V
0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
GRT1-DA2C
2 Pt100 inputs
GRT1-TS2P
2 Pt1000 inputs
GRT1-TS2K
Types B, E, J , K, N, R, S, T, U, W, PL2, with cold junction compensation
GRT1-TS2T
*1
The GRT1-ML2 supports the GRT1-IA4-1, GRT1-IA4-2, GRT1-OD4G-3, GRT1-TS2P, GRT1-TS2K and GRT1-TS2T slice units only in combination with TJ2-MC64 motion controller. They are not
supported in combination with TJ1-MC16/04.
Note: Refer to Automation systems catalogue for detailed specs and accesories information
MECHATROLINK-II cables
Name
Remarks
Order code
0.5 meter
JEPMC-W6003-A5
1 meter
JEPMC-W6003-01
3 meters
JEPMC-W6003-03
5 meters
JEPMC-W6003-05
10 meters
JEPMC-W6003-10
20 meters
JEPMC-W6003-20
30 meters
JEPMC-W6003-30
MECHATROLINK-II terminator
Terminating resistor
JEPMC-W6022
MECHATROLINK-II repeater
Network repeater
JEPMC-REP2000
Computer software
Specifications
Order code
CX-Motion Pro V1.3.3 or higher
CX-One
Trajexia Studio*1 V1.3.3 or higher
TJ1-Studio
*1
92
When the Trajexia Studio software is included in CX-One, then it is called CX-Motion Pro.

Stand-alone motion controller for compact and simple
machines
Perfect motion control of 2 axes
Supports position, speed and torque control
Serial port for master encoder axis
Multi-tasking controller capable of running up to 22 tasks simultaneously
2 fast-registration inputs
Single axis moves and axes interpolation
Motion basic programming and dedicated motion commands
Open communication: Serial and EtherNet/IP built-in, PROFIBUS-DP, DeviceNet
and CANopen options
Motion controllers
Motion
controller unit
G5
interface unit
A Power supply unit
Communication units
End cover unit

(included with the CPU)
E Interface cable
E Interface cable
Accurax G5
F analog/pulse
servo drive
93
Trajexia system
Power supply unit
Symbol
Specifications
Order code
Power supply unit for Trajexia system (100 to 240 VAC)
CJ1W-PA202
Power supply unit for Trajexia system (24 VDC)
CJ1W-PD025
Motion controller unit

Symbol
Specifications
Order code
Trajexia motion controller unit, up to 64 axes (Trajexia end cover unit TJ1-TER is included)
TJ2-MC64
Trajexia motion controller unit, up to 2 axes (Trajexia end cover unit TJ1-TER is included)
TJ2-MC02
G5 interface unit
Symbol
Specifications
Order code
G5 interface unit
TJ2-KS02
Communication unit
Symbol
Specifications
Order code
Trajexia DeviceNet slave unit
TJ1-DRT
Trajexia PROFIBUS-DP slave unit
TJ1-PRT
Trajexia CANopen unit
TJ1-CORT
Note: The TJ2-MC02 supports a maximum of one TJ1-CORT unit.

The TJ2-MC02 supports a maximum of one TJ1-PRT or TJ1-DRT unit. No both at the same time.
Accessories
Symbol
Specifications
Interface cable
Order code
1m
TJ2-KC01M
3m
TJ2-KC03M
Servo drive related device

Symbol
Specifications
Order code
Accurax G5 Analog/pulse servo drive (100 W to 15 kW)
R88D-KT_
Computer software
Specifications
Order code
CX-Motion Pro (version 1.4.2 or higher)
CX-One
Trajexia Studio*1 (version 1.4.2 or higher)
TJ1-Studio
*1
94
CJ1W-NC_8_
Position control units with 2, 4, 8 or 16 axes

NC_82 models support up to 64 additional nodes: inverters, vision systems and
distributed I/Os
Linear and circular interpolation
Linear and infinite axes management
Programming languages: ladder and function blocks. Certified PLCopen motion
control function blocks
The unit can perfom various operation sequences in the memory operation data.
CX-Programmer software for unit setup, EtherCAT network configuration and PLC
programming
Personal computer
software: CX-One
CJ Series: Position control unit
NC EtherCAT
ADR
ADR
ADR
ADR
Max. length
100 m
External inputs
I/O
qtm
ovq
RfRlwQ ?@hmudqsdq
Accurax G5
servo drive
qtm
`kl
oqf
rsno
qdrds
Fast registration
inputs, home and
limits switches ...
MX2 inverter
series
Accurax G5 series
servo motor
Position controller unit

Name
Order code
Position controller unit - EtherCAT 16 axes + 64 nodes for remote I/O
CJ1W-NCF82
CJ1W-NC882
CJ1W-NC482
Position controller unit - EtherCAT 16 axes
CJ1W-NCF81
CJ1W-NC881
CJ1W-NC481
CJ1W-NC281
EtherCAT related devices

Servo system and frequency inverter
Name
Order code
R88D-KN_ _ _-ECT
Accurax G5 servo drive EtherCAT built-in

MX2 inverter with EtherCAT option board
Frequency inverter
3G3MX2-A_
EtherCAT option board
3G3AX-MX2-ECT
Note: Refer to servo system and frequency inverter sections for detailed specs and ordering information.
GX-Series I/O Blocks

Name
Order code
16 NPN inputs
GX-ID1611
16 PNP inputs
GX-ID1621
16 NPN outputs
GX-OD1611
16 PNP outputs
GX-OD1621
GX-MD1611
GX-MD1621
95
Motion controllers
Multi-axis point-to-point positioning controller over

EtherCAT
CJ1W-NC_8_
Name
Order code
16 NPN inputs
GX-ID1612
16 PNP inputs
GX-ID1622
16 NPN outputs
GX-OD1612
16 PNP outputs
GX-OD1622
GX-MD1612
GX-MD1622
16 relay outputs
250 VAC, 2 A,1-wire connection, expandable
GX-OC1601
10 V, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA
GX-AD0471
2 analog outputs, current/voltage
10 V, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA
GX-DA0271
2 encoder open collector inputs
500 kHz Open collector input
GX-EC0211
2 encoder line-driver inputs
4 MHz Line driver input
GX-EC0241
Note: Refer to Automation systems catalogue for detailed specs and ordering information.
Vision system
Name
Specification
Order code
Vision system with EtherCAT interface
NPN
FZM1-350-ECT
PNP
FZM1-355-ECT
Note: Refer to vision system documentation for detailed specs and ordering information.
Computer software
Specifications
Order code
CX-One version 4 or higher
CX-One
CX-Programmer version 9.12 or higher
CX-Programmer
96
Trajexia-PLC CJ1W-MC472/MCH72

Trajexia, the family of advanced motion controllers that put you in control, now has a
compact and integrated version. Meet Trajexia-PLC, the motion controller that has all
the flexibility and modularity of Omron PLCs, plus the outstanding motion-control
features of the Trajexia platform.
Control of up to 30 physical axes
Control of servos and inverters over a single motion network
Advanced motion control such as CAM control, registration control, interpolation
and axes synchronization via simple motion commands
Serial port for external encoder
Embedded digital I/Os
I/O data exchange with the PLC CPU
NS-series
HMI
Personal computer software:

CX-One (CX-Motion Pro)
Trajexia Studio
Ethernet/serial
CJ1-series
Digital I/Os
Encoder input/output
Motion control unit
CJ1W-MC472 - 4 axes CJ1W-MCH72 - 30 axes MECHATROLINK-II
G- Series
Servo drive
Accurax G5 series
Servo drive
AC SE R VO DRIVER
7 8
9 01
2 3
2 3
5 6
X10
ADR
01
X1
COM
SP
IM
G
Terminator
Input
Fast registration
inputs, home and
limits switches ...
Accurax G5 series
Servo motors
G-Series
Servo motors
Motion controller
Name
Order code
Trajexia motion control unit, up to 30 MECHATROLINK-II axes
CJ1W-MCH72
Trajexia motion control unit, up to 4 MECHATROLINK-II axes
CJ1W-MC472

Servo system
Name
Order code
R88D-KN__ _-ML2
R88D-GN_ _H-ML2

MX2 inverter with MECHATROLINK-II option board
Frequency inverter
3G3MX2-A_
MECHATROLINK-II option board
3G3AX-MX2-MRT
97
Motion controllers
Trajexia motion controller integrated with your PLC
Trajexia-PLC CJ1W-MC472/MCH72
Name
Remarks
Order code
0.5 meter
JEPMC-W6003-A5
1 meter
JEPMC-W6003-01
3 meters
JEPMC-W6003-03
5 meters
JEPMC-W6003-05
10 meters
JEPMC-W6003-10
20 meters
JEPMC-W6003-20
30 meters
JEPMC-W6003-30
MECHATROLINK-II terminator
Terminating resistor
JEPMC-W6022
MECHATROLINK-II repeater
Network repeater
JEPMC-REP2000
Computer software
Specifications
Order code
CX-Motion Pro V1.3.3 or higher
CX-One
Trajexia Studio*1 V1.3.3 or higher
TJ1-Studio
*1
98
CJ1W-NC_71

2, 4 and 16-axis point-to-point positioning controller
over MECHATROLINK-II
Motion controllers
NC_71 is a powerful controller for point-to-point applications. It is based on

MECHATROLINK-II motion bus, which reduces programming and development and
maintenance costs. Supports PLC open function blocks.
Supports position, speed and torque control.
Programming languages: ladder, function blocks. Supports PLC Open Function
Blocks.
Smart active parts for Omron HMIs terminals reduce engineering time.
Access to the complete system from one point. Network setup, servo drives
configuring and monitoring, and PLC programming.
Personal computer
software: CX-One
CJ series
CJ1W-NC_71
2..16 axes max.
Accurax G5 series
Servo drive
G- Series
Servo drive
AC SE R VO DRIVER
9 01
7 8
2 3
5 6
X10
ADR
01
2 3
MECHATROLINK-II
X1
COM
SP
IM
G
Terminator
Input
Fast registration
inputs, home and
limits switches ...
Accurax G5 series
Servo motors
G-Series
Servo motors
Position controller unit
Computer software
Name
Order code
Specifications
Order code
MECHATROLINK-II position controller unit 16 axes
CJ1W-NCF71
CX-One
CJ1W-NC471
CJ1W-NC271
CX-One version 2.0 (CX-Motion NCF 1.70 or higher)

CX-One version 3.0 (CX-Motion NCF 1.90 or higher)
CX-One version 4.0 or higher

Servo system
Name
Order code
R88D-KN_ _ _-ML2
R88D-GN_ _ H-ML2
Note: Refer to servo systems section for detailed specs and ordering information
Name
Remarks
Order code
MECHATROLINK-II terminator Terminating resistor
JEPMC-W6022
0.5 meter
JEPMC-W6003-A5
1 meter
JEPMC-W6003-01
3 meters
JEPMC-W6003-03
5 meters
JEPMC-W6003-05
10 meters
JEPMC-W6003-10
20 meters
JEPMC-W6003-20
30 meters
JEPMC-W6003-30
99
CJ1W-NC_3
Control via pulses

1, 2 or 4-axis point-to-point positioning controller with
pulse train output
The NC motion controllers support positioning control via pulse-train outputs. Positioning is performed using trapezoidal or S-curve acceleration and deceleration. Ideal
for controlling simple positioning in stepper motors and servos with pulse-train input.
Positioning can be done by direct ladder commands
Position and speed control
Linear interpolation
Interrupt feeding function
Positioning of 100 points done from memory
Positioning data is saved in internal flash memory, eliminating the need to
maintain a backup battery.
Personal computer
software: CX-One
CJ1 series
CJ1W-NC__3
SmartStep 2
Servo drive
Input
Emergency stop input,

home and limit switches
I/O signals
(CN1 connector)
Servo
relay unit
Accurax G5
Servo drive
I/O signals
(CN1 connector)
Po s
unit
Accurax G5
Servo motors
G-Series
Servo motors
Servo drive cables
Name
Order code
Note: Refer the selected servo systems section for cable and servo relay units information.
1 axis position control unit. Open-collector output.
CJ1W-NC113
Computer software
2 axes position control unit. Open-collector output.
CJ1W-NC213
CJ1W-NC413
1 axis position control unit. Line-driver output.
CJ1W-NC133
2 axes position control unit. Line-driver output.
CJ1W-NC233
CJ1W-NC433
100
Specifications
Order code
CX-One
CX-One
CJ1W-NC_4
Control via pulses
The NC motion controllers support positioning control via pulse-train outputs. Positioning is performed using trapezoidal or S-curve acceleration and deceleration.
Ideal for controlling simple positioning in stepper motors and servos with pulse-train
input. When the CJ1W-NC__4 unit is used in a CJ2 CPU, it can perform also synchronous operation by use of electronic CAMs and other function blocks.
Position and speed control
Linear interpolation and feeder control function
Electronic CAM profiles and axes synchronization
Positioning of 500 points done from memory
Programming languages: ladder, function blocks.
Personal computer
software: CX-One
CJ1 series
CJ1W-NC__4
Axes 1
Axes 2
External signals for Axis 1

and Axis 2
SmartStep 2
Servo drive
I/O signals
(CN1 connector)
Servo
relay unit
Accurax G5
Servo drive
I/O signals
(CN1 connector)
Po s
unit
Emergency stop input,

home and limit switches
Accurax G5
Servo motors
G-Series
Servo motors
Servo drive cables
Name
Order code
Note: Refer to selected servo systems section for cable and servo relay units information.
CJ1W-NC214
Computer software
CJ1W-NC414
CJ1W-NC234
CJ1W-NC434
Specifications
Order code
CX-One
CX-One
101
Motion controllers
2 or 4-axis point-to-point positioning controller with

pulse train output and motion control unit functionality
Servo systems
STREAM AUTOMATION
EXTREME MECHATRONICS MEETS

At the heart of every great machine
Great machines are born from a perfect match between control and mechanics. Accurax G5 gives you the extra edge to build
more accurate, faster, smaller and safer machines. You will benefit from an almost 25% reduction in motor weight, and gain
50% cabinet space. You will achieve sub micron precision and ms settling time. Some might call it perfection, we just call it
tireless innovation to help you build great machines.
EtherCAT, ML-II and analog/pulse models
High response frequency of 2 kHz
Safety built-in conforming ISO13849-1 PL-d
High accuracy provided by 20 bit encoder
Machine controller
Which motion architecture do you need?
Indexer
functionality
into the drive
Stand-alone
controller
Sequence, Motion, Vision, Safety,

Robotics and Database connection
functionality
2 axes + 1 axis pulse

train output
analog output and
pulse train output
NJ Series
Trajexia 2.5 axes

motion controller
Trajexia
motion controller
Integration of logic and motion

in one Intel CPU, advanced motion,
up to 64 axes
Advanced motion,
e-cam,
2 axes synchronisation
Advanced motion,
e-cam,
multi-axis
synchronization
102
Accurax G5
EtherCAT
Accurax G5
A/P
G-Series
A/P
SmartStep2
Accurax G5
ML2
G-Series
ML2
50 W to 15 kW
50 W to 15 kW
50 W to 1.5 kW
50 to 750 W
50 W to 5 kW
50 W to 1.5 kW
F354, F356
Page 106, 125
F354, F356
Page 106, 125
F352, F355
Page 114, 141
F353, F355
Page 120, 141
F354, F356
Page 106, 125
F352, F355
Page 114, 141
Servo systems
Based in
OMRON PLC
Drive control method?
MECHATROLINK-II
EtherCAT
Pulse train output
NC EtherCAT
Trajexia-PLC
NC MECHATROLINK-II
NCs
PTP applications
with linear and circular
interpolation
Advanced motion,
e-cam,
multi-axis
synchronization
PTP applications
Up to 4-axis
PTP applications
Accurax G5
EtherCAT
Accurax G5
ML2
G-Series
ML2
Accurax G5
A/P
G-Series
A/P
SmartStep2
50 W to 15 kW
50 W to 5 kW
50 W to 1.5 kW
50 W to 15 kW
50 W to 1.5 kW
50 to 750 W
F354, F356
Page 106, 125
F354, F356
Page 106, 125
F352, F355
Page 114, 141
F354, F356
Page 106, 125
F352, F355
Page 114, 141
F353, F355
Page 120, 141
103
Selection table
Servo drives
Accurax G5
G-Series
SmartStep 2
EtherCAT network and safety built-in Compact size and ML2 motion bus
Pulse train input

with ultra-compact size
Ratings 230 V single-phase
100 W to 1.5 kW
100 W to 1.5 kW
100 W to 750 W
Ratings 400 V three-phase
600 W to 15 kW
N/A
N/A
Applicable servomotor
Accurax G5 and G-Series rotary

motors
G-Series
G-Series
Position control
EtherCAT, MECHATROLINK-II or
Pulse train input
MECHATROLINK-II
or Pulse train input
Pulse train input
Speed control
Analog input 10 V
MECHATROLINK-II
or Analog input 10 V
N/A
Torque control
Analog input 10 V
MECHATROLINK-II
or Analog input 10 V
Torque limits only
Embedded indexer functionality
N/A
N/A
Safety approvals
ISO13849-1:2008 (PL d),

EN 954-1:1996 (Cat-3)
N/A
N/A
Full closed loop
Built-in
N/A
N/A
Page/Quick Link
106
114
120
Accurax G5 servo motors
Standard models
3,000 r/min motor
2,000 r/min motor
1,500 r/min motor
Rated speed
3,000 rpm
2,000 rpm
1,500 rpm
1,000 r/min motor

1,000 rpm
Maximum speed
4,500 to 6,000 rpm
3,000 rpm
2,000 to 3,000 rpm
2,000 rpm
Rated torque
0.16 Nm to 15.9 Nm
1.91 Nm to 23.9 Nm
47.8 Nm to 95.5 Nm
8.59 Nm to 28.7 Nm
Sizes
50 W to 5 kW
400 W to 5 kW
7.5 kW to 15 kW
900 W to 6 kW
Accurax G5 servo drive
Encoder resolution
20-bit incremental/
17-bit absolute
20-bit incremental/
17-bit absolute
17-bit absolute
20-bit incremental/
17-bit absolute
IP rating
IP67
IP67
IP67
IP67
Page/Quick Link
125
G-Series servo motors

Cylindrical type
G-Series servo motors

Flat type
3,000 r/min motor
2,000 r/min motor
1,000 r/min motor
3,000 r/min motor
Rated speed
3,000 rpm
2,000 rpm
1,000 rpm
3,000 rpm
Maximum speed
4,500 to 5,000 rpm
3,000 rpm
2,000 rpm
5,000 rpm
Rated torque
0.16 Nm to 4.77 Nm
4.8 Nm to 7.15 Nm
8.62 Nm
0.32 Nm to 1.3 Nm
Sizes
50 to 1,500 W
1 to 1.5 kW
900 W
100 to 400 W
SmartStep 2, G-Series and

Accurax G5 servo drives



Encoder resolution
10,000 pulses/revolution or
17-bit absolute/incremental
IP rating
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
Page/Quick Link
141
104
Servo systems
Servo systems
Accurax G5 servo motors
High inertia models

3,000 r/min motor
2,000 r/min motor
Rated speed
3,000 rpm
2,000 rpm
1,500 r/min motor

1,500 rpm
Maximum speed
5,000 rpm
3,000 rpm
2,000 to 3,000 rpm
Rated torque
0.64 Nm to 2.4 Nm
4.77 Nm to 23.9 Nm
47.8 Nm
Sizes
200 W to 750 W
1 kW to 5 kW
7.5 kW
Encoder resolution
20-bit incremental/
17-bit absolute
20-bit incremental/
17-bit absolute
17-bit absolute
IP rating
IP65
IP67
IP67
Page/Quick Link
125
105
Accurax G5
Servo drives
Accurate motion control in a compact size servo drive
family. EtherCAT and safety built-in
EtherCAT, ML-II and analog/pulse servo drive models

Safety conforming ISO13849-1 PL-d
High-response frequency of 2 kHz
High resolution provided by 20 bits encoder
Drive Programming: embedded indexer functionality in the analog/pulse models
External encoder input for full closed loop
Real time auto-tuning
Advanced tuning algorithms (anti-vibration function, torque feedforward,
disturbance observer)
Accurax G5 series EtherCAT reference configuration
A
Standard servo motor
3000 rpm (50 W - 750 W)
C Accurax G5 series EtherCAT

servo drive
High inertia servo motor

3000 rpm (200 W - 750 W)
ADR
Sysmac Studio
CN5
CN7
A
3000 rpm (1 kW - 5 kW)
2000 rpm (400 W - 5 kW)
1000 rpm (900 W - 3 kW)

2000 rpm (1 kW - 5 kW)
Analog monitor cable
USB cable
CN8
Motor
cables
K Safety cable
D
External
regenerative
resistor
CN1
M
CN2
I/O signals connector

I/O signals cable
CN4
H
G Terminal block
External encoder cable

1500 rpm (7.5 kW - 15 kW)
1000 rpm (4.5 kW - 6 kW)
EtherCAT
controllers
CN6
Filter
for I/O signals
R88D-KN___-ECT

1500 rpm (7.5 kW)
Note: The symbols ABCDE show the recommended sequence to select the components in Accurax G5 servo system
Servo motors, power and encoder cables

Note: AB Refer to the Accurax G5 servo motor chapter for servomotor, motor cables or connectors selection
Servo drives
Symbol
C
Specifications
1 phase 230 VAC
3 phase 400 VAC
100 W
Servo drive models
Standard models
High Inertia models
Order code
R88M-K05030(H/T)-_
R88D-KN01H-ECT
R88M-K10030(H/T)-_
200 W
R88M-K20030(H/T)-_
R88M-KH20030(H/T)-_
R88D-KN02H-ECT
400 W
R88M-K40030(H/T)-_
R88M-KH40030(H/T)-_
R88D-KN04H-ECT
750 W
R88M-K75030(H/T)-_
R88M-KH75030(H/T)-_
R88D-KN08H-ECT
1.0 kW
R88M-K1K020(H/T)-_
R88D-KN10H-ECT
1.5 kW
R88M-K1K030(H/T)-_
R88D-KN15H-ECT
R88M-K1K530(H/T)-_
600 W
1.0 kW
1.5 kW
106
A Compatible G5 series rotary servo motors
R88M-K1K520(H/T)-_
R88M-K90010(H/T)-_
R88M-K40020(F/C)-_
R88M-K60020(F/C)-_
R88M-K75030(F/C)-_
R88M-K1K020(F/C)-_
R88M-KH1K020(F/C)-_
R88M-K1K030(F/C)-_
R88M-K1K530(F/C)-_
R88M-K1K520(F/C)-_
R88M-KH1K520(F/C)-_
R88M-K90010(F/C)-_
R88D-KN06F-ECT
R88D-KN10F-ECT
R88D-KN15F-ECT
Accurax G5
C
Specifications
3 phase 400 VAC
2.0 kW
3.0 kW
5.0 kW
7.5 kW
15 kW
Servo drive models
Standard models
High Inertia models
Order code
R88M-K2K030(F/C)-_
R88D-KN20F-ECT
R88M-K2K020(F/C)-_
R88M-KH2K020(F/C)-_
R88D-KN30F-ECT
R88M-K3K030(F/C)-_
R88M-K3K020(F/C)-_
R88M-KH3K020(F/C)-_
R88M-K2K010(F/C)-_
R88M-K4K030(F/C)-_
R88M-K5K030(F/C)-_
R88M-K4K020(F/C)-_
R88M-KH4K020(F/C)-_
R88M-K5K020(F/C)-_
R88M-KH5K020(F/C)-_
R88M-K4K510C-_
R88M-K3K010(F/C)-_
R88D-KN50F-ECT
R88D-KN75F-ECT
R88M-K6K010C-_
R88M-K7K515C-_
R88M-KH7K515C-_
R88M-K11K015C-_
R88M-K15K015C-_
Servo systems
Symbol
Servo drives
R88D-KN150F-ECT
Signals cables for I/O general purpose (CN1)

Symbol
Description
Connect to
Length
Order code
I/O connector kit (26 pins)
For I/O general purpose
R88A-CNW01C
I/O signals cable
1m
R88A-CPKB001S-E
2m
R88A-CPKB002S-E
1m
XW2Z-100J-B34
2m
XW2Z-200J-B34
Terminal block (M3 screw and for pin terminals)
XW2B-20G4
Terminal block (M3.5 screw and for fork/round terminals)
XW2B-20G5
Terminal block (M3 screw and for fork/round terminals)
XW2D-20G6
Terminal block cable
External encoder cable (CN4)
EtherCAT controllers
Symbol
Name
Length
Order code
Symbol
Name
5m
R88A-CRKM005SR-E
NJ-series
Order code
10 m
R88A-CRKM010SR-E
NJ501-1400 (32 axes)
20 m
R88A-CRKM020SR-E
NJ501-1300 (16 axes)
CPU unit
NJ501-1500 (64 axes)
NJ301-1200 (8 axes)
Analog monitor (CN5)
NJ301-1100 (4 axes)
Symbol
Name
Length
Order code
1m
R88A-CMK001S
Power supply unit
NJ-PD3001 (24 VDC)

USB personal computer cable (CN7)

Symbol
Name
Length
Order code
USB mini-connector cable
2m
AX-CUSBM002-E
NJ-PA3001 (220 VAC)
Motion control unit
TJ2-MC64 (64 axes)
EtherCAT master unit
TJ2-ECT64 (64 axes)

TJ2-ECT16 (16 axes)
TJ2-ECT04 (4 axes)
Cable for safety (CN8)
Position controller unit for CJ1 PLC series
CJ1W-NCF8_ (16 axes)
Symbol
Name
Length
Order code
CJ1W-NC88_ (8 axes)
Safety cable
3m
R88A-CSK003S-E
CJ1W-NC48_ (4 axes)
CJ1W-NC281 (2 axes)
External regenerative resistor

Symbol
Specifications
Order code
50 , 80 W
R88A-RR08050S
100 , 80 W
R88A-RR080100S
47 , 220 W
R88A-RR22047S
20 , 500 W
R88A-RR50020S
Filters
Symbol
Applicable servodrive
Rated current
Leakage current
Rated voltage
Order code
R88D-KN01H-ECT, R88D-KN02H-ECT
2.4 A
3.5 mA
250 VAC single-phase
R88A-FIK102-RE
R88D-KN04H-ECT
4.1 A
3.5 mA
R88A-FIK104-RE
R88D-KN08H-ECT
6.6 A
3.5 mA
R88A-FIK107-RE
R88D-KN10H-ECT, R88D-KN15H-ECT
14.2 A
3.5 mA
R88D-KN06F-ECT, R88D-KN10F-ECT, R88D-KN15F-ECT
4A
0.3 mA/32 mA*1
R88D-KN20F-ECT
6A
0.3 mA/32 mA*1
R88A-FIK306-RE
R88D-KN30F-ECT, R88D-KN50F-ECT
12.1 A
0.3 mA/32 mA*1
R88A-FIK312-RE
R88D-KN75F-ECT
22 A
0.3 mA/40 mA*1
R88A-FIK330-RE
R88D-KN150F-ECT
44 A
2 mA/130 mA*1
R88A-FIK350-RE
*1
R88A-FIK114-RE
400 VAC three-phase
R88A-FIK304-RE
Momentary peak leakage current for the filter at switch-on/off.
107
Accurax G5
Servo drives
Connectors
Computer software
Specifications
Order code
Specifications
Order code
External encoder connector (for CN4)
R88A-CNK41L
Sysmac Studio version 1.0 or higher
SYSMAC-SE2_ _ _
Safety I/O signal connector (for CN8)
R88A-CNK81S
CX-Drive version 2.10 or higher
CX-DRIVE 2.10
CX-One software package including CX-Drive 2.10 or higher CX-ONE

Note: If CX-One is installed on the same computer as Sysmac Studio, it must be CX-One v4.2
or higher.
Accurax G5 series MECHATROLINK-II reference configuration

C Accurax G5 series MECHATROLINK-II
servo drive
CN5
A
3000 rpm (50 W - 750 W)
CN7
CN8
MSafety cable
Filter
Cables
A
3000 rpm (1 kW - 5 kW)
2000 rpm (400 W - 5 kW)
1000 rpm (900 W - 4.5 kW)
External
regenerative
resistor
K MECHATROLINK-II
motion controllers
J MECHATROLINK-II cables
CN6

3000 rpm (200 W - 750 W)
USB cable
CN1
with ML2
I/O signals connector
I/O signals cable
CJ PLC series:
Trajexia in PLC
NC MECHATROLINK-II unit
CN4
CN2

2000 rpm (1 kW - 5 kW)
H
G
Terminal block
for I/O signals
R88D-KN___-ML2

Note: AB Refer to the Accurax G5 servo motor section for servomotor, motor cables or connectors selection
Servo drives
Symbol
C
Specifications
1 phase 230 VAC
3 phase 400 VAC
100 W
Servo drive models
Standard models
High inertia models
Order code
R88M-K05030(H/T)-_
R88D-KN01H-ML2
R88M-K10030(H/T)-_
200 W
R88M-K20030(H/T)-_
R88M-KH20030(H/T)-_
R88D-KN02H-ML2
400 W
R88M-K40030(H/T)-_
R88M-KH40030(H/T)-_
R88D-KN04H-ML2
750 W
R88M-K75030(H/T)-_
R88M-KH75030(H/T)-_
R88D-KN08H-ML2
1.0 kW
R88M-K1K020(H/T)-_
R88D-KN10H-ML2
1.5 kW
R88M-K1K030(H/T)-_
R88D-KN15H-ML2
R88M-K1K530(H/T)-_
600 W
1.0 kW
1.5 kW
2.0 kW
3.0 kW
5.0 kW
108
R88M-K1K520(H/T)-_
R88M-K90010(H/T)-_
R88M-K40020(F/C)-_
R88M-K60020(F/C)-_
R88M-K75030(F/C)-_
R88M-K1K020(F/C)-_
R88M-KH1K020(F/C)-_
R88M-K1K030(F/C)-_
R88M-K1K530(F/C)-_
R88M-K1K520(F/C)-_
R88M-KH1K520(F/C)-_
R88M-K90010(F/C)-_
R88M-K2K030(F/C)-_
R88M-K2K020(F/C)-_
R88M-KH2K020(F/C)-_
R88M-K3K030(F/C)-_
R88M-K3K020(F/C)-_
R88M-KH3K020(F/C)-_
R88M-K2K010(F/C)-_
R88M-K4K030(F/C)-_
R88M-K5K030(F/C)-_
R88M-K4K020(F/C)-_
R88M-KH4K020(F/C)-_
R88M-K5K020(F/C)-_
R88M-KH5K020(F/C)-_
R88M-K4K510C-_
R88M-K3K010(F/C)-_
R88D-KN06F-ML2
R88D-KN10F-ML2
R88D-KN15F-ML2
R88D-KN20F-ML2
R88D-KN30F-ML2
R88D-KN50F-ML2
Accurax G5
Servo drives
Control cables (CN1)

Symbol
Description
Connect to
Length
Order code
I/O connector kit (26 pins)
R88A-CNW01C
I/O signals cable
1m
R88A-CPKB001S-E
2m
R88A-CPKB002S-E
1m
XW2Z-100J-B34
2m
XW2Z-200J-B34
XW2B-20G4
XW2B-20G5
XW2D-20G6
MECHATROLINK-II motion controllers
Symbol
Name
Length
Order code
Symbol
Name
Order code
5m
R88A-CRKM005SR-E
Trajexia stand-alone Motion control unit
TJ2-MC64 (64 axes)
10 m
R88A-CRKM010SR-E
20 m
R88A-CRKM020SR-E
TJ1-MC16 (16 axes)
Servo systems
TJ1-MC04 (4 axes)
TJ1-ML16 (16 axes)
ML2 master unit
TJ1-ML04 (4 axes)
Symbol
Name
Length
Order code
1m
R88A-CMK001S
CJ1W-MCH72 (30 axes)
Trajexia-PLC motion controller
CJ1W-MC472 (4 axes)
CJ1W-NCF71 (16 axes)
Position controller unit for CJ1 PLC
MECHATROLINK-II cables (CN6)

Length
CJ1W-NC471 (4 axes)
Symbol
Specifications
MECHATROLINK-II Terminator resistor -
Order code
JEPMC-W6022-E
0.5 m
JEPMC-W6003-A5-E
1m
JEPMC-W6003-01-E
3m
JEPMC-W6003-03-E
5m
JEPMC-W6003-05-E
10 m
JEPMC-W6003-10-E
Symbol
Name
Length
Order code
20 m
JEPMC-W6003-20-E
2m
AX-CUSBM002-E
30 m
JEPMC-W6003-30-E
CJ1W-NC271 (2 axes)
CS1W-NCF71 (16 axes)
Position controller unit for CS1 PLC
CS1W-NC471 (4 axes)
CS1W-NC271 (2 axes)
Cable for safety functions (CN8)

Symbol
Description
Order code
Safety connector with 3 m cable

(with loose wires at one end)
R88A-CSK003S-E

Symbol
Specifications
Order code
50 , 80 W
R88A-RR08050S
100 , 80 W
R88A-RR080100S
47 , 220 W
R88A-RR22047S
20 , 500 W
R88A-RR50020S
Filters
Symbol
Rated current
Leakage current
Rated voltage
Order code
R88D-KN01H-ML2, R88D-KN02H-ML2
2.4 A
3.5 mA
R88A-FIK102-RE
R88D-KN04H-ML2
4.1 A
3.5 mA
R88A-FIK104-RE
R88D-KN08H-ML2
6.6 A
3.5 mA
R88A-FIK107-RE
R88D-KN10H-ML2, R88D-KN15H-ML2
14.2 A
3.5 mA
R88D-KN06F-ML2, R88D-KN10F-ML2, R88D-KN15F-ML2
4A
0.3 mA /32 mA*1
R88D-KN20F-ML2
6A
0.3 mA /32 mA*1
R88A-FIK306-RE
R88D-KN30F-ML2, R88D-KN50F-ML2
12.1 A
0.3 mA /32 mA*1
R88A-FIK312-RE
*1
R88A-FIK114-RE
400 VAC three-phase
R88A-FIK304-RE
Connectors
Computer software
Specifications
Order code
Specifications
Order code
R88A-CNK41L
CX-DRIVE 1.91
R88A-CNK81S
109
Accurax G5
Servo drives
Accurax G5 series analog/pulse reference configuration
Accurax G5 series
Analog/pulse servo drive

3000 rpm (50 W - 750 W)
CN5

3000 rpm (200 W - 750 W)
CN7
Filter
B Cables
CN8
P USB mini connector cable

R
Personal computer:
Software CX-One
Safety cable
D
Motion control unit

3000 rpm (1 kW - 5 kW)
2000 rpm (400 W - 5 kW)
1000 rpm (900 W - 3 kW)
2000 rpm (1 kW - 5 kW)
External
regenerative
resistor
CN1

-High-speed type-
Terminal block
for external signals

CN4
I
General purpose cable
R88D-KT___
1500 rpm (7.5 kW - 15 kW)
1000 rpm (4.5 kW - 6 kW)
Terminal block for servo drive

I/O general purpose signals
CN4

1500 rpm (7.5 kW)
N External encoder cable

Note: AB Refer to the Accurax G5 servo motor section for servomotor, motor cables or connectors selection
Servo drives
Symbol
Specifications
1 phase 230 VAC
3 phase 400 VAC
100 W
Servo drive models*1
Standard models
High inertia models
Order code
R88M-K05030(H/T)-_
R88D-KT01H
R88M-K10030(H/T)-_
200 W
R88M-K20030(H/T)-_
R88M-KH20030(H/T)-_
R88D-KT02H
400 W
R88M-K40030(H/T)-_
R88M-KH40030(H/T)-_
R88D-KT04H
750 W
R88M-K75030(H/T)-_
R88M-KH75030(H/T)-_
R88D-KT08H
1.0 kW
R88M-K1K020(H/T)-_
R88D-KT10H
1.5 kW
R88M-K1K030(H/T)-_
R88D-KT15H
R88M-K1K530(H/T)-_
R88M-K1K520(H/T)-_
R88M-K90010(H/T)-_
R88M-K40020(F/C)-_
R88M-K60020(F/C)-_
600 W
1.0 kW
1.5 kW
2.0 kW
3.0 kW
5.0 kW
7.5 kW
15 kW
*1
A Compatible Accurax G5 series rotary servo motors
R88M-K75030(F/C)-_
R88M-K1K020(F/C)-_
R88M-KH1K020(F/C)-_
R88M-K1K030(F/C)-_
R88M-K1K530(F/C)-_
R88M-K1K520(F/C)-_
R88M-KH1K520(F/C)-_
R88M-K90010(F/C)-_
R88M-K2K030(F/C)-_
R88M-K2K020(F/C)-_
R88M-KH2K020(F/C)-_
R88M-K3K030(F/C)-_
R88M-K3K020(F/C)-_
R88M-KH3K020(F/C)-_
R88M-K2K010(F/C)-_
R88M-K4K030(F/C)-_
R88M-K5K030(F/C)-_
R88M-K4K020(F/C)-_
R88M-KH4K020(F/C)-_
R88M-K5K020(F/C)-_
R88M-KH5K020(F/C)-_
R88M-K4K510C-_
R88M-K3K010(F/C)-_
R88M-K6K010C-_
R88M-K7K515C-_
R88M-KH7K515C-_
R88M-K11K015C-_
R88M-K15K015C-_
Drive Programming embedded indexer functionality is available in the Accurax G5 analog/pulse models with firmware 1.10 or higher.
110
R88D-KT06F
R88D-KT10F
R88D-KT15F
R88D-KT20F
R88D-KT30F
R88D-KT50F
R88D-KT75F
R88D-KT150F
Accurax G5
Servo drives
Symbol
Description
Connect to
Length
Order code
Control cable
(1 axis)
Motion control units

CS1W-MC221
CS1W-MC421
1m
R88A-CPG001M1
2m
R88A-CPG002M1
3m
R88A-CPG003M1
5m
R88A-CPG005M1
1m
R88A-CPG001M2
2m
R88A-CPG002M2
3m
R88A-CPG003M2
5m
R88A-CPG005M2
Position control units (high-speed type)

CJ1W-NC234
CJ1W-NC434
1m
XW2Z-100J-G9
5m
XW2Z-500J-G9
10 m
XW2Z-10MJ-G9
Control cable
(open-collector output for 1 axis)

CJ1W-NC214
CJ1W-NC414
1m
XW2Z-100J-G13
3m
XW2Z-300J-G13
Control cable
(line-driver output for 2 axes)

CJ1W-NC234
CJ1W-NC434
1m
XW2Z-100J-G1
5m
XW2Z-500J-G1
10 m
XW2Z-10MJ-G1

CJ1W-NC214
CJ1W-NC414
1m
XW2Z-100J-G5
3m
XW2Z-300J-G5
0.5 m
XW2Z-C50X
1m
XW2Z-100X
2m
XW2Z-200X
3m
XW2Z-300X
5m
XW2Z-500X
10 m
XW2Z-010X
Terminal block for external signals (M3 screw, pin terminals)
XW2B-20G4
Terminal block for ext. signals (M3.5 screw, fork/round terminals)
XW2B-20G5
Terminal block for ext. signals (M3 screw, fork/round terminals)
XW2D-20G6
Control cable
(2 axes)
Control cable
(line-driver output for 1 axis)
Control cable
(open-collector output for 2 axes)
F

CS1W-MC221
CS1W-MC421
Terminal block cable for external signals

(for input common, forward/reverse run prohibited inputs, emergency stop input, CJ1W-NC234
origin proximity input and interrupt input)
CJ1W-NC434
CJ1W-NC214
CJ1W-NC414
Cable from servo relay unit to servo drive
Servo relay unit
CS1W-NC1@3, CJ1W-NC1@3, C200HW-NC113,

CS1W-NC2@3/4@3, CJ1W-NC2@3/4@3,
C200HW-NC213/413, CQM1H-PLB21 or CQM1-CPU43
1m
XW2Z-100J-B25
2m
XW2Z-200J-B25
CJ1M-CPU21/22/23
1m
XW2Z-100J-B31
2m
XW2Z-200J-B31
Position control units

CS1W-NC1@3, CJ1W-NC1@3 or C200HW-NC113
XW2B-20J6-1B (1 axis)

CS1W-NC2@3/4@3, CJ1W-NC2@3/4@3 or
C200HW-NC213/413
XW2B-40J6-2B (2 axes)
CQM1H-PLB21 or CQM1-CPU43
CJ1M-CPU21/22/23
XW2B-20J6-8A (1 axis)
XW2B-40J6-9A (2 axes)
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A3
1m
XW2Z-100J-A3
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A6
1m
XW2Z-100J-A6
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A7
1m
XW2Z-100J-A7
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A10
1m
XW2Z-100J-A10
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A11
1m
XW2Z-100J-A11
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A14
1m
XW2Z-100J-A14
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A15
1m
XW2Z-100J-A15
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A18
1m
XW2Z-100J-A18
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A19
1m
XW2Z-100J-A19
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A33
1m
XW2Z-100J-A33
1m
R88A-CPG001S
2m
R88A-CPG002S
1m
XW2Z-100J-B24
2m
XW2Z-200J-B24
XW2B-50G4
XW2B-50G5
XW2D-50G6

connecting cable
CQM1H-PLB21
CS1W-NC113 or C200HW-NC113
CS1W-NC213/413 or C200HW-NC213/413
CS1W-NC133
CS1W-NC233/433
CJ1W-NC113
CJ1W-NC213/413
CJ1W-NC133
CJ1W-NC233/433
CJ1M-CPU21/22/23
K
L
M

For general purpose controllers

Servo systems
Control cables (CN1)
111
Accurax G5
Servo drives
Symbol
Name
Length
Order code
Symbol
Specifications
Order code
5m
R88A-CRKM005SR-E
50 , 80 W
R88A-RR08050S
10 m
R88A-CRKM010SR-E
100 , 80 W
R88A-RR080100S
20m
R88A-CRKM020SR-E
47 , 220 W
R88A-RR22047S
20 , 500 W
R88A-RR50020S

Symbol
Name
Length
Order code
Cable for safety functions (CN8)
1m
R88A-CMK001S
Symbol
Description
Order code
Safety connector with 3 m cable

(with loose wires at one end)
R88A-CSK003S-E

Symbol
Name
Length
Order code
2m
AX-CUSBM002-E
Filters
Symbol
Rated current
Leakage current
Rated voltage
Order code
R88D-KT01H, R88D-KT02H
2.4 A
3.5 mA
R88A-FIK102-RE
R88D-KT04H
4.1 A
3.5 mA
R88A-FIK104-RE
R88D-KT08H
6.6 A
3.5 mA
R88A-FIK107-RE
R88D-KT10H, R88D-KT15H
14.2 A
3.5 mA
R88D-KT06F, R88D-KT10F, R88D-KT15F
4A
0.3 mA/32 mA*1
R88D-KT20F
6A
0.3 mA/32 mA*1
R88A-FIK306-RE
R88D-KT30F, R88D-KT50F
12.1 A
0.3 mA/32 mA*1
R88A-FIK312-RE
R88D-KT75F
22 A
0.3 mA/40 mA*1
R88A-FIK330-RE
R88D-KT150F
44 A
2 mA/130 mA*1
R88A-FIK350-RE
*1
Connectors
Specifications
Model
I/O connector kit 50 pins (for CN1)
R88A-CNU11C
R88A-CNK41L
R88A-CNK81S
Computer software
Specifications
Order code
CX-DRIVE 2.10
112
R88A-FIK114-RE
400 VAC three-phase
R88A-FIK304-RE
Accurax G5
Servo drives
Specifications
Single-phase, 230 V
Servo drive type
R88D-K_
01H_
02H_
04H_
08H_
10H_
15H_
Applicable servo motor
R88M-K_
05030(H/T)-_
20030(H/T)-_
40030(H/T)-_
75030(H/T)-_
1K020(H/T)-_
1K030(H/T)-_
10030(H/T)-_
1K530(H/T)-_
1K520(H/T)-_
90010(H/T)-_
W 100
200
400
750
1,000
1,500
Arms 1.2
1.6
2.6
4.1
5.9
9.4
Max. applicable motor capacity

Input power
Main circuit
Single-phase/3-phase, 200 to 240 VAC + 10% to 15% (50/60 Hz)
Supply
Control circuit
Single-phase, 200 to 240 VAC + 10% to 15% (50/60 Hz)
Control method
IGBT-driven PWM method, sinusoidal drive

Serial encoder (incremental/absolute value)
Usage/storage temperature
0 to 55C/20 to 65C
Usage/storage humidity
90% RH or less (non-condensing)
Altitude
1,000 m or less above sea level
Servo systems
Feedback
Conditions
Basic specifications
Continuous output current
5.88 m/s2 1060 Hz (Continuous operation at resonance point is not allowed)/19.6 m/s2
Vibration/shock resistance (max.)
Configuration
Base mounted
Approx. weight
kg 0.8
1.1
1.6
1.8
Three-phase, 400 V
Servo drive type
R88D-K_
06F_
10F_
15F_
20F_
30F_
50F_
75F_
150F_
R88M-K_
40020(F/C)-_
75030(F/C)-_
1K030(F/C)-_
2K030(F/C)-_
3K030(F/C)-_
4K030(F/C)-_
6K010C-_
11K015C-_
60020(F/C)-_
1K020(F/C)-_
1K530(F/C)-_
2K020(F/C)-_
3K020(F/C)-_
5K030(F/C)-_
7K515C-_
15K015C-_
1K520(F/C)-_
2K010(F/C)-_
4K020(F/C)-_
90010(F/C)-_
5K020(F/C)-_
4K510C-_
3K010(F/C)-_
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.5
15.0
4.7
6.7
9.4
16.5
22.0
33.4
W 0.6
Arms 2.9
Main circuit
3-phase, 380 to 480 VAC + 10% to 15% (50/60Hz)
Supply
Control circuit
24 VDC15%
Control method
IGBT-driven PWM method, sinusoidal drive
Feedback
Conditions

Input power
Serial encoder (incremental/absolute value)
Absolute encoder
0 to 55C/20 to 65C
Altitude
1,000 m or less above sea level
Vibration/shock resistance
5.88 m/s2 1060 Hz (Continuous operation at resonance point is not allowed)/19.6 m/s2
Configuration
Base mounted
Approx. weight
kg 1.9
2.7
4.7
13.5
21.0
Dimensions
Specification
EtherCAT model
ML2 model
Analog/pulse model
D1
D1
D1
100200 W
150
40
132
70
150
40
132
70
150
40
130
70
R88D-KT04H, R88D-KN04H-_
400 W
150
55
132
70
150
55
132
70
150
55
130
70
R88D-KT08H, R88D-KN08H-_
750 W
150
65
172
70
150
65
172
70
150
65
170
70
R88D-KT10/15H, R88D-KN10/15H-_
11.5 kW
150
86
172
70
150
86
172
70
150
85
170
70
R88D-KT06/10/15F, R88D-KN06/10/15F-_ 400 V
600 W1.5 kW 150
92
172
70
150
92
172
70
150
91
170
70
R88D-KT01/02H, R88D-KN01/02H-_
230 V
R88D-KT20F, R88D-KN20F-_
2 kW
198
94
195
70
198
94
195
70
198
94
193.5 70
R88D-KT30/50F, R88D-KN30/50F-_
3-5 kW
250
130
214
70
250
130
214
70
250
130
212
R88D-KT75F, R88D-KN75H-ECT
7.5 kW
250
233
334
70
250
233
334
70
R88D-KT150F,R88D-KN150H-ECT
15 kW
450
261
271
70
450
261
270
70
D1
Drive model
70
113
G-Series
Servo drives
Compact in size, big in features. Save space, save wiring,
save time
The G-series servo drive with built-in MECHATROLINK-II significantly reduces wiring
and set-up time, while saving up to 30% of cabinet space. So you not only save
on space, wiring and installation time, but also significantly reduce the chance of
connection errors.
High response frequency of 1 kHZ
Auto-tuning for easy and quick start-up
Vibration suppression and adaptive resonance suppression filter
Positioning, speed and torque control modes
Fast and accurate positioning
Separated supply for main power and control power
Incremental and absolute encoder available
G-Series MECHATROLINK-II model reference configuration
A G-Series Cylindrical type servo motor
B G-Series MECHATROLINK-II
Personal computer:
Sofware CX-One
Servo drive
AC SERVO DRIVER
2 3
7 8
9 01
2 3
5 6
X10
ADR
01
X1
COM
CN3
SP
3000 rpm (1000 to 1500 W)

2000 rpm (1000 to 1500 W)
1000 rpm (900 W)
3000 rpm (50 to 750W)
IM
G
CN6
L Filter
K MECHATROLINK-II cables
M External
D Power cable
A G-Series Flat type
Position control unit:

CJ1W-NC MECHATROLINK-II
regenerative
resistor
servo motor
Servo drive I/O signals
I/O signals cable
Motion controller unit:
CN1
Trajexia in PLC
C Encoder cable
3000 rpm (100 to 400 W)
MECHATROLINK-II
Motion controllers
Terminal block
for Servo drive I/O signals
Note: The symbols ABCDE ... show the recommended sequence to select the components in a G-Series servo system
Servo motors, power & encoder cables

Note: ACD Refer to the G-Series servo motor section for servomotor, motor cables or connectors selection
Servo drives
Symbol
B
Specifications
1 phase 200 VAC
100 W
A Compatible rotary servo motors
Servo drive model
Cylindrical type
Flat type
Order code
R88M-G05030_
R88M-GP10030_
R88D-GN01H-ML2
R88M-G10030_
200 W
R88M-G20030_
R88M-GP20030_
R88D-GN02H-ML2
400 W
R88M-G40030_
R88M-GP40030_
R88D-GN04H-ML2
750 W
R88M-G75030_
R88D-GN08H-ML2
1.0 kW
R88M-G1K020T_
R88D-GN10H-ML2
1.5 kW
R88M-G90010T_
R88D-GN15H-ML2
R88M-G1K030T_
R88M-G1K520T_
R88M-G1K530T_
Control cables (for CN1)
MECHATROLINK-II Motion controllers
Symbol
Name
Connect to
Length
Order code
Symbol
Name
I/O connector kit
R88A-CNU01C
Trajexia stand-alone motion controller 4
General purpose
cable
Servo drive I/O

signals
1m
R88A-CPGB001S-E
16
TJ1-MC16
2m
R88A-CPGB002S-E
64
TJ2-MC64
CJ1W-MC472
30
CJ1W-MCH72
CJ1W-NC271
XW2B-20G5
CJ1W-NC471
XW2D-20G6
16
CJ1W-NCF71
CS1W-NC271
CS1W-NC471
16
CS1W-NCF71
G
H
Terminal block
cable
1m
XW2Z-100J-B33
2m
XW2Z-200J-B33
Terminal block
XW2B-20G4
Position controller unit for CJ1 PLC
Position controller unit for CS1 PLC
Computer cable (for CN3)

Symbol
Name
Length
Order code
Computer cable RS232
2m
R88A-CCG002P2
114
Trajexia-PLC motion controller,
Axes
Order code
TJ1-MC04
G-Series
Servo drives
MECHATROLINK-II cables (for CN6)

Specifications

Length
Order code
Symbol
Specifications
Order code
MECHATROLINK-II Terminator resistor -
JEPMC-W6022-E
50 , 80 W
R88A-RR08050S
0.5 m
JEPMC-W6003-A5-E
100 , 80 W
R88A-RR080100S
1m
JEPMC-W6003-01-E
47 , 220 W
R88A-RR22047S
3m
JEPMC-W6003-03-E
20 , 500 W
R88A-RR50020S
5m
JEPMC-W6003-05-E
10 m
JEPMC-W6003-10-E
20 m
JEPMC-W6003-20-E
Specifications
30 m
JEPMC-W6003-30-E
Configuration and monitoring software tool for servo drives CX-Drive

and inverters. (CX-Drive version 1.70 or higher)
Filters
Symbol
Applicable
servodrive
Rated
current
Leakage Rated
current voltage
Order code
R88D-GN01H_
R88D-GN02H_
2.4 A
3.5 mA
R88D-GN04H_
4.1 A
3.5 mA
250 VAC R88A-FIK102-RE

singlephase
R88A-FIK104-RE
R88D-GN08H_
6.6 A
3.5 mA
R88A-FIK107-RE
R88D-GN10H_
R88D-GN15H_
14.2 A
3.5 mA
R88A-FIK114-RE
Computer software
Order code
Complete Omron software package including CX-Drive.

(CX-One version 3.10 or higher)
CX-One
Servo systems
Symbol
G-Series analog/pulse model reference configuration
A G-Series cylindrical type servo motor
G-Series analog/pulse
Servo drive
Personal computer:
Sofware CX-One
P Filter
3000 rpm (50 to 750W)
Q
D Power cable
External
regenerative
resistor
CN3
CN1
RS232 computer cable
E
Motion control unit
3000 rpm (1000 to 1500 W)

2000 rpm (1000 to 1500 W)
1000 rpm (900 W)

-High-speed type-
C Encoder cable
H Terminal block
K
A G-Series at type
servo motor
M
3000 rpm (100 to 400 W)
Terminal block for Servo drive

I/O general purpose signals
Note: The symbols ABCDE... show the recommended sequence to select the components in a G-Series servo system
Servo motors, power & encoder cables

Note: ACD Refer to the G-Series servo motor section for servomotor, motor cables or connectors selection
Servo drives
Symbol
B
Specifications
1 phase 200 VAC
100 W
Servo drive model
Cylindrical type
Flat type
Order code
R88M-G05030_
R88M-GP10030_
R88D-GT01H
R88M-G10030_
200 W
R88M-G20030_
R88M-GP20030_
R88D-GT02H
400 W
R88M-G40030_
R88M-GP40030_
R88D-GT04H
750 W
R88M-G75030_
R88D-GT08H
1.0 kW
R88M-G1K020T_
R88D-GT10H
1.5 kW
R88M-G90010T_
R88D-GT15H
R88M-G1K030T_
R88M-G1K520T_
R88M-G1K530T_
115
G-Series
Servo drives

Symbol
Description
Connect to
Length
Order code
Control cable
(1 axis)

CS1W-MC221
CS1W-MC421
1m
R88A-CPG001M1
2m
R88A-CPG002M1
3m
R88A-CPG003M1
5m
R88A-CPG005M1
1m
R88A-CPG001M2
2m
R88A-CPG002M2
3m
R88A-CPG003M2
5m
R88A-CPG005M2

CJ1W-NC234
CJ1W-NC434
1m
XW2Z-100J-G9
5m
XW2Z-500J-G9
10 m
XW2Z-10MJ-G9
Control cable

CJ1W-NC214
CJ1W-NC414
1m
XW2Z-100J-G13
3m
XW2Z-300J-G13
Control cable

CJ1W-NC234
CJ1W-NC434
1m
XW2Z-100J-G1
5m
XW2Z-500J-G1
10 m
XW2Z-10MJ-G1

CJ1W-NC214
CJ1W-NC414
1m
XW2Z-100J-G5
3m
XW2Z-300J-G5
0.5 m
XW2Z-C50X
1m
XW2Z-100X
2m
XW2Z-200X
3m
XW2Z-300X
5m
XW2Z-500X
10 m
XW2Z-010X
XW2B-20G4
Terminal block for ext. signals (M3.5 screw, fork/round terminals)
XW2B-20G5
Terminal block for ext. signals (M3 screw, fork/round terminals)
XW2D-20G6
CS1W-NC1@3, CJ1W-NC1@3, C200HW-NC113,

CS1W-NC2@3/4@3, CJ1W-NC2@3/4@3,
C200HW-NC213/413, CQM1H-PLB21 or CQM1CPU43
1m
XW2Z-100J-B25
2m
XW2Z-200J-B25
CJ1M-CPU21/22/23
1m
XW2Z-100J-B31
2m
XW2Z-200J-B31

CS1W-NC1@3, CJ1W-NC1@3 or C200HW-NC113

CS1W-NC2@3/4@3, CJ1W-NC2@3/4@3 or
C200HW-NC213/413
CJ1M-CPU21/22/23
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A3
1m
XW2Z-100J-A3
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A6
1m
XW2Z-100J-A6
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A7
1m
XW2Z-100J-A7
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A10
1m
XW2Z-100J-A10
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A11
1m
XW2Z-100J-A11
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A14
1m
XW2Z-100J-A14
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A15
1m
XW2Z-100J-A15
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A18
1m
XW2Z-100J-A18
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A19
1m
XW2Z-100J-A19
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A33
1m
XW2Z-100J-A33
1m
R88A-CPG001S
2m
R88A-CPG002S
1m
XW2Z-100J-B24
2m
XW2Z-200J-B24
XW2B-50G4
XW2B-50G5
XW2D-50G6
Control cable
(2 axis)
Control cable
Control cable
G

CS1W-MC221
CS1W-MC421

(for input common, forward/reverse run prohibited inputs, emergency stop input, or- CJ1W-NC234
igin proximity input and interrupt input)
CJ1W-NC434
CJ1W-NC214
CJ1W-NC414
Servo relay unit
Position control unit connecting cable
CS1W-NC213/413 or C200HW-NC213/413
CS1W-NC133
CS1W-NC233/433
CJ1W-NC113
CJ1W-NC213/413
CJ1W-NC133
CJ1W-NC233/433
CJ1M-CPU21/22/23
L
M
N
116


G-Series
Servo drives
Symbol
Name
Length
Order code
Symbol
Specifications
Order code
2m
R88A-CCG002P2
50 , 80 W
R88A-RR08050S
100 , 80 W
R88A-RR080100S
47 , 220 W
R88A-RR22047S
20 , 500 W
R88A-RR50020S
Filters
Symbol
Applicable
servodrive
Rated
current
Leakage Rated
current voltage
Order code
R88D-GT1H_
R88D-GT02H_
2.4 A
3.5 mA
R88D-GT04H_
4.1 A
3.5 mA
250 VAC R88A-FIK102-RE

singlephase
R88A-FIK104-RE
R88D-GT08H_
6.6 A
3.5 mA
R88A-FIK107-RE
R88D-GT10H_
R88D-GT15H_
14.2 A
3.5 mA
R88A-FIK114-RE
Connectors
Specifications
Order code
I/O connector kit, 50 pins (for CN1)
R88A-CNU11C
Computer software
Specifications
Order code
Complete Omron software package including CX-Drive.

(CX-One version 3.10 or higher)
Servo systems

CX-One
Specifications
General specifications
Servo drive type
R88D-G_
R88M-G_
R88M-GP_
02H_
04H_
08H_
10H_
15H_
05030_/10030_
20030_
40030_
75030_
G1K020T_
90010T_ /1K030T_ /
1K5_0T_
10030_
20030_
40030_
100
200
400
750
1,000
1,500
Arms
1.16
1.6
2.7
4.0
5.9
9.8
Max. output current
Arms
3.5
5.3
7.1
14.1
21.2
28.3
Input power
Main circuit
For single-phase, 200 to 240 VAC + 10% to 15% (50/60 Hz)
Supply
Control circuit
For single-phase, 200 to 240 VAC + 10% to 15% (50/60 Hz)
Control method
For single-phase/three-phase, 200 to 240 VAC + 10% to 15%

(50/60 Hz)
IGBT-driven PWM method
Feedback
Conditions
01H_
Serial encoder (incremental/absolute)
0 to 55C/20 to 65C
Altitude
1,000m or less above sea level

5.88 m/s2/19.6 m/s2
Vibration/shock resistance
Configuration
Base mounted
Approx. weight
Kg
0.8
1.1
1.5
1.7
I/O signal
Performance
Speed variance
Command input
Position/Speed/torque control mode
MECHATROLINK-II servo drive specifications

Load variance
During 0% to 100% load 0.01 max. (at rated speed)
Voltage variance
0% at 10% of rated voltage (at rated speed)
Temperature variance
0 to 50C 0.1% max. (at rated speed)
Frequency characteristics
1 kHz
Torque control accuracy (reproducibility)
3% (at 20% to 100% of rated torque)
Soft start time setting
0 to 10 s (acceleration time and deceleration time can be set)
MECHATROLINK communication
MECHATROLINK-II commands
(for sequence, motion, data setting/reference, monitor, adjustament and other commands)
Sequence input signal
Emergency stop, 3 external latch signals, forward/reverse torque limit, forward/reverse run prohibit, origin proximity,
3 general-purpose inputs
Sequence output signal
It is possible to output three types of signals: positioning completed, speed coincidence, rotation speed detection, servo ready,
current limit, speed limit, brake release and warning signal
117
G-Series
Integrated functions
Communications
RS-232
communications
MECHATROLINK
communications
Servo drives
Interface
Personal computer
Transmission rate
From 2,400 to 57,600 bps
Functions
Parameter setting, status display, alarm display (monitor, clear, history), servo drive data tracing function, test run/autotuning
operations, real time trace, absolute encoder setting, default values function
Communications
protocol
MECHATROLINK-II
Transmission rate
10 Mbps
Data length
32 bytes
Functions
Parameter setting, status display, alarm display (monitor, clear, history), default values function
Tuning
Horizontal and vertical axis mode. One parameter rigidity setting. Load inertia detection.
Dynamic brake (DB)
Operates when main power OFF, servo alarm, overtravel or servo OFF
Regenerative processing
Built-in regeneration resistor in models from 750 W to 1.5 kW. External regeneration resistor optionally.
Overtravel (OT) prevention function
Dynamic brake, disables torque or emergency stop torque during POT and NOT operation
Emergency stop (STOP)
Emergency stop input
Encoder divider function
Optional division pulses possible
Electronic gearing
0,01<Numerator/Denominator<100
Internal speed setting function
8 internal speeds
Protective functions
Overvoltage, undervoltage, overcurrent, overload, regeneration overload, servo drive overheat
Analog monitor ouput
The actual servomotor speed, command speed, torque and number of accumulated pulses can be measured using an
oscilloscope or other device.
Panel operator
Display functions
A 2-digit 7-segment LED display shows the servo drive status, alarm codes, parameters, etc.
Switches
Rotary switch for setting the MECHATROLINK-II node address
MECHATROLINK-II communications status LED indicator (COM)
Analog/pulse servo drive specifications

Control mode
Integrated functions
During 0% to 100% load 0.01 max. (at rated speed)
Voltage variance
0% at 10% of rated voltage (at rated speed)
Temperature
dependence
0 to 50C 0.1% max. (at rated speed)
3% (at 20% to 100% of rated torque)
Soft start time setting
0 to 10 s (acceleration time and deceleration time can be set)
Input signal
1 kHz
Torque control accuracy (reproducibility)

Command pulse
Input signal
Speed control
Input pulse type
Signal + pulse, 90 phase displacement 2-phase pulse (phase A/B) or reverse and forward pulses (CW/CCW)
Input pulse frequency
500 kpps max. line-driver input, 200 kpps max. open-collector input
Electronic gearing
0,01<Numerator/Denominator<100
Speed reference voltage 10 VDC at 3,000 r/min: set at delivery (the scale can be set by parameters)
Torque limit
Torque control
3 VDC at rated torque (torque can be limited separately in positive/negative direction)
Preset speed control
Preset speed is selectable from 8 internal settings by digital inputs.
Torque reference
voltage
3 VDC at rated torque: set at delivery (the scale and polarity can be set by parameters).
Speed limit
Speed limit can be set by parameter.
Sequence input signal
Forward/reverse run prohibit, deviation counter reset, alarm reset, control mode switch, pulse prohibited, speed selection, gain
switch, zero speed designation, origin proximity
Sequence output signal
Brake release, servo ready and alarm output. It is possible also to output two types of configurable signals: current limit, rotation
speed detection, warning signal, speed coincidence, positioning completed
RS-232
communications
RS-485
communications data
Interface
Personal computer
Transmission rate
From 2,400 to 57,600 bps
Functions
Interface
Communication data interface between servo drives.and personal computer.
Transmission rate
From 2,400 to 57,600 bps
Functions
Tuning
Horizontal and vertical axis mode. One parameter rigidity setting. Load inertia detection.
Dynamic brake (DB)
Operates when main power OFF, servo alarm, overtravel or servo OFF
Regenerative processing
Built-in regeneration resistor in models from 750 W to 1.5 kW. External regeneration resistor optionally.
Overtravel (OT) prevention function
Dynamic brake, disables torque or emergency stop torque during POT and NOT operation
Emergency stop (STOP)
Emergency stop input
Encoder divider function
Optional division pulses possible
Protective functions
Overvoltage, undervoltage, overcurrent, overload, regeneration overload, servo drive overheat
Analog monitor Ouput
The actual servomotor speed, command speed, torque and number of accumulated pulses can be measured using an
oscilloscope or other device.
Panel operator
118
Position, speed and torque control mode

Load variance
Frequency characteristics
Communications
I/O signal Speed/torque control Position control
Performance
Speed variance
Display functions
A 6-digit 7-segment LED display shows the servo drive status, alarm codes, parameters, etc.
Switches
Unit No. switch for serial communications. Value from 0 to F. To identify which servo drive the computer is accesing in RS232
communications when multiple servo drives.
G-Series
Servo drives
Dimensions
Analog/pulse models
D1
D1
100 to 200 W
150 mm
40 mm
132 mm
70 mm
150 mm
40 mm
130 mm
70 mm
400 W
150 mm
55 mm
132 mm
70 mm
150 mm
55 mm
130 mm
70 mm
D1
AC SERVO DRIVER
ADR
0 1
0 1
2 3
2 3
R88D-GN04H-ML2, R88D-GT04H
200 V
ML2 models
7 8
R88D-GN01/02H-ML2, R88D-GT01/02H
Specification
4 5 6
Drive model
X10
X1
COM
SP
IM
750 W
150 mm
65 mm
172 mm
70 mm
150 mm
65 mm
170 mm
70 mm
R88D-GN10/15H-ML2, R88D-GT10/15H
1 kW to 1.5 kW 150 mm
85 mm
172 mm
70 mm
150 mm
85 mm
170 mm
70 mm
Servo systems
R88D-GN08H-ML2, R88D-GT08H
119
SmartStep 2
Servo drives
Another step forward in drive simplicity
The new SmartStep offers an ideal solution for point-to-point motion applications
where simplicity is essential. SmartStep 2 keeps things simple whilst combining high
performance and advanced features in a cost effective solution.
On-line Auto-tuning and Easy set up
Ultra-compact size. The footprint is only 48% compared to the previous SmartStep
Two torque limits
Electronic gear, four internal speed settings and wide range of pulse settings
Adaptive resonance suppression filter
Position control via pulse input 500 kpps
Configuration and commissioning using CX Drive-software
SmartStep2 servo drive configuration (100-400 W)
G-Series
servo motor
Personal computer
software: CX-One
SmartStep 2 servo drive

(100 to 400 W models)
O
-High-speed type-
Encoder cable
K
B
Power cable
Brake cable
L
P
Filter
Position control
unit
Terminal block
General purpose signals
(with pulse output)
Note: The symbols ABCDE ... show the recommended sequence to select the components in a SmartStep 2 servo system
Servo motor
Note: ABCD refer to G-Series motor section for detailed motor specifications and selection.
Servo drives
Symbol
E
A Compatible servo motors
Specifications
200 VAC
SmartStep 2 drive model
Cylindrical type
Flat type
Order code
R88M-G05030H-_
R7D-BP01H
R88M-G10030H-_
R88M-GP10030H-_
200 W
R88M-G20030H-_
R88M-GP20030H-_
R7D-BP02HH
400 W
R88M-G40030H-_
R88M-GP40030H-_
R7D-BP04H
100 W
Power supply cables (for CNA)

Symbol
Specifications
Power supply input cable for single-phase power (connectors attached)
Appearance
Order code
R7A-CLB002S2

Symbol
Description
Connect to
Length
Order code
Control cable
Position control unit (high-speed type)

CJ1W-NC234
CJ1W-NC434
1m
XW2Z-100J-G12
5m
XW2Z-500J-G12
10 m
XW2Z-10MJ-G12
Control cable

CJ1W-NC214
CJ1W-NC414
1m
XW2Z-100J-G16
3m
XW2Z-300J-G16
Control cable

CJ1W-NC234
CJ1W-NC434
1m
XW2Z-100J-G4
5m
XW2Z-500J-G4
10 m
XW2Z-10MJ-G4

CJ1W-NC214
CJ1W-NC414
1m
XW2Z-100J-G8
3m
XW2Z-300J-G8
Control cable
120
Servo drives
Symbol
Description
Connect to
Length
Order code

(for input common, forward/reverse run prohibited inputs,
emergency stop input, origin proximity input and interrupt input)

CJ1W-NC234
CJ1W-NC434
CJ1W-NC214
CJ1W-NC414
0.5 m
XW2Z-C50X
1m
XW2Z-100X
2m
XW2Z-200X
3m
XW2Z-300X
5m
XW2Z-500X
10 m
XW2Z-010X
Terminal block for external signals ( with M3 screw and for pin terminals)
XW2B-20G4
Terminal block ext. signals ( with M3.5 screw and for fork/round terminals)
XW2B-20G5
Terminal block ext. signals ( with M3 screw and fork/round pin terminals)
XW2D-20G6
Servo relay unit
CS1W-NC1_3, CJ1W-NC1_3, C200HW-NC113, CS1W- 1 m

NC2_3/4_3, CJ1W-NC2_3/4_3, C200HW-NC213/413,
CQM1H-PLB21 or CQM1-CPU43-V1
2m
XW2Z-100J-B29
CJ1M-CPU21/22/23
1m
XW2Z-100J-B32
2m
XW2Z-200J-B32
CS1W-NC1_3, CJ1W-NC1_3 or
C200HW-NC113 position control unit
CS1W-NC2_3/4_3, CJ1W-NC2_3/4_3 or
C200HW-NC213/413 position control unit
CQM1H-PLB21 or CQM1-CPU43-V1
CJ1M-CPU21/22/23
CJ1W-NC133
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A18
1m
XW2Z-100J-A18
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A19
1m
XW2Z-100J-A19
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A10
1m
XW2Z-100J-A10
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A11
1m
XW2Z-100J-A11
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A14
1m
XW2Z-100J-A14
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A15
1m
XW2Z-100J-A15
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A6
1m
XW2Z-100J-A6
XW2Z-200J-B29
Servo systems
SmartStep 2
K
CJ1W-NC233/433
CS1W-NC133
CS1W-NC233/433
CJ1W-NC113
CJ1W-NC213/413
CS1W-NC113
C200HW-NC113
L
M
N
CS1W-NC213/413
C200HW-NC213/413
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A7
1m
XW2Z-100J-A7
CJ1M-CPU21/22/23
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A33
1m
XW2Z-100J-A33
CQM1H-PLB21
CQM1-CPU43-V1
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A3
1m
XW2Z-100J-A3
1m
R7A-CPB001S
2m
R7A-CPB002S
1m
XW2Z-100J-B28
2m
XW2Z-200J-B28
Terminal block ( with M3 screw and for pin terminals)
XW2B-34G4
Terminal block ( with M3.5 screw and for fork/round terminals)
XW2B-34G5
Terminal block ( with M3 screw and fork/round pin terminals)
XW2D-34G6

Cable for CN3
External regeneration resistor
Symbol
Name
Length
Order code
Specification
Order code
Personal Computer Monitor Cable
2m
R88A-CCG002P2
80 W, 50
R88A-RR08050S
80 W, 100
R88A-RR080100S
220 W, 47
R88A-RR22047S
Filters
Symbol
Applicable servo drive Rated Rated voltage Order code

curren
t
R7D-BP01H/ 02HH/ 04H 4 A
1 pH, 230 V
R7A-FIB104-RE
Connectors
External regeneration resistor cable

Specifications
Order code
External Regenerative Resistor Connection Cable, 2 meters R7A-CLB002RG
Parameter unit & computer software
Specifications
Order code
Main Circuit Connector (CNA)
R7A-CNB01P
Servomotor Connector (CNB)
R7A-CNB01A
Control I/O Connector (CN1)
R88A-CNW01C
Encoder Input Connector (CN2)
R88A-CNW01R
Servomotor Connector for Encoder Cable
R88A-CNG02R
Servomotor Connector for Servomotor Power Cable
R88A-CNG01A
Brake Cable Connector
R88A-CNG01B
Specifications
Order code
Parameter copy unit (with cable)
R88A-PR02G

121
SmartStep 2
Servo drives
SmartStep2 servo drive configuration (750 W)

Personal computer
software: CX-One
(Refer to G-Series servo motors section)
SmartStep 2 servo drive

(750 W model)
O
A
G-Series
servo motor
P
Q
External regenerative
resistor
Power cable
Encoder cable
Terminal block

-High-speed type-
Filter
F
I
G
K
L
EBrake cable
Position control
unit
Terminal block
General purpose signals
(with pulse output)
Note: The symbols ABCDE ... show the recommended sequence to select the components in a SmartStep 2 servo system.
Servo motor
Note: ACDE refer to G-Series motor section for detailed motor specifications and selection.
Servo drives
Symbol
B
Specifications
1 phase 200 VAC
750 W
Servo drive model
Cylindrical type
Order code
R88M-G75030H-_
R88D-GP08H

Symbol
Description
Connect to
Length
Order code
Control cable
(line-driver output for 1 axis

CJ1W-NC234
CJ1W-NC434
1m
XW2Z-100J-G9
5m
XW2Z-500J-G9
10 m
XW2Z-10MJ-G9
Control cable
(open-collector output for 1 axis

CJ1W-NC214
CJ1W-NC414
1m
XW2Z-100J-G13
3m
XW2Z-300J-G13
Control cable
(line-driver output for 2 axis

CJ1W-NC234
CJ1W-NC434
1m
XW2Z-100J-G1
5m
XW2Z-500J-G1
10 m
XW2Z-10MJ-G1

CJ1W-NC214
CJ1W-NC414
1m
XW2Z-100J-G5
3m
XW2Z-300J-G5
0.5 m
XW2Z-C50X
1m
XW2Z-100X
2m
XW2Z-200X
3m
XW2Z-300X
5m
XW2Z-500X
10 m
XW2Z-010X
XW2B-20G4
Terminal block ext. signals (M3.5 screw, fork/round terminals)
XW2B-20G5
Terminal block ext. signals (M3 screw, fork/round terminals)
XW2D-20G6
CS1W-NC1_3, CJ1W-NC1_3, C200HW-NC113/213/

413, CS1W-NC2_3/4_3, CJ1W-NC2_3/4_3 or
CQM1H-PLB21
1m
XW2Z-100J-B25
2m
XW2Z-200J-B25
CJ1M-CPU21/22/23
1m
XW2Z-100J-B31
2m
XW2Z-200J-B31
CS1W-NC1_3, CJ1W-NC1_3 or C200HW-NC113

position control unit
CS1W-NC2_3/4_3, CJ1W-NC2_3/4_3 or
C200HW-NC213/413 position control unit
CQM1H-PLB21
CJ1M-CPU21/22/23
Control cable
(open-collector output for 2 axis
G

(for input common, forward/reverse run prohibited inputs, emergency stop input, or- CJ1W-NC234
igin proximity input and interrupt input)
CJ1W-NC434
CJ1W-NC214
CJ1W-NC414
Servo relay unit
122
Servo drives
Symbol
Description
Connect to
Length
Order code
CQM1H-PLB21
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A3
1m
XW2Z-100J-A3
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A6
1m
XW2Z-100J-A6
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A7
1m
XW2Z-100J-A7
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A10
1m
XW2Z-100J-A10
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A11
1m
XW2Z-100J-A11
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A14
1m
XW2Z-100J-A14
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A15
1m
XW2Z-100J-A15
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A18
1m
XW2Z-100J-A18
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A19
1m
XW2Z-100J-A19
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A33
1m
XW2Z-100J-A33
1m
R88A-CPG001S
2m
R88A-CPG002S
1m
XW2Z-100J-B24
2m
XW2Z-200J-B24
XW2B-50G4
XW2B-50G5
Terminal block (M3 screw and for fork/found terminals)
XW2D-50G6
CS1W-NC213/413 or C200HW-NC213/413
CS1W-NC133
CS1W-NC233/433
CJ1W-NC113
CJ1W-NC213/413
CJ1W-NC133
CJ1W-NC233/433
CJ1M-CPU21/22/23
L
M
N
Connectors
Symbol
Name
Length
Order code
Specifications
Order code
2m
R88A-CCG002P2
I/O connector kit -50 pins- (for CN1)
R88A-CNU11C
Power cable connector (motor side)
R88A-CNG01A
Encoder connector (Servo drive side CN2)
R88A-CNW01R
Incremental encoder cable connector (motor side)
R88A-CNG02R
Filter
Symbol
Rated Leakage Rated

current current voltage
6.6 A
3.5 mA
Servo systems
SmartStep 2
Applicable
servodrive
Order code
Computer software
250 VAC
R88D-GP08H R88A-FIK107-RE
single-phase
Specifications

Symbol
Specifications
Order code
50 , 80 W
R88A-RR08050S
100 , 80 W
R88A-RR080100S
47 , 220 W
R88A-RR22047S
20 , 500 W
R88A-RR50020S
Order code

and inverters (CX-Drive version 1.91 or higher).
Specifications
Performance specifications
Item
200 VAC input type

100 W
200 W
400 W
R7D-BP01H
R7D-BP02HH
R7D-BP04H
750 W
R88D-GP08H
Continuous output current (rms)
1.0 A
1.6 A
2.5 A
4A
Momentary maximum output current (rms)
3.3 A
4.9 A
7.8 A
Main-circuit power supply
Single-phase 200 to 240 VAC (170 to 264 V), 50/60 Hz
Single-phase/three-phase 200 to
240 VAC (170 to 264 V), 50/60 Hz
Control circuit input power
Single-phase 200 to 240 VAC

(170 to 264 V)
Control method
All-digital method
Feedback
10,000 pulses/revolution incremental encoder
Inverter method
PWM method based on IGBT
PWM frequency
12 kHz
Weight
0.35 kg
Compatible motor voltage
200 V
Command pulse response
Line drive: 500 kpps
Compatible motor capacity

Applicable servo motor (R88M-)
14.1 A
6 kHz
0.42 kg
0.42 kg
1.5 kg
50 W
100 W
200 W
400 W
750 W
G05030H
G10030H
GP10030H
G020030H
GP20030H
G40030H
GP40030H
G75030H
123
SmartStep 2
Servo drives
Dimensions
R7D-BP01H (230 V, 100 W)
R7D-BP02HH/04H (230 V, 200-400 W)
35
40
Mounting Hole
Dimensions
15
20
15
20
Mounting Hole
Dimensions
.
dia
Two, M4
5
5.2
Two, M4
5.2
dia
ALM
PWR
ALM
C
N
3
C
N
3
C
N
1
140
C
N
2
C
N
B
C
N
B
C
N
A
C
N
A
5.1
5.2
70
105
15
5.1
20
70
5.2
105
15
R88D-GP08H (230 V, 750 W)

70
65
170
4
Two, M4
AC SER
V O DRI V ER
U N IT N o.
DATA
SP
140
150
150
0.5
IM
7.5
50
0.5
65
124
1300.5
140
130
120
140
C
N
2
1300.5
140
130
120
C
N
1
PWR
25
Accurax G5
Servo motors
Servo motor family for accurate motion control
Servo systems
Accurax G5 servo motors include IP67 protection and connectors on the motor body.
Use of 10 pole motors and 20 bit encoder results in 40% reduction in motor cogging.
The servomotors are 25% lighter and 15% smaller due to patented new stator design
PACK & CLAMP technology, 40% iron loss reduction and 15% smaller encoder.
Standard and high inertia servo motor models
Peak torque 300% of rated torque during 3 seconds or more depending on model
High accuracy provided by a 20 bit resolution encoder, ABS encoder as an option
IP67 protection in all models
Ultra-light and compact size motor
Low speed ripple and low torque ripple due to low torque cogging
Various shaft, brake and seal options
Standard servo motors
E Power cable
A
C Encoder cable
3000 rpm (50 W to 750 W)
F Brake cable
A
Power cable/
E power cable with brake
B Drive options
3,000 rpm (750 W to 5 kW)

2,000 rpm (400 W to 5 kW)
1,000 rpm (900 W to 3 kW)
ADR

EtherCAT, ML2 and
analog/pulse models
C Encoder cable
A
1,500 rpm (7.5 kW to 15 kW)
1,000 rpm (4.5 kW to 6 kW)
High inertia servo motors
D Extension cable for
Power cable/
absolute encoder
(with battery holder)
A
3,000 rpm (200 W to 750 W)
C Encoder cable
Power cable/

2,000 rpm (1 kW to 5 kW)
C Encoder cable
A
1,500 rpm (7.5 kW)
Note: The symbols ABC ... show the recommended sequence to select the servo motor and cables
Servo motor
A Select motor from R88M-K or R88M-KH families using motor tables in next pages.
Servo drive
B Refer to Accurax G5 servo drive section for detailed drive specifications and selection of drive accessories.
125
Accurax G5
Servo motors

Servo motors 3,000 r/min (50 to 5,000 W)
Symbol
B Compatible servo drives
Specifications
Voltage Encoder and design
230 V
Rated torque Capacity

50 W
R88D-KN01H-_
R88D-KT01H
R88M-K05030H-S2
100 W
R88D-KN01H-_
R88D-KT01H
R88M-K10030H-S2
0.64 Nm
200 W
R88D-KN02H-_
R88D-KT02H
R88M-K20030H-S2
1.3 Nm
400 W
R88D-KN04H-_
R88D-KT04H
R88M-K40030H-S2
2.4 Nm
750 W
R88D-KN08H-_
R88D-KT08H
R88M-K75030H-S2
3.18 Nm
1,000 W
R88D-KN15H-_
R88D-KT15H
R88M-K1K030H-S2
4.77 Nm
1,500 W
R88D-KN15H-_
R88D-KT15H
R88M-K1K530H-S2
0.16 Nm
50 W
R88D-KN01H-_
R88D-KT01H
R88M-K05030H-BS2
0.32 Nm
100 W
R88D-KN01H-_
R88D-KT01H
R88M-K10030H-BS2
0.64 Nm
200 W
R88D-KN02H-_
R88D-KT02H
R88M-K20030H-BS2
1.3 Nm
400 W
R88D-KN04H-_
R88D-KT04H
R88M-K40030H-BS2
2.4 Nm
750 W
R88D-KN08H-_
R88D-KT08H
R88M-K75030H-BS2
3.18 Nm
1,000 W
R88D-KN15H-_
R88D-KT15H
R88M-K1K030H-BS2
4.77 Nm
1,500 W
R88D-KN15H-_
R88D-KT15H
R88M-K1K530H-BS2
Absolute encoder (17 bit)

Without brake 0.16 Nm
Straight shaft with key and tap
0.32 Nm
50 W
R88D-KN01H-_
R88D-KT01H
R88M-K05030T-S2
100 W
R88D-KN01H-_
R88D-KT01H
R88M-K10030T-S2
0.64 Nm
200 W
R88D-KN02H-_
R88D-KT02H
R88M-K20030T-S2
1.3 Nm
400 W
R88D-KN04H-_
R88D-KT04H
R88M-K40030T-S2
2.4 Nm
750 W
R88D-KN08H-_
R88D-KT08H
R88M-K75030T-S2
3.18 Nm
1,000 W
R88D-KN15H-_
R88D-KT15H
R88M-K1K030T-S2
4.77 Nm
1,500 W
R88D-KN15H-_
R88D-KT15H
R88M-K1K530T-S2
0.16 Nm
50 W
R88D-KN01H-_
R88D-KT01H
R88M-K05030T-BS2
0.32 Nm
100 W
R88D-KN01H-_
R88D-KT01H
R88M-K10030T-BS2
0.64 Nm
200 W
R88D-KN02H-_
R88D-KT02H
R88M-K20030T-BS2
1.3 Nm
400 W
R88D-KN04H-_
R88D-KT04H
R88M-K40030T-BS2
2.4 Nm
750 W
R88D-KN08H-_
R88D-KT08H
R88M-K75030T-BS2
3.18 Nm
1,000 W
R88D-KN15H-_
R88D-KT15H
R88M-K1K030T-BS2
4.77 Nm
1,500 W
R88D-KN15H-_
R88D-KT15H
R88M-K1K530T-BS2
Incremental encoder (20 bit) Without brake 2.39 Nm

3.18 Nm
750 W
R88D-KN10F-_
R88D-KT10F
R88M-K75030F-S2
1,000 W
R88D-KN15F-_
R88D-KT15F
R88M-K1K030F-S2
4.77 Nm
1,500 W
R88D-KN15F-_
R88D-KT15F
R88M-K1K530F-S2
6.37 Nm
2,000 W
R88D-KN20F-_
R88D-KT20F
R88M-K2K030F-S2
9.55 Nm
3,000 W
R88D-KN30F-_
R88D-KT30F
R88M-K3K030F-S2
12.7 Nm
4,000 W
R88D-KN50F-_
R88D-KT50F
R88M-K4K030F-S2
15.9 Nm
5,000 W
R88D-KN50F-_
R88D-KT50F
R88M-K5K030F-S2
2.39 Nm
750 W
R88D-KN10F-_
R88D-KT10F
R88M-K75030F-BS2
3.18 Nm
1,000 W
R88D-KN15F-_
R88D-KT15F
R88M-K1K030F-BS2
4.77 Nm
1,500 W
R88D-KN15F-_
R88D-KT15F
R88M-K1K530F-BS2
6.37 Nm
2,000 W
R88D-KN20F-_
R88D-KT20F
R88M-K2K030F-BS2
9.55 Nm
3,000 W
R88D-KN30F-_
R88D-KT30F
R88M-K3K030F-BS2
12.7 Nm
4,000 W
R88D-KN50F-_
R88D-KT50F
R88M-K4K030F-BS2
15.9 Nm
5,000 W
R88D-KN50F-_
R88D-KT50F
R88M-K5K030F-BS2

3.18 Nm
750 W
R88D-KN10F-_
R88D-KT10F
R88M-K75030C-S2
1,000 W
R88D-KN15F-_
R88D-KT15F
R88M-K1K030C-S2
4.77 Nm
1,500 W
R88D-KN15F-_
R88D-KT15F
R88M-K1K530C-S2
6.37 Nm
2,000 W
R88D-KN20F-_
R88D-KT20F
R88M-K2K030C-S2
9.55 Nm
3,000 W
R88D-KN30F-_
R88D-KT30F
R88M-K3K030C-S2
12.7 Nm
4,000 W
R88D-KN50F-_
R88D-KT50F
R88M-K4K030C-S2
15.9 Nm
5,000 W
R88D-KN50F-_
R88D-KT50F
R88M-K5K030C-S2
2.39 Nm
750 W
R88D-KN10F-_
R88D-KT10F
R88M-K75030C-BS2
3.18 Nm
1,000 W
R88D-KN15F-_
R88D-KT15F
R88M-K1K030C-BS2
4.77 Nm
1,500 W
R88D-KN15F-_
R88D-KT15F
R88M-K1K530C-BS2
6.37 Nm
2,000 W
R88D-KN20F-_
R88D-KT20F
R88M-K2K030C-BS2
9.55 Nm
3,000 W
R88D-KN30F-_
R88D-KT30F
R88M-K3K030C-BS2
12.7 Nm
4,000 W
R88D-KN50F-_
R88D-KT50F
R88M-K4K030C-BS2
15.9 Nm
5,000 W
R88D-KN50F-_
R88D-KT50F
R88M-K5K030C-BS2
With brake
230 V
(1,000 to 1,500 W)
With brake
400 V
With brake
With brake
126
Order code
G5 analog/pulse

0.32 Nm
230 V (50 to 750 W)
400 V
(750 to 5,000 W)
G5 EtherCAT/ML2
Accurax G5
Servo motors
Servo motors 2,000 r/min (1 to 5 kW)

Specifications
230 V
Order code
G5 analog/pulse
1,000 W
R88D-KN10H-_
R88D-KT10H
R88M-K1K020H-S2
1,500 W
R88D-KN15H-_
R88D-KT15H
R88M-K1K520H-S2
4.77 Nm
1,000 W
R88D-KN10H-_
R88D-KT10H
R88M-K1K020H-BS2
7.16 Nm
1,500 W
R88D-KN15H-_
R88D-KT15H
R88M-K1K520H-BS2

7.16 Nm
1,000 W
R88D-KN10H-_
R88D-KT10H
R88M-K1K020T-S2
1,500 W
R88D-KN15H-_
R88D-KT15H
R88M-K1K520T-S2
4.77 Nm
1,000 W
R88D-KN10H-_
R88D-KT10H
R88M-K1K020T-BS2
7.16 Nm
1,500 W
R88D-KN15H-_
R88D-KT15H
R88M-K1K520T-BS2

2.86 Nm
400 W
R88D-KN06F-_
R88D-KT06F
R88M-K40020F-S2
600 W
R88D-KN06F-_
R88D-KT06F
R88M-K60020F-S2
4.77 Nm
1,000 W
R88D-KN10F-_
R88D-KT10F
R88M-K1K020F-S2
7.16 Nm
1,500 W
R88D-KN15F-_
R88D-KT15F
R88M-K1K520F-S2
9.55 Nm
2,000 W
R88D-KN20F-_
R88D-KT20F
R88M-K2K020F-S2
14.3 Nm
3,000 W
R88D-KN30F-_
R88D-KT30F
R88M-K3K020F-S2
19.1 Nm
4,000 W
R88D-KN50F-_
R88D-KT50F
R88M-K4K020F-S2
23.9 Nm
5,000 W
R88D-KN50F-_
R88D-KT50F
R88M-K5K020F-S2
1.91 Nm
400 W
R88D-KN06F-_
R88D-KT06F
R88M-K40020F-BS2
2.86 Nm
600 W
R88D-KN06F-_
R88D-KT06F
R88M-K60020F-BS2
4.77 Nm
1,000 W
R88D-KN10F-_
R88D-KT10F
R88M-K1K020F-BS2
7.16 Nm
1,500 W
R88D-KN15F-_
R88D-KT15F
R88M-K1K520F-BS2
9.55 Nm
2,000 W
R88D-KN20F-_
R88D-KT20F
R88M-K2K020F-BS2
14.3 Nm
3,000 W
R88D-KN30F-_
R88D-KT30F
R88M-K3K020F-BS2
19.1 Nm
4,000 W
R88D-KN50F-_
R88D-KT50F
R88M-K4K020F-BS2
23.9 Nm
5,000 W
R88D-KN50F-_
R88D-KT50F
R88M-K5K020F-BS2

2.86 Nm
400 W
R88D-KN06F-_
R88D-KT06F
R88M-K40020C-S2
600 W
R88D-KN06F-_
R88D-KT06F
R88M-K60020C-S2
4.77 Nm
1,000 W
R88D-KN10F-_
R88D-KT10F
R88M-K1K020C-S2
7.16 Nm
1,500 W
R88D-KN15F-_
R88D-KT15F
R88M-K1K520C-S2
9.55 Nm
2,000 W
R88D-KN20F-_
R88D-KT20F
R88M-K2K020C-S2
14.3 Nm
3,000 W
R88D-KN30F-_
R88D-KT30F
R88M-K3K020C-S2
19.1 Nm
4,000 W
R88D-KN50F-_
R88D-KT50F
R88M-K4K020C-S2
23.9 Nm
5,000 W
R88D-KN50F-_
R88D-KT50F
R88M-K5K020C-S2
1.91 Nm
400 W
R88D-KN06F-_
R88D-KT06F
R88M-K40020C-BS2
2.86 Nm
600 W
R88D-KN06F-_
R88D-KT06F
R88M-K60020C-BS2
4.77 Nm
1,000 W
R88D-KN10F-_
R88D-KT10F
R88M-K1K020C-BS2
7.16 Nm
1,500 W
R88D-KN15F-_
R88D-KT15F
R88M-K1K520C-BS2
9.55 Nm
2,000 W
R88D-KN20F-_
R88D-KT20F
R88M-K2K020C-BS2
14.3 Nm
3,000 W
R88D-KN30F-_
R88D-KT30F
R88M-K3K020C-BS2
19.1 Nm
4,000 W
R88D-KN50F-_
R88D-KT50F
R88M-K4K020C-BS2
23.9 Nm
5,000 W
R88D-KN50F-_
R88D-KT50F
R88M-K5K020C-BS2

7.16 Nm
With brake
With brake
400 V
G5 EtherCAT/ML2
With brake
With brake
Servo systems
Symbol
Servo motors 1,500 r/min (7.5 to 15 KW)

Symbol
Specifications
400 V

7,500 W
G5 EtherCAT
Order code
G5 analog/pulse

straight shaft with key and tap
70.0 Nm
R88D-KT75F
R88M-K7K515C-S2
11,000 W R88D-KN150F-ECT
R88D-KT150F
R88M-K11K015C-S2
95.5 Nm
15,000 W R88D-KN150F-ECT
R88D-KT150F
R88M-K15K015C-S2
47.8 Nm
7,500 W
R88D-KT75F
R88M-K7K515C-BS2
70.0 Nm
11,000 W R88D-KN150F-ECT
R88D-KT150F
R88M-K11K015C-BS2
95.5 Nm
15,000 W R88D-KN150F-ECT
R88D-KT150F
R88M-K15K015C-BS2
With brake
R88D-KN75F-ECT
R88D-KN75F-ECT
127
Accurax G5
Servo motors
Servo motors 1,000 r/min (900 to 6,000 W)

Symbol
Specifications
230 V
400 V
G5 EtherCAT
Order code
G5 analog/pulse G5 ML2
Incremental encoder (20 bit) No brake

straight shaft with key and tap With brake
8.59 Nm
900 W
R88D-KN15H-ECT R88D-KT15H
R88D-KN15H-ML2 R88M-K90010H-S2
8.59 Nm
900 W
R88D-KN15H-ML2 R88M-K90010H-BS2

No brake
straight shaft with key and tap With brake
8.59 Nm
900 W
R88D-KN15H-ML2 R88M-K90010T-S2
8.59 Nm
900 W
R88D-KN15H-ML2 R88M-K90010T-BS2
Incremental encoder (20 bit) No brake

8.59 Nm
900 W
R88D-KN15F-ECT R88D-KT15F
R88D-KN15F-ML2 R88M-K90010F-S2
19.1 Nm
2,000 W
R88D-KN30F-ML2 R88M-K2K010F-S2
28.7 Nm
3,000 W
R88D-KN50F-ML2 R88M-K3K010F-S2
8.59 Nm
900 W
R88D-KN15F-ML2 R88M-K90010F-BS2
19.1 Nm
2,000 W
R88D-KN30F-ML2 R88M-K2K010F-BS2
28.7 Nm
3,000 W
R88D-KN50F-ML2 R88M-K3K010F-BS2
8.59 Nm
900 W
R88D-KN15F-ML2 R88M-K90010C-S2
19.1 Nm
2,000 W
R88D-KN30F-ML2 R88M-K2K010C-S2
28.7 Nm
3,000 W
43.0 Nm
4,500 W
57.3 Nm
6,000 W
8.59 Nm
900 W
R88D-KN15F-ML2 R88M-K90010C-BS2
19.1 Nm
2,000 W
R88D-KN30F-ML2 R88M-K2K010C-BS2
28.7 Nm
3,000 W
43.0 Nm
4,500 W
57.3 Nm
6,000 W
900 W to 3 kW
With brake

No brake
4.5 kW to 6 kW
With brake
R88M-K6K010C-S2
R88M-K6K010C-BS2

Servo motors 3,000 r/min (200 to 750 W)
Symbol
Specifications
230 V
Incremental encoder
(20 bit)
With brake
Absolute encoder
(17 bit)
200 W
R88D-KN02H-_
R88D-KT02H
R88M-KH20030H-S2-D
400 W
R88D-KN04H-_
R88D-KT04H
R88M-KH40030H-S2-D
2.4 Nm
750 W
R88D-KN08H-_
R88D-KT08H
R88M-KH75030H-S2-D
0.64 Nm
200 W
R88D-KN02H-_
R88D-KT02H
R88M-KH20030H-BS2-D
1.3 Nm
400 W
R88D-KN04H-_
R88D-KT04H
R88M-KH40030H-BS2-D
2.4 Nm
750 W
R88D-KN08H-_
R88D-KT08H
R88M-KH75030H-BS2-D
200 W
R88D-KN02H-_
R88D-KT02H
R88M-KH20030T-S2-D
1.3 Nm
400 W
R88D-KN04H-_
R88D-KT04H
R88M-KH40030T-S2-D
2.4 Nm
750 W
R88D-KN08H-_
R88D-KT08H
R88M-KH75030T-S2-D
0.64 Nm
200 W
R88D-KN02H-_
R88D-KT02H
R88M-KH20030T-BS2-D
1.3 Nm
400 W
R88D-KN04H-_
R88D-KT04H
R88M-KH40030T-BS2-D
2.4 Nm
750 W
R88D-KN08H-_
R88D-KT08H
R88M-KH75030T-BS2-D

With brake
Order code
G5 analog/pulse
1.3 Nm
G5 EtherCAT/ML2
Servo motors 2,000 r/min (1 to 5 kW)

Symbol
Specifications
400 V
Incremental encoder
(20 bit)
Order code
1,000 W
R88D-_KN10F-_
R88D-KT10F
R88M-KH1K020F-S1
7.16 Nm
1,500 W
R88D-_KN15F-_
R88D-KT15F
R88M-KH1K520F-S1
9.55 Nm
2,000 W
R88D-_KN20F-_
R88D-KT20F
R88M-KH2K020F-S1
14.3 Nm
3,000 W
R88D-_KN30F-_
R88D-KT30F
R88M-KH3K020F-S1
19.1 Nm
4,000 W
R88D-_KN50F-_
R88D-KT50F
R88M-KH4K020F-S1
23.9 Nm
5,000 W
R88D-_KN50F-_
R88D-KT50F
R88M-KH5K020F-S1
4.77 Nm
1,000 W
R88D-_KN10F-_
R88D-KT10F
R88M-KH1K020F-BS1
7.16 Nm
1,500 W
R88D-_KN15F-_
R88D-KT15F
R88M-KH1K520F-BS1
9.55 Nm
2,000 W
R88D-_KN20F-_
R88D-KT20F
R88M-KH2K020F-BS1
14.3 Nm
3,000 W
R88D-_KN30F-_
R88D-KT30F
R88M-KH3K020F-BS1
19.1 Nm
4,000 W
R88D-_KN50F-_
R88D-KT50F
R88M-KH4K020F-BS1
23.9 Nm
5,000 W
R88D-_KN50F-_
R88D-KT50F
R88M-KH5K020F-BS1
1,000 W
R88D-_KN10F-_
R88D-KT10F
R88M-KH1K020C-S1
7.16 Nm
1,500 W
R88D-_KN15F-_
R88D-KT15F
R88M-KH1K520C-S1
9.55 Nm
2,000 W
R88D-_KN20F-_
R88D-KT20F
R88M-KH2K020C-S1
14.3 Nm
3,000 W
R88D-_KN30F-_
R88D-KT30F
R88M-KH3K020C-S1
19.1 Nm
4,000 W
R88D-_KN50F-_
R88D-KT50F
R88M-KH4K020C-S1
23.9 Nm
5,000 W
R88D-_KN50F-_
R88D-KT50F
R88M-KH5K020C-S1
4.77 Nm
1,000 W
R88D-_KN10F-_
R88D-KT10F
R88M-KH1K020C-BS1
7.16 Nm
1,500 W
R88D-_KN15F-_
R88D-KT15F
R88M-KH1K520C-BS1
9.55 Nm
2,000 W
R88D-_KN20F-_
R88D-KT20F
R88M-KH2K020C-BS1
14.3 Nm
3,000 W
R88D-_KN30F-_
R88D-KT30F
R88M-KH3K020C-BS1
19.1 Nm
4,000 W
R88D-_KN50F-_
R88D-KT50F
R88M-KH4K020C-BS1
23.9 Nm
5,000 W
R88D-_KN50F-_
R88D-KT50F
R88M-KH5K020C-BS1
With brake
Shaft end with key
With brake
128
G5 analog/pulse
Shaft end with key
Absolute encoder
(17 bit)
Servo motor model
G5 EtherCAT/ML2
Accurax G5
Servo motors
Servo motors 1,500 r/min (7.5 kW)

Symbol
Specifications
400 V
Absolute encoder
(17 bit)
Servo motor model
G5 EtherCAT
G5 analog/pulse
Order code
7,500 W
R88D-KN75F-ECT
R88D-KT75F
R88M-KH7K515C-S1
With brake
7,500 W
R88D-KN75F-ECT
R88D-KT75F
R88M-KH7K515C-BS1
Shaft end with key

47.8 Nm
Encoder cables for absolute and incremental encoders

Appearance
Specifications
Order code
Encoder cable for servomotors

R88M-K(050/100/200/400/750)30(H/T)_

R88M-KH(200/400/750)30(H/T)_

R88M-K(1K0/1K5)30(H/T)_
R88M-K(750/1K0/1K5/2K0/3K0/4K0/5K0)30(F/C)_
R88M-K(400/600/1K0/1K5/2K0/3K0/4K0/5K0)20_
R88M-K(7K5/11K0/15K0)15_
R88M-K(900/2K0/3K0/4K5/6K0)10_
R88M-KH(1K0/1K5/2K0/3K0/4K0/5K0)20(F/C)_
R88M-KH7K515C_
1.5 m
R88A-CRKA001-5CR-E
3m
R88A-CRKA003CR-E
5m
R88A-CRKA005CR-E
10 m
R88A-CRKA010CR-E
15 m
R88A-CRKA015CR-E
20 m
R88A-CRKA020CR-E
3m
R88A-CRWA003C-DE
5m
R88A-CRWA005C-DE
10 m
R88A-CRWA010C-DE
15 m
R88A-CRWA015C-DE
20 m
R88A-CRWA020C-DE
1.5 m
R88A-CRKC001-5NR-E
3m
R88A-CRKC003NR-E
5m
R88A-CRKC005NR-E
10 m
R88A-CRKC010NR-E
15 m
R88A-CRKC015NR-E
20 m
R88A-CRKC020NR-E
Servo systems
Symbol
Note: For servomotors fitted with an absolute encoder you have to add the extension battery cable R88A-CRGD0R3C_ (see below) or connect a backup battery in the CN1 I/O connector.
Absolute encoder battery cable (encoder extension cable only)

Symbol
Appearance
Specifications
Absolute encoder battery cable
Order code
Battery not included
0.3 m R88A-CRGDOR3C-E
Battery included
0.3 m R88A-CRGDOR3C-BS-E
Battery holder
Absolute encoder backup battery
R88A-BAT01G
2,000 mA.h 3.6V
Power cables
Symbol
E
Appearance
Specifications
Order code
For 200 V servomotors

Power cable only
R88M-K(050/100/200/400/750)30(H/T)-_ _ S2 (without brake)
Note: for servomotors with brake
R88M-K(050/100/200/400/750)30
(H/T)-BS2, the separate brake cable
R88A-CAKA _ _ _ BR-E is needed
R88M-KH(200/400/750)30(H/T)-__S2
without brake
with brake
1.5 m
R88A-CAKA001-5SR-E
3m
R88A-CAKA003SR-E
5m
R88A-CAKA005SR-E
10 m
R88A-CAKA010SR-E
15 m
R88A-CAKA015SR-E
20 m
R88A-CAKA020SR-E
3m
R88A-CAWA003S-DE
5m
R88A-CAWA005S-DE
10 m
R88A-CAWA010S-DE
15 m
R88A-CAWA015S-DE
20 m
R88A-CAWA020S-DE
3m
R88A-CAWA003B-DE
5m
R88A-CAWA005B-DE
10 m
R88A-CAWA010B-DE
15 m
R88A-CAWA015B-DE
20 m
R88A-CAWA020B-DE
129
Accurax G5
Symbol
E
Appearance
Servo motors
Specifications
R88M-K(1K0/1K5)30(H/T)-_ _ S2
R88M-K(1K0/1K5)20(H/T)-_ _ S2
R88M-K90010(H/T)-_ _ S2
Order code
without brake
with brake

without brake
R88M-K(750/1K0/1K5/2K)30(F/C)-_ _ S2
R88M-K(400/600/1K0/1K5/2K0)20(F/C)-_ _ S2
R88M-K90010(F/C)-_ _ S2
R88M-KH(1K0/1K5)20(F/C)-_S1
with brake

R88M-KH2K020(F/C)-_S1
without brake
with brake

R88M-K(3K0/4K0/5K0)30(F/C)-_ _ S2
R88M-K(3K0/4K0/5K0)20(F/C)-_ _ S2
R88M-K(2K0/3K0)10(F/C)-_ _ S2
R88M-K4K510C-_ _ S2
R88M-KH(3K0/4K0/5K0)20(F/C)-_S1
without brake
with brake

R88M-K6K010C-_ _ S2
R88M-K7K515C-_ _ S2
R88M-KH7K515C-_S1
Note: for servomotors with brake
R88M-K(6K010/7K515)C-BS2 and
R88M-KH7K515C-BS1 the separate
brake cable R88A-CAGE _ _ _ BR-E is
needed
Power cable only

(without brake)

Power cable only
R88M-K(11K0/15K0)15C-_ _ S2
(without brake)
Note: Note: for servomotors with brake
R88M-K(11K0/15K0)15C-BS2, the separate brake cable R88A-CAGE _ _ _ BRE is needed
130
1.5 m
R88A-CAGB001-5SR-E
3m
R88A-CAGB003SR-E
5m
R88A-CAGB005SR-E
10 m
R88A-CAGB010SR-E
15 m
R88A-CAGB015SR-E
20 m
R88A-CAGB020SR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAGB001-5BR-E
3m
R88A-CAGB003BR-E
5m
R88A-CAGB005BR-E
10 m
R88A-CAGB010BR-E
15 m
R88A-CAGB015BR-E
20 m
R88A-CAGB020BR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAGB001-5SR-E
3m
R88A-CAGB003SR-E
5m
R88A-CAGB05SR-E
10 m
R88A-CAGB010SR-E
15 m
R88A-CAGB015SR-E
20 m
R88A-CAGB020SR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAKF001-5BR-E
3m
R88A-CAKF003BR-E
5m
R88A-CAKF005BR-E
10 m
R88A-CAKF010BR-E
15 m
R88A-CAKF015BR-E
20 m
R88A-CAKF020BR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAKC001-5SR-E
3m
R88A-CAKC003SR-E
5m
R88A-CAKC005SR-E
10 m
R88A-CAKC010SR-E
15 m
R88A-CAKC015SR-E
20 m
R88A-CAKC020SR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAKF001-5BR-E
3m
R88A-CAKF003BR-E
5m
R88A-CAKF005BR-E
10 m
R88A-CAKF010BR-E
15 m
R88A-CAKF015BR-E
20 m
R88A-CAKF020BR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAGD001-5SR-E
3m
R88A-CAGD003SR-E
5m
R88A-CAGD005SR-E
10 m
R88A-CAGD010SR-E
15 m
R88A-CAGD015SR-E
20 m
R88A-CAGD020SR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAGD001-5BR-E
3m
R88A-CAGD003BR-E
5m
R88A-CAGD005BR-E
10 m
R88A-CAGD010BR-E
15 m
R88A-CAGD015BR-E
20 m
R88A-CAGD020BR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAKE001-5SR-E
3m
R88A-CAKE003SR-E
5m
R88A-CAKE005SR-E
10 m
R88A-CAKE010SR-E
15 m
R88A-CAKE015SR-E
20 m
R88A-CAKE020SR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAKG001-5SR-E
3m
R88A-CAKG003SR-E
5m
R88A-CAKG005SR-E
10 m
R88A-CAKG010SR-E
15 m
R88A-CAKG015SR-E
20 m
R88A-CAKG020SR-E
Accurax G5
Servo motors
Brake cables (for 200 V 50 to 750 W servo motors and 400 V 6 to 15 kW servo motors)
Appearance
Specifications
Order code
Brake cable only.

For 200 V servo motors with brake
R88M-K(050/100/200/400/750)30(H/T)-BS2
Brake cable only.

For 400 V servo motors with brake
R88M-K6K010C-BS2
R88M-K(7K5/11K0/15K0)15C-BS2
R88M-KH7K515C-BS1
1.5 m
R88A-CAKA001-5BR-E
3m
R88A-CAKA003BR-E
5m
R88A-CAKA005BR-E
10 m
R88A-CAKA010BR-E
15 m
R88A-CAKA015BR-E
20 m
R88A-CAKA020BR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAGE001-5BR-E
3m
R88A-CAGE003BR-E
5m
R88A-CAGE005BR-E
10 m
R88A-CAGE0010BR-E
15 m
R88A-CAGE015BR-E
20 m
R88A-CAGE020BR-E
Servo systems
Symbol
Connectors for encoder, power and brake cables

Specifications
Connectors for making encoder cables
Connectors for making power cables
Connector for brake cable
Order code
Drive side (CN2)
All models
R88A-CNW01R
Motor side
R88M-K(050/100/200/400/750)30(H/T)_
R88A-CNK02R
Motor side
R88M-KH(200/400/750)_
SPOC-17H-FRON169
Motor side
R88M-K(1K0/1K5)30(H/T)_
R88M-K(750/1K0/1K5/2K0/3K0/4K0/5K0)30(F/C)_
R88M-K(400/600/1K0/1K5/2K0/3K0/4K0/5K0)20_
R88M-K(900/2K0/3K0)10_
R88M-K(4K5/6K0)10C-_
R88M-K(7K5/11K0/15K0)15C-_
R88M-KH(1K0/1K5/2K0/3K0/4K0/5K0/7K5)_
R88A-CNK04R
Motor side
R88M-K(050/100/200/400/750)30(H/T)_
R88A-CNK11A
Motor side
R88M-KH(200/400/750)30(H/T)_
SPOC-06K-FSDN169
Motor side
R88M-K(1K0/1K5)30(H/T)-S2
R88M-K(1K0/1K5)20(H/T)-S2
R88M-K90010(H/T)-S2
R88M-K(750/1K0/1K5/2K0)30(F/C)-S2
R88M-K(400/600/1K0/1K5/2K0)20(F/C)-S2
R88M-K90010(F/C)-S2
R88M-KH(1K0/1K5)20(F/C)-S1
MS3108E20-4S
Motor side
R88M-K(1K0/1K5)30(H/T)-BS2
R88M-K(1K0/1K5)20(H/T)-BS2
R88M-K90010(H/T)-BS2
MS3108E20-18S
Motor side
R88M-K(750/1K0/1K5/2K0/3K0/4K0/5K0)30(F/C)-BS2
R88M-K(400/600/1K0/1K5/2K0/3K0/4K0/5K0)20(F/C)-BS2
R88M-K(900/2K0/3K0)10(F/C)-BS2
R88M-K4K510C-BS2
R88M-KH(1K0/1K5/2K0/3K0/4K0/5K0)20(F/C)-BS1
MS3108E24-11S
Motor side
R88M-K(3K0/4K0/5K0)30(F/C)-S2
R88M-K(3K0/4K0/5K0)20(F/C)-S2
R88M-K(2K0/3K0)10(F/C)-S2
R88M-K4K510C-S2
R88M-KH(2K0/3K0/4K0/5K0)20(F/C)-S1
MS3108E22-22S
Motor side
R88M-K6K010C-_
R88M-K(7K5/11K0/15K0)15C-_
R88M-KH7K515C-_S1
MS3108E32-17S
Motor side
R88M-K(050/100/200/400/750)30(H/T)-BS2
R88A-CNK11B
Motor side
R88M-K6K010C-BS2
R88M-K(7K5/11K0/15K0)15C-BS2
R88M-KH7K515C-BS1
MS3108E14S-2S
Note: 1. All cables listed are flexible and shielded (except the R88A-CAKA___-BR-E which is only a flexible cable).
2. All connectors and cables listed have IP67 class (except R88A-CNW01R connector and R88A-CRGD0R3C cable).
Specifications
Standard servo motors 3,000 r/min, 230 V
Voltage
Servo motor model R88M-K_
230 V
20-bit incremental encoder 05030H-_
10030H-_
20030H-_
40030H-_
75030H-_
1K030H-_
1K530H-_
17-bit absolute encoder
05030T-_
10030T-_
20030T-_
40030T-_
75030T-_
1K030T-_
1K530T-_
Rated output
50
100
200
400
750
1,000
1,500
Rated torque
Nm
0.16
0.32
0.64
1.3
2.4
3.18
4.77
Instantaneous peak torque
Nm
0.48
0.95
1.91
3.8
7.1
9.55
14.3
Rated current
A (rms)
1.1
1.1
1.5
2.4
4.1
6.6
8.2
4.7
6.5
10.2
17.4
28
35
Instantaneous max. current
A (rms)
4.7
Rated speed
min-1
3,000
Max. speed
min-1
6,000
Torque constant
Nm/A
0.1110%
0.2110%
0.3110%
0.3910%
0.4210%
0.37
0.45
Rotor moment of inertia (JM)
kgm2 10-4
(without brake)
0.025
0.051
0.14
0.26
0.87
2.03
2.84
0.027
0.054
0.16
0.28
0.97
2.35
3.17
20*1
15*1
kgm2 10-4 (with brake)

Allowable load moment of inertia Multiple of (JM)
(JL)
30*1
5,000
131
Accurax G5
Servo motors
Voltage
230 V
10030H-_
20030H-_
40030H-_
75030H-_
1K030H-_
05030T-_
10030T-_
20030T-_
40030T-_
75030T-_
1K030T-_
1K530T-_
Rated power rate
kW/s (without brake)
10.1
19.9
29.0
62.4
65.6
49.8
80.1
kW/s (with brake)
9.4
18.8
25.4
58
58.8
43
71.8
Allowable radial load
68
Allowable thrust load
58
Approx. mass
kg (without brake)
0.32
0.47
0.82
1.2
2.3
3.5
4.4
kg (with brake)
0.53
0.68
1.3
1.7
3.1
4.5
5.4
Brake specifications
Rated voltage
*1
245
1K530H-_
490
98
196
24VDC10%
Holding brake moment of

inertia J
kgm2 10-4
0.002
Power consumption (20C)
0.0018
0.33
17
19
Current consumption (20C) A
0.3
0.36
0.7010%
0.8110%
Static friction torque
2.5
7.8
0.29
1.27
Rise time for holding torque ms (max.)
N.m (minimum)
35
50
Release time
20
15
ms (max)
Time Rating
Continuous
Insulation class
Type B
Ambient operating/storage temperature
0 to 40C/20 to 65C
Ambient operating/storage humidity
20% to 80% (non-condensing)
Vibration class
V-15
Type F
Insulation resistance
20 M min. at 500 VDC between the power terminals and FG terminal
Enclosure
Totally-enclosed, self-cooling, IP67 (excluding shaft opening)
Vibration resistance
Vibration acceleration 49 m/s2
Mounting
Flange-mounted
Applicable load inertia: The operable load inertia ratio (load inertia/rotor inertia) depends on the mechanical configuration and its rigidity. For a machine with high rigidity, operation is possible even with high load inertia. Select an appropriate motor and confirm that operation is possible.

Voltage
400 V
20-bit incremental encoder 75030F-_
1K030F-_
1K530F-_
2K030F-_
3K030F-_
4K030F-_
75030C-_
1K030C-_
1K530C-_
2K030C-_
3K030C-_
4K030C-_
5K030C-_
750
1,000
1,500
2,000
3,000
4,000
5,000
Rated torque
Nm
2.39
3.18
4.77
6.37
9.55
12.7
15.9
Nm
7.16
9.55
14.3
19.1
28.6
38.2
47.7
Rated current
A (rms)
2.4
3.3
4.2
5.7
9.2
9.9
12
A (rms)
10
14
18
24
39
42
51
Rated speed
min-1
3,000
Max. speed
min-1
5,000
Torque constant
Nm/A
0.78
0.75
0.89
0.87
0.81
0.98
kgm2 10-4 (without

brake)
1.61
2.03
2.84
3.68
6.5
12.9
17.4
1.93
2.35
3.17
4.01
7.85
14.2
18.6
20*1
15*1
Rated output

(JL)
Rated power rate
5K030F-_
4,500
35.5
49.8
80.1
110
140
126
146
kW/s (with brake)
29.6
43
71.8
101
116
114
136
490
196
Approx. mass
kg (without brake)
3.1
3.5
4.4
5.3
8.3
11
14
kg (with brake)
4.1
4.5
5.4
6.3
9.4
12.6
16

inertia J
kgm2 10-4
0.33
Rated voltage
*1
784
343
24VDC10%
1.35
17
19
0.7010%
0.8110%
2.5
7.8
N.m (minimum)
22
0.9010%
11.8
16.1
50
110
Release time
15
50
ms (max)
Time Rating
Continuous
Insulation class
Type F
0 to 40C/20 to 65C
Vibration class
V-15
Enclosure
Totally-enclosed, self-cooling, IP67(excluding shaft opening)
Vibration acceleration 49 m/s
Mounting
Flange-mounted
132
Accurax G5
Servo motors
Standard servo motors 2,000 r/min, 230 V/400 V

Voltage
230 V
400 V
20-bit incremental encoder 1K020H-_ 1K520H-_ 40020F-_
60020F-_
1K020F-_ 1K520F-_ 2K020F-_ 3K020F-_ 4K020F-_ 5K020F-_
1K020T-_ 1K520T-_ 40020C-_ 60020C-_ 1K020C-_ 1K520C-_ 2K020C-_ 3K020C-_ 4K020C-_ 5K020C-_
Rated output
1,000
1,500
400
600
1,000
1,500
2,000
3,000
4,000
Rated torque
Nm
4.77
7.16
1.91
2.86
4.77
7.16
9.55
14.3
19.1
23.9
Nm
14.3
21.5
5.73
8.59
14.3
21.5
28.7
43
57.3
71.6
Rated current
A (rms)
5.7
9.4
1.2
1.5
2.8
4.7
5.9
8.7
10.6
13
A (rms)
24
40
4.9
6.5
12
20
25
37
45
55
Rated speed
min-1
2,000
Max. speed
min-1
3,000
Torque constant
Nm/A
0.63
0.58
1.27
1.38
1.27
1.16
1.27
1.18
1.40
1.46
kgm2 10-4 (without brake) 4.60
6.70
1.61
2.03
4.60
6.70
8.72
12.9
37.6
48
7.99
1.90
2.35
5.90
7.99
10
14.2
38.6
48.8
Max. load moment of inertia (JL) Multiple of (JM)
10*1
Rated power rate
49.5
76.5
22.7
40.3
49.5
76.5
105
159
97.1
119
kW/s (with brake)
38.6
64.2
19.2
34.8
38.6
64.2
91.2
144
94.5
117
490
196
Approx. mass
kg (without brake)
5.2
6.7
3.1
3.5
5.2
6.7
11
15.5
18.6
kg (with brake)
6.7
8.2
4.1
4.5
6.7
8.2
9.5
12.6
18.7
21.8
Rated voltage
*1
Servo systems
5.90
5,000
784
343
24VDC 10%
Holding brake moment

inertia
(J) kgm2 10-4
1.35
4.7
14
19
17
14
19
22
0.5910%
0.7910%
0.70 10%
0.5910%
0.79 10%
0.9010%
1.310%
4.9
13.7
2.5
4.9
13.7
16.2
24.5
80
100
50
80
100
110
80
Release time
70
50
15
70
50
N.m (minimum)
ms (max)
Time Rating
Continuous
Insulation class
TypeF
0 to 40 C/20 to 85C
Vibration class
V-15
Enclosure
Mounting
Flange-mounted
31
1.3 -10%
25

Applied voltage
400 V
7K515C-_
11K015C-_
15K015C-_
Rated output
7,500
11,000
15,000
Rated torque
Nm
47.8
70.0
95.5
Nm
119.0
175.0
224.0
Rated current
A (rms)
22.0
27.1
33.1
A (rms)
83
101
118
Rated speed
min-1
1,500
Max. speed
min-1
3,000
2,000
Torque constant
Nm/A
1.54
1.84
2.10
kgm2 10-4 (without

brake)
101
212
302
107
220
311

(JL)
10*1
Rated power rate
226
231
302
kW/s (with brake)
213
223
293
1,176
2,254
490
686
Approx. mass
kg (without brake)
36.4
52.7
70.2
kg (with brake)
40.4
58.9
76.3

inertia J
kgm2 10-4
4.7
7.1
34
26
Rated voltage
24VDC10%
1.410%
1.0810%
58.8
100
150
300
Release time
50
140
N.m (minimum)
ms (max)
133
Accurax G5
Servo motors
Applied voltage
*1
400 V
7K515C-_
Time Rating
Continuous
Insulation class
Type F
11K015C-_
15K015C-_
0 to 40 C/20 to 65C
20% to 85% RH (non-condensing)
Vibration class
V-15
Enclosure
Mounting
Flange-mounted
Standard servo motors 1000 r/min, 230 V/400 V

Applied voltage
230 V
400 V
90010F-_
2K010F-_
3K010F-_
90010T-_
90010C-_
2K010C-_
3K010C-_
4K510C-_
6K010C-_
Rated output
900
900
2,000
3,000
4,500
6,000
Rated torque
Nm
8.59
19.1
28.7
43.0
57.3
Nm
19.3
47.7
71.7
107.0
143.0
Rated current
A (rms)
7.6
3.8
8.5
11.3
14.8
19.4
A (rms)
24
12
30
40
55
74
Rated speed
min-1
1,000
Max. speed
min-1
2,000
Torque constant
Nm/A
0.86
1.72
1.76
1.92
2.05
2.08
kgm2 10-4 (without

brake)
6.70
30.3
48.4
79.1
101
7.99
31.4
49.2
84.4
107

(JL)
Rated power rate
10*1
110
120
170
233
325
kW/s (with brake)
92.4
116
167
219
307
686
1,176
1,470
196
490
Approx. mass
kg (without brake)
6.7
14
20
29.4
36.4
kg (with brake)
8.2
17.5
23.5
33.3
40.4

inertia J
kgm2 10-4
1.35
Rated voltage
*1
1,764
588
24VDC10%
4.7
19
31
34
0.7910%
1.310%
1.410%
58.8
13.7
24.5
N.m (minimum)
100
80
150
Release time
50
25
50
ms (max)
Time Rating
Continuous
Insulation class
Type F
0 to 40 C/20 to 65C
Vibration class
V-15
Enclosure
Mounting
Flange-mounted
High inertia servo motors 3,000 r/min, 230 V

Voltage
Servo motor model R88M-KH_
Rated output
Rated torque
Rated current
Rated speed
Max. speed
Torque constant
134
20-bit incremental encoder

W
Nm
Nm
A (rms)
A (rms)
min-1
min-1
Nm/A
kgm2 10-4 (without
brake)
230 V
20030H-_
20030T-_
200
0.64
1.91
1.6
6.9
3,000
5,000
0.2910%
0.42
40030H-_
40030T-_
400
1.3
3.8
2.6
11.0
75030H-_
75030T-_
750
2.4
7.1
4.0
17.0
0.3610%
0.67
4,500
0.4510%
1.51
0.45
0.70
1.61
Accurax G5
Servo motors
75030H-_
75030T-_
20*1
37.7
35.3
392
147
2.5
3.3
0.075
10
0.42
Servo systems
230 V
40030H-_
20030T-_
40030T-_
30*1
(JL)
Rated power rate
9.58
24.1
kW/s (with brake)
9.06
23.3
N
245
N
98
Approx. mass
kg (without brake)
0.96
1.4
kg (with brake)
1.4
1.8
Rated voltage
24 VDC5%
kgm2 10-4
0.018
inertia J
Power consumption (at 20C) W
9
Current consumption (at
A
0.36
20C)
N.m (minimum)
1.27
50
Release time
ms (max)
15
Time Rating
Continuous
Insulation class
Type B
0 to 40C/20 to 65C
Vibration class
V-15
Enclosure
Totally-enclosed, self-cooling, IP65 (excluding shaft opening and lead wire ends)
Mounting
Flange-mounted
2.45
70
20
Voltage
*1
Applicable load inertia: The operable load inertia ratio (load inertia/rotor inertia) depends on the mechanical configuration and its rigidity. For a machine with high rigidity, operation is
possible even with high load inertia. Select an appropriate motor and confirm that operation is possible.
High inertia servo motors 2,000 and 1,500 r/min, 400 V

R/min, voltage
2,000r/min, 400 V
1,500r/min,
400 V
20-bit incremental encoder 1K020F-_
1K520F-_
2K020F-_
3K020F-_
4K020F-_
1K020C-_
1K520C-_
2K020C-_
3K020C-_
4K020C-_
5K020F-_
5K020C-_
7K515C-_
Rated output
1,000
1,500
2,000
3,000
4,000
5,000
7,500
Rated torque
Nm
4.77
7.16
9.55
14.3
19.1
23.9
47.8
Nm
14.3
21.5
28.6
43.0
57.3
71.6
119
Rated current
A (rms)
2.9
4.7
5.5
8.0
10.5
13.0
22.0
A (rms)
12
20
24
34
45
55
83
Rated speed
min-1
2,000
Max. speed
min-1
3,000
Torque constant
Nm/A
1.27
1.16
1.31
1.34
1.38
1.39
1.54
kgm2 10-4 (without

brake)
24.7
37.1
57.8
90.2
112
162
273
26.0
38.4
62.9
95.3
117
167
279

Max. load moment of inertia (JL) Multiple of (JM)
5*1
Rated power rate
1500
3000
9.2
13.8
15.8
22.7
32.5
35.1
86.7
kW/s (with brake)
8.8
13.4
14.5
21.5
31.1
34.1
85.1
490
784
1,176
196
343
490
Approx. mass
kg (without brake)
6.7
8.6
12.2
16.0
18.6
23.0
42.3
kg (with brake)
8.1
10.1
15.5
19.2
21.8
26.2
46.2
Rated voltage
*1
24 VDC10%
Holding brake moment

inertia
(J) kgm2 10-4
1.35
4.7
14
19
31
0.5910%
0.7910%
1.3010%
1.4010%
4.9
13.7
24.5
58.8
80
100
80
150
Release time
70
50
25
50
N.m (minimum)
ms (max)
Time Rating
Continuous
Insulation class
Type F
0 to 40C/20 to 65C
Vibration class
V-15
20 MW min. at 500 VDC between the power terminals and FG terminal
Enclosure
Mounting
Flange-mounted
34
135
Accurax G5
Servo motors
Dimensions
Type 3,000 r/min motors (230 V, 50 to 100 W)
Dimensions (mm)
Without brake
With brake
Model
LL
LM
LL
LM
R88M-K05030(H/T)-_S2
72
48
102
78
23
R88M-K10030(H/T)-_S2
92
68
122
98
43
Encoder connector
Brake connector
Motor connector
LN
Shaft end dimensions
Approx. mass (kg)
Tap Depth
Without brake
With brake
M3 6L
0.32
0.53
0.47
0.68
Encoder connector
Motor connector
4040
LL
25
LL
25
Shaft end
LM
LM
25
6
3
R3.7
14
12.5
3h9
3
1.5 min.
6.2
30h7
LN
30h7
8h6
8h6
2
LN
46
0.2
1.5 min.
R4.2
24.3
Models without brake
Models with brake
Tap x depth

Dimensions (mm)
Without brake
With brake
Model
LL
LM
LL
LM
LR Flange surface
LB
R88M-K20030(H/T)-_S2
79.5
56.5
116
93
30 50h7 60
R88M-K40030(H/T)-_S2
99
76
135.5 112.5
R88M-K75030(H/T)-_S2
112.2
86.2
148.2 122.2 35 70h7 80
LC
70
90
Encoder connector
Brake connector
LR
6.5 4.5
8
LM
Approx. mass (kg)

Tap Depth
Without brake
With brake
4h9 4
M4 8L
0.82
1.3
5h9 5
M5 10L
1.2
1.7
2.3
3.1
QK
11h6 20
18
8.5
14h6 25
22.5
11
19h6
22
15.5 6h9 6
LCLC
LR
LM
LE
LG
LZ
Encoder connector
Motor connector
LL
Motor connector
LL
LD LE LG
LG
Shaft end
LE
4-LZ
LR
B
T
H
QK
0.2
LD
LB
LB
Tap x depth
1.5 min.
1.5 min.
Model with brake
Model without brake
Type 3,000 r/min motors (230 V, 1 to 1.5 kW/ 400V, 750 W to 5 kW)
LR Flange surface
LL
LM
KB1
KB2
KL1 LL
LM
KB1
KB2
KL1
LA
LB
141
97
66
119
101 168
124
66
146
101 55 135 95h7
LC
LD
Tap
Depth
LE LG S
R88M-K_
230 1K030(H/T)-_S2
1K530(H/T)-_S2
159.5 115.5 84.5
137.5
186.5 142.5 84.5
164.5
100 115 3
10 19h6 M5
12L
45 42 15.5 6h9 6 3.5
4.5
4.4
5.4
131.5 87.5
56.5
109.5
158.5 114.5 53.5
136.5 103
3.1
4.1
1K030(F/C)-_S2
141
66
119
168
146
3.5
4.5
1K530(F/C)-_S2
159.5 115.5 84.5
137.5
186.5 142.5 81.5
164.5
4.4
5.4
2K030(F/C)-_S2
178.5 134.5 103.5 156.5
205.5 161.5 100.5 183.5
5.3
6.3
3K030(F/C)-_S2
190
146
112
168
113 215
171
112
193
113
41 18
8h9 7 8.3
9.4
4K030(F/C)-_S2
208
164
127
186
118 233
189
127
211
118 65 165
55 51 20
11
12.6
5K030(F/C)-_S2
243
199
162
221
268
224
162
246
14
16
97
LL
Motor and brake

connector
124
63
162 110h7 120 145

130
12 22h6
6
24h6 M8
20L
LR
LM
KB2
Shaft end
LCxLC
KB1
LR
Encoder connector
LE
4-9
QK
B
LA
S
LB
LB
60
KL1
LG
400 75030(F/C)-_S2
LD
136
K QK H
Approx.
mass (kg)
With
brake
With brake
Without
brake
Model
Without brake
Voltage
Dimensions (mm)
Tap x depth
Accurax G5
Servo motors
Type 2,000 r/min motors (230 V, 1 to 1.5 kW/400 V, 400 W to 5 kW)
LM
KB1 KB2
KL1 LL
LM
KB1 KB2
KL1
LA
LB
94
60
116 163
119
60
116 55 165 110h7

LC
LD LE LG LZ
R88M-K_
230 1K020(H/T)-_S2 138
116
1K520(H/T)-_S2 155.5 111.5 77.5 133.5

400 40020(F/C)-_S2 131.5 87.5
141
130 145 6
60020(F/C)-_S2 141
97
66
119
168
124
63
146
1K020(F/C)-_S2 138
94
60
116
116 163
119
57
141
118
QK H
22h6 M5 45 41 18
12L
12 9
180.5 136.5 77.5 158.5
56.5 109.5 101 158.5 114.5 53.5 136.5 103
Approx.
mass (kg)
B
8h9
7 5.2
6.7
6.7
8.2
4.1
135 95h7
100 115 3
10
19h6
42 15.5 6h9
6 3.1
3.5
4.5
165 110h7
130 145 6
12
22h6
41 18
8h9
7 5.2
6.7
1K520(F/C)-_S2 155.5 111.5 77.5 133.5
180.5 136.5 74.5 158.5
6.7
8.2
2K020(F/C)-_S2 173
129
95
151
198
154
92
9.5
3K020(F/C)-_S2 208
164
127 186
118 233
189
127 211
11
12.6
4K020(F/C)-_S2 177
133
96
155
140 202
158
96
5K020(F/C)-_S2 196
152
115 174
221
177
115 199
LL
Motor and brake

connector
176
24h6 M8 55 51 20
20L
65
140 70 233 114.3h7 176 200 3.2 18 13.5 35h6 M12
25L
180
50 30
10h9 8 15.5
18.7
18.6
21.8
LR
LM
KB2
Shaft end
LCxLC
KB1
LR
Encoder connector
LE
QK
4-9
KL1
LG
B
T
S
LB
LB
60
LA
LD
Tap x depth
Type 1,500 r/min motors (400 V, 7.5 kW)

Dimensions (mm)
Without brake
Voltage
Model
LL
LM
KB1
KB2
L1
L2
With brake
400
7K515C-_S2
312
268
219
290
117.5
117.5 149
L3
Approx. mass (kg)
LL
LM
KB1
KB2
L1
L2
L3
Whithout brake With brake
337
293
253
315
117.5
152.5
183
36.4
R88M-K_
L2
43.5
L1
Shaft end
4- 13.5
24 3.2
113
96
90
2 min.
Boss insertion positon
114.3h7
42h6
60
184
45
3
23
2
00
M4, through
12h9
L3
37 -0.2
KB1
48
110
176 176
43.5
LL
LM
KB2
44
61.5
Encoder connector
Brake connector
(for model with brake only)
113
114.3h7
Motor connector
40.4
M16
(depth 32 min.)
137
Servo systems
LR Flange surface
With
brake
LL
With brake
Without
brake
Model
Without brake
Tap
Depth
Voltage
Dimensions (mm)
Accurax G5
Servo motors
Type 1,500 r/min motors (400 V, 11 to 15 kW)

Dimensions (mm)
Without brake
Voltage
LL
Model
With brake
LM
KB1
KB2
L1
L2
L3
LL
Approx. mass (kg)
LM
KB1
KB2
L1
L2
L3
Whithout
brake
With brake
R88M-K_
400
11K015C-_S2
316
272
232
294
124.5
124.5
162
364
320
266
342
124.5
159.5
196
52.7
58.9
15K015C-_S2
384
340
300
362
158.5
158.5
230
432
388
334
410
158.5
193.5
264
70.2
76.3
Motor
connector
LL
LM
KB2
44
Encoder
connector
110
Brake connector
116
220 220
KB1
L3
57
57
L2
L1
4- 13.5
4
(Shaft end specications with key and tap)

116
98
90
45 M5,
16h9
through
(Key groove P9)
55m6
55m6
200h7
60
8
26
235
200h7
0
49 -0.2
10
32
205
61.5
48
M20
(depth 40 min.)
2 min.
Type 1,000 r/min motors (230 V, 900 W/400 V, 900 W to 3 kW)
KB1
KB2
KL1 LL
LM
KB1
KB2
KL1
LA
LB

LC
LD
LE LG LZ
R88M-K_
230 90010(H/T)-_S2 155.5 111.5 77.5
158.5 116 70 165 110h7
133.5 116 180.5 136.5 77.5
400 90010(F/C)-_S2
74.5
2K010(F/C)-_S2 163.5 119.5 82.5
130 145 6
22h6 M5
12L
12 9
118
166.5 140 80 233 114.3h7 176 200 3.2 18 13.5 35h6 M12
25L
234.5 190.5 128.5 212.5
LL
Motor and brake

connector
K QK H B
45 41 18 8h9
7 6.7
8.2
M5
10L
141.5 140 188.5 144.5 82.5
3K010(F/C)-_S2 209.5 165.5 128.5 187.5
Approx.
mass (kg)
With
brake
LM
LR Flange surface
Without
brake
LL
With brake
55 50 30 10h9 8 14
17.5
20
23.5
LR
LM
KB2
Shaft end
LCxLC
KB1
LR
Encoder connector
LE
QK
4-9
KL1
LG
LB
S
LB
60
LA
Model
Without brake
Tap
Depth
Voltage
Dimensions (mm)
LD
Tap x depth

Dimensions (mm)
Without brake
Voltage
LL
Model
With brake
LM
KB1
KB2
L1
L2
LL
222
185
244
98
98
291
Approx. mass (kg)
LM
KB1
KB2
L1
L2
Whithout
brake
With brake
247
185
269
98
133
29.4
33.3
R88M-K_
400
4K510C-_S2
Motor and
brake
connector
Encoder
connector
44
266
LL
LM
KB2
KB1
176 176
113
43.5
L2
43.5
L1
2 min.
138
M4, through
2
00
12h9
(Key groove P9)
3
23
37
114.3h7
42h6
60
140
45
0
-0.2
113
96
90
114.3h7
4- 13.5
42h6
61.5
Shaft end
24 3.2
M16
(depth 32 min.)
Accurax G5
Servo motors
Type 1,000 r/min motors (400 V, 6 kW)

Dimensions (mm)
Without brake
Voltage
LL
LM
KB1
KB2
L1
L2
L3
LL
LM
KB1
KB2
L1
L2
L3
Whithout
brake
With brake
312
268
219
290
117.5
117.5
149
337
293
253
315
117.5
152.5
183
36.4
40.4
Model
With brake
Approx. mass (kg)
R88M-K_
Brake connector
113
176 176
43.5
KB1
L3
L2
L1
4- 13.5
24 3.2
42h6
2 min.
3
23
114.3h7
60
184
61.5
48
110
43.5
(Shaft end specications with key and tap)

113
96
90
45 M4, through
12h9
(Key groove P9)
Servo systems
LL
LM
KB2
44
Encoder
connector
2
00
0
37 -0.2
Motor connector
42h6
6K010C-_S2
114.3h7
400
M16
(depth 32 min.)

LL
KB1 LR
LL
Flange surface
LA
LB
LC
LG
LZ
70
50h7
60
6.5
4.5
Approx.
mass (kg)
Tap
Depth
QK
20
T
With
brake
With brake
11h6
M4 8L
18
8.5
4h9
0.96
1.4
14h6
M5 10L 25
22.5
11
5h9
1.4
1.8
19h6
M5 10L 25
22
15.5
6h9
2.5
3.3
R88M-KH@
230 20030(H/T)-_S2-D
129
99
165.5
135.5
42
40030(H/T)-_S2-D
148.5
118.5
185
155
61.5
30
75030(H/T)-_S2-D
162.2
127.2
199.2
164.2
67.2 35
90
70h7
80
300
Encoder connector
Power and brake connector
(Dimensions of shaft end
with key and tap)
LR
300
L
LL
LG
LC LC
36
30
LR
3
4-LZ
K
QK
13
B
T
LA
LB
Voltage
Model
Without brake
Without
brake
Dimensions (mm)
Tap depth
KB1
Encoder connector wiring
Power and brake connector wiring

6
Cable length 30030
Cable length 30030
Connector optional
Connector optional
Made by Hypertac
SRUC-17G-MRWN040 (MALE)
Made by Hypertac
SRUC-06J-MSCN236 (MALE)
4
3
Encoder connector
Pin No.
Signal
BAT (0 V)
2
3
BAT +
S+
Phase V
Phase W
*Brake terminal
5 to 7
Pin No.
Output
Phase U
Free
5
*Brake terminal
E5V (power supply)
6
FG (ground)
E0V (power supply)
* Note: Pins 4 and 5 used only for
Free
motors with brake.
Connector case
FG (Ground)
Mating connector:
* Note: Pins 1 and 2 used only for
Plug type: SPOC-06K-FSDN169 (FEMALE)
motors with ABS encoder.
Mating connector:
Plug type: SPOC-17H-FRON169 (FEMALE)
8
9
10 to 17
139
Accurax G5
Servo motors
Type 2,000 r/min motors (400 V, 1 kW to 5 kW)

Dimensions (mm)
With brake
LM
KB1
173
129
95
KB2
KL1 LL
LM
KB1
KB2
KL1
LA
LB
151
116 201
157
92
179
118 70 165 110h7
Shaft End Dimensions

LC
LD
LE LG LZ
QK H
Approx.
mass (kg)
8h9
7 6.7
Without
brake
With
brake
LL
LR Flange surface
R88M-KH@
400 1K020(F/C)-_S1
130 145 6
22h6 45 41 18
12 9
190.5 146.5 112.5
168.5
2K020(F/C)-_S1
177
133
96
155
140 206
162
96
184
3K020(F/C)-_S1
196
152
115
174
225
181
115
203
4K020(F/C)-_S1
209.5 165.5 128.5
187.5
238.5 194.5 128.5 216.5
18.6 21.8
5K020(F/C)-_S1
238.5 194.5 157.5
216.5
267.5 223.5 157.5 245.5
23.0 26.2
LL
8.6
140 80 233 114.3h7 176 200 3.2 18 13.5 35h6 55 50 30
16.0 19.2
LR
LM
KB2
KB1
Encoder connector
10.1
10h9 8 12.2 15.5
Shaft end
LC LC
LR
K
LE
QK
4-LZ
KL1
LG
B
S
LB
LB
60
LA
Motor and brake

connector
218.5 174.5 109.5 196.5
8.1
1K520(F/C)-_S1
Voltage
Model
Without brake
LD

Dimensions (mm)
Without brake
Voltage
Model
LL
LM
KB1
KB2
L1
L2
L3
With brake
LL
LM
KB1
KB2
L1
L2
L3
Approx. mass (kg)

Whithout brake With brake
400
7K515C-_S1
357
313
264
335
146.5
146.5
194
382
338
298
360
146.5
181.5
228
42.3
R88M-KH_
L1
Shaft end
4- 13.5
24 3.2
113
96
90
2 min.
140
114.3h7
42h6
60
45
3
23
2
00
M4, through
12h9
37
L2
43.5
184
L3
0
-0.2
KB1
48
110
176 176
43.5
LL
LM
KB2
44
61.5
Encoder connector
Brake connector
113
114.3h7
Motor connector
46.2
G-Series
Servo motors
Compact in size, big in features
Servo systems
A wide range of compact servo motors to meet all application needs. When used
with a SmartStep 2 drive, the G-Series servo motors offer the simplicity and costeffectiveness of a stepper with the added advantages of a servo system.
Peak torque 300% of continuous torque during 3 seconds or more depending
on model
Servo motors supported by SmartStep2, G-Series and Accurax G5 servo drives
Cylindrical and Flat servo motors types are available
Encoder accuracy of 10,000 step/rev as standard and 17-bit INC/ABS encoder
as optional
IP65 as standard and shaft oil seal available
Motors with brake as option
AC SERVO DRIVER
9 01
2 3
2 3
7 8
ADR
5 6
X10
01
X1
COM
SP
IM
G
Drive options
A
Servo motor with
standard connector
3,000 rpm (50 to 750 W)
Flat type servo motor

with standard connector
3,000 rpm (100 to 400 W)
A
Servo motor with
circular connector
3,000 rpm (50 to 750 W)
Flat type servo motor

with circular connector
3,000 rpm (100 to 400 W)
H Power cable
G Power cable
E Encoder cable
G-Series servo drive

ML2 and analog/pulse
models (100 to 1500 W)
D Encoder cable
F Power cable
I Brake cable
C Encoder cable
SmartStep 2
Servo drive controlled
by pulses (100 to 750 W)
A
3,000 rpm (1,000 to 1,500 W)
2,000 rpm (1,000 to 1,500 W)
1,000 rpm (900 W)
Note: The symbols ABCDEF ... show the recommended sequence to select the servo motor and cables
Servo drive
B Refer to G-Series and SmartStep2 servo drive section for detailed drive specifications and selection of drive accessories.
Servo motor
A Select motor from cylindrical and flat types using motor tables in next pages.
141
G-Series
Servo motors
Cylindrical servo motors 3,000/2,000/1,000 r/min (230 V, 50 to 1.5 kW)

Symbol
Specifications
Encoder and design
Speed
Design
Servo motor with

standard connector
Servo motor with

circular connector
SmartStep 2
G-Series
Order code
Incremental
3,000 min-1 Without brake
encoder (10,000 pulses)
0.16 Nm
50 W
R7D-BP01H
R88D-G_01H_
R88M-G05030H-S2
R88M-G05030H-S2-D
0.32 Nm
100 W
R7D-BP01H
R88D-G_01H_
R88M-G10030H-S2
R88M-G10030H-S2-D
0.64 Nm
200 W
R7D-BP02HH
R88D-G_02H_
R88M-G20030H-S2
R88M-G20030H-S2-D
Straight shaft
with key and tap
1.3 Nm
400 W
R7D-BP04H
R88D-G_04H_
R88M-G40030H-S2
R88M-G40030H-S2-D
2.4 Nm
750 W
R88D-GP08H
R88D-G_08H_
R88M-G75030H-S2
R88M-G75030H-S2-D
0.16 Nm
50 W
R7D-BP01H
R88D-G_01H_
R88M-G05030H-BS2
R88M-G05030H-BS2-D
0.32 Nm
100 W
R7D-BP01H
R88D-G_01H_
R88M-G10030H-BS2
R88M-G10030H-BS2-D
0.64 Nm
200 W
R7D-BP02HH
R88D-G_02H_
R88M-G20030H-BS2
R88M-G20030H-BS2-D
1.3 Nm
400 W
R7D-BP04H
R88D-G_04H_
R88M-G40030H-BS2
R88M-G40030H-BS2-D
2.4 Nm
750 W
R88D-GP08H
R88D-G_08H_
R88M-G75030H-BS2
R88M-G75030H-BS2-D
0.16 Nm
50 W
R88D-G_01H_
R88M-G05030T-S2
R88M-G05030T-S2-D
0.32 Nm
100 W
R88D-G_01H_
R88M-G10030T-S2
R88M-G10030T-S2-D
0.64 Nm
200 W
R88D-G_02H_
R88M-G20030T-S2
R88M-G20030T-S2-D
1.3 Nm
400 W
R88D-G_04H_
R88M-G40030T-S2
R88M-G40030T-S2-D
2.4 Nm
750 W
R88D-G_08H_
R88M-G75030T-S2
R88M-G75030T-S2-D
3.18 Nm
1 kW
R88D-G_15H_
R88M-G1K030T-S2
4.77 Nm
1.5 kW
R88D-G_15H_
R88M-G1K530T-S2
0.16 Nm
50 W
R88D-G_01H_
R88M-G05030T-BS2
R88M-G05030T-BS2-D
0.32 Nm
100 W
R88D-G_01H_
R88M-G10030T-BS2
R88M-G10030T-BS2-D
0.64 Nm
200 W
R88D-G_02H_
R88M-G20030T-BS2
R88M-G20030T-BS2-D
1.3 Nm
400 W
R88D-G_04H_
R88M-G40030T-BS2
R88M-G40030T-BS2-D
2.4 Nm
750 W
R88D-G_08H_
R88M-G75030T-BS2
R88M-G75030T-BS2-D
3.18 Nm
1 kW
R88D-G_15H_
R88M-G1K030T-BS2
4.77 Nm
1.5 kW
R88D-G_15H_
R88M-G1K530T-BS2
4.8 Nm
1 kW
R88D-G_10H_
R88M-G1K020T-S2
7.15 Nm
1.5 kW
R88D-G_15H_
R88M-G1K520T-S2
4.8 N m
1 kW
R88D-G_10H_
R88M-G1K020T-BS2
7.15 Nm
1.5 kW
R88D-G_15H_
R88M-G1K520T-BS2
8.62 Nm
900 W
R88D-G_15H_
R88M-G90010T-S2
8.62 Nm
900 W
R88D-G_15H_
R88M-G90010T-BS2
Servo motor with

standard connector
Servo motor with

circular connector
With brake
(50 to 750 W)
Absolute/
incremental
encoder (17 bits)
Straight shaft
with key and tap
(900 to 1,500 W)
With brake

With brake
With brake
Flat type servo motors 3,000 r/min (230 V, 100 to 400 W)

Symbol
Specifications
Encoder and design
Incremental encoder
(10,000 pulses)
Straight shaft
with key and tap
Absolute/ incremental encoder

(17 bits)
Straight shaft
with key and tap
142
Without brake
With brake
Without brake
With brake
SmartStep 2
G-Series
Order code
0.32 Nm
100 W
R7D-BP01H
R88D-G_01H_
R88M-GP10030H-S2
R88M-GP10030H-S2-D
0.64 Nm
200 W
R7D-BP02HH
R88D-G_02H_
R88M-GP20030H-S2
R88M-GP20030H-S2-D
1.3 Nm
400 W
R7D-BP04H
R88D-G_04H_
R88M-GP40030H-S2
R88M-GP40030H-S2-D
0.32 Nm
100 W
R7D-BP01H
R88D-G_01H_
R88M-GP10030H-BS2
R88M-GP10030H-BS2-D
0.64 Nm
200 W
R7D-BP02HH
R88D-G_02H_
R88M-GP20030H-BS2
R88M-GP20030H-BS2-D
1.3 Nm
400 W
R7D-BP04H
R88D-G_04H_
R88M-GP40030H-BS2
R88M-GP40030H-BS2-D
0.32 Nm
100 W
R88D-G_01H_
R88M-GP10030T-S2
R88M-GP10030T-S2-D
0.64 Nm
200 W
R88D-G_02H_
R88M-GP20030T-S2
R88M-GP20030T-S2-D
1.3 Nm
400 W
R88D-G_04H_
R88M-GP40030T-S2
R88M-GP40030T-S2-D
0.32 Nm
100 W
R88D-G_01H_
R88M-GP10030T-BS2
R88M-GP10030T-BS2-D
0.64 Nm
200 W
R88D-G_02H_
R88M-GP20030T-BS2
R88M-GP20030T-BS2-D
1.3 Nm
400 W
R88D-G_04H_
R88M-GP40030T-BS2
R88M-GP40030T-BS2-D
G-Series
Servo motors
Encoder cables
Symbol
Appearance
Specifications
Encoder cable (50 to 750 W)

R88M-G(50/100/200/400/750)30
R88M-GP(100/200/400)30
Absolute
encoder
T-_
Incremental
encoder
H-_
Length
Order code
1.5 m
R88A-CRGA001-5CR-E
3m
R88A-CRGA003CR-E
5m
R88A-CRGA005CR-E
10 m
R88A-CRGA010CR-E
15 m
R88A-CRGA015CR-E
20 m
R88A-CRGA020CR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CRGB001-5CR-E
3m
R88A-CRGB003CR-E
5m
R88A-CRGB005CR-E
10 m
R88A-CRGB010CR-E
15 m
R88A-CRGB015CR-E
20 m
R88A-CRGB020CR-E
Servo systems
For 50 to 750 W servo motors with standard connectors
For 50 to 750 W servo motors with circular connector

Symbol
Appearance
Specifications
Length
Order code
Encoder cable (50 to 750 W)

R88M-G(50/100/200/400/750)30_- _ _ _ -D
R88M-GP(100/200/400)30_- _ _ _ -D
3m
R88A-CRWA003C-DE
5m
R88A-CRWA005C-DE
10 m
R88A-CRWA010C-DE
15 m
R88A-CRWA015C-DE
20 m
R88A-CRWA020C-DE
Specifications
Length
Order code
Encoder cable (900-1500 W)

R88M-G(1K0/1K5)30T-_
R88M-G(1K0/1K5)20T-_
R88M-G90010T-_
1.5 m
R88A-CRGC001-5NR-E
3m
R88A-CRGC003NR-E
5m
R88A-CRGC005NR-E
10 m
R88A-CRGC010NR-E
15 m
R88A-CRGC015NR-E
20 m
R88A-CRGC020NR-E
For 900 to 1,500 W servo motors

Symbol
Appearance
Battery cable for G-series servo drive models with absolute encoder
Symbol
Appearance
Specifications
Absolute encoder battery cable

Battery holder
Order code
Battery
not included
0.3 m R88A-CRGDOR3C-E
Battery
included
0.3 m R88A-CRGDOR3C-BS-E
Absolute encoder backup battery 2,000 mA.h 3.6 V
R88A-BAT01G
Note: The absolute encoder battery cable is only an extension and must be used with an absolute encoder cable.
Power cables
For 50 to 750 W servo motors with standard connectors
Symbol
F
Appearance
Specifications
Applicable
servo drive
For servomotors from 50 to 400 W

R88M-G(050/100/200/400)30_
R88M-GP(100/200/400)30_
SmartStep 2 1.5 m
For servomotors with brake, a separate cable

(R88A-CAGA_BR-E) is needed
For servomotors from 50 to 750W
R88M-G(050/100/200/400/750)30_
R88M-GP(100/200/400)30_
For servomotors with brake, a separate cable
(R88A-CAGA_BR-E) is needed
Length
Order code
R7A-CAB001-5SR-E
3m
R7A-CAB003SR-E
5m
R7A-CAB005SR-E
10 m
R7A-CAB010SR-E
15 m
R7A-CAB015SR-E
20 m
R7A-CAB020SR-E
SmartStep 2 1.5 m
(only 750 W) 3 m
and
5m
G-Series
10 m
R88A-CAGA001-5SR-E
R88A-CAGA003SR-E
R88A-CAGA005SR-E
R88A-CAGA010SR-E
15 m
R88A-CAGA015SR-E
20 m
R88A-CAGA020SR-E
143
G-Series
Servo motors
For 50 to 750 W servo motors with circular connectors

Symbol
Appearance
Specifications
R88M-G(050/100/200/400)30_
R88M-GP(100/200/400)30_
Applicable
servo drive
Without SmartStep 2 1.5 m

brake
3m
-S2-D
5m
With
brake
-BS2-D

R88M-G(050/100/200/400/750)30_
R88M-GP(100/200/400)30_
Length
Order code
R7A-CAB001-5SR-DE
R7A-CAB003SR-DE
R7A-CAB005SR-DE
10 m
R7A-CAB010SR-DE
15 m
R7A-CAB015SR-DE
20 m
R7A-CAB020SR-DE
1.5 m
R7A-CAB001-5BR-DE
3m
R7A-CAB003BR-DE
5m
R7A-CAB005BR-DE
10 m
R7A-CAB010BR-DE
15 m
R7A-CAB015BR-DE
20 m
R7A-CAB020BR-DE
Without SmartStep 2 3 m
brake
(only 750 W) 5 m
-S2-D
and
10 m
G-Series
15 m
R88A-CAWA003S-DE
20 m
R88A-CAWA020S-DE
3m
R88A-CAWA003B-DE
5m
R88A-CAWA005B-DE
10 m
R88A-CAWA010B-DE
15 m
R88A-CAWA015B-DE
20 m
R88A-CAWA020B-DE
Length
Order code
With
brake
-BS2-D
R88A-CAWA005S-DE
R88A-CAWA010S-DE
R88A-CAWA015S-DE
For 900 to 1,500 W servo motors

Symbol
Appearance
Specifications
Applicable
servo drive
For servomotors from 900 to 1.5 kW Without G-Series

R88M-G(1K0/1K5)30T_
brake
R88M-G(1K0/1K5)20T_
-S2
R88M-G90010T_
With
brake
-BS2
1.5 m
R88A-CAGB001-5SR-E
3m
R88A-CAGB003SR-E
5m
R88A-CAGB005SR-E
10 m
R88A-CAGB010SR-E
15 m
R88A-CAGB015SR-E
20 m
R88A-CAGB020SR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAGB001-5BR-E
3m
R88A-CAGB003BR-E
5m
R88A-CAGB005BR-E
10 m
R88A-CAGB010BR-E
15 m
R88A-CAGB015BR-E
20 m
R88A-CAGB020BR-E
Brake cable with standard connector

Symbol
F
Appearance
Specifications
Brake cable only.
For servomotors from 50 to 750W with brake
R88M-G(050/100/200/400/750)30_-BS2,
R88M-GP(100/200/400)30_-BS2
Order code
1.5 m R88A-CAGA001-5BR-E
3 m R88A-CAGA003BR-E
144
G-Series
Servo motors
Specifications
Connectors for power cable
Order code
Drive side (CNB)
R88M-G(050/100/200/400)30H_
R88M-GP(100/200/400)30H_
R7A-CNB01A
Motor side
Standard connector
R88M-G(050/100/200/400/750)30_
R88M-GP(100/200/400)30_
R88A-CNG01A
R88M-G(1K0/1K5)30_-S2
R88M-G(1K0/1K5)20_-S2
R88M-G90010_-S2
MS3108E20-4S
R88M-G(1K0/1K5)30_-BS2
R88M-G(1K0/1K5)20_-BS2
R88M-G90010_-BS2
MS3108E20-18S
R88M-G(50/100/200/400/750)30_-_ _ _ -D
R88M-GP(100/200/300)_-_ _ _ -D
SPOC-06K-FSDN169
Circular connector
(Hypertac)
Connectors for encoder cable
Connector for brake cable
Drive side (CN2)
All models
R88A-CNW01R
Motor side
Standard connector
R88M-G(050/100/200/400/750)30T-_
R88M-GP(100/200/400)30T-_
R88A-CNG01R
R88M-G(050/100/200/400/750)30H-_
R88M-GP(100/200/400)30H-_
R88A-CNG02R
R88M-G(1K0/1K5)30T-_
R88M-G(1K0/1K5)20T-_
R88M-G90010T-_
MS3108E20-29S
Circular connector
(Hypertac)
R88M-G(50/100/200/400/750)30_-_ _ _ -D
R88M-GP(100/200/300)_-_ _ _ -D
SPOC-17H-FRON169
Standard connector
R88M-G(050/100/200/400/750)30_-BS2
R88M-GP(100/200/400)30_-BS2
R88A-CNG01B
Order code
Circular connector
(Hypertac)
R88M-G(50/100/200/400/750)30_-_ _ _ -D
R88M-GP(100/200/300)_-_ _ _ -D
SRUC-06J-MSCN236
R88M-G(50/100/200/400/750)30_-_ _ _ -D
R88M-GP(100/200/300)_-_ _ _ -D
SRUC-17G-MRWN087
Motor side
Servo systems
Connectors for power, encoder and brake cables
Connectors included with the motor

Specifications
Power and brake connector (MALE)
Encoder connector (MALE)
Note: 1. All cables listed are flexible and shielded (except the R88A-CAGA _ _ _ BR-E which is only a flexible cable).
2. The R88A-CRGC _ _ _ NR-E, R88A-CAGB _ _ _ SR-E, R88A-CAGB _ _ _ BR-E, R88A-CRWA _ _ _ C-DE, R88A-CAWA _ _ _ S-DE and R88A-CAWA _ _ _ B-DE cables have IP67 class
(including connector).
Specifications
Cylindrical servo motors 3,000/2,000/1,000 r/min
Applied voltage
230 V
Servo motor model R88M-_
G05030_
G10030_
G20030_
G40030_
G75030_
G1K030T
G1K530T
G1K020T
G1K520T
G90010T
Rated output
50
100
200
400
750
1,000
1,500
1,000
1,500
900
Rated torque
Nm
0.16
0.32
0.64
1.3
2.4
3.18
4.77
4.8
7.15
8.62
Nm
0.45
0.90
1.78
3.67
7.05
9.1
12.8
13.5
19.6
18.4
Rated current
A (rms)
1.1
1.6
2.6
7.2
9.4
5.6
9.4
7.6
A (rms)
3.4
4.9
7.9
12.1
21.4
28.5
17.1
28.5
17.1
Rated speed
min-1
3,000
Max. speed
min-1
5,000
4,500
5,000
2,000
1,000
3,000
2,000
Torque constant
Nm/A (rms)
0.14
0.19
0.41
0.51
0.64
0.44
0.51
0.88
0.76
kgm2x10-4
0.025
0.051
0.14
0.26
0.87
1.69
2.59
6.17
11.2
Allowable load moment of inertia (JL)
Multiple of (JM)
30
20
15
Rated power rate
kW/s
10.4
20.1
30.3
62.5
66
60
Applicable Encoder
Incremental encoder (10,000 pulses)
1.13
10
88
37.3
45.8
66.3
Incremental /Absolute encoder(17 bits)

N
68
245
392
490
58
98
147
196
Approx. mass
kg (without brake) 0.3
0.5
0.8
1.2
2.3
4.5
5.1
6.8
8.5
kg (with brake)
0.7
1.3
1.7
3.1
5.1
6.5
8.7
10.1
Rated voltage
0.5
24 VDC5%
686
10
24 VDC10%
Holding brake moment of inertia J kgm2x10-4
0.002
0.018
0.075
0.25
0.33
1.35
Power consumption (at 20C)
10
18
19
14
Current consumption (at 20C)
0.3
0.36
0.42
0.74
0.81
0.59
0.79
N.m (minimum)
0.29
1.27
2.45
4.9
7.8
4.9
13.7
Rise time for holding torque
ms (max.)
35
50
70
50
80
100
Release time
ms (max)
20
15
20
15
70
50
19
145
G-Series
Servo motors
Applied voltage
230 V
G05030_
Rating
G10030_
G20030_
G40030_
G75030_
G1K030T
G1K530T
G1K020T
Continuous
Insulation grade
Type B
Type F
0 to 40C/20 to 65C
0 to 40C/20 to 80C
85% RH max. (non-condensing)
Vibration class
V-15
Enclosure
Mounting
Flange-mounted
Vibration acceleration 24.5 m/s
Flat servo motors 3,000 r/min

Applied voltage
230 V
GP10030_
GP20030_
GP40030_
Rated output
100
200
400
Rated torque
Nm
0.32
0.64
1.3
Nm
0.86
1.8
3.65
Rated current
A (rms)
1.6
2.5
A (rms)
3.1
4.9
7.5
3,000
Rated speed
min-1
Max. speed
min-1
5,000
Torque constant
Nm/A (rms)
0.34
0.42
0.54
kgm2x10-4
0.1
0.35
0.64
11.5
25.5
Allowable load moment of inertia (JL)
Multiple of (JM)
20
Rated power rate
kW/s
10.2
Applicable encoder
Incremental (10,000 pulses)

Incremental/Absolute encoder (17 bits)
68
245
58
98
Approx. mass
146
kg (without brake) 0.7
1.3
1.8
kg (with brake)
2.5
Rated voltage
0.9
24 VDC10%
Holding brake moment of inertia J kgm2x10-4
0.03
0.09
Power consumption (at 20C)
10
Current consumption (at 20C)
0.29
0.41
N.m (minimum)
0.29
1.27
Rise time for holding torque
ms (max.)
50
60
Release time
ms (max)
15
Rating
Continuous
Insulation grade
Type B
0 to 40C/20 to 80C
85% RH max. (non-condensing)
Vibration class
V-15
Enclosure
Mounting
Flange-mounted
G1K520T
G90010T
G-Series
Servo motors
Dimensions
Cylindrical type 3,000 r/min (230 V, 50 to 100 W)
Dimensions (mm)
Without brake
With brake
Model
LL
LL
LN
R88M-G05030_-_S2-_
72
102
26.5
R88M-G10030_-_S2-_
92
122
46.5
Flange surface
Shaft end
Aprox. mass (kg)

Without brake
With brake
30h7
8h6
3h9
0.3
0.5
0.5
0.7
Servo motor with standard connector
LL
Brake connector
Servomotor connector
25
3

with key and tap)
230
14
12.5
B
1.8
40 40
32
200
Two, 4.3 dia.
Servo systems
Encoder
connector
46 d
ia.
M3 x 6L (Tap x Depth)
LN
Servo motor with circular connector

6
Cable length 30030
300
Encoder connector
Cable length 30030

Connector optional
Made by Hypertac
Made by Hypertac
Encoder connector
300
25
6
LL
Connector optional
Pin No.
Signal
BAT - (0 V)
2
3
BAT +
S+
S-
5 to 7
Free
E5V (power supply)

E0V (power supply)
LN
Pin No.
Output
Phase U
2
3
Phase V
Phase W
*Brake terminal
*Brake terminal
FG (ground)
*Note: Pins 4 and 5 used only for

Free
motors with brake.
Connector case
FG (Ground)
Mating connector:
Mating connector:
10 to 17
147
G-Series
Servo motors
Cylindrical type 3,000 r/min (230 V, 200 to 750 W)

Dimensions (mm)
Without
brake
With
brake
Model
LL
LL
R88M-G20030_-_S2-_
79.5
116
R88M-G40030_-_S2-_
99
135.5
R88M-G75030_-_S2-_
112.2
149.2
LR
KL1 Flange surface
Shaft end
D1
D2
QK
T1
Tap depth
Without brake
With brake
30
43
70
50h7 60
6.5
4.5
11h6
18
4h9
2.5
M4 8L
0.8
1.3
14h6
22.5
5h9
M5 10L
1.2
1.7
35
53
90
70h7 80
19h6
22
6h9
3.5
2.3
3.1
Aprox. mass (kg)

Brake connector
Servomotor connector
Encoder
connector
LL
LR
3
220

with key and tap)
QK
CC
B
H
T1
200
Four, Z dia.
KL1
ia.
D1 d
D2
Tap x Depth

6
300
Cable length 30030
Made by Hypertac
Encoder connector
300
LR
3
Pin No.
Signal
BAT - (0 V)
2
3
BAT +
S+
S-
5 to 7
Free
8
9
E5V (power supply)

E0V (power supply)
Free
Cable length 30030

Connector optional
Made by Hypertac
LL
Connector optional
Encoder connector
D2
10 to 17
Pin No.
Output
Phase U
2
3
Phase V
Phase W
*Brake terminal
*Brake terminal
FG (ground)

motors with brake.
Mating connector:
Connector case
FG (Ground)
Mating connector:
Cylindrical type 3,000, 2,000 and 1,000 r/min (230 V, 900 kW to 1.5 kW)
Dimensions (mm)
Without brake
With brake
Model
LL
LL
LR
R88M-G1K030T-_S2
175
200
R88M-G1K530T-_S2
180
205
R88M-G1K020T-_S2
150
175
118 145
R88M-G1K520T-_S2
175
200
R88M-G90010T-_S2
175
200
55
KL1 Flange surface
Shaft end
D1
D2
D3
100
80h7
120
90
6.6 19h6
103 115
95h7
135
100 10
110h7 165
130 12
98
T1
Tap
depth
Without
brake
42
6h9
3.5
M5 12L 4.5
5.1
5.1
6.5
9
6
22h6
41
8h9
With brake
6.8
8.7
8.5
10.1
70
10

with key and tap)
Servomotor/brake
connector
Approx. mass (kg)
QK
LL
CC
LR
Encoder
Four, Z dia.
QK
B
T1
84
KL1
connector
D2
ia.
D3 d
D1 d
ia.
Tap x Depth
148
G-Series
Servo motors
Flat type 3;000 r/min (230 V, 100 W to 400 W)

Dimensions (mm)
Without
brake
With
brake
Model
LL
LL
R88M-GP10030H-_S2-_
60.5
84.5
R88M-GP10030T-_S2-_
87.5
111.5
R88M-GP20030H-_S2-_
67.5
100
R88M-GP20030T-_S2-_
94.5
127
R88M-GP40030H-_S2-_
82.5
115
R88M-GP40030T-_S2-_
109.5
142
LR
KL1 Flange surface

D1
D2
QK
T1
Tap depth
Without brake
With brake
25
43
70
50h7 60
4.5
8h6
12.5
3h9
1.8
M3 6L
0.7
0.9
30
53
90
70h7 80
5.5
11h6 18
4h9
2.5
M4 8L
1.3
14h6 22.5
5h9
3.0
M5 10L
1.8
2.5
Shaft end
Aprox. mass (kg)

Encoder
connector
LL
LR
Servo systems
Motor connector
Brake connector
CC
QK
Four, Z dia.
KL1
T1
(7)
(7)
200
220

with key and tap)
dia.
Tap Depth
D2
D1

6
300
Encoder connector
Made by Hypertac
2 Made by Hypertac
Cable length 30030

Connector optional
3
Encoder connector
LL
LR
F
D2
Connector optional
300
G
5
Cable length 30030
Pin No.
Signal
Pin No.
Output
BAT - (0 V)
Phase U
BAT +
S+
Phase V
Phase W
S-
*Brake terminal
*Brake terminal
FG (ground)
5 to 7
Free
8
9
10 to 17
E5V (power supply)

E0V (power supply)

motors with brake.
Mating connector:
Free
Connector case
FG (Ground)
Mating connector:
149
Frequency inverters
BORN TO DRIVE MACHINES
Harmonised motor and machine control
Specifically created for your application, the MX2 was developed to harmonise advanced motor and machine control.
Thanks to its advanced design and algorithms the MX2 provides smooth control down to zero speed, plus precise
operation for fast cyclic operations and torque control capability in open loop.
The MX2 also gives you comprehensive functionality for machine control such as positioning, speed synchronisation
and logic programming. The MX2 is fully integrated within the Omron smart automation platform.
The MX2 is the child of a true leader in machine automation.
What is your inverter application needs?

Closed loop control?
No
Yes
With sensorless vector control?
No
Yes
>7.5 kW?
>15 kW?
No
Yes
No
Yes
690 V power supply?
No
Lift application
IP54 protection?
No
JX
MX2
RX
LX
IP54
150
RS-485 Modbus and

EMC filter built-in,
side-by-side-mounting,
0.2 to 7.5 kW
Logic programming, positioning,

built-in safety,
0.1 to 15 kW
Logic programming,
positioning,
application oriented,
0.4 to 132 kW
Logic programming,
synchronous/asynchronous motor
control,
3.7 to 18.5 kW
D222
Page 166
D228, D239
Page 160
D224
Page 154
D238
Frequency inverters
Yes
Yes
SX (690 V)
SX (400 V)
IP54
Logic programming,
hardware customisation,
0.75 to 800 kW
Logic programming,
hardware customisation,
90 to 1000 kW
D243
D243
151
152
Model
Frequency inverters
RX
LX
Customised to your machine
Lift applications
400 V three-phase
0.4 kW to 132 kW
3.7 kW to 18.5 kW
200 V three-phase
0.4 kW to 55 kW
Application
High performance, built-in know-how functionality
Lift control with asynchronous and synchronous motors
Control method
Open and closed loop for vector and V/F control
Open and closed loop vector control and V/F control
Torque features
200% at 0.0 Hz (CLV)

150% at 0.3 Hz (OLV)
150% at 0.0 Hz (CLV)

200% at 0.3 Hz (OLV)
Connectivity
Modbus, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS, MECHATROLINK-II, EtherCAT, CompoNet
Modbus
Logic programming
Standard firmware
Standard firmware
Page/Quick Link
154
D238
Model
MX2
JX
Frequency inverters
Selection table
IP54
Born to drive machines
Compact and complete
400 V three-phase
0.4 kW to 15 kW
0.4 kW to 7.5 kW
200 V three-phase
0.1 kW to 15 kW
0.2 kW to 7.5 kW
200 V single-phase
0.1 kW to 2.2 kW
0.2 kW to 2.2 kW
Application
Harmonized motor and machine control
General purpose built-in communications
Control method
Open loop speed and torque control for vector and speed for V/F control
V/F control
Torque features
200% at 0.5 Hz
150% at 3 Hz
Connectivity
Modbus, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS, MECHATROLINK-II, EtherCAT, CompoNet,

EtherNet IP
Modbus
Logic programming
Standard firmware
N/A
Customisation options
IP54 enclosure
N/A
Page/Quick Link
160
166
Model
SX (400 V)
SX (690 V)
IP54
High performance vector control

400 V three-phase
0.75 kW to 800 kW
690 V three-phase
90 kW to 1,000 kW
Application
High power flux vector and variable torque applications
High power flux vector and variable torque applications
Control method
Flux vector and V/F control
Flux vector and V/F control
Torque features
120% at 0,0 Hz (CLV)

120% at 0,5 Hz (OLV)
120% at 0,0 Hz (CLV)

120% at 0,5 Hz (OLV)
Connectivity
Modbus, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS, EtherCAT, Modbus TCP, CAN
Modbus, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS, EtherCAT, Modbus TCP, CAN
Logic programming
Standard firmware
Standard firmware
Customisation options
Hardware customisation (main switch, liquid cooling, 12-pulse rectifier, ) Hardware customisation (main switch, liquid cooling, 12-pulse rectifier, )
Page/Quick Link
D243
D243
153
RX
Frequency inverters
Customised to your machine
Omron realises that you need quality and reliability, plus the ability to easily and
quickly customise your inverter to the application in hand. And with the RX, you have
the perfect tool for the job. Naturally it combines the same high level of quality and
performance for which Omron is renowned. It also has abundant application functionality on board and you can customise it yourself to match your precise requirements.
Ratings up to 132 kW
Full torque at 0 Hz in closed loop
Sensor-less and vector closed-loop control
Built-in EMC filter
Built-in logic programmability
Built-in application oriented functionality
Fieldbus communications: Modbus, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS, MECHATROLINK-II,
EtherCAT and CompoNet
Power
supply
B
RJ45 USB cable
E
Software
MCCB
A
Input AC reactor
Digital
operator
options
Digital operator
remote cable
5 lines LCD
digital operator*1
Operator
holder
Filter
or
RX
Communication
option board*2
Blind cover
LED digital
operator
D
Braking chopper
D
A
Choke
Braking resistor
DC reactor
Motor
Ground
*1
*2
Output AC reactor
The 5 lines LCD digital operator is provided with the inverter from factory.
When a communication option board is mounted, there are two options: mount a blind cover or a LED digital operator.
154
RX
Frequency inverters
3G3RX
Voltage class
Constant torque
Variable torque
Max.
Rated
Max.
motor kW current A motor
KW
Three-phase
200 V
Order code
Specifications
Standard
Voltage class
Rated
current A
Order code
Constant torque
Variable torque
Standard
Max.
Rated
Max.
motor kW current A motor
KW
Rated
current A
0.4
1.5
0.75
1.9
3G3RX-A4004-E1F
0.75
2.5
1.5
3.1
3G3RX-A4007-E1F
0.4
3.0
0.75
3.7
3G3RX-A2004-E1F
0.75
5.0
1.5
6.3
3G3RX-A2007-E1F
1.5
7.5
2.2
9.4
3G3RX-A2015-E1F
1.5
3.8
2.2
4.8
3G3RX-A4015-E1F
2.2
10.5
4.0
12
3G3RX-A2022-E1F
2.2
5.3
4.0
6.7
3G3RX-A4022-E1F
4.0
16.5
5.5
19.6
3G3RX-A2037-E1F
4.0
9.0
5.5
11.1
3G3RX-A4040-E1F
5.5
24
7.5
30
3G3RX-A2055-E1F
5.5
14
7.5
16
3G3RX-A4055-E1F
7.5
32
11
44
3G3RX-A2075-E1F
7.5
19
11
22
3G3RX-A4075-E1F
11
46
15
58
3G3RX-A2110-E1F
11
25
15
29
3G3RX-A4110-E1F
15
64
18.5
73
3G3RX-A2150-E1F
15
32
18.5
37
3G3RX-A4150-E1F
18.5
76
22
85
3G3RX-A2185-E1F
18.5
38
22
43
3G3RX-A4185-E1F
22
95
30
113
3G3RX-A2220-E1F
22
48
30
57
3G3RX-A4220-E1F
30
121
37
140
3G3RX-A2300-E1F
30
58
37
70
3G3RX-A4300-E1F
37
145
45
169
3G3RX-A2370-E1F
37
75
45
85
3G3RX-A4370-E1F
45
182
55
210
3G3RX-A2450-E1F
45
91
55
105
3G3RX-A4450-E1F
55
220
75
270
3G3RX-A2550-E1F
55
112
75
135
3G3RX-A4550-E1F
75
149
90
160
3G3RX-B4750-E1F
90
176
110
195
3G3RX-B4900-E1F
110
217
132
230
3G3RX-B411K-E1F
132
260
160
290
3G3RX-B413K-E1F
Three-phase
400 V
Frequency inverters
Specifications
A Rasmi line filter

200 V
400 V
Model 3G3R_X-_
Leakage
Nom./Max.
Rated
Weight
current A (kg)
Order code
Model 3G3RX-_
Leakage
Nom./Max.
Rated
Weight
current A (kg)
Order code
A2004/A2007/A2015/
A2022/A2037
0.7/40 mA
18
2.0
AX-FIR2018-RE
A4004/A4007/A4015/
A4022/A4040
0.3/40 mA
10
1.9
AX-FIR3010-RE
A2055/A2075/A2110
0.7/40 mA
53
2.5
AX-FIR2053-RE
A4055/A4075/A4110
0.3/40 mA
30
2.2
AX-FIR3030-RE
A2150/A2185/A2220
1.2/70 mA
110
8.0
AX-FIR2110-RE
A4150/A4185/A4220
0.8/70 mA
53
4.5
AX-FIR3053-RE
A2300
1.2/70 mA
145
8.6
AX-FIR2145-RE
A4300
3/160 mA
64
7.0
AX-FIR3064-RE
A2370/A2450
6/300 mA
250
13.0
AX-FIR3250-RE
A4370
2/130 mA
100
8.0
AX-FIR3100-RE
A2550
6/300 mA
320
13.2
AX-FIR3320-RE
A4450/A4550
2/130 mA
130
8.6
AX-FIR3130-RE
A4750/A4900
10/500 mA
250
13.0
AX-FIR3250-RE
A411K/A413K
10/500 mA
320
13.2
AX-FIR3320-RE
A Input AC reactors
3-phase 200 VAC
3-phase 400 VAC
Inverter model 3G3RX-_
Order code
Order code
A2004/A2007/A2015
AX-RAI02800100-DE
A4004/A4007/A4015
AX-RAI07700050-DE
A2022/A2037
AX-RAI00880200-DE
A4022/A4040
AX-RAI03500100-DE
A2055/A2075
AX-RAI00350335-DE
A4055/A4075
AX-RAI01300170-DE
A2110/A2150
AX-RAI00180670-DE
A4110/A4150
AX-RAI00740335-DE
A2185/A2220
AX-RAI00091000-DE
A4185/A4220
AX-RAI00360500-DE
A2300/A2370
AX-RAI00071550-DE
A4300/A4370
AX-RAI00290780-DE
A2450/A2550
AX-RAI00042300-DE
A4450/A4550
AX-RAI00191150-DE
A4750/A4900
AX-RAI00111850-DE
A411K/A413K
AX.RAI00072700-DE
A DC reactors
3-phase 200 VAC
3-phase 400 VAC
Order code
Order code
A2004
AX-RC10700032-DE
A4004
AX-RC43000020-DE
A2007
AX-RC06750061-DE
A4007
AX-RC27000030-DE
A2015
AX-RC03510093-DE
A4015
AX-RC14000047-DE
A2022
AX-RC02510138-DE
A4022
AX-RC10100069-DE
A2037
AX-RC01600223-DE
A4040
AX-RC06400116-DE
A2055
AX-RC01110309-DE
A4055
AX-RC04410167-DE
A2075
AX-RC00840437-DE
A4075
AX-RC03350219-DE
A2110
AX-RC00590614-DE
A4110
AX-RC02330307-DE
A2150
AX-RC00440859-DE
A4150
AX-RC01750430-DE
A2185/A2220
AX-RC00301275-DE
A4185/A4220
AX-RC01200644-DE
A2300
AX-RC00231662-DE
A4300
AX-RC00920797-DE
A2370
AX-RC00192015-DE
A4370
AX-RC00741042-DE
A2450
AX-RC00162500-DE
A4450
AX-RC00611236-DE
A2550
AX-RC00133057-DE
A4550
AX-RC00501529-DE
155
RX
Frequency inverters
3-phase 200 VAC
3-phase 400 VAC
Order code
Order code
A4750
AX-RC00372094-DE
A4900
AX-RC00312446-DE
A411K
AX-RC00252981-DE
A413K
AX-RC00213613-DE
A Chokes
Diameter
Description
Order code
21
For 2.2 kW motors or below
AX-FER2102-RE
25
For 15 kW motors or below
AX-FER2515-RE
50
For 45 kW motors or below
AX-FER5045-RE
60
For 55 kW motors or above
AX-FER6055-RE
A Output AC Reactor
200 V
400 V
Model 3G3RX-_
Order code
Model 3G3RX-_
Order code
A2004
AX-RAO11500026-DE
A4004/A4007/A4015
AX-RAO16300038-DE
A2007
AX-RAO07600042-DE
A2015
AX-RAO04100075-DE
A2022
AX-RAO03000105-DE
A4022
AX-RAO11800053-DE
A2037
AX-RAO01830160-DE
A4040
AX-RAO07300080-DE
A2055
AX-RAO01150220-DE
A4055
AX-RAO04600110-DE
A2075
AX-RAO00950320-DE
A4075
AX-RAO03600160-DE
A2110
AX-RAO00630430-DE
A4110
AX-RAO02500220-DE
A2150
AX-RAO00490640-DE
A4150
AX-RAO02000320-DE
A2185
AX-RAO00390800-DE
A4185
AX-RAO01650400-DE
A2220
AX-RAO00330950-DE
A4220
AX-RAO01300480-DE
A2300
AX-RAO00251210-DE
A4300
AX-RAO01030580-DE
A2370
AX-RAO00191450-DE
A4370
AX-RAO00800750-DE
A2450
AX-RAO00161820-DE
A4450
AX-RAO00680900-DE
A2550
AX-RAO00132200-DE
A4550
AX-RAO00531100-DE
A4750
AX-RAO00401490-DE
A4900
AX-RAO00331760-DE
A411K
AX-RAO00262170-DE
A413K
AX-RAO00212600-DE
Note: This table corresponds with HD rating. When ND is used, please choose the reactor for the next size inverter.
B Accessories
Types
Appearance
Remote digital operator
LED digital operator
Description
Order code
5 line LCD digital operator with copy function*1
3G3AX-OP05
Operator holder (for inside cabinet mounting)
3G3AX-OP05-H-E
LED remote digital operator
3G3AX-OP01
Mounting kit
4X-KITmini
To be used in combination with communication option boards
3G3AX-OP03
3G3AX-OP05-B-E
Blind cover
Cables
3 m remote digital operator cable
3G3AX-CAJOP300-EE
RJ45 to USB connection cable
USB-CONVERTERCABLE
3G3AX-PCACN2
*1
This digital operator is provided with the RX inverter from factory.
C Option boards
Types
Description
Functions
Order code
Encoder feedback
PG speed controller option

card
Phase A,B and Z pulse (differential pulse) inputs (RS-422)

Pulse train position command input (RS-422)
Pulse monitor output (RS-422)
PG frequency range: 100 kHz max
3G3AX-PG
Used for running or stopping the inverter, setting or referencing parameters, and monitoring
output frequency, output current ... through communications with the host controller
3G3AX-RX-DRT
Communication option board DeviceNet option card

Profibus option card
I/O option
156
3G3AX-RX-PRT
Ethercat option card
3G3AX-RX-ECT
CompoNet option card
3G3AX-RX-CRT
Mechatrolink-II option card
3G3AX-RX-MRT
Extra input/output option card 8 digital inputs, 8 digital outputs, 4 analog inputs, 1 analog output
3G3AX-EIO21-ROE
RX
Frequency inverters
D Braking unit, braking resistor unit

Voltage
Braking resistor unit

Max. motor Inverter
kW
3G3RX_
Braking unit
AX-BCR_
Connectable min. Inverter mounted type (3% ED, 10 sec Braking

resistance
max.)
torque %
Built-in
50
3-phase
200 V
0.55
(single-/
1.1
three-phase)
1.5
2004
Order code
Resist
AX-REM00K1200-IE
200
2007
2015
35
2.2
2022
4.0
2037
5.5
2055
16
7.5
2075
10
11.0
2110
15.0
2150
18.5
2185
22.0
2220
30.0
2300
37.0
2370
45.0
2450
55.0
2550
400 V
0.55
(three-phase) 1.1
4004
7.5
AX-REM00K2070-IE
70
2070130-TE
2.8
Built-in
100
Order code
Resist
180
AX-REM00K1200-IE
200
180
100
AX-REM00K2070-IE
70
200
140
AX-REM00K4075-IE
75
130
90
AX-REM00K4035-IE
35
180
75
50
AX-REM00K6035-IE
35
100
AX-REM00K4035-IE
35
75
AX-REM00K9020-IE
20
150
55
AX-REM01K9017-IE
17
110
75
AX-REM00K6035-IE
35
40
AX-REM02K1017-IE
17
AX-REM00K9017-IE
17
55
AX-REM03K5010-IE
10
95
AX-REM03K5010-IE
10
75
AX-REM19K0008-IE
95
AX-REM19K0006-IE
80
60
2 x AX-REM19K0006-IE
105
85
AX-REM00K1400-IE
400
200
65
80
AX-REM00K1400-IE
400
200
AX-REM00K1200-IE
200
190
AX-REM00K2200-IE
200
190
AX-REM00K2200-IE
200
130
AX-REM00K5120-IE
120
200
AX-REM00K2120-IE
120
120
AX-REM00K6100-IE
100
140
AX-REM00K4075-IE
75
140
AX-REM00K9070-IE
70
150
100
AX-REM01K9070-IE
70
110
4007
200
1.5
4015
2.2
4022
4.0
4040
5.5
4055
7.5
4075
11.0
4110
15.0
4150
18.5
4185
22.0
4220
30.0
4300
4015045-TE
16
37.0
4370
4017068-TE
45.0
4450
55.0
4550
70
Braking
torque %
AX-REM00K4075-IE
5
2035090-TE
External resistor 10% ED

10 sec max. for built-in
5 sec max. for braking unit
35
200
AX-REM00K6100-IE
100
50
AX-REM02K1070-IE
70
75
AX-REM00K9070-IE
70
55
AX-REM03K5035-IE
35
110
AX-REM03K5035-IE
35
90
AX-REM19K0030-IE
30
100
AX-REM19K0020-IE
20
95
11
AX-REM38K0012-IE
15
125
4035090-TE
8.5
10
100
24
20
75
Frequency inverters
Inverter
85
100
75.0
4750
10
75
90.0
4900
4070130-TE
5.5
105
110.0
411K
4090240-TE
3.2
125
132.0
413K
105
E Computer software
Description
Installation
Order code
Computer software
Configuration and monitoring software tool
CX-Drive
Computer software
CX-One
Computer software
Software tool for energy saving calculation
Saver
157
RX
Frequency inverters
Specifications
200 V class
Three-phase: 3G3RX-_
A2004
Max. applicable motor 4P kW*1 at CT 0.4
Braking
Power supply
Output characteristics
at VT 0.75
Inverter
capacity kVA
200 V at CT 1.0
A2007
A2015
A2022
A2037
A2055
A2075
A2110
A2150
A2185
A2220
A2300
A2370
A2450
A2550
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
1.7
2.5
3.6
5.7
8.3
11.0
15.9
22.1
26.3
32.9
41.9
50.2
63.0
76.2
93.5
at VT 1.3
2.1
3.2
4.1
6.7
10.4
15.2
20.0
26.3
29.4
39.1
49.5
59.2
72.7
240 V at CT 1.2
2.0
3.1
4.3
6.8
9.9
13.3
19.1
26.6
31.5
39.4
50.2
60.2
75.6
91.4
at VT 1,5
2.6
3.9
5.0
8.1
12.4
18.2
24.1
31.5
35.3
46.9
59.4
71.0
87.2
112.2
Rated output current at CT 3.0

(A)
at VT 3.7
5.0
7.5
10.5
16.5
24
32
46
64
76
95
121
145
182
220
6.3
9.4
12
19.6
30
44
58
73
85
113
140
169
210
270
16
10
10
7.5
7.5
Max. output voltage
Proportional to input voltage: 0 to 240 V
Max. output frequency
400 Hz
Rated input voltage

and frequency
3-phase 200 to 240 V 50/60 Hz
Allowable voltage
fluctuation
15% to 10%
Allowable frequency
fluctuation
5%
Regenerative braking
Internal BRD circuit (external discharge resistor)
Minimum connectable
resistance
50
50
35
IP20
Cooling method
Forced air cooling
*1
35
External regenerative braking unit
35
Based on a standard 3-phase standard motor.
400 V class
Three-phase: 3G3RX-_
A4004 A4007 A4015 A4022 A4040 A4055 A4075 A4110 A4150 A4185 A4220 A4300 A4370 A4450 A4550 B4750 B4900 B411K B413K
Max. applicable motor 4P kW*1 at CT 0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
1.5
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
400 V at CT 1.0
1.7
2.5
3.6
6.2
9.7
13.1
17.3
22.1
26.3
33.2
40.1
51.9
63.0
77.6
103.2 121.9 150.3 180.1
at VT 1.3
2.1
3.3
4.6
7.7
11.0
15.2
20.9
25.6
30.4
39.4
48.4
58.8
72.7
93.5
110.8 135
480 V at CT 1.2
2.0
3.1
4.3
7.4
11.6
15.8
20.7
26.6
31.5
39.9
48.2
62.3
75.6
93.1
123.8 146.3 180.4 216.1
Braking
Power supply
at VT 0.75
Inverter
capacity kVA
at VT 1.5
2.5
4.0
5.5
9.2
13.3
18.2
24.1
30.7
36.5
47.3
58.1
70.6
87.2
112.2 133
Rated output current at CT 1.5

(A)
at VT 1.9
2.5
3.8
5.3
9.0
14
19
25
32
38
48
58
75
91
112
149
176
217
260
3.1
4.8
6.7
11.1
16
22
29
37
43
57
70
85
105
135
160
195
230
290
35
35
24
24
20
Max. output voltage
400 Hz
Rated input voltage

and frequency
3-phase 380 to 480 V 50/60 Hz
Allowable voltage
fluctuation
15% to 10%
Allowable frequency
fluctuation
5%
Regenerative braking
Internal BRD circuit (external discharge resistor)
Minimum connectable
resistance
100
100
100
IP20
Cooling method
Forced air cooling
*1
Based on a standard 3-phase standard motor.
158
159.3 200.9
100
70
70
External regenerative braking unit
IP00
162.1 191.2 241.1
RX
Frequency inverters
Dimensions
Voltage class
Inverter model
Three-phase 200 V
3G3RX-A2004
Dimensions in mm
H
Weight (kg)
255
150
140
3.5
260
210
170
390
250
190
14
3G3RX-A2300
540
310
195
20
3G3RX-A2370
550
390
250
30
3G3RX-A2550
700
480
250
43
3G3RX-A4004
255
150
140
3.5
260
210
170
390
250
190
14
3G3RX-A4300
540
310
195
22
3G3RX-A4370
550
390
250
30
700
390
270
60
740
480
270
80
3G3RX-A2007
3G3RX-A2015
3G3RX-A2022
3G3RX-A2037
3G3RX-A2055
3G3RX-A2075
3G3RX-A2110
Frequency inverters
3G3RX-A2150
3G3RX-A2185
3G3RX-A2220
3G3RX-A2450
Three-phase 400 V
3G3RX-A4007
3G3RX-A4015
3G3RX-A4022
3G3RX-A4040
3G3RX-A4055
3G3RX-A4075
3G3RX-A4110
3G3RX-A4150
3G3RX-A4185
3G3RX-A4220
3G3RX-A4450
3G3RX-A4550
3G3RX-B4750
3G3RX-B4900
3G3RX-B411K
3G3RX-B413K
159
MX2
Frequency inverters
Born to drive machines
MX2 has been developed to harmonise advanced motor and machine control. Thanks
to its advanced design algorithms the MX2 provides smooth control down to zero
speed, plus precise operation for fast cyclic operations and torque control capability in
open loop. The MX2 also gives you comprehensive functionality for machine control
such as positioning, speed synchronisation and logic programming.
Current vector control
Double rating VT 120%/1 min and CT 150%/1 min
IM & PM motor control
Torque control in open loop vector
Positioning functionality
Built-in application functionality (i.e. Brake control)
Fieldbus comms: Modbus, DeviceNet, Profibus, MECHATROLINK-II, EtherCAT,
CompoNet and EtherNet/IP
Power
supply
USB cable
CX-Drive
CX-One
MCCB
Remote operator
extension cable
Input AC reactor
LCD 5 lines remote

operator
Installation accessory
Filter
Communication option
MX2
Braking resistor
A
Choke
DC reactor
Motor
Output AC reactor
Ground
3G3MX2
Specifications
Voltage class
Order code
Constant torque
Max motor kW
Single-phase
200 V
Three-phase
200 V
160
Variable torque
Rated current A
Max motor kW
Standard (IP20)
Finless
IP54
Rated current A
0.1
1.0
0.2
1.2
3G3MX2-AB001-E
3G3MX2-AB001-P-E
3G3MX2-DB001-E/EC
0.2
1.6
0.4
1.9
3G3MX2-AB002-E
3G3MX2-AB002-P-E
3G3MX2-DB002-E/EC
0.4
3.0
0.55
3.5
3G3MX2-AB004-E
3G3MX2-AB004-P-E
3G3MX2-DB004-E/EC
0.75
5.0
1.1
6.0
3G3MX2-AB007-E
3G3MX2-AB007-P-E
3G3MX2-DB007-EC
1.5
8.0
2.2
9.6
3G3MX2-AB015-E
3G3MX2-AB015-P-E
3G3MX2-DB015-EC
2.2
11.0
3.0
12.0
3G3MX2-AB022-E
3G3MX2-AB022-P-E
3G3MX2-DB022-EC
0.1
1.0
0.2
1.2
3G3MX2-A2001-E
3G3MX2-A2001-P-E
3G3MX2-D2001-E/EC
0.2
1.6
0.4
1.9
3G3MX2-A2002-E
3G3MX2-A2002-P-E
3G3MX2-D2002-E/EC
0.4
3.0
0.55
3.5
3G3MX2-A2004-E
3G3MX2-A2004-P-E
3G3MX2-D2004-E/EC
0.75
5.0
1.1
6.0
3G3MX2-A2007-E
3G3MX2-A2007-P-E
3G3MX2-D2007-E/EC
1.5
8.0
2.2
9.6
3G3MX2-A2015-E
3G3MX2-A2015-P-E
3G3MX2-D2015-EC
2.2
11.0
3.0
12.0
3G3MX2-A2022-E
3G3MX2-A2022-P-E
3G3MX2-D2022-EC
3.7
17.5
5.5
19.6
3G3MX2-A2037-E
3G3MX2-A2037-P-E
3G3MX2-D2037-EC
5.5
25.0
7.5
30.0
3G3MX2-A2055-E
3G3MX2-D2055-EC
7.5
33.0
11
40.0
3G3MX2-A2075-E
3G3MX2-D2075-EC
11
47.0
15
56.0
3G3MX2-A2110-E
3G3MX2-D2110-EC
15
60.0
18.5
69.0
3G3MX2-A2150-E
3G3MX2-D2150-EC
MX2
Frequency inverters
Specifications
Order code
Constant torque
Variable torque
Max motor kW
Three-phase
400 V
Rated current A
Max motor kW
Standard (IP20)
Finless
IP54
Rated current A
0.4
1.8
0.75
2.1
3G3MX2-A4004-E
3G3MX2-A4004-P-E
3G3MX2-D4004-EC
0.75
3.4
1.5
4.1
3G3MX2-A4007-E
3G3MX2-A4007-P-E
3G3MX2-D4007-EC
1.5
4.8
2.2
5.4
3G3MX2-A4015-E
3G3MX2-A4015-P-E
3G3MX2-D4015-EC
2.2
5.5
3.0
6.9
3G3MX2-A4022-E
3G3MX2-A4022-P-E
3G3MX2-D4022-EC
3.0
7.2
4.0
8.8
3G3MX2-A4030-E
3G3MX2-A4030-P-E
3G3MX2-D4030-EC
4.0
9.2
5.5
11.1
3G3MX2-A4040-E
3G3MX2-A4040-P-E
3G3MX2-D4040-EC
5.5
14.8
7.5
17.5
3G3MX2-A4055-E
3G3MX2-D4055-EC
7.5
18.0
11
23.0
3G3MX2-A4075-E
3G3MX2-D4075-EC
11
24.0
15
31.0
3G3MX2-A4110-E
3G3MX2-D4110-EC
15
31.0
18.5
38.0
3G3MX2-A4150-E
3G3MX2-D4150-EC
A Line filters
Inverter
Standard line filter
Low leakage line filter
Rasmi
Schaffner
Rasmi
Schaffner
Voltage
Model 3G3MX2-_
Order code
AX-FIM
Current (A)
Order code
AX-FIM
Current (A)
Order code
AX-FIM
Current (A)
Order code
AX-FIM
Current (A)
1Phase
200 VAC
AB001 / AB002 / AB004
1010-RE
10
1010-SE-V1
1010-RE-LL
10
1010-SE-LL
10
AB007
1014-RE
14
1014-SE-V1
14
1014-RE-LL
14
1014-SE-LL
14
AB015 / AB022
1024-RE
24
1024-SE-V1
27
1024-RE-LL
24
1024-SE-LL
24
A2001 / A2002 /
A2004 / A2007
2010-RE
10
2010-SE-V1
7.8
2010-RE-LL
10
A2015 / A2022
2020-RE
20
2020-SE-V1
16
2020-RE-LL
20
2020-SE-LL
20
A2037
2030-RE
30
2030-SE-V1
25
2030-RE-LL
30
2030-SE-LL
30
A2055 / A2075
2060-RE
60
2060-SE-V1
50
2060-RE-LL
60
2060-SE-LL
50
A2110
2080-RE
80
2080-SE-V1
70
2080-RE-LL
80
A2150
2100-RE
100
2100-SE-V1
75
2100-RE-LL
100
A4004 / A4007
3005-RE
3005-SE-V1
3005-RE-LL
3005-SE-LL
A4015 / A4022 / A4030
3010-RE
10
3010-SE-V1
12
3010-RE-LL
10
3010-SE-LL
10
A4040
3014-RE
14
3014-SE-V1
15
3014-RE-LL
14
3014-SE-LL
15
A4055 / A4075
3030-RE
30
3030-SE-V1
29
3030-RE-LL
30
3030-SE-LL
30
A4110 / A4150
3050-RE
50
3050-SE-V1
48
3050-RE-LL
50
3050-SE-LL
50
3Phase
200 VAC
3Phase
400 VAC
A Input AC reactors
Inverter
AC Reactor
Inverter
Voltage
Model 3G3MX2-_
Order code
Voltage
Model 3G3MX2-_
Order code
1-Phase 200 VAC
AB002/AB004
AX-RAI02000070-DE
3-Phase 400 VAC
A4004/A4007/A4015
AX-RAI07700050-DE
AB007
AX-RAI01700140-DE
A4022/A4030/A4040
AX-RAI03500100-DE
AB015
AX-RAI01200200-DE
A4055/A4075
AX-RAI01300170-DE
AB022
AX-RAI00630240-DE
A4110/A4150
AX-RAI00740335-DE
A2002/A2004/A2007
AX-RAI02800080-DE
A2015/A2022/A2037
AX-RAI00880200-DE
A2055/A2075
AX-RAI00350335-DE
A2110/A2150
AX-RAI00180670-DE
3-Phase 200 VAC
AC Reactor
A DC reactors
200 V single-phase
200 V three-phase
400 V three-phase
Inverter
Order code
Inverter
Order code
Inverter
Order code
3G3MX2-AB001
AX-RC10700032-DE
3G3MX2-A2001
AX-RC21400016-DE
3G3MX2-A4004
AX-RC43000020-DE
3G3MX2-A4007
AX-RC27000030-DE
3G3MX2-AB002
3G3MX2-A2002
3G3MX2-AB004
AX-RC06750061-DE
3G3MX2-A2004
AX-RC10700032-DE
3G3MX2-A4015
AX-RC14000047-DE
3G3MX2-AB007
AX-RC03510093-DE
3G3MX2-A2007
AX-RC06750061-DE
3G3MX2-A4022
AX-RC10100069-DE
3G3MX2-AB015
AX-RC02510138-DE
3G3MX2-A2015
AX-RC03510093-DE
3G3MX2-A4030
AX-RC08250093-DE
3G3MX2-AB022
AX-RC01600223-DE
3G3MX2-A2022
AX-RC02510138-DE
3G3MX2-A4040
AX-RC06400116-DE
3G3MX2-A2037
AX-RC01600223-DE
3G3MX2-A4055
AX-RC04410167-DE
3G3MX2-A2055
AX-RC01110309-DE
3G3MX2-A4075
AX-RC03350219-DE
3G3MX2-A2075
AX-RC00840437-DE
3G3MX2-A4011
AX-RC02330307-DE
3G3MX2-A2011
AX-RC00590614-DE
3G3MX2-A4015
AX-RC01750430-DE
3G3MX2-A2015
AX-RC00440859-DE
A Chokes
Diameter
Description
Order code
21
For 2.2 KW motors or below
AX-FER2102-RE
25
For 15 KW motors or below
AX-FER2515-RE
50
For 45 KW motors or below
AX-FER5045-RE
161
Frequency inverters
Voltage class
MX2
Frequency inverters
A Output AC reactor
Inverter
AC Reactor
Inverter
Voltage
Model 3G3MX2-_
Order code
Voltage
Model 3G3MX2-_
AC Reactor
Order code
200 VAC
AB001/AB002/AB004/A2001/A2002/
A2004
AX-RAO11500026-DE
400 VAC
A4004/A4007/A4015
AX-RAO16300038-DE
A4022
AX-RAO11800053-DE
AB007/A2007
AX-RAO07600042-DE
A4030/A4040
AX-RAO07300080-DE
AB015/A2015
AX-RAO04100075-DE
A4055
AX-RAO04600110-DE
AB022/A2022
AX-RAO03000105-DE
A4075
AX-RAO03600160-DE
A2037
AX-RAO01830160-DE
A4110
AX-RAO02500220-DE
A2055
AX-RAO01150220-DE
A4150
AX-RAO02000320-DE
A2075
AX-RAO00950320-DE
A2110
AX-RAO00630430-DE
A2150
AX-RAO00490640-DE
B Accessories
Types
Description
Functions
Order code
Digital operator
LCD remote operator
5 Line LCD remote operator with copy function, cable length max. 3m.
AX-OP05-E
Remote operator cable
3 meters cable for connecting remote operator
3G3AX-CAJOP300-EE
LED remote operator
LED remote operator, cable length max. 3m
3G3AX-OP01
Accessories
Mounting kit for LED operator Mounting kit for LED operator on panel
4X-KITMINI
Operator holder
Holder to put the AX-OP05-E inside of the cabinet
3G3AX-OP05-H-E
PC configuration cable
Mini USB to USB connector cable
AX-CUSBM002-E
C Communication option boards

Description
Functions
Profibus option card
Used for running or stopping the inverter, setting or referencing parameters, and monitoring output frequency, output current, 3G3AX-MX2-PRT
or similar items through communications with the host controller.
3G3AX-MX2-DRT
DeviceNet option card
Order code
EtherCAT option card
3G3AX-MX2-ECT
CompoNet option card
3G3AX-MX2-CRT
MECHATROLINK-II option card
3G3AX-MX2-MRT
3G3AX-MX2-EIP
EtherNet/IP option card

Extra input/output option
board
3G3AX-MX2-EIO15-E
1 analog voltage input, 1 analog current input, 1 analog voltage output, 8 discrete logic inputs,
4 discrete logic outputs
D Braking unit, braking resistor unit

Inverter
Braking resistor unit
Voltage
Max. motor
kW
Inverter 3G3MX2_ Connectable min.

resistance
Inverter mounted type

(3 %ED, 10 sec max)
1-phase 3-phase
Order code
Resist
200 V
(Single-/Threephase)
0.12
B001
2001
AX-REM00K1400-IE
400
0.25
B002
2002
0.55
B004
2004
1.1
B007
2007
1.5
B015
2015
2.2
B022
2022
4.0
2040
5.5
2055
20
7.5
2075
17
11
2110
15
2150
0.55
4004
1.1
4007
1.5
4015
400 V
(Three-phase)
2.2
4022
3.0
4030
4.0
4040
5.5
4055
7.5
4075
11
4110
15
4150
100
Braking Inverter mounted type

torque % (10%ED, 10 sec max)
200
Braking
torque %
Order code
Resist
AX-REM00K1400-IE
400
200
180
180
AX-REM00K1200-IE
200
180
AX-REM00K1200-IE
200
180
100
AX-REM00K2070-IE
70
200
AX-REM00K2070-IE
70
140
AX-REM00K4075-IE
75
130
90
AX-REM00K4035-IE
35
180
50
35
AX-REM00K4075-IE
75
50
AX-REM00K6035-IE
35
100
AX-REM00K4035-IE
35
75
AX-REM00K9020-IE
20
150
55
AX-REM01K9017-IE
17
110
AX-REM00K6035-IE
35
40
AX-REM02K1017-IE
17
75
10
AX-REM00K9017-IE
17
55
AX-REM03K5010-IE
10
95
180
AX-REM00K1400-IE
400
200
AX-REM00K1400-IE
400
200
200
100
70
35
200
AX-REM00K1200-IE
200
190
AX-REM00K2200-IE
200
190
AX-REM00K2200-IE
200
130
AX-REM00K5120-IE
120
200
AX-REM00K2120-IE
120
160
120
AX-REM00K6100-IE
100
140
140
AX-REM00K9070-IE
70
150
100
AX-REM01K9070-IE
70
110
AX-REM00K4075-IE
75
160
AX-REM00K6100-IE
100
50
AX-REM02K1070-IE
70
75
AX-REM00K9070-IE
70
55
AX-REM03K5035-IE
35
110
E Computer software
Description
Installation
Order code
Computer software
CX-Drive
Computer software
CX-One
Computer software
Software tool for Energy Saving calculation
Saver
162
MX2
Frequency inverters
Specifications
200 V class
Single-phase: 3G3MX2-_
B001
B002
B004
B007*1
B015
B022
Three-phase: 3G3MX2-_
2001
2002
2004
2007
2015
2022
2037
2055
2075
2110
2150
For VT setting
0.2
0.4
0.55
1.1
2.2
3.0
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
For CT setting
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
23.9
Output
characteristics
Inverter capacity kVA
Power
supply
200 VT
0.4
0.6
1.2
2.0
3.3
4.1
6.7
10.3
13.8
19.3
200 CT
0.2
0.5
1.0
1.7
2.7
3.8
6.0
8.6
11.4
16.2
20.7
240 VT
0.4
0.7
1.4
2.4
3.9
4.9
8.1
12.4
16.6
23.2
28.6
240 CT
0.3
0.6
1.2
2.0
3.3
4.5
7.2
10.3
13.7
19.5
24.9
Rated output current (A) at VT
1.2
1.9
3.5
6.0
9.6
12.0
19.6
30.0
40.0
56.0
69.0
Rated output current (A) at CT
1.0
1.6
3.0
5.0
8.0
11.0
17.5
25.0
33.0
47.0
60.0
Max. output voltage
Proportional to input voltage: 0 240 V
400 Hz
Rated input voltage and frequency
Single-phase 200 240 V 50/60 Hz

3-phase 200 240 V 50/60 Hz
Allowable voltage fluctuation
15% +10%
Allowable frequency fluctuation
5%
70%:
<50Hz
50%:
<60Hz
Approx 20%
Braking At short-time deceleration

torque
At capacitor feedback
100%: <50Hz
Cooling method
Self cooling*3
*1
*2
*3
Frequency inverters
Motor
kW*2
50%: <60Hz
Forced-air-cooling
Three phase model use forced-air-cooling but single phase model is self cooling.
Based on a standard 3-Phase standard motor.
Forced air cooling for IP54 models
400 V class
Three-phase: 3G3MX2-_
Motor
kW*1
4004
4007
4015
4022
4030
4040
4055
4075
4110
4150
For VT setting
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.0
4.0
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
For CT setting
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.0
4.0
5.5
7.5
11
15
380 VT
1.3
2.6
3.5
4.5
5.7
7.3
11.5
15.1
20.4
25.0
380 CT
1.1
2.2
3.1
3.6
4.7
6.0
9.7
11.8
15.7
20.4
480 VT
1.7
3.4
4.4
5.7
7.3
9.2
14.5
19.1
25.7
31.5
480 CT
25.7
Output
characteristics
Power
supply
1.4
2.8
3.9
4.5
5.9
7.6
12.3
14.9
19.9
Rated output current (A) at VT
2.1
4.1
5.4
6.9
8.8
11.1
17.5
23.0
31.0
38.0
Rated output current (A) at CT
1.8
3.4
4.8
5.5
7.2
9.2
14.8
18.0
24.0
31.0
Max. output voltage
Proportional to input voltage: 0 480 V
400 Hz
Rated input voltage and frequency
3-phase 380 480 V 50/60 Hz
15% +10%
5%
Braking At short-time deceleration*2

torque At capacitor feedback
100%: <50Hz
50%: <60Hz
Cooling method
Self cooling*2
*1
*2
70%: <50Hz
50%: <60Hz
Forced-air-cooling

Forced air cooling for IP54 models
163
MX2
Frequency inverters
Dimensions
Standard models (IP20)
Voltage class
Single-phase 200 V
Inverter model
3G3MX2-AB001-E
Dimensions in mm
Weight (kg)
128
68
109
3G3MX2-AB002-E
3G3MX2-AB004-E
3G3MX2-AB007-E
128
108
122.5
1.1
170.5
1.4
3G3MX2-AB015-E
1.8
3G3MX2-AB022-E
Three-phase 200 V
3G3MX2-A2001-E
1.8
128
68
109
3G3MX2-A2002-E
122.5
3G3MX2-A2007-E
145.5
1.2
108
170.5
1.6
3G3MX2-A2037-E
128
140
170.5
3G3MX2-A2055-E
260
140
155
3G3MX2-A2022-E
1.8
3G3MX2-A2075-E
2.0
3.0
3.4
3G3MX2-A2110-E
296
180
175
5.1
3G3MX2-A2150-E
350
220
175
7.4
3G3MX2-A4004-E
128
108
143.5
1.5
170.5
1.6
3G3MX2-A4007-E
3G3MX2-A4015-E
1.8
3G3MX2-A4022-E
1.9
3G3MX2-A4030-E
1.9
3G3MX2-A4040-E
128
3G3MX2-A4055-E
260
140
170.5
155
3G3MX2-A4075-E
3G3MX2-A4110-E
D
W
1.1
128
3G3MX2-A2015-E
1.0
1.0
3G3MX2-A2004-E
Three-phase 400 V
1.0
1.0
2.1
3.5
3.5
296
180
175
3G3MX2-A4150-E
4.7
5.2
Finless models
Voltage class
Single-phase 200 V
Inverter model
3G3MX2-AB001-P-E
Dimensions in mm
Weight (kg)
128
68
103
1.1
128
108
123
1.8
128
68
103
1.1
3G3MX2-AB002-P-E
3G3MX2-AB004-P-E
3G3MX2-AB007-P-E
3G3MX2-AB015-P-E
3G3MX2-AB022-P-E
Three-phase 200 V
3G3MX2-A2001-P-E
3G3MX2-A2002-P-E
3G3MX2-A2004-P-E
3G3MX2-A2007-P-E
3G3MX2-A2015-P-E
128
108
123
1.8
3G3MX2-A2022-P-E
Three-phase 400 V
3G3MX2-A2037-P-E
128
140
123
2.1
3G3MX2-A4004-P-E
128
108
123
1.8
128
140
123
2.1
3G3MX2-A4007-P-E
3G3MX2-A4015-P-E
3G3MX2-A4022-P-E
3G3MX2-A4030-P-E
3G3MX2-A4040-P-E
164
MX2
Frequency inverters
IP54 models
Inverter model
Dimensions in mm
H
Single-phase 200 V
Three-phase 200 V
Weight (kg)
W
3G3MX2-DB001-E
464.74
179.5
292.7
8.0
3G3MX2-DB001-EC
482.8
309.5
317.7
11.8
3G3MX2-DB002-E
464.74
179.5
292.7
8.0
3G3MX2-DB002-EC
482.8
309.5
317.7
11.8
3G3MX2-DB004-E
464.74
179.5
292.7
8.4
3G3MX2-DB004-EC
482.8
309.5
317.7
12.1
3G3MX2-DB007-EC
12.4
3G3MX2-DB015-EC
16.0
3G3MX2-DB022-EC
16.0
3G3MX2-D2001-E
464.74
179.5
292.7
3G3MX2-D2001-EC
482.8
309.5
317.7
11.8
3G3MX2-D2002-E
464.74
179.5
292.7
8.0
3G3MX2-D2002-EC
482.8
309.5
317.7
11.8
464.74
179.5
292.7
8.1
3G3MX2-D2004-EC
482.8
309.5
317.7
11.9
3G3MX2-D2007-E
464.74
179.5
292.7
8.2
3G3MX2-D2007-EC
482.8
309.5
317.7
12.0
3G3MX2-D2015-EC
15.4
3G3MX2-D2022-EC
15.6
3G3MX2-D2055-EC
16.2
627.04
325
299.5
18.8
710.35
379
329.7
25.3
482.8
309.5
317.7
12.0
3G3MX2-D2075-EC
3G3MX2-D2110-EC
19.2
3G3MX2-D2150-EC
Three-phase 400 V
3G3MX2-D4004-EC
28.0
3G3MX2-D4007-EC
12.5
3G3MX2-D4015-EC
12.4
3G3MX2-D4022-EC
12.5
3G3MX2-D4030-EC
12.5
3G3MX2-D4040-EC
3G3MX2-D4055-EC
13.1
627.04
325
299.5
18.7
710.35
379
329.7
23.8
3G3MX2-D4075-EC
3G3MX2-D4110-EC
3G3MX2-D4150-EC
D
W
8.0
3G3MX2-D2004-E
3G3MX2-D2037-EC
Frequency inverters
Voltage class
18.7
24.3
165
JX
Frequency inverters
Compact and complete
With the RFI filter built-in, and the communications integrated as standard, the JX
provides a compact and complete solution to a whole range of simple applications,
such as conveyor control. The RS485 Modbus is built into the RJ45 port of the inverter
front, making it very easy to add inverters into the network without any extra option
boards. Therefore, saving costs and space.
V/f controlled inverter
Side by side mounting
EMC filter built-in
RS485 Modbus built-in
Overload detection function (150% during 60 s)
PID
Micro-surge voltage suppression
Automatic energy saving
Power
supply
MCCB
CX-Drive
CX-One
USB cable
A
AC reactor
B
LCD 5 lines remote
operator
Remote operator
extension cable
Filter
JX
A
Choke
Motor
A
DC reactor
A
Output reactor
Ground
* Only needed for 3 phase 200 V or to comply C1 on 3 phase 400 V models
166
JX
Frequency inverters
3G3JX
Order code
Voltage class
Max. applicable motor output kW
Rated output current (A)
Standard
Single-phase 200 V
0.2
1.4
3G3JX-AB002-EF
0.4
2.6
3G3JX-AB004-EF
0.75
3G3JX-AB007-EF
1.5
7.1
3G3JX-AB015-EF
2.2
10
3G3JX-AB022-EF
0.2
1.4
3G3JX-A2002-E
0.4
2.6
3G3JX-A2004-E
0.75
3G3JX-A2007-E
1.5
7.1
3G3JX-A2015-E
2.2
10
3G3JX-A2022-E
3.7
15.9
3G3JX-A2037-E
5.5
24
3G3JX-A2055-E
7.5
32
3G3JX-A2075-E
0.4
1.5
3G3JX-A4004-EF
0.75
2.5
3G3JX-A4007-EF
1.5
3.8
3G3JX-A4015-EF
2.2
5.5
3G3JX-A4022-EF
4.0
8.6
3G3JX-A4040-EF
5.5
13
3G3JXA4055-EF
7.5
16
3G3JXA4075-EF
Three-phase 200 V
Three-phase 400 V
Frequency inverters
Specifications
A Line filters
Inverter
Line filter Rasmi
Voltage
Model 3G3JX-_
Rated current (A)
Weight (kg)
Order code
1-Phase 200 VAC
AB002/AB004
0.5
AX-FIJ1006-RE
AB007
10
0.6
AX-FIJ1010-RE
AB015/AB022
26
0.8
AX-FIJ1026-RE
A2002/A2004/A2007
1.0
AX-FIJ2006-RE
A2015/A2022/A2037
20
1.3
AX-FIJ2020-RE
A2055/A2075
40
2.3
AX-FIJ2040-RE
A4004/A4007 /A4015
0.9
AX-FIJ3005-RE
A4022 /A4040
11
1.1
AX-FIJ3011-RE
A4055/A4075
20
1.7
AX-FIJ3020-RE
3-Phase 200 VAC
3-Phase 400 VAC
A Input AC Reactors
Inverter
AC Reactor
Voltage
Model 3G3JX-_
Order code
3-Phase 200 VAC
A2002/A2004/A2007
AX-RAI02800080-DE
A2015/A2022/A2037
AX-RAI00880175-DE
A2055/A2075
AX-RAI00350335-DE
AB002/AB004
Under development
1-Phase 200 VAC
AB007
AB015/AB022
3-Phase 400 VAC
A4004/A4007/A4015
AX-RAI07700042-DE
A4022/A4040
AX-RAI03500090-DE
A4055/A4075
AX-RAI01300170-DE
A DC Reactors
200 V single-phase
200 V three-phase
400 V three-phase
Inverter
Order code
Inverter
Order code
Inverter
3G3JX-AB002
AX-RC10700032-DE
3G3JX-A2002
AX-RC21400016-DE
Order code
3G3JX-AB004
AX-RC06750061-DE
3G3JX-A2004
AX-RC10700032-DE
3G3JX-A4004
AX-RC43000020-DE
3G3JX-AB007
AX-RC03510093-DE
3G3JX-A2007
AX-RC06750061-DE
3G3JX-A4007
AX-RC27000030-DE
3G3JX-AB015
AX-RC02510138-DE
3G3JX-A2015
AX-RC03510093-DE
3G3JX-A4015
AX-RC14000047-DE
3G3JX-AB022
AX-RC01600223-DE
3G3JX-A2022
AX-RC02510138-DE
3G3JX-A4022
AX-RC10100069-DE
3G3JX-A2037
AX-RC01600223-DE
3G3JX-A4040
AX-RC06400116-DE
3G3JX-A2055
AX-RC01110309-DE
3G3JX-A4055
AX-RC04410167-DE
3G3JX-A2075
AX-RC00840437-DE
3G3JX-A4075
AX-RC03350219-DE
167
JX
Frequency inverters
A Chokes
B Accessories
Description
Order code
21
AX-FER2102-RE
Types Description
25
AX-FER2515-RE
Digital operator
Diameter
A Output AC Reactors
Inverter
AC Reactor
Functions
Order code
LCD remote
operator
5 Line LCD remote operator

with copy function, cable
length max. 3 m.*1
AX-OP05-E
Remote operator
cable
3 meters cable for connecting 3G3AX-CAJOP300-EE

remote operator
LED remote opera- LED remote operator, cable

tor
length max. 3 m
3G3AX-OP01
Model 3G3JX-@
Order code
200 VAC
A2001/A2002/A2004
AB001/AB002/AB004
AX-RAO11500026-DE
Mounting kit for LED Mounting kit for LED operator 4X-KITMINI
operator
on panel
A2007/AB007
AX-RAO07600042-DE
A2015/AB015
AX-RAO04100075-DE
USB converter / USB RJ45 to USB connection cable 3G3AX-PCACN2

cable
USB-convertercable
A2022/AB022
AX-RAO03000105-DE
A2037
AX-RAO01830160-DE
A2055
AX-RAO01150220-DE
A2075
AX-RAO00950320-DE
A4004/A4007/A4015
AX-RAO16300038-DE
A4022
AX-RAO11800053-DE
A4040
AX-RAO07300080-DE
D Computer software
A4055
AX-RAO04600110-DE
Description
Installation
AX-RAO03600160-DE
Computer software
Configuration and monitoring CX-Drive

software tool
Computer software
Configuration and monitoring CX-One

software tool
Computer software
Software tool for Energy Saving calculation
400 VAC
A4075
Accessories
Voltage
*1
3G3AX-CTB020-EE
RJ45 T-Branch cable T cable for RS-422

connection
RJ45 Terminator
resistor
Terminator resistor for RS-422 3G3AX-CTR150-EE

connection
Please note, for 3G3JX inverters models, the operator will only display 2 lines of text.
Order code
Saver
Specifications
200 V class
Single-phase: 3G3JX_
AB002
AB004
AB007
AB015
AB022
Three-phase: 3G3JX_
A2002
A2004
A2007
A2015
A2022
A2037
A2055
A2075
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
200 V
0.4
0.9
1.3
2.4
3.4
5.5
8.3
11.0
240 V
0.5
1.0
1.6
2.9
4.1
6.6
9.9
13.3
1.4
2.6
4.0
7.1
10.0
15.9
24.0
32.0
Max. output voltage
Applicable motor capacity
Output
characteristics
Motor
kW*1
400 Hz
Power
supply
Rated input voltageand frequency
Single-phase 200 to 240 V 50/60 Hz

Three-phase 200 to 240 V 50/60 Hz
Rated input current (A) Three-phase 200 V
1.8
3.4
5.2
9.3
13.0
20.0
30.0
40.0
Rated input current (A) Single-phase 200 V
3.1
5.8
9.0
16.0
22.5
15% to 10%
5%
Built-in filter
EMC filter (C1 single phase)

torque
At capacitor feedback
Approx. 50%
50% for
Approx 20% to 40%
3-phase
20% to 40% for
1-phase
Cooling method
Self cooling
Forced-air-cooling
*1
Approx 20%
400 V class
Three-phase: 3G3JX_
A4004
A4007
A4015
A4022
A4040
A4055
A4075
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
380 V
0.9
1.6
2.5
3.6
5.6
8.5
10.5
480 V
1.2
2.0
3.1
4.5
7.1
10.8
13.3
1.5
2.5
3.8
5.5
8.6
13.0
16.0
Max. output voltage
7.0
11.0
16.5
20.0
Applicable motor capacity
Output
characteristics
Motor
kW*1
400 Hz
Power
supply
Rated input voltageand frequency
3-phase 380 to 480 V 50/60 Hz
Rated input current (A)
2.0
15% to 10%
5%
3.3
5.0
Built-in filter
EMC filter C2 class

torque At capacitor feedback
Approx. 50%
Approx. 20% to 40%
Cooling method
Self cooling
Forced-air-cooling
*1
168
Approx. 20%
JX
Frequency inverters
Dimensions
Voltage class
Max. applicable motor output Inverter model

kW
Dimensions in mm
H
Weight (kg)
Single-phase 200 V
0.2
3G3JX-AB002
155
80
95.5
0.8
109.5
0.9
189
110
130.5
1.5
157.5
2.3
95.5
0.8
109.5
0.9
Three-phase 400 V
3G3JX-AB004
3G3JX-AB007
1.5
3G3JX-AB015
2.2
3G3JX-AB022
0.2
3G3JX-A2002
0.4
3G3JX-A2004
0.75
3G3JX-A2007
1.5
3G3JX-A2015
2.2
3G3JX-A2022
3.7
3G3JX-A2037
5.5
3G3JX-A2055
7.5
3G3JX-A2075
0.4
3G3JX-A4004
0.75
3G3JX-A4007
1.5
3G3JX-A4015
2.2
3G3JX-A4022
4.0
3G3JX-A4040
5.5
3G3JX-A4055
7.5
3G3JX-A4075
2.4
155
189
80
110
132.5
1.1
157.5
2.2
H
D
W
Frequency inverters
Three-phase 200 V
0.4
0.75
2.4
250
180
167.5
4.2
189
110
130.5
1.5
157.5
2.3
2.4
250
180
167.5
4.2
169
Sensing
S5
NS5
Handheld
38
e 69
N539
Page 70

170
Quick Link
Fiber optic sensors and amplifiers

Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Compact square
E3Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
E3ZM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
E3Z-Laser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Miniature and Photomicro
E3T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
E3H2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
EE-SX47/67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Fork
E3Z-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Cylindrical
E3FA/E3FB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
E3F_-B/-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
E3F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
E3FC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
E3H2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
E3T-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Longer distance
E3S-CL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
E3G-M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
E3Z-Laser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
E3G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Special application
E3ZM-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
E3ZM-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
E3Z-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
E3JK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
E3JM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
E3NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
E3S-LS3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
E3S-DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Reflectors
E39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Accessories
AS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
E39/Y92E-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
E32 Miniature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E32 Longer distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E32 Chemical resistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E32 Heat resistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E32 Vacuum resistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E32 Robot application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E32 Precision detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E32 Special application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber amplifiers
E3X-HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E3X-SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E3X-NA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E3NX-FA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E3X-DAC-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E3X-NA_F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E3X-MDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E3X-DAH-S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber accessories
E39/E32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Mark sensors
E3ZM-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
E3X-DAC-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
FQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
FZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Color sensors
E3X-DACLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
FQ2-CLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Xpectia lite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Lightcurtains and area sensors

Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
F3ET2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
F3E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
E32 Area monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
F3EM2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
E3Z. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
ZX-GT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Fiber sensor heads
E32 Standard cylindrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
E32 Square shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
238
240
242
243
245
247
248
250
252
255
256
258
218
231
231
231
261
Inductive sensors
Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Compact cylindrical
E2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
E2A-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
E2A3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
E2B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
PROX E2E Small Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Square/block style
TL-W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
E2S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
E2Q5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Special models
E2EH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
E2AU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
E2E-_-U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
E2FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
E2C-EDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
E2FQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Mechanical sensors/Limit switches

Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Limit switches
D4N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
D4B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
WL-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
D4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
ZC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
EE-SX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
D4C, D4E, X, Z, ZC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
D4MC, HL, WL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
D4E, SHL, WL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
D5B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Rotary encoders
Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Rotary encoders
E6A2-C, E6B2-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
E6C2-C/E6C3-C, E6F-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
E6H-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
E6C3-A, E6F-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Cable connectors
Cable connectors
XS2, XS3, Y92E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
306
171
Sensing
Content
Sensing
FOR MACHINES BUILT TO LAST
Reliability and accuracy confirmed by millions every day
With more than one million units sold, OMRON Photoelectric sensors are among the world's most popular and
successful photoelectric sensors.
Manufactured to exceptionally high engineering standards, you can take the performance reliability for granted.
Optimal sensing performance tuned to your application
Various housing designs fitting your application concept
Proven performance and unmatched reliability
Miniature
172
Fork
Cylindrical
Cylindrical
Miniature
Square
Fork shape
E3T
EE-SX
E3H2/E3T-C
E3FA/E3FB
B224
Page 192
B422, B423, B442

Page 194
B284, B283
Pages 190-191
B278
Page 184
M18
Stainless steel
Miniature
E3F1
E3FC
EE-SX
B286
Page 187
B439
Page 188
B422, F525, B423, B442

Page 194
Standard M18
Standard
Standard
Stainless steel
E3Z-G
E3Z
E3ZM
B268
Page 196
B222
Page 176
B223
Page 178
Special
models
Longer
distance
Compact
square
Compact
Laser
Longer distance
diffuse-reflective
Longer distance
retro-reflective
E3Z-Laser
E3JK
E3G
B265
Page 180
B227
Page 182
B228
(see next page)
173
Selection table
Type
Compact square
Longer distance
Model
E3Z
E3ZM
E3Z Laser
E3S-CL
E3JK
361
PRO
PROplus
PROplus
n.a.
LITE
Housing
PBT
Stainless steel
PBT
Zinc diecast
ABS
Through-beam
15 m, 30 m
15 m
60 m
40 m
Retro-reflective with M.S.R.
5m
4m
15 m
7m
Diffuse-reflective (energetic) 1 m
1m
2.5 m
Diffuse-reflective
(background suppression)
200 mm
200 mm
300 mm
500 mm
Page/Quick Link
176
178
180
181
182
Type
Cylindrical
Model
E3FA/E3FB
E3F1
E3FC
E3H2
361
PRO
LITE
PROplus
n.a.
Housing
M18 PBT, metal
ABS
M18 stainless steel
M12 metal,
M8 stainless steel
Through-beam
20 m
15 m
20 m
4 m, 2 m
4m
3m
4m
2m
Diffuse-reflective (energetic) 1 m
300 mm
1m
300 mm
Diffuse-reflective
200 mm
200 mm
Page/Quick Link
184
187
188
190
Type
Miniature
Model
E3T-C
E3T
EE-SX47/67
E3Z-G
361
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
Housing
M5, M6 stainless steel
PBT
PBT
PBT
Through-beam
1m
1 m, 2 m
5 mm (slot width)
25 mm
Fork
200 mm
Diffuse-reflective (energetic) 50 mm
30 mm
Diffuse-reflective
30 mm
Page/Quick Link
191
192
194
196
174
Type
Oil resistant
Mark detection
Transparent detection
Model
E3ZM-C
E3ZM-V
E3ZM-B
E3Z-B
E3F_-B/-V
E3S-DB
361
PROplus
PROplus
PROplus
PROplus
PROplus
PROplus
Key features
Oil and lubricant resistant White LED for optimal

stainless steel housing
contrast recognition
Optimised optical system Optical system for

for all transparent objects standard transparent
objects
Optimised optical system Enhanced performance

for all transparent objects for all transparent
objects, SmartTeach,
Narrow spot
Housing
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
PBT
M18 PBT/metal
Through-beam
20 m
4m
500 mm
500 mm, 2 m
2m
4.5 m
Diffuse-reflective
1m
12mm2mm
Diffuse-reflective
200 mm
50 mm
Page/Quick Link
197
217
199
200
201
202
Type
High precision positioning
Structured object detection
Multi voltage power supply
Model
E3NC Laser Sensors
E3S-LS3
E3JK, E3JM, E3G-_M
361
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
Key features
0.1 mm Laser spot, line beam, CMOS BGS, EtherCAT Wide beam
connectivity
AC/DC power supply

and relay output
Housing
PBT
PBT
ABS, ABS, PBT
Through-beam
40 m, 10 m,
8m
9 m, 4 m, 10 m
Diffuse-reflective
1.2 m
60 mm
2.5 m, 700 mm, 2 m
Diffuse-reflective
250 mm
, , 1.2 m
Page/Quick Link
203
207
182/208/209
PBT/ABS
175
E3Z
Compact square sensors

General purpose sensor in compact
plastic housing
The compact housing size and the high-power LED provide an excellent performancesize ratio and the high optical precision and long sensor lifetime make the sensor the
first choice for standard and challenging applications.
Minimal optical axis deviation for easy alignment
IP67 and IP69K for highest water resistance
Intensive shielding for highest noise immunity (EMC)
Multiple molding housing for high mechanical resistance
Sensing distance
Through-beam
30 m
(Infrared light)
10 m
(Red light)
Retro-reflective
with M.S.R.
Retro-reflective
without M.S.R.
Diffuse-reflective
*2
0.1 to 4 m
(Red light)
0.1 to 5 m*2
(Infrared light)
1 m (adjustable) (Infrared light)
Diffuse-reflective wide 100 mm (adjustable) (Infrared light)

beam
Distance
settable
(background
suppression)
Small
spot
(Red
light)
Standard
(Red
light)
2 mm
80 mm
20 mm
BGS (set to maximum)
20 mm
BGS (at min. setting)
200 mm
40 mm
BGS (at max. setting)
Incident
light level
threshold (fixed)
FGS (at min. setting)
Light-ON/Dark-ON switch selectable

Measured with E39-R1S
For infrared LED models contact your Omron representative
176
2m
2m
2m
2m
2m
2m
2m
2m
BGS (set to minimum)
FGS (at max. setting)
*1
*2
*3
Order code*1
Connection method
For ordering pigtail versions replace '2M' of cable types with:

- M1J: M12
with 30 cm cable
- M3J: M8 4-pin with 30 cm cable
Sensor type
NPN output
PNP output
E3Z-T62 2M
E3Z-T82 2M
E3Z-T67
E3Z-T87
E3Z-T61A 2M
E3Z-T81A 2M
E3Z-T66A
E3Z-T86A
E3Z-R61 2M
E3Z-R81 2M
E3Z-R66
E3Z-R86
E3Z-R61-4 2M
E3Z-R81-4 2M
E3Z-R66-4
E3Z-R86-4
E3Z-D62 2M
E3Z-D82 2M
E3Z-D67
E3Z-D87
E3Z-D61 2M
E3Z-D81 2M
E3Z-D66
E3Z-D86
E3Z-LS63 2M
E3Z-LS83 2M
E3Z-LS68
E3Z-LS88
E3Z-LS61 2M*3
E3Z-LS81 2M*3
E3Z-LS66*3
E3Z-LS86*3
E3Z
Specifications
Through-beam
Retro-reflective
with M.S.R
Retro-reflective
without M.S.R
Diffuse-reflective
Diffuse-reflective
(wide beam)
Distance-settable (background
suppression)
Red LED
Infrared LED
Standard
Small spot
NPN
E3Z-T62/T67
E3Z-T61A/T66A
E3Z-R61/R66
E3Z-R6_-4
E3Z-D62/D67
E3Z-D61/D66
E3Z-LS61/66
E3Z-LS63/68
PNP
E3Z-T82/T87
E3Z-T81A/T86A
E3Z-R81/R86
E3Z-R8_-4
E3Z-D82/D87
E3Z-D81/D86
E3Z-LS81/86
E3Z-LS83/88
10% of set
distance max.
5% of set
distance max.
Red LED
(680 nm)
Red LED
(650 nm)
Directional angle
Both emitter and receiver:

3 to 15
Black/white error
Light source
(wave length)
Infrared LED (870 RED LED

nm)
(700 nm)
12 to 24 VD10%, ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Protective circuits
Reverse polarity
protection, shortcircuit protection,
output reverse
polarity protection
Output shortcircuit protection,

power supply,
reverse polarity
protection
Response time
2 ms max.
1 ms max.
Ambient
Operating
temperature Storage
25 to 55C
IEC 60529 IP67, IP69K after DIN 40050 part 9
Material
Case
PBT (polybutylene terephthalate)
Lens
Denatured polyacrylate resin
High ambient light immunity
2 to 10
Red LED
(680 nm)
Infrared LED (870 Infrared LED (860 nm)

nm)
Reverse polarity protection,

output short-circuit protection,
mutual interference prevention,
output reverse polarity protection
Reverse polarity protection,

output short-circuit protection,
mutual interference prevention
40 to 70C (with no icing or condensation)
Methacrylate resin
High electromagnetic noise immunity
Item
Denatured polyacrylate resin
Robust and tight housing construction
177
E3ZM

Photoelectric sensor in compact
stainless steel housing
Compact housing size and high power LED for excellent performance-size ratio in a
rugged, detergent-resistant stainless steel housing for demanding environments.
High grade stainless steel housing (SUS316L)
IP67 and IP69k for highest water resistance
ECOLAB tested and certified detergent resistance
Sensor type
Sensing distance
Through-beam
15 m
0.8 m with built-in slit
Diffuse-reflective
0.1 to 4 m
1 m (adjustable)
Diffuse-reflective
Order code*1
Connection method
10 to 100 mm (fixed)
2m
2m
2m
2m
2m
2m
*2
NPN output
PNP output
E3ZM-T61 2M
E3ZM-T81 2M
E3ZM-T66
E3ZM-T86
E3ZM-T63 2M
E3ZM-T83 2M
E3ZM-T68
E3ZM-T88
E3ZM-R61 2M
E3ZM-R81 2M
E3ZM-R66
E3ZM-R86
E3ZM-D62 2M
E3ZM-D82 2M
E3ZM-D67
E3ZM-D87
E3ZM-LS61X 2M*3
E3ZM-LS81X 2M*3
E3ZM-LS66X*3
E3ZM-LS86X*3
E3ZM-LS64X 2M
E3ZM-LS69X
*3
*3
E3ZM-LS84X 2M*3
E3ZM-LS89X*3
*1
*2
Light-ON / Dark-ON switch selectable except for E3ZM-LS

For ordering pigtail versions replace '2M' of the cable types with:
- S1J: for M12 stainless steel plug with 30 cm cable
- S3J: for M8 4-pin stainless steel plug with 30cm cable
- S5J: for M8 3-pin stainless steel plug with 30cm cable (except for background suppression types)
- M1J: for M12 brass plug with 30cm cable
- M3J: for M8 4-pin brass plug with 30cm cable
- M5J: for M8 3-pin brass plug with 30cm cable (except for background suppression types)
*3
E3ZM-LS_X are fixed LIGHT-ON models. For fixed DARK-ON models please order E3ZM-LS_Y and for L-ON/D-ON selectable by wire please order E3ZM-LS_H.
Specifications
Item
Diffuse-reflective
NPN
Through-beam
E3ZM-T61
E3ZM-T66
E3ZM-T63
E3ZM-T68
E3ZM-R61
E3ZM-R66
E3ZM-D62
E3ZM-D67
PNP
E3ZM-T81
E3ZM-T86
E3ZM-T83
E3ZM-T88
E3ZM-R81
E3ZM-R86
E3ZM-D82
E3ZM-D87
Red LED (660 nm)
Infrared LED (860 nm)
Light source (wave length)
10 to 30 VDC, 10% ripple (p-p)
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse polarity protection, output Power supply reverse polarity protection, output short-circuit protection, mutual interference prevenshort-circuit protection, output reverse polarity tion, output reverse polarity protection
protection
Response time
1 ms max.
Ambient temperature Operating 25 to 55C

Storage
Material
Case
SUS316L
Lens
Methacrylic resin
Display
PES (polyether sulfone)
Sensitivity adjustment PEEK (polyether ether ketone)

and operation switch
Seals
178
Fluoro rubber
E3ZM
Item
Diffuse-reflective with background suppression (fixed distance)

NPN
E3ZM-LS61X
E3ZM-LS66X
E3ZM-LS64X
E3ZM-LS69X
PNP
E3ZM-LS81X
E3ZM-LS86X
E3ZM-LS84X
E3ZM-LS89X
Light source (adjustable)
Red LED (650 nm)
Red LED (660 nm)
Black/white error
5% of sensing distance max.
20% of sensing distance max.
10 to 30 VDC, 10% ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse polarity protection, output short-circuit protection, output reverse polarity protection, mutual interference protection
Response time
1 ms max.

range
Storage
Material
Case
SUS316L
Lens
Methacrylic resin
Display

Fluoro rubber
Seals
Robust construction
Tight housing
Detergent resistant
Pre-wired models with stainless steel plug connectors for best combination of highest water
ingress protection with fast connect & disconnect..
179
E3Z-Laser

LASER sensor in compact plastic housing
The E3Z LASER sensor in compact plastic housing features visible LASER light for
precision positioning and detection applications.
Visible LASER light for precision positioning and small object detection
High power LD for long range precision
Class 1 LASER
Precise background suppression and low black/white error for accurate detection
Sensing distance
Through-beam
60 m
Distance-settable
Order code*1
Connection method
1 ms
*2
0.3 to 15 m
20 to 300 mm
25 to 300 mm
*1
*2
Response
time
0.5 ms
2m
2m
2m
2m
For ordering pigtail versions replace '2M'

of cable types with:
- M1J: M12
with 30 cm cable
Sensor type
NPN output
PNP output
E3Z-LT61 2M
E3Z-LT81 2M
E3Z-LT66
E3Z-LT86
E3Z-LR61 2M
E3Z-LR81 2M
E3Z-LR66
E3Z-LR86
E3Z-LL61 2M
E3Z-LL81 2M
E3Z-LL66
E3Z-LL86
E3Z-LL63 2M
E3Z-LL83 2M
E3Z-LL68
E3Z-LL88

Measured with E39-R1
Specifications
Item
Through-beam
Distance settable (background suppression)
Standard model
High-speed model
NPN output
E3Z-LT61/-LT66
E3Z-LR61/-LR66
E3Z-LL61/-LL66
E3Z-LL63/-LL68
PNP output
E3Z-LT81/-LT86
E3Z-LR81/-LR86
E3Z-LL81/-LL86
E3Z-LL83/-LL88
5% (at 160 mm)
5% (at 100 mm)
Black/white error
Red LD (655 nm), JIS Class 1, IEC Class 1, FDA Class II
12 to 24 VDC10%, ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse polar- Power supply reverse polarity protection, short circuit protection, output reverse polarity protection,
ity, protection, short circuit mutual interference prevention
protection, output reverse
polarity protection
Response time
1 ms max.
Ambient temperature Operating
10 to 55C
Storage
Material
0.5 ms max.

Case
Lens
Modified polyacrylate resin Methacrylate
Modified polyacrylate resin
Class 1 laser
Low black/white error for precise detection
180
Visible laser light for precision positioning
E3S-CL
Longer distance sensors

Distance-settable photoelectric sensor in metal housing
Minimal black/white error for highest reliability detecting differently colored
objects (E3S-CL1)
Setting distance up to 500 mm with reliable background suppression
Sensing distance
Distance-settable
Order code*1
Connection method
40mm
E3S-CL1 2M
M12
E3S-CL1-M1J
E3S-CL2 2M
M12
E3S-CL2-M1J
Setting range
Min. setting
Max. setting
Sensortype
40 to 200 mm
200mm
Detecting range
5 to 200 mm
50mm
Min. setting
Max. setting
5
*1
Setting range
50 to 500 mm
Detecting range
5 to 500 mm
500mm
Light-ON/Dark-ON switch selectable. NPN/PNP switch selectable
Specifications
Item
Distance-settable (background suppression)
Red LED (700 nm)
Black/white error*1
2% max.
10% max.
10 to 30 VDC [ripple (p-p) 10% included]
Protective circuits
Reverse polarity protection, output short-circuit protection, mutual interference prevention
E3S-CL1
Response time
Ambient
temperature
1 ms max.
Operating
2 ms max.
Storage
IEC 60529 IP67
Material
Case
Zinc diecast
Operation
panel cover
Polyethyl sulfon
Lens
Acrylics
*1
E3S-CL2
Sensing distance difference between standard white paper (reflectivity 90%) and standard black paper (reflectivity 5%)
181
E3JK

All voltage photoelectric sensor with long sensing
distance
The new generation of square sized E3JK family provides significantly enhanced
sensing performance and ease of operation. The family features 24 to 240 VAC power
models as well as models with PNP/NPN transistor output.
High power and visible red LED for all models enabling easy alignment and long
sensing distance
Bright indicator LEDs that are visible even at a large distance
Best price-value ratio
Sensor type
Sensing distance
Connection method
2m
Relay models
(AC/DC)
NPN models
PNP models
E3JK-TR11 2M
E3JK-TN11 2M
E3JK-TP11 2M
Through-beam
40 m (adjustable)
Retro-reflective without M.S.R.
9 m*1 (adjustable)
E3JK-RR11 2M
E3JK-RN11 2M
E3JK-RP11 2M
7 m*1 (adjustable)
E3JK-RR12 2M
E3JK-RN12 2M
E3JK-RP12 2M
Diffuse-reflective
2.5 m (adjustable)
E3JK-DR11 2M
E3JK-DN11 2M
E3JK-DP11 2M
300 mm (adjustable)
E3JK-DR12 2M
E3JK-DN12 2M
E3JK-DP12 2M
*1
Order code
Measured with E39-R1S. Please order reflector separately.
Accessories
Appearance
Description
Order code
Mounting bracket*1 (A mounting bracket is not provided with the sensor. Order a mounting bracket separately if required.) E39-L40
*1
When using a through-beam sensor, order one mounting bracket for the receiver and one for the emitter.
Specifications
AC models
Item
Through-beam
E3JK-TR11
E3JK-RR11
E3JK-RR12
E3JK-DR11
E3JK-DR12
Sensing distance
40 m
9m
7m
2.5 m
300 mm
Red LED (624 nm)
24 to 240 VDC10% ripple (p-p): 10% max. 24 to 240 VAC10% 50/60 Hz
Control output
Relay output SPDT, 250 VAC, 3 A max. (cos= 1), 5 VDC, 10 mA min., Light-ON/Dark-ON selectable
Response time
20 ms max.
Sensitivity adjustment
Ambient temperature
One-turn adjuster
Operating
25 to 55C
Storage
Material
182
Retro-reflective
without M.S.R.
IEC60529 IP64
Case
ABS
Lens
Methacrylics (PMMA)
Retro-reflective with M.S.R. Diffuse-reflective
E3JK
DC models
Item
Through-beam
Retro-reflective
without M.S.R.
Retro-reflective with M.S.R. Diffuse-reflective
NPN output
E3JK-TN11
E3JK-RN11
E3JK-RN12
E3JK-DN11
PNP output
E3JK-TP11
E3JK-RP11
E3JK-RP12
E3JK-DP11
E3JK-DP12
Sensing distance
40 m
9m
7m
2.5 m
300 mm
Red LED (624 nm)
10 to 30 VDC, including ripple (p-p): 10%
Control output
Open collector output (NPN/PNP), Load current: 100 mA max., Light-ON/Dark-ON selectable
Response time
1 ms max.
Ambient temperature
One-turn adjuster
Operating
25 to 55C
Storage
Case
ABS
Lens
Methacrylics (PMMA)
Material
E3JK-DN12
IEC60529 IP64
40 m
AC power-supply ts for building installations like industrial doors, elevators or car parks
Long sensing distance up to 40 m
183
E3FA/E3FB
Cylindrical sensors
High performance photoelectric sensor in compact M18
housing
E3FA/E3FB series represents a new generation of OMRON photoelectric sensors with
large varieties of reliable and easy-to use photoelectric sensors. Featuring many standard and special functions this line is addressing many kinds of industries such as
packaging, ceramics and material handling.
Large variety of standard and special types
High power and visible red LED enabling easy alignment and long sensing distance
Compact and robust housing for easy integration into machines
Straight types
Sensor type
Sensing distance
Connection method
Order code
E3FA (plastic housing)
E3FB (metal housing)
NPN output
PNP output
NPN output
PNP output
2m
E3FA-TN11 2M
E3FA-TP11 2M
E3FB-TN11 2M
E3FB-TP11 2M
E3FA-TN21
E3FA-TP21
E3FB-TN21
E3FB-TP21
2m
E3FA-TN12 2M
E3FA-TP12 2M
E3FA-TN22
E3FA-TP22
0.1 to 4 m
(with E39-R1S)
2m
E3FA-RN11 2M
E3FA-RP11 2M
E3FB-RN11 2M
E3FB-RP11 2M
E3FA-RN21
E3FA-RP21
E3FB-RN21
E3FB-RP21
Coaxial Retro-reflective with MSR*1 0 to 500 mm

(with E39-R1S)
2m
E3FA-RN12 2M
E3FA-RP12 2M
E3FB-RN12 2M
E3FB-RP12 2M
E3FA-RN22
E3FA-RP22
E3FB-RN22
E3FB-RP22
Through-beam (Red LED)
20 m
Through-beam (Infrared LED)
Retro-reflective with MSR
*1
Diffuse-reflective (Red LED)
15 m
100 mm
300 mm
1m
Diffuse-reflective (Infrared LED)
100 mm
300 mm
1m
BGS
100 mm
200 mm
184
2m
E3FA-DN11 2M
E3FA-DP11 2M
E3FB-DN11 2M
E3FB-DP11 2M
E3FA-DN21
E3FA-DP21
E3FB-DN21
E3FB-DP21
2m
E3FA-DN12 2M
E3FA-DP12 2M
E3FB-DN12 2M
E3FB-DP12 2M
E3FA-DN22
E3FA-DP22
E3FB-DN22
E3FB-DP22
2m
E3FA-DN13 2M
E3FA-DP13 2M
E3FB-DN13 2M
E3FB-DP13 2M
E3FA-DN23
E3FA-DP23
E3FB-DN23
E3FB-DP23
2m
E3FA-DN14 2M
E3FA-DP14 2M
E3FA-DN24
E3FA-DP24
2m
E3FA-DN15 2M
E3FA-DP15 2M
E3FA-DN25
E3FA-DP25
2m
E3FA-DN16 2M
E3FA-DP16 2M
E3FA-DN26
E3FA-DP26
2m
E3FA-LN11 2M
E3FA-LP11 2M
E3FB-LN11 2M
E3FB-LP11 2M
E3FA-LN21
E3FA-LP21
E3FB-LN21
E3FB-LP21
2m
E3FA-LN12 2M
E3FA-LP12 2M
E3FB-LN12 2M
E3FB-LP12 2M
E3FA-LN22
E3FA-LP22
E3FB-LN22
E3FB-LP22
E3FA/E3FB
Cylindrical sensors
Radial types
Through-beam
Retro-reflective with MSR*1.
Diffuse reflective
Sensing distance
15 m
0.1 to 3 m
(with E39-R1S)
100 mm
300 mm
700 mm
*1
Connection method
Order code
E3RA (plastic housing)
E3RB (metal housing)
NPN output
PNP output
NPN output
PNP output
2m
E3RA-TN11 2M
E3RA-TP11 2M
E3RB-TN11 2M
E3RB-TP11 2M
E3RA-TN21
E3RA-TP21
E3RB-TN21
E3RB-TP21
2m
E3RA-RN11 2M
E3RA-RP11 2M
E3RB-RN11 2M
E3RB-RP11 2M
E3RA-RN21
E3RA-RP21
E3RB-RN21
E3RB-RP21
2m
E3RA-DN11 2M
E3RA-DP11 2M
E3RB-DN11 2M
E3RB-DP11 2M
E3RA-DN21
E3RA-DP21
E3RB-DN21
E3RB-DP21
2m
E3RA-DN12 2M
E3RA-DP12 2M
E3RB-DN12 2M
E3RB-DP12 2M
E3RA-DN22
E3RA-DP22
E3RB-DN22
E3RB-DP22
2m
E3RA-DN13 2M
E3RA-DP13 2M
E3RB-DN13 2M
E3RB-DP13 2M
E3RA-DN23
E3RA-DP23
E3RB-DN23
E3RB-DP23
Sensor type
The Reflector is sold separately. Select the Reflector model most suited to the application.
Compact size and shape. Can be installed

almost anywhere.
Visible LED light for easy alignment.
185
E3FA/E3FB
Cylindrical sensors
Specifications
Straight type
Sensing method
Through-beam
(Red LED)
Through-beam
(Infrared LED)
Retro-reflective
Coaxial
Retro-reflective
Diffuse-reflective
NPN
output
Pre-wired
E3F_-TN11 2M
E3F_-TN12 2M
E3F_-RN11 2M
E3F_-RN12 2M
E3F_-DN11 2M
E3F_-DN12 2M
E3F_-DN13 2M
M12 Connector
E3F_-TN21
E3F_-TN22
E3F_-RN21
E3F_-RN22
E3F_-DN21
E3F_-DN22
E3F_-DN23
PNP
output
Pre-wired
E3F_-TP11 2M
E3F_-TP12 2M
E3F_-RP11 2M
E3F_-RP12 2M
E3F_-DP11 2M
E3F_-DP12 2M
E3F_-DP13 2M
M12 Connector
E3F_-TP21
E3F_-TP22
E3F_-RP21
E3F_-RP22
E3F_-DP21
E3F_-DP22
E3F_-DP23
Sensing distance
20 m
15 m
0.1 to 4 m
0 to 500 mm
100 mm
300 mm
1m
Light source (wavelength)
Red LED (624 nm)
Infrared LED
(850 nm)
Red LED (624 nm)
10 to 30 VDC (include voltage ripple of 10%(p-p) max.)
Operation mode
Light-ON/Dark-ON selectable by wiring
One-turn adjuster
Protection circuits
Reversed power supply polarity protection, Output short-circuit protection and Reversed output polarity protection
Model
Item
Response time
Ambient
temperature
0.5 ms
Operating
25 to 55C
Storage
IEC: IP67, DIN 40050-9: IP69K
Material
Case and Nut
E3FA: ABS, E3FB: Nickel brass
Lens and Display
PMMA
Adjuster
POM
Sensing method
Diffuse-reflective
NPN
output
Pre-wired
E3F_-DN14 2M
E3F_-DN15 2M
E3F_-DN16 2M
E3F_-LN11 2M
E3F_-LN12 2M
M12 Connector
E3F_-DN24
E3F_-DN25
E3F_-DN26
E3F_-LN21
E3F_-LN22
PNP
output
Pre-wired
E3F_-DP14 2M
E3F_-DP15 2M
E3F_-DP16 2M
E3F_-LP11 2M
E3F_-LP12 2M
M12 Connector
E3F_-DP24
E3F_-DP25
E3F_-DP26
E3F_-LP21
E3F_-LP22
Sensing distance
100 mm
300 mm
1m
100 mm
200 mm
Operation mode
Model
Item
BGS (Background suppression)
Red LED (624 nm)
One-turn adjuster
Protection circuits
Reversed power supply polarity protection, Output short-circuit protection and Reversed output polarity
protection
Response time
Ambient
temperature
Fixed
0.5 ms
Operating
25 to 55C
Storage
IEC: IP67, DIN 40050-9: IP69K
Material
Case and Nut
Lens and Display
PMMA
Adjuster
POM
Radial type
Sensing method
Through-beam
Retro-reflective
Diffuse-reflective
NPN
output
Pre-wired
E3R_-TN11 2M
E3R_-RN11 2M
E3R_-DN11 2M
E3R_-DN12 2M
E3R_-DN13 2M
M12 Connector
E3R_-TN21
E3R_-RN21
E3R_-DN21
E3R_-DN22
E3R_-DN23
PNP
output
Pre-wired
E3R_-TP11 2M
E3R_-RP11 2M
E3R_-DP11 2M
E3R_-DP12 2M
E3R_-DP13 2M
M12 Connector
E3R_-TP21
E3R_-RP21
E3R_-DP21
E3R_-DP22
E3R_-DP23
Sensing distance
15 m
0.1 to 3 m
100 mm
300 mm
700 mm
Red LED (624 nm)
Operation mode
One-turn adjuster
Protection circuits
Model
Item
Response time
Ambient
temperature
0.5 ms
Operating
25 to 55C
Storage
IEC: IP67, DIN 40050-9: IP69K
Material
Case and Nut
Lens and Display
PMMA
Adjuster
POM
186
E3F1
Cylindrical sensors
Standard M18 Photosensor with best price-value ratio
OMRON E3F1 series represents an M18 size Photoelectric sensor with best value
at competitive price. It features the same compact housing as E3FA and meets all
requirements for standard industrial applications.
Bright visible red LED enabling easy alignment
Reliable operation in all industrial environments
Compact and robust housing for easy integration into machines
Sensing distance
Through-beam
15 m
Retro-reflective*2
0.1 to 3 m (with E39-R1S)
Diffuse-reflective
100 mm
300 mm
*1
*2
Connection method
Order code
NPN output
PNP output
2m
E3F1-TN11 2M*1
E3F1-TP11 2M*1
E3F1-TN21*1
E3F1-TP21*1
2m
E3F1-RN11 2M
E3F1-RP11 2M
E3F1-RN21
E3F1-RP21
2m
E3F1-DN11 2M
E3F1-DP11 2M
E3F1-DN21
E3F1-DP21
2m
E3F1-DN12 2M
E3F1-DP12 2M
E3F1-DN22
E3F1-DP22
Sensor type
Includes the emitter and receiver.

The Reflector is sold separately.
Specifications
Sensing method
Through-beam
Retro-reflective
Diffuse-reflective
NPN
output
Pre-wired
E3F1-TN11 2M
E3F1-RN11 2M
E3F1-DN11 2M
E3F1-DN12 2M
M12 Connector
E3F1-TN21
E3F1-RN21
E3F1-DN21
E3F1-DN22
PNP
output
Pre-wired
E3F1-TP11 2M
E3F1-RP11 2M
E3F1-DP11 2M
E3F1-DP12 2M
M12 Connector
E3F1-TP21
E3F1-RP21
E3F1-DP21
E3F1-DP22
Sensing distance
15 m
0.1 to 3 m
100 mm
300 mm
Red LED (624 nm)
Operation mode
One-turn adjuster
Protection circuits
Model
Item
Response time
Ambient
temperature
0.5 ms
Operating
25 to 55C
Storage
IEC: IP66
Material
Case
ABS
Lens and Display
PMMA

almost anywhere.
187
E3FC
Cylindrical sensors
M18 Photosensor in high-grade stainless steel housing
OMRON E3FC represents a compact M18 sensor with high housing protection for washdown applications in Food & Beverage industry.
High grade steel housing (SUS316L)
Proven with various industrial detergents of Ecolab and Diversey
Withstands heat shock conditions
Epoxy resin at connector/cable end preventing water ingress
Bright visible red LED enabling easy alignment
Sensor type
Sensing distance
Through-beam
20 m
Retro-reflective with MSR*1
0.1 to 4 m (with E39-R1S)
Diffuse-reflective*2
300 mm (adjustable, red LED)

1 m (adjustable, red LED)
300 mm (adjustable, IR LED)
1 m (adjustable, IR LED)
BGS*2 (Background suppression)
100 mm
200 mm
*1
*2
Connection method
Order code
PNP output
2m
E3FC-TN11 2M
E3FC-TP11 2M
E3FC-TN21
E3FC-TP21
2m
E3FC-RN11 2M
E3FC-RP11 2M
E3FC-RN21
E3FC-RP21
2m
E3FC-DN12 2M
E3FC-DP12 2M
E3FC-DN22
E3FC-DP22
2m
E3FC-DN13 2M
E3FC-DP13 2M
E3FC-DN23
E3FC-DP23
2m
E3FC-DN15 2M
E3FC-DP15 2M
E3FC-DN25
E3FC-DP25
2m
E3FC-DN16 2M
E3FC-DP16 2M
E3FC-DN26
E3FC-DP26
2m
E3FC-LN11 2M
E3FC-LP11 2M
E3FC-LN21
E3FC-LP21
2m
E3FC-LN12 2M
E3FC-LP12 2M
E3FC-LN22
E3FC-LP22
The Reflector is sold separately.

Models with default L-On output logic for diffuse and BGS available. Please check with your OMRON representative.
188
NPN output
E3FC
Cylindrical sensors
Specifications
Sensing method
Through-beam Retro-reflective Diffuse reflective
NPN output
E3FC-TN11 2M
PNP output
Item
Pre-wired
BGS (Background suppression)
E3FC-RN11 2M
E3FC-DN12 2M E3FC-DN13 2M E3FC-DN15 2M E3FC-DN16 2M E3FC-LN11 2M
E3FC-LN12 2M
M12 connector E3FC-TN21
E3FC-RN21
E3FC-DN22
E3FC-DN23
E3FC-DN25
E3FC-DN26
E3FC-LN21
E3FC-LN22
Pre-wired
E3FC-RP11 2M
E3FC-DP12 2M
E3FC-DP13 2M
E3FC-DP15 2M
E3FC-DP16 2M
E3FC-LP11 2M
E3FC-LP12 2M
E3FC-RP21
E3FC-DP22
E3FC-DP23
E3FC-DP25
E3FC-DP26
E3FC-LP21
E3FC-LP22
0.1 to 4 m
300 mm
1m
300 mm
1m
100 mm
200 mm
E3FC-TP11 2M
M12 connector E3FC-TP21
Sensing distance
20 m
red LED (624 nm)
Operation mode
Indicator
Operation indicator (orange)

Stability indicator (green)
no adjuster
Protection circuits
Response time
Ambient temperature
*1
no adjuster
0.5 ms
Operating
25 to 55C
Storage

IP67, IP68*1, IP69K
Material
One-turn adjuster
red LED (624 nm)
Case
Stainless Steel (SUS 316L)
Lens
PMMA
Cable
PVC
Adjuster
POM
Model
IP68 test definition: Heat shock cycles in 3 and 60C surface tensioned water (20 cycles with 30 min.)
Best t for wash-down applications.
Proven in heat shock tests with surface

tensioned water.

almost anywhere.
189
E3H2
Cylindrical sensors
Miniature photoelectric sensors in cylindrical M8 and
M12 housing
M8 or M12 sized cylindrical housings when mounting space is crucial
Retro-reflective models with two teaching modes for standard and semitransparent objects
pre-wired and connector models
M12 cylindrical housing
Sensor type
Sensing distance
Through-beam
4 m (adjustable)
Retro-reflective with
M.S.R.
Diffuse-reflective
2 m (teachable*2)
300 mm (teachable)
100 mm (fixed)
*1
*2
*3
Order code*1
Connection method
NPN output
PNP output
2m
E3H2-T4C4M 2M
E3H2-T4B4M 2M
E3H2-T4C4M-M1
E3H2-T4B4M-M1
2m
E3H2-R2C4M 2M*3
E3H2-R2B4M 2M*3
E3H2-R2C4M-M1*3
E3H2-R2B4M-M1*3
2m
E3H2-DS30C4M 2M
E3H2-DS30B4M 2M
E3H2-DS30C4M-M1
E3H2-DS30B4M-M1
2m
E3H2-DS10C4M 2M
E3H2-DS10B4M 2M
E3H2-DS10C4M-M1
E3H2-DS10B4M-M1
Light-ON/Dark-ON selectable by wire

Models without teach-button are available. Contact your OMRON representative.
Without reflector; order reflector separately
Sensor type
Sensing distance
Through-beam
Connection method
2m
Operation mode
2m
2m
dark on
light on
Order code
NPN output
PNP output
E3H2-T2C2S 2M
E3H2-T2B2S 2M
E3H2-T2C2S-M5
E3H2-T2B2S-M5
E3H2-T2C1S 2M
E3H2-T2B1S 2M
E3H2-T2C1S-M5
E3H2-T2B1S-M5
Specifications
Item
Through-beam
E3H2-T4
E3H2-T2
Diffuse-reflective
E3H2-R
E3H2-DS30
Red LED (660 nm)
10 to 30 VDC, 10% ripple
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse polarity protection, output short circuit protection
Response time
2.5 ms max
1 ms max.
1.1 ms max
Potentiometer adjuster
Teach-in
Ambient
Operating
temperature
25 to 55C
25 to 50C
25 to 55C
EN 60529: IP67
Material
Case
nickel-plated brass
stainless steel
nickel-plated brass
Lens
plastic
190
E3H2-DS10
E3T-C
Miniature and Photomicro sensors

Miniature photoelectric sensors in M5 and M6 sized
housing
The E3T-C family of miniature photoelectric sensors is the ideal solution when
mounting space is crucial.
axial and radial M5 sized through-beam sensors
axial M6 sized diffuse-reflective sensors
pre-wired models in stainless steel housing
Sensing distance
Connection method
Operation mode
Through-beam (axial)
1m
2m
Through-beam (radial)
500 mm
2m
dark on
Order code
NPN output
PNP output
E3T-CT12 2M
E3T-CT14 2M
E3T-CT22S 2M
E3T-CT24S 2M
Sensor type
Sensor type
Diffuse-reflective
Sensing distance
50 mm (adjustable)
Connection method
Operation mode
2m
light on
Order code
NPN output
PNP output
E3T-CD11 2M
E3T-CD13 2M
Specifications
Item
E3T-CT1_
E3T-CT2_
E3T-CD1_
Red LED (630 nm)
Red LED (625 nm)
12 to 24 VDC10%, ripple (p-p) 10% max.
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse polarity protection,

Output short-circuit protection
Response time
0.5 ms max.

Storage
Material
25 to 55C
IEC 60529 IP65
Case
SUS303
Display window
Polysulfone Epoxy
Lens
Polysulfone
191
E3T

Photoelectric sensor in miniature plastic housing
Small sized photoelectric sensors in flat and side view shape for demanding mounting
conditions.
Small size with precision pinpoint LED where space is crucial
3.5 mm flat model with reliable background suppression and small black/white
error
Unique optical alignment technology ensuring minimal deviation of optical axis
High EMC and ambient light immunity
Sensor type
Through-beam
Sensing distance
2m
Connection method
Mounting screw
size
Order code*1
NPN output
PNP output
Light-ON
M2
E3T-ST31 2M
E3T-ST33 2M
Dark-ON
M2
E3T-ST32 2M
E3T-ST34 2M
Light-ON
M2
E3T-ST11 2M
E3T-ST13 2M
M3
E3T-ST11M 2M
E3T-ST13M 2M
M2
E3T-ST12 2M
E3T-ST14 2M
M3
E3T-ST12M 2M
E3T-ST14M 2M
M2
E3T-ST21 2M
E3T-ST23 2M
M3
E3T-ST21M 2M
E3T-ST23M 2M
M2
E3T-ST22 2M
E3T-ST24 2M
M3
E3T-ST22M 2M
E3T-ST24M 2M
Light-ON
M2
E3T-FT11 2M
E3T-FT13 2M
Dark-ON
M2
E3T-FT12 2M
E3T-FT14 2M
Light-ON
M2
E3T-FT21 2M
E3T-FT23 2M
Dark-ON
M2
E3T-FT22 2M
E3T-FT24 2M
Operation
mode
2m
1m
Dark-ON
300 mm
Light-ON
Dark-ON
Through-beam
500 mm
300 mm
Diffuse-reflective
Limited-reflective
30 to 200 mm*2
on reflectors/
10 to 100 mm*2
on reflective foils
Light-ON
M2
E3T-SR41-C 2M*3
E3T-SR43-C 2M*3
Dark-ON
M2
E3T-SR42-C 2M*3
E3T-SR44-C 2M*3
5 to 30 mm
Light-ON
M2
E3T-FD11 2M
E3T-FD13 2M
M3
E3T-FD11M 2M
E3T-FD13M 2M
M2
E3T-FD12 2M
E3T-FD14 2M
M3
E3T-FD12M 2M
E3T-FD14M 2M
M2
E3T-SL11 2M
E3T-SL13 2M
M3
E3T-SL11M 2M
E3T-SL13M 2M
M2
E3T-SL12 2M
E3T-SL14 2M
M3
E3T-SL12M 2M
E3T-SL14M 2M
M2
E3T-SL21 2M
E3T-SL23 2M
M3
E3T-SL21M 2M
E3T-SL23M 2M
M2
E3T-SL22 2M
E3T-SL24 2M
M3
E3T-SL22M 2M
E3T-SL24M 2M
Light-ON
M2
E3T-FL11 2M
E3T-FL13 2M
Dark-ON
M2
E3T-FL12 2M
E3T-FL14 2M
Light-ON
M2
E3T-FL21 2M
E3T-FL23 2M
Dark-ON
M2
E3T-FL22 2M
E3T-FL24 2M
5 to 15 mm
5 to 30 mm
Diffuse-reflective
1 to 15 mm
1 to 30 mm
*1
*2
For ordering pigtail versions replace '2M' of cable types with:

- M1J: M12
with 30 cm cable
Retro-reflective
Dark-ON
Light-ON
Dark-ON
Light-ON
Dark-ON
For pre-wired models with robotic cables add '-R' to the order code (example: E3T-FT21R 2M)
The distances are measured with reflector E39-R4 and reflective foil E39-R37-CA. For applications with shorter distances between the sensor and the reflector contact your OMRON
representative.
*3
Order reflector separately. Models with included reflectors are available.
192
E3T
Specifications
Through-beam
Retro-reflective
Side-view
Flat
Side-view
E3T-ST1
E3T-ST2
E3T-ST3
E3T-FT1
E3T-FT2
E3T-SR4
Sensing distance
E3T-ST3_: 2 m
E3T-ST1_: 1 m
E3T-ST2_: 300 mm
E3T-FT1_: 500 mm
E3T-FT2_: 300 mm
30 to 200 mm (with E39-R4)

10 to 100 mm (with E39-R37-CA)
Red LED (Pin-point LED) = 650 nm
Protective circuits
Power supply and control output reverse polarity protection

Output short-circuit protection
Response time
1 ms max.
Ambient
Operating
temperature Storage
IEC60529 IP67
Material
Case
Display window
Denatured polyarylate
Lens
Item

Output short-circuit protection, mutual interference prevention, surge suppressor
Methacrylic resin
Diffuse-reflective
Limited-reflective
Flat
Side-view
E3T-FD1
E3T-SL1
E3T-SL2
E3T-FL1
E3T-FL2
Sensing distance
5 to 30 mm
5 to 15 mm
5 to 30 mm
1 to 15 mm
1 to 30 mm
Black/white error
Red LED (Pin-point LED) = 650 nm
Protective circuits

Output short-circuit protection, Mutual interference prevention
Response time
1 ms max.
Ambient
Operating
temperature Storage
25 to 55C
IEC60529 IP67
Material
Case
Display window
Lens
Item
Diffuse-reflective (background suppression)

Flat
15% max.
(mm)
25
Light receiving lens
Flip chip (IC)
20
Light receiving
element
15
10
5
0
Rear
Front
Side
White paper Black paper

E3T-FL1@
Minimal black / white error
The coaxial optics and the small focal lens

of the retro-reective models allow the
detection of small (dia 2 mm) objects or
through small holes (dia 2 mm).
The unique light receiving lens shape and

the chip mounting technology, provide
appropriate sensing distances for very
precise and reliable detection even through
smallest slits and gaps with e.g. 0.5 mm dia.
Models with mounting holes for M2 or

M3 screws
193
EE-SX47/67

Photo microsensor in plastic fork shape housing
Standard photo microsensors with 50 to 100 mA direct switching capacity for best
value-performance ratio to detect machine parts or end positions independent of
material or magnetic fields.
Response frequency up to 1 kHz
Wide operating voltage range: 5 to 24 VDC
Connector models
Sensor type
Sensing
distance
Connection method
Operation Mode
Shape*1
NPN output
PNP output
Through-beam with slot
5 mm
(slot width)
(Infrared light)
Connector (4 pin)*3
Dark-ON/Light-ON
(selectable)
Standard
EE-SX670
EE-SX670P
L-shaped
EE-SX671
EE-SX671P
T-shaped,
7 mm
EE-SX672
EE-SX672P
Closemounting
EE-SX673
EE-SX673P
Closemounting
EE-SX674
EE-SX674P
T-shaped,
10 mm
EE-SX675
EE-SX675P
F-shaped
EE-SX676
EE-SX676P
R-shaped
EE-SX677
EESX-677P
*1
*2
*3
For shape dimensions refer to datasheet on www.industrial.omron.eu

For pre-wired models with 1 m cable add '-WR' to order reference (e.g. EE-SX670-WR)
Order connector separately from accessories
194
Order code *2
EE-SX47/67
Specifications
Item
Through-beam
Standard
L-shaped
T-shaped,
slot center: 7 mm
Close-mounting
T-shaped,
slot center: 10 mm
F-shaped
R-shaped
NPN
EE-SX670
EE-SX671
EE-SX672
EE-SX673
EE-SX674
EE-SX675
EE-SX676
EE-SX677
PNP
EE-SX670P
EE-SX671P
EE-SX672P
EE-SX673P
EE-SX674P
EE-SX675P
EE-SX676P
EE-SX677P
Sensing distance
5 mm (slot width)
5 to 24 VDC 10%, ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Response frequency
1 kHz min. (3 kHz average)
Ambient temperature
Operating: 25 to 55C, Storage: 30 to 80C
IEC60529 IP50
Material
Case
Lens
Polycarbonate
Accessories (order separately)

Type
Cable length
Material
Order code
Connector with Cable
2m
PVC
EE-1010 2M
Connector with Robot Cable
2m
PVC
EE-1010R 2M
Note: For mechanical limit switches see page 304
Easy to mount end position detection/limit

sensors (contactless).
195
E3Z-G
Fork sensors
Photoelectric sensor in 25 mm plastic
fork shape housing
The forked shape optical through-beam sensors combine simple installation with
reliable passage detection of object, machine parts or transportation elements like
hanggliders.
Fork shape for simple installation
1 or 2 axis models
Sensor type
Through-beam
Sensing distance
Number of
optical axes
25 mm
(Infrared light)
*1
Order code*1
Connection method
2m
2m
NPN output
PNP output
E3Z-G61 2M
E3Z-G81 2M
M8 4-pin E3Z-G61-M3J
E3Z-G62 2M
M8 4-pin E3Z-G62-M3J
E3Z-G81-M3J
E3Z-G822M
E3Z-G82-M3J
Specifications
Item
Through-beam
E3Z-G
12 to 24 VDC10% max. ripple (p-p): 10%
Protective circuits
Output short-circuit protection, and mutual interference prevention, power supply, reverse polarity protection
Response time
Ambient temperature
1 ms max.
Operating
25 to 55C
Storage
IEC60529 IP64
Material
ABS
196
E3ZM-C
Special application sensors

Oil-resistant photoelectric sensor in compact stainless
steel housing
The oil-resistant compact photoelectric sensor in a robust stainless steel housing
features an enhanced functional reserve for reliable object detection in dirty and
mechanically demanding environments such as automotive assembly lines.
Oil-resistant stainless steel housing
IP67 and IP69k for highest water resistance
High visibility orange LED in through-beam model for easy alignment
Sensing distance
Through-beam
15 m
(Infrared light)
20 m
(Orange light)
Diffuse-reflective
0.1 to 4m*3
1 m (adjustable)
Diffuse-reflective
*1
*2
*3
Order code*1
Connection method
NPN output
PNP output
E3ZM-CT61 2M
E3ZM-CT81 2M
E3ZM-CT61-M1TJ
E3ZM-CT81-M1TJ
Sensor type
2m
*2
E3ZM-CT66
E3ZM-CT86
2m
E3ZM-CT62B 2M
E3ZM-CT82B 2M
*2
E3ZM-CT62B-M1TJ
E3ZM-CT82B-M1TJ
E3ZM-CT67B
E3ZM-CT87B
2m
E3ZM-CR61 2M
E3ZM-CR81 2M
*2
E3ZM-CR61-M1TJ
E3ZM-CR81-M1TJ
E3ZM-CR66
E3ZM-CR86
2m
E3ZM-CD62 2M
E3ZM-CD82 2M
*2
E3ZM-CD62-M1TJ
E3ZM-CD82-M1TJ
E3ZM-CD67
E3ZM-CD87
2m
E3ZM-CL61H 2M
E3ZM-CL81H 2M
*2
E3ZM-CL61H-M1TJ
E3ZM-CL81H-M1TJ
E3ZM-CL66H
E3ZM-CL86H
2m
E3ZM-CL64H 2M
E3ZM-CL84H 2M
*2
E3ZM-CL64H-M1TJ
E3ZM-CL84H-M1TJ
E3ZM-CL69H
E3ZM-CL89H
Light-ON/ Dark-ON switch selectable for E3ZM-CT, E3ZM-CR and E3ZM-CD. Light-ON/ Dark-ON selectable by wire for E3ZM-CL.
uses OMRON's Twist & Click M12 connector XS5.
Measured with E39-R1S.
Specifications
Item
Diffuse-reflective
NPN
Through-beam
E3ZM-CT61 (-M1TJ)
E3ZM-CT66
E3ZM-CT62B (-M1TJ)
E3ZM-CT67B
E3ZM-CR61 (-M1TJ)
E3ZM-CR66
E3ZM-CD62 (-M1TJ)
E3ZM-CD67
PNP
E3ZM-CT81 (-M1TJ)
E3ZM-CT86
E3ZM-CT82B (-M1TJ)
E3ZM-CT87B
E3ZM-CR81 (-M1TJ)
E3ZM-CR86
E3ZM-CD82 (-M1TJ)
E3ZM-CD87
Orange LED (615 nm)
Red LED (660 nm)
10 to 30 VDC, including 10% ripple (p-p)
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse polarity protection, output Power supply reverse polarity protection, output short-circuit protection, output reverse polarity protecshort-circuit protection, output reverse polarity tion, and mutual interference prevention
protection
Response time
1 ms max.
2 ms max.
1 ms max.

Storage
Material
Case
SUS316L
Lens
PMMA (polymethylmethacrylate)
Display

Seals
Fluoro rubber
197
E3ZM-C
Item
Diffuse-reflective with background suppression (fixed distance)

NPN
E3ZM-CL61H (-M1TJ)
E3ZM-CL66H
E3ZM-CL64H (-M1TJ)
E3ZM-CL69H
PNP
E3ZM-CL81H (-M1TJ)
E3ZM-CL86H
E3ZM-CL84H (-M1TJ)
E3ZM-CL89H
Red LED (660 nm)
Red LED (650 nm)
Protective circuits
Reversed power supply polarity protection, output short-circuit protection, reversed output polarity protection, mutual interference protection
Response time
1 ms max.

Storage
Material
Case
SUS316L
Cable
Oil-resistant vinyl cable
Lens
Display
PES (polyethersulfone)
Seals
Fluoro rubber
Oil Resistance
Test oil type
Lubricants
Non-water-soluble cutting oils
Water-soluble
cutting oils
Product name
Velocity Oil No. 3
Yushiron Oil No.2 AC
Yushiroken EC50T3
Yushiroken EC50T5
Yushiroken S46D
Yushiroken S50N
Yushiron Lubic HWC68
Yushiroken Synthetic #770TG
Emulcut FA-900ST
Multicool CSF-9000
Sugicut CS-68JS-1
Toyocool 3A-666
Gryton 1700
Gryton 1700D
Kinetic viscosity at 40C (mm2/s)

2.02
Less than 10
pH (dilution rate)
10.1 (30)
9.9 (30)
9.9 (50)
8.6 (50)
9.1 (30)
9.9 (20)
9.7 (30)
9.7 (20)
9.6 (20)
9.6 (20)
9.1 (10)
9.3 (3)
1. The Sensor was immersed in the above oils for 240 h at 55C and then passed an insulation resistance test at 100 M.
2. Use the kinetic viscosities and pHs in the above table as a guide when using the Sensor in environments containing oils not listed in the table. Additives in the oil may also affect performance.
Always test applicability in advance.
Tested oil and lubricant resistance
198
Highly visible orange LED
E3ZM-B

Transparent object detection sensor in compact stainless
steel housing
The E3ZM-B family provides models for the general transparent material detection
and specialized models providing highest stability for the detection of PET bottles.
Stable PET detection using double refraction and AC3 power control technology
Detergent resistant compact SUS316L housing
Retro-reflective
with M.S.R.
Sensing distance
Optimised for PET

bottles and trays
100 to 500 mm
(teachable)
Special reflector
Order separately*2
E39-RP1 included
Retro-reflective
with M.S.R.
*1
*2
*3
*4
For all transparent

media (glass, PET,
foils)
100 to 500 mm
(potentiometer
adjustment)*3
Order code*1
Connection method
Order separately*4
NPN output
PNP output
2m
E3ZM-B61 2M
E3ZM-B81 2M
E3ZM-B66
E3ZM-B86
2m
E3ZM-B61-C 2M
E3ZM-B81-C 2M
E3ZM-B66-C
E3ZM-B86-C
2m
E3ZM-B61T 2M
E3ZM-B81T 2M
E3ZM-B66T
E3ZM-B86T
Sensor type
PET optimised models are Light-ON/Dark-ON selectable by wire. E3ZM-B_T all transparent media types are Light-ON/ Dark-ON switch selectable
For higher signal stability using circular polarisation functionality for PET bottles, order special reflector E39-RP1 separately
Teachable all-transparent-media types are available. Contact your OMRON representative
Order reflector separately
Specifications
Item
PET optimised (teachable)
all-transparent-media (potentiometer adjustment)
NPN
E3ZM-B61(-C)/-B66(-C)
E3ZM-B6_T
PNP
E3ZM-B81(-C)/-B86(-C)
E3ZM-B8_T
Red LED (650 nm)
Protective circuits
Reversed power supply polarity protection, output short-circuit protection, mutual interference prevention, and reversed output polarity protection
Repsonse time
Ambient
temperature
1 ms max.
Operating
40 to 60C
Storage
Material
Case
SUS316L
Lens
Display
Seals
Fluoro rubber
Cable
PVC (polyvinyl chloride)
Utilisation of double reection eect in PET

for higher detection stability (PET optimised
models)
Automatic LED power adjustment (AC3) to

compensate for soiling and temperature
uctuations (PET optimised models)
25 to 55C
Detergent resistant
199
E3Z-B

Transparent object detection photoelectric sensor in
compact plastic housing
The E3Z-B provides easy adjustment for the detection of a large variety of standard
transparent objects.
Detects a wide range of bottles from single bottles to sets of stocked bottles
IP67/IP69K tested for highest water resistance
Sensor type
Sensing distance
Retro-reflective without M.S.R. 80 to 500 mm*2 (adjustable)

0.5 to 2 m*2 (adjustable)
*1
*2
Order code*1
Connection method
NPN output
PNP output
2m
E3Z-B61 2M
E3Z-B81 2M
E3Z-B66
E3Z-B86
2m
E3Z-B62 2M
E3Z-B82 2M
E3Z-B67
E3Z-B87
Light-ON / Dark-ON switch selectable

Measured with E39-R1S
Specifications
Item
Retro-reflective without M.S.R.

NPN output
E3Z-B61/E3Z-B66
E3Z-B62/E3Z-B67
PNP output
E3Z-B81/E3Z-B86
E3Z-B82/E3Z-B87
Red LED (680 nm)
12 to 24 VDC10%, ripple (p-p) : 10% max.
Protective circuits
Response time
1 ms max.
Ambient
Operating
temperature Storage
25 to 55C
Material
Case
Lens
Methacrylate resin
Easy adjustment for the detection of a large

variety of transparent objects
200
E3F_-B/-V

Transparent object detection sensor in compact M18
housing
The E3F_-B/-V provide enhanced detection stability for the detection of transparent
objects. It allows an easy and intuitive adjustment to individual requirements.
Easy adjustment to individual requirements for all transparent materials
P-opaquing technology enables reliable detection of PET bottles also in dusty
environments
Coaxial optics (E3F_-B__1) for stable, position-independent detection
Ordering Information
Sensing distance
Limited distance reflective
10 to 50 mm
Coaxial retro-reflective with

P-opaquing function*1
0 to 500 mm
(with E39-RP1)
0.1 to 2m
(with E39-RP1)
Retro-reflective with
P-opaquing function*1
*1
Connection method
Order code
E3FA (plastic housing)
E3FB (metal housing)
NPN output
PNP output
NPN output
PNP output
2m
E3FA-VN11 2M
E3FA-VP11 2M
E3FB-VN11 2M
E3FB-VP11 2M
E3FA-VN21
E3FA-VP21
E3FB-VN21
E3FB-VP21
2m
E3FA-BN11 2M
E3FA-BP11 2M
E3FB-BN11 2M
E3FB-BP11 2M
E3FA-BN21
E3FA-BP21
E3FB-BN21
E3FB-BP21
2m
E3FA-BN12 2M
E3FA-BP12 2M
E3FB-BN12 2M
E3FB-BP12 2M
E3FA-BN22
E3FA-BN22
E3FB-BN22
E3FB-BN22
The Reflector is sold separately. Select the Reflector model most suited to the application. For PET detection E39-RP1 is recommended for best detection stability.
Ratings and Specifications

Sensing method
Limited distance reflective
Retro-reflective with P-opaquing function
NPN
output
Pre-wired
E3F_-VN11 2M
E3F_-BN11 2M
E3F_-BN12 2M
M12 Connector
E3F_-VN21
E3F_-BN21
E3F_-BN22
PNP
output
Pre-wired
E3F_-VP11 2M
E3F_-BP11 2M
E3F_-BP12 2M
M12 Connector
E3F_-VP21
E3F_-BP21
E3F_-BP22
Sensing distance
10 to 50 mm
0 to 500 mm (coaxial)
0.1 to 2 m
Red LED (624 nm)
Operation mode
One-turn adjuster
Model
Item
Protection circuits
Response time
0.5 ms
Ambient temperature
Operating
25 to 55C
Storage
IEC: IP67, DIN 40050-9: IP69K
Material
Case and Nut
Lens and Display
PMMA
Coaxial optics (E3F_-B) for detection

through small holes
Reliable detection of PET bottles by unique

p-opaquing technology
Limited-reective types suitable for

detecting transparant lm to shiny,
mirror lm.
201
Sensor type
E3S-DB

Transparent object sensor
E3S-DB sensor provides most reliable detection of all kinds of transparent objects such
as PET bottles, glass bottles or transparent trays.
Most reliable detection of all transparent objects
SmartTeach enabling fast set up and optimum threshold setting
Narrow beam types detecting smallest object gaps (min. 3 mm)
Proven for environments in Food & Beverage industry
Sensor type
Sensing distance
recommended (max.)
Retro-reflective
with MSR function
Smart teach
Standard
Narrow beam*3
Trimmer
Standard
Narrow beam*3
*1
*2
*3
*4
Order code*1
Connection method
3.5 m (4.5 m)*2
0.5 m (0.7 m)*4
3.5 m (4.5 m)*2
0.5 m (0.7 m)*4
NPN output
PNP output
E3S-DBN11 2M
E3S-DBP11 2M
E3S-DBN21
E3S-DBP21
E3S-DBN31
E3S-DBP31
E3S-DBN12 2M
E3S-DBP12 2M
E3S-DBN22
E3S-DBP22
E3S-DBN32
E3S-DBP32
E3S-DBN11T 2M
E3S-DBP11T 2M
E3S-DBN21T
E3S-DBP21T
E3S-DBN31T
E3S-DBP31T
E3S-DBN12T 2M
E3S-DBP12T 2M
E3S-DBN22T
E3S-DBP22T
E3S-DBN32T
E3S-DBP32T
Please order reflector separately.

Rated with E39-R8
For narrow beam type please use micro-triple reflector (e.g. E39-R21)
Rated with E39-R21
Specifications
Sensing method
Retro-reflective with MSR function
Model NPN output
E3S-DBN_1
E3S-DBN_1T
E3S-DBN_2
E3S-DBN_2T
PNP output
E3S-DBP_1
E3S-DBP_1T
E3S-DBP_2
E3S-DBP_2T
Item
Sensing distance, typ. max
0 to 4.5 m (with E39-R8)
0 to 700 mm (with E39-R21)
Sensing distance, recommended
0 to 3.5 m (with E39-R8)
0 to 500 mm (with E39-R21)
Red LED (624 nm)
Operating modes
OUT1: L-ON/OUT2: D-ON (antivalent output)
Protection circuits
Reversed power supply polarity protection, Output short-circuit protection,

Reversed output polarity protection, Missconnection protection, Mutual interference suppression
Response time
0.5 ms
SmartTeach
IEC: IP67, DIN 40050-9: IP69K
Connection method
Pre-wired cable (standard length: 2 m) or M12 4-pin connector or Pigtail (0.3 m/M12 4-pin)
Indicators
Light indicator (orange), Stability indicator (green)
SmartTeach providing fast & easy setting of

optimum thresholds
Narrow beam models for detecting gaps

down to 3 mm
202
11-turn trimmer
SmartTeach
PC Tool enables detailed identication of

object attenuation level and optimizing
sensor set up
11-turn trimmer
Auto-compensation-control for contamination keeps light level stable in harsh

environments
E3NC

High precision laser sensor with separate amplifier
The separate amplifier laser sensors feature a comprehensive range of sensing heads
with variable spot and advanced CMOS sensing heads for high precision positioning
and demanding applications.
High detection stability independent from color or surface structure
Lens attachments for line beam applications
Easy installation due to adjustable focus and smart tune functions
Sensor heads with up to 1.2 m sensing distance covering a wide range
of applications
High speed network connectivity to EtherCat fieldbus
Sensor type
Sensing distance
Remarks
Order code
Diffuse-reflective
1,200 mm
Variable spot (diffuse reflective)
E3NC-LH02 2M
7015 mm
Fixed spot (limited reflective)
E3NC-LH01 2M
8 m*1
Fixed spot
E3NC-LH03 2M
Coaxial retro-reflective
with M.S.R.
*1
Sensor heads E3NC-L Sensor Series
A Reflector is not included. Purchase a Reflector separately.
Sensor heads E3NC-S CMOS Laser Sensor Series

Sensor type
Sensing distance
Laser class
Order code
Diffuse-reflective
(distance-settable)
35 to 100 mm
E3NC-SH100 2M
35 to 250 mm
E3NC-SH250 2M
35 to 250 mm
E3NC-SH250H 2M
Amplifier units E3NC-L Sensor Series

Item
Order code
with connector*1
pre-wired
NPN output
PNP output
NPN output
2 outputs + 1 input models
E3NC-LA21 2M
E3NC-LA51 2M
1 output + 1 input models
Networking model*2
E3NC-LA0
*1
*2
E3NC-LA7
M8 connector
PNP output
NPN output
PNP output
E3NC-LA9
E3NC-LA24
E3NC-LA54
Order connector (E3X-CN21_) separately from accessories

For network connection please order networking unit E3NW
Amplifier units E3NC-S CMOS Laser Sensor Series

Item
Order code
with connector*1
pre-wired
NPN output
PNP output
NPN output
2 outputs + 1 input models
E3NC-SA21 2M
E3NC-SA51 2M
1 output + 1 input models
Networking model*2
E3NC-SA0
*1
*2
E3NC-SA7
M8 connector
PNP output
NPN output
PNP output
E3NC-SA9
E3NC-SA24
E3NC-SA54
Order connector (E3X-CN21_) separately from accessories

For network connection please order networking unit E3NW
203
E3NC
Amplifier connectors
Shape
Type
Comment
Order code
Amplifier connector
2 m PVC cable
E3X-CN21
30 cm PVC cable with M12 plug connector (4 pin)
E3X-CN21-M1J 0.3M
E3X-CN21-M3J-2 0.3M
Applicable Amplifier Units
Order code
Communication units
Shape
Communications method
Sensor communication unit for EtherCAT E3NX-FA0

E3NC-LA0
E3NC-SA0
E3NW-ECT
Sensor dispersion (slave) unit
E3NW-DS
Reflectors
Appearance
Type
Size
Applicable sensor
Order code
Micro-triple reflector
30 35 mm
E3NC-LH03
E39-R21
Micro-triple reflector
55 40 mm
E39-R22
Micro-triple reflector self-adhesive
25 25 mm
E39-RS10
Micro-triple reflector self-adhesive
50 50 mm
E39-RS11
Lens Attachments for Sensor Heads

Appearance
204
Comment
Applicable sensor
Order code
Lens attachement to a create line beam
E3NC-LH03
E39-P51
Lens attachement to a create line beam
E3NC-LH02
E39-P52
E3NC
Appearance
Type
Applicable sensor
Order code
L-shape mounting bracket
E3NC-LH03
E39-L190
E3NC-LH02
E39-L185
E3NC-LH01
E39-L186
E3NC-SH250
E3NC-SH250
E3NC-SH100
E39-L187
Mounting Brackets for Sensor Heads
E39-L188
Specifications
Sensor heads E3NC-L Sensor Series
Item
Coaxial Retro-reflective (M.S.R.)
Diffuse-reflective
E3NC-LH03
E3NC-LH02
E3NC-LH01
Light source (emission wave length)
Red laser diode (660 nm), 315 W max. (JIS Class 1, IEC/EN Class 1, and FDA Class 1)
Sensing distance
Giga-power mode (GIGA): 8 m

Standard mode (Stnd): 6 m
High-speed mode (HS): 3.5 m
Super-high-speed mode (SHS): 2 m
Giga-power mode (GIGA): 1,200 mm

Standard mode (Stnd): 750 mm
High-speed mode (HS): 250 mm
Super-high-speed mode (SHS): 200 mm
7015 mm
Beam size (typical)
2 mm dia. (at 1 m)
0.8 mm max. (at distances up to 300 mm)
0.1 mm (at 70 mm)
IP67
IP65
Amplifier units E3NC-L Sensor Series

Item
2 output/1 input models
Networking models
NPN output
E3NC-LA21
E3NC-LA7/E3NC-LA24
E3NC-LA0
PNP output
E3NC-LA51
E3NC-LA9/E3NC-LA54
Outputs
2 outputs
1 output
Inputs
1 input
Supply voltage
Response time
Functions

Super-high-speed mode
80 s
High-speed mode
250 s
Standard mode
1 ms
Giga-power mode
16 ms
Smart tuning
2-point tuning, full auto tuning, position tuning, maximum sensitivity tuning, power tuning, or percentage tuning
(99% to 99%)
Timer function
Select from timer disabled, OFF-delay, ON-delay, one-shot, or ON-delay + OFF-delay timer: 1 to 9,999 ms
Eco mode
Select from OFF (digital displays lit) or ECO (digital displays not lit)
Bank switching
Select from banks 1 to 4
Dynamic Power Control (DPC)
Provided (automatically controls light intensity and compensates incident level changes)
Ambient
Operating
temperature range Storage
10 to 55C
Digital display
7-segment displays (sub digital display: green, main digital display: white)
Display direction: switchable between normal and reversed
IP50 (IEC 60529)
*
*
Two sensor outputs are allocated in the programmable logic controller PLC I/O table. PLC operation via Communications Unit enables reading detected values and changing settings.
205
E3NC
Sensor heads E3NC-SH CMOS Laser Sensor series

Item
Diffuse-reflective (distance-settable)
E3NC-SH250H
E3NC-SH250
Light source (emission wave length)
Red laser diode (660 nm), 1 mW

(average output: 220 W),
(JIS Class 2, IEC/EN Class 2, and FDA Class 2)
Red laser diode (660 nm), 100 W max. (JIS Class 1, IEC/EN Class 1, and FDA Class 1)
E3NC-SH100
Measurement range
35 to 250 mm (display value: 350 to 2,500)
35 to 100 mm (display value: 350 to 1,000)
Spot diameter
1 mm (at 250 mm)
0.5 mm (at 100 mm)
IEC60529 IP67
Amplifier units E3NC-SH CMOS Laser Sensor series

Item
Networking models
NPN output
E3NC-SA21
E3NC-SA7/E3NC-SA24
E3NC-SA0
PNP output
E3NC-SA51
E3NC-SA9/E3NC-SA54
Outputs
2 outputs
1 output
Inputs
1 input
Supply voltage
Response time
Functions

Super-high-speed mode
1.5 ms
High-speed mode
5 ms
Standard mode
10 ms
Giga-power mode
50 ms
Smart tuning
2-point tuning, full auto tuning, 1-point tuning, tuning without workpiece, 2-point area tuning, 1-point area tuning,
or area tuning without workpiece
Timer function
Select from timer disabled, OFF-delay, ON-delay, one-shot, or ON-delay + OFF-delay timer: 1 to 9,999 ms
Bank switching
Select from banks 1 to 4
Ambient
Operating
temperature range Storage
10 to 55C
Digital display
7-segment displays (sub digital display: green, main digital display: white)
Display direction: switchable between normal and reversed.
IP50 (IEC 60529)
*
*
Two sensor outputs are allocated in the programmable logic controller PLC I/O table. PLC operation via Communications Unit enables reading detected values and changing settings.
Integration into N-Smart platform
206
Focal point adjustment
High precision detection over long range
E3S-LS3

Photoelectric sensor for structured object detection in
plastic housing
The special wide beam and limited-reflective optics of the E3S-LS3 ensures reliable
detection of structured objects (with holes or different heights) and can be used for
example to detect printed circuit boards (PCBs).
Wide beam and limited-reflective optics for the reliable detection of structured,
shiny and irregularly shaped objects
Sensor type
Sensing distance
Connection method
Timer function
Output
Order code
Limited-reflective
20 to 35 mm (Red light)
2m
No
NPN
2m
No
PNP
2m
E3S-LS3PT 2M
M8 3-pin No
E3S-LS3P-M5J
M8 4-pin No
E3S-LS3PT-M5J
E3S-LS3P-M3J
Yes
E3S-LS3PT-M3J
No
E3S-LS3PW 2M
Yes
E3S-LS3PWT 2M
M8 3-pin No
E3S-LS3PW-M5J
Yes
E3S-LS3P 2M
Yes
Yes
10 to 60 mm
E3S-LS3N 2M
E3S-LS3NW 2M
10 to 60 mm (Red light)
20 to 35 mm
Light ON
M8 4-pin No
Yes
E3S-LS3PWT-M5J
E3S-LS3PW-M3J
E3S-LS3PWT-M3J
Specifications
Item
Limited-reflective
E3S-LS3_
Red LED (660 nm)
Response time
1 ms max.
Timer function
Ambient
temperature
Available with E3S-LS3P(W)T models only. Time range: 0.1 to 1.0 s (adjustable)
Operating
Storage
Material
IEC60529 IP40
Case
ABS
Lens
Acrylic
207
E3JM

All voltage photoelectric sensor in
plastic housing with timer function
The square sized E3JM family provides 12 to 240 VDC and 24 to 240 VAC power supply
voltage, an enhanced sensing distance and a timer function.
12 to 240 VDC and 24 to 240 VAC supply voltage
Relay or solid state relay output
Models with timer function
Sensor type
Sensing distance
Through-beam
10 m
Diffuse-reflective
*1
Connection
method
Order code*1
Timer function
Relay output
minus common
plus common
E3JM-10M4-G-N
E3JM-10S4-G-N
E3JM-10R4-G-N
ON or OFF delay 0.1 s to 5 s

(adjustable)
E3JM-10M4T-G-N
E3JM-10S4T-G-N
E3JM-10R4T-G-N
E3JM-R4M4-G
E3JM-R4S4-G
E3JM-R4R4-G

(adjustable)
E3JM-R4M4T-G
E3JM-R4S4T-G
E3JM-R4R4T-G
E3JM-DS70M4-G
E3JM-DS70S4-G
E3JM-DS70R4-G

(adjustable)
E3JM-DS70M4T-G
E3JM-DS70S4T-G
E3JM-DS70R4T-G
Terminal block
(with PG 13.5)
4m
700 mm (adjustable)
DC SSR output
Light-ON / Dark-ON switch selectable
Specifications
Item
Through-beam
E3JM-10

E3JM-10_ T
E3JM-R
E3JM-R_ T
12 to 240 VDC10% ripple (p-p) : 10% max. 24 to 240 VAC10% 50/60 Hz
Control output
Relay output
250 VAC, 3 A max.; 5 VDC, 10 mA min.
DC SSR output
48 VDC, 100 mA max.; residual voltage 2V
Relay output
30 ms max.
DC SSR output
5 ms max.
Timer function
ON/OFF delay
Ambient
temperature
Operating
25 to 55C
Storage
Response time
Material
208
IEC60529 IP66
Case
ABS
Lens
Methacrylate resin
0.1 s to 5 s
Red LED (660 nm)
Diffuse-reflective
E3JM-D
E3JM-D_ T
0.1 s to 5 s
0.1 s to 5 s
E3G-M

Long distance all voltage photoelectric sensor in plastic
housing
The E3G-M series offers the long sensing distance of the E3G family for all voltage
(AC and DC) installations.
12 to 240 VDC and 24 to 240 VAC power supply
Terminal block connection
Sensor type
Sensing distance
Connection method
Timer function
Order code*1
Distance-settable
*1
*2
0.5 to 10 m
(Red light)
Terminal block (with PG 13.5 conduit)
0.2 to 2 m
(0.2 to 1.2 m distance settable)
E3G-MR19-G
ON or OFF delay 0 to 5 s (adjustable)
E3G-MR19T-G
E3G-ML79-G
ON or OFF delay 0 to 5 s (adjustable)
E3G-ML79T-G
Relay output
*2

Measured with E39-R2
Specifications
Item

E3G-MR19-G
Light source
(wave length)
Red LED (700 nm)
12 to 240 VDC10% ripple (p-p): 10% max.

24 to 240 VAC10% 50/60 Hz
Response time
30 ms
Timer function
Ambient
Operating
temperature Storage
25 to 55C
IEC 60529 IP67 (with protective cover attached)
Material
Case
Lens
Acrylics (PMMA)
Distance-settable (background suppression)

E3G-MR19T-G
E3G-ML79-G
E3G-ML79T-G
ON delay/OFF delay
0 to 5 s
(Adjuster variable system)
ON delay/OFF delay
0 to 5 s
(Adjuster variable system)
209
E39
Reflectors
Reflectors for retro-reflective photoelectric sensors

Shape
Type
Housing material
Features
Size in mm
Applicable Sensor
Order code
General purpose
reflectors
ABS base
Acrylic surface
Surface screw mounting

(diagonal holes)
40 60 7.5
Retro-reflective photoelectric
sensors with and without M.S.R
E39-R1S

(holes on one side only)
35.4 42.3 8
E39-R9
51.4 60.3 8.5
E39-R42
Small size
Side screw mounting or surface 41.8 22.5 11

selfadhesive
E39-R3
23 13.7 4.9
E39-R4
100 100 9
E39-R8
84.5 84.5 8.7
E39-R40
Large size
High precision
Simple mounting
Microtripel for improved

performance with fine beam
sensors
Round shape with centered

mounting hole for simple
screw mounting
Note: the ambient operating temperature is -25C to 55C unless otherwise specified
210
52 40 4.8
Recommended for fine beam

coaxial models (E3NC-LH03,
E3S-DB, E3T-SR4)
E39-R6
30 45
E39-R12
14 23 1
E39-R37-CA
12 24
E39-R13
Diameter: 84
Depth: 7.4
Photoelectric sensors with and

without M.S.R.
E39-R7
E39
Type
Housing material
Features
Enhanced
detergent
resistance
PVC

40 60 7.5
IP69k after DIN 40050 part 9
Size in mm
Applicable Sensor
Order code
Recommended for harsh

environment sensors
E39-R50
20 60 6
E39-R51
Highest detergent SUS316L

resistance
Borosilicat
43 30 5
E39-R16
Heat resistant
Borosilicat

450C heat resistance
Suitable for vacuum environment
95 51 8
E39-R47
Non-fogging
reflector
ABS
Acrylic surface
Anti-fogging coating
40 60 7.5
E39-R1K
Special polarizing
ABS base
PMMA surface
Special polarizing filter to PET 44 80 8.5
E3ZM-B, E3FA-B, E3FB-B, E3S-DB
E39-RP1
General purpose
tape reflectors
Acrylic
Self adhesive
Pre cut
Photoelectric sensors with and

without M.S.R.
E39-RS1
Reflectors
Shape
Reflectors
35 10 0.6
Optimised for E3T-SR4
E39-RS2
40 35 0.6
E39-RS3-CA
E39-RS25 5 m
Self adhesive
25 mm 5 m
Cut-to-length, roll material
Self adhesive
Pre cut
E39-RS2-CA
E39-RS3
80 70 0.6
High precision tape

reflectors
E39-RS1-CA
25 mm 22.8 m
E39-RS25 22.8 m
50 mm 5 m
E39-RS50 5 m
50 mm 22.8 m
E39-RS50 22.8 m
195 22
108 46
Recommended for fine beam and

laser sensors (E3NC-LH03, E3Z-LR,
E3S-DB_2)
E39-RS4
E39-RS5
Note: Note: the ambient operating temperature is 25C to 55C unless otherwise specified
211
AS
Accessories
Mounting brackets
Shape
Type
Material
Features
Order code
M8 nuts
brass
100 pcs
ASMM0800
M12 nuts
stainless steel
ASMM0801
brass
ASMM1200
ASMM1800
M18 nuts
stainless steel
plastic
ASMM1802
1 pc
ASMK1802 (8 mm thickness)
100 pcs
ASMK1801 (4 mm thickness)
M30 nuts
brass
100 pcs
ASMM3000
M8 Washer
brass
1,000 pcs
ASZA0800
ASZA1200
M12 Washer
M18 Washer
M30 Washer
212
stainless steel
500pcs
ASZA1201
brass
100 pcs
ASZA1801
stainless steel
200 pcs
ASZA1802
brass
100 pcs
ASZA3001
E39/Y92E-B
Accessories
Shape
*1
Type
Order code
Quick access snap fix for cylindrical sensors; sizes M8, M12, M18, M30
Y92E-BC08
Y92E-BC12
Y92E-BC18
Y92E-BC30
Surface mounting for M18 cylindrical sensors (dia 18mm)
E39-L183
Standard-surface mounting (for pre-wired or pigtail models)
E39-L104*1
Standard-backwall mounting
E39-L44*1
Protection-wall mounting (for pre-wired or pigtail models)
E39-L142*1
Protection-surface mounting
E39-L98*1
Telescope mounting
E39-L93FH
3D rotation mounting
E39-EL4
Accessories
Mounting brackets
The order references are examples for the E3Z sensor family. Refer to the sensor accessory datasheet E26E for the complete list of mounting brackets.
213

FAST ADAPTION TO CHANGING PACKAGINGS
Choose the performance you need
Packaging machines have to adapt quickly to a large variety of different packaging designs with minimal change-over
time and no quality loss. For sensors detecting registration marks or colors this requires flexibility and simplicity in
handling while keeping the precision and operational stability. At OMRON we closely work together with leading
packaging machine makers to evaluate the requirements for sensors from commonly used packaging material as well
as most critical designs or materials. Our portfolio is set up to balance the performance and budget requirements
in these situations ... simply choose the performance you need.
Reliable mark detection even in changing environmental conditions during machine operation
Fast and easy setup up after packaging material exchange
Performance levels tting the machine value concept
Mark detection
214
Standard
Challenging
designs
Complex detection
and advanced
features
E3ZM-V
E3XDAC-S
FQ, FZ
B274
Page 217
B325
Page 218
G453, G638
Color detection
Easy color
detection
Vision color
detection
High
performance vision
color detection
E3X-DACLR
FQ2CLR
Xpectia lite
B343
Page 220
G523
Page 221
G638
215
Selection table
Type
Standard print mark detection
Challenging designs
Complex detection and advanced features
Model
E3ZM-V
E3X-DAC-S
FQ, FZ
Key feature
White LED, stainless steel housing
White LED, RGB ratio comparison and

extended functionality
High performance vision inspection functionality

See QUALITY CONTROL AND INSPECTION GUIDE
Detection distance
122 mm
550 mm
Response time
50 s
60 s
Page/Quick Link
217
218
Type
Easy color detection
Vision color detection
High performace vision color detection
Model
E3X-DACLR
FQ2-CLR
Xpectia lite
Key feature
Easy one-button teach operation
No of simultaneous
color inspections
1 to 4
1 to 32
1 to 128
Output
RGB value out

(via ethernet)
HSI value out

(via ethernet)
Tolerance
adjustment
Color
detected
digital out
Auto
tolerance
Teachable
Manually
adjustable
Advanced
220
221
See QUALITY CONTROL AND INSPECTION GUIDE
Page/Quick Link
216
E3ZM-V
Mark sensors
Registration mark sensor in compact stainless steel
housing
The registration mark detection sensor in a compact stainless steel housing provides
reliable detection of all common registration marks in food packaging applications.
White LED for stable detection of differently colored or black print marks
SUS 316L stainless steel housing
Easy-to-use teach-in button or remote teach
Fast response time of 50 s
Sensing distance
Mark sensor
*1
122 mm
Order code*1
Connection method
NPN output
PNP output
2m
E3ZM-V61 2M
E3ZM-V81 2M
E3ZM-V66
E3ZM-V86
Sensor type
The output configuration (ON or OFF when mark is detected) is teachable. Common operation is output is ON when mark is detected.
Specifications
Item
NPN
E3ZM-V6_
PNP
E3ZM-V8_
White LED (450 to 700 nm)
Protective circuits
Ambient temperature
Reversed power supply polarity protection, output short-circuit protection, Reversed output polarity protection, and mutual interference prevention
Operating
25 to 55C
Storage
Response time
50 s
IEC: IP67, DIN 40050-9: IP69K
Material
Case
SUS316L
Lens
Display
PEEK (polyether ether ketone)
Seals
Fluoro rubber
Half mirror
RGB
lightreceiving
element
Lens
Sensing object
(with regular
reection)
White LED
Coaxial optical system with white LED
Remote teaching
Detergent resistant
Reliable detection of standard or

semi-transparent marks at normal or high
speed
217
E3X-DAC-S
Mark sensors
E3X-DAC-S high functionality mark detection sensor
The E3X-DAC-S provides reliable mark detection for standard as well as challenging
applications. The separate sensing head setup allows the easy adaption to the mounting requirements even when space is crucial. The remote amplifier provides easy
teaching for standard applications but also on demand full control over the detection
performance for most challenging applications.
Pre-wired
Item
Functions
Order code (for pre-wired types with 2 m cable length)

NPN output
PNP output
Standard models
Timer, response speed change
E3X-DAC11-S
E3X-DAC41-S
Advanced models
Same as standard models + simultaneous determination (2 colors)

AND/OR output, remote setting
E3X-DAC21-S
E3X-DAC51-S
Item
Functions
Order code
NPN output
PNP output
Standard models (fiber amplifier connector)*1
Timer, response speed change
E3X-DAC6-S
E3X-DAC8-S
Standard models
Advanced models
E3X-DAC1, E3X-DAC4
E3X-DAC6, E3X-DAC8
E3X-DAC2, E3X-DAC5
Connector versions
*1
Order connector separately
Specifications
Item
Number of registered marks
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse polarity protection, output short circuit protection, output reverse polarity protection, mutual interference
prevention
Ambient
temperature
Operating
25 to 55C
Storage
Response time Super-high-speed mode

Standard mode
2 (simultaneous determination)
Operation or reset: 60 s
Operation or reset: 1 ms

Sensitivity setting
Teaching (one-point teaching or teaching with/without workpiece) or manual adjustment
Functions
Automode (automatic selection of C-mode or I-mode)

C-mode (RGB ratio)
I-mode (light intensity)
Mark mode (Intensity and ratio of RGB values)
Detection mode
Operating mode
ON for match (ON for same color as registered color) or ON for mismatch (ON for different color from registered color)
Timer function
Timer type: OFF delay, ON delay, or one-short

Timer time: 1 ms to 5 s (variable)
Control outputs
Output for each channel, AND output, and OR output
Remote control
One-point teaching, teaching with/without workpiece, zero reset,

and light emission OFF
IEC60529 IP50 (with protective cover attached)
Recommended fiber heads

Sensor type
218
Size
Recommended operating distance

(mm)
Comment
Order code
M6
Standard mark detection
E32-CC200 2M
29x25.5x11.2 mm
40 to 50
Long distance plastic
E32-L15 2M
23x20x9 mm
25 to 30
Long distance metal
E32-A09 2M
M3
10
High precision mark detection

(dia 1mm spot)
E32-EC31 2M + E39-EF51
E3X-DAC-S
Mark sensors
Fiber amplifier connectors

Shape
Type
Comment
Order code
Fiber amplifier
connector
2 m PVC cable
E3X-CN21
E3X-CN21-M1J 0.3M
E3X-CN21-M3J-2 0.3M
Easy to operate detection of challenging or

colored registration marks.
39,994
Detection of challenging registration marks

e.g. with texts or graphics.
219
E3X-DACLR
Color sensors
Easy-Teach Color Detection Sensor
The E3X-DACLR provides reliable and easy to set up one-touch color verification. Up to
four colors can be identified. The separate amplifier allows mounting in easily accessible areas for operators while the small sensor head can be mounted in locations even
when space is limited.
Easy to set up one-touch color verification for 1 to 4 colors
Model for remote teaching
Small sensor head for easy mounting even when space is tight
White LED and multi detection modes for reliable operation even for challenging
applications
Type
Output
Tolerance adjustment
Single color detection
Digital color detected out
1 to 4 color detection
Digital color detected out

(with bank switching)
Object teaching (good sample) M8 4-pin pigtail

with auto-tolerance
(with 30 cm PVC cable)*2
2-point teaching
2 m PVC cable
(good and bad sample)
*1
*2
Connection method
Order code
PNP*1
E3X-DACLRX1P-M3J 0.3M
E3X-DACLRX4P 2M
NPN models are available. Contact your Omron representative.

Models with 2 m PVC cable or M12 pigtail connector are available. Contact your Omron representative.
Specifications (amplifier and sensing head)

Item
Single color detection
Sensing distance
40 to 50 mm (E32-L15 sensing head)
Number of registered marks
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse polarity protection, output short circuit protection, output reverse polarity protection, mutual interference
prevention
Ambient
temperature
Operating
25 to 55C (amplifier)
40 to 70C (sensing head)
Storage
30 to 70C (amplifier); (without icing or condensation)

40 to 70C (sensing head)
Response time Super-high-speed mode

Standard mode
Functions
1 to 4 (2 banks switchable by external input with 2 colors each)

Operating mode
ON for match (ON for same color as registered color) or ON for mismatch (ON for different color from registered color)
Timer function
Timer type: OFF delay, ON delay, or one-short

Timer time: 1 ms to 5 s (variable)
Remote control
220
1 to 4 color detection
IEC60529 IP50 (with protective cover attached)
One-point teaching, teaching with/without workpiece, zero reset,

and light emission OFF
FQ2-CLR
Color sensors
Vision Color Sensor with teachable
inspection area and RGB value processing
The vision color sensor FQ2-CLR provides real color identification functionality in combination with the flexibility and functionality of a vision sensor. The teachable
inspection area provides an easy and flexible set up. The color processing and evaluation can be carried out by the FQ2-CLR directly or the RGB values are available via
Ethernet to other devices.
Teachable inspection area
Models with single color detection or up to 32 color and image processing tasks
RGB values via Ethernet
Output
Single color
Digital color detected out and/or Object teaching (good sample) 3 m PVC cable
RGB value out (via ethernet)
with auto-tolerance
or
2-point teaching
3 m Ethernet cable*2
(good and bad sample)
1 to 32 color and image processing tasks

*1
*2
*3
Tolerance adjustment
Connection method
Order code
PNP*1
Type
FQ2-CLR-V1P 3M*3
FQ2-CLR-V32P 3M
NPN models are available. Contact your Omron representative.

I/O and Ethernet cables are included. Other cable lengths can be provided on request. Contact your Omron representative.
Programming device Touch Finder FQ2-D31 is not included. Order separately incl. AC power supply and battery or use PC Tool to program FQ2-CLR.
Programming device
Type
Order code
Touch Finder (included in FQ2-CLR-V32P)*1
*1
FQ2-D31
AC power supply (plug type c) for FQ2-D31
FQ-AC4
Rechargeable battery for FQ2-D31
FQ-BAT1
The FQ2-CLR can be programmed either with the Touch Finder or via a PC using the FQ2 PC Tool. After programming the FQ2-CLR, the programming device can be disconnected. Only one
programming device is required for programming multiple FQ2-CLR. Contact your OMRON representative for FQ2-CLR-V32P version without included Touch Finder.
Specifications
Item
FQ2-CLR-V@
Field of view
13 x 8.2 to 53 x 33 mm
Installation distance
56 to 215 mm
Ambient
temperature
0 to 50C
Operating
Storage
25 to 65C (without icing or condensation)

IEC 60529 IP67
221

PRESENCE, HEIGHT OR PROFILE ...
... choose the accuracy you need
Objects with varying positions or heights or objects with holes can create multiple signals or stay undetected when using
single beam sensors. These objects (e.g. parcels, bikes or natural products like ham or sh) are then wrongly classied as
multiple smaller items or are not detected correctly.
Detecting these objects over their whole length or acquiring the more detailed object prole can be realized using
multiple sensors or light curtains.
Omron offers a wide range of models with varying max detection heights, different resolutions and with digital, analog
or serial outputs to provide the best performance match tting your application.
Detection
Multibeam/
lightcurtains
Stacked
sensors
E3Z
E32-M21
F3ET2
F3E
Application
specific
E32 Area
See next page
B222
Page 176
222
B522
Page 227
B634
Page 225
B632
Page 226
B522
Page 227
Measurement
(M)m
resolution
mm
resolution
cm
resolution
ZX-GT
E32 Area
F3EM2
C435
Page 397
B522
Page 227
B633
Page 228
223
Selection table
Type
Stacked sensors
Multibeam sensors/lightcurtains
Application specific lightcurtains
Model
E3Z
E32-M21
F3ET2
F3E
E32 area
Key features
Mutual interference
prevention
4 M3 heads
combined in one
fiber
Models with 5 and

18 mm pitch
Thin aluminum
housing
Teachable sensitivity Type 2, type 4 or

application specific
Safety lightcurtains F3E Elevator

lightcurtains
Fulfills EN81-70
Max. sensing distance
60 m
1.3 m
15 m
5m
4m
50 m
5m
Max. detection height
n. a.
4m
2.1 m
1.8 m
70 mm
2.4 m
1.8 m
Page/Quick Link
176
227
225
226
227
462
226
Type
Measuring lightcurtains
Model
F3EM2
E32 area
ZX-GT
Key features
cm accuracy
mm accuracy
m accuracy
Max. sensing distance
15 m
4m
0.5 m
Max. measurement height
2.1 m
70 mm
28 mm
Page/Quick Link
228
227
397
224
F3ET2

Lightcurtain in robust aluminum housing
The F3ET2 lightcurtains provide a reliable area monitoring in a robust housing.
The optical synchronisation between emitter and receiver allow a fast and simple
installation without special requirements.
Optical synchronisation for reliable operation without additional wiring
Robust aluminum housing
NPN/PNP and Light ON/Dark ON selectable
Order code*1
PNP/NPN
F3ET2-005-150
Detection area (mm) Pitch
Sensing
distance
Channels
Through-beam
150
5 mm
3m
30
18 mm
15 m
F3ET2-018-150
5 mm
3m
60
F3ET2-005-300
18 mm
15 m
16
F3ET2-018-300
5 mm
3m
90
F3ET2-005-450
18 mm
15 m
24
F3ET2-018-450
5 mm
3m
120
F3ET2-005-600
18 mm
15 m
32
F3ET2-018-600
5 mm
3m
180
F3ET2-005-900
18 mm
15 m
48
F3ET2-018-900
5 mm
3m
240
F3ET2-005-1200
18 mm
15 m
64
F3ET2-018-1200
5 mm
3m
300
F3ET2-005-1500
18 mm
15 m
80
F3ET2-018-1500
5 mm
3m
360
F3ET2-005-1800
18 mm
15 m
96
F3ET2-018-1800
18 mm
15 m
112
F3ET2-018-2100
300
450
600
900
1200
1500
1800
2100
*1
Connection method
Output
Sensor type
5 pin
Light-ON/Dark-ON selectable
Connector cables
Type
Features
M12
Material
5 wires
Order code
Nut
Cable
Straight
Angled
CuZn
PVC 2 m
XS2F-M12PVC5S2M-EU
XS2F-M12PVC5A2M-EU
PUR 2 m
XS2F-M12PUR5S2M-EU
XS2F-M12PUR5A2M-EU
PVC 5 m
XS2F-M12PVC5S5M-EU
XS2F-M12PVC5A5M-EU
PUR 5 m
XS2F-M12PUR5S5M-EU
XS2F-M12PUR5A5M-EU
Specifications
Item
Through-beam
Sensing distance
0 to 3 m
0 to 15 m
Vertical detection area
0 to MaxM mm; MaxM: 150, 300, 450, 600, 900, 1200, 1500, 1800*1
0 to MaxM mm; MaxM: 150, 300, 450, 600, 900, 1200, 1500, 1800, 2100
Minimum detectable object size
10 mm
30 mm
Pitch
5 mm
18 mm
Response time
4 ms + 80 s number of beams
24 VDC20%
Operating temperature
10 to 55C
IEC 60529 IP65
F3ET2-005_
Material
*1
Case
F3ET2-018_
Aluminum
Models with different detection ranges are available in 150 mm intervals. Please contact your OMRON representative.
225
F3E

Lightcurtain in thin aluminum housing
The crossing of the multiple sensor beams provides a reliable area monitoring in a
thin, easy to install housing. The thin housing makes the light curtain ideal for the
installation where space is crucial.
Thin 9 mm shape for easy design-in in elevator constructions
High ambient light immunity
Fulfills requirements of EN81-70 (1800 mm models) for mounting in elevators
Sensor type
Detection
area
Pitch
Sensing
distance
Channels
Number of
optical axis
Through-beam
200 mm
40 mm
5m
16
1320 mm
1800 mm
120 mm
120 mm
40 mm
*1
12
16
46
Order code*1
Potential free output
Connection method
34
46
136
5m
F3E-06-T1 5M
F3E-06-T6
5m
F3E-12-T1 5M
F3E-12-T6
5m
F3E-16-T1 5M
F3E-16-T6
5m
F3E-46-T1 5M
F3E-46-T6
Light-ON/Dark-ON settable. Common operation is Dark-ON
Specifications
Item
Through-beam
F3E-06-T_
F3E-12-T_
F3E-16-T_
F3E-46-T_
Number of LEDs
12
16
46
Number of optical axes
16
34
46
136
Pitch
40 mm
120 mm
120 mm
40 mm
Vertical detection range
20 to 200 mm
20 to 1320 mm
20 to 1820 mm
Response time
max. 110 ms (signal interruption)
10 to 30 VDC
Ambient
temperature
Operation
20 to 60C
Storage
40 to 70C
EMC conformity/standards
73/23/EWG; 89/336/EWG; 95/16/EG; EN81-1; EN81-2; EN12015; EN12016; EN61000-6-x
IEC 60529 IP54
Dimensions
400 40.7 9 mm
Material
226
Case
Aluminum
1590 40.7 9 mm
2070 40.7 9 mm
2000 40.7 9 mm
E32 Area monitoring

Area monitoring fiber sensor heads
When mounting space is crucial or the objects are very small, the area monitoring
fibers provide a reliable object detection even when the object position varies within
the monitored range.
In combination with the window monitoring function or the serial transmission of
the received light level values of the fiber amplifiers, simple height comparison or
measuring applications can be realized.
Area monitoring up to 70 mm height
Multi-beam sensor with 4 separate heads for flexible detection points
Standard or high flex fibers
Sensor type
Sensing height
(in mm)
*2
*1
*2
Sensing distance (in mm)*1
Order code
Standard fiber
High-flex fiber
Standard fiber
High-flex fiber
E32-T16
1700
2550
E32-T16P
E32-T16PR 2M
4000
2600
3900
E32-T16W 2M
E32-T16WR 2M
3000
4000
E32-ET16WR-2 2M
3500
4000
E32-ET16WR-1 2M
11
2000
3000
1500
2200
E32-T16J 2M
E32-T16JR 2M
4 seperate
M3 heads
1300
1900
E32-M21
11
300
450
E32-D36P1 2M
E3X-HD
E3NX-FA
E3X-HD
E3NX-FA
10
4000
4000
11
2200
3300
30
3600
50
70
Sensing distance measured with Standard mode

Sensing area aligned to top of housing.
Specifications
Item
Standard
E32-T16
E32-T16J
E32-T16P
E32-T16W
E32-D36P1
E32-ET16WR-1
E32-ET16WR-2
R10
R4
R1
ABS
Brass-nickel plated
Aluminium
Polyethylene coating
PVC coating
IEC 60529 IP67
IEC 60529 IP50
Permissible bending radius
R25
Cut to length
Yes
Ambient temperature
40C to 70C
Material
Head
ABS
Fiber
PMMA
Sheath
High-flex
E32-M21
Stainless steel
Output 1: ON
Output 2: OFF
The two outputs of the E3NX-FA can be used to detect two dierent light levels
E32-T16JR
E32-T16PR
E32-T16WR
ABS
PVC coating
IEC 60529 IP54
IEC 60529 IP50
Output 1: ON
Output 2: ON
In combination with the twin output function of the E3NX-FA amplier, the diuse reective
area monitoring bers can detect very small objects (e.g. needles) and a second state (e.g
cover present). The area beam compensates for position variations at high speed.
227
F3EM2

Measuring lightcurtain in robust aluminum housing
The F3EM2 provides easy to install and set up height and profile measurement. The
analog output provides a simple overall height detection and the serial output models
provide single beam evaluation for profile measurements.
Analog output for simple height detections
Serial output with single beam evaluation for profile measurement
Various output modes to adapt output data to the given application
Sensor type
Through-beam
(measuring)
Measurement Pitch*1
range (mm)
Sensing
distance
Channels
150
5 mm
3m
30
18 mm
15 m
5 mm
3m
60
18 mm
15 m
5 mm
300
450
600
900
1200
1500
1800
2100
*1
*2
Connection method
Order code
RS-232-C serial/
analog output
models*2
Analog output models
F3EM2-005-150
F3EM2-005-150-AV
F3EM2-018-150
F3EM2-018-150-AV
F3EM2-005-300
F3EM2-005-300-AV
16
F3EM2-018-300
F3EM2-018-300-AV
3m
90
F3EM2-005-450
F3EM2-005-450-AV
18 mm
15 m
24
F3EM2-018-450
F3EM2-018-450-AV
5 mm
3m
120
F3EM2-005-600
F3EM2-005-600-AV
18 mm
15 m
32
F3EM2-018-600
F3EM2-018-600-AV
5 mm
3m
180
F3EM2-005-900
F3EM2-005-900-AV
18 mm
15 m
48
F3EM2-018-900
F3EM2-018-900-AV
5 mm
3m
240
F3EM2-005-1200
F3EM2-005-1200-AV
18 mm
15 m
64
F3EM2-018-1200
F3EM2-018-1200-AV
5 mm
3m
300
F3EM2-005-1500
F3EM2-005-1500-AV
18 mm
15 m
80
F3EM2-018-1500
F3EM2-018-1500-AV
5 mm
3m
360
F3EM2-005-1800
F3EM2-005-1800-AV
18 mm
15 m
96
F3EM2-018-1800
F3EM2-018-1800-AV
18 mm
15 m
112
F3EM2-018-2100
F3EM2-018-2100-AV
M12 8-pin/
M12 5-pin
Models with 7.5 mm pitch are available. Contact your OMRON representative.
Models with RS-485 serial output are available. Contact your OMRON representative.
Connector cables
Type
M12
228
Features
Material
Order code
Nut
Cable
Straight
8 wires
CuZN
PUR 2 m
Y92E-M12PURSH8S2M-L
Angled
PUR 5 m
Y92E-M12PURSH8S5M-L
5 wires
CuZn
PVC 2 m
XS2F-M12PVC5S2M-EU
XS2F-M12PVC5A2M-EU
PUR 2 m
XS2F-M12PUR5S2M-EU
XS2F-M12PUR5A2M-EU
PVC 5 m
XS2F-M12PVC5S5M-EU
XS2F-M12PVC5A5M-EU
PUR 5 m
XS2F-M12PUR5S5M-EU
XS2F-M12PUR5A5M-EU
F3EM2
Specifications
Item
Through-beam
Sensing distance
0 to 3 m
0 to 15 m
Vertical measurement range
0 to MaxM mm; MaxM: 150, 300, 450, 600, 900, 1200, 1500, 1800*1
0 to MaxM mm; MaxM: 150, 300, 450, 600, 900, 1200, 1500, 1800*1
Minimum detectable object size
10 mm
30 mm
Pitch
5 mm
18 mm
Response time
4 ms + 80 s number of beams (+ transmitting time for serial operation)
24 VDC20%
Ambient temperature
10 to 55C
IEC 60529 IP65
F3EM2-005_
Material
Aluminum
Models with different measurement ranges are available in 150 mm intervals. Please contact your OMRON representative.
*1
Case
F3EM2-018_
Volume measurement
Prole scan
Hole detection
Position control
229

HIGH PRECISION IN SMALL SPACES
Precision and performance you can rely on
The requirements for fiber optic solutions can be very demanding particularly for applications
with extreme temperatures and aggressive chemicals or for applications requiring highest precision
with limited mounting space.
With the wide range of E32 fiber heads and the easy-usage amplifiers, the best performance fit
for your application can be provided. The highest quality control procedures in design and manufacturing
ensure that you get the precision and long service life that you can rely on.
Long operational life
Easy to install and adjust
Wide portfolio range for best performance fit
Fiber sensor heads
General
application
230
Enhanced environmental
resistance
Cylindrical
Square shape
Miniature
Longer
distance
Chemical
resistant
Heat
resistant
Vacuum
resistant
E32 standard
cylindrical
E32
square shape
E32
miniature
E32 longer
distance
E32 chemical
resistant
E32 heat
resistant
E32 vacuum
resistant
B533
Page 234
B532
Page 236
B526
Page 238
B525
Page 240
B523
Page 242
B524
Page 243
B534
Page 245
Fiber ampliers
Special objects
or installations
Robot
applications
Precision
detection
Advanced
functionality
Easy usage
Area
monitoring
Special
applications
Easy-teach
Potentiometer
adjuster
High functionality
E3NX-FA
High speed
E3X-NA-F
Double amplifier
E3X-MDA
Color detection
E3X-DAC-S
E32
robot
E32 precision
detection
E32 area
monitoring
E32
special
E3X-HD/E3X-SD
E3X-NA
B528
Page 247
B527
Page 248
B522
Page 227
B529
Page 250
B342, B334
Page 252/255
B328
Page 256
Infrared
E3X-DAH-S
E3NX-FA
E3X-NA_F
E3X-MDA
E3X-DAC-S
E3X-DAH-S
B345
B339
B326
B325
B338
Page 258
Page 218
231
Selection table
Fiber sensor heads
Type
Cylindrical
Square shape
Miniature
Longer distance
Chemical resistant
Model
E32 standard cylindrical
E32 square shape
E32 miniature
E32 longer distance
E32 chemical resistant
Key features
Standard and high-flex

fibers
Sizes M3 to M6
3 or 4 mm thin housing
Models in X,Y or Z-axis
Direct mounting without
bracket
Sizes from dia 500 m to

3 mm
Bendable sleeves
Built in focal lenses
Fluoroplastic cover or
coating
Through-beam
1,550 mm
1,550 mm
1,550 mm
20 m
4m
Retro-reflective
250 mm
1.5 m
Diffuse-reflective
650 mm
600 mm
600 mm
1.4 m
350 mm
Page/Quick Link
234
236
238
240
242
Note:
All sensing distances measured with E3X-DA-SE-S. Longer sensing distances up to 80% can be achieved with E3X-DA-S.
Fiber amplifiers
Type
Easy teach/double display
Easy teach/single display
Potentiometer adjuster
High performance
Double amplifier
Model
E3X-HD
E3X-SD
E3X-NA
E3NX-FA
E3X-MDA
361
PRO
LITE
LITE
PROplus
n.a.
Key features
Easy operation by
smart tuning
Dynamic power control
Fieldbus connectivity
1 button object teaching

Easy adjustment by
Auto teach during operation potentiometer
High functionality signal

2 inputs and AND, OR signal
processing (timer, counter,
comparison
dynamic power control, etc.
High signal resolution
Increased sensing distance
Double output/external
input
Fieldbus connectivity
Response time (min.)
1 ms
(50 s in super-high-speed
mode)
1 ms
200 s
1 ms
(30 s in super-high-speed
mode)
1 ms
(130 s in high speed mode)
Page/Quick Link
252
255
256
258
B326
232

Vacuum resistant
Robot applications
Precision detection
Area monitoring
Special application
E32 heat resistant
E32 vacuum resistant
E32 robot
E32 precision detection
E32 area monitoring
E32 special
Heat resistant up to 400C
Leakage rate of
1 10-10 Pa*m3/s max
Free moving multicore fibers Detection accuracy

for >1 Mio bending cycles
up to 100 m
Coaxial fibers
Adjustable focal points
Area monitoring
up to 70 mm
Detection of special objects

(wafer, liquid level, flat glass,
print mark ...)
3m
950 mm
1,350 mm
3.8 m
4m
3.8 m
500 mm
350 mm
600 mm
300 mm
20 mm
243
245
247
248
227
250
High speed
Color/print mark detection
Infrared LED
E3X-NA-F
E3X-DAC-S
E3X-DAH-S
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
Short turn on time of 20 s
White LED and RGB ratio

comparison
Infrared LED
20 s
1 ms
(60 s in super high speed
mode)
1ms
(55s in super high speed
mode)
B339
218
B338
Heat resistant
233
E32 Standard cylindrical
Fiber sensor heads

Standard cylindrical fiber sensor heads
The standard cylindrical fiber optic sensor heads provide reliable object detection,
easy installation and long sensor lifetime for all general applications.
High-flex fibers and 90 cable exit for fiber breakage prevention
Models with hexagonal back for simplified one-nut mounting
Sizes M3 to M6
Sensor type
Size

Standard fiber
easy
easy
easy
*1
moun
moun
moun
Standard fiber
High-flex fiber
1400
E32-TC200 2M
E32-ET11R 2M
190
E32-TC200E 2M
E32-ET21R 2M
E32-ETC220 2M
E3X-HD
E3NX-FA
E3X-HD
E3NX-FA
M4
1550
2300
1400
M3
450
670
130
dia 4 mm
1500
2300
M4
M6
M6
1000
1500
E32-T11N 2M
1200
1800
E32-LR11NP 2M
250
370
E32-R21
M6
600
900
550
820
E32-DC200 2M
E32-ED11R 2M
M4
160
240
60
90
E32-D211 2M
E32-D211R 2M
M3
160
240
150
220
E32-DC200E 2M
E32-ED21R 2M
M6
350
520
E32-D11N 2M
M4
350
520
E32-D21N 2M
dia 6 mm
220
100
150
E32-D14L 2M
E32-D14LR 2M
Sensing distance measured with Standard Mode
234
Order code
High-flex fiber
300
E32 Standard cylindrical
Fiber sensor heads
Specifications
Standard
E32-_C200
E32-_C220
R25
Cut to length
Yes
High Flex
E32-D14L
E32-D211
E32-R21
R10
Ambient temperature
40C to 70C
Material
Head
Brass-nickel
plated
Fiber
PMMA
Sheath
E32-_C200E
Stainless steel
Brass-nickel
plated
E32-E_R
E32-T11N
E32-D11N
E32-D14LR
E32-D211R
R1
Stainless steel
Plastic (ABS)
Brass-nickel
plated
E32-LR11NP
R2
Stainless steel
Brass-nickel plated
PVC coating
IEC 60529 IP67
Hi-ex multicore bers for exibility in

installation without ber breakage
E32-D21N
IP50
Models with hexagonal back for simple

one-nut mounting
Item
Cable exit shifted by 90 for preventing ber

breakage
235
E32 Square shape
Fiber sensor heads

Square shape fiber sensor heads
The fiber heads in square shaped housing provide fast and easy installation on flat surfaces.
Models with sensing direction in X, Y or Z axis
3 or 4mm thick housings for minimal height requirement
Standard or high-flex fibers
Sensor type
Long
Long
*1
hole
Size in mm
(standard /
high-flex)

E3X-HD
E3NX-FA
E3X-HD
E3NX-FA
1583 /
15104
1550
1550
1400
1583
950
1400
1583 /
1594
950
1400
1394
hole
Order code
High-flex fiber
Standard fiber
High-flex fiber
2100
E32-T15X 2M
E32-ETS10R 2M
450
670
E32-T15Y 2M
E32-T15YR 2M
1300
1800
E32-T15Z 2M
E32-ETS14R 2M
1300
1800
E32-ET15YR 2M
1300
1800
E32-ET15ZR 2M
15103
600
900
350
520
E32-D15X 2M
E32-D15XR 2M
15103
200
300
100
150
E32-D15Y 2M
E32-D15YR 2M
15103 /
1362.3
200
300
100
150
E32-D15Z 2M
E32-EDS24R 2M
24.5103
1780
2600
E32-A03-1 2M
2192
680
1000
E32-A04-1 2M
236
Standard fiber
E32 Square shape
Fiber sensor heads
Specifications
Item
Standard
High flex
E32-_15
E32-A03_
R25
R10
Cut to length
Yes
Material
E32-E
E32-_15_R
R1
40C to 70C
Head
Aluminium
Fiber
PMMA
Sheath
Brass-nickel plated
Stainless steel
Aluminium
IEC 60529 IP67
PVC coating
IEC 60529 IP50
IEC 60529 IP67
Ambient temperature
E32-A04_
90
Space saving and fast mounting without

additional brackets
Precise positioning during manufacturing for

90 optics to achieve minimal tolerance
variations in optical output axis angle
237
E32 Miniature
Fiber sensor heads

Miniature fiber sensor heads
The miniature fiber heads provide high accuracy in smallest spaces and reliable
detection of minute objects.
Sizes from dia 500 m to 3 mm
Side view models with precision axis alignment for highest accuracy
Bendable sleeves for precision positioning
Sensor type
Size

Standard fiber
eve
ble sle
a
Bend
eve
le sle
ab
Bend
*1
*2
*3
Order code
High-flex fiber
Standard fiber
High-flex fiber
1500
E32-T12 2M
E32-T12R 2M
370
E32-T22 2M
E32-T22R 2M
450
670
E32-T222 2M
E32-T222R 2M
250
370
E32-T223R 2M
1420
450
670
E32-T14L 2M
E32-T14LR 2M
680
1020
E32-A04 2M
dia 1 mm
250
370
100
150
E32-T24
E32-T24R 2M
dia 1.2 mm
1550
2300
1000
1500
E32-TC200B*2
E32-TC200BR*2
E3X-HD
E3NX-FA
E3X-HD
E3NX-FA
dia 3 mm
1550
2300
1000
dia 2 mm
450
670
250
dia 1.5 mm
450
670
dia 1 mm
dia 3 mm
950
dia 2 mm
dia 0.9 mm
450
670
250
370
E32-TC200F*2
E32-TC200FR*2
dia 3 mm
160
240
60
90
E32-D22 2M
E32-D22R 2M
dia 2 mm
150
220
80
120
E32-D32 2M
E32-D32R 2M
dia 1.5 mm
60
90
E32-D22B 2M
dia 2 mm
60
90
30
40
E32-D24
E32-D24R 2M
dia 2.5 mm
600
900
350
520
E32-DC200B 2M*2 *3 E32-DC200BR *2 *3
dia 1.2 mm
160
240
60
90
E32-DC200F*2
E32-DC200FR*2
dia 0.8 mm
30
40
E32-D33 2M
dia 0.5 mm
E32-D331 2M
Sensing distance measured in Standard Mode

Models with 40 mm sleeve instead of 90 mm sleeve are available by adding 4 to the order code at the end, e.g. E32-TC200B4
Sleeve cannot be bent
238
E32 Miniature
Fiber sensor heads
Specifications
Standard
High-flex
E32-DC200B E32-T14L
E32-T12
E32-TC200B
R25
Cut to length
Yes
Ambient temperature
40C to 70C
Material
Head
Brass-nickel
plated
Fiber
PMMA
Sheath
Stainless steel
E32-D32
E32-D22
E32-D24
E32-A04
E32-T222
E32-DC200F
E32-TC200F E32-T22
E32-T24
E32-D32R
E32-D33
E32-D331
R10
R4
Brass-nickel
plated
Bendable metal sleeves for precision

positioning of sensors after installation
Stainless steel
PVC and
PVC coating
polyethylene
IEC 60529
IP50
0.5 mm diameter (diuse reective) or

1 mm diameter (through beam) when
mounting space is crucial
E32DC200BR
E32-T12R
E32TC200BR
E32-D22R
E32-T222R
E32TC200FR
E32-D24R
E32DC200FR
E32-T14LR
E32-T22R
E32-T223R
E32-T24R
R1
Brass-nickel plated
PVC and
polyethylene
IEC 60529 IP67
E32-D22B
Stainless
steel
IEC 60529 IP67
Item
High precision ber surface cutting and

positioning during manufacturing to
achieve minimal deviation of optical output
axis angle
239
E32 Longer distance
Fiber sensor heads

Longer distance fiber sensor heads
With built-in focal lenses the longer distance fiber heads provide enhanced
operational stability in dusty environments or long distance applications
Sensing distance up to 20 m
Built-in focal lens
Sizes from dia 2 mm to M14
Easy installation - no need to attach auxiliary lenses
Sensor type
Size

Standard fiber
easy
moun
Order code
High-flex fiber
Standard fiber
High-flex fiber
E32-T17L
E32-T14
3500
4000
E32-LT11N 2M
4000
3500
4000
E32-LT11 2M
E32-LT11R 2M
2000
E32-TC200A 2M
2600
3900
E32-T12L 2M
dia 2 mm
850
1200
E32-T22L 2M
21.5 27 10 mm
1500
2250
E32-R16 2M
M6
350
520
E32-LD11N 2M
22 17.5 9 mm
1400
2100
E32-D16 2M
M6
360
540
350
520
E32-LD11 2M
E32-LD11R 2M
M4
260
390
E32-D21L 2M
dia 3 mm
450
670
E32-D12 2M
E3X-HD
E3NX-FA
E3X-HD
E3NX-FA
M14
20000
20000
25.2 10.5 8 mm
4000
4000
M4
M4
4000
M3
1350
dia 3 mm
Reflector
easy
*1
moun
240
E32 Longer distance
Fiber sensor heads
Specifications
Through-beam
E32-T17L/
E32-T14
E32-LT11N
E32-LT11
R25
R2
R25
Cut to length
Yes
Ambient temperature
40C to 70C
Material
Head
ABS
Fiber
PMMA
Sheath
E32-T12L
E32-TC200A
E32-LT11R
E32-T22L
R1
R10
Brass-nickel plated
Stainless steel
IP67
IP50
Item
Retro-reflective
Diffuse-reflective
E32-R16
E32-D16
E32-LD11N
E32-LD11
E32-LD11R
E32-D21L
E32-D12
R25
R4
R2
R25
R10
R10
R25
Cut to length
Yes
Aluminium
Brass-nickel plated
Ambient temperature
Material
IP67
IP67
40C to 70C
Head
ABS
Fiber
PMMA
Sheath
Polyethylene coating PVC coating
IP67
IP50
IP50
IP40
Item
Stainless steel
IP67
Light
emission
approx. 60
Sheath
Light emission of conventional bers
directional
light
Core
Core
Sheath
Lens
Lens tube
With built-in focal lenses, longer sensing

distances can be achieved up to 5 times
longer compared to conventional sensors
Models with hexagonal back for simple

one-nut mounting
Cable exit shifted by 90 for preventing ber

breakage
241
E32 Chemical resistant
Fiber sensor heads

Chemical resistant fiber sensor heads
The chemical resistant fibers provide long sensor lifetime in areas with frequent cleaning, usage of chemicals and higher temperatures.
fluoroplastic cover for highest chemical resistance
temperature resistance up to 200C
Sensor type
Size
M4
dia 5 mm
M6
Order code
2000
Fluororesin coating
E32-T11U 2M
Fluororesin cover
E32-ET11F 2M
E3NX-FA
1350
3200
4000
4000
4000
E32-T12F
800
1200
E32-T14F 2M
350
520
Fluororesin coating
E32-D11U 2M
Fluororesin cover
E32-ED11F 2M
dia 7 mm
300
450
dia 6 mm
190
280
E32-D12F
80
120
E32-D14F 2M
1400
2100
Fluororesin cover
Heat resistant to 200C
E32-T81F-S 2M
2800
4000
Fluororesin cover
Heat resistant to 150C
E32-T51F 2M
dia 5 mm
*1
Key feature
E3X-HD
Specifications
Item
Fluororesin coating
Full fluororesin cover
Full fluororesin cover and heat resistance
E32-T11U
E32-D11U
E32-E_11F
E32-_12F/E32-_14F
Permissible bending radius (in mm)
R1
R4
R75
R40
Cut to length
yes
Ambient temperature
40C to 70C
Brass-nickel plated
Fiber
PMMA
Sheath
Fluororesin coating
40C to 150C
40C to 200C
Glass
Fluororesin cover
IEC60529 IP67
Enhanced temperature resistant models
242
R10
Fluororesin
200C
The uororesin cover provides highest

chemical resistance for longest lifetime in
frequently cleaned environments like
aseptic lling in pharmaceutical
applications
E32-T81F-S
no
Material
Head
E32-T51F
Highest chemical resistance
E32 Heat resistant
Fiber sensor heads

Heat resistant fiber sensor heads
The wide range of heat resistant fibers provides long sensor lifetime with highest
protection in demanding environments
heat resistant up to 400C
sizes from dia 2 mm to M6
models for long distances or high detection accuracy
Sensor type
Size
M4
Sensing distance (in mm)*1 Key feature
Order code
E3X-HD
For E3NX-FA and E3X-HD

amplifiers
For E3X-NA amplifier
3000
4000
40C to 150C
E32-ET51 2M
800
1200
40C to 100C*2, high-flex
E32-T51R 2M
550
820
40C to 200C
E32-T81R-S 2M
900
1350
60C to 350C
E32-T61-S 2M
dia 2 mm
450
670
40C to 150C
E32-T54 2M
dia 3 mm
2600
3900
40C to 200C
E32-T84S-S 2M
M6
500
750
40C to 150C
E32-ED51 2M
280
420
40C to 100C*2, high-flex
E32-D51R 2M
180
270
40C to 200C
E32-D81R-S 2M
E32-D81R 2M
180
270
60C to 350C
E32-D61-S 2M
E32-D61
120
180
40C to 400C
E32-D73-S 2M
E32-D73
M4
23209 mm 1538
40C to 150C
E32-A09H 2M
30249 mm 2030
40C to 300C
E32-A09H2 2M
25185 mm 15
40C to 300C
E32-L64 2M
36185 mm 518
*1
*2
E3NX-FA
E32-L66 2M

Short term resistance. For continuous operation 40C to 90C
243
E32 Heat resistant
Fiber sensor heads
Specifications
Item
40C to
150C
40C to
100C
40C to 150C
40C to 200C
40C to 300C
60C to
350C
40C to
400C
E32-E_51
E32-D51R/
T51R
E32-T54
E32-_ 81_
E32-T84_
E32-A09H2
E32-_ 61_
E32-D73_
Permissible bending radius (in mm)
R35
R2
R35
R10
R25
Cut to length
Yes
Material
Brass-nickel
plated
Stainless steel
Aluminium
Fiber
PMMA
Acrylate resin PMMA
Sheath
Fluoro resin
Polyurethane Fluoro resin

resin
IEC 60529
IP67
IEC 60529
IP50
IEC 60529 IP67
400C
350C
200C
150C
The temperature range optimised material
selection provides best application t and
value - performance ratio.
Stainless steel spiral coating for exibility

with highest mechanical protection.
244
E32-L6_
No
Head
E32-A09H
Stainless steel
Glass
Stainless steel Stainless steel Stainless steel spiral coating Stainless steel
spiral coating tube
tube
IEC 60529
IP40
IEC 60529 IP67
E32 Vacuum resistant
Fiber sensor heads

Vacuum resistant fiber sensor heads
For applications in cleanest and hot environments the vacuum resistant fibers and
connecting flanges provide long operational lifetime and vacuum integrity.
Leakage rate of 1 1010 Pa*m3/s max
Heat resistance up to 200C
Detergent resistant fluororesin or stainless steel fiber sheath
Sensor
Sensor type
*1
Size
Temperature range
Order code
600
40C to 120C
E32-T51V 1M
250
370
40C to 120C
E32-T54V 1M
950
1400
60C to 200C
E32-T84SV 1M
40C to 70C
E32-G86V-1 3M
E3X-HD
E3NX-FA
M4
400
dia 3
dia 3
33 18 5.5 mm
Flange
Type
Size
Order code
4 channel flange
80 80 49 mm
E32-VF4
1 channel flange
96 dia 30 mm max.
E32-VF1
Flange-to-amplifier
connection fiber
2 m length
E32-T10V 2M
245
E32 Vacuum resistant
Fiber sensor heads
Specifications
Item
Fiber sensor heads
Flange-to-amplifier fiber
E32-T51V
R30
Cut to length
No
Material
Head
Aluminium
Fiber
Glass
Sheath
Fluororesin coating
Item
Flange
E32-T54V
Material
PMMA
E32-VF4
25C to 55C
Aluminium and stainless steel
Seal
Fluorocarbon rubber (viton)
Aluminium
Atmospheric-pressure side
Lens unit (optional)
Amplier unit
Fiber unit
Flange
The vacuum resistant ber heads and anges are sealed to prevent gas leakage into
vacuum areas
246
Stainless steel spiral coating
Flange
Vacuum chamber
E32-T10V
Yes
Stainless steel
1 1010 Pa*m3/s max
Ambient temperature
E32-G86V-1
R25
E32-VF1
Leakage rate
E32-T84SV
E32 Robot application
Fiber sensor heads

Robot application fiber sensor heads
For applications on frequently or fast moving parts, the robot fibers reduce the risk
of fiber breakage with a guaranteed operational life of more than 1 million bending
cycles
Free moving multicore fibers for > 1 mio bending cycles
Square shapes for easy surface installation
Cylindrical sizes from dia 1.5 mm to M6
Sensor type
*1
Size
Order code
E3X-HD
E3NX-FA
M4
1350
2000
E32-T11 2M
M3
400
600
E32-T21 2M
dia 3 mm
1350
2000
E32-T12B
dia 2 mm
400
600
E32-T221B
dia 1.5 mm
400
600
E32-T22B
15 18 3 mm
1350
2000
E32-T15XB 2M
M6
350
520
E32-D11 2M
M4
140
210
E32-D21B 2M
M3
60
90
E32-D21 2M
dia 1.5 mm
60
90
E32-D22B 2M
15 10 3 mm
350
520
E32-D15XB 2M
Specifications
Item
Square
Cylindrical
E32-D15XB
E32-T15XB
E32-T21
R4
Cut to length
Yes
Ambient temperature
Material
E32-D21
E32-T12B
E32-T22B
E32-D21B
E32-D22B
E32-T221B
40C to 70C
Head
Aluminium
Fiber
PMMA
Sheath
PVC coating
E32-D11
E32-T11
Brass-nickel plated
Stainless steel
PVC coating
IEC 60529 IP67
free
moving
cores
Guaranteed more than 1 mio bending

operations
re-arranged
core structure
Free moving ber cores prevent ber breakage and light intensity loss when the ber is bent.
247
E32 Precision detection
Fiber sensor heads

Precision detection fiber sensor heads
Highest precision in design and manufacturing of the fibers and focal lenses ensure
highest beam and spot accuracy allowing the detection of smallest objects and height
differences of less than 100 m.
Coaxial fibers with focal lenses for spot diamters of 100 m
Through-beam models with highly focused beam and precise optical axis
alignment
Limited reflective models for height difference detection of less than 100 m
Sensor type
Preferred usage
Size
Precise thin object detection dia 3 mm

/accurate positioning
Key feature
High precision optical axis

adjustment
Very focused beam
E32-A04 2M
600
900
E32-CC200 2M*2
Spot dia 0.5 mm
120
180
E32-EC31 2M
Spot dia 0.2 mm
17
Spot dia 0.1 mm
dia 3 mm
300
450
E32-D32L
dia 2 mm
150
220
E32-D32 2M*2
M6
90 cable exit
Hexagonal back
350
520
E32-C11N 2M
130
190
E32-C21N 2M
90 cable exit
50
70
E32-C31N 2M
Spot dia 0.5 to 3mm
8 - 25 adjustable
E32-EC31 2M + E39-EF51
Spot dia 0.5 to 1 mm
6 - 15 adjustable
E32-D32 2M + E39-F3A
Spot dia 0.1 to 0.6 mm
6 - 15 adjustable
E32-C42 1M + E39-F3A
23 20 9 mm
26.511.5
E32-A09 2M
16 18 4 mm
7.21.8
E32-L25L*2
20 20 5 mm
3.3
E32-L25
18 20 4 mm
Precise spot e.g. for detection of a 42

flat / reflective surface
E32-L24L*2
34 25 8 mm
High precision (detection accura- 2.4

cy 100 m)
E32-EL24-1 2M
20.5 14 3.8 mm
Limited reflective wide beam

15
e.g. for object detection on a flat
surface
E32-L16-N 2M
dia 2 mm*3

A high flex cable version is available. Add R to the order code, e.g. E32-CC200R
Outer diameter of the fiber. Outer diameter of the focal lens is dia 4mm (front part)
248
E32-T22S
E32-A03 2M
M3
*1
*2
*3
4000
2650
M3
Precision height difference

detection / flat surface
detection
Object detection in front
of background
E3NX-FA
3800
1000
M3
E3X-HD
1780
Very small object detection M6
moun
Order code
680
dia 2 mm
easy
Sensing distance *1
(in mm)
E32-EC41 1M + E39-F3B
E32-EC41 1M + E39-F3A-5
E32 Precision detection
Fiber sensor heads
Specifications
Item
Through-beam
Diffuse reflective (coaxial)
Limited reflective
E32-T22S
E32-A03
E32-A04
E32-C11N
E32-C31N
E32-C21N
E32-CC200 E32-C42
E32-EL24-1 E32-L24L
E32-D32/-D32L
E32-L25L
E32-EC31/-EC41
E32-L25
Permissable
bending radius
R10
R1
R10
R4
R2
R25
R25
Cut to length
Yes
Ambient
temperature
40C to 70C
Materia Head
l
Brass-nickel plated
Stainless
steel
Brass-nickel plated
Fiber
PMMA
Sheath
PVC coating Polyethylene coating

IEC 60529 IP50
IEC 60529 IP67
Brass nickel plated Brass-nickel Polycarbon- ABS

plated and ate
aluminium
E32-A09
Aluminium
PVC, polyethylene and polyole- Polyethylene coating

fin coating
IEC 60529 IP50
IEC 60529 IP40
Degree of protection IEC 60529

IP67
PVC coating
R10
E32-L16
Receivers
Transmitter
Focused and high precision beam alignment

during manufacturing. Models available
with typical deviation of 0.1 for very
precise detections
Coaxial bers provide an enhanced positioning and detection accuracy and allow the easy
adjustment of the focal point using adjustable focal lenses
Limited reective bers utilize the total

reection on shiny surfaces to detect height
dierences or objects at a pre-dened
distance.
249
E32 Special application
Fiber sensor heads

Special application fiber sensor heads
For a wide range of special applications, the task optimised fiber heads provide best
fitting sensing performance and adaption to environmental requirements.
Detection of special objects (liquids, labels on foils, etc.)
Fiber heads optimised for special tasks (wafer mapping, flat glass, etc.)
Sensor type
Size

E3X-HD
E32-G14
36 24 8 mm
10
Wafer mapping
dia 3 mm
3800
4000
E32-T22S
dia 3 mm
2600
3900
E32-T24S
dia 3 mm
1780
2650
E32-A03 2M
dia 2 mm
680
1000
E32-A04 2M
dia 6 mm
liquid contact
Liquid level contact
E32-D82F1 4M
15 23.5 5 mm
tube contact
Liquid level detection

E32-D36T 2M
through transparent tube
or container
Glass detection
Glass detection
in hot environment
21 16.5 4 mm
Metal housing
E32-A10 2M
20.5 14 3.8 mm
15
Plastic housing
E32-L16-N 2M
25 18 5 mm
15
Heat resistant up to 300C E32-L64 2M

E32-L66 2M
36 18 5.5 mm
518
Glass detection
in wet processes
38.5 39 17.5 mm
8 to 20 (recommended: 11)
Heat resistant up to 85C E32-L11FS 2M
Label detection
20 20 5 mm
7.21.8
E32-L25L
E32-L24L
250
Order code
Fork shape
Liquid level sensor
*1
Comment
E3NX-FA
18 20 4 mm
42
34 25 8 mm
2.4
Very precise spot (detec- E32-EL24-1 2M

tion accuracy 100 m)
E32 Special application
Fiber sensor heads
Specifications
Item
E32-D82F1
E32-L11FS
E32-G14
Permissable bending radius
R40
R25
Cut to length
Yes
No
Ambient temperature
40C to 70C
40C to 300C
Head
PFA
Fiber
PMMA
Sheath
IEC 60529 IP67
Item
E32-EL24-1
Permissable bending radius
R10
Cut to length
Yes
ABS
E32-L16-N
ABS
PVC
E32-L66
E32-L64
Stainless steel
Glass
Stainless steel spiral coating
E32-T24S
IEC 60529 IP30
IEC 60529 IP40
IEC 60529 IP40
IEC 60529 IP50
E32-L24L
E32-L25L
E32-A04
E32-D36T
E32-A03
R4
R1
ABS
Brass-nickel plated
E32-T22S
Ambient temperature
40C to 70C
Material
Head
Brass-nickel
plated and aluminium
Fiber
PMMA
Sheath
PVC coating
IEC 60529 IP67
IEC 60529 IP50
IEC 60529 IP67
IEC 60529 IP50
Stainless steel
Brass-nickel plated
The limited reective ber heads for glass detection provide a stable detection of at glass in
standard, hot or wet environment. The shapes and materials are optimized to provide the
best value - performance ratio depending on the requirements.
Stainless steel
Material
E32-A10
IEC 60529 IP67
For the detection of very small height

dierences like labels on foils in applications
where space is crucial, the small sized
limited reective sensors provide accurate
detection up to 100 m resolution.
251
E3X-HD
Fiber amplifier
Easy-teach digital fiber amplifier
The E3X-HD with 1-button Smart tune set-up provides fast and simple teaching. Dual
digital display and advanced features make the E3X-HD ideal even for demanding
applications.
Easy teaching by Smart tuning within a few seconds
Dynamic Power Control (DPC) for highest operational stability for changing
environmental conditions or challenging objects
M8 connector models
EtherCAT and CompoNet Communication units for high-speed field bus
connectivity
Item
Order code
Communication unit model*1
Transistor output models

NPN output
PNP output
Pre-wired
E3X-HD11 2M
E3X-HD41 2M
Fiber amplifier connector
E3X-HD6
E3X-HD8
E3X-HD0
M8 connector (4pin)
E3X-HD14
E3X-HD44
*1
For field bus connection please chose Communication unit E3X-ECT for EtherCAT or E3X-CRT for CompoNet.

Shape
Type
Comment
Order code
2 m PVC cable
E3X-CN11
E3X-CN21-M1J 0.3M
E3X-CN21-M3J-2 0.3M
Applicable Fiber Amplifier Units
Order code
CompoNet
E3X-HD0
E3X-MDA0
E3X-DA0-S
E3X-CRT
Communication units
Shape
EtherCAT
252
E3X-ECT
E3X-HD
Fiber amplifier
Type
Standard models
Model
E3X-HD11
Connection method
Pre-wired
Control output
NPN output
For Communications
Unit
E3X-HD41
PNP output
E3X-HD6
E3X-HD8
E3X-HD14
Wire-saving connector
M8-4pin connector
NPN output
NPN output
PNP output
Red, 4-element LED (625 nm)
Power consumption
Normal Mode: 720 mW max. (Current consumption: 30 mA max. at 24 VDC, 60 mA max. at 12 VDC.)
Power Saving Eco Mode: 530 mW max. (Current consumption: 22 mA max. at 24 VDC, 44 mA max. at 12 VDC.)
Control output
Load power supply voltage: 26.4 VDC max., open-collector output (Varies with the model depending on
output is PNP or NPN.)Load current: 50 mA max. (residual voltage: 2 V max.), OFF current: 0.5 mA max.
Response time
E3X-HD44
E3X-HD0
Communications
unit connector
PNP output
Super-high-speed Mode Operate or reset: 50 s (NPN models) or 55 s (PNP models)

(SHS)
High-speed Mode (HS)
Operate or reset: 250 s
Standard Mode (STND)
Operate or reset: 1 ms
Giga-power Mode
(GIGA)
Mutual interference
prevention
Possible for up to 10 units
Maximum
connectable Units
16 units
Item
Specifications
with E3X-CRT:
16 units
with E3X-ECT:
30 units
253
E3X-HD
Fiber amplifier
Easy One-Button-Teaching/Smart Tuning
Setting of Smart Tuning
Easy Solution Fewer Setting Steps

E3X-HD
Conventional Model
1
Step
Power adjustment
Step
Smart
tuning
With workpiece Without workpiece
Power adjustment
Step
Threshold setting
Optimum
settings
Easy Solution
Threshold setting
Press only twice.
Optimum
settings
Incident level
adjustment
without workpiece
Incident level
adjustment
with workpiece
Threshold setting
Set to intermediate value
between the incident levels
with and without a workpiece.
Optimum settings for saturated and
low incident level
Settings are simultaneously completed.
Easy setting of optimum power and threshold by pushing tune button twice.
Smart power control
APC
Always ON
Long-term stability
Light intensity
(AUTO POWER
CONTROL)
Automatically
compensate light
intensity
Smart Power
Control
Time
Incident level
DPC
(DYNAMIC POWER
CONTROL)
Automatically
compensate
incident level
With APC
Without APC
Target value
(displayed
incident level)
Compen- Compen-Compensated. sated. sated.
Setting value
(threshold value)
Flashes when
compensation is
no longer possible.
DPC
Time
Enhanced signal stability control for compensating power reductions caused by temperature drift, dust or aging of LED.
Field bus connectivity
E3X-CRT
E3X-ECT
Field bus communication allows control by an external device to simplify setup and
reduce wiring effort.
254
E3X-SD
Fiber amplifier
Single display digital fiber amplifier
E3X-SD allows easy one button setting and provide the best value performance ratio
for standard applications.
Auto-teaching during machine operation
2-point teaching within a few seconds
Simple threshold adjustment with up/down keys
Item
Order code
NPN output
PNP output
Pre-wired
E3X-SD21 2M
E3X-SD51 2M
Fiber amplifier connector*1
E3X-SD7
E3X-SD9
*1
Order connector separately. For M8 connector models see E3X-HD.

Shape
Type
Comment
Order code
E3X-CN11
Fiber amplifier connector 2 m PVC cable

E3X-CN21-M1J 0.3M
E3X-CN21-M3J-2 0.3M
Specifications
Item
E3X-SD
12 to 24 VDC 10%, ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse polarity protection, output short-circuit protection, mutual interference prevention
Response time
Operation or reset: 200 s max
Sensitivity setting
Teaching and digital up/down keys
Functions
High-speed control method for emission current
Auto power control
Mutual interference prevention Optical communication sync. possible for up to 5 units

Digital displays
Incident level or threshold
Easy operation by ergonomic buttons
Auto-teaching
2-point teaching
Workpiece
Workpiece
Workpiece
Push the TEACH button for min. 3 seconds while objects passing
Workpiece
Position a workpiece and press

the TEACH button.
Remove a workpiece and press

the TEACH button.
255
E3X-NA
Fiber amplifier
Digital fiber amplifier with potentiometer adjustment
The E3X-NA is the ideal amplifier for standard fiber applications providing
quick & easy potentiometer adjustment and bargraph display.
Easy adjustment with potentiometer
Mutual interference prevention
Enhanced water resistance types
Pre-wired
Item
Order code (for pre-wired types with 2 m cable length)

NPN output
PNP output
Standard
E3X-NA11 2M
E3X-NA41 2M
Enhanced water resistance
E3X-NA11V 2M
E3X-NA41V 2M
Connector version
Item
Order code
NPN output
PNP output
Standard (fiber amplifier connector)*1
E3X-NA6
E3X-NA8

(M8 4-pin connector)
E3X-NA14V
E3X-NA44V
*1
Order connector separately.

Shape
Type
Comment
Order code
2 m PVC cable
E3X-CN21
30 cm PVC cable
E3X-CN21-M1J 0.3M
with M12 plug connector (4 pin)
30 cm PVC cable
E3X-CN21-M3J-2 0.3M
with M8 plug connector (4 pin)
256
E3X-NA
Fiber amplifier
Specifications
Item
Output
Standard
NPN output
E3X-NA11, E3X-NA6
E3X-NA11V, E3X-NA14V
PNP output
E3X-NA41, E3X-NA8
E3X-NA41V, E3X-NA44V
Red LED (625 nm)
Protective circuit
Response time
Operation or reset: 200 s max.
Sensitivity setting
8-turn endless adjuster (potentiometer)
Functions
OFF-delay timer: 40 ms (fixed)
Bargraph display with light level, switching

status and threshold indicators
Switching status
+20%
+10%
Threshold
10%
20%
Simple sensitivity adjustment by

potentiometer
257
E3NX-FA
Fiber amplifier
High-performance digital fiber amplifier
The E3NX-FA amplifier is best choice for most challenging fiber applications in terms
of long sensing distance, minute object detection or high speed processes.
Easy teaching by Smart tuning within a few seconds
New N-Smart technology provides significant improvement for sensing distance,
minimum object detection and speed
Easy and transparent information about sensor status by Solution Viewer and
Change Finder function
EtherCAT Communication unit for high-speed field bus connectivity
Item
Connection
Inputs/Outputs
Standard models
Pre-wired
1 output

Advanced models
*1
NPN output
PNP output
E3NX-FA11 2M
E3NX-FA41 2M
E3NX-FA6
E3NX-FA8
Pre-wired
2 outputs + 1 input
E3NX-FA21 2M
E3NX-FA51 2M
1 output + 1 input
E3NX-FA7
E3NX-FA9
2 outputs
E3NX-FA7TW
E3NX-FA9TW
1 output + 1 input
E3NX-FA24
E3NX-FA54
2 output
E3NX-FA54TW
via com. protocol
E3NX-FA0
M8 connector
Networking model*1
Order code
Connector for communication unit
For field bus connection please chose communication unit E3NW-ECT for EtherCAT.

Shape
Type
Comment
Order code
2 m PVC cable (4 pin)
E3X-CN21
E3X-CN21-M1J 0.3M
E3X-CN21-M3J-2 0.3M
Applicable Amplifier Units
Order code
Sensor communication unit for EtherCAT
E3NX-FA0
E3NC-LA0
E3NC-SA0
E3NW-ECT
Communication units
Shape
Sensor dispersion (slave) unit
258
E3NW-DS
E3NX-FA
Fiber amplifier
Type
Standard models
Advanced models
Model for sensor

communications unit
NPN output
E3NX-FA11
E3NX-FA6
E3NX-FA21
E3NX-FA7
E3NX-FA7TW
E3NX-FA24
PNP output
E3NX-FA41
E3NX-FA8
E3NX-FA51
E3NX-FA9
E3NX-FA9TW
E3NX-FA54
E3NX-FA54TW
Connection method
Pre-wired
Wire-saving
connector
Pre-wired
Wire-saving connector
M8 connector
Outputs
1 output
2 outputs
1 output
2 outputs
1 output
2 outputs
via com. protocol
External inputs
1 input
1 input
1 input
Power consumption
At power supply voltage of 24 VDC

Standard model or model for sensor communications unit:
Normal mode: 960 mW max. (current consumption: 40 mA max.),
Power saving eco mode: 840 mW max. (current consumption: 35 mA max.)
Advanced model:
Normal mode: 1,080 mW max. (current consumption: 45 mA max.),
Power saving eco mode: 930 mW max. (current consumption: 40 mA max.)
Control output
Load power supply voltage: 30 VDC max., open-collector output

Load current: groups of 1 to 3 amplifires: 100 mA max., groups of 4 to 30 amplifires: 20 mA max.
Residual voltage:
at load current of less than 10 mA: 1 V max.
at load current of 10 to 100 mA: 2 V max.
OFF current: 0.1 mA max.
No. of units for mutual

Response time
interference prevention
Connector for sensor

communications unit
Super-high-speed Mode Operate or reset for model with 1 output: 30 s, with 2 outputs: 32 s
(SHS)*1
High-speed Mode (HS)
Operate or reset: 250 s
Standard Mode (Stnd)
Giga-power Mode
(GIGA)
Super-high-speed Mode 0
(SHS)*1
High-speed Mode (HS) 10
Standard Mode (Stnd)
10
Giga-power Mode
(GIGA)
Functions
10
Maximum connectable units
30
*1
E3NX-FA0
Inputs/ Item
outputs
Specifications
Auto power control (APC), dynamic power control (DPC), timer, zero reset, resetting settings, eco mode, bank switching, power tuning, and hysteresis width
The mutual interference prevention function is disabled if the detection mode is set to super-high-speed mode.
259
E3NX-FA
Fiber amplifier
Easy One-Button-Teaching/Smart Tuning
Automatic setting of optimum values

TUNE button
Press the
once with a workpiece and
once without a workpiece
Threshold + Incident level

ST
5000
Set to the intermediate
value between
the incident levels with and
without a workpiece.
9999
Incident level
adjustment with and
without a workpiece
Dynamic range
increased by a
factor of 40,000
Easy setting of optimum power and threshold by pushing tune button twice.
Smart power control
APC
Always ON
Long-term stability
Light intensity
(AUTO POWER
CONTROL)
Automatically
compensate light
intensity
Smart Power
Control
Time
Incident level
DPC
(DYNAMIC POWER
CONTROL)
Automatically
compensate
incident level
With APC
Without APC
Target value
(displayed
incident level)
Setting value
(threshold value)
Compen- Compen-Compensated. sated. sated.
Flashes when
compensation is
no longer possible.
DPC
Time
Enhanced signal stability control for compensating power reductions caused by temperature drift, dust or aging of LED. Alarm output added for predictive maintenance.
N-Smart platform
The N-Smart platform provides wide portfolio of advanced sensors all with the
same intuitive operation concept and field bus connectivity.
260
E39/E32
Fiber accessories
Shape
Type
Comment
Order code
Focal lens
Extends sensing distance by more than 500%

For M4 Through beam fibers E32-TC200, E32-ET11R, E32-T11 (fits M2.6 thread)
2 pcs per set
E39-F1
Focal lens (side view)
For M4 through beam fibers E32-TC200, E32-ET11R, E32-T11,

E32-T61-S, E32-T81R-S (fits M2.6 thread)
Temperature range 40 to 200C
2 pcs per set
E39-F2
Focal lens (variable)
For precision detection with E32-D32, E32-EC41
E39-F3A
Focal lens
For precision detection with E32-EC41
E39-F3A-5
For precision detection with E32-EC41
E39-F3B
For precision detection with M6 coaxial diffuse reflective fibers (e.g. E32-CC200)
E39-F18
Focal lens (side view, variable) For precision detection with E32-EC31
E39-EF51
Focal lens (heat resistant)
Extends sensing distance by more than 500%

For M4 through beam fibers E32-ET51, E32-T61, E32-T61-S,
E32-T81R, E32-T81R-S (fits M4 thread)
Temperature range 60 to 350C
2 pcs per set
E39-EF1-37-2
Focal lens (vacuum resistant,

heat resistant)
Fits E32-T51V and E32-T54V (fits M2.6 thread)

2 units per set
Heat resistant up to 120C
E39-F1V
Fiber cutter
Included in applicable fiber
E39-F4
Thin fiber attachment
Amplifier adapter for thin fibers

Included in applicable fiber (2 sets)
E39-F9
Sleeve bender
For E32-TC200B(4)
For E32-TC200F(4)
For E32-DC200F(4)
E39-F11
Single fiber extension

connector
Fiber extension connector for 2.2 mm dia standard fibers

One unit
E39-F10
Dual fiber extension connector For fibers with dia 2.2
Protective spiral tube *1
Fiber on roll *2
*1
*2
Accessories
E39-F16
E39-F13
For fiber with dia 1.0
E39-F14
For fibers with dia between 1.0 and 2.2
E39-F15
For M3 diffuse type sensors

Length 1 m
E39-F32A
For M3 through beam type sensors

Length 1 m
E39-F32B
For M4 through beam type sensors

Length 1 m
E39-F32C
For M6 diffuse type sensors

Length 1 m
E39-F32D
Dia 2.2 mm
Standard monocore, 10 mm bending radius
40 to 80C
E32-E01 100M
Dia 1.1 mm
Standard monocore, 15 mm bending radius
40 to 80C
E32-E02 100M
Dia 2.2 mm
High flex multicore, 1 mm bending radius
40 to 80C
E32-E01R 100M
Dia 1.1 mm
High flex multicore, 1 mm bending radius
40 to 80C
E32-E02R 100M
Dia 2.2 mm
High temperature monocore, 20 mm bending radius
60 to 150C
E32-E05 100M
Protective spiral tubes with 0.5 m length are available. Add '5' to order code e.g. E39-F32A5
Fiber length 100 m on a roll cut to length
261
Inductive sensors
ZERO TOLERANCE ON FAILURE
Tested reliability for demanding conditions
Our inductive sensors are designed and tested to ensure a long service life and to achieve maximum machine
availability even in the harshest environments.
This trusted reliability makes the E2A one of the world's most popular and successful inductive proximity sensors
with more than one million units sold every year.
Wide portfolio and application range
Highest reliability even in demanding environments
Designed for flexibility - modular housing design for best performance fit
Inductive sensors
Compact
cylindrical
Miniature
M8 to M30
262
Cylindrical
Miniature
Square
E2A
E2B
PROX E2E
E2S
A272
Page 266
A289
Page 270
A286
Page 272
A234
Page 274
Inductive sensors
Square/
block style
Compact
Longer
distance
Square/
block style
Longer
distance
Special
models
Cylindrical
See next page:
TL-W
E2Q5
E2A3
E2A-S
E2EH
E2FQ
E2AU
E2E-_-U
E2FM
E2C-EDA
A227
Page 273
A229
Page 275
A274
Page 269
263
Selection table
Cylindrical
Model
E2A
E2A3
E2A-S
E2B
361 product line
PRO
PROplus
PRO
LITE
Type
Compact
Long distance
Compact
Compact
Material
Brass, SUS
Brass
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
IP
Voltage Wiring
rating
Oper.
mode
Mount. Max. sensing distance
Format
dia. 3
dia. 4
M5
dia. 6.5
M8
2/4 mm
3 mm
2/4 mm
2/4 mm
M12
4/8 mm
6 mm
4/8 mm
4/8 mm
M18
8/16 mm
11 mm
8/16 mm
8/16 mm
M30
15/30 mm
20 mm
15/20 mm
15/30 mm
19 6 6
22 8 6
31 18 10
53 40 23
67 40 40
Shielded
Non-shielded
NO
NC
NO + NC
DC 2-wire
DC 3-wire
DC 4-wire
AC 2-wire
10 to 30 VDC
12 to 240 VAC
IP67
IP69K
Page/Quick Link
266
269
268
270
Type
Vehicle usage certified
Detergent and heat resistant
Chemical resistant
Small diameter
Model
E2AU
E2EH
E2FQ
PROX E2E
361 product line
PROplus
PROplus
PROplus
PROplus
Key features
e1 type approval (according to

Stainless steel housing
automotive directive 2005/83/EC) 120C heat resistance
E1 (according to vehicle regulation
ECE-R10)
PTFE housing
High frequency of 5 kHz: suitable

for high-speed counting
All sizes are also available as nonshielded types
dia. 3
M8
M12
M18
M30
Page/Quick Link
277
276
A246
272
Special models
dia. 4
dia. 6.5
M5
264
Inductive sensors
Square
Model
TL-W
E2S
Type
Compact
Miniature
Long distance
Material
ABS
Polyarylate
PBT
IP
Voltage Wiring
rating
Oper.
mode
E2Q5
dia. 3
dia. 4
M5
dia. 5.4
M8
M12
M18
M30
19 6 6
1.6 mm
22 8 6
3 mm
2.5 mm
31 18 10
5 mm
53 40 23
20 mm
67 40 40
40 mm
Shielded
Non-shielded
NO
NC
NO + NC
DC 2-wire
DC 3-wire
DC 4-wire
AC 2-wire
10 to 30 VDC
12 to 240 VAC
IP67
IP69K
Page/Quick Link
273
274
275
Type
Full metal face
Oil resistant
Model
E2FM
E2E-_U
E2C-EDA
361 product line
PROplus
PROplus
PROplus
Key features
Immune to aluminum
and cast iron chips on sensing
surface
Oil resistant
Tested oil resistance on commonly Distance teaching up to m

used lubricants
accuracy
dia. 3
dia. 4
dia. 6.5
Inductive sensors
Mount. Max. sensing distance
Format
Special models
M5
M8
M12
M18
M30
Page/Quick Link
279
278
281
Standard
Available
No/not available
265
E2A
Compact cylindrical
Extended sensing range inductive sensor
in cylindrical brass housing
The high quality and the long-life design of the E2A extended sensing distance
provide high operational reliability, accurate performance and long sensor lifetime for
a wide range of applications.
Extended (double) sensing distance
IP67 and IP69k for highest water protection
DC 3-wire (NO, NC)
Wide temperature range 40 to 70C
200 mA max load current
Wide installation and connectivity range through modular concept
Pre-wired
Size
M8
M12
M18
M30
Sensing
distance
2.0 mm
Thread length
(overall length)
Output
Order code (for pre-wired types with 2 m PVC cable)
configuration Operation mode NO
Operation mode NC
DC 4-wire (NO+NC-PNP models)
27 (40) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S08KS02-WP-B1 2M*2
E2A-S08KS02-WP-B2 2M*2
E2A-S08LS02-WP-B3 2M*3
E2A-S08KN04-WP-B1 2M*2
E2A-S08KN04-WP-B2 2M*2
E2A-S08LN04-WP-B3 2M*3
4.0 mm
21 (40) mm
PNP*1
4.0 mm
34 (50) mm
PNP*1
E2A-M12KS04-WP-B1 2M
8.0 mm
27 (50) mm
PNP*1
E2A-M12KN08-WP-B1 2M
8.0 mm
39 (59) mm
PNP*1
16.0 mm
29 (59) mm
PNP*1
15.0 mm
44 (64) mm
PNP*1
20.0 mm*4 29 (64) mm
PNP*1
Sensing
distance
Output
Order code (for M12 connector types)
Operation mode NC
Connector types (M12)

Size
M8
M12
M18
M30
Thread length
(overall length)
*1
*2
DC 4-wire (NO+NC-PNP models)
*2
E2A-S08LS02-M3-B3*5
2.0 mm
27 (43) mm
PNP
E2A-S08KS02-M1-B1
E2A-S08KS02-M1-B2
4.0 mm
21 (43) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S08KN04-M1-B1*2
E2A-S08KN04-M1-B2*2
E2A-S08LN04-M3-B3*5
4.0 mm
24 (48) mm
PNP*1
E2A-M12KS04-M1-B1
E2A-M12KS04-M1-B2
E2A-M12KS04-M1-B3
8.0 mm
27 (48) mm
PNP*1
E2A-M12KN08-M1-B1
E2A-M12KN08-M1-B2
E2A-M12KN08-M1-B3
8.0 mm
39 (53) mm
PNP*1
E2A-M18KS08-M1-B1
E2A-M18KS08-M1-B2
E2A-M18KS08-M1-B3
16.0 mm
29 (53) mm
PNP*1
E2A-M18KN16-M1-B1
E2A-M18KN16-M1-B2
E2A-M18KN16-M1-B3
15.0 mm
44 (58) mm
PNP*1
E2A-M30KS15-M1-B1
E2A-M30KS15-M1-B2
E2A-M30KS15-M1-B3
20.0 mm*4 29 (58) mm
PNP*1
E2A-M30KN20-M1-B1
E2A-M30KN20-M1-B2
E2A-M30KN20-M1-B3
Sensing
distance
Thread length
(overall length)
Body material
Stainless steel
DC 2-Wire models
Size
M8
M12
M18
M30
Operation mode

DC 2-wire (NO)*1
2.0 mm
27 (40) mm
4.0 mm
21 (40) mm
4.0 mm
34 (50) mm
8.0 mm
27 (50) mm
E2A-M12KN08-WP-D1 2M
8.0 mm
39 (59) mm
E2A-M18KS08-WP-D1 2M
16.0 mm
29 (59) mm
15.0 mm
44 (64) mm
20.0 mm
29 (64) mm
Sensing
distance
Thread length
(overall length)
Output
Connection
configuration
2 mm
27 (40) mm
NPN
Connector M8 3 pin: gold-plated Stainless steel
PNP
Connector M12 4 pin: gold-plated Brass-nickel plated
NO
E2A-S08KS02-WP-D1 2M
E2A-S08KN04-WP-D1 2M
Brass-nickel plated
Gold-plated pins models

Size
M8
M12
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
4 mm
8 mm
34 (48) mm
Operation
mode
Order code
NO
E2A-S08KS02-M5-C1-4
E2A-S08LS02-M5-C1-4
49 (62) mm
NPN models are available. For ordering replace -B1, -B2, -B3or -D1 by -C1, -C2 or -C3.
M8 sized housings are only available in stainless steel (SUS 303).
Longer housing with thread length 49 mm and overall length 62 mm.
Models with longer sensing distances of 30 mm and 35 mm are available.
Models with M8 4-pin connector and thread length 49 mm and overall length 61 mm.
266
Body material
E2A-M12KS04-M1-B1-4
E2A-M12KN08-M1-B1-4
E2A
Compact cylindrical
Specifications
(Exemplary for shielded versions.)
Item
M8
M12
M18
M30
E2A-S08KS
E2A-M12KS
E2A-M18KS
E2A-M30KS
Sensing distance
2 mm10%
4 mm10%
8 mm10%
15 mm10%
Response frequency
1,500 Hz
1,000 Hz
500 Hz
250 Hz

(operating voltage)
12 to 24 VDC. Ripple (p-p): 10% max. (10 to 32 VDC)
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse polarity protection, Output reverse polarity protection, power supply reverse polarity protection, surge suppressor,
surge suppressor, short-circuit protection short-circuit protection
Ambient
temperature
Operating
40 to 70C
Storage
IP67 after IEC 60529; IP69K after DIN 40050 part 9
Material
Case
Stainless steel
Sensing surface
PBT
Brass-nickel plated
Optional features
Refer to complete datasheet or contact your OMRON representative for the below optional features
Sensing module and body
single sensing distance (ideal for compatibility with previous machine generations)
Long body (ideal for mounting through thicker constructions)
Inductive sensors
Connection
M8 4-pin (for ordering replace -M1 by -M3 e.g. E2A-S08KS02-M3-B1)
M8 3-pin (for ordering replace -M1 by -M5 e.g. E2A-S08KS02-M5-B1)
PUR cable
Pigtails with M8 or M12 plugs
Output
400 mA max. load current (ideal for switching higher load currents directly)
DC 2-wire (ideal for reduced wiring; leakage current can be used to detect cable breakage)
DC 4-wire (NO+NC output ideal for reduced stock for spare parts; antivalent signal can be used to detect cable breakage)
High water resistance
Cable breakage protection
High resistance against temperature change
High vibration resistance
High mechanical resistance
High electro-magnetic noise immunity
267
E2A-S
Compact cylindrical
Extended sensing range inductive sensor
in cylindrical stainless steel housing
The performance and operational reliability of the E2A family is also available in
stainless steel housing.
Stainless steel housing (SUS 303)
Pre-wired
Size
M8
M12
M18
M30
Sensing distance
Thread length
(overall length)
Output
configuration

Operation mode NO
Operation mode NC
2.0 mm
27 (40) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S08KS02-WP-B1 2M
4.0 mm
21 (40) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S08KN04-WP-B1 2M
4.0 mm
34 (50) mm
PNP*1
8.0 mm
27 (50) mm
PNP*1
8.0 mm
39 (59) mm
PNP*1
16.0 mm
29 (59) mm
PNP*1
15.0 mm
44 (64) mm
PNP*1
20.0 mm*2
29 (64) mm
PNP*1
Sensing distance
Thread length
(overall length)
Output
configuration

Size
M8
M12
M18
M30
*1
*2
Operation mode NO
Operation mode NC
*1
2.0 mm
27 (43) mm
PNP
E2A-S08KS02-M1-B1
E2A-S08KS02-M1-B2
4.0 mm
21 (43) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S08KN04-M1-B1
E2A-S08KN04-M1-B2
4.0 mm
24 (48) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S12KS04-M1-B1
E2A-S12KS04-M1-B2
8.0 mm
27 (48) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S12KN08-M1-B1
E2A-S12KN08-M1-B2
8.0 mm
39 (53) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S18KS08-M1-B1
E2A-S18KS08-M1-B2
16.0 mm
29 (53) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S18KN16-M1-B1
E2A-S18KN16-M1-B2
15.0 mm
44 (58) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S30KS15-M1-B1
E2A-S30KS15-M1-B2
20.0 mm*2
29 (58) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S30KN20-M1-B1
E2A-S30KN20-M1-B2
NPN models are available. For ordering replace -B1 or -B2 by -C1 or -C2.
Models with longer sensing distances of 30 mm and 35 mm are available.
Specifications
(Exemplary for shielded versions)
Item
M8
M12
M18
E2A-S08KS
E2A-M12KS
E2A-M18KS
M30
E2A-M30KS
Sensing distance
2 mm10%
4 mm10%
8 mm10%
15 mm10%
1,000 Hz
500 Hz
250 Hz
Response frequency
1,500 Hz

(operating voltage)
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse polarity protection, Output reverse polarity protection, power supply reverse polarity protection, surge suppressor,
surge suppressor, short-circuit protection short-circuit protection
Ambient
temperature
Operating
40 to 70C
Storage
Material
Case
Stainless steel (SUS 303)
Sensing surface
PBT
268
E2A3
Compact cylindrical
Long (triple) distance inductive sensor in cylindrical brass
housing
The E2A3 family features an optimised sensing performance to achieve triple sensing
distance for quasi flush mounting requirements.
Triple distance for enhanced sensor protection from mechanical damage
IP67 and IP69k
Size
M8
M12
M18
M30
Sensing distance
3.0 mm
6.0 mm
11.0 mm
20.0 mm
Thread length
(overall length)
27 (40) mm
34 (50) mm
39 (60) mm
44 (65) mm
Output
configuration

Operation mode: NO
Operation mode: NC
PNP
E2A3-S08KS03-WP-B1 2M
E2A3-S08KS03-WP-B2 2M
NPN
E2A3-S08KS03-WP-C1 2M
E2A3-S08KS03-WP-C2 2M
PNP
E2A3-M12KS06-WP-B1 2M
NPN
E2A3-M12KS06-WP-C1 2M
PNP
NPN
PNP
NPN
Output
configuration

Operation mode: NO
Operation mode: NC
Inductive sensors
Pre-wired
(For different cable materials and lengths, special housing length or special connectors, please refer to complete datasheet.)

Size
M8
M12
M18
M30
Sensing distance
3.0 mm
6.0 mm
11.0 mm
20.0 mm
Thread length
(overall length)
27 (44) mm
34 (49) mm
39 (54) mm
44 (59) mm
PNP
E2A3-S08KS03-M1-B1
E2A3-S08KS03-M1-B2
NPN
E2A3-S08KS03-M1-C1
E2A3-S08KS03-M1-C2
PNP
E2A3-M12KS06-M1-B1
E2A3-M12KS06-M1-B2
NPN
E2A3-M12KS06-M1-C1
E2A3-M12KS06-M1-C2
PNP
E2A3-M18KS11-M1-B1
E2A3-M18KS11-M1-B2
NPN
E2A3-M18KS11-M1-C1
E2A3-M18KS11-M1-C2
PNP
E2A3-M30KS20-M1-B1
E2A3-M30KS20-M1-B2
NPN
E2A3-M30KS20-M1-C1
E2A3-M30KS20-M1-C2
M30
Specifications
Item
M8
M12
M18
E2A3-S08KS03
E2A3-M12KS06-
E2A3-M18KS11
E2A3-M30KS20
Sensing distance
3 mm10%
6 mm10%
11 mm10%
20 mm10%
Response frequency
700 Hz
350 Hz
250 Hz
80 Hz

(operating voltage)
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse

polarity protection, surge suppressor,
short-circuit protection
Ambient
Operating
temperature Storage
25to 70C
Material
Case
Stainless steel
Sensing surface
PBT
Output reverse polarity protection, power supply reverse polarity protection, surge suppressor, short-circuit
protection
Brass-nickel plated
269
E2B
Compact cylindrical
The ideal solution for standard industrial conditions
Thanks to the simple construction and Omrons innovative hot melt production
process, the E2B sensors embody two characteristics: value-for-money and high
reliability.
All-round-visible indicator
The laser printed part number
Vibration shock resistance: IEC 60947-5-2 (10 to 55 Hz)
Operating temperature: 25 to 70C
Water resistance: IP67
Pre-wired
Size
M8
M12
M18
M30
Sensing distance
Output configuration

Operation mode NO
Operation mode NC
2.0 mm
PNP*1
E2B-S08KS02-WP-B1 2M*2
E2B-S08KS02-WP-B2 2M*2
E2B-S08KN04-WP-B1 2M*2
E2B-S08KN04-WP-B2 2M*2
4.0 mm
PNP*1
4.0 mm
PNP*1
E2B-M12KS04-WP-B1 2M
8.0 mm
PNP*1
E2B-M12KN08-WP-B1 2M
8.0 mm
PNP*1
16.0 mm
PNP*1
15.0 mm
PNP*1
30.0 mm
PNP*1
E2B-M30LN30-WP-B1 2M
E2B-M30LN30-WP-B2 2M
Sensing distance
Order code
Connector types
Size
Operation mode NO
M8
M12
M18
M30
*1
*2
2.0 mm
E2B-S08KS02-MC-B1
*2
E2B-S08KS02-MC-B2*2
*1
E2B-S08KN04-MC-B1*2
E2B-S08KN04-MC-B2*2
PNP
4.0 mm
PNP
4.0 mm
PNP*1
E2B-M12KS04-M1-B1
E2B-M12KS04-M1-B2
8.0 mm
PNP*1
E2B-M12KN08-M1-B1
E2B-M12KN08-M1-B2
8.0 mm
PNP*1
E2B-M18KS08-M1-B1
E2B-M18KS08-M1-B2
16.0 mm
PNP*1
E2B-M18KN16-M1-B1
E2B-M18KN16-M1-B2
15.0 mm
PNP*1
E2B-M30KS15-M1-B1
E2B-M30KS15-M1-B2
30.0 mm
PNP*1
E2A-M30LN30-M1-B1
E2B-M30LN30-M1-B2
NPN models are available. For ordering replace -B1 or -B2 by -C1 or -C2.
M8 sized housings are only available in stainless steel (SUS 303).
Optional features
Refer to complete datasheet or contact your OMRON representative for the below optional features
Sensing module and body
Single sensing distance (ideal for compatibility with previous machine generations)
Long body (ideal for mounting through thicker constructions)
Connection
M8 3-pin -MC e.g. E2B-S08KS02-MC-B1
Output
200 mA max. load current
270
Operation mode NC
*1
E2B
Compact cylindrical
Specifications
(Exemplary for shielded versions.)
Item
M8
M12
M18
M30
E2B-S08KS
E2B-M12KS
E2B-M18KS
E2B-M30KS
Sensing distance
2 mm10%
4 mm10%
8 mm10%
15 mm10%
Response frequency
1,500 Hz
1,000 Hz
500 Hz
250 Hz

(operating voltage)
Protective circuits
Output reverse polarity protection, Power source circuit reverse polarity protection
Ambient
temperature
Operating and
storage
25 to 70C
IP67 after IEC 60529
Material
Case
Stainless steel
Sensing surface
PBT
Brass-nickel plated
Inductive sensors
High-visibility ring LED indicator
Laser printing part number
271
PROX E2E Small Diameter
Compact cylindrical
Small diameter proximity sensors for high precision
detection
Omron's latest inductive technology has now been applied to a new range of small
diameter inductive sensors. The new PROX E2E provides precision detection and
allows installation in even the most confined spaces. The portfolio has been extended
to include non-shielded types and versions with pig-tail connector leads.
Miniature size: 3, 4, 6.5 mm and M4, M5 diameters
High frequency of 5 kHz: suitable for high-speed counting
All sizes are also available as non-shielded types
IP67 water ingress protection
Highly visible indicators for easy operation confirmation
Size
dia 3 mm
Sensing distance
0.8 mm
M4
0.8 mm
dia 4 mm
3 mm
1.2 mm
dia 6.5 mm
2 mm
1.2 mm
M5
2 mm
3 mm
2 mm
Connection
PW
PW
PW
PW
PW
PW
PW
PW
PW
M8(3P)
4 mm
PW
M8(3P)
Order code
Operation mode NO
Operation mode NC
PNP
E2E-C03SR8-WC-B1 2M OMS
E2E-C03SR8-WC-B2 2M OMS
NPN
E2E-C03SR8-WC-C1 2M OMS
E2E-C03SR8-WC-C2 2M OMS
PNP
E2E-C03N02-WC-B1 2M OMS
NPN
E2E-C03N02-WC-C1 2M OMS
PNP
E2E-S04SR8-WC-B1 2M OMS
E2E-S04SR8-WC-B2 2M OMS
NPN
E2E-S04SR8-WC-C1 2M OMS
E2E-S04SR8-WC-C2 2M OMS
PNP
E2E-S04N02-WC-B1 2M OMS
NPN
E2E-S04N02-WC-C1 2M OMS
PNP
E2E-C04S12-WC-B1 2M OMS
NPN
E2E-C04S12-WC-C1 2M OMS
PNP
NPN
PNP
E2E-S05S12-WC-B1 2M OMS
E2E-S05S12-WC-B2 2M OMS
NPN
E2E-S05S12-WC-C1 2M OMS
E2E-S05S12-WC-C2 2M OMS
PNP
NPN
PNP
NPN
PNP
E2E-C06S02-MC-B1 OMS
E2E-C06S02-MC-B2 OMS
NPN
E2E-C06S02-MC-C1 OMS
E2E-C06S02-MC-C2 OMS
PNP
NPN
PNP
E2E-C06N04-MC-B1 OMS
E2E-C06N04-MC-B2 OMS
NPN
E2E-C06N04-MC-C1 OMS
E2E-C06N04-MC-C2 OMS
Specifications
Item
dia. 3/M4
dia. 4/M5
dia. 6.5
E2E-C03S/-S04S
E2E-C03N/-S04N
E2E-C04S/-S05S
E2E-C04N/-S05N
E2E-C06S
E2E-C06N
Sensing distance
0.8 mm10%
2.0 mm10%
1.2 mm10%
3.0 mm10%
2.0 mm10%
4 mm10.%
Setting distance
0 to 0.56 mm
0 to 1.4 mm
0 to 0.84 mm
0 to 2.1 mm
0 to 1.4 mm
0 to 2.8 mm
Response frequency
5 kHz
3 kHz
4 kHz
2 kHz
3 kHz
4 kHz
Supply voltage
10 to 30 VDC
Current consumption
10 mA
Max. control output
50 mA
Residual output voltage
2 V
Ambient temperature range
25 to 70C
Ambient temperature fluctuation
15%
IEC 60529 IP67
Material
272
Case
Stainless steel (SUS303)
Sensing surface
Heat-resistant ABS
100 mA
200 mA
TL-W
Square/block style
Flat shape inductive sensor in compact plastic housing
The TL-W family offers a wide range of block style inductive sensors for simple
mounting on flat surfaces. With sensing distances from 1.5 mm to 20 mm the TL-W
is the ideal solution for all standard applications.
IP67
DC 2-wire and DC 3-wire models
Sensing distances from 1.5 mm to 20 mm
Side facing sensing face
DC 2-wire
Sensing distance
31 18 10

Operation mode normally open (NO)
Operation mode normally closed (NC)
5 mm
TL-W5MD1
TL-W5MD2
Sensing distance
Inductive sensors
Size in mm
(H W D)
DC 3-wire
Size in mm
(H W D)
PNP-NO
PNP-NC
NPN-NO
NPN-NC
1.5 mm
TL-W1R5MB1
TL-W1R5MC1
22 8 6
3 mm
TL-W3MB1
TL-W3MB2
TL-W3MC1
TL-W3MC2
31 18 10
5 mm
TL-W5MB1
TL-W5MB2
TL-W5MC1
TL-W5MC2
53 40 23
20 mm
TL-W20ME1
TL-W20ME2
5 mm
TL-W5F1
TL-W5F2
TL-W5E1
TL-W5E2
TL-W5E_/F_
25 8 5
31 18 10
Specifications
Item
TL-W5MD_
TL-W1R5M_1
TL-W3M_ _
TL-W5M_ _
Sensing distance
5 mm10%
1.5 mm10%
3 mm10%
5 mm10%
1 kHz min.
600 Hz min.
500 Hz min.
Response frequency
500 Hz

(operating voltage)
12 to 24 VDC (10 to 30 VDC) ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Protective circuits
Surge absorber; shortcircuit protection
Ambient
temperature
Operating
TL-W20ME_
20 mm10%
300 Hz min.
40 Hz min.
10 to 30 VDC with a ripple 12 to 24 VDC

(p-p) of 20% max.
(10 to 30 VDC)
ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Surge suppressor; power supply reverse polarity protection
Storage
IEC60529 IP67
Material
Case
Heat-resistant ABS resin
Sensing
surface
Diecast aluminum
273
E2S
Square/block style
Miniature square inductive sensor in plastic housing
The E2S family features miniature block style plastic housings for simple mounting
on flat surfaces. The durable plastic housing with front or side facing sensing
surfaces, provide best value-performance ratio for machine part movement detection.
Miniature housing
Front and side facing sensing faces
Models with simple one-screw mounting
IP67
DC 2-wire
Size in mm
(H W D)
19 6 6
Sensing distance Sensing face
23 8 8
1.6 mm
2.5 mm
Order code (pre-wired types with 1 m cable

length)
Operation mode NO
Operation mode NC
E2S-W11 1M
E2S-W12 1M
E2S-Q11 1M
E2S-Q12 1M
E2S-W21 1M
E2S-W22 1M
E2S-Q21 1M
E2S-Q22 1M
Output
specifications
Order code (pre-wired types with 1m cable length)

Operation mode NO
Operation mode NC
NPN
DC 3-wire
Size in mm
(H W D)
19 6 6
Sensing distance Sensing face
27 8 8
1.6 mm
2.5 mm
19 6 6
1.6 mm
23 8 8
2.5 mm
E2S-W13 1M
E2S-W14 1M
E2S-Q13 1M
E2S-Q14 1M
E2S-W23 1M
E2S-W24 1M
E2S-Q23 1M
E2S-Q24 1M
E2S-W15 1M
E2S-W16 1M
E2S-Q15 1M
E2S-Q16 1M
E2S-W25 1M
E2S-W26 1M
E2S-Q25 1M
E2S-Q26 1M
PNP
Specifications
Item
E2S-W1
E2S-Q1
E2S-W2
E2S-Q2
Sensing distance
1.6 mm10%
2.5 mm15%
Response frequency
1 kHz min.
Power supply voltage (operating voltage)
12 to 24 VDC (10 to 30 VDC), ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Protective circuits
Surge suppressor; power supply reverse polarity protection

Storage
Material
274
25 to 70C
IEC60529 IP67
Case
Polyarylate
E2Q5
Square/block style
Long distance inductive proximity sensor in plastic
housing
The long sensing distance and simple installation on flat surfaces make the E2Q5
ideal for the detection of large metal objects for example in automotive assembly lines.
M12 Plug-in connection
Integrated short circuit and reverse polarity protection
Sensing face positioning: Y-axis 15, X-axis 90 increments
Size in mm
(H W D)
67 40 40
Sensing distance
Sensing face
Output
Operation mode NO + NC
20 mm
Changeable
NPN
E2Q5-N20E1-M1
E2Q5-N20E3-M1
PNP
E2Q5-N20F1-M1
E2Q5-N20F3- M1
NPN
E2Q5-N40ME1-M1
E2Q5-N40ME3-M1
PNP
E2Q5-N40MF1-M1
E2Q5-N40MF3-M1
40 mm
Inductive sensors
Specifications
Item
E2Q5-N20 _ _ - M1
E2Q5-N40M _ 3- M1
Sensing distance
20 mm10%
40 mm10%
Response frequency
150 Hz
10 to 30 VDC
Protective circuits
Output reverse polarity protection, short-circuit protection
Ambient
temperature
Operating
25 to 85C
IEC 60529 IP 67; IP69k after DIN 40050 part 9
Material
Case
PBT
Sensing face
PBT
275
E2EH
Special models
Heat and detergent resistant inductive sensor in
cylindrical stainless steel housing
The heat and detergent resistant inductive sensors allow reliable metal object or
machine part detection in demanding environments such as food processing.
Temperature resistant up to 120C
SUS316L housing with heat resistant plastic sensing face
IP69k for highest water resistance
ECOLAB tested and certified detergent resistance
Pre-wired
Size
M12
M18
Sensing distance
Output
configuration
Order code (for pre-wired types with 2 m heat resistant PVC cable)
Operation mode NO
Operation mode NC
3 mm
PNP
E2EH-X3B1 2M
E2EH-X3B2 2M
NPN
E2EH-X3C1 2M
E2EH-X3C2 2M
DC 2-wire
E2EH-X3D1 2M
E2EH-X3D2 2M
PNP
E2EH-X7B1 2M
E2EH-X7B2 2M
NPN
E2EH-X7C1 2M
E2EH-X7C2 2M
DC 2-wire
E2EH-X7D1 2M
E2EH-X7D2 2M
PNP
E2EH-X12B1 2M
E2EH-X12B2 2M
NPN
E2EH-X12C1 2M
E2EH-X12C2 2M
DC 2-wire
E2EH-X12D1 2M
E2EH-X12D2 2M
Output
7 mm
M30
12 mm

Size
Sensing distance
Operation mode NO
Operation mode NC
PNP
E2EH-X3B1-M1
E2EH-X3B2-M1
NPN
E2EH-X3C1-M1
E2EH-X3C2-M1
DC 2-wire
E2EH-X3D1-M1G
E2EH-X3D2-M1G
PNP
E2EH-X7B1-M1
E2EH-X7B2-M1
NPN
E2EH-X7C1-M1
E2EH-X7C2-M1
DC 2-wire
E2EH-X7D1-M1G
E2EH-X7D2-M1G
PNP
E2EH-X12B1-M1
E2EH-X12B2-M1
NPN
E2EH-X12C1-M1
E2EH-X12C2-M1
DC 2-wire
E2EH-X12D1-M1G
E2EH-X12D2-M1G
M12
M18
M30
E2EH-X3_ _
E2EH-X7_ _
E2EH-X12_ _
Sensing distance
3 mm10%
7 mm10%
12 mm10%
Response frequency (average)
500 Hz
300 Hz
100 Hz

(operating voltage range)
12 to 24 VDC, ripple (p-p): 10% max. (10 to 32 VDC) (24 VDC max. at 100C or higher)
Protective circuits
Surge suppression, short circuit protection, power supply reverse polarity protection, output reverse polarity protection
Ambient temperature*1
DC 3-wire models: 0 to 100C (0 to 120C for 1,000 hours), DC 2-wire models: 0 to 100C (0 to 110C for 1,000 hours)
IEC 60529 IP67, IP69k after DIN 40050-9
Material
Case, clamping nuts
Stainless steel (SUS316L)
Sensing surface
Cable
Heat-resistant PVC
M12
M18
3 mm
7 mm
M30
12 mm
Specifications
Item
*1
Operation with power supplied for 1,000 h has been verified at 120C for DC 3-wire models and at 110C for DC 2-wire models. Do not bend the cable repeatedly at 100C or higher.
120C
Enhanced temperature resistance
276
Enhanced detergent resistance
E2AU
Special models
Inductive sensor for mobile usage in cylindrical brass
housing
Designed and tested to keep your mobile machines moving.
IP69k tested and certified for highest water resistance
e1 type approval (according to Automotive Directive 2005/83/EC)
E1 type approval (according to vehicle regulation ECE-R10)
Cable or connector breakage protection
Pre-wired
M12
M18
M30
*1
Sensing distance
4.0 mm
8.0 mm
15.0 mm
Thread length
(overall length)
34 mm (50 mm)
56 mm (72 mm)
Order code (for pre-wired types with 2 m PVC cable)*1

Operation mode: NO
Operation mode: NC
PNP
E2AU-M12KS04-WP-B1 2M
PNP
E2AU-M12LS04-WP-B1 2M
39 mm (59 mm)
PNP
61 mm (81 mm)
PNP
44 mm (64 mm)
PNP
66 mm (86 mm)
PNP
Inductive sensors
Size
NPN types and pre-wired types with PUR cable are available. Contact your OMRON representative

Size
M12
M18
M30
Sensing distance
4.0 mm
8.0 mm
15.0 mm
Thread length
(overall length)
34 mm (48 mm)
56 mm (70 mm)

Operation mode: NO
Operation mode: NC
PNP
E2AU-M12KS04-M1-B1
E2AU-M12KS04-M1-B2
PNP
E2AU-M12LS04-M1-B1
E2AU-M12LS04-M1-B2
39 mm (53 mm)
PNP
E2AU-M18KS08-M1-B1
E2AU-M18KS08-M1-B2
61 mm (75 mm)
PNP
E2AU-M18LS08-M1-B1
E2AU-M18LS08-M1-B2
44 mm (58 mm)
PNP
E2AU-M30KS15-M1-B1
E2AU-M30KS15-M1-B2
66 mm (80 mm)
PNP
E2AU-M30LS15-M1-B1
E2AU-M30LS15-M1-B2
Specifications
Item
Sensing distance
M12
M18
E2AU-M12_
E2AU-M18_
M30
E2AU-M30_
4 mm10%
8 mm10%
15 mm10%
500 Hz
250 Hz
Response frequency
1,000 Hz
Power supply voltage (operating voltage)
12 to 24 VDC. Ripple (p-p): 10% max.(10 to 32 VDC)
Protective circuits
Output reverse polarity protection, power supply reverse polarity protection, surge suppressor, short-circuit protection
Ambient temperature
Operating
40 to 70C
Storage
Material
IP67 after IEC 60529, IP69K after DIN 40050 part 9

Case
Brass-nickel plated
Sensing surface
PBT
e1
High electro-magnetic noise immunity (elds and cable induced)
e1 type approval after 2005/83/EC
E1
E1 type approval after ECE-R10
277
E2E-_-U
Special models
Oil resistant inductive sensor in cylindrical brass housing
The E2E-_-U offers tested oil resistance on commonly used oils in the automotive
industry for reliable long-life operation in automotive assembly lines.
Oil resistant PUR cable
M8, M12, M18 and M30 standard sizes
IP67g (water and oil resistance)
DC 2-wire (pre-wired)
Size
M8
Sensing distance
Order code (for pre-wired types with 2 m PUR cable)

Operation mode NO
Operation mode NC
2 mm
E2E-X2D1-U
E2E-X2D2-U
M12
3 mm
E2E-X3D1-U
E2E-X3D2-U
M18
7 mm
E2E-X7D1-U
E2E-X7D2-U
M30
10 mm
E2E-X10D1-U
E2E-X10D2-U
DC 2-wire (pre-wired with M12)

Size
Sensing distance
Order code (for pre-wired types with 30 cm PUR cable and M12 plug))
Operation mode NO
Operation mode NC
2 mm
E2E-X2D1-M1TGJ-U 0.3M
M12
3 mm
M18
7 mm
M30
10 mm
M8
Specifications
Item
M8
M12
M18
M30
E2E-X2D_
E2E-X3D_
E2E-X7D_
E2E-X10D_
Sensing distance
2 mm10%
3 mm10%
7 mm10%
10 mm10%
Response frequency
1.5 kHz
1.0 kHz
0.5 kHz
0.4 kHz

(operating voltage)
Protective circuits
Surge suppressor, output short-circuit protection (for control and diagnostic output)
Ambient
temperature
Operating
25 to 70C
Storage
IEC 60529 IP67 (JEM standard IP67g (waterproof and oil-proof))
Material
Case
Sensing surface PBT (polybutylene terephthalate)

Cable
278
PUR for jacket, PE
Brass-nickel plated
E2FM
Special models
Inductive sensor in cylindrical full metal housing
(case + sensing face)
The high durability stainless steel sensing face provides more than 20 times longer
protection against mechanical damage than conventional sensors. The high mineral
oil and coolant resistance and the immunity against small metal chips on the surface
make this sensor ideal for metal cutting or drilling applications.
Full body stainless steel housing for highest mechanical protection
Low frequency modulation for metal chip immunity
Flame retardant cable for high protection against welding spatter damage (pigtail
models)
Size
Sensing distance
Order code*1
(for pre-wired types with 30 cm PVC cable and M12 plug)
1.5 mm
E2FM-X1R5D1-M1TGJ
M12
2 mm
E2FM-X2D1-M1TGJ
M18
5 mm
E2FM-X5D1-M1TGJ
M30
10 mm
E2FM-X10D1-M1TGJ
M8
Inductive sensors
DC 2-wire (with M12 pigtail connector)
DC 3-wire, M12 Connector types

Size
Sensing distance
Order code*1
(for M12 connector types)
PNP
NPN
1.5 mm
E2FM-X1R5B1-M1
E2FM-X1R5C1-M1
M12
2 mm
E2FM-X2B1-M1
E2FM-X2C1-M1
M18
5 mm
E2FM-X5B1-M1
E2FM-X5C1-M1
M30
10 mm
E2FM-X10B1-M1
E2FM-X10C1-M1
Sensing distance
Order code*1
(for pre-wired types with 2 m PVC cable)
M8
DC 3-wire, pre-wired types

Size
PNP
NPN
1.5 mm
E2FM-X1R5B1 2M
E2FM-X1R5C1 2M
M12
2 mm
E2FM-X2B1 2M
E2FM-X2C1 2M
M18
5 mm
E2FM-X5B1 2M
E2FM-X5C1 2M
M30
10 mm
E2FM-X10B1 2M
E2FM-X10C1 2M
M8
*1
Output configuration normally open (NO)
279
E2FM
Special models
Specifications)
Item
M8
M12
M18
M30
E2FM-X1R5
E2FM-X2
E2FM-X5
E2FM-X10
Sensing distance
1.5 mm10%
2 mm10%
5 mm10%
10 mm10%
Response frequency
200 Hz
100 Hz
100 Hz
50 Hz

(operating voltage range)
Protective circuits
E2FM-_D1: Surge suppressor, output short-circuit protection

E2FM-_B1/C1: Output reverse polarity protection (not E2FM-X1R5B1-M1), power supply reverse polarity protection, surge suppressor, short-circuit
protection
Ambient
temperature
Operating
Storage
IEC60529 IP67, IP69k after DIN 40050 part 9
Material
Case
Sensing surface Stainless steel (SUS303)

Cable
PVC (flame retardant)
0.8
E2FM extra strong sensing face
280
0.2
Conventional metal face product
No interference by small metal chips on

sensing surface
Cable resistant to welding spatter
E2C-EDA
Special models
High precision positioning inductive proximity sensor
with seperate amplifier
The separate amplifier inductive sensor family E2C-EDA offers high precision distance
positioning and detection. The teach-in function allows simple installation, and with
the window function (2 outputs) production tolerance checks can easily be set up and
modified.
Typically several hundred m detection precision
Precision distance teaching
Window function (2 outputs) for production tolerance checks
Appearance
Sensing distance
Repeat accuracy
Order code
0.6 mm
1 m
E2C-EDR6-F
5.4 dia. 18
1 mm
1 m
E2C-ED01*1
8 dia. 22
2 mm
2 m
E2C-ED02*1
Screw
M10 22
2 mm
2 m
E2C-EM02*1
Flat
30 14 4.8
5 mm
2 m
E2C-EV05*1
Screw
M18 46.3
7 mm
5 m
E2C-EM07M*1
Screw (heat
resistant)
M12 22
2 mm
2 m
E2C-EM02H
*1
3 dia. 18
Cylindrical
Inductive sensors
Sensor heads
For models with cut-to-length cables add -F for example E2C-ED01-F

For models with protective stainless steel spiral tubes add -S for example E2C-ED01-S
Amplifier units with connectors*1
Amplifier units with cables

Item
Functions
Order code
NPN output
PNP output
Item
Functions
Order code
NPN output
PNP output
Twin-output
models
Area output, open

circuit detection,
differential operation
E2C-EDA11
E2C-EDA41
Twin-output
models
Area output, open

circuit detection,
E2C-EDA6
E2C-EDA8
External-input models
Remote setting,
E2C-EDA21
E2C-EDA51
External-input models Remote setting,

E2C-EDA7
E2C-EDA9
*1
Order fitting connector (E3X-CN21_) separately from accessories.
Specifications
Sensor heads
Item
Ambient
Operating
temperatur Storage
e
3 dia.
5.4 dia.
8 dia.
M10
M18
30144.8 mm
E2C-EDR6-F
E2C-ED01(-_ )
E2C-ED02(-_ )
E2C-EM02(-_ )
E2C-EM07(-_ )
E2C-EV05(-_ )
IEC60529 IP67
Material
Case
Brass
Sensing
surface
Heat-resistant ABS
M12
E2C-EM02H
10 to 200C
IEC60529 IP60
Stainless steel
Brass
Zinc
Brass
PEEK
Note: For amplifier specifications refer to complete datashee
281

THE RELIABLE AND FLEXIBLE WAY ...
... to stop your machines
For the detection of machine part movement especially for the detection of end positions, the mechanical and optical limit
switches provide accurate and reliable operation with a large variety of actuation possibilities optimized for a widest range of
application and usage requirements. The easy positioning and intuitive installation, the high immunity to changing environmental
influences (electromagnetic fields, sunlight, temperatures, etc.) as well as the possibility to directly switch loads with up to 15 A
make these sensors ideal for a wide range of conveying and handling applications.
Mechanical sensors/limit switches
282
Standard
Compact size
Metal
Metal
Basic housing/
for subassemblies
Plastic housing
Contactless
(photoelectric)
Portrait
Landscape
WL-N
D4C
ZC
EE-SX
L835
Pages 290
L824
Page 292
L834
Page 294
L862
Page 296
B422, B423, B442

Page 194
Special models
Electrical load
variations
Mounting shape
and pitch variations
D4C, D4E, X, Z, ZC
mA
Connection and
wiring variations
Safety
applications
Plastic
Metal
D4MC, HL, WL
D4E, SHL, WL
D4N
D4B
L853
L854
S238
Page 286
S232
Pages 288
L856
283
284
Type
Standard
Model
D4N
D4B
Material
Plastic
Metal
Screw terminal
No conduit
Compact
Basic housing
WL-N
D4C
Metal
Metal
Plastic
Cable dia. 8.5 to 10.5
M20
PG13.5
G1/2
1/2-14NPT
Cable connector M12
Prewired
290
292
296
Mounting shape and

pitch variations
Connection and
wiring variations
IP67
Page/Quick Link
286
288
Type
High precision
multi direction
Compact
Model
D5B
ZC
Material
Metal
Metal
Key Features
X, Y, Z action
several m switching
accuracy
M5, M8, M10 sizes
Small housing size

Screw terminals
IP67
Page/Quick Link
L833
294
Type
Highest precision
tactile measurement
Electrical load variations
Selection table
IP00
Special models
mA
Model
ZX-T
D4C, D4E, X, Z, ZC
D4MC, HL, WL
D4E, SHL, WL
D4 Safety
Material
Plastic
Plastic and Metal
Metal
Metal
Plastic and Metal
Key Features
Measurement resolution
up to 0.1 m
Microloads
Mounting shapes and
Screw conduit variations Mechanical form lock
(1 mA to 100 mA)
pitches popular in differ(PG13.5, G1/2,
Manual reset
High current at high
ent countries in the world 1/2"14NPT
Door hinge switches
voltage switching
Mounting pitch varia Cable exit variations
(10 A at 125 VDC)
tions (base mounting,
(pigtails, rubber snap on
Double circuit switching
diagonal pitches, ...)
covers, screw on covers,
Alternative actuator
with or without cable
positions
breakage protection for
different cable diameters
Page/Quick Link
391
Contact your OMRON representative
400
285
D4N
Limit switches
Limit switch with plastic housing
The D4N series of limit switches in plastic housing is the ideal switch for all standard
mechanical position detection applications both for safety and non-safety
applications.
Direct opening mechanism and approval by notified body
Rugged plastic housing with double insulation
Wide range of actuators
M12 connectors or terminal block with M20 conduit
Actuator type
Connection method
Order code*1
1NC/1NO (snap-action) 1NC/1NO (slow-action)
2NC (slow-action)
2NC/1NO (slow-action)
Order code
Order code
Order code
Order code
Roller lever
(resin lever, resin roller)
M20
D4N-4120
D4N-4A20
D4N-4B20
D4N-4C20
M12 connector
D4N-9120
D4N-9A20
D4N-9B20
Plunger
M20
D4N-4131
D4N-4A31
D4N-4B31
M12 connector
D4N-9131
D4N-9A31
D4N-9B31
M20
D4N-4132
D4N-4A32
D4N-4B32
D4N-4C32
M12 connector
D4N-9132
D4N-9A32
D4N-9B32
M20
D4N-4162
D4N-4A62
D4N-4B62
D4N-4C62
M12 connector
D4N-9162
D4N-9A62
D4N-9B62
One-way roller arm lever (vertical)
M20
D4N-4172
D4N-4A72
D4N-4B72
Adjustable roller lever, form lock

(metal lever, resin roller)
M20
D4N-412G
D4N-4A2G
D4N-4B2G
M12 connector
D4N-912G
D4N-9A2G
D4N-9B2G

(metal lever, rubber roller)
M20
D4N-412H
D4N-4A2H
D4N-4B2H
M12 connector
D4N-912H
D4N-9A2H
D4N-9B2H
Roller plunger
One-way roller arm lever (horizontal)
Switches with MBB contacts

MBB (Make Before Break) contacts have an overlapping structure, so that before the normally closed (NC) contact opens the normally open (NO) contact closes.
Actuator type
M20
D4N-4E20
D4N-4F20
M12 connector
D4N-9E20
Roller plunger
M20
D4N-4E32
D4N-4F32
M12 connector
D4N-9E32
M20
D4N-4E62
D4N-4F62
M12 connector
D4N-9E62
The NC contacts provide the approved direct opening mechanism.
286
Order code*1
Roller lever

*1
Connection method
D4N
Limit switches
Specifications
Operating speed
Mechanical
15,000,000 operations min.*2
Electrical
500,000 operations min. for a resistive load of 3 A at 250 VAC

Roller lever
1 mm/s to 0.5 m/s
Operating frequency
30 operations/minute max.
Minimum applicable load
Resistive load of 1 mA at 5 VDC (N-level reference value)
Protection against electric shock
Class II (double insulation)
Pollution degree (operating environment)
3 (EN60947-5-1)
Contact gap
Snap-action: 2x0.5 mm min

Slow-action: 2x2 mm min
Conditional short-circuit current
100 A (EN60947-5-1)
Rated open thermal current (Ith)
10 A (EN60947-5-1)
Ambient temperature
30 to 70C with no icing
Operating
*1
*2
IP67 (EN60947-5-1)
The durability is acquired for an ambient temperature of 5 to 35C and an ambient humidity of 40% to 70%.
10,000,000 operations min. for fork lever actuator.
1NO/1NC Contact (Snap-action)

If metal deposition between mating contacts occurs on the NC contact side, they can
be pulled apart by the shearing force and tensile force generated when part B of the
1. When metal deposition occurs.
safety cam or plunger engages part A of the movable contact blade. When the safety
cam or plunger is moved in the direction of the arrow, the Limit Switch releases.
3. When contacts are completely pulled apart.
2. When contacts are being pulled apart.
Movable contact
Safety cam directly
pushes up the movable
contact blade.
Movable contact
blade
Plunger
Safety cam
Fixed contact (NC)
1NC/1NO Contact (Slow-action)
2NC Contact (Slow-action)
Fixed contact (NC)
Fixed contact (NC)
Contact spring
Contact spring
Movable contact
Return spring
Plunger
Movable contact
Plunger
Return spring
Fixed contact (NO)
NC contacts conform to EN60947-5-1 Direct Opening

When metal deposition occurs, the contacts are separated from each other by the plunger
being pushed in.
is marked on the product to indicate approval of direct opening.
287
Durability*1
D4B
Limit switches
Limit switch with metal housing
The D4B series of limit switches in a rugged metal housing is suitable for both safety
and non-safety applications due to its direct opening mechanism and TV approval.
Furthermore with the increased temperature range and enhanced mechanical switching lifetime, the D4B is first choice for all applications from standard to demanding environments and for highest flexibility in mounting and connectivity preferences.
Rugged metal housing and extended mechanical switching lifetime
(snap action models)
Terminal block for direct wiring
Actuator type
Connection method
Order code*1
1NC/1NO (snap-action)
2NC (slow-action)
D4B-4111N
D4B-4511N
D4B-4A11N
Adjustable roller lever
D4B-4116N
D4B-4516N
D4B-4A16N
Adjustable rod lever
D4B-4117N
D4B-4517N
D4B-4A17N
Plain
D4B-4170N
D4B-4570N
D4B-4A70N
Roller
D4B-4171N
D4B-4571N
D4B-4A71N
Coil spring
D4B-4181N*4
Plastic rod
D4B-4187N*4
Roller lever*2
Terminal block with

M20 conduit*3
*1
*2
*3
*4
For models with stainless steel rollers and temperature resistance of -40C refer to WL-_-TC.
Models with G1/2 or 1/2"14NPT conduit are available. For ordering refer to complete datasheet. For PG13.5 conduit models for non-safety applications contact your OMRON representative.
No direct opening mechanism.
Specifications
Item
Durability*1
Snap-action
Slow-action
Mechanical
30,000,000 operations min.
Electrical
500,000 operations min. (at a 250 VAC, 10 A resistive load)
Operating speed
Operating frequency
1 mm/s to 0.5 m/s

Mechanical
120 operations/min
Electrical
30 operations/min
Rated frequency
50/60 Hz
Contact resistance
25 m max. (initial value)
3 (EN60947-5-1)
100 A (EN60947-5-1)
Conventional enclosed thermal current (Ith)
20 A (EN60947-5-1)
Class I (with ground terminal)
Ambient temperature
*1
*2
Operating
40 to 80C (with no icing)*2

IP67 (EN60947-5-1)
The values are acquired for an ambient temperature of 5 to 35C and an ambient humidity of 40% to 70%.
25 to 80C for the flexible-rod actuator.
288
D4B
Limit switches

Movable contact
Safety cam directly
pushes up the movable
contact blade.
Movable contact
blade
Plunger
Safety cam
Fixed contact (NC)
Fixed contact (NC)
Fixed contact (NC)
Contact spring
Contact spring
Movable contact
Return spring
Plunger
Movable contact
Plunger
Return spring
Fixed contact (NO)

being pushed in.
289
WL-N
Limit switches
WL-N Series limit switches simplify installation
Models focus on the most popular features to make stocking easier.
Improved durability and performance
Applicable to either standard loads or microloads
LED with 3D light-dispersing structure
Reduced part numbers
Easy wiring
Direct and pre-wiring
Ground terminal models are approved by EN and IEC and bear
the CE marking UL,CSA
Actuator type
*1
Contact Form and features
Connection method
CE Mark Order code
Roller lever R38
DPDB*1
Screw terminal (Pg13,5 conduit with

ground terminal)*2
Yes
Adjustable roller lever: R25 to 89 mm, pretravel 155
DPDB, Heat-resistant: 5 to 120C
WLCA12-THG-N
Adjustable roller lever: R25 to 89 mm, pretravel 155
DPDB, LED
WLCA12-GLD-N
Roller lever R50, pretravel 155
DPDB
WLCA2-7G-N
Roller lever R63, pre-travel 155
DPDB
WLCA2-8G-N
Adjustable rod lever: 25 to 140 mm, pretravel 155
DPDB, Heat-resistant: 5 to 120C
Adjustable rod lever: 25 to 140 mm, pretravel 155
DPDB, LED,
Roller lever R38, High sensitive pre-travel 10+2/1
DPDB, LED
Za
*2
WLCL-THG-N
Pre-wired Connector M12 (Smart Click),
with ground terminal
DPDB The double-pole, double-break structure ensures circuit braking.

(NO) 14
13 (NO)
(NC) 12
11 (NC)
11
13
12
14
Load
Load
Models with screw terminals with M20 conduit instead of PG13.5 are available. Contact your OMRON representative.
290
WLCA2-2NG-N
WLCL-2NLD-DGJ-N
WLG2-LDFS-DGJS-N
WL-N
Limit switches
Specifications
Characteristics
Durability*1
IP67
Mechanical
Electrical
750,000 operations min.*3
Operating speed
Operating frequency
1 mm/s to 1 m/s (in case of WLCA2-N)

Mechanical
120 operations/minute min.
Electrical
30 operations/minute min.
Rated frequency
50/60 Hz
100 M min. (at 500 VDC)
Contact resistance
Dielectric strength
25 m max. (initial value for the built-in switch when tested alone)
Between terminals of the same polarity 1,000 VAC (600 VAC), 50/60 Hz for 1 min
Between each terminal and noncurrentcarrying metal part
2,200 VAC (1,500 VAC), 50/60 Hz for 1 min
Malfunction
10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude
Shock resistance
Destruction
1,000 m/s2 max.
Malfunction
300 m/s2
35% to 95% RH
Weight
Approx. 255 g (in case of WLCA2-N)
*1
The values are calculated at an operating temperature of 5 to 35C and an operating humidity of 40% to 70% RH. Contact your OMRON sales representative for more detailed information on
other operating environments.
*2 Durability is 1,000,000 operations min. for high-sensitivity models. 500,000 operations min. for weather-proof models.
*3
Durability is 500,000 operations min. for high-sensitivity models. 500,000 operations min. for weather-proof models.
*4
For low-temperature models this is 40 to 40C (with no icing). For heatresistant models the range is 5 to 120C.
Note: 1. The above figures are initial values.
2. The figures in parentheses for dielectric strength are those for the highsensitivity overtravel models.
Ratings
Item
Basic switches
Rated voltage (V)
AC
DC
High-sensitivity switches
AC
DC
Non-inductive load (A)
Inductive load (A)
Resistive load
Lamp load
Inductive load
Motor load
NC
NC
NO
NC
NO
NO
NC
NO
125
10
1.5
10
2.5
250
10
10
1.5
500
10
1.5
0.8
1.5
0.8
10
10
14
10
10
30
125
0.8
0.2
0.2
0.8
0.2
250
0.4
0.1
0.1
0.4
0.1
125
250
125
0.4
250
0.2
291
Between currentcarrying metal part and 2,200 VAC (1,500 VAC), 50/60 Hz for 1 min
ground
D4C
Limit switches
Compact limit switch in metal housing
The 16 mm flat and compact size make the D4C range of limit switches very popular
for all standard applications but especially where mounting space is limited or protruding housings may interfere with machine operation. The triple sealed construction, the rugged metal housing and the precisely manufactured movable parts ensure
long operational life in standard or oily environments (special models).
16 mm flat compact size
Rugged metal housing
Models with M12 connector or oil resistant VCTF cable
Actuator type
Load range (VDC)*1 Operation LED indicator

0.8 W to 60 W max No
Plunger
Connection method
Order code
Yes
*2
3m
D4C-1250
D4CC-4050
3m
*1
*2
D4C-3220
D4CC-3050
3m
D4C-1220
D4CC-4024
3m
Coil spring
D4C-3243
D4CC-3024
3m
D4C-1243
D4CC-4043
3m
Roller lever
D4C-3233
D4CC-3043
3m
D4C-1233
D4CC-4033
3m
Crossroller plunger with M14 mounting
D4C-3203
D4CC-3033
3m
D4C-1203
D4CC-4003
3m
Sealed crossroller plunger
D4C-3242
D4CC-3003
3m
D4C-1242
D4CC-4042
3m
Crossroller plunger
D4C-3232
D4CC-3042
3m
D4C-1232
D4CC-4032
3m
Roller plunger with M14 mounting
D4C-3202
D4CC-3032
3m
D4C-1202
D4CC-4002
3m
Sealed roller plunger
D4C-3241
D4CC-3002
3m
D4C-1241
D4CC-4041
3m
Roller plunger
D4C-3231
D4CC-3041
3m
D4C-1231
D4CC-4031
3m
Plunger with M14 mounting
D4C-3201
D4CC-3031
3m
D4C-1201
D4CC-4001
3m
Sealed plunger
D4CC-3001
D4C-3250
See specifications for details on max. current per rated voltage and load type. Micro load models with 5mW to 0.8W are available. For ordering refer to complete datasheet.
Pre-wired models with 30 cm PVC cable and M12 plug (pigtail) are available. Contact your OMRON representative.
292
D4C
Limit switches
Specifications
Voltage and current rating
D4C-1@@@
Rated
voltage
Rated
current*1
Non-inductive load
Resistive load
Inductive load
Lamp load
Inductive load
Inrush current
Motor load
NC
NO
NC
NO
NC
NO
NC
NO
NC
NO
5A
5A
1.5 A
0.7 A
3A
3A
2.5 A
1.3 A
5A
5A
1A
0.5 A
2A
2A
1.5 A
0.8 A
20 A
max.
10 A
max.
8 VDC
5A
5A
2A
2A
5A
4A
3A
3A
14 VDC
5A
5A
2A
2A
4A
4A
3A
3A
125 VAC
250 VAC
30 VDC
2A
4A
4A
2A
2A
3A
3A
3A
3A
125 VDC
2A
0.4 A
0.4 A
0.05 A
0.05 A
0.4 A
0.4 A
0.05 A
0.05 A
250 VDC
0.2 A
0.2 A
0.03 A
0.03 A
0.2 A
0.2 A
0.03 A
0.03 A
D4C-3@@@
30 VDC
2A
4A
4A
2A
2A
3A
3A
3A
3A
D4CC-3@@@
D4CC-4@@@
30 VDC
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
D4C-6@@@
30 VDC
0.1 A
0.1 A
0.1 A
*1
Applicable load range

(5 to 30 VDC)
0.8 W to 60 W
0.8 W to 60 W
5 A max. 2.5 A
max
0.8 W to 30 W
20 A
max.
5 mW to 0.8 W
10 A
max.
Model
For D4C- cable types these ratings are certified by TV Rheinland according to EN60947-5-1 (file no R9451333).
Item
D4C-_ (cable types)
Durability*1
Mechanical
10,000,000 operations min
Electrical
200,000 operations min
Operating frequency
Mechanical
120 operations/min
Electrical
30 operations/min
LED indicator
Ambient temperature
*1
*2
D4CC-_ (connector types)
D4C-3_, D4C-6_, D4CC-4_: Operation indicator (red)

Operation indicator turns OFF when the switch operates.*2
Operating
10 to 70C (with no icing)

IEC 60529: IP67
Values are acquired at 5 to 35C operating temperature, 40% to 70% operating humidity.
Models where operation indicator turns ON when the switch operates are available by adding -B to the order code. Contact your OMRON representative for availability.
293
ZC
Limit switches
Limit switch in compact metal housing
with terminal block
The compact housing size and the terminal block with side facing cable exit allow the
mounting where space is crucial and self-wiring connection is preferred. The rugged
and tight housing construction provides high protection while the low-force actuators
make the ZC limit switch ideal for switching smaller or lighter objects.
Terminal block for self-wiring with side facing cable exit
Low-force actuators for switching smaller or lighter objects
Rugged metal housing with IP67 protection
Actuator type
Connection method
Plunger
*1
Terminal block with side facing ZC-D55

cable exit (left/right changeable) for cables dia 8.5 to
10.5 mm*1
ZC-Q55
Sealed roller plunger
ZC-N2255
Roller plunger with M14 mounting
ZC-Q2255
Sealed cross roller plunger
ZC-N2155
Cross roller plunger with M14 mounting
ZC-Q2155
Hinge lever 50R
ZC-W55
Hinge lever 70R
ZC-W155
Hinge roller lever 50R
ZC-W255
Hinge roller lever 70R
ZC-W2155
Models with M20 conduit or other connection variations are available. Refer to OPTIONAL FEATURES in complete datasheet for details.
294
Order code
ZC
Limit switches
Specifications
Voltage and current rating
Model
Standard type
Rated voltage
Non-inductive load
125 VAC
Inductive load
Resistive load
Lamp load
NC and NO
NC
10
Inrush current
Inductive load
Motor load
NO
NC
NC
NO
NC
NO
1.5
10
2.5
30 A
15 A
1.5
2.5
2.5
1.5
250 VAC
2.5
1.25
8 VDC
1.5
NO
14 VDC
High current at high VDC

switching type*1
30 VDC
125 VDC
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.05
250 VDC
0.25
0.2
0.2
0.03
8 VDC
10
1.5
10
1.5
0.75
14 VDC
125 VDC
250 VDC
*1
7.5
1.5
30 VDC
Refer to OPTIONAL FEATURES in complete datasheet for details.
Durability
Operating speed
Operating frequency
Mechanical
10.000.000 operations min
Electrical
500.000 operations min
Plunger
0.05 mm/s to 0.5 m/s
Mechanical
120 operations/min
Electrical
20 operations/min
100 M min (at 500VDC)
Contact resistance (initial)
15 m max
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between non-continuous terminals

2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between each terminal and non-current-carrying metal part
Malfunction
10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude
Shock resistance
Destruction
1,000 m/s min
Malfunction
300 m/s min
Ambient temperature
Operating
Ambient humidity
Operating
35% to 95% RH
IEC 60529: IP67
Additional specifications after EN60947-5-1 (TV Rheinland File No J50041904)

Category
AC-12 10A/250 VAC
Rated insulation voltage
1,000 VAC
Short circuit protective device
10A fuse type gG (IEC60269)
Protection against electrical shock
Class II
Operating characteristics
Values for OF and RF are in N and values for PT, OT, MD and OP are in mm unless otherwise specified.
ZC-N2@
ZC-W1@
Operating force (OF)
11.8
ZC-D@
ZC-Q2@
ZC-Q5@
6.86
2.75
ZC-W21@
3.92
ZC-W25@
Release force (RF)
4.9
1.67
0.59
0.78
Pre-travel (PT)
1.5
Overtravel (OT)
2.4
Movement differential (MD)
0.2
Operating Position (OP)
32.40.8
ZC-W5@
3
47.40.8
2.5
38.20.8
47.40.8
8.4
1.4
28.51.2
43.01.2
28.51.2
295
Limit switches
Limit switch with basic plastic housing
The Z series of basic switches in plastic housing provide the same electrical and
mechanical switching capability and lifetime as standard limit switches. But with
the basic plastic housing the basic switches are an ideal solution with best value for
money for uncritical environments or when separately encased in subassemblies.
Cost efficient basic plastic housing for subassemblies
Same electrical and mechanical switching ratings as standard limit switches
Actuator type*1
*1
*2
Order code*2
Solder terminal
Screw terminal
Pin plunger
Z-15G
Z-15G-B
Short spring plunger
Z-15GD
Z-15GD-B
Leaf spring
Z-15GL
Z-15GL-B
Reverse hinge lever
Z-15GM
Z-15GM-B
Reverse hinge roller lever
Z-15GM2
Z-15GM2-B
Z-15GQ
Z-15GQ-B
Hinge lever
Z-15GW
Z-15GW-B
Hinge roller lever
Z-15GW2
Z-15GW2-B
Other actuator types are available. For the full range refer to the complete datasheet.
Contacts are directly accessible. Additional protective measures are required e.g. order covers from accessories.
Specifications
Rated voltage
Non-inductive load
Inductive load
Resistive load
NC
Lamp load
NO
Inductive load
NC
NO
NC
Motor load
NO
NC
NO
125 VAC
15 A
3A
1.5 A
15 A
5A
2.5 A
250 VAC
15 A
2.5 A
1.25 A
15 A
3A
1.5 A
8 VDC
15 A
3A
1.5 A
15 A
5A
2.5 A
14 VDC
15 A
3A
1.5 A
10 A
5A
2.5 A
30 VDC
6A
3A
1.5 A
5A
5A
2.5 A
125 VDC
0.5 A*1
0.5 A
0.5 A
0.05 A
0.05 A
0.05 A
*1
For switching high currents at high voltages (e.g. 10A at 125VDC) contact your OMRON representative.
Durability
Mechanical
Electrical
500,000 operations min.
Operating speed
Plunger
0.01 mm to 1 m/s
Operating frequency
Mechanical
240 operations/min
Ambient temperature
296
Electrical
20 operations/min
Operating

IP00
Limit switches
Accessories
Terminal covers (protection of electrical contacts against accidental contact of e. g. fingers)
Type
Material
Order code
AP-A
AP-B
AP1-A
AP1-B
Cover with bottom cable exit
AP-Z
for soldering terminal models for screw terminal models

Cover with 5 thinner parts (plastic type) or holes (metal type) as plastic
cable exit positions. Protective cover is fixed to basic switch
metal
with mounting screws of basic switch.
297
Rotary encoders
ACCURACY AND ROBUSTNESS MADE RELIABLE
Close the loop angle, position and velocity on hand
Rotary encoders create information which represent the movement of your application.
To meet challenging demands, Omron offers a wide range of absolute and incremental
encoders.
Wide resolution variety
Models with rugged housing
Models for multi- turn applications
Incremental
298
Small diameter
Standard
Rugged housing
Hollow shaft
E6A2-C
E6B2-C
E6C2-C
E6C3-C
E6F-C
E6H-C
F525, F526
Page 302
F527
Page 303
F529
Page 303
M429
Page 304
Rotary encoders
Rotary encoders
Absolute
Standard
Rugged housing
E6C3-A
E6F-A
F522
Page 305
F524
Page 305
299
300
Selection table
Rotary encoders
Output
Incremental
Model
E6A2-C
Type
Small diameter shaft
E6B2-C
E6C2-C
E6C3-C
Standard
E6F-C
Rugged housing
Resolution
range
Min.
10
Max.
500
2,000
3,600
1,000
Output
NPN
PNP
25
40
50
50
60
10
30
50
80
120
Size dia. in mm
100
Max.
force
Radial
Axial
20
30
50
50
IP
rating
IP50
IP64
IP65
Max. rotation frequency
5,000
6,000
Page/Quick Link
302
Output
Incremental
Absolute
Model
E6H-C
E6C3-A
E6F-A
Type
Hollow shaft
Standard
Rugged housing
256
5,000
Rotary encoders
303
Resolution
Range
Min.
300
Max.
3,600
1,024
Output
NPN
PNP
40 (hollow)
50
60
120
Size dia. in mm
Max.
force
Radial
29.4
80
Axial
4.9
50
50
IP
rating
IP50
IP64
IP65
5,000
Max. rotation frequency
10,000
5,000
Page/Quick Link
304
305
Standard
Available
No/not available
301
E6A2-C
Rotary encoders
Incremental rotary encoder in miniature housing
The E6A family of rotary encoders features a small sized dia. 25 mm housing.
Small sized dia. 25 mm housing
Size dia. in mm
Output phase
Output form
Resolution (pulse/rotation)
Order code
25
5 to 12 VDC
NPN voltage output
10, 20, 60, 100, 200, 300, 360, 500
E6A2-CS3E
NPN open collector
10, 20, 60, 100, 200, 300, 360, 500
E6A2-CS3C
NPN voltage output
100, 200, 360, 500
E6A2-CW3E
NPN open collector
100, 200, 360, 500
E6A2-CW3C
NPN voltage output
100, 200, 360, 500
E6A2-CWZ3E
NPN open collector
100, 200, 360, 500
E6A2-CWZ3C
E6A2-CS5C
12 to 24VDC
A, B
5 to 12 VDC
E6A2-CW5C
12 to 24VDC
A, B, Z
5 to 12 VDC
E6A2-CWZ5C
12 to 24VDC
E6B2-C
Incremental rotary encoder in compact housing
The E6B family of incremental rotary encoders features a housing size dia. 40 mm.
Line driver output models available
Size dia. in mm
Output form
40
5 to 24 VDC
NPN open collector output
10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 100, 200, 300, 360, 400, 500, 600, 720, 800, 1,000, E6B2-CWZ6C
1,024, 1,200, 1,500 1,800, 2,000
302
Order code
12 to 24VDC
PNP open collector output
100, 200, 360, 500, 600, 1,000, 2,000
5 to 12 VDC
NPN voltage output
10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 100, 200, 300, 360, 400, 500, 600, 1,000, 1,200, 1,500 E6B2-CWZ3E
1,800, 2,000
5 VDC
Line driver output
10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 100, 200, 300, 360, 400, 500, 600, 1,000, 1,024,
1,200, 1,500 1,800, 2,000
E6B2-CWZ5B
E6B2-CWZ1X
E6C2-C/E6C3-C
Rotary encoders
Incremental rotary encoder with enhanced water
resistant
The E6C family of dia. 50 mm incremental rotary encoders features an improved water
resistance compared to standard models.
IP64f or IP65f drip-proof, oil-proof construction
Size dia. in mm Power supply voltage
Output form
50
10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 100, 200, 300, 360, 400, 500, E6C2-CWZ6C
600, 720, 800, 1,000, 1,024, 1,200, 1,500, 1,800, 2,000
12 to 24VDC
100, 200, 360, 500, 600, 1,000, 2,000
5 to 12 VDC
NPN voltage output
10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 100, 200, 300, 360, 400, 500, E6C2-CWZ3E
600, 720, 800, 1,000, 1,024, 1,200, 1,500, 1,800, 2,000
5 VDC
Line driver output
10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 100, 200, 300, 360, 400, 500, E6C2-CWZ1X
600, 720, 800, 1,000, 1,024, 1,200, 1,500, 1,800, 2,000
12 to 24VDC
Complimentary output
100, 200, 300, 360, 500, 600, 720, 800, 1,000, 1,024, E6C3-CWZ5GH
1,200, 1,500, 1,800, 2,000, 2,048, 2,500, 3,600
5 to 12 VDC
NPN voltage output
100, 200, 300, 360, 500, 600, 720, 800, 1,000, 1,024, E6C3-CWZ3EH
1,200, 1,500, 1,800, 2,000, 2,048, 2,500, 3,600
5 to 12 VDC
Line driver output
100, 200, 300, 360, 500, 600, 720, 800, 1,000, 1,024, E6C3-CWZ3XH
1,200, 1,500, 1,800, 2,000, 2,048, 2,500, 3,600
8 dia. tough model
5 to 24 VDC
Order code
E6C2-CWZ5B
Rotary encoders
Standard models
E6F-C
Incremental rotary encoder in rugged housing
The E6F family of dia. 60 mm rotary encoders features a rugged housing.
Strong shaft for max 120 N in radial direction and max 50 N in thrust direction)
Water- and oil-proof structure (IP65f)
Size dia. in mm
Output form
Order code
60
12 to 24VDC
Complimentary output
100, 200, 360, 500, 600, 1000
E6F-CWZ5G
303
E6H-C
Rotary encoders
Incremental rotary encoder with hollow shaft
The E6H family of incremental encoders features a dia. 40 mm housing with hollow
shaft.
Wide operating voltage range from 5 to 24 VDC
Line drive output available (100 m max.)
Size dia. in mm
Output form
Order code
40
5 to 24 VDC
Open collector output
300, 360, 500, 600, 720, 800, 1,000, 1,024, 1,200, 1,500, 1,800, 2,000,
2,048, 2,500, 3,600
E6H-CWZ6C
5 to 12 VDC
Voltage output
300, 360, 500, 600, 720, 800, 1,000, 1,024, 1,200, 1,500, 1,800, 2,000,
2,048, 2,500, 3,600
E6H-CWZ3E
5 to 12 VDC
Line drive output
300, 360, 500, 600, 720, 800, 1,000, 1,024, 1,200, 1,500, 1,800, 2,000,
2,048, 2,500, 3,600
E6H-CWZ3X
304
E6C3-A
Rotary encoders
Absolute rotary encoder with enhanced water resistance
The E6C family of dia. 50 mm incremental rotary encoders features an improved water
resistance compared to standard models.
IP65f drip-proof, oil-proof construction
Size dia. in mm
Output form
Output code
50
12 to 24VDC
Gray code
5 VDC
NPN voltage output
Resolution
(pulse/rotation)
Connection method
Order code
256, 360
Connector type
E6C3-AG5C-C
256, 360, 720, 1,024
Pre-wired type
E6C3-AG5C
Binary
32, 40
E6C3-AN5C
BCD
6, 8, 12
E6C3-AB5C
Gray code
256, 360, 720, 1,024
E6C3-AG5B
Binary
32, 40
E6C3-AN5B
BCD
6, 8, 12
E6C3-AB5B
Binary
256
E6C3-AN1E
Rotary encoders
E6C3-AN2E
12 VDC
E6F-A
Absolute rotary encoder in rugged housing
The E6F family of dia. 60 mm rotary encoders features a rugged housing.
Stronger shaft and higher durability (120 N in radial direction and 50 N
in thrust direction) than previous E6F Encoders
Drip-proof construction meets IP64F standards
High-resolution models (1024 pulses max. per revolution)
Faster response for high-speed control applications (grey code: 20 kHz)
Size dia. in mm
Output form
Output code
Resolution
(pulses/revolution)
Connection method
Order code
60
12 to 24 VDC
NPN open collector
BCD
360
Pre-wired
E6F-AB5C
Connector type*1
E6F-AB5C-C
PNP open collector

*1
Gray code
256, 360, 720, 1,024
Pre-wired
E6F-AG5C
BCD
360
Pre-wired
E6F-AB5B
Gray code
256, 360, 720, 1,024
Pre-wired
E6F-AG5B
For extension cables order E69-DF5 (5M) or E69-DF10 (10M).
305
Cable connectors
Size
Shape
Type
Features
Material
Nut
M8
PRO
3 pin
Brass (CuZn)
4pin
LITE
3 pin
Brass (CuZn)
Order code
Cable
PVC 2 m
XS3F-M8PVC3S2M-EU
XS3F-M8PVC3A2M-EU
PUR 2 m
XS3F-M8PUR3S2M-EU
XS3F-M8PUR3A2M-EU
PVC 2 m
XS3F-M8PVC4S2M-EU
XS3F-M8PVC4A2M-EU
PUR 2 m
XS3F-M8PUR4S2M-EU
XS3F-M8PUR4A2M-EU
PVC 2 m
XS3F-LM8PVC3S2M
XS3F-LM8PVC3A2M
XS3F-LM8PVC4S2M
XS3F-LM8PVC4A2M
4 pin
PROplus
Detergent resistant
Wash-down
4 pin
Stainless steel PP*1 2 m

(SUS316L)
Y92E-S08PP4S 2M
Y92E-S08PP4A 2M
PROplus
Robotic (drag chain)
4 pin
Brass (CuZn)
Robotic PVC 2 m
XS3F-M421-402-R
XS3F-M422-402-R
Robotic PUR 2 m
Y92E-M08PUR4S2M-L
Y92E-M08PUR4A2M-L
High robotic PUR 2 m Y92E-M08PUR4S2M-R
Y92E-M08PUR4A2M-R
High robotic
(drag chain & torsion)
M12
PRO
3 wire
Brass (CuZn)
4 wire
5 wire
LITE
3 wire
Brass (CuZn)
PVC 2 m
XS2F-M12PVC3S2M-EU
XS2F-M12PVC3A2M-EU
PUR 2 m
XS2F-M12PUR3S2M-EU
XS2F-M12PUR3A2M-EU
PVC 2 m
XS2F-M12PVC4S2M-EU
XS2F-M12PVC4A2M-EU
PUR 2 m
XS2F-M12PUR4S2M-EU
XS2F-M12PUR4A2M-EU
PVC 2 m
XS2F-M12PVC5S2M-EU
XS2F-M12PVC5A2M-EU
PUR 2 m
XS2F-M12PUR5S2M-EU
XS2F-M12PUR5A2M-EU
PVC 2 m
XS2F-LM12PVC3S2M
XS2F-LM12PVC3A2M
XS2F-LM12PVC4S2M
XS2F-LM12PVC4A2M
XS2F-M12PVC3A2MPLED
XS2F-M12PVC4A2MPLED
XS2F-M12PUR3A2MPLED
XS2F-M12PUR4A2MPLED
4 wire
PROplus
LED (power and output
LED, PNP)
3 wire
4 wire
Nickel plated
brass
3 wire
PVC 2 m
PUR 2 m
4 wire
PROplus
Detergent resistant
Wash-down
4 wire
Stainless steel PP*1 2 m

(SUS316L)
Y92E-S12PP4S 2M
Y92E-S12PP4A 2M
PROplus
105C
Heat resistant
4 wire
Stainless steel Heat resistant PVC

(SUS316L)
2m
XS2F-E421-D80-E
XS2F-E422-D80-E
Twist & click
4 wire
Nickel plated
Zinc
PVC 2 m
XS5F-D421-D80-F
XS5F-D422-D80-F
PUR 2 m
XS5F-D421-D80-P
XS5F-D422-D80-P
Robotic PVC 2 m
XS2F-D421-D80-F
XS2F-D422-D80-F
Robotic PUR 2 m
Y92E-M12PUR4S2M-L
Y92E-M12PUR4A2M-L
High grade robotic Y92E-M12PUR4S2M-R

PUR 2 m
Y92E-M12PUR4A2M-R
PROplus
Robotic (drag chain)
4 wire
Brass (CuZn)
High robotic
(drag chain & torsion)
Fiber amplifier (E3X)

connector
8 pin
8 wire shielded ca- Brass (CuZn)

ble
Shielded PUR 2m
Y92E-M12PURSH8S2M-L
Special fiber
connector - 4 wire
PBT
PVC 2 m
E3X-CN21
Special fiber
connector +
M8 plug
Plug:
Zinc diecast
PVC 30 cm with M8 E3X-CN21-M3J-2 0.3M

4-pin plug
Special fiber
connector +
M12 plug
*1
PP - polypropylene
306
PVC 30 cm with M12 E3X-CN21-M1J 0.3M

4-pin plug
Cable connectors
Size
M12
Shape
Type
Features
IDC (Insulation Displace- Fast and easy IDC

ment Contact)
pressure-welded
assembly
Material
Order code
Nut
Cable
Brass
n.a.
XS5G-D418
XS5C-D418
n.a.
XS2G, XS2C
Y92E_conf
One connector for

cable diameters of
3 mm to 8 mm
IP 67 for waterproof
connection
M8/M12
Confection-able
Plugs and connec- Brass

tors for self assembly
M12
Field I/0 boxes
Direct wiring or
DeviceNet
communi-cation
M8/M12
T-connectors, covers, ac- n.a.

cessories and extended
wiring portfolio
XW3B, DRT2
XS2R, XS3R, XY2F,
Cable connectors
Smartclick
connection
307
S5
NS5
Handheld
38
e 69
N539
Page 70

308
Quick Link

Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Inspection systems
FQ2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
FQ-M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Xpectia FH/FZ5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
FlexXpect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Ident systems
V400-H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
FQ-CR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
FQ-CR1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
FQ2-CH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
FQ2-S4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
RFID systems
RFID system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Measurement sensors
Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Laser displacement sensor
ZX1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
ZX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
ZS-HL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
ZX-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Confocal fiber sensor
ZW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Inductive displacement sensor
ZX-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Contact displacement sensor
ZX-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Profile sensor
ZG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Laser micrometer
ZX-GT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
309
Content

EASY VISION: TOUCH, COMMUNICATE AND GO
Built-in LCD monitor for setup and immediate image visualization
The easy vision sensor FQ2 solves the applications by an intuitive teach & go procedure. For advanced
applications features such as multiple inspections, position correction, intelligent image filtering and
ethernet communication are offered by the Xpectia lite. The high end is addressed by the Xpectia FJ.
Easy vision intuitive user interfaces
Communication centralized set-up & inspection via Ethernet
High-end vision PC-based system for challenging applications
True color close to human eye identification and image processing
Inspection systems
Easy vision
sensors
FQ2
Pick & Place

sensors
Vision systems
Smart camera
Powerful
customizable
vision system
Compact
vision system
Powerful
customizable
vision system
FQ-M
Xpectia FH
Xpectia FZ5/lite
Xpectia FH
G632, G633, G634, G635, G636

Page 348
Accessories
G453
Page 315
310
G455
Page 325
G639
Page 333
G638
Page 333
G639
Page 333
G459
Ident systems
Datamatrix
Barcode &
Datamatrix
Code verification
Inspection,
Barcode &
Datamatrix,
Code verification
RFID
V400-H
FQ-CR2
FQ-CR1
FQ2-CH
FQ2-S4
V680/V680S
D322
G462
G524
G463
G464
D526
Page 358
311
Selection table
Model
Selection criteria
Features
Vision systems
FQ2
FQ-M
Xpectia FH
Xpectia FZ5/Lite
Smart camera
Smart camera
Camera type
Monochrome/Color
Color
Digital color or
black & white
Digital color or
black & white
Digital color or
black & white
Resolution (usable)
Display dots
752 480
928 828
1,280 1,024
752 480
from 640 480 to

2,040 2,048
from 640 480 to

2,488 2,044
from 640 480 to

2,040 2,048
Min.
Depends on selected lens
Max.
970
Min.
7.5 4.7
Max.
300 268
Field of view
Communication
Pick & Place
Number of connectable cameras
Working distance mm
312
Vision sensor
Xpectia FH
Number of storable configurations 32
32
Number of tools/configuration
32
32
limited only by
memory space
limited only by
memory space
limited only by
memory space
IP-Rating camera head
IP67
IP40
Depends on setup & tools,

IP20

IP20

IP20
Supply voltage
24 VDC
24 VDC
Image processing tools
Search, shape search II,

Contour based search,
sensitive search, area, color labelling, edge position
data, edge position, edge
pitch, edge width, labeling,
FQ2-S4 has additional: OCR,
Bar code, 2D-code, 2D-code
(DMP) and Model dictionary
The types of characters and
codes to be read are the
same as those of FQ2-CH
and FQ-CR1 & FQ-CR2
App. 70 processing tools for

object or defect recognition,
measurements, calculations, input/output, display
and more. Includes also
character recognition and
high precision edge code
inspection tools

inspection tools

inspection tools
Image preprocessing
High dynamic range (HDR), High dynamic range (HDR), Smoothing, edge enhancepolarizing filter (attachwhite balance
ment, edge extraction,
ment), and white balance
erosion, dilation, median,
background suppression multiple passes, configurable
Smoothing, edge enhancement, edge extraction,

Smoothing, edge enhancement, edge extraction,

Flow programming
User interface
PC-Tool or Touch Display
Optional PC configuration software Yes
Yes
Security tools
RS-232C
Optional via FQ-SDU2
USB
Ethernet
Yes
EtherCAT
Yes
Yes
Yes
Number of digital I/O
7 in/3 out
9 in/5 out
19 in/34 out
11 in/26 out
19 in/34 out
Page/Quick Link
315
325
333
333
333
Model
FQ-CR1
FQ-CR2
FQ2-CH
FQ2-S4
V400-H
Number of connectable cameras
Smart camera
Smart camera
Smart camera
Smart camera
Camera type
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome/Color
Digital black & white
Resolution (usable)
Display dots
752 480
752 480
752 480
752 480
928 828
1,280 1,024
Working distance mm
Min.
40 mm
Max.
970
970
970
970
40 mm
Min.
7.5 4.7
7.5 4.7
7.5 4.7
7.5 4.7
5 5 mm
Max.
300 191
300 191
300 191
300 268
30 30 mm
Number of storable configurations 32
32
32
32
limited by SD card
Number of tools/configuration
32
32
32
32
IP-Rating camera head
IP67
IP67
IP67
IP67
IP64
Supply voltage
24 VDC
24 VDC
Image processing tools
2D-codes:
2D-codes:
Data Matrix, QR Code,
Data Matrix, QR Code
Micro QR Code, PDF417,
Micro PDF417, GS1-Data
Matrix
Bar codes:
JAN/EAN/UPC, Code39,
Codabar (NW-7),
IFT (interleaved2 of 5),
Code93, Code128/GS1-128,
GS1-DataBar, GS1-128
Composite Code,
Pharmacode
Image preprocessing
High dynamic range (HDR), High dynamic range (HDR), High dynamic range (HDR), High dynamic range (HDR),
polarizing filter (attachpolarizing filter (attachpolarizing filter (attachpolarizing filter (attachment), and white balance ment), and white balance ment), and white balance ment), and white balance
Communication
Features
Selection criteria
Field of view
24 VDC
24 VDC
5 VDC
OCR
- Alphabet A to Z
- Number 0 to 9
- Symbol '-. : /
Model dictionary
Search, shape search II,

sensitive search, area, color
data, edge position, edge
pitch, edge width, labeling,
OCR, Bar code, 2D-code,
2D-code (DMP) and Model
dictionary
The types of characters and
codes to be read are the
same as those of FQ2-CH
and FQ-CR1 & FQ-CR2
Data Matrix, ECC200,

1010 to 6464,
818 to 1648,
QR Code (Models 1, 2),
2121 to 5757
(Versions 1 to 10).
Flow programming
User interface
Optional PC configuration software Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Security tools
RS-232C
USB
Ethernet
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
EtherCAT
Number of digital I/O
7 in/3 out
7 in/3 out
7 in/3 out
7 in/3 out
Page/Quick Link
G524
G462
G463
G464
D322
Standard
Code reader
No/not available
313
314
FQ2
Inspection systems
The new standard in image inspection and code
verification
The FQ2 vision sensor family is set to redefine the vision sensor market, providing
advanced inspection, code reading and verification only previously available in higher
end vision systems. With over 100 camera options, the FQ2 provides users with the
ultimate flexibility to solve applications, whether you need high resolution, code
reading, integrated lighting, or a cost effective solution to solve a simple application,
there is an FQ2 which fits your needs.
Powerful functionality with versatile line-up
All-in-one-housing
Easy searching with Shape Search II
Direct Part Marked (DPM)
Unique OCR technology
Code verification
System Configuration
Up to 32 Sensors can be set up and monitored from a single Touch Finder or PC Tool.
Various types of Sensors can be used at the same time.
However, I/O type and wiring method vary depending on the Sensor, so select the necessary devices.
Sensors (32 max.)*
FQ2-S1/S2/S3/S4/CH,FQ-CR1/CR2
Touch Finder FQ2-D
or PC Tool
Switching Hub
W4S1
Special Ethernet Cable
FQ-WN
Standard Ethernet Cable

RJ-45 of the FCC regulations
*The Setup Tool can connect to up to 32 Sensors and it can display up to eight Sensors at the same time.
Note: If you register as a member after purchasing a Sensor, you can download free setup software that runs on a PC and can be used in place of Touch Finder.
Refer to the member registration sheet for details.
Ethernet (EtherNet/IP, No-protocol, or PLC Link) Connection

FQ2-S1
FQ2-S2
FQ2-S3
FQ2-S4
FQ2-CH
FQ-CR1
Touch Finder
FQ2-D
or PC Tool
FQ-CR2
Control PLC
Switching Hub
W4S1
Standard Ethernet Cable*
Standard
Ethernet Cable*
Trigger sensor
I/O control PLC
Sensor
FQ2-S1/S2/S3/S4/CH, FQ-CR1/CR2
DC24V
FQ
Ethernet Cable
FQ-WN
I/O Cable
FQ-WD
FL-STC
Lighting Controller
FL-series
External Lighting
DC24V
* RJ-45 of the FCC regulations
Parallel Interface Connection

Connection with Standard
Parallel Interface of the
Sensor
FQ2-S1
FQ2-S2
FQ2-S3
FQ2-S4
FQ2-CH
FQ-CR1
Touch Finder
FQ2-D
or PC Tool
Sensor
FQ2-S1/S2/S3/S4/CH,FQ-CR1/CR2
FQ
Ethernet Cable
FQ-WN
Trigger sensor
I/O Cable
FQ-WD
FL-STC
Lighting Controller
DC24V
FQ-CR2
Sensor control PLC

I/O control PLC
FL-series
External Lighting
DC24V
Connection through a
Parallel Interface Sensor
Data Unit
FQ2-S1
FQ2-S2
FQ2-S3
FQ2-S4
FQ2-CH
FQ-CR1
FQ-CR2
Touch Finder
FQ2-D
or PC Tool
Parallel Interface
Sensor Data Unit
FQ-SDU1
Sensor
FQ2-S3/S4/CH
FQ
Ethernet Cable
FQ-WN
DC24V
Sensor Data
Unit Cable
FQ-WU
Parallel Cable
for FQ-SDU1
FQ-VP1
x 2 cables
Trigger sensor
FL-STC
Lighting Controller
Sensor control PLC

I/O control PLC
FL-series
External Lighting
DC24V
315
FQ2
Inspection systems
RS-232C Serial Connection
FQ2-S1
Touch Finder
FQ2-D
or PC Tool
FQ2-S2
FQ2-S3
FQ2-S4
FQ2-CH
FQ-CR1
Sensor
FQ2-S3/S4/CH
RS-232C Interface
Sensor Data Unit
FQ-SDU2
Parallel Cable for
FQ-SDU2
FQ-VP2 x 2 cables
FQ-CR2
FQ
Ethernet Cable
FQ-WN
Sensor Data
Unit Cable
FQ-WU
Trigger sensor
Sensor control PLC

I/O control PLC
RS-232C Cable
XW2Z- @00S-V
DC24V
FL-STC
Lighting Controller
FL-series
External Lighting
Model compatible with

communications interface
Compatible
Sensor control PLC
Not compatible
DC24V
Sensor
Inspection model
FQ2-S1 Series [Single-function Type]
Field of vision
Narrow View
Number of pixels
350,000 pixels
Color
Standard View
Wide View (Long-distance)
Wide View (Short-distance)
NPN
FQ2-S10010F
FQ2-S10050F
FQ2-S10100F
FQ2-S10100N
PNP
FQ2-S15010F
FQ2-S15050F
FQ2-S15100F
FQ2-S15100N
Field of vision/Installation distance Refer to Figure 1 on page 317. Refer to Figure 2 on page 317. Refer to Figure 3 on page 317. Refer to Figure 4 on page 317.
FQ2-S2 Series [Standard Type]
Field of vision
Narrow View
Number of pixels
350,000 pixels
Color
Standard View
NPN
FQ2-S20010F
FQ2-S20050F
FQ2-S20100F
FQ2-S20100N
PNP
FQ2-S25010F
FQ2-S25050F
FQ2-S25100F
FQ2-S25100N
FQ2-S3 Series [High-resolution Type]
Field of vision
Narrow View
Number of pixels
760,000 pixels
Color
Monochrome
Standard View
Wide View (Short-distance) C-mount

1.3 million pixels
NPN
FQ2-S30010F-08
FQ2-S30050F-08
FQ2-S30100F-08
FQ2-S30100N-08
FQ2-S30-13
PNP
FQ2-S35010F-08
FQ2-S35050F-08
FQ2-S350100F-08
FQ2-S35100N-08
FQ2-S35-13
NPN
FQ2-S30010F-08M
FQ2-S30050F-08M
FQ2-S30100F-08M
FQ2-S30100N-08M
FQ2-S30-13M
PNP
FQ2-S35010F-08M
FQ2-S35050F-08M
FQ2-S35100F-08M
FQ2-S35100N-08M
FQ2-S35-13M
Field of vision/Installation distance Refer to Figure 5 on page 317. Refer to Figure 6 on page 317. Refer to Figure 7 on page 317. Refer to Figure 8 on page 317. Refer to optical chart on p. 318
Inspection/ID model
FQ2-S4 Series [Standard Type]
Field of vision
Narrow View
Number of pixels
350,000 pixels
Color
Monochrome
Standard View
NPN
FQ2-S40010F
FQ2-S40050F
FQ2-S40100F
FQ2-S40100N
PNP
FQ2-S45010F
FQ2-S45050F
FQ2-S45100F
FQ2-S45100N
NPN
FQ2-S40010F-M
FQ2-S40050F-M
FQ2-S40100F-M
FQ2-S40100N-M
PNP
FQ2-S45010F-M
FQ2-S45050F-M
FQ2-S45100F-M
FQ2-S45100N-M
[High-resolution Type]
Field of vision
Narrow View
Number of pixels
760,000 pixels
Color
Monochrome
Standard View
Wide View (Short-distance) C-mount

1.3 million pixels
NPN
FQ2-S40010F-08
FQ2-S40050F-08
FQ2-S40100F-08
FQ2-S40100N-08
FQ2-S40-13
PNP
FQ2-S45010F-08
FQ2-S45050F-08
FQ2-S45100F-08
FQ2-S45100N-08
FQ2-S45-13
NPN
FQ2-S40010F-08M
FQ2-S40050F-08M
FQ2-S40100F-08M
FQ2-S40100N-08M
FQ2-S40-13M
PNP
FQ2-S45010F-08M
FQ2-S45050F-08M
FQ2-S45100F-08M
FQ2-S45100N-08M
FQ2-S45-13M
Field of vision/Installation distance Refer to Figure 5 on page 317. Refer to Figure 6 on page 317. Refer to Figure 7 on page 317. Refer to Figure 8 on page 317. Refer to optical chart on p. 318
316
FQ2
Inspection systems
ID Model
FQ2-CH Series [Optical Character Recognition Sensor]
Field of vision
Narrow View
Number of pixels
350,000 pixels
Monochrome
Standard View
NPN
FQ2-CH10010F-M
FQ2-CH10050F-M
FQ2-CH10100F-M
FQ2-CH10100N-M
PNP
FQ2-CH15010F-M
FQ2-CH15050F-M
FQ2-CH15100F-M
FQ2-CH15100N-M
FQ-CR1 Series [Multi Code Reader]
Field of vision
Narrow View
Number of pixels
350,000 pixels
Monochrome
Standard View
NPN
FQ-CR10010F-M
FQ-CR10050F-M
FQ-CR10100F-M
FQ-CR10100N-M
PNP
FQ-CR15010F-M
FQ-CR15050F-M
FQ-CR15100F-M
FQ-CR15100N-M
FQ-CR2 Series [2D Code Reader]
Field of vision
Narrow View
Number of pixels
350,000 pixels
Monochrome
Standard View
NPN
FQ-CR20010F-M
FQ-CR20050F-M
FQ-CR20100F-M
FQ-CR20100N-M
PNP
FQ-CR25010F-M
FQ-CR25050F-M
FQ-CR25100F-M
FQ-CR25100N-M
Field of vision/Installation distance

Field of vision
(Unit: mm)
Narrow View
Standard View
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 3
Figure 4
350,000 pixels type
38
57 4.7
8.2
7.5
Field of
vision
13
32
220
56
8.2
13
33
33
53
18 29
53
Field of
vision
Field of
vision
215
Appearance
Field of
vision
380
970
191
760,000 pixels type
Figure 5
Figure 6
Figure 7
Figure 8
38
57 6.7
11.6
Field of
vision
13
32
220
56
7.5
11.6
215
47.3
13
47.3
Field of
vision
53
300
240
153
25.9
53
Field of
vision
29
Field of
vision
380
970
268
214
300
240
317
FQ2
Inspection systems
Optical Chart for C-mount Camera FQ2-S3@-13@/-S4@-13@

High-resolution, Low-distortion Lenses 3Z4S-LE SV-@@@@H
10000
Meaning of Optical Chart

The X axis of the optical chart shows the field of
vision (mm) (See Note.), and the Y axis of the optical chart shows the camera installation distance (mm).
3Z4S-LE
SV-0614H
t0
SV-0814H
t0 t0
Camera installation distance (mm)
t5
1000
t50 t40
t30
t25 t20
t50 t40
t15 t10
t15
t5
SV-1614H
Note: The lengths of the fields of vision given

in the optical charts are the lengths of
the Y axis.
SV-2514H
SV-3514H
t0
t0
t0
t0
t10
t5
t25 t20
t30 t15 t10
t5
t2
t50 t40 t30 t25 t20
t10
t15
t1
t5
t30 t25 t20
t2
t0.5
t1
t10
t15
t0.5
t5 t2
100
SV-1214H
t0
t0
SV-5014H
SV-7525H
SV-10028H
Camera
Extension tube
Examples
t0: Extension tube is not required.
t5: A 5-mm
extension tube is required.
Extension tube
t_ (mm)
Camera lens
Camera installation
distance (mm)
Measurement
object
10
10
100
Y axis of eld of view (mm)
Touch Finder
1000
Field of view (mm)
External Lighting
Type
Appearance
Order code
Type
Model
DC power supply
FQ2-D30
FLV series
Refer to FLV series catalog Q198
AC/DC/battery
FQ2-D31
Accessories
Application
Cables
Type
FQ Ethernet Cables
(connect Sensor to Touch Finder,
Sensor to PC)
Appearance
Robotic
cable
I/O Cables
Robotic
cable
Appearance
Parallel Interface
RS-232C Interface
FQ-WN002
5m
FQ-WN005
10m
FQ-WN010
20m
FQ-WN020
2m
FQ-WD002
5m
FQ-WD005
10m
FQ-WD010
20m
FQ-WD020
For Touch
Finder
Appearance
Sensor Data Unit Cable

Robotic
cable
Parallel Cable for FQ-SDU1*1
Parallel Cable for FQ-SDU2*1
RS-232C Cable for FQ-SDU2*1
*1
FQ-XL
Mounting Bracket
FQ-XL2
Mounting Base for C-mount

type*2
FQ-XLC
Polarizing Filter Attachment*1
FQ-XF1
Panel Mounting Adapter
FQ-XPM
AC Adapter
(for AC/DC/battery model)*4
FQ-A@
Output type
Order code
FQ-SDU10
PNP
FQ-SDU15
NPN
FQ-SDU20
Battery
(for AC/DC/battery model)
FQ-BAT1
PNP
FQ-SDU25
Touch Pen*4
FQ-XT
Strap
FQ-XH
SD CARD (4 GB)
HMC-SD491
Cable length Order code

2m
FQ-WU002
5m
FQ-WU005
10m
FQ-WU010
20m
FQ-WU020
2m
FQ-VP1002
*1
*2
5m
FQ-VP1005
*4.
Included with Integrated Sensor.

Included with Sensor with C-mount.
AC Adapters for Touch Finder with DC/AC/Battery Power Supply.Select the model for the
country in which the Touch Finder will be used.
10m
FQ-VP1010
2m
FQ-VP2002
Plug Type
Voltage
Certified standards
Order code
5m
FQ-VP2005
125 V max.
PSE
FQ-AC1
10m
FQ-VP2010
UL/CSA
FQ-AC2
2m
XW2Z-200S-V
250 V max.
CCC mark
FQ-AC3
5m
XW2Z-500S-V
250 V max.
FQ-AC4
BF
250 V max.
FQ-AC5
250 V max.
FQ-AC6
When using FQ-SDU@@, 2 cables are required for all I/O signals.
*4.
318
Order code
NPN
Cables for Sensor Data Unit

Type
Name
Mounting Bracket*1
Cable length Order code

2m
Sensor Data Unit (FQ2-S3/S4/CH only)

Type
Appearance
For Sensor
Enclosed with Touch Finder.
FQ2
Inspection systems
Industrial Switching Hubs (Recommended)

Appearance
Number
of ports
Failure detection Current

consumption
Order code
None
0.22 A
W4S1-03B
None
0.22 A
W4S1-05B
W4S1-05C
Supported
Lenses for C-mount Camera. Refer to optical chart on p. 318 for selection of a lens.
High-resolution, Low-distortion Lenses
Model
3Z4S-LE
SV-0614H
3Z4S-LE
SV-0814H
3Z4S-LE
SV-1214H
3Z4S-LE
SV-1614H
3Z4S-LE
SV-2514H
3Z4S-LE
SV-3514H
3Z4S-LE
SV-5014H
3Z4S-LE
SV-7525H
3Z4S-LE
SV-10028H
Appearance
42 dia.
57.5
39 dia.
52.5
51.0
30 dia.
30 dia.
47.5
30 dia.
36.0
44 dia.
45.5
57.5
44 dia.
36 dia.
49.5
39 dia.
Focal length
6 mm
8 mm
12 mm
16 mm
25 mm
35 mm
50 mm
75 mm
100 mm
Brightness
F1.4
F1.4
F1.4
F1.4
F1.4
F1.4
F1.4
F2.5
F2.8
Filter size
M40.5 P0.5
M35.5 P0.5
M27 P0.5
M27 P0.5
M27 P0.5
M35.5 P0.5
M40.5 P0.5
M34.0 P0.5
M37.5 P0.5
66.5
Extension Tubes
3Z4S-LE SV-EXR
Contents
Set of 7 tubes
(40 mm, 20 mm,10 mm, 5 mm, 2.0 mm,1.0 mm, and 0.5 mm)
Maximum outer diameter: 30 mm dia.
Note: Do not use the 0.5-mm, 1.0-mm, and 2.0-mm Extension Tubes attached to each other.
Since these Extension Tubes are placed over the threaded section of the Lens or other
Extension Tube, the connection may loosen when more than one 0.5-mm, 1.0-mm or
2.0-mm Extension Tube are used together.
Note: Reinforcement is required to protect against vibration when Extension Tubes exceeding 30 mm are used.
Model
Ratings and Performance

Sensor
Inspection Model FQ2-S1/S2/S3 Series
Item
Model
Single-function type
Standard type
High-resolution type
NPN
FQ2-S10@@@@
FQ2-S20@@@@
FQ2-S30@@@@-08
FQ2-S30@@@@-08M FQ2-S30-13
FQ2-S30-13M
PNP
FQ2-S15@@@@
FQ2-S25@@@@
FQ2-S35@@@@-08
FQ2-S35@@@@-08M FQ2-S35-13
FQ2-S35-13M
Refer to Ordering Information on p.19. (Tolerance (field of vision): 10% max.)
Field of view
Main
functions
Select a lens according to the field of vision

and installation distance.
Refer to optical chart on p. 318.
Inspection items
Search, shape search II, sensitive search, area, color data, edge position, edge pitch, edge width, and labeling
Number of
simultaneous
measurements
32
Position compensation Supported (360 Model position compensation, Edge position compensation)
Number of registered
scenes
Calibration
Supported
Image input Image processing

method
Lighting
32
Real color
Monochrome
Real color
Monochrome
Image filter
High dynamic range (HDR), image adjustment (Color Gray Filter, Weak smoothing, Strong smoothing, Dilate, Erosion, Median, Extract edges, Extract
horizontal edges, Extract vertical edges, Enhance edges, Background suppression), polarizing filter (attachment), and white balance (Sensors with Color
Cameras only)
Image elements
1/3-inch color CMOS
1/2-inch color CMOS
Shutter
Built-in lighting ON: 1/250 to 1/50,000

Built-in lighting OFF: 1/1 to 1/50,000

1/1 to 1/60,000
Processing resolution
752 480
928 828
1,280 1,024
Partial input function
Supported horizontally only.
Supported horizontally and vertically
1/2-inch Monochrome 1/2-inch color CMOS

CMOS
Lens mounts
C-mount
Lighting method
Pulse
White
Lighting color
Data logging Measurement data
Images
1/2-inch Monochrome
CMOS
In Sensor: 1,000 items (If a Touch Finder is used, results can be saved up to the capacity of an SD card.)
In Sensor: 20 images (If a Touch Finder is used, images can be saved up to the capacity of an SD card.)
Auxiliary function
Math (arithmetic, calculation functions, trigonometric functions, and logic functions)
Measurement trigger
External trigger (single or continuous)

Communications trigger (Ethernet TCP no-protocol, Ethernet UDP no-protocol, Ethernet FINS/TCP no-protocol, EtherNet/IP, PLC Link, or PROFINET)
319
FQ2
Inspection systems
Item
Model
Single-function type
Standard type
High-resolution type
NPN
FQ2-S10@@@@
FQ2-S20@@@@
FQ2-S30@@@@-08
FQ2-S30@@@@-08M FQ2-S30-13
FQ2-S30-13M
PNP
FQ2-S15@@@@
FQ2-S25@@@@
FQ2-S35@@@@-08
FQ2-S35@@@@-08M FQ2-S35-13
FQ2-S35-13M
I/O specifica- Input signals

tions
Output signals
7 signals
Single measurement input (TRIG)
Control command input (IN0 to IN5)
3 signals
Control output (BUSY)
Overall judgement output (OR)
Error output (ERROR)
The assignments of the three output signals (OUT0 to OUT2) can be changed to the individual judgements of the inspection items, the image input
ready output (READY), or the external lighting timing output (STGOUT).
Ethernet specifications 100Base-TX/10Base-T
Ratings
Communications
Ethernet TCP no-protocol, Ethernet UDP no-protocol, Ethernet FINS/TCP no-protocol, EtherNet/IP, PLC Link, or PROFINET
I/O expansion
Possible by connecting FQ-SDU1_ Sensor Data Unit. 11 inputs and 24 outputs
RS-232C
21.6 to 26.4 VDC (including ripple)
Current consumption
2.4 A max.
0.3 A max.
Environmen- Ambient temperature Operating: 0 to 50C

tal immunity range
Storage: 25 to 65C
(with no icing or condensation)
Operating: 0 to 40C
Storage: 25 to 65C
Ambient humidity
range
Operating and storage: 35% to 85% (with no condensation)
Ambient atmosphere
No corrosive gas
(destruction)
10 to 150 Hz, single amplitude: 0.35 mm, X/Y/Z directions

8 min each, 10 times
Shock resistance
(destruction)
150 m/s2 3 times each in 6 direction (up, down, right, left, forward, and backward)
IEC 60529 IP67 (Except when Polarizing Filter Attachment is mounted

or connector cap is removed.)
IEC 60529 IP40
Materials
Sensor: PBT, PC, SUS

Mounting Bracket: PBT
Polarizing Filter Attachment: PBT, PC
Ethernet connector: Oil-resistance vinyl compound
I/O connector: Lead-free heat-resistant PVC
Cover: Zinc-plated steel,

Thickness: 0.6 mm
Case: Aluminum diecast alloy (ADC-12)
Mounting base: Polycarbonate ABS
Weight
Narrow View/Standard View:Approx.160 g

Wide View: Approx.150 g
Approx. 160 g without base,

Approx. 185 g with base
Accessories included with sensor
Mounting Bracket (FQ-XL) (1)

Polarizing Filter Attachment (FQ-XF1) (1)
Instruction Manual, Quick Startup Guide
Member Registration Sheet, Warning Label
Mounting Base (FQ-XLC) (1)

Mounting Screw (M3 8mm) (4)
Member Registration Sheet
LED class
Class 2(Applicable standards: IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1:1997 +A2:2001,

EN 60825-1:1994 +A1:2002 +A2:2001, and JIS C 6802:2005)
Applicable standards
EN standard EN 61326 and EC Directive No.2004/ EN 61326-1:2006 and IEC 61010-1

104/EC
Inspection/ID Model FQ2-S4 Series

Item
Model
Inspection/ID Model
NPN
FQ2-S40@@@@
FQ2-S40@@@@-M
FQ2-S40@@@@-08
FQ2-S40@@@@-08M FQ2-S40@@@@-13
FQ2-S40@@@@-13M
PNP
FQ2-S45@@@@
FQ2-S45@@@@-M
FQ2-S45@@@@-08
FQ2-S45@@@@-08M FQ2-S45@@@@-13
FQ2-S45@@@@-13M
Refer to Ordering Information on p.19. (Tolerance (field of vision): 10% max.)
Field of view
Main
functions
Select a lens according to the field of vision

and installation distance.
Refer to optical chart on p. 318.
Inspection items
Search, shape search II, sensitive search, area, color data, edge position, edge pitch, edge width, labeling, OCR*1, Bar code*2, 2D-code*2, 2D-code
(DMP)*3, and Model dictionary
Number of
simultaneous
measurements
32
Position compensation Supported (360 Model position compensation, Edge position compensation)
scenes
32
Calibration
Supported
Retry function
Normal retry, Exposure retry, Scene retry, Trigger retry
Image input Image processing

method
Lighting
320
Real color
Monochrome
Real color
Monochrome
Real color
Monochrome
Image filter
High dynamic range (HDR), image adjustment (Color Gray Filter, Weak smoothing, Strong smoothing, Dilate, Erosion, Median, Extract edges, Extract horizontal edges, Extract vertical edges, Enhance edges, Background suppression), polarizing filter (attachment), and white balance (Sensors with Color
Cameras only)
Image elements
1/3-inch color CMOS
Shutter


1/1 to 1/60,000
752 480
928 828
1,280 1,024
Supported horizontally and vertically
1/3-inch Monochrome 1/2-inch color CMOS

CMOS
1/2-inch Monochrome
CMOS
1/2-inch color CMOS
Lens mounts
C-mount
Lighting method
Pulse
Lighting color
White
1/2-inch Monochrome
CMOS
FQ2
Inspection systems
Item
Model
Inspection/ID Model
NPN
FQ2-S40@@@@
FQ2-S40@@@@-M
FQ2-S40@@@@-08
FQ2-S40@@@@-08M FQ2-S40@@@@-13
FQ2-S40@@@@-13M
PNP
FQ2-S45@@@@
FQ2-S45@@@@-M
FQ2-S45@@@@-08
FQ2-S45@@@@-08M FQ2-S45@@@@-13
FQ2-S45@@@@-13M

Images
Auxiliary function
Measurement trigger

Communications trigger (Ethernet TCP no-protocol, Ethernet UDP no-protocol, Ethernet FINS/TCP no-protocol, EtherNet/IP, PLC Link , or PROFINET)

tions
7 signals
Output signals
3 signals
The assignments of the three output signals (OUT0 to OUT2) can be changed to the individual judgements of the inspection items, the image input
ready output (READY), or the external lighting timing output (STGOUT).
Ratings
Communications
Ethernet TCP no-protocol, Ethernet UDP no-protocol, Ethernet FINS/TCP no-protocol, EtherNet/IP, PLC Link, or PROFINET
I/O expansion
RS-232C
Power supply
voltage
Current consumption
2.4 A max.
0.3 A max.
Ambient humidity
range
Ambient atmosphere
No corrosive gas
(destruction)

Shock resistance
(destruction)
IEC 60529 IP67 (Except when Polarizing Filter Attachment is mounted

or connector cap is removed.)
IEC 60529 IP40
Materials
Sensor: PBT, PC, SUS

Mounting Bracket: PBT
Polarizing Filter Attachment: PBT, PC
Ethernet connector: Oil-resistance vinyl compound
I/O connector: Lead-free heat-resistant PVC
Cover: Zinc-plated steel,

Thickness: 0.6 mm
Case: Aluminum diecast alloy (ADC-12)
Mounting base: Polycarbonate ABS
Weight
Narrow View/Standard View:Approx.160 g

Wide View:Approx.150 g
Approx. 160 g without base,

Approx. 185 g with base
Mounting Bracket (FQ-XL)(1)

Polarizing Filter Attachment (FQ-XF1) (1)
Member Registration Sheet, Warning Label
Mounting Base (FQ-XLC) (1)

Mounting Screw (M3 8mm)(4)
Member Registration Sheet
LED class
Class 2(Applicable standards: IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1:1997 +A2:2001,

EN 60825-1:1994 +A1:2002 +A2:2001, and JIS C 6802:2005)
EN 61326-1:2006 and IEC 61010-1
*1
*2
*3
Environment Ambient temperature Operating: 0 to 40C

al immunity range
Storage: 25 to 65C
The types of characters to be read are the same as those of FQ2-CH Optical Character Recognition Sensor.
The types of codes to be read are the same as those of FQ-CR1 Multi Code Reader.
The types of codes to be read are the same as those of FQ-CR2 2D Code Reader.
321
FQ2
Inspection systems
ID Model FQ2-CH, FQ-CR1/CR2 Series

Item
Model
Optical Character Recognition Sensor
Multi Code Reader
2D Code Reader
NPN
FQ2-CH10@@@@-M
FQ-CR10@@@@-M
FQ-CR20@@@@-M
PNP
FQ2-CH15@@@@-M
FQ-CR15@@@@-M
FQ-CR25@@@@-M
Refer to Ordering Information on page 316. (Tolerance (field of vision): 10% max.)
Field of view
Main
functions
Inspection items
OCR
Alphabet A to Z
Number 0 to 9
Symbol ' - . : /
Model dictionary
Lighting
Bar Code (JAN/EAN/UPC, Code39, Codabar (NW7), ITF (Interleaved 2 of 5), Code 93, Code128/
GS1-128, GS1 DataBar* (Truncated, Stacked, Omnidirectional, Stacked Omnidirectional, Limited,
Expanded, Expanded Stacked), Pharmacode,
GS1-128 Composite Code (CC-A, CC-B, CC-C)
Image filter
Weak smoothing, Strong smoothing, Dilate,

None
Erosion, Median, Extract edges, Extract horizontal
edges, Extract vertical edges, Enhance edges,
Background suppression
Filter function (Smooth, Dilate, Erosion, Median),

Code Error Correction Position Display
Verification function
Supported
None
Retry function
Normal retry, Exposure retry, Scene retry, Trigger retry
Number of
simultaneous
measurements
32
Position compensation Supported (360 Model position compensation,

Edge position compensation)
Image
input
2D Code (Data Matrix(EC200), QR Code, MicroQR 2D Code

Code, PDF417, MicroPDF417, GS1-Data Matrix) (Data Matrix(EC200), QR Code)
Supported
None
scenes
32
Image processing
method
Monochrome
Image filter
High dynamic range (HDR) and polarizing filter (attachment)
Image elements
1/3-inch Monochrome CMOS
Shutter

752 480
Lighting method
Pulse
Lighting color
White

Images
1/250 to 1/30,000
Auxiliary function
Measurement trigger

Communications trigger (Ethernet TCP no-protocol, Ethernet UDP no-protocol, Ethernet FINS/TCP
no-protocol, EtherNet/IP, PLC Link, or PROFINET)

tions
7 signals
Output signals
3 signals
The assignments of the three output signals
(OUT0 to OUT2) can be changed to the individual
judgements of the inspection items, the image input ready output (READY), or the external lighting
timing output (STGOUT).
3 signals
Note: The three output signals can be allocated for the judgements of individual inspection items.
Ratings
Communications
Ethernet TCP no-protocol, Ethernet UDP no-pro- Ethernet TCP no-protocol

tocol, Ethernet FINS/TCP no-protocol,
EtherNet/IP, PLC Link, or PROFINET
I/O expansion
Possible by connecting FQ-SDU1_ Sensor Data

Unit. 11 inputs and 24 outputs
RS-232C
Possible by connecting FQ-SDU2_ Sensor Data

Unit. 8 inputs and 7 outputs
Current consumption
2.4 A max.
Environment Ambient temperature Operating: 0 to 40C, Storage: 25 to 65C

al immunity range
322
1/250 to 1/32,258

Ambient humidity
range
Ambient atmosphere
No corrosive gas
(destruction)

Shock resistance
(destruction)
IEC 60529 IP67 (Except when Polarizing Filter Attachment is mounted or connector cap is removed.)
FQ2
Inspection systems
Item
Model
Optical Character Recognition Sensor
Multi Code Reader
2D Code Reader
NPN
FQ2-CH10@@@@-M
FQ-CR10@@@@-M
FQ-CR20@@@@-M
PNP
FQ2-CH15@@@@-M
FQ-CR15@@@@-M
FQ-CR25@@@@-M
Materials
Sensor: PBT, PC, SUS, Mounting Bracket: PBT, Polarizing Filter Attachment: PBT, PC
Ethernet connector: Oil-resistance vinyl compound, I/O connector: Lead-free heat-resistant PVC
Weight
Narrow View/Standard View: Approx.160 g Wide View: Approx. 150 g
Mounting Bracket (FQ-XL)(1), Polarizing Filter Attachment (FQ-XF1) (1), Instruction Manual, Quick Startup Guide, Member Registration Sheet, Warning
Label
LED class
Class 2(Applicable standards: IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1:1997 +A2:2001,EN 60825-1:1994 +A1:2002 +A2:2001, and JIS C 6802:2005)
EN 61326-1:2006 and IEC61010-1
Touch Finder
Type
Model with DC power supply
Model with AC/DC/battery power supply
Model
FQ2-D30
FQ2-D31
Number of connectable Sensor

Main functions
Indications
Number of sensors that can be recognized (switched): 32 max. number or sensor that can displayed on monitor: 8 max.
Types of measurement displays
Last result display, Last NG display, trend monitor, histograms
Types of display images
Through, frozen, zoom-in, and zoom-out images
Data logging
Measurement results, measured images
Menu language
English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, Korean, Japanese
LCD
Display device
3.5-inch TFT color LCD
Pixels
320 240
Display colors
16.7 million
Life expectancy*1
50,000 hours at 25C
Brightness adjustment
Provided
Screen saver
Provided
Backlight
Operation interface Touch screen Method

Life expectancy*2
External interface
Ratings
Environmental
immunity
Ethernet
Resistance film
1,000,000 touch operations
100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
SD card
SDHC-compliant, Class 4 or higher recommended
DC power connection: 21.6 to 26.4 VDC (including ripple)
DC power connection: 21.6 to 26.4 VDC (including ripple)

AC adapter (manufactured by Sino-American Japan Co., Ltd)
connection: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Battery connection: FQ-BAT1 Battery (1cell, 3.7 V)
Continuous operation on Battery*3
1.5 h
Power consumption
DC power connection: 0.2 A max.
DC power connection: 0.2 A max.

Charging battery:
0.4 A max.
Operating: 0 to 50C
Storage: 25 to 65C
Operating:
Ambient humidity range
Ambient atmosphere
No corrosive gas
0 to 50C when mounted to DIN Track

or panel
Operation on Battery: 0 to 40C: 25 to 65C
Vibration resistance (destruction)
10 to 150 Hz, single amplitude: 0.35 mm, X/Y/Z directions 8 min each, 10 times
Shock resistance (destruction)
IEC 60529 IP20 (when SD card cover, connector cap, or harness is attached)
Weight
Approx. 270 g (without Battery and hand strap attached)
Materials
Case: ABS
Accessories included with Touch Finder
Touch Pen (FQ-XT), Instruction Manual
*1
This is a guideline for the time required for the brightness to diminish to half the initial brightness at room temperature and humidity. The life of the backlight is greatly affected by the ambient
temperature and humidity and will be shorter at lower or higher temperatures.
*2 This value is only a guideline. No guarantee is implied. The value will be affected by operating conditions.
*3
This value is only a guideline. No guarantee is implied. The value will be affected by the operating environment and operating conditions.
323
Item
FQ2
Inspection systems
Sensor Data Units (FQ2-S3/S4/CH only)

Item
Model
I/O specifications
Ratings
Environmental
immunity
Parallel Interface
RS-232C Interface
NPN
FQ-SDU10
FQ-SDU20
PNP
FQ-SDU15
FQ-SDU25
Connector 1
16 outputs (D0 to D15)
6 inputs (IN0 to IN5)
Connector 2
11 inputs (TRIG, RESET, IN0 to IN7, and DSA)

2 inputs (TRIG and RESET)
8 outputs (GATE, ACK, RUN, BUSY, OR, ERROR, STGOUT, and 7 outputs (ACK, RUN, BUSY, OR, ERROR, STGOUT, and
SHTOUT)
SHTOUT)
Parallel I/O
RS-232C
Sensor interface
FQ2-S3 connected with FQ-WU@@@: OMRON interface

*Number of connected Sensors: 1
1 channel, 115,200 bps max.
Between all DC external terminals and case: 0.5 M min (at 250 VDC)
Current consumption
2.5 A max.: FQ2-S@@@@@@-@@@ and FQ-SDU@@

0.4 A max.: FQ2-S3@-@@@ and FQ-SDU@@
0.1 A max.: FQ-SDU@@ only
Operating: 0 to 50C, Storage: 20 to 65C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient atmosphere
No corrosive gas
10 to 150 Hz, single amplitude: 0.35 mm, X/Y/Z directions, 8 min each, 10 times
150 m/s 3 times each in 6 directions (up, down, right, left, forward, and backward)
IEC 60529 IP20
Materials
Case: PC + ABS, PC
Weight
Approx. 150 g
Accessories included with Sensor Data Unit
Instruction Manual
Battery
ItemModel
FQ-BAT1
Battery type
Secondary lithium ion battery
Nominal capacity
1,800 mAh
Rated voltage
3.7 V
Operating: 0 to 40C
Storage: 25 to 65C (with no icing or condensation)
Charging method
Charged in Touch Finder (FQ2-D31). AC adapter (FQ-AC@) is required.
Charging time*1
2h
Usage time*1
1.5 h
Battery backup life*2
300 charging cycles
Weight
50 g max.
*1
*2
This value is only a guideline. No guarantee is implied. The value will be affected by operating conditions
This is a guideline for the time required for the capacity of the Battery to be reduced to 60% of the initial capacity. No guarantee is implied. The value will be affected by the operating
environment and operating conditions.
System Requirements for PC tool for FQ

The following Personal Computer system is required to use the software.
OS
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition/Professional SP2 or higher (32-bit version)

Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium or higher (32-bit/64-bit version)
CPU
Core 2 Duo 1.06 GHz or the equivalent or higher
RAM
1GB min.
HDD
500 MB min. available space*1
Monitor
1,024 768 dots min.
*1
Available space is also required separately for data logging.

Windows is registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the USA and other countries.
Other company names and product names in this document are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
324
FQ-M
Inspection systems
FQ-M Vision sensor
The new FQ-M series is a vision sensor designed specifically for Pick & Place
applications. It comes with EtherCAT embedded and can be integrated easily into any
environment. The FQ-M is compact, fast and includes an incremental encoder input for
easy tracking calibration. Omrons Sysmac Studio software is the perfect tool for
configuring the FQ-M and is complemented by the TouchFinder console for on-site
monitoring.
Designed for motion tracking
Made specifically for pick & place applications
Connectivity with EtherCAT/Ethernet
Encoder input for conveyor tracking and calibration
Contour based object detection
Smart calibration wizard
Sysmac Studio software for vision system operation and setting
System configuration
EtherCAT connections
EtherCAT Master
Touch Finder *
Machine Automation
Controller NJ series
Programmable Controllers
CJ2 CPU Units
FQ-M EtherCAT Cables

(RJ45/M12)
Standard Ethernet Cables
Position Control Units

CJ1W-NC@82
FQ-MS@@@-ECT
FQ-MS@@@-M-ECT
(With built-in EtherCAT slave function)
Industrial Switching Hubs for

EtherNet/IP and Ethernet
Sysmac Studio *
Standard Edition
Vision Edition
Another slave
FQ-M Ethernet Cables (RJ45/M12)

(M12/M12)
External Lightings
(FL Series)

(M12/RJ45)
FQ-M I/O Cables
Lighting Controllers
FL-TCC1
Power Supply
24 VDC
Trigger input
sensor
Incremental
rotary encoder
PLC for I/O control
Lighting Controller
(FL-STC)
* Sysmac Studio and Touch Finder can not be used together. When both are connected, Sysmac Studio will have a priority.
When you use the Sysmac Studio Standard Edition and connect the FQ series and the Machine Automation Controller NJ-series, connect them with a general-purpose
Ethernet cable or a USB cable.
No-protocol Ethernet and PLC Link Connections

Control PLC, Robot Controller, or Motion Controller
Sysmac Studio *
Vision Edition
Touch Finder *
Programmable Controllers
CJ2 CPU Units
Robot controller

FQ-M Ethernet Cables

(RJ45/M12)
FQ-M Ethernet Cables (RJ45/M12)
FQ-MS@@@
FQ-MS@@@-M
FQ-M I/O Cables
FL-TCC1
External Lightings
(FL Series)
Power Supply
24 VDC
Trigger input
sensor
Incremental
rotary encode
PLC for I/O control
Lighting Controller
(FL-STC)
* Sysmac Studio and Touch Finder can not be used together.

When both are connected, Sysmac Studio will have a priority.
Note: 1. EtherCAT and Ethernet (PLC Link) can not be used simultaneously.
2. It is not possible to configure and adjust the FQ-M via an NJ-series controller, when they are connected via an EtherCAT network. For configuration and adjustment of FQ-M, connect
the FQ-M and a computer or a Touch Finder via an Ethernet network.
Sysmac is a trademark or registered trademark of OMRON Corporation in Japan and other countries for OMRON factory automation products.
Windows is registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the USA and other countries.
EtherCAT is registered trademark and patented technology, licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH, Germany.
Other company names and product names in this document are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
325
FQ-M
Inspection systems
Sensors
Appearance
Type
Color
Monochrome
Order code
NPN
FQ-MS120
EtherCAT communication function not provided
PNP
FQ-MS125
NPN
FQ-MS120-M
FQ-MS125-M
PNP
Color
Monochrome
NPN
FQ-MS120-ECT
EtherCAT communication function provided
PNP
FQ-MS125-ECT
NPN
FQ-MS120-M-ECT
PNP
FQ-MS125-M-ECT
Automation Software Sysmac Studio

Please purchase a DVD and required number of licenses the first time you purchase the Sysmac Studio. DVDs and licenses are available individually. Each model of licenses does
not include any DVD.
Product name
Specifications
Standards
Order code
SYSMAC-SE200D
SYSMAC-SE201L
SYSMAC-VE001L
Number of Media
licenses
Sysmac Studio
Standard Edition
Ver.1.@@*1
The Sysmac Studio provides an integrated development environment to

set up, program, debug, and maintain NJ-series Controllers and other
Machine Automation Controllers, as well as EtherCAT slaves.
(Media
only)
DVD
Sysmac Studio runs on the following OS.

Windows XP (Service Pack 3 or higher, 32-bit version) /
Vista (32-bit version)/7 (32-bit/64-bit version)
1 license*2
The Sysmac Studio Standard Edition DVD includes Support Software to set
up EtherNet/IP Units,
DeviceNet slaves, Serial Communications Units, and Support Software for
creating screens on HMIs (CX-Designer).
For details, refer to the Sysmac Integrated Catalogue (P072).
Sysmac Studio
Vision Edition
Ver.1.@@
*1
*2
Sysmac Studio Vision Edition is a limited license that provides selected

1 license
functions required for Vision Sensor FQ-M settings.
Because this product is a license only, you need the Sysmac Studio Standard
Edition DVD media to install it.
The FQ-M series is supported by Sysmac Studio version 1.01 or higher.

Multi licenses are available for the Sysmac Studio (3, 10, 30, or 50 licenses).
Touch Finder
Appearance
*1
Type
Order code
DC power supply
FQ-MD30
AC/DC/battery*1
FQ-MD31
AC Adapter and Battery are sold separately.
Bend resistant Cables for FQ-M Series

Appearance
Type
Order code
For EtherCAT and Ethernet cable

Angle: M12/ Straight: RJ45
For EtherCAT and Ethernet cable

Straight type (M12/RJ45)
For EtherCAT cable

Angle type (M12/M12)
For EtherCAT cable

Straight type (M12/M12)
I/O Cables
Angle type
Straight type
326
Cable length: 5 m
FQ-MWNL005
Cable length: 10 m
FQ-MWNL010
Cable length: 5m
FQ-WN005-E
Cable length: 10 m
FQ-WN010-E
Cable length: 5 m
FQ-MWNEL005
Cable length: 10 m
FQ-MWNEL010
Cable length: 5m
FQ-MWNE005
Cable length: 10 m
FQ-MWNE010
Cable length: 5 m
FQ-MWDL005
Cable length: 10 m
FQ-MWDL010
Cable length: 5 m
FQ-MWD005
Cable length: 10 m
FQ-MWD010
FQ-M
Inspection systems
Accessories
Appearance
Type
For Touch Finder
FQ-XPM
AC Adapter
(for models for DC/AC/Battery)
FQ-AC@*1
Battery
(for models for DC/AC/Battery)
FQ-BAT1
Touch Pen
(enclosed with Touch Finder)
FQ-XT
Strap
FQ-XH
SD Card (2 GB)
HMC-SD291
AC Adapters for Touch Finder with DC/AC/Battery Power Supply. Select the model for the country in which the Touch Finder will be used.
Plug type
Voltage
Certified standards
Order code
125 V max.
PSE
FQ-AC1
UL/CSA
FQ-AC2
250 V max.
CCC mark
FQ-AC3
250 V max.
FQ-AC4
BF
250 V max.
FQ-AC5
250 V max.
FQ-AC6
*1
Order code
Panel Mounting Adapter
Industrial Switching Hubs for EtherNet/IP and Ethernet

Appearance
Number of ports
Failure detection
Current consumption
Order code
None
0.22 A
W4S1-03B
None
0.22 A
W4S1-05B
Supported
W4S1-05C
Note: 1. Industrial switching hubs are cannot be used for EtherCAT.
EtherCAT junction slaves

Appearance
Number of ports
Current consumption
Order code
20.4 to 28.8 VDC

(24 VDC 15% to 20%)
0.08 A
GX-JC03
0.17 A
GX-JC06
Note: 1. Please do not connect EtherCAT junction slave with OMRON position control unit, Model CJ1W-NC@81/@82.
2. EtherCAT junction slaves cannot be used for EtherNet/IP and Ethernet.
Cameras peripheral devices

Type
Cameras peripheral devices
Order code
CCTV Lenses
3Z4S-LE Series
FL Series
External Lightings
For FL Series
FL-TCC1
327
FQ-M
Inspection systems
Specifications
Sensors
Item
Model
Type
EtherCAT communication function not provided
EtherCAT communication function provided
Color
Monochrome
Color
NPN
FQ-MS120
FQ-MS120-M
FQ-MS120-ECT
FQ-MS120-M-ECT
PNP
FQ-MS125
FQ-MS125-M
FQ-MS125-ECT
FQ-MS125-M-ECT
Field of vision, Installation distance
Selecting a lens according to the field of vision and installation distance.
Main functions
Inspection items
Shape search, Search, Labeling, Edge position
Number of simultaneous
inspections
32
Monochrome
Number of registered scenes 32

Image input
External Lightings
Data logging
Image processing method
Real color
Monochrome
Real color
Monochrome
Image elements
1/3-inch color CMOS
1/3-inch monochrome CMOS
1/3-inch color CMOS
1/3-inch monochrome CMOS
Image filter
High dynamic range (HDR) and High dynamic range (HDR)

white balance
Shutter
Electronic shutter; select shutter speeds from 1/10 to 1/30000 (sec)
752 (H) 480 (V)
Pixel size
6.0 ( m) 6.0 ( m)
Frame rate
(image read time)
60 fps (16.7 ms)
Connecting method
Connection via a strobe light controller
Connectable lighting
FL series
Measurement data
In Sensor: Max. 32,000 items*1
Images
In Sensor: 20 images*1
Measurement trigger
I/O specifications
I/O trigger, Encoder trigger, Communications trigger (Ethernet No-protocol, PLC Link, or EtherCAT)
Input signals
9 signals
Error clear input (IN0)
Encoder counter reset input (IN1)
Encoder input (A, B, Z)*2
Output signals
5 signals*3
OUT0 Overall judgement output (OR)
OUT1 Control output (BUSY)
OUT2 Error output (ERROR)
OUT3 (Shutter output: SHTOUT)
OUT4 (Strobe trigger output: STGOUT)
Ethernet specifications
100BASE-TX/10BASE-TX
EtherCAT specifications
Connection method
Special connector cables

Power supply and I/O:
1 Special connector I/O cable
Touch Finder, Computer and Ethernet:1 Ethernet cable
EtherCAT:
2 EtherCAT cable
LED display
Ratings
Environmental
immunity
Dedicated protocol for EtherCAT 100BASE-TX
OR: Judgment result indicator

ERR: Error indicator
BUSY: BUSY indicator
ETN: Ethernet communications indicator
EtherCAT display

Between all lead wires and case: 0.5 M (at 250 V)
Current consumption
450mA max. (When the FL-series Strobe controller and lighting are used.)
250mA max. (When external lighting is not used.)
Ambient temperature range Operating: 0 to 50 C, Storage: 20 to 65 C (with no icing or condensation)

Ambient atmosphere
No corrosive gas
(destruction)
10 to 150 Hz, single amplitude: 0.35 mm, X/Y/Z directions, 8 min each, 10 times
Shock resistance
(destruction)
IEC60529 IP40
Case: alminium die casting, Rear cover: alminium plate
Weight
Approx. 390 g (Sensor only)
Accessories
Instruction Manual
If a Touch Finder is used, results can be saved up to the capacity of an SD card.

Encoder input specifications.
The five output signals can be allocated for the judgements of individual inspection items.
328
L/A IN (Link/Activity IN) 1

L/A OUT (Link/Activity OUT) 1
RUN 1
ERR 1
Materials
*1
*2
*3
High dynamic range (HDR) and High dynamic range (HDR)

white balance
Approx. 480 g (Sensor only)
FQ-M
Inspection systems
Pulse input Specifications (When an open collector type encoder is used.)

Item
Specification
Input voltage
24 VDC10%
12 VDC10%
5 VDC5%
Input current
4.8 mA (at 24 VDC, typical value)
NPN
PNP
ON voltage*1
4.8 V max.
2.4 V max.
1.0 V max.
OFF voltage*2
19.2 V min.
9.6 V min.
4.0 V min.
ON voltage*1
19.2 V min.
9.6 V min.
4.0 V min.
OFF voltage*2
4.8 V max.
2.4 V max.
1.0 V max.
Maximum response frequency*3
50 kHz (I/O cable: when the FQ-MWD005 or FQ-MWDL005 cables is used.)

20 kHz (I/O cable: when the FQ-MWD010 or FQ-MWDL010 cables is used.)
Input impedance
5.1 k
*1
*2
*3
ON voltage: Voltage to change from OFF to ON state. The ON voltage is the difference of voltages between the GND terminal of the encoder power terminals and each input terminal.
OFF voltage: Voltage to change from ON to OFF state. The ON voltage is the difference of voltages between the GND terminal of the encoder power terminals and each input terminal.
Select maximum response frequency depending on length of the encoder cable and response frequency of the encoder.
Pulse input Specifications (When a line-driver output type encoder is used.)

Item
Specification
Input voltage
EIA standard RS-422-A line driver level
Input impedance*1
120 5%
Differential input voltage
0.2 V min.
Hysteresis voltage
50 mV
Maximum response frequency*2
200 kHz (I/O cable: when the FQ-MWD005, FQ-MWDL005, FQ-MWD010, or FQ-MWDL010 cables is used.)
When terminating resistance function is used.

Select maximum response frequency depending on length of the encoder cable and response frequency of the encoder.
*1
*2
329
FQ-M
Inspection systems
Touch Finder
Item
Model with DC power supply
Model with AC/DC/battery power supply
Model
Type
FQ-MD30
FQ-MD31
Number of connectable Sensors
2 max.
Main functions
Types of measurement displays
Last result display, Last NG display, trend monitor, histograms
Types of display images
Through, frozen, zoom-in, and zoom-out images
Data logging
Measurement results, measured images
Menu language
Indications
LCD
Backlight
Indicators
Operation interface
External interface
Touch screen
English, Japanese
Display device
3.5-inch TFT color LCD
Pixels
320 240
Display colors
16,777,216
Life expectancy*1
50,000 hours at 25C
Brightness adjustment
Provided
Screen saver
Provided
Power indicator
(color: green)
POWER
Error indicator
(color: red)
ERROR
SD card access indicator

(color: yellow)
SD ACCESS
Charge indicator
(color: orange)
Method
Resistance film
Life expectancy*2
1,000,000 operations
Ethernet
100 BASE-TX/10 BASE-T
SD card
Ratings
CHARGE
Omron SD card (Model: HMC-SD291) or a SDHC card of Class4 or higher rating is recommended.
DC power connection
AC adapter connection
Battery connection
FQ-BAT1 Battery (1 cell, 3.7 V)
Continuous operation on Battery*3
1.5 h
Current consumption
DC power connection: 0.2 A
100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Between all lead wires and case: 0.5 M (at 250 V)
Environmental
immunity
Operating: 0 to 50C
Storage: 25 to 65C
Environmental
immunity
Ambient atmosphere
No corrosive gas
10 to 150 Hz, single amplitude: 0.35 mm, X/Y/Z directions 8 min each, 10 times
IEC 60529 IP20
Dimensions
95 85 33 mm
Materials
Case: ABS
Weight
Approx. 270 g (without Battery and hand strap)
Accessories
Touch Pen (FQ-XT), Instruction Manual
*1
Operating: 0 to 50C when mounted to DIN Track

or panel 0 to 40C when operated on a Battery
Storage: 25 to 65C
This is a guideline for the time required for the brightness to diminish to half the initial brightness at room temperature and humidity. No guarantee is implied. The life of the backlight is
greatly affected by the ambient temperature and humidity. It will be shorter at lower or higher temperatures.
*2 This value is only a guideline. No guarantee is implied. The value will be affected by operating conditions.
*3
This value is only a guideline. No guarantee is implied. The value will be affected by the operating environment and operating conditions.
330
FQ-M
Inspection systems
Battery Specifications
Sysmac Studio
ItemModel
FQ-BAT1
Item
Requirement
Battery type
Secondary lithium ion battery
Nominal capacity
1,800 mAh
Operating system (OS)*1, *2

Japanese or English system
Rated voltage
3.7 V
Windows XP (Service Pack 3 or higher,

32-bit version) /Vista (32-bit version) /
7 (32-bit/64-bit version)
Dimensions
35.3 53.1 11.4 mm
CPU
Ambient temperature range Operating: 0 to 40C

Storage: 25 to 65C
Windows computers with Celeron 540

(1.8 GHz) or faster CPU.
Core i5 M520 (2.4 GHz) or equivalent or
faster recommended
Main memory
2 GB min.
Operating and storage: 35% to 85%

(with no condensation)
Hard disk
At least 1.6 GB of available space*3
Charging method
Charged in Touch Finder (FQ-MD31).

AC adapter (FQ-AC@) is required.
Display
XGA 1,024 768, 1,600 million colors.

WXGA 1,280 800 min. recommended
Charging time*1
2.0 h
Disk drive
DVD-ROM drive
Battery backup life*2
300 charging cycles
Communications ports
USB port corresponded to USB 2.0,

or Ethernet port
Weight
50 g max.
*1
*1
This value is only a guideline. No guarantee is implied. The value will be affected by operating conditions.
*2
This is a guideline for the time required for the capacity of the Battery to be reduced to 60%
of the initial capacity. No guarantee is implied.The value will be affected by the operating
environment and operating conditions.
Sysmac Studio Operating System Precaution:

System requirements and hard disk space may vary with the system environment.
The following restrictions apply when Sysmac Studio is used with Microsoft Windows Vista
or Windows 7.
Some Help files cannot be accessed.
The Help files can be accessed if the Help program distributed by Microsoft for Windows
(WinHlp32.exe) is installed. Refer to the Microsoft homepage listed below or contact
Microsoft for details on installing the file. (The download page is automatically displayed
if the Help files are opened while the user is connected to the Internet.)
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/917607/en-us
*3
To use the file logging function, additional memory area to save the logging data is necessary.
*2
Item
Specifications
Communications standard
IEC 61158 Type12
Physical layer
100BASE-TX (IEEE802.3)
Connector
M12 2
E-CAT IN:EtherCAT (IN)
E-CAT OUT:EtherCAT (OUT)
FQ-M Series EtherCAT Communications Specifications
Communications media
Use the cables for FQ-MWN@@, or FQ-WN@@ series.
Communications distance
Use the communication cable within the length of FQ-MWN@@ or FQ-WN@@ series cables.
Process data
Variable PDO Mapping
Mailbox (CoE)
Emergency messages, SDO requests, SDO responses, and SDO information
Distributed clock
Synchronization with DC mode 1
LED display
L/A IN (Link/Activity IN) 1, L/A OUT (Link/Activity OUT) 1, RUN 1, ERR 1
Version Information
FQ-M Series and Programming Devices
FQ-M Series
Required Programming Device

Sysmac Studio Standard Edition/Vision Edition
FQ-MS@@@(-M)
FQ-MS@@@(-M)-ECT
Ver.1.00
Ver.1.01 or higher
Not supported
Supported
331
FQ-M
Inspection systems
Components and Functions

Sensor
(10)
(6)
(2)
(9)
(11)
(8)
(5)
(4)
(1)
(7)
(3)
(7)
No. Name
Description
No. Name
Description
(1) I/O Cable connector
An I/O Cable is used to connect the

Sensor to the power supply and external I/O.
(9) Strobe controller

connection holes
Install the strobe controller in this part. FL-TCC1 can be

mounted.
(2) Ethernet connector
An Ethernet cable is used to connect the Sensor to

external devices such as PLCs, the Touch Finder, or
computers.
(10) Measurement OR
process
ETN
Operation
ERROR
indicators
BUSY
Lit in orange while OR signal is ON.
(11) EtherCAT
Operation
indicators
L/A IN
Lit in green when Link with EtherCAT

device is established and flickers in green when
communicating (data IN).
L/A OUT
Lit in green when Link with EtherCAT

device is established and flickers in green when
communicating (data OUT).
ECAT RUN
Lit in green when EtherCAT communication is

available.
ECAT ERROR
Lit in red when an EtherCAT communications error

occurs.
(3) Lighting connector
Connect an external lighting (strobe controller).

*1
Connect an EtherCAT compatible device.
(4) EtherCAT connector (IN)
(5) EtherCAT connector (OUT)*1 Connect an EtherCAT compatible device.

(6) Node address switch*1
Set the node address for EtherCAT communications.
(7) Installation holes
Holes to install and secure the camera.
(8) C-mount lens connection part Install the C-mount lens in this part.
Determine the field of view depending on the
measurement target and select a suitable CCTV lens
(C-mounting lens).
*1
Lit in orange while in Ethernet communications.

Lit in red when an error occurs.
Lit in green while the sensor is processing.
FQ-MS@@@-ECT and FQ-MS@@@-M-ECT only.
Touch Finder
(6)
(7)
(3)
(1)
(4)
(2)
(5)
(11)
(8)
(9)
(12)
(10)
No. Name
(1) Operation
indicators
Description
No. Name
Description
POWER
Lights green when the Touch Finder is turned ON.
(6) Touch pen holder
ERROR
Lights red when an error occurs.
The touch pen can be stored here when it is not being

used.
SD ACCESS
Lights yellow when an SD card is inserted.

Flashes yellow when the SD card is
being accessed.
(7) Touch pen
Used to operate the touch panel.
(8) DC power supply connector
Used to connect a DC power supply.
(9) Slider
Used to mount the Touch Finder to a DIN Track.
Lights orange when the Battery is charging.
(10) Ethernet port
Used when connecting the Touch Finder to the Sensor

with an Ethernet cable.
Insert the connector until it locks in place.
This is a holder for attaching the strap.
CHARGE*1
(2) LCD/touch panel
Displays the setting menu, measurement results, and

images input by the camera.
(3) SD card slot
An SD card can be inserted.
(11) Strap holder
(4) Battery cover*
The Battery is inserted behind this cover.

Remove the cover when mounting or
removing the Battery.
(12) AC power supply connector*1 Used to connect the AC adapter.
(5) Power supply switch
*1
Applicable to the FQ-MD31 only.
332
The Battery is inserted behind this cover.

Remove the cover when mounting or
removing the Battery.
*1
Applicable to the FQ-MD31 only.
Xpectia FH/FZ5
Inspection systems
Faster machine speed and high-precision operation
The new FH vision systems are specifically intended for seamless integration with
PLCs, motion controllers and robotic control systems, and are ideally suited for applications in high-speed manufacturing machines of all types. FH vision systems featuring a new and exceptionally efficient vision algorithm, high-speed image bus, fourcore processing and fast EtherCAT communications. A further benefit is that FH Vision
Systems are fully compatible with the Sysmac Studio Automation software.
Four-core image processing
Fast EtherCAT communications
Innovative Shape Search III
Up to 8 high resolution cameras
Supports Microsoft.NET
Compatible with Sysmac Studio Automation software
EtherCAT connections for FH series
Example of the FH sensor controllers (4-camera type)
Sysmac Studio
Standard Edition
Vision Edition
Machine automation
controller NJ series
External lightings
Lighting controllers
Vision system
FH sensor controllers
EtherCAT cables*1
Cameras
Special cable
for cameras
Ethernet cables*2
Incremental
rotary encoder
Special cable
Special cable for LCD monitor and

DVI-I -RGB Conversion connector
Another slave
EtherCAT cables*1
Special cable for I/O
LCD monitor
Trigger input
sensor
PLC for I/O control
*1. To use STP (shielded twisted-pair) cable of category 5 or higher with double shielding (braiding and aluminum foil tape) for EtherCAT and RJ45 connector.
*2. To use STP (shielded twisted-pair) cable of category 5 or higher for Ethernet and RJ45 connector.
EtherNet/IP, No-protocol Ethernet and PLC Link connections for FZ5 series
Example of the FZ5 sensor controllers (4-camera type)
PLC for I/O control
Personal
computer
Industrial switching hubs for

Ethernet cables*
Trigger input
sensor
PLC for I/O control
Special cable for I/O
Vision system
FZ5 sensor controllers
Special cable for

cameras
Cameras
External lightings
* To use Straight or cross STP (shielded twisted-pair) cable of category 5 or higher for Ethernet and RJ45 connector.
333
Xpectia FH/FZ5
Inspection systems
FH series sensor controllers
Item
CPU
Box-type controllers
Output
Order code
High-speed controllers (4 core) 2
No. of cameras
NPN/PNP
FH-3050
NPN/PNP
FH-3050-10
NPN/PNP
FH-3050-20
NPN/PNP
FH-1050
NPN/PNP
FH-1050-10
NPN/PNP
FH-1050-20
CPU
No. of cameras
Output
Order code
High-speed controllers
NPN
FZ5-1100
PNP
FZ5-1105
NPN
FZ5-1100-10
PNP
FZ5-1105-10
NPN
FZ5-600
PNP
FZ5-605
NPN
FZ5-600-10
PNP
FZ5-605-10
NPN
FZ5-L350
PNP
FZ5-L355
NPN
FZ5-L350-10
PNP
FZ5-L355-10
Descriptions
Color/
Image read
Monochrome time
Order code
High-speed
CMOS Cameras
(Lens required)
For FH Sensor Controllers only
12 million pixels
(Up to four cameras can be connected to one
Controller. Up to eight cameras other than
12 million-pixel cameras can be connected
to a FH-3050-20 or a FH-1050-20.)
Color
High-speed
CMOS Cameras
(Lens required)
4 million pixels
Standard controllers (2 core)
FZ5 series sensor controllers

Item
Controllers integrated
with LCD
Standard controllers
Lite controllers
Cameras
Item
25.7 ms*1
FH-SM12
Monochrome
Color
8.5 ms*1
Color
4.6 ms
*1
Color
3.3 ms
5 million pixels
(When connecting FZ5-6@ or FZ5-L35@,
up to two cameras can be connected.)
Monochrome
Color
2 million pixels
Color
62.5 ms
Color
33.3 ms
300,000 pixels
Color
Small Digital
CCD Cameras
(Lenses for small camera required)
300,000-pixel flat type
Color
12.5 ms
*1
When connected using two camera cables.
334
Narrow view
Color
FZ-SFC
FZ-SF
12.5 ms
FZ-SPC
FZ-SP
Monochrome
Intelligent Compact CMOS Cameras
(Camera + Manual Focus Lens + High power
Lighting)
FZ-SHC
FZ-SH
12.5 ms
Monochrome
Color
FZ-SC
FZ-S
4.9 ms
Monochrome
300,000-pixel pen type
FZ-SC2M
FZ-S2M
Monochrome
High-speed
CCD Cameras
(Lens required)
FZ-SC5M2
FZ-S5M2
Monochrome
300,000 pixels
FH-SC
FH-SM
Monochrome
Digital
CCD Cameras
(Lens required)
FH-SC02
FH-SM02
Monochrome
300,000 pixels
FH-SC04
FH-SM04
Monochrome
2 million pixels
FH-SC12
16.7 ms
FZ-SQ010F
Standard view
FZ-SQ050F
Wide View (long-distance)
FZ-SQ100F
Wide View (short-distance)
FZ-SQ100N
Xpectia FH/FZ5
Inspection systems
Lenses
C-mount Lens for 1/3-inch image sensor (Recommend: FZ-S@/FZ-SH@/FH-S@)
Model
Appearance/
Dimensions
(mm)
3Z4S-LE
SV-0614V
29 dia.
3Z4S-LE
SV-0813V
30.0
3Z4S-LE
SV-1214V
28 dia.
29 dia.
34.0
3Z4S-LE
SV-1614V
29 dia.
29.5
3Z4S-LE
SV-2514V
3Z4S-LE
SV-3518V
29 dia.
29 dia.
24.5
24.0
3Z4S-LE
SV-5018V
33.5[WD:] to
37.5[WD:300]
3Z4S-LE
SV-7527V
3Z4S-LE
SV-10035V
32 dia.
32 dia.
32 dia.
42.0[WD:] to
44.4[WD:1000]
37.0[WD:] to
39.4[WD:1000]
43.9[WD:] to
46.3[WD:1000]
Focal length
6 mm
8 mm
12 mm
16 mm
25 mm
35 mm
50 mm
75 mm
100 mm
Brightness
F1.4
F1.3
F1.4
F1.4
F1.4
F1.8
F1.8
F2.7
F3.5
Filter size
M27.0 P0.5
M25.5 P0.5
M27.0 P0.5
M27.0 P0.5
M27.0 P0.5
M27.0 P0.5
M30.5 P0.5
M30.5 P0.5
M30.5 P0.5
Maximum
sensor size
1/3 inch
1/3 inch
1/3 inch
1/3 inch
1/3 inch
1/3 inch
1/3 inch
1/3 inch
1/3 inch
Mount
C-mount
3Z4S-LE
SV-3514H
3Z4S-LE
SV-5014H
3Z4S-LE
SV-7525H
3Z4S-LE
SV-10028H
C-mount Lens for 2/3-inch image sensor (Recommend: FZ-S@2M/FZ-S@5M2/FH-S@02)

(3Z4S-LE SV-7525H and 3Z4S-LE SV-10028H can also be used for FH-S@04)
Appearance/
Dimensions
(mm)
3Z4S-LE
SV-0614H
42 dia.
Focal length
6 mm
Brightness
Filter size
3Z4S-LE
SV-0814H
3Z4S-LE
SV-1214H
39 dia.
57.5
30 dia.
52.5
3Z4S-LE
SV-1614H
30 dia.
51.0
3Z4S-LE
SV-2514H
30 dia.
47.5
45.5
44 dia.
36.0
25 mm
35 mm
44 dia.
36 dia.
57.5
50 mm
39 dia.
42.0[WD:] to
54.6[WD:1200]
75 mm
66.5[WD:] to
71.6[WD:2000]
8 mm
12 mm
16 mm
100 mm
F1.4
F1.4
F1.4
F1.4
F1.4
F1.4
F1.4
F2.5
F2.8
M40.5 P0.5
M35.5 P0.5
M27.0 P0.5
M27.0 P0.5
M27.0 P0.5
M35.5 P0.5
M40.5 P0.5
M34.0 P0.5
M37.5 P0.5
Maximum
sensor size
2/3 inch
2/3 inch
2/3 inch
2/3 inch
2/3 inch
2/3 inch
2/3 inch
1 inch
1 inch
Mount
C-mount
Model
C-mount Lens for 1-inch image sensor (Recommend: FH-S@02/FH-S@04)

(3Z4S-LE SV-7525H with focal length of 75 mm and 3Z4S-LE SV-10028H with focal length of 100 mm are also available.)
Model
Appearance/
Dimensions
(mm)
3Z4S-LE
VS-0618H1
64.5 dia.
3Z4S-LE
VS-0814H1
57.2
3Z4S-LE
VS-1214H1
38 dia.
57 dia.
3Z4S-LE
VS-1614H1N
38 dia.
48.0[WD:] to
48.5[WD:300]
59
3Z4S-LE
VS-2514H1
45.0[WD:] to
45.9[WD:300]
3Z4S-LE
VS-3514H1
3Z4S-LE
VS-5018H1
38 dia.
38 dia.
33.5[WD:] to
35.6[WD:300]
44 dia.
44.5[WD:] to
49.5[WD:500]
35.0[WD:] to
39.1[WD:300]
Focal length
6 mm
8 mm
12 mm
16 mm
25 mm
35 mm
50 mm
Aperture (F
No.)
1.8 to 16
1.4 to 16
1.4 to 16
1.4 to 16
1.4 to 16
1.4 to 16
1.8 to 16
Filter size
Can not be
used a filter
M55.0 P0.75
M35.5 P0.5
M30.5 P0.5
M30.5 P0.5
M30.5 P0.5
M40.5 P0.5
Maximum
sensor size
1 inch
1 inch
1 inch
1 inch
1 inch
1 inch
1 inch
Mount
C mount
M42-mount Lens for large image sensor (Recommend: FH-S@12)

Model
Appearance/
Dimensions
(mm)
3Z4S-LE
VS-L1828/M42-10
58.5 dia.
94
3Z4S-LE
VS-L2526/M42-10
58.5 dia.
80
3Z4S-LE
VS-L3528/M42-10
64.5 dia.
108
3Z4S-LE
VS-L5028/M42-10
66 dia.
94.5
3Z4S-LE
VS-L8540/M42-10
55.5 dia.
129.5
3Z4S-LE
VS-L10028/M42-10
54 dia.
Focal length
18 mm
25 mm
35 mm
50 mm
85 mm
100 mm
Aperture (F
No.)
2.8 to 16
2.6 to 16
2.8 to 16
2.8 to 16
4.0 to 16
2.8 to 16
Filter size
M55.0 P0.75
M55.0 P0.75
M62.0 P0.75
M62.0 P0.75
M52.0 P0.75
M52.0 P0.75
Maximum
sensor size
1.8 inch
Mount
M42 mount
134.5
335
Xpectia FH/FZ5
Inspection systems
Camera Accessories
Item
Descriptions
External Lighting
Order code
FLV Series*1
FL Series*1
Lighting Controller
(Required to control external
lighting from a Controller)
For FLV-Series
For FL-Series
For Intelligent Compact Camera
*1
FLV-TCC1*1
Camera Mount Lighting Controller

(Four channels)
FLV-TCC4*1
Analog Lighting Controller
FLV-ATC Series*1
FL-TCC1*1
Mounting Bracket
FQ-XL
Mounting Brackets
FQ-XL2
Polarizing Filter Attachment
FQ-XF1
Mounting Bracket for FZ-S@
FZ-S-XLC
Mounting Bracket for FZ-S@2M
FZ-S2M-XLC
Mounting Bracket for FZ-SH@
FZ-SH-XLC
Mounting Bracket for FH-S@, FZ-S@5M2
FH-SM-XLC
Mounting Bracket for FH-S@12
FH-SM12-XLC
Refer to the Vision Accessory Catalog (Cat. No. Q198) for details.
336

(One channel)
Xpectia FH/FZ5
Inspection systems
Cables
Item
Descriptions
Order code
Camera Cable
Cable length: 2 m, 3 m, 5m, or 10 m*1
FZ-VS3
Bend resistant Camera Cable

FZ-VSB3
Right-angle Camera Cable*2

FZ-VSL3
Bend resistant Right-angle Camera Cable*2

Cable length: 2 m, 3 m, 5 m, or 10 m*1
FZ-VSLB3
Long-distance Camera Cable

Cable length: 15 m*1
FZ-VS4
Long-distance Right-angle Camera Cable*2

Cable length: 15 m*1
FZ-VSL4
Cable Extension Unit

Up to two Extension Units and three Cables can be connected. (Maximum cable length: 45 m*1)
FZ-VSJ
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
DVI-I -RGB Conversion Connector

FH-VMRGB
Parallel I/O Cable

Cable length: 2 m or 5 m, For FZ Sensor Controllers only
FZ-VP
Parallel I/O Cable for Connector-terminal Conversion Unit

Cable length: 2 m or 5 m, For FZ Sensor Controllers only
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Units can be connected
(Terminal Blocks Recommended Products: OMRON XW2R-J50G-T, XW2R-E50G-T, XW2R-P50G-T)
FZ-VPX
Parallel I/O Cable*3

Cable length: 2 m or 5 m, For FH Sensor Controllers only
XW2Z-S013-@*4
Parallel I/O Cable for Connector-terminal Conversion Unit*3

Cable length: 0.5 m, 1 m, 1.5 m, 2 m, 3 m, 5 m, For FH Sensor Controllers only
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Units can be connected
(Terminal Blocks Recommended Products: OMRON XW2R-@34G-T)
XW2Z-@@@EE*5
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Units, General-purpose devices
XW2R-@34G-T*6
Encoder Cable for line-driver

Cable length: 1.5 m, For FH Sensor Controllers only
FH-VR
Monitor Cable
FZ-VM
Cable length: 2 m or 5 m (When you connect a LCD Monitor FZ-M08 to FH sensor controller, please use it in combination with a
DVI-I -RGB Conversion Connector FH-VMRGB.)
The maximum cable length depends on the Camera being connected, and the model and length of the Cable being used. For further information,please refer to the "Cameras/Cables" table.
When a high-speed CMOS camera FH-S@02/-S@04/-S@12 is used in the high speed mode of transmission speed, two camera cables are required.
This Cable has an L-shaped connector on the Camera end.
2 Cables are required for all I/O signals.
Insert the cables length into @ in the model number as follows. 2 m = 2, 5 m = 5
nsert the cables length into @@@ in the model number as follows. 0.5 m = 050, 1 m = 100, 1.5 m = 150, 2 m = 200, 3 m = 300, 5 m = 500
Insert the wiring method into @ in the model number as follows. Phillips screw = J, Slotted screw (rise up) = E, Push-in spring = P
Refer to the XW2R Series catalog (Cat. No. G077) for details.
337
Xpectia FH/FZ5
Inspection systems
Recommended EtherCAT and EtherNet/IP communications cables

Use Straight STP (shielded twisted-pair) cable of category 5 or higher with double shielding (braiding and aluminum foil tape) for EtherCAT.
Use Straight or cross STP (shielded twisted-pair) cable of category 5 or higher for EtherNet/IP.
Item
Descriptions
For EtherCAT*1
Order code
Standard type cable with connectors on both ends (RJ45/RJ45)
Wire gauge and number of pairs: AWG27, 4-pair cable, cable sheath material: LSZH*2,
Cable color: Blue, Yellow, or Green,
Cables length: 0.2 m, 0.3 m, 0.5 m, 1 m, 1.5 m, 2 m, 3 m, 5 m, 7.5 m, 10 m, 15 m, 20 m
XS6W-6LSZH8SS@CM-Y*3
Rugged type cable with connectors on both ends (RJ45/RJ45)

Wire gauge and number of pairs: AWG22, 2-pair cable
Cables length: 0.3 m, 0.5 m, 1 m, 2 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 15 m
XS5W-T421-@MD-K*3
Rugged type cable with connectors on both ends (M12/RJ45)

Wire gauge and number of Pairs: AWG22, 2-pair cable
XS5W-T421-@MC-K*3
Rugged type cable with connectors on both ends (M12 L/RJ45)

XS5W-T422-@MC-K*3
Wire gauge and number of

pairs: AWG24, 4-pair cable
Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
NETSTAR-C5E
SAB 0.5 4P*4
Kuramo Electric Co.
KETH-SB*4
SWCC Showa Cable Systems Co.
FAE-5004*4
RJ45 connectors
Panduit Corporation
MPS588-C*4
Cables
Kuramo Electric Co.
KETH-PSB-OMR*5
Nihon Electric Wire&Cable Co.,Ltd.
PNET/B *5
RJ45 assembly connector
OMRON
XS6G-T421-1*5
Cables
Fujikura Ltd.
F-LINK-E 0.5mm 4P*6
RJ45 connectors
Panduit Corporation
MPS588 *6
For EtherCAT*1
and EtherNet/IP

pairs: AWG22, 2-pair cable
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
For EtherNet/IP

pairs: 0.5 mm, 4-pair cable
Cables
The FH series supports the EtherCAT communication. It cannot be used in FZ series.

The lineup features Low Smoke Zero Halogen cables for in-cabinet use and PUR cables for out-of-cabinet use.
For details, refer to Cat.No.G019.
We recommend you to use above cable for EtherCAT and EtherNet/IP, and RJ45 connector together.
We recommend you to use above cable for EtherCAT and EtherNet/IP, and RJ45 assembly connector together.
We recommend you to use above cable For EtherNet/IP and RJ45 connectors together.
Note: Please be careful while cable processing, for EtherCAT, connectors on both ends should be shield connected and for EtherNet/IP, connectors on only one end should be shield connected.
338
Xpectia FH/FZ5
Inspection systems
Item
Descriptions
Order code
LCD monitor
For Box-type controllers
FZ-M08
USB memory
SD card
For FH Controller only
2 GB
FZ-MEM2G
8 GB
FZ-MEM8G
2 GB
HMC-SD291
4 GB
HMC-SD491
VESA attachment
For installing the LCD integrated-type controller
FZ-VESA
Desktop controller stand

For installing the LCD integrated-type controller
FZ-DS
Display/USB switcher
FZ-DU
Mouse recommended products

Driverless wired mouse
(A mouse that requires the mouse driver to be installed is not supported.)

For FH series
3 port
6 port

Power supply voltage:

20.4 to 28.8 VDC
(24 VDC 15 to 20%)
Current consumption:
0.08 A
GX-JC03
0.17 A
GX-JC06
0.22 A
W4S1-03B
3 port
Failure detection: None
5 port
Failure detection: None
W4S1-05B
5 port
Failure detection: Supported
W4S1-05C
Peripheral devices
Automation software Sysmac Studio

Please purchase a DVD and licenses the first time you purchase the Sysmac Studio. DVDs and licenses are available individually. The license does not include the DVD.
Product
Specifications
Order code
Number of model
standards licenses
Sysmac Studio
Standard Edition
Ver.1.@@
Sysmac Studio
Vision Edition
Ver.1.@@ *2
*1
*2
The Sysmac Studio provides an integrated development environment to set up,

program, debug, and maintain NJ-series controllers and other Machine Automation
controllers, as well as EtherCAT slaves.
Windows XP (Service Pack 3 or higher, 32-bit version)/Vista (32-bit version)/7 (32-bit/
64-bit version)
Sysmac Studio Vision Edition is a limited license that provides selected functions
required for FH-series/
FQ-M-series vision sensor settings.
Media
(Media only)
DVD *1
SYSMAC-SE200D
1 license
SYSMAC-SE201L
3 license
SYSMAC-SE203L
10 license
SYSMAC-SE210L
30 license
SYSMAC-SE230L
50 license
SYSMAC-SE250L
1 license
SYSMAC-VE001L
The same media is used for both the Standard Edition and the Vision Edition.
With the Vision Edition, you can use only the setup functions for FH-series/FQ-M-series vision sensors.
Note: 1. Site licenses are available for users who will run Sysmac Studio on multiple computers. Ask your OMRON sales representative for details.
2. Sysmac Studio version 1.07 or higher supports the FH series. Sysmac Studio does not support the FZ5 series.
Development Environment
Please purchase a DVD and licenses the first time you purchase the Sysmac Studio. DVDs and licenses are available individually. The license does not include the DVD.
Product
Specifications
Order code
Number of model
standards licenses
Application Producer
Software components that provide a development environment to further customize (Media only)
the standard controller features of the FH series.
System requirements:
CPU: Intel Pentium Processor (SSE2 or higher)
OS: Windows 7 Professional (32bit) or Enterprise (32bit) or Ultimate (32bit)
.NET Framework: .NET Framework 3.5 or higher
Memory: At least 2 GB RAM
Available disk space: At least 2 GB
1 license
Browser: Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or later
Display: XGA (1,024 768), True Color (32-bit) or higher
Optical drive: CD/DVD drive
The following software is required to customize the software:
Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Professional or
Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 Professional
Media
CD
FH-AP1
FH-AP1L
339
Xpectia FH/FZ5
Inspection systems
Specifications
FH sensor controllers
Type
High-speed Controllers (4 core)
Model
NPN
FH-3050
FH-3050-10
Standard Controllers (2 core)

FH-3050-20
FH-1050
FH-1050-10
FH-1050-20
PNP
Controller type
No. of Cameras
Connected Camera
Can be connected to all cameras.

(FZ-S series/FH-S series)
Processing
resolution
(FZ-S)
Processing
resolution
(FH-S)
Main functions
No. of scenes
Number
of logged
images*1
When connected to a 300,000-pixel camera
640 (H) 480 (V)
When connected to a 2 million-pixel camera
1,600 (H) 1,200 (V)
2,448 (H) 2,044 (V)
640 (H) 480 (V)
2,040 (H) 1,088 (V)
2,040 (H) 2,048 (V)
4,084 (H) 3,072 (V)
Can be connected to all cameras.

(FZ-S series/
FH-S series)
(Can be connected to up to four
12 million-pixel
cameras or up to
eight cameras
other than
12 million-pixel
cameras.)
128
When connected to a intelligent compact camera Connected to 1 camera(Color): 232, Connected to 2 camera(Color): 116
Connected to 3 camera(Color): 77, Connected to 4 camera(Color): 58
(FZ-S/FH-S)
Connected to 1 camera(Color): 270, Connected to 1 camera(Monochrome): 272

Connected to 3 camera(Color/Monochrome): 90

(FH-S)
Connected to 1 camera(Color/Monochrome): 37, Connected to 2 camera(Color/Monochrome): 18


(FZ-S)


(FH-S)


(FZ-S)


(FH-S)

Mouse or similar device
Settings
Create series of processing steps by editing the flowchart (Help messages provided).
Serial communications
RS-232C: 1 CH
EtherNet communications
No-protocol (TCP/UDP) 1000BASE-T

1 port
External interface
Can be connect- Can be connected to all cameras.

ed to all cameras. (FZ-S series/FH-S series)
(FZ-S series/
FH-S series)
(Can be connected to up to four
12 million-pixel
cameras or up to
eight cameras
other than
12 million-pixel
cameras.)
When connected to a intelligent compact camera 752 (H) 480 (V)
Operation
340
2 port
2 port
1 port
2port
2port
EtherNet/IP communications
Ethernet port baud rate: 1 Gbps (1000 BASE-T)
EtherCAT communications
EtherCAT protocol (100BASE-TX)
Parallel I/O
(In the 2-line random trigger mode)

17 inputs (STEP0/ENCTRIG_Z0, STEP1/ENCTRIG_Z1, ENCTRIG_A0 to 1, ENCTRIG_B0 to 1, DSA0 to 1, DI0 to 7,
DI_LINE0)
37 outputs (RUN0 to 1, READY0 to 1, BUSY0 to 1, OR0 to 1, ERROR0 to 1, GATE0 to 1, STGOUT0/SHTOUT0,
STGOUT1/SHTOUT1, STGOUT2 to 7, DO0 to 15, ACK)
(In the 5-line to 8-line random trigger mode)
19 inputs, STEP0 to 7, DI_LINE0 to 2, DI0 to 7)
34 outputs (READY0 to 7, BUSY0 to 7, OR0 to 7, ACK, ERROR, STGOUT/SHTOUT0 to 7)
Encoder interface
RS422-A line driver level. Phase A/B: single-phase 4MHz (multiplying phase difference of 1MHz by 4 times),
Phase Z: 1MHz
Monitor interface
DVI-I (Single Link) output IF 1ch
USB interface
4 channels (supports USB 1.1 and 2.0)
SD card interface
SDHC card of Class4 or higher rating is recommended.
Xpectia FH/FZ5
Inspection systems
Type
High-speed Controllers (4 core)
Model
NPN
FH-3050
Standard Controllers (2 core)
FH-3050-10
FH-3050-20
FH-1050
FH-1050-10
Connected to 2 cameras 5.0 A max.
5.4 A max.
Connected to 4 cameras
7.0 A max.
FH-1050-20
6.4 A max.
4.7 A max.
5.0 A max.
5.9 A max.
8.1 A max.
6.5 A max.
7.5 A max.
PNP
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
When connected to a
Connected to 2 cameras 4.1 A max.
300,000-pixel camera, Connected to 4 cameras
2 million-pixel camera,
4 million-pixel camera, Connected to 8 cameras
5 million-pixel camera
or 12 million-pixel
camera
Dimensions
Operation Environment
Noise
Immunity
11.5 A max.
10.9 A max.
5.2 A max.
3.6 A max.
3.7 A max.
4.5 A max.
4.8 A max.
5.6 A max.
4.3 A max.
5.0 A max.
6.8 A max.
6.2 A max.
Between DC power supply and controller FG: 20 M or higher (rated voltage 250 V)
DC Power Supply
Direct infusion: 2 KV Pulse rising: 5 ns Pulse width: 50 ns Burst continuation time: 15 ms/0.75 ms Period: 300 ms
Application time: 1 min
I/O line
Cramp: 1 KV Pulse rising: 5 ns Pulse width: 50 ns Burst continuation time: 15 ms/0.75 ms Period: 300 ms
Application time: 1 min
Operating: 0 to 50 C Storage: 20 to 65 C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient atmosphere
No corrosive gases
Grounding
Type D grounding (100 or less grounding resistance) Conventional type 3 grounding
IEC60529 IP20
Dimensions
190 115 182.5 mm
Weight
Approx. 3.2 kg
Case materials
Cover: zinc-plated steel plate, side plate: aluminum (A6063)
Accessories
*1
*2
Fast transient burst
4.2 A max.
Approx. 3.4 kg
Approx. 3.4 kg
Approx. 3.2 kg
Approx. 3.4 kg
Approx. 3.4 kg
Controller (1)/user manual (one Japanese and one English versions)/Instruction Installation Manual (1)/Power
supply terminal block connector (1)/Ferrite core (2, FH-3050 and FH-1050), 4 (FH-3050-10 and FH-1050-10), and
8 (FH-3050-20 and FH-1050-20)
The image logging capacity changes when multiple cameras of different types are connected at the same time.
The current consumption when the maximum number of cameras supported by each controller are connected. If a lighting controller model is connected to a lamp, the current consumption
is as high as when an intelligent compact camera is connected.
341
Ratings
When connected to a
Current
consumption intelligent compact
(at 24.0 VDC) *2 camera
Xpectia FH/FZ5
Inspection systems
FZ5 sensor controllers

Type
Model
Lite controllers
NPN
FZ5-1100
FZ5-1100-10
FZ5-600
FZ5-600-10
FZ5-L350
FZ5-L350-10
PNP
FZ5-1105
FZ5-1105-10
FZ5-605
FZ5-605-10
FZ5-L355
FZ5-L355-10
Controller type
Controllers integrated with LCD
High-grade processing items
No
No. of cameras
Connected camera
Can be connected to FZ-S series.

(Can not be connected to FH-S series.)
Processing
resolution
When connected to a intelligent compact camera
752 (H) 480 (V)
640 (H) 480 (V)
1,600 (H) 1,200 (V)
2,448 (H) 2,044 (V)
No. of scenes
Number of logged
images*1
2
Can be connected to FZ-S series. (Can not be connected to FH-S series.

When connecting 5 million-pixel cameras, up to two cameras can be connected.)
32
When connected to a
intelligent compact
camera
When connected to a
300,000-pixel camera
When connected to a
When connected to a
Connected to 1 camera
232
214
116
107
77
71
58
53
Color camera: 270,

Monochrome Camera: 272
Color camera: 250, Monochrome Camera: 252
Color camera: 135,

Color camera: 90,

Color camera: 67,

Color camera: 43,

Color camera: 21,

Color camera: 14,

Color camera: 10,

Color camera: 16,

Color camera: 8,
Color camera: 5,
Color camera: 4,
Operation
Touch pen, mouse, etc.
Settings
Create series of processing steps by editing the flowchart (Help messages provided).
Mouse or similar device
Serial communications
RS-232C/422A: 1 CH
RS-232: 1CH
EtherNet communications
Ethernet 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
Ethernet 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/
10BASE-T
EtherNet/IP communications
Ethernet port baud rate: 100 Mbps (100Base-TX)
Parallel I/O
(When used in Multi-line randomtrigger mode)

17 inputs (RESET, STEP0/
ENCTRIG_Z0, STEP1/ENCTRIG_Z1,
DSA0 to 1, ENCTRIG_A0 to 1,
ENCTRIG_B0 to 1, DI0 to 7),
29 outputs (RUN/BUSY1, BUSY0,
GATE0 to 1, OR0 to 1, READY0 to 1,
ERROR, STGOUT0 to 3, DO0 to 15)
(When used in other mode)
ENCTRIG_Z0, DSA0, ENCTRIG_A0,
ENCTRIG_B0, DI0 to 7),
26 outputs (RUN, BUSY0, GATE0,
OR0, READY0, ERROR, STGOUT0 to 3,
DO0 to 15)
STGOUT 2 to 3 only for camera 4 ch
type
Monitor interface
Integrated controller and LCD 12.1 inch TFT color LCD

(Resolution: XGA 1,024 768 dots)

ENCTRIG_Z0, DSA0, ENCTRIG_A0,
ENCTRIG_B0, DI0 to 7),
26 outputs (RUN, BUSY0, GATE0,
OR0, READY0, ERROR, STGOUT0 to 3,
DO0 to 15)
type
USB interface
4 channels (supports USB 1.1 and 2.0)
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Power supply voltage*2
When connected to a intelligent compact camera
5.0 A max.
7.5 A max.
5.0 A max.
Current
consumption
When connected to a intelligent or autofocus camera
*3
(at 24.0 VDC)
3.7 A max.
4.9 A max.
3.7 A max.
342
11 inputs (RESET, STEP, DSA, and DI

0 to 7),
26 outputs (RUN, BUSY, GATE, OR,
READY, ERROR, STGOUT 0 to 3, and
DO 0 to 15)
type
Analog RGB video output, 1 channel

(Resolution: XGA 1,024 768 dots)
2CH (supports USB1.1/2.0)
7.5 A max.
4.0 A max.
5.5 A max.
4.9 A max.
2.6 A max.
2.9 A max.
Xpectia FH/FZ5
Inspection systems
Type
Model
Lite controllers
NPN
FZ5-1100
FZ5-1100-10
FZ5-600
FZ5-600-10
FZ5-L350
FZ5-L350-10
PNP
FZ5-1105
FZ5-1105-10
FZ5-605
FZ5-605-10
FZ5-L355
FZ5-L355-10
Operating: 0 to 45C for low cooling fan speeds, 0 to 50C for high cooling Operating: 0 to 45C, 0 to 50C
fan speeds
Storage: 20 to 65C
Weight
Approx. 3.2 kg
Accessories
Touch pen (one, inside the front panel), Instruction manual, 6 mounting Instruction manual
brackets
Approx. 3.4 kg
Approx. 3.2 kg
Approx. 3.4 kg
Approx. 1.8 kg
*1
*2
The image logging capacity changes when multiple cameras of different types are connected at the same time.
Do not ground the positive terminal of the 24-VDC power supply to a Lite controller.
If the positive terminal is grounded, electrical shock may occur when an SG (0-V) part, such as the case of the controller or camera, is touched.
*3
The current consumption when the maximum number of cameras supported by each controller are connected.
If a strobe controller model is connected to a lamp, the current consumption is as high as when an intelligent camera is connected.
Cameras
High-speed CMOS cameras
Model
FH-SM
Image elements
CMOS image elements

(1/3-inch equivalent)
FH-SM02
Color/Monochrome
Monochrome
Effective pixels
640 (H) 480 (V)
2,040 (H) 1,088 (V)
2,040 (H) 2,048 (V)
4,084 (H) 3,072 (V)
Imaging area H V
(opposing corner)
4.8 3.6 (6.0 mm)
11.26 5.98 (12.76 mm)
11.26 11.26 (15.93 mm)
22.5 16.9 (28.14 mm)
Pixel size
7.4 (m) 7.4 (m)
5.5 (m) 5.5 (m)
5.5 (m) 5.5 (m)
5.5 (m) 5.5 (m)
Shutter function
Electronic shutter;
Electronic shutter;
Shutter speeds can be set from 20 s to Shutter speeds can be set from 25 s to 100 ms.
100 ms.
Partial function
1 to 480 lines
Frame rate
(image read time)
308 fps (3.3 ms)
Lens mounting
C mount
Field of vision,
installation distance
Selecting a lens according to the field of vision and installation distance
Color
2 to 480 lines
FH-SC02
FH-SM04
FH-SC04
FH-SM12
FH-SC12
CMOS image elements

(2/3-inch equivalent)
CMOS image elements

(1-inch equivalent)
CMOS image elements

(1.76-inch equivalent)
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
1 to 1,088 lines
Color
2 to 1,088 lines
219 fps (4.6 ms)*1
1 to 2,048 lines
Color
Color
Electronic shutter;
Shutter speeds can be set from 60 s to
100 ms.
2 to 2,048 lines
118 fps (8.5 ms)*1
4 to 3,072 lines (4-line increments)

38.9 fps (25.7 ms)*1
M42 mount
Ambient temperature range Operating: 0 to 40 C, Storage: 25 to 65 C (with no icing or condensation)

Weight
Approx.105 g
Accessories
Instruction manual
*1
Approx.110 g
Approx.320 g
Frame rate in high speed mode when the camera is connected using two camera cables.
Digital CCD cameras

Model
FZ-S
Image elements
Interline transfer reading all pixels,

1/3-inch CCD image elements
FZ-SC
Color/Monochrome
Monochrome
Effective pixels
640 (H) 480 (V)
1,600 (H) 1,200 (V)
2,448 (H) 2,044 (V)
Pixel size
7.4 (m) 7.4 (m)
4.4 (m) 4.4 (m)
3.45 (m) 3.45 (m)
Shutter function
Electronic shutter; select shutter speeds from 20 s to 100 ms
Partial function
12 to 480 lines
12 to 1,200 lines
12 to 2,044 lines
Frame rate
(image read time)
80 fps (12.5 ms)
30 fps (33.3 ms)
16 fps (62.5 ms)
Lens mounting
C-mount
Field of vision,
Color

Storage: 25 to 65C
FZ-S2M
FZ-SC2M
FZ-S5M2
FZ-SC5M2

1/1.8-inch CCD image elements

2/3-inch CCD image elements
Monochrome
Monochrome
Color
Color
Operating: 0 to 40C
Storage: 25 to 65C
Weight
Approx. 55 g
Accessories
Instruction manual
Approx. 76 g
Approx.140 g
343
FH-SC
Xpectia FH/FZ5
Inspection systems
Small CCD Digital cameras

Model
FZ-SF
Image elements
Interline transfer reading all pixels, 1/3-inch CCD image elements
FZ-SFC
Color/Monochrome
Monochrome
Effective pixels
640 (H) 480 (V)
Pixel size
7.4 (m) 7.4 (m)
Shutter function
Electronic shutter; select shutter speeds from 20 m to 100 ms
Partial function
12 to 480 lines
Frame rate
(image read time)
80 fps (12.5 ms)
Lens mounting
Special mount (M10.5 P0.5)
Field of vision,
Color
FZ-SP
FZ-SPC
Monochrome
Color
Ambient temperature range Operating: 0 to 50C (camera amp)

0 to 45C (camera head)
Weight
Approx. 150 g
Accessories
Instruction manual, installation bracket,

Four mounting brackets (M2)
Instruction manual
High-speed CCD cameras

Model
FZ-SH
Image elements
Interline transfer reading all pixels, 1/3-inch CCD image elements
FZ-SHC
Color/Monochrome
Monochrome
Effective pixels
640 (H) 480 (V)
Pixel size
7.4 (m) 7.4 (m)
Shutter function
Electronic shutter; select shutter speeds from 1/10 to 1/50,000 s
Partial function
12 to 480 lines
Frame rate
(image read time)
204 fps (4.9ms)
Field of vision,
Color

Weight
Approx. 105 g
Accessories
Instruction manual
Intelligent Compact CMOS cameras

Model
FZ-SQ010F
Image elements
1/3-inch CMOS image elements
FZ-SQ050F
FZ-SQ100F
FZ-SQ100N
Color/Monochrome
Color
Effective pixels
752 (H) 480 (V)
Pixel size
6.0 (m) 6.0 (m)
Shutter function
1/250 to 1/32,258
Partial function
8 to 752 lines
Frame rate
(image read time)
60 fps
Field of vision
7.5 4.7 to 13 8.2 mm
13 8.2 to 53 33 mm
53 33 to 240 153 mm
29 18 to 300 191 mm
38 to 60 mm
56 to 215 mm
220 to 970 mm
LED class*1
Class 2
32 to 380 mm

Storage: 25 to 65C
Weight
Approx. 150 g
Accessories
Mounting bracket (FQ-XL), polarizing filter attachment (FQ-XF1), instruction manual and warning label
*1
Applicable standards: IEC62471-2
344
Approx. 140 g
Xpectia FH/FZ5
Inspection systems
LCD Monitor
Long-distance camera cables
Model
FZ-M08
Model
FZ-VS4 (15 m)
Size
8.4 inches
Type
Liquid crystal Color TFT
Shock resistiveness
(durability)
10 to 150 Hz single amplitude 0.15 mm

3 directions, 8 strokes, 4 times
Resolution
1,024 768 dots
Input signal
Analog RGB video input, 1 channel
Ambient
temperature range
Operation and storage: 0 to 65 C

21.6 to 26.4 VDC
Operation and storage: 40% to 70%RH

Current consumption
Approx. 0.7 A max.
Ambient atmosphere
No corrosive gases
Ambient temperature
range
Operating: 0 to 50C; Storage: 25 to 65C

Material
Cable sheath, connector: PVC
Weight
Approx. 1.2 kg
Accessories
Instruction sheet and 4 mounting brackets
FZ-VS3
(2 m)
Shock resistiveness
(durability)
10 to 150 Hz single amplitude 0.15 mm

3 directions, 8 strokes, 4 times
Ambient
temperature range
Operation and storage: 0 to 65 C


Ambient atmosphere
No corrosive gases
Material
Cable sheath, connector: PVC
Minimum bending radius 69 mm
69 mm
FZ-VSL3
(2 m)
Weight
Approx. 1,400 g
FZ-VSLB3
(2 m)
Model
FZ-VP
Vibration resistiveness
10 to 150 Hz single amplitude 0.15 mm 3 directions, 8 strokes,

4 times
FZ-VPX
Ambient temperature
range
Operation: 0 to 50C; Storage: 20 to 65C


Ambient atmosphere
No corrosive gases
Material
Cable sheath: heat-resistant PVC, Connector: resin

Weight
69 mm
69 mm
Approx. 160 g
Approx. 180 g
Note: FZ-VP/FZ-VPX is only for the FZ series. The FH series can use XW2Z-S013-2/-S013-5.
Approx. 170 g Approx. 180 g Approx. 170 g Approx. 180 g
Encoder cable
Monitor cable
Model
FZ-VM

4 times
Ambient temperature
range


Ambient atmosphere
No corrosive gases
Material
Cable sheath: heat-resistant PVC, connector: PVC
Model
FH-VR

10 times
Ambient temperature
range


Ambient atmosphere
No corrosive gases
Material
Cable Jacket: Heat, oil and flame resistant PVC

Connector: polycarbonate resin
Weight
Weight
Approx. 170 g
Approx. 104 g
Cable extension unit

Model
FZ-VSJ
Power supply voltage*1
11.5 to 13.5 VDC
Current consumption*2
1.5 A max.
Ambient temperature
range
Operating: 0 to 50C; Storage: 25 to 65C

Maximum units
connectable
2 Units per camera
Weight
Approx. 240 g
Accessories
Instruction sheet and 4 mounting screws
*1
A 12-VDC power supply must be provided to the cable extension unit when connecting
the Intelligent camera, the Autofocus camera, the Intelligent compact camera, the Strobe
controller, or the Lighting controller.
*2
The current consumption shows when connecting the cable extension unit to an external
power supply.
345
Weight
FZ-VSB3
(2 m)
Parallel cable
Camera cables
Model
FZ-VSL4 (15 m)
Xpectia FH/FZ5
Inspection systems
Cameras/Cables connection table

Type of camera
Camera Cables
Right-angle
camera cables
Bend resistant
camera cables
Long-distance
camera cable
Long-distance
right-angle
camera cable
*1
Model
FZ-VS3
FZ-VSL3
FZ-VSB3
FZ-VSLB3
FZ-VS4
FZ-VSL4
Cable
length
High-speed CMOS cameras*1

300,000-pixel
2 million-pixel
4 million-pixel
12 million-pixel
FH-SM/SC
FH-SM02/SC02
FH-SM04/SC04
FH-SM12/SC12
High speed mode of Standard mode of High speed mode of Standard mode of High speed mode of Standard mode of
transmission speed transmission speed transmission speed transmission speed transmission speed transmission speed
select
select
select
select
select
select
2m
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
3m
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
5m
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
10 m
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
2m
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
3m
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
5m
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
10 m
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
15 m
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
300,000-pixel
2 million-pixel
5 million-pixel
Small digital
High-speed
CCD cameras
CCD cameras
Pen type/flat type
Intelligent
compact CMOS
cameras
FZ-S/SC
FZ-S2M/SC2M
FZ-S5M2/SC5M2
FZ-SF/SFC
FZ-SP/SPC
FZ-SH/SHC
FZ-SQ@
2m
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
3m
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
5m
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
10 m
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
High-speed CMOS camera is only for the FH series.
Type of
camera
Camera Cables
Right-angle
camera cables
Bend resistant
camera cables
Long-distance
camera cable
Long-distance
right-angle
camera cable
Model
FZ-VS3
FZ-VSL3
FZ-VSB3
FZ-VSLB3
FZ-VS4
FZ-VSL4
Cable
length
Digital CCD cameras
2m
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
3m
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
5m
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
10 m
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
15 m
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
EtherCAT communications specifications

Item
Specifications
IEC61158 Type 12
Physical layer
100 BASE-TX (IEEE802.3)
Modulation
Base band
Baud rate
100 Mbps
Topology
Depends on the specifications of the EtherCAT master.
Transmission media
Twisted-pair cable of category 5 or higher (double-shielded straight cable with aluminum tape and braiding)
Transmission distance
Distance between nodes: 100 m or less
Node address setting
00 to 9
External connection terminals
RJ45 2 (shielded) IN: EtherCAT input data, OUT: EtherCAT output data
Send/receive PDO data sizes Input

Mailbox data size
56 to 280 bytes/line (including input data, status, and unused areas) Up to 8 lines can be set.*1
Output
28 bytes/line (including output data and unused areas) Up to 8 lines can be set.*1
Input
512 bytes
Output
512 bytes
Mailbox
Emergency messages, SDO requests, and SDO information
Refreshing methods
I/O-synchronized refreshing (DC)
*1
This depends on the upper limit of the master.
Version information
FH Series and programming devices
FH series
Required programming device

Sysmac Studio Standard Edition/Vision Edition
FH-3050 (-_)
FH-1050 (-_)
Ver.1.06
Ver.1.07 or higher
Not supported
Supported
Note: 1. The auto-update to Sysmac Studio version 1.07 will be available soon.
2. Sysmac Studio does not support the FZ5 series.
346
Xpectia FH/FZ5
Inspection systems
Components and functions

Example of the FH sensor controllers BOX type
(4-camera type)
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
H
I
B
J
K
[11]
C
[7]
[12]
[13]
[8]
[14]
[10]
[9]
D
E
Name
Description
[1]
POWER LED
Lit while power is ON.
[2]
ERROR LED
Lit when an error has occurred.
[3]
RUN LED
Lit while the controller is in Measurement Mode.
[4]
ACCESS LED
Lit while the memory is accessed.
[5]
SD POWER LED
Lit while power is supplied to the SD card and the card is usable.
[6]
SD BUSY LED
Blinks while the SD memory card is accessed.
[7]
EtherCAT RUN LED
Lit while EtherCAT communications are usable.
[8]
EtherCAT LINK/ACT IN LED
Lit when connected with an EtherCAT device, and blinks while performing communications.
[9]
EtherCAT LINK/ACT OUT LED
Lit when connected with an EtherCAT device, and blinks while performing communications.
[10]
EtherCAT ERR LED
Lit when EtherCAT communications have become abnormal.
[11]
EtherNet NET RUN1 LED
Lit while EtherNet communications are usable.
[12]
EtherNet NET LINK/ACK1 LED
Lit when connected with an EtherNet device, and blinks while performing communications.
[13]
EtherNet NET RUN2 LED
Lit when EtherNet communications are usable.
[14]
EtherNet NET LINK/ACK2 LED
Lit when connected with an EtherNet device, and blinks while performing communications.
Name
Description
SD memory card installation connector
Install the SD memory card. Do not plug or unplug the SD card during measurement operation.
Otherwise measurement time may be affected or data may be destroyed.
EtherNet connector
Connect an EtherNet device.
USB connector
Connect a USB device. Do not plug or unplug it during measurement operation.

Otherwise measurement time may be affected or data may be destroyed.
RS-232C connector
Connect an external device such as a programmable controller.
DVI-I connector
Connect a monitor.
Connect the controller to external devices such as a sync sensor and PLC.
I/O connector (control lines, data lines)
EtherCAT address setup volume
Used to set a node address (00 to 99) as an EtherCAT communication device.
EtherCAT communication connector (IN)
Connect the opposed EtherCAT device.
EtherCAT communication connector (OUT)
Connect the opposed EtherCAT device.
Encoder connector
Connect an encoder.
Camera connector
Connect cameras.
Power supply terminal connector
Connect a DC power supply. Wire the controller independently on other devices. Wire the ground line. Be sure to ground the controller
alone. Perform wiring using the attached power supply connector.
Example of the FZ5 sensor controllers

LCD-integrated type
Left-side view
(4-camera type)
Front view
Right-side view
[9]
Example of the FZ5-Lite sensor controllers

LCD-integrated type
[1]
[2]
(4-camera type)
[4]
[6] [7]
[8]
[3]
[9]
[10]
[8]
[11]
[11]
[4]
[5]
[5]
[10]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[10]
[6]
[12]
Name
Description
[1]
POWER LED
Lit while power is ON.
[2]
RUN LED
Lit while the controller is in Run Mode.
[3]
ERROR LED
Lit when an error has occurred.
[4]
I/O connector (control lines, data lines)
Connect the controller to external devices such as a sync sensor and PLC.
[5]
Camera connector
Connect cameras.
[6]
Power
Connect a DC power supply. Wire the power supply unit independently of other devices. After wiring, replace the terminal cover.
[7]
Ground terminal
Connect the ground wire. Make sure that the controller is grounded with a separate ground wire.
[8]
Monitor connector (analog RGB)
Connect a monitor. (Provided with Lite controller type only)
[9]
RS-232C/RS-422 connector
Connect an external device such as a personal computer or PLC.
[10]
USB connector
Connect a track ball, mouse and USB memory. A total of four USB ports are provided and any of them can be used. However, when connecting two or more USB memories, do not connect them to adjacent ports. Doing so may cause the USB memories to come into contact,
resulting in malfunction or damage.
[11]
EtherNet connector
Connect the controller to a personal computer.
[12]
Touch pen (holder)
A touch pen is stored. (Provided with the LCD integrated type only)
347
Vision tailored and t for industry
FlexXpect vision platform

FlexXpect is a modular Vision platform featuring industry specic functionality. In combination with the powerful
Xpectia-hardware, the FlexXpect software modules take you into a new dimension of specialisation. FlexXpect
is simple to use and can be customised easily, to focus on your individual needs. The combination of Xpectias
real colour sensing, high resolution and intuitive user guidance combined with the FlexXpect value added tools
represents an unbeatable duo.
Depending on industry, dierent requirements and regulations are in place for quality inspection. Premium class
add-on functionality, tailored for industry, is delivered by FlexXpect.
Simplicity easy to use
Customised to your needs
FlexXpect features an easy and intuitive user interface,

which allows inspection solutions to be set-up quickly
and eciently. With a built in touch screen interface
and icon based menu structure, the complexity of
programming the system is kept to a minimum. The
Flow-Menu is an ideal tool to re-built the process
sequences inside the vision platform.
The FlexXpect platform can be further customized to

the needs of the individual application. Dierent levels
of product modications are supported. Based on the
skill of the user and required functionality it oers:
Flow programming
GUI modications
Processing items & communication
348
Your benefits
FlexXpect-Glue Bead: Automatic one shot seal
inspection
FlexXpect-Pharma: 21 CFR Part 11 compliant
FlexXpect-Labelling: 360 bottle inspection
FlexXpect-PV: alignment & inspection of wafers
349
FlexXpect Pharma
FlexXpect is a modular Vision platform. In combination with the powerful Xpectia-hardware, it takes you
into a new dimension of specialisation. The FlexXpect-Pharma is targeting challenging inspections in the
Pharmaceutical industry. It oers powerful inspection tools and all functions, necessary for the validation under
the FDA 21 CFR Part 11. With the powerful code verication and OCR features, FlexXpect-Pharma is the ideal
solution for Track & Trace applications.
Inspect any applications in Pharma:
Blister pack
Vials
Syringes
Label inspection
Inspect any applications in Pharma
Pill inspection in blisters
Polar transformation of round strings
Date/Batch code verication (OCR/OCV)
High speed code reading
350
Your benefits
Strong OCR/OCV
(any font & print type)
Barcode/Datamatrix
Braille
Pattern and edge tools
Real colour inspection
High resolution to detect
minute defects
Optimize your set-up with a click
User access administration
Audit trail
Generate and export conguration

data
Item description
Order code
Quick Link
FlexXpect-Pharma software module
FLEXXPECT-PHARMA
G634
Note: FlexXpect software modules require Xpectia/FZW hardware. This is not part of the item and needs to be ordered independently.
351
FlexXpect Labelling
FlexXpect is a modular Vision platform. In combination with the powerful Xpectia-hardware, it takes you into
a new dimension of specialisation. FlexXpect-Labelling has been designed to deliver tailored functionality for
inspection of labels and packages.
Powerful image processing tools for labelling:
OCR/OCV
Barcode/Datamatrix
Pattern and edge tools
Real colour inspection
High resolution to detect minute defects
Label unwrapping from bottles for inspection of

premium beverages:
Acquire images from up to 4x cameras
Compensate the distortion
Identify the overlapping areas
Stitch the images together
Powerful image processing tools for labelling
Strong OCR/OCV
Polar transformation of round strings
Date/Batch code verication (OCR/OCV)
High speed code reading
352
Your benefits
Strong OCR/OCV
Code reading (Barcode, Datamatrix)
360 inspections of bottles
Real colour processing items
High resolution
Easy & intuitive conguration
Position and defect inspection

Produce aesthetically perfect products is a key point.
FlexXpect-Labelling oers a suite of image processing
tools to inspect the label for position and defects.
Reading different codes at a time

Two or more dierent codes in the same eld of view
can be read by utilizing a high resolution camera.This
function helps to reduce the inspection time.
Item description
Order code
Quick Link
FlexXpect-Labelling software module
FLEXXPECT-LABELLING
G633
353
FlexXpect Glue Bead

FlexXpect is a modular Vision platform. In combination with the powerful Xpectia-hardware, it takes you into a
new dimension of specialisation. The FlexXpect-Glue Bead inspects the complete sealing of automotive parts in
one shot. Driven by the real colour functionality, any sealing can be identied and checked, independent how
visible it is. Featuring a simple set-up procedure and automatic calculation of the path, it represents a powerful
and straight forward solution for any glue application.
Glue Bead inspection:
Correct path
Thickness
Interrupt
Inspect any applications in Pharma

FlexXpect-Glue Bead features an intuitive and easy set-up procedure. No expert knowledge of the user is required.
Step 1
Dene inspection area.
Step 2
Teach the glue.
Step 3
Dene start & end point of the glue.
Step 4
Automatic calculation of the path of the Glue Bead.
354
Your benefits
One shot inspection of the complete path
Easy set-up
Automatic path calculation
Real colour glue extraction
Item description
Order code
Quick Link
FlexXpect-Glue Bead software module
FLEXXPECT-GLUE BEAD
G632
355
FlexXpect PV
FlexXpect is a modular Vision platform. In combination with the powerful Xpectia hardware, it takes you into a
new dimension of specialisation. FlexXpect-PV delivers tailored functionality for alignment and the inspection of
wafers for chips and cracks.
Feautures of FlexXpect-PV:
Easy and intuitive set-up
Automatic extraction and teaching of the PV wafer
Precise inspections with high resolution cameras
Automatic robot calibration
Fade-out strings and conveyor belts
Supported PV inspections:
Precise wafer and string alignment
Accurate chamfer chip inspection
Detection of minute edge cracks
Bus bar alignment on the wafer
Quick set-up in simple steps:
Step 1:
Select the inspection function
Step 2:
Draw a rectangle around the wafer
Step 3:
One step deletion of bus bars and conveyor belts
(optional)
Step 4:
Start the inspectionAccurate chamfer chip inspection
(0.1 mm)
356
Bus bar alignment
Outline adge alignment
Precise detection of edge breakage
Your benefits
One shot inspection of the complete path
Easy set-up
Automatic path calculation
Real colour glue extraction
Item description
Order code
Quick Link
FlexXpect-PV software module
FLEXXPECT-PV
G636
357
V680 RFID System

One for all
Whenever you need to have full transparency of your production process or logistic application V680 is helping
you to manage your data most comfortably and reliably.
Diagnostic functions for maintenance

One for all: modular platform concept
Flexible installation: long reach antennas
Fit for speed: high turn around time
Save time & costs: easy setup & maintenan
Production ID system for the paint shop

A RFID system is used to store the process parameters
needed for the production of the car throughout the
process. Harsh conditions through chemicals and high
temperatures occur during the production steps. RFID
is ideal for this application as it features high resistance
tags for harsh conditions.
358
Monitoring of the moulding history

Process and maintenance related information of a
moulding press can be stored by using RFID. The
information can be read out permanently or on
demand from a remote location and can be used to
control the process.
Your benefits
High speed air communication
Standardized protocol (ISO 15693)
Large memory (up to 32kByte) and very
compact tags
Long life time of tags (FERAM variants)
All protocols for PLC communication
Traceability of automotive parts

Track the parts in the production process. Process
related information can be stored to guarantee high
quality production.
Carrier Management
For the administration and traceability of transport
carriers along the hole process RFID represents a smart
solution. V680 is working on the standardized universal
frequency of 13.56MHz. The exible platform with its
versatile and compact design can be easily integrated
into any point in the production process.
359
360
V680S series
RFID system
3 in 1 RFID: Antenna, amplifier & controller
Conforms to ISO/IEC 18000-3 (15693).
Standard-feature Ethernet (Modbus TCP) enables easy connection with one cable.
Easy installation and visualized communications status minimize startup work
and downtime.
WEB browser can be used for setting, monitoring, and communications with RF
tags.
V680S-series
Type
Memory capacity
Battery-less
2 kbytes
Appearance
Size
Installation
Order code
40 40 5 mm
For flush mounting on metallic surface
V680S-D2KF67M
For flush mounting on nonmetallic surface
V680S-D2KF67
V680S-D2KF68M
V680S-D2KF68
V680S-D8KF67M*1
V680S-D8KF67*1
V680S-D8KF68M*1
V680S-D8KF68*1
86 54 10 mm
8 kbytes
40 40 5 mm
86 54 10 mm
*1
RF tag
V680S-D8KF6_M/V680S-D8KF6_ can be used with V680S series Reader/Writer version 2.00 or higher.
V680-series
RF tag
Type
Memory capacity
Battery-less
1 kbyte
Appearance
Size
Installation
Order code
20 dia. 2.7 mm
V680-D1KP54T
34 34 3.5 mm
V680-D1KP66MT
V680-D1KP66T
Environment-resistant type
Battery-less
95 36.5 6.5 mm
V680-D1KP66T-SP
High-temperature type
Battery-less
80 dia. t10 mm
For mounting with special attachment
V680-D1KP58HTN
Note: V680 series 8kbyte RF Tag (V680-D8KF67,V680-D8KF67M and V680-D8KF68A) can communicate with V680S series Reader/Writer. For details, refer to the User's Manual (Cat. No. Z339).
Reader/Writer
Type
Reader/Writer
Appearance
Size
Interface
Order code
75 75 40 mm
Ethernet (TCP/IP: Modbus TCP)
V680S-HMD64-ETN
120 120 40 mm
Ethernet (TCP/IP: Modbus TCP)
V680S-HMD66-ETN
361
V680S series
RFID system
RF tag attachment
Type
Appearance
Order code
For the V680-D1KP66T
V600-A86
For the V680-D1KP58HTN
V680-A80
For the V680-D1KP54T
V700-A80
Cable
Type
Appearance
Special connector --- RJ45
Special connector --- Loose wires
Length
Order code
2m
V680S-A41 2M
5m
V680S-A41 5M
10 m
V680S-A41 10M
2m
V680S-A42 2M
5m
V680S-A42 5M
10 m
V680S-A42 10M
Extension cable
Type
Appearance
Special connector --- Special connector
Length
Order code
10 m
V680S-A40 10M
20 m
V680S-A40 20M
50 m
V680S-A40 50M
Note: The maximum extendable cable length using the cable and extension cable is 60 m. Only one extension cable can be used.
Industrial switching hubs (Recommended hubs)

Type
Industrial switching hubs
362
Appearance
Specifications
Order code
Functions
No. of ports
Failure detection
Quality of Service (QoS):

EtherNet/IP control data priority
Failure detection:
Broadcast storm and LSI error detection
10/100BASE-TX, Auto-Negotiation
No
W4S1-03B
No
W4S1-05B
Yes
W4S1-05C
V680S series
RFID system
Specifications
V680S-series
RF tag (2-kbyte Memory)
Item
V680S-D2KF67
Memory capacity
2,000bytes (user area)
V680S-D2KF67M
V680S-D2KF68
Memory type
FRAM
Data retention
10 years after writing (85C or less)
Memory life
One trillion writes for each block (85C or less), Access frequency*1: One trillion accesses
V680S-D2KF68M
Ambient operating temperature 20 to 85C (with no icing)

35% to 85%
IP68 (IEC 60529:2001), Oil resistance equivalent to IP67G (JIS C 0920:2003, Appendix 1)*2.
IPX9K (DIN 40 050)
No abnormality after application of 10 to 2,000 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude, No abnormality after application of 10 to 500 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude,
acceleration: 150 m/s2, 10 sweeps each in X, Y, and Z directions for 15 minutes acceleration: 100 m/s2, 10 sweeps each in X, Y, and Z directions for 11 minutes
each
each
Shock resistance
No abnormality after application of 500 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions (Total: 18 times)
Dimensions (WHD)
40 40 5 mm
Materials
Exterior: PPS resin
Weight
Approx. 11.5 g
Approx. 12 g
Approx. 44 g
Approx. 46 g
Metal countermeasures
None
Provided
None
Provided
V680S-D8KF68
V680S-D8KF68M
*1
*2
86 54 10 mm
The number of accesses is the total number of reads and writes.

Oil resistance has been tested using a specific oil as defined in the OMRON test method.
Note: For details, refer to the Users Manual (Cat. No. Z339).
Item
V680S-D8KF67
Memory capacity
8,192 bytes (user area)
V680S-D8KF67M
Memory type
FRAM
Data retention
Memory life
One trillion writes for each block (85C or less), Access frequency*1: One trillion accesses
RF Tag (8-kbyte Memory)

35% to 85%
IP68 (IEC 60529:2001), Oil resistance equivalent to IP67G (JIS C 0920:2003, Appendix 1)*2.
IPX9K (DIN 40 050)
No abnormality after application of 10 to 2,000 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude, No abnormality after application of 10 to 500 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude,
acceleration: 150 m/s2, 10 sweeps each in X, Y, and Z directions for 15 minutes acceleration: 100 m/s2, 10 sweeps each in X, Y, and Z directions for 11 minutes
each
each
Shock resistance
Dimensions (WHD)
40 40 5 mm
Materials
Exterior: PPS resin
Weight
Approx. 11.5 g
Approx. 12 g
Approx. 44 g
Approx. 46 g
None
Provided
None
Provided
*1
*2
86 54 10 mm
The number of accesses is the total number of reads and writes.

Note: For details, refer to the Users Manual (Cat. No. Z339).
V680-series
RF Tag (1-kbyte Memory)
Item
V680-D1KP54T
Memory capacity
V680-D1KP66T
Memory type
EEPROM
Data retention time
10 years after writing (85C or less), 0.5 year after writing (85 to 125C)
Total data retention at high temperatures exceeding 125C is 10 hours*1
Write endurance
100,000 writes for each block (25C)
V680-D1KP66MT

(during transmission)
V680-D1KP66T-SP
During RF Tag communications:

Not during RF Tag communications:

(during data backup)

Heat resistance: 1,000 thermal cycles each of 30 minutes at 10C/150C,
High temperature storage: 1,000 hours at 150C*2
200 thermal cycles each of 30 minutes at 10C/180C,
High temperature storage: 200 hours at 180C*3
35 to 95%
IP67 (IEC 60529:2001)

Oil resistance equivalent to IP67G
(JIS C 0920:2003, Appendix 1)*4
No abnormality after application of 10 to 2,000 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude,

acceleration: 150 m/s2, 10 sweeps each in X, Y, and Z directions for 15 minutes each
Shock resistance
IP68 (IEC 60529:2001)

Oil resistance equivalent to IP67G
(JIS C 0920:2003, Appendix 1)*4
IP67
363
V680S series
RFID system
Item
V680-D1KP54T
V680-D1KP66T
Appearance
20 dia. 2.7 mm
34 34 3.5 mm
V680-D1KP66MT
V680-D1KP66T-SP
Materials
PPS resin
Weight
Approx. 2 g
Approx. 6 g
Approx. 7.5 g
Approx. 20 g
None
None
Provided
None
95 36.5 6.5 mm
(excluding protruding parts)
Exterior: PFA fluororesin
RF Tag filling: PPS resin
*1
*2
After storing data at high temperatures, rewrite the data even if changes are not required. High temperatures are those exceeding 125C up to 180C.
150C heat resistance: The heat resistance has been checked at 150C for up to 1,000 hours, and thermal shock has been checked through testing 1,000 thermal cycles each of 30 minutes at
10/150C. (Test samples: 22, defects: 0)
*3 180C heat resistance: The heat resistance has been checked at 180C for up to 200 hours, and thermal shock has been checked through testing 200 thermal cycles each of 30 minutes at
10C/180C. (Test samples: 22, defects: 0)
*4
Note: For details, refer to the User's Manual (Cat. No. Z339).
RF Tag (1-kbyte Memory with High-temperature Capability)

Item
V680-D1KP58HTN
Memory capacity
Memory type
EEPROM
Data retention
10 years after writing (85C or less), 0.5 year after writing (85 to 125C)
Total data retention at high temperatures exceeding 125C is 10 hours*1
Write endurance
100,000 writes for each block (25C)

(during transmission)
(during data backup)

(Data retention: 40 to 125C)
Ambient storage humidity
No restrictions.
IP67 (IEC 60529:2001)

Oil resistance equivalent to IP67G (JIS C 0920:2003, Appendix 1)*2
No abnormality after application of 10 to 2,000 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude, acceleration: 150 m/s2,
10 sweeps each in X, Y, and Z directions for 15 minutes each
Shock resistance
Materials
Exterior: PPS resin
Weight
Approx. 70 g
*1
*2
After storing data at high temperatures, rewrite the data even if changes are not required. High temperatures are those exceeding
Note: For details, refer to the User's Manual (Cat. No. Z339).
Reader/Writer
Item
V680S-HMD64-ETN
V680S-HMD66-ETN
Dimensions (WHD)
75 75 40 mm (excluding protruding parts)
120 120 40 mm (excluding protruding parts)
24 VDC (15% to 10%)
Consumption current
0.2 A max.

25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Ambient storage humidity
25% to 85% (with no condensation)
20 M min. (at 500 VDC) between cable terminals and case
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between cable terminals and case
No abnormality after application of 10 to 500 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude, acceleration: 100 m/s2, 10 sweeps in each of 3 axis directions (up/down, left/
right, and forward/backward) for 11 minutes each
Shock resistance
No abnormality after application of 500 m/s2, 3 times each in 6 directions (Total: 18 times)
IP67 (IEC 60529: 2001)

Oil resistance equivalent to IP67F (JIS C 0920: 2003, Appendix 1)*1
Materials
Case: PBT resin, Filled resin: Urethane resin
Mass
Approx. 270g
Installation method
Four M4 screws (Use a screw of 12 mm or more in length.)
Host device communications

interface
Ethernet 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Host device communications

protocol
MODBUS TCP
Accessories
Instruction sheet, Copy of Description of Regulations and Standard, IP address label, Ferrite core*2
*1
*2
Provided only with the V680S-HMD66-ETN.
364
Approx. 640g
V680S series
RFID system
Host Device
1 to N connection
Host Device
1 to 1 connection
PLC/Machine Automation Controller
Personal Computer
PLC/Machine Automation Controller
Personal Computer
Ethernet
V680S-A41_M
V680S-A42_M
Cable length: 2/5/10 m
Extension Cable *2
Special connector-Special connector

V680S-A40_M
Reader/Writer
V680S-HMD64-ETN
V680S-HMD66-ETN
V680 series*5
V680S series
8K bytes
1K bytes
RF Tag
2K bytes
V680S-D2KF67
V680S-D2KF67M
V680S-D2KF68
V680S-D2KF68M
V680S-D8KF67*4
V680S-D8KF67M*4
V680-D1KP54T
V680-D1KP66T
V680-D1KP66MT
V680-D1KP66T-SP
V680-D1KP58HTN
V680S-D8KF68*4
V680S-D8KF68M*4
*1
A customer should treat wires terminal of the connector.

Only one extension cable can be used.
When the industrial Switching Hub is used, the maximum extendable cable length between the Reader/Writer and the Industrial Switching Hub is 60 m.
*4
V680S-D8KF6_M/V680S-D8KF6_ can be used with V680S series Reader/Writer version 2.00 or higher.
*5
V680 series 8K byte RF Tag (V680-D8KF67,V680-D8KF67M and V680-D8KF68A) can communicate with V680S series Reader/Writer. For details, refer to the User's Manual (Cat. No. Z339).
*2
*3
365
Special connectorLoose wires*1
Special connector-RJ45
Cable
Max. extended length: 60 m *3
Recommended Switching
HUB W4S1 (OMRON)
Ethernet
Measurement sensors
HIGH PRECISION QUALITY INSPECTION
Zero defect becomes reality scalable accuracy in inspection
The Smart displacement sensor family offers a modular and scalable approach to solve the most challenging
measurement tasks. The powerful portfolio enables you to measure profiles, thickness, distance, evenness/warpage,
as well as width, edge, etc. Several measurement profiles can be performed simultaneously, using a single- or
multi-controller unit. Aided by Omrons advanced technologies, the highest accuracy over long distances, speed and
reliability will be achieved.
Accurate and fast 0.25 m at less than 110 s sampling time
Scalable multi-controller unit to coordinate and calculate up to 9 units
Smart data storage and remote control via networking capabilities
Displacement
Laser
triangulation
Inductive
Contact
Diffuse (plastic),
mirror
All surfaces
366
White Light
Confocal Fiber
Principle
ZX1/ZX2
ZS-HL
ZX-L
ZW
ZX-E
ZX-T
C437, C436
Page 371/373
C425
Page 376
C426
Page 381
C438
Page 384
C427
Page 389
C428
Page 391
Measurement sensors
Profile
Position/
Diameter/Width
ZG2
ZX-GT
C422
Page 393
C435
Page 397
367
Selection table
Communication
Control I/O
Supply
voltage
Application
Features
Selection criteria
368
Model
ZX1/ZX2
ZS-HL
ZX-L
ZW
Measurement range Z Min.
5010 mm
100.5 mm
302 mm
7 mm
Max.
600400 mm
1500500 mm
300200 mm
40 mm
Measurement range X Min.
Max.
Resolution Z
1.5 m
0.25 m
0.25 m
0.01 m
Resolution X
Linearity (% of full scale)
0.05%
0.05%
0.2%
0.1%
Response time
60 s
110 s
150 s
500 s
Spot beam
Line beam
IP-rating head
IP67
IP64/IP67
IP50
IP40
IP-rating controller
IP40
IP40
IP40
IP20
Ambient oper. temperature
0 to 50C
0 to 50C
0 to 50C
0 to 40C
Number of connectable sensors
Thickness measurement
Eccentricity
Height
Step
Profile
Distance
Evenness
Warpage
Edge
Width
Peak
Peak to peak
Bottom
Self-trigger
Calibration
Signal scaling
PC-software
Mirror
Glass
Metal
Plastic
Black rubber
Paper
12 to 24 VDC
21.6 to 26.4 VDC
4 to 20 mA
1 to 5 VDC
Judgement output High/Pass/Low
Trigger
RS-232C
USB2.0
Page/Quick Link
371/373
376
381
384
Communication
Control I/O
Supply
voltage
Application
Features
Selection criteria
Profile sensor
Laser micrometer
ZX-GT
Model
ZX-E
ZX-T
ZG2
Measurement range Z Min.
0.5 mm
1 mm
20 0.5 mm
Max.
7 mm
10 mm
210 30 mm
28 mm
Measurement range X Min.
3 mm
Max.
70 mm
Resolution Z
1 m
0.1 m
0.2 m
10 m
Resolution X
3 mm/631 pixels
Linearity (% of full scale)
0.5%
0.3%
0.5%
0.1%
Response time
150 s
1 ms
5 ms
150 s
Spot beam
Line beam
IP-rating head
IP67
IP67
IP64/66
IP40
IP-rating controller
IP40
IP40
IP20
IP40
Ambient oper. temperature
0 to 50C
0 to 50C
0 to 50C
0 to 50C
Number of connectable sensors
Thickness measurement
Eccentricity
Height
Step
Profile
Distance
Evenness
Warpage
Edge
Width
Peak
Peak to peak
Bottom
Self-trigger
Calibration
Signal scaling
PC-software
Mirror
Glass
Metal
Plastic
Black rubber
Paper
12 to 24 VDC
21.6 to 26.4 VDC
4 to 20 mA
1 to 5 VDC
Judgement output High/Pass/Low
Trigger
RS-232C
USB2.0
Page/Quick Link
389
391
393
397
Standard
Available
Measurement sensors
Measurement sensors
No/not available
369
370
ZX1

Highest performance for optimized productivity
Highest performance is now available in matchbox size. We are defining a new class
of measurement sensors using an advanced HSDR-CMOS (High Speed and Dynamic
Range) camera chip.
Stable measurement for objects with any surface
Best in class performance for accuracy and speed
Compact size for quick mounting
Increased measurement range
Simple configuration by one-button, Smart Tuning
Reliable measurement in harsh environments
Integrated display
Sensors
Connection method
Cable length
NPN output
PNP output
Pre-wired
2m
5010 mm
ZX1-LD50A61 2M
ZX1-LD50A81 2M
5m
40 60
ZX1-LD50A61 5M
ZX1-LD50A81 5M
ZX1-LD50A66 0.5M
ZX1-LD50A86 0.5M
ZX1-LD100A61 2M
ZX1-LD100A81 2M
ZX1-LD100A61 5M
ZX1-LD100A81 5M
ZX1-LD100A66 0.5M
ZX1-LD100A86 0.5M
Pre-wired connector
Pre-wired
Pre-wired
Order code
0.5 m
2m
10035 mm
65
5m
Pre-wired connector
Sensing distance
135
0.5 m
2m
300150 mm
ZX1-LD300A61 2M
ZX1-LD300A81 2M
5m
150
ZX1-LD300A61 5M
ZX1-LD300A81 5M
450
Pre-wired connector
0.5 m
ZX1-LD300A66 0.5M
ZX1-LD300A86 0.5M
Pre-wired
2m
ZX1-LD600A61 2M
ZX1-LD600A81 2M
ZX1-LD600A61 5M
ZX1-LD600A81 5M
ZX1-LD600A66 0.5M
ZX1-LD600A86 0.5M
600400 mm
200
5m
Pre-wired connector
0.5 m
1,000
Measurement sensors
Appearance
Accessories (sold separately)

Extension cables for pre-wired connector models
An Extension cable is not provided with the sensor. Order an extension cable separately.
Cable length
Order code
10 m
ZX0-XC10R
20 m
ZX0-XC20R
371
ZX1
Specifications
Model
NPN output
ZX1-LD50A61
ZX1-LD50A66
ZX1-LD100A61
ZX1-LD100A66
ZX1-LD300A61
ZX1-LD300A66
ZX1-LD600A61
ZX1-LD600A66
PNP output
ZX1-LD50A81
ZX1-LD50A86
ZX1-LD100A81
ZX1-LD100A86
ZX1-LD300A81
ZX1-LD300A86
ZX1-LD600A81
ZX1-LD600A86
Measurement range
5010 mm
10035 mm
300150 mm
600400 mm
Visible-light semiconductor laser

(wavelength: 660 nm, 1 mW max., IEC/EN Class 2, FDA Class II*1)
Spot diameter (typical)

(Defined at the measurement center distance)*2
0.17 mm dia.
0.52 mm dia.
0.56 mm dia.
Current consumption
250 mA max. (at power supply voltage 10 VDC)
Control output
Load power supply voltage: 30 VDC max., Load current: 100 mA max.
(Residual voltage: 1 V max. (load current 10 mA or less), 2 V max. (load current of 10 to 100 mA))
Analog output
Current output: 4 to 20 mA, maximum load resistance: 300
Indicators
Digital display (red), output indicator (OUT1, OUT2) (orange), zero reset indicator (orange), menu indicator (orange), laser ON
indicator (green), and smart tuning indicator (blue)
Item
Response time
0.33 mm dia.
Judgment output
Super-high-speed (SHS) Mode: 1 ms

High-speed (HS) Mode: 10 ms
Standard (Stnd) Mode: 100 ms
Laser OFF input
200 ms max.
Zero reset input
200 ms max.
Temperature characteristic*3
0.03% F.S./C
Linearity*4
0.15% F.S.
0.04% F.S./C
0.25% F.S.
0.25% F.S.
(200 to 600 mm)
0.5% F.S.
(entire range)
30 m
80 m
Resolution *5
2 m
Ambient illumination
Illumination on received light surface:

7,500 lx or less (incandescent light)
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1 minute3
10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude, 2 hours each in X, Y, and Z directions
500 m/s2 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Degree of protection *6
IEC 60529, IP67
Connection method
Pre-wired model (Standard cable length: 2 m, 5 m)

Pre-wired connector model (Standard cable length: 0.5 m)
Weight
(packed state/
sensor only)
7 m

5,000 lx or less (incandescent light)
Pre-wired models (2 m)
Approx. 240 g / Approx. 180 g
Pre-wired models (5 m)
Pre-wired connector models (0.5 m)
Materials
Case and cover: PBT (polybutylene terephthalate), Optical window: Glass, Cable: PVC, Mounting hole part: SUS303
Accessories
Instruction sheet and Laser warning label (English)
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
Classified as Class 2 by EN60825-1 criteria in accordance with the FDA standard previsions of Laser Notice No. 50. Notification to CDRH planned. (Center for Devices and Radiological Health)
Spot diameter: Defined as 1/e (13.5%) of the central intensity at the measurement center distance.
False detections can occur in the case there is light leakage outside the defined region and the surroundings of the target object have a high reflectance in comparison to the target object.
Accurate measurements may not be possible for workpieces that are smaller than the spot diameter.
Temperature characteristic: Value for the case the space between the sensor and Omrons standard target object is secured by an aluminum jig. (Measured at the measurement center
distance)
Linearity: Indicates the error with respect to the ideal straight line of the displacement output in the case of measuring Omrons standard target object (white ceramic) at a temperature of
25C. Linearity and measured value may vary depending on target object.
Resolution: Defined in Standard Mode for Omrons standard target object (white ceramic) after executing Smart Tuning.
The resolution indicates the repetition accuracy for a still workpiece. Not an indication of the distance accuracy.
Resolution performance may not be satisfied in a strong electromagnetic field.
IP67 protection applies to the connector on pre-wired connector models if an extension cable is connected.
Note: False detection outside the measurement range can occur in the case of an object with high reflectance.
372
ZX2

Stable, easy & affordable
laser measurement sensor
High accuracy and measurement stability, at an affordable price. The new ZX2 laser
sensor offers best in class performance for accuracy and speed for all linear
displacement applications. Utilising an advanced HSDR-CMOS image sensor, high
measurement stability is achieved, even on the most challenging of surfaces.
One touch setup
Accurate: 1.5 to 5 m
Any surface
High speed: 30 s
Sensor heads
Beam shape
Line beam
Sensing distance
5010 mm
Spot beam
40
Line beam
Regular reflective
65
Spot beam
ZX2-LD50L
ZX2-LD50
5 m
ZX2-LD100L
ZX2-LD100
135
485 mm
43
Order code
1.5 m
60
10035 mm
Spot beam
Resolution
1.5 m
ZX2-LD50V
Measurement sensors
Optical system
Diffuse-reflective
53
Amplifier units
Power supply
Output type
Order code
DC
NPN
ZX2-LDA11
PNP
ZX2-LDA41

These are not included with the sensor head or amplifier unit.
Please order as necessary.
Sensor head extension cables*1
Calculating unit
Calculating unit
Order code
Cable length
Order code
ZX2-CAL
1m
ZX2-XC1R
4m
ZX2-XC4R
9m
ZX2-XC9R
20 m
ZX2-XC20R
*1.
Extension cables cannot be coupled and used together.
Mounting brackets
Applicable Sensor Heads
ZX2-LD50V
ZX2-LD50L
ZX2-LD50
ZX2-LD100L
ZX2-LD100
Appearance
Contents
Order code
Mounting Bracket: 1
Nut plate: 1
Phillips screws (M330): 2
E39-L178
E39-L179
373
ZX2
Specifications
Diffuse reflective Sensor Heads
Item Model
ZX2-LD50L
Optical system
Diffuse reflective
ZX2-LD50
ZX2-LD100L
Visible-light semiconductor laser with a wavelength of 660 nm and an output of 1 mW max.
ZX2-LD100
EN class 2,FDA class II*5

Measurement center point
50 mm
100 mm
Measurement range
10 mm
35 mm
Beam shape
Line
Spot
Line
Spot
Beam size*1
Approx. 60 m2.6 mm
Approx. 60 m dia.
Approx.110 m2.7 mm
Approx.110 m dia.
Resolution*2
1.5 m
Linearity*3
0.05% F.S. (40 to 50 mm)
0.1% F.S. (40 to 50 mm)
0.05%F.S. (65 to 100 mm)
0.1%F.S. (65 to 100 mm)
0.1% F.S. (entire range)
5 m
0.02% F.S./C
Incandescent lamp: 10,000 lx max. (on light receiving side)
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute.
10 to 150 Hz, 0.7-mm double amplitude, 80 minutes. each in X,Y,and Z directions
300 m/s2 3 times each in six directions (up/down,left/right,forward/backward)
IEC60529, IP67
Connection method
Connector connection (standard cable length: 500 mm)
Weight (packed state)
Approx.160 g (Sensor Head only: Approx.75 g)
Materials
Case and cover: PBT (polybutylene terephtahalate), Optical window: Glass, Cable: PVC
Accessories
Instruction sheet, Ferrite core, Laser warning label (English), FDA certification label
Regular-reflective Sensor Heads

Item Model
ZX2-LD50V
Optical system
Regular reflective
Visible-light semiconductor laser with a wavelength of 660 nm and an output of 0.24 mW max. EN class 1, FDA class I
Measurement center point
48 mm
Measurement range
5 mm
Beam shape
Spot
Beam size*1
Approx. 60 m dia.
Resolution*2
1.5 m
Linearity*3
0.06% F.S./C
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute.
10 to 150 Hz, 0.7-mm double amplitude, 80 minutes. each in X,Y,and Z directions
IEC 60529, IP67
Connection method
Connector connection (standard cable length: 500 mm)
Approx.160 g (Sensor Head only: Approx.75 g)
Materials
Case and cover: PBT (polybutylene terephtahalate), Optical window: Glass, Cable: PVC
Accessories
Instruction sheet, Ferrite core, Laser warning label (English)
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
Beam size: Defined as 1/e2 (13.5%) of the central intensity at the smallest value of diameter for the measurement range (typical value) False detections can occur in the case there is light
leakage outside the defined region and the surroundings of the target object have a high reflectance in comparison to the target object.
Resolution: indicates the degree of fluctuation (3) of analog output when connected to the ZX2-LDA. (The measured value is given for the center distance for OMRONs standard target
object (diffuse-reflective models: white ceramic object, regular-reflective models: 1/4 flat mirror) when the response time of the ZX2-LDA is set to 128 ms.)
Indicates the repetition accuracy for when the workpiece is in a state of rest. Not an indication of distance accuracy. Resolution performance may not be satisfied in a strong electromagnetic
field.
Linearity: indicates the error with respect to the ideal straight line of the displacement output in the case of measuring Omron s standard target object. Linearity and measured value may
vary depending on target object. F.S. indicates the full scope of the measurement range. (ZX2-LD50 (L): 20mm)
Temperature characteristic: Value for the case the space between the sensor head and Omrons standard target object is secured by an aluminum jig. (Measured at the measurement center
distance)
These Sensors are classified as Class 2 laser devices for diffuse-reflective models and Class 1 for regular-reflective models under EN 606825-1 and the regulations of Laser Notice No. 50 for
FDA certification. CDRH registration has been completed for diffuse-reflective models and is scheduled for regular-reflective models.
Note: False detection outside the measurement range can occur in the case of an object with high reflectance.
374
ZX2
Amplifier units
Item
ZX2-LDA11
Measurement period*1
Min 30 s
Response time
60 s, 120 s, 240 s, 500 s, 1 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms, 8 ms, 12 ms, 20 ms, 36 ms, 66 ms, 128 ms, 250 ms, 500 ms
Analog output*2
4 to 20 mA, Max. load resistance: 300, 5VDC or 1 to 5 VDC, Output impedance: 100
Judgement outputs (HIGH/PASS/LOW:

3 outputs), error output
NPN open-collector outputs, 30 VDC, 50 mA max.(residual voltage:

1 V max. for load current 10 mA max.,2 V max. for load current above
10 mA)
Laser OFF input, zero reset input, timing ON: Short-circuited with 0-V terminal or 1.5 V or less
input, reset input, bank input
OFF: Open (leakage current: 0.1 mA max.)
ZX2-LDA41
PNP open-collector outputs, 30 VDC, 50 mA max.(residual voltage:

1 V max. for load current 10 mA max., 2 V max. for load current above
10 mA)
ON: Supply voltage short-circuited or supply voltage within 1.5 V
Smart tuning, scaling, sample hold, peak hold, bottom hold, peak-to-peak hold, self-peak hold, self-bottom hold, average hold, zero reset, On-delay
timer, OFF-delay timer, keep/clamp switch, (A-B)calculations*3, thickness calculation*3, mutual interference prevention*3, laser deterioration
detection, bank function (4 banks)
Indications
Judgement indicators: HIGH (orange), PASS (green), LOW (orange), 11-segment main display (red), 11-segmentsub-display (orange), laser ON
(green), zero reset (green), enable (green), menu (green), HIGH threshold (orange), LOW threshold (orange)
10 to 30 VDC, including 10% ripple(p-p)
Power consumption
3,000 mW max. with power supply voltage of 30 VDC and power supply current of 100 mA (with Sensor connected)
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min.
(destruction)
10 to 150 Hz, 0.7-mm double amplitude, 80 min. each in X,Y,and Z directions
Shock resistance
(destruction)
IEC60529, IP40P
Connection method
Prewired (standard cable length: 2 m)
Approx. 200 g (unit only: Approx.135 g)
Materials
Case: PBT(polybutylene terephtahalate), Cover: Polycarbonate, Display: Acrylic resin, Button: Polyacetal, Cable: PVC
Accessories
Instruction sheet
*1
*2
*3
Measurement sensors
Functions
In the case of Omrons standard target object (white ceramic)

Configure current output (4 to 20mA) and voltage output (5 V or 1 to 5 V) by MENU mode.
Calculating unit (ZX2-CAL) is necessary.
Calculating unit
Item
ZX2-CAL
Applicable amplifier units
ZX2-LDA11/ZX2-LDA41
Current consumption
12 mA max. (supplied from the smart sensor amplifier unit)
Ambient temperature
Operating: 0 to 50C, storage: 15 to 70C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity
Operating and storage: 35% to 85% RH (with no condensation)
Connection method
Connector
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min
100 M (at 500 VDC)
Vibration resistance (destructive)
10 to 150 Hz, 0.7-mm double amplitude 80 min each in X, Y, and Z directions
Shock resistance (destructive)
300 m/s2 3 times each in six directions (up/down, left/right, forward/backward)
Materials
Case: PBT (polybutylene terephthalate), Display: Acrylic resin
Approx. 50 g
Accessories
Instruction sheet
375
ZS-HL

The scalable high-precision laser measurement sensor
The ZS laser sensor family provides outstanding measurement performance on all kind
of materials. Its huge range of sensor heads and scalable concept makes it a versatile
platform for all high precision sensing applications.
Highest resolution and dynamic sensing range for all surfaces
Modular and scalable platform concept for up to 9 sensors
Easy to use, install and maintain for all user levels
Fast response time of 110 s
Multi-tasking capability manages up to 4 measurement tools in one controller
Sensors
ZS-HL-series sensor heads
Optical system
Regular reflective models
Diffuse reflective models
*1
Sensing distance
201 mm
252 mm
505 mm
10020 mm
600350 mm
1500500 mm
Beam diameter
1.0 mm 20 m
2.2 mm 45 m
1.0 mm 30 m
3.5 mm 60 m
16 mm 0.3 mm
40 mm 1.5 mm
Resolution*1
0.25 m
0.6 m
0.25 m
1 m
8 m
500 m
Order code
ZS-HLDS2T
ZS-HLDS2VT
ZS-HLDS5T
ZS-HLDS10
ZS-HLDS60
ZS-HLDS150
Beam shape
Line beam
Beam diameter
900x25 m
Resolution*1
0.25 m
Order code
ZS-LD10GT
ZS-LD15GT
Beam shape
Line beam
Spot beam
Line beam
Line beam
Spot beam
Line beam
Line beam
Line beam
Spot beam
Beam diameter
900 25 m
25 m dia.
2000 35 m
900 60 m
50 m dia.
900 60 m
600 70 m
900 100 m
240 m dia.
Resolution*1
0.25 m
Order code
ZS-LD20T
ZS-LD20ST
ZS-LD40T
ZS-LD50
ZS-LD50S
ZS-LD80
ZS-LD130
ZS-LD200
ZS-LD350S
Beam shape
Line beam
Refer to the table of ratings and specifications for details.
ZS-HL-series sensor heads (for nozzle gaps) also compatible with ZS-L controller
Optical system
*1
Sensing distance
100.5 mm
150.75 mm
Refer to the table of ratings and specifications for details.
ZS-L-series sensor heads

Optical system
Sensing distance
201 mm
Diffuse reflective models
402.5 mm
505 mm
8015 mm
13015 mm
200 50 mm
350 135 mm
*1
0.8 m
2 m
3 m
5 m
20 m
This is the peak-to-peak displacement conversion value in the displacement output at the measuring center distance in high-precision mode when the number of samples to average is set
to 128 and the measuring mode is set to the high-resolution mode. The standard workpiece is white aluminum ceramics in diffuse reflection mode and glass in the regular reflection mode.
ZS-HL-series sensor controllers

Supply voltage
24 VDC
Control outputs
NPN outputs
PNP outputs
Multi-controllers
Order code
ZS-HLDC11
ZS-HLDC41
ZS-HLDC41A
(incl. USB cable +
Smart monitor)
Supply voltage
24 VDC
Control outputs
NPN outputs
PNP outputs
Order code
ZS-MDC11
ZS-MDC41
Control outputs
NPN outputs
PNP outputs
Order code
ZS-DSU11
ZS-DSU41
Data storage units

Supply voltage
24 VDC

Controller link
Extension cables for sensor heads
Item
Controller link
Order code
ZS-XCN
Panel mount adapter

Model
For 1st controller
For expansion (from 2nd controller on)
Order code
ZS-XPM1
ZS-XPM2
Cables for connecting to a Personal Computer

Type
RS-232C
USB
376
Quantity
1
1
Order code
ZS-XRS2
ZS-XUSB2
Cable length
1m
4m
5m
8m
10 m
*1
*2
Quantity
1
1
1
1
1
Up to two ZS-XC_B cables can be connected (22 m max.).

A robot cable (ZS-XC5BR) is also available.
Order code
ZS-XC1A
ZS-XC4A
ZS-XC5B*1,*2
ZS-XC8A
ZS-XC10B*1
ZS-HL

Safety precautions for using laser equipment
Logging software
Item
Order code
Smart monitor zero professional
ZS-SW11E
Laser Label Indications

Attach the following warning
label to the side of the
ZS-L-series Sensor Head.
Memory card
Model
Order code
64 MB
F160-N64S(S)
128 MB
QM300-N128S
256 MB
F160-N256S
Specifications
Sensor heads
ZS-HL-series sensor heads
ZS-HLDS2T
ZS-HLDC series
ZS-HLDS2VT
ZS-HLDS5T
Optical system
Regular
reflection
Measuring center distance

Measuring range
Light source
Visible semiconductor laser (wavelength: 650 nm, 1 mW max., JIS Clas
ZS-HLDS10
Diffuse reflection
Regular
reflection
Regular
reflection
20 mm
5.2 mm
25 mm
44 mm
50 mm
94 mm
100 mm
600 mm
1,500 mm
1 mm
1 mm
2 mm
4 mm
5 mm
16 mm
20 mm
350 mm
500 mm
Diffuse reflection
Beam shape
Line beam
Beam diameter*1
1.0 mmx20 m
2.2 mmx45 m
1.0 mmx30 m
Linearity*2
0.05% F.S.
0.2 %F.S.
0.1% F.S.
Resolution*3
0.25 m
(No. of samples to average: 256)
0.5 m
0.25 m
(No. of samples (No. of samples to average: 512)
to average: 128)
Temperature characteristic*4 0.01% F.S./C

Sampling cycle
Indicators
0.1% F.S./C
Regular
reflection
Diffuse reflection
ZS-HLDS60
ZS-HLDS150
Diffuse reflection
Diffuse reflection
Visible semiconductor laser

(wavelength 658 nm, 1 mW max.,
Class 2)
3.5 mmx60 m
1 m
(No. of samples to average: 64)
0.3 mmx16 mm 1.5 mmx40 mm

0.07 %F.S.
(250 mm to
750 mm)
0.1% F.S.
(750 mm to
950 mm)
0.2 %F.S.
8 m
(average 64)
(at 250 mm)
40 m
(average 64)
(at 600 mm)
500 m
(average 64)
Illumination on
received light
surface 1,000 lx
or less (incandescent light)
Illumination on
received light
surface 500 lx or
less (incandescent light)
Measurement sensors
Item
Applicable controllers
0.01% F.S./C
110 s (high-speed mode), 500 s (standard mode), 2.2 ms (high-precision mode), 4.4 ms (high-sensitivity mode)
NEAR
indicator
Lits near the measurement center, and nearer than the measurement center distance inside the measuring range.
Flashes when the measurement target is outside of the measuring range or when the received light amount is insufficient.
FAR indicator Lits near the measurement center, and further than the measurement center distance inside the measuring range.
Operating ambient
illumination
Illumination on received light surface 3,000 lx or less (incandescent light)
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
IP64
(destructive)
10 to 150 Hz, 0.7 mm double amplitude, 80 min each in X, Y, and Z directions
IP67
Cable length 0.5 m: IP66, cable length 2 m: IP67
IP66 (IEC60529)
Shock resistance (destructive) 150 m/s 3 times each in six directions (up/down, left/right, forward/backward)
Materials
Case: aluminum die-cast, front cover: glass
Cable length
0.5 m, 2 m
Weight
Approx. 350 g
2m
0.5 m, 2 m
Approx. 600 g
Approx. 800 g
*1
Defined as 1/e (13.5%) of the center optical intensity in the measurement center distance. The beam diameter is sometimes influenced by the ambient conditions of the workpiece such as
leaked light from the main beam.
*2
This is the error on the measured value with respect to an ideal straight line. Linear curve may change according to the workpiece. The following lists the workpieces
Model
Diffusive reflection
Mirror reflection
ZS-HLDS2T
SUS block
Glass
ZS-HLDS5T/HLDS10
White alumina ceramic
Glass
ZS-HLDS60/HLDS150
ZS-HLDS2VT
Glass
*3
This is the peak-to-peak displacement conversion value of the displacement output in the measurement center distance when high-resolution mode and the average number in the table
are set (For ZS-HLDS60, the maximum resolution at 250 mm is also included). The following lists the workpieces.
Model
Diffusive reflection
Mirror reflection
ZS-HLDS2T
SUS block
Glass
ZS-HLDS5T
Glass
ZS-HLDS10
ZS-HLDS60/HLDS150
ZS-HLDS2VT
Glass
*4 Value obtained when the sensor part and object part are fixed with an aluminum jig.
377
ZS-HL

Item
ZS-LD20T
ZS-HLDC/LDC series
ZS-LD20ST
ZS-LD40T
Optical system
Regular reflection Diffuse reflection
Regular reflection
20 mm
6.3 mm
20 mm
6.3 mm
40 mm
30 mm
10 mm
15 mm
Measuring range
1 mm
1 mm
1 mm
1 mm
2.5 mm
2 mm
0.5 mm
0.75 mm
Light source
Visible semiconductor laser (wavelength: 650 nm, 1 mW max., JIS Class 2)
Beam shape
Line beam
Spot beam
Line beam
Beam diameter*1
900 x 25 m
25 m dia.
2,000 x 35 m
Linearity*2
0.1%F.S
Resolution*3
0.25 m
Temperature characteristic*4 0.04% FS/C
ZS-LD10GT
Approx. 25 x 900 m
0.25 m
0.4 m
0.25 m
0.04% FS/C
0.02% FS/C
0.04% FS/C
Sampling cycle*5
Indicators
NEAR
indicator
Lights near the measuring center distance, and nearer than the measuring center distance inside the measuring range.
FAR
indicator
Lights near the measuring center distance, and further than the measuring center distance inside the measuring range.
Operating ambient
illumination
ZS-LD15GT
0.25 m
Illumination on received light surface: 3,000 lx or less (incandescent light)
Ambient temperature
Operating: 0 to 50C, storage: -15 to 60C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity
Materials
Case: Aluminum die-cast, front cover: Glass
Cable length
0.5 m, 2 m
IP40
Weight
Approx. 350 g
Approx. 400 g
Accessories
Laser labels (1 each for JIS/EN, 3 for FDA), ferrite cores (2), insure Locks (2), instruction sheet
Laser safety labels (1 each for JIS/

EN),ferrite cores (2), insure locks (2)
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
Defined as 1/e (13.5%) of the center optical intensity at the actual measurement center distance (effective value). The beam diameter is sometimes influenced by the ambient conditions of
the workpiece, such as leaked light from the main beam.
This is the error in the measured value with respect to an ideal straight line. The standard workpiece is white aluminum ceramics in diffuse reflection mode and glass in the regular reflection
mode of the ZS-LD20T/40T/50. Linearity may change according to the workpiece.
This is the value obtained at the measuring center distance when the Sensor and workpiece are fixed by an aluminum jig.
This value is obtained when the measuring mode is set to the high-speed mode.

Item
ZS-LD50
ZS-HLDC/LDC series
ZS-LD50S
ZS-LD80
ZS-LD130
ZS-LD200
ZS-LD350S
Optical system (reflection)
Diffuse
Regular
Diffuse
Regular
Diffuse
Regular
Diffuse
Regular
Diffuse
Regular
50 mm
47 mm
50 mm
47 mm
80 mm
78 mm
130 mm
130 mm
200 mm
200 mm
350 mm
Measuring range
5 mm
4 mm
5 mm
4 mm
15 mm
14 mm
15 mm
12 mm
50 mm
48 mm
135 mm
Light source
Visible semiconductor laser (wavelength: 650 nm, 1 mW max., JIS Class 2)
Diffuse
Beam shape
Line beam
Spot beam
Line beam
Line beam
Line beam
Spot beam
Beam diameter*1
900 x 60 m
50 m dia.
900 x 60 m
600 x 70 m
900 x 100 m
240 m dia.
Linearity*2
0.1%F.S.
Resolution*3
0.8 m
0.8 m
2 m
3 m
5 m
20 m
0.02% FS/C
0.01% FS/C
0.02% FS/C
0.02% FS/C
0.04% FS/C
Temperature characteristic*4 0.02% FS/C
0.25%F.S.
0.1%F.S.
Sampling cycle*5
Indicators
NEAR
indicator
Lights near the measuring center distance, and nearer than the measuring center distance inside the measuring range.
FAR
indicator
Lights near the measuring center distance, and further than the measuring center distance inside the measuring range.
Operating ambient
illumination
Illumination on received light surface: 3,000 lx or less (incandescent light)
Ambient
temperature
Ambient humidity
Materials
Case: Aluminum die-cast, front cover: Glass
Cable length
0.5 m, 2 m
Weight
Approx. 350 g
Accessories
Laser labels (1 each for JIS/EN, 3 for FDA), ferrite cores (2), insure Locks (2), instruction sheet
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
0.25%F.S.
0.04%F.S.
Illumination on received
light surface: 2,000 lx or less 3,000 lx or less (incandescent light)
(incandescent light)
Defined as 1/e (13.5%) of the center optical intensity at the actual measurement center distance (effective value). The beam diameter is sometimes influenced by the ambient conditions of
the workpiece, such as leaked light from the main beam.
This is the error in the measured value with respect to an ideal straight line. The standard workpiece is white aluminum ceramics in diffuse reflection mode and glass in the regular reflection
mode of the ZS-LD20T/40T/50. Linearity may change according to the workpiece.
This is the value obtained at the measuring center distance when the sensor and workpiece are fixed by an aluminum jig.
This value is obtained when the measuring mode is set to the high-speed mode.
378
ZS-HL
Sensor controllers
ZS-HL-series sensor controllers
Item
ZS-HLDC11
ZS-HLDC41
NPN/PNP
NPN
PNP
No. of samples to average
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1,024, 2,048, or 4,096
Number of mounted sensors
1 per sensor controller
External Connection method

interface Serial I/O
USB 2.0
Serial I/O: connector, other: pre-wired (standard cable length: 2 m)
RS-232C
Output
1 port, 115,200 bps. max.
Judgement output HIGH/PASS/LOW 3 outputs

NPN open collector, 30 VDC, 50 mA max.,
residual voltage 1.2 V max
Linear output
Inputs
1 port, full speed (12 Mbps max.), MINI-B

HIGH/PASS/LOW: 3 outputs
PNP open collector, 50 mA max.,
residual voltage 1.2 V max
Selectable from 2 types of output, voltage or current (selected by slide switch on bottom).
Voltage output: .10 to 10 V, output impedance: 40
Current output: 4 to 20 mA
Laser OFF,
ON: Short-circuited with 0 V terminal or 1.5 V or less
ZERO reset timing, OFF: Open (leakage current: 0.1 mA max.)
RESET
Functions
ON: Short-circuited to supply voltage or within 1.5 V of supply voltage.

Display: Measured value, threshold value, voltage/current, received light amount, and resolution/terminal block output
Sensing: Mode, gain, measurement object, head installation
Measurement point: Average, peak, bottom, thickness, step, and calculations
Filter: Smooth, average, and differentiation
Outputs: Scaling, various hold values, and zero reset
I/O settings: Linear (focus/correction), judgments (hysteresis and timer), non-measurement, and bank (switching and clear)
System: Save, initialization, measurement information display, communications settings, key lock, language, and data load
Task: Single task or multitask (up to 4)
Status indicators
Segment display
HIGH (orange), PASS (green), LOW (orange), LDON (green), ZERO (green), and ENABLE (green)
Main digital
8-segment red LED, 6 digits
Sub-digital
8-segment green LEDs, 6 digits

16 digitsx2 rows, color of characters: green, resolution per character: 5x8 pixel matrix
Setting inputs
Setting keys
Direction keys (UP, DOWN, LEFT, and RIGHT), SET key, ESC key, MENU key, and function keys (1 to 4)
Slide switch
Threshold switch (2 states: High/Low), mode switch (3 states: FUN, TEACH, and RUN)
21.6 V to 26.4 VDC (including ripple)
Current consumption
0.5 A max. (when sensor head is connected)
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
IP20
Materials
Case: Polycarbonate (PC)
Weight
Approx. 280 g (excluding packing materials and accessories)
Accessories
Ferrite core (1), instruction sheet
Measurement sensors
LCD
ZS-MDC11/MDC41 multi controllers
Basic specifications are the same as those for the sensor controllers.
The following points, however, are different.
Controller link unit

Connection using the ZS-XCN
(1) Sensor heads cannot be connected.

(2) A maximum 9 of controllers can be connected. Control link units are required to connect
controllers.
(3) Processing functions between controllers: Math functions
Data storage unit
Multi-controller
Sensor controllers
Data storage units

Sensor controllers
Model
ZS-DSU11
Number of mounted censor heads
Cannot be connected
Number of connectable controllers
10 controllers max. (ZS-MDC: 1 controller, ZS-HLDC: 9 controllers max.)*1
Connectable controllers
ZS-HLDC_ _ , ZS-MDC__
External Connection method

interface Serial I/O
USB 2.0
Serial I/O: connector, other: pre-wired (standard cable length: 2 m)
RS-232C
ZS-DSU41
1 port, full speed (12 Mbps), MINI-B

1 port, 115,200 bps max.
Outputs
3 outputs: HIGH, PASS, and LOW

NPN open-collector, 30 VDC, 50 mA max.,
residual voltage: 1.2 V max.
3 outputs: HIGH, PASS, and LOW

PNP open-collector, 50 mA max.,
residual voltage: 1.2 V max.
Inputs
ON: Short-circuited with 0V terminal or 1.5 V or less

ON: Short-circuited to supply voltage or within 1.5 V of supply voltage

Data resolution
32 bits
Function Logging trigger functions

s
Other functions
Start and stop triggers can be set separately; external triggers, data triggers (self-triggers), and time triggers
Status indicators
OUT (orange), PWR (green), ACCESS (orange), and ERR (red)
Segment display
8-segment green LEDs, 6 digits
LCD
Setting inputs
External banks, alarm outputs, saved data format customization, and clock
16 digitsx2 rows, color of characters: green, resolution per character: 5x8 pixel matrix
Setting keys
Direction keys (UP, DOWN, LEFT, and RIGHT), SET key, ESC key, MENU key, and function keys (1 to 4)
Slide switch
Threshold switch (2 states: High/Low), mode switch (3 states: FUN, TEACH, and RUN)
379
ZS-HL
Sensor controllers

Model
ZS-DSU11
ZS-DSU41
21.6 V to 26.4 VDC (including ripple)
Current consumption
0.5 A max.
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Materials
Case: Polycarbonate (PC)
Weight
Approx. 280 g (excluding packing materials and accessories)
Accessories
Ferrite core (1) instruction sheet, tools for data storage unit: CSV file converter for data storage unit, smart analyzer macro edition
(Excel macros for analysis of collected data)
*1
Control link units are required to connect controllers.
380
ZX-L

Smart, fast and accurate laser measurement sensor
Smart ZX-L-N offers plug & measure technology for applications where high resolution
and fast response time is required. A wide range of interchangeable sensor heads
provides greater flexibility in solving most demanding applications.
Small and light sensor heads for easy integration
High speed response time of 150 s
Easy sensor head replacement
Scalability through a modular platform concept
Multipoint measurement with up to 5 sensors
Wide range of sensor heads offering laser beam width from 1 mm to 30 mm
Sensors
Optical method
Beam shape
Sensing distance
Resolution *1
Size in mm (H W D)
Order code
Diffuse-reflective
Spot beam
4010 mm
2 m
39 33 17
ZX-LD40
10040 mm
16 m
ZX-LD100
300200 mm
300 m
ZX-LD300
4010 mm
2 m
ZX-LD40L
10040 mm
16 m
ZX-LD100L
300200 mm
300 m
302 mm
0.25 m
Line beam
Regular reflection type
Spot beam
ZX-LD300L
ZX-LD30V
45 55 25
ZX-LD30VL
Line beam
*1
Measurement sensors
Sensor head (reflection type)
At average count of 4,096 times
Sensor head (through-beam)

Optical method
Through-beam
Measurement width
Sensing distance
1 mm dia.
0 to 2,000 mm
5 mm
0 to 500 mm
Resolution *1
4 m
*1
Order code
Transmitter
Receiver
15 15 34
15 15 19
20 20 42
20 20 25
ZX-LT010
64.25 70 22.6
64.25 54 22.6
ZX-LT030
ZX-LT001
ZX-LT005
10 mm
30 mm
Size in mm (H W D)
12 m
At average count of 64 times
Amplifier units
Power supply
Output specifications
Order code
DC
NPN output
ZX-LDA11-N
PNP output
ZX-LDA41-N
Note: Compatible with sensor head connection.

Calculating unit
Calculating unit
SmartMonitor sensor setup tool for Personal Computer connection

Order code
Name
Order code
ZX-CAL2
ZX-series communications interface unit
ZX-SF11

+ Setup Software (CD-ROM)
ZX-SFW11EV3*1,*2
ZX-SW11EV3*1
Side-view attachments
Applicable sensor head
Order code
ZX-series sensor setup and logging software (CD-ROM)
ZX-LT1001/LT005
ZX-XF12
*1
ZX-LT010
ZX-XF22
When using the ZX-TDA11/41 with the SmartMonitor, either the ZX-SFW11EV3 or the
ZX-SW11EV3 SmartMonitor must be used. Earlier versions cannot be used.
*2
The ZX-SFW11EV3 SmartMonitor can be used only to set functions and monitor waveforms.
Cables with connectors on both ends (for extension)*1

Cable length
Order code
1m
ZX-XC1A
4m
ZX-XC4A
8m
ZX-XC8A
9 m*2.
ZX-XC9A
*1.
*2.
Robot cable models are also available. The model numbers are ZX-XC_R.
For use only with reflective sensors.
381
ZX-L
Specifications
Sensor head (reflection type)
Item
ZX-LD40
Optical method
Diffuse reflection
ZX-LD100
ZX-LD300
ZX-LD30V
ZX-LD40L
Regular
reflection
Diffuse reflection
ZX-LD100L
ZX-LD300L
ZX-LD30VL
Visible-light semiconductor laser (wavelength 650 nm, 1 mW or less, Class 2)
Measurement center distance
40 mm
100 mm
300 mm
30 mm
40 mm
100 mm
300 mm
30 mm
Measurement range
10 mm
40 mm
200 mm
2 mm
10 mm
40 mm
200 mm
2 mm
Beam shape
Spot
Regular
reflection
Line
Beam diameter*1
50 m dia.
100 m dia.
300 m dia.
75 m dia.
75 mx2mm
150 mx2 mm
450 mx2 mm
100 mx1.8 mm
Resolution*2
2 m
16 m
300 m
0.25 m
2 m
16 m
300 m
0.25 m
Linearity*3
0.2% F.S.
(entire range)
0.2% F.S.
(80 to 121 mm)
2% F.S.
0.2% F.S.
(200 to 401 mm) (entire range)
0.2% F.S.
(32 to 49 mm)
0.2% F.S.
(80 to 121 mm)
2% F.S.
0.2% F.S.
(200 to 401 mm) (entire range)
0.03% FS/C (except for ZX-LD300 and ZX-LD300L, which are 0.1% FS/C.)
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
20 M min. at 500 VDC
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min
(destruction)
Shock resistance
(destruction)
IEC 60529 IP50
Connection method
Connector relay (standard cable length: 500 mm)
IEC standard IP40 IEC 60529 IP50
IEC standard IP40
Approx. 150 g
Approx. 250 g
Materials
Case: PBT (polybutylene terephthalate),

Cover: Aluminum, lens: Glass
Case and cover: Case: PBT (polybutylene terephthalate),

Aluminum, lens: Cover: Aluminum, lens: Glass
Glass
Approx. 150 g
Approx. 250 g
Accessories
Instruction sheet, Laser warning label (English)
Case and cover:

Aluminum, lens:
Glass
*1
Beam diameter: This is the value of the measurement center distance (actual value), and is defined at 1/e 2 (13.5%) of the central light intensity. If there is stray light outside, the defined area
and the area around the object has a higher reflectance than the object.
*2 Resolution: Indicates the amount of fluctuation (3 ) in the linear output when connected to the ZX-LDA. (The measured value when the average count of the ZX-LDA is set to 4,096 and our
standard object (white ceramic) is used for the central distance.) This indicates the repeatability precision when the work is in a static state, and does indicate the distance precision. The
resolution performance may not be satisfactory in a strong electromagnetic field.
*3 Linearity: This indicates the error with respect to the ideal straight line of the displacement output when measuring our standard object.
*4
Temperature characteristic: The temperature characteristic is measured at the measurement point with the sensor and reference object (Omrons standard reference object) secured with an
aluminum jig.
Note: Highly reflective objects can result in incorrect detection by causing out-of-range measurements.
Sensor head (through-beam)

Item
ZX-LT001
Optical method
Through-beam
Visible-light semiconductor laser (wavelength 650 nm, 1 mW or less, Class 1)
Maximum output
ZX-LT005
0.2 mW max.
ZX-LT010
0.35 mW max.
Measurement width
1 mm dia.
1 to 2.5 mm dia. 5 mm
Sensing distance
0 to 500 mm
500 to 2,000 mm 0 to 500 mm
Min. sensing object
8 mm dia.
opaque object
8 to 50 m
opaque object
opaque: 0.05 mm dia.
Resolution*1
4 m*2
4 m*3
Temperature characteristic
0.2% FS/C
Incandescent lamp: 10,000 lx max. (on light-receiving side)
0.2 mW max.
10 mm
30 mm
opaque: 0.1 mm dia.
opaque: 0.3 mm dia.
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Operating: 35% to 85% (with no condensation)
IEC 60529 IP40
Connection method
Connector relay (standard cable length: 500 mm)
Approx. 220 g
Cable length
Extendable up to 10 m with special extension cable.
Materials
Case
Polyetherimide
Cover
Polycarbonate
Front filter
Glass
Tightening torque
0.3 Nm max.
Accessories
Instruction sheet, sensor head-amplifier connection cable

Optical axis adjustment seal
*1
*2
*3
*4
ZX-LT030
12 m*4
0.3% FS/C
IP 40
Approx. 450 g
Zinc die-cast
Mounting Bracket
The amount of fluctuation (3 ) of the linear output when connected to an amplifier unit, converted to a detection span.
When the average count is 64. 5 m when the count is 32. The value when the smallest detection object shades the vicinity of the center of the 1 mm dia. detection span.
When the average count is 64. 5 m when the count is 32.
For an average count of 64. The value is 15 m for an average count of 32.
382
ZX-L
Amplifier units
Indications
Current consumption
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Dielectric strength
(destruction)
Shock resistance
(destruction)
Connection method
Materials
Accessories
ZX-LDA11-N
ZX-LDA41-N
150 s
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1,024, 2,048, or 4,096
When connected to a reflective sensor head: 0.01% FS/C, when connected to a through-beam sensor head: 0.1% FS/C
4 to 20 mA/FS, max. load resistance: 3004 V ( 5 V, 1 to 5 V *3), output impedance: 100
NPN open-collector outputs, 30 VDC, 50 mA max.
PNP open-collector outputs, 30 VDC, 50 mA max.
Residual voltage: 1.2 V max.
Residual voltage: 2 V max.
ON: Short-circuited with 0-V terminal or 1.5 V or less
ON: Supply voltage short-circuited or supply voltage within 1.5 V
Measurement value display, present value/set value/light level/resolution display, scaling, display reverse, display OFF mode, ECO mode, number
of display digit changes, sample hold, peak hold, bottom hold, peak-to-peak hold, self-peak hold, self-bottom hold, average hold, delay hold, intensity mode, zero reset, initial reset, ON-delay timer, OFF-delay timer, one-shot timer, deviation, previous value comparison, sensitivity adjustment,
keep/clamp switch, direct threshold value setting, position teaching, 2-point teaching, automatic teaching, hysteresis width setting, timing inputs,
reset input, monitor focus, linear output compensation, (A-B) calculations*4, (A+B) calculations*4, mutual interference*4, laser deterioration detection, zero reset memory, zero reset display, key lock
Operation indicators: High (orange), pass (green), low (yellow), 7-segment main display (red), 7-segment subdisplay (yellow), laser ON (green), zero
reset (green), enable (green)
12 to 24 VDC10%, Ripple (p-p): 10% max.
140 mA max. with power supply voltage of 24 VDC (with sensor connected)
Operating: 0to 50C, storage: 15 to 60C (with no icing or condensation)
20 M min. at 500 VDC
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min
Approx. 350 g
Case: PBT (polybutylene terephthalate), cover: Polycarbonate
Instruction sheet
Measurement sensors
Item
Measurement period
Possible average count settings*1
Linear output*2
Judgement outputs
(3 outputs: HIGH/PASS/LOW)*1
Laser OFF input, zero reset input, timing
input, reset input
Functions
*1
The response speed of the linear output is calculated as the measurement period x (average count setting + 1) (with fixed sensitivity).
The response speed of the judgement outputs is calculated as the measurement period x (average count setting + 1) (with fixed sensitivity).
*2 The output can be switched between a current output and voltage output using a switch on the bottom of the amplifier unit.
*3
Setting is possible via the monitor focus function.
*4
A calculating unit (ZX-CAL2) is required.
Calculating unit
Item
Current consumption
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Connection method
Dielectric strength
Materials
ZX-CAL2
ZX-LDA11-N/41-N/ZX-EDA11/41/ZX-TDA11/41
12 mA max. (supplied from the smart sensor amplifier unit)
Connector
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min
100 M (at 500 VDC)
Display: Acrylic, case: ABS resin
Approx. 50 g
ZX-series Communications Interface Unit

Item
Current consumption
Applicable amplifier unit versions
Max. No. of amplifier units

Communications Communications
functions
port
Communications
protocol
Baud rate
Data configuration
Indicators
Protective circuits
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Dielectric strength
Materials
Accessories
*1
ZX-SF11
60 mA max. (supplied by the amplifier unit)
ZX series
ZX-LDA_ 1-N Ver. 1.000 or higher
ZX-EDA_ 1 Ver. 1.100 or higher
ZX-TDA_ 1 Ver. 1.000 or higher
5
RS-232C port (9-pin D-Sub connector)
CompoWay/F*1
38,400 bps
Data bits: 8, parity: none, start bits: 1, stop bits: 1, flow control: none
Power supply: green, sensor communications: green, sensor communications error: red, external terminal communications: green, external
terminal communications error: red
Reverse polarity protection
20 M min. (at 500 VDC)
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min, Leakage current: 10 mA max.
Instruction sheet, 2 clamps
Contact your Omron representative for CompoWay/F communications specifications.
383
ZW

Ultra-compact, lightweight sensor measures any
material
The ZW confocal fiber displacement sensor delivers stable, non-contact, in-line
measurement of heights, thicknesses and other dimensions. It solves the problems
of traditional laser triangulation sensors: deviation between different material and
inclination tolerance. The compact sensing head has no electronic parts to eliminate
problems of installation space and mutual interference, electrical/magnetic noise,
temperature rise and mechanical positioning.
Minimum resolution: 0.01 m
Ultra-compact sensing head: 24 24 mm; weighs only 105 g
High flexibility robotic cable from sensor to controller, extends 32 m
Mount sensing head one time: no need to re-tune for changing materials
Separate amplifier provides white LED light source, spectroscope and processor to
convert reflected color light to distance
Automation Software Sysmac Studio simplifies system operation and setting
Sensor heads
Type
Straight type
Right-angle type
*1
*2
Measuring range
Spot diameter
Order code*1
Static resolution
*2
70.3 mm
18 m dia.
0.01 m /0.25 m
ZW-S07
201 mm
40 m dia.
0.02 m*2/0.25 m
ZW-S20
303 mm
60 m dia.
0.06 m*2/0.25 m
ZW-S30
406 mm
80 m dia.
0.08 m*2/0.25 m
ZW-S40
70.3 mm
18 m dia.
0.25 m
ZW-SR07
201 mm
40 m dia.
0.25 m
ZW-SR20
406 mm
80 m dia.
0.25 m
ZW-SR40
When ordering, specify the cable length (0.3 m, 2.0 m).

The high resolution types are subject to the export control restrictions
Controller with EtherCAT

Power supply
Output type
Order code
24 VDC
NPN
ZW-CE10T/ZW-C10*1
PNP
ZW-CE15T/ZW-C15*1
*1
The high resolution types are subject to the export control restrictions
Note: Controllers with binary outputs are also available (ZW-C10T/-C15T). Please contact your OMRON sales representative for details.
Cable
Item
Cable length
Order code
Sensor Head - Controller Extension Fiber Cable (flexible cable) (Fiber Adapter ZW-XFC provided)
2m
ZW-XF02R
5m
ZW-XF05R
10 m
ZW-XF10R
20 m
ZW-XF20R
30 m
ZW-XF30R
Fiber Adapter (between Sensor Head pre-wired cable and Extension Fiber Cable)
ZW-XFC
Parallel cable for ZW-CE1@ 32-pole*1
2m
ZW-XCP2E
RS-232C Cable for personal computer
2m
ZW-XRS2
RS-232C Cable for PLC/programmable terminal
2m
ZW-XPT2
*1
A parallel cable for Controllers with binary outputs is also available (ZW-XCP2). Please contact your OMRON sales representative for details.
Automation Software Sysmac Studio

Please purchase a DVD and required number of licenses the first time you purchase the Sysmac Studio. DVDs and licenses are available individually. Each model of licenses does not include any DVD.
Product name
Specifications
Order code
Number of licenses
Sysmac Studio
Standard Edition
Ver.1.@@ *1
The Sysmac Studio provides an integrated development environment to set up,

program, debug, and maintain NJ-series controllers and other machine auto- (Media only)
mation controllers, as well as EtherCAT slaves.
1 license*2
Windows XP (Service Pack 3 or higher, 32-bit version)/Vista (32-bit version)/
7 (32-bit/64-bit version)
Media
DVD
SYSMAC-SE200D
SYSMAC-SE201L
1 license
SYSMAC-ME001L
3 licenses
SYSMAC-ME003L
This software provides functions of the Measurement Sensor Edition. Refer to

Sysmac Catalog (P072) for details such as supported models and functions.
Sysmac Studio
Measurement Sensor Edition
Ver.1.@@ *3
*1
*2
*3
Sysmac Studio Measurement Sensor Edition is a limited license that provides

selected functions required for ZW-series Displacement Sensor settings.
Because this product is a license only, you need the Sysmac Standard Edition
DVD media to install it.
ZW-series is supported by Sysmac Studio version 1.05 or higher.

Multi licenses are available for the Sysmac Studio (3, 10, 30, or 50 licenses).
Setting Software Smart Monitor ZW is also available (ZW-SW101). Please contact your OMRON representative for details.
384
ZW
Setting software
Accessories
Item
Order code
Item
Order code
Smart Monitor ZW
ZW-SW101
Fiber Connector Cleaner
ZW-XCL
Recommended EtherCAT communications cables

Use Straight STP (shielded twisted-pair) cable of category 5 or higher with double shielding (braiding and aluminum foil tape) for EtherCAT.
Item
Recommended manufacturer
Cable length (m)*1
Order code
Standard type
Cable with connectors on both ends (RJ45/RJ45)
Wire gauge and number of pairs:
AWG27, 4-pair Cable
Cable Sheath material: LSZH*2
Cable color: Yellow *3
OMRON
0.3
XS6W-6LSZH8SS30CM-Y
0.5
XS6W-6LSZH8SS50CM-Y
XS6W-6LSZH8SS100CM-Y
0.3
XS5W-T421-AMD-K
0.5
XS5W-T421-BMD-K
XS5W-T421-CMD-K
XS5W-T421-DMD-K
XS5W-T421-GMD-K
10
XS5W-T421-JMD-K
0.3
XS5W-T421-AMC-K
0.5
XS5W-T421-BMC-K
XS5W-T421-CMC-K
XS5W-T421-DMC-K
XS5W-T421-GMC-K
10
XS5W-T421-JMC-K
0.3
XS5W-T422-AMC-K
0.5
XS5W-T422-BMC-K
XS5W-T422-CMC-K
XS5W-T422-DMC-K
XS5W-T422-GMC-K
10
XS5W-T422-JMC-K
Rugged type
Cable with connectors on both ends (RJ45/RJ45)
AWG22, 2-pair cable
OMRON
Rugged type
Cable with connectors on both ends (M12 Straight/RJ45)
AWG22, 2-pair cable
OMRON
Rugged type
Cable with connectors on both ends (M12 Right-angle/RJ45)
AWG22, 2-pair cable
OMRON
Measurement sensors
Cable with connectors
*1
Standard type cables length 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15 and 20m are available.
Rugged type cables length 0.3, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 10 and 15m are available.
*2 The lineup features Low Smoke Zero Halogen cables for in-cabinet use and PUR cables for out-of-cabinet use.
*3
Cables colors are available in blue, yellow, or Green
Note: For details, refer to Cat.No.G019.
Cables/connectors
Industrial switching hubs for Ethernet
Number of Failure detection

ports
Current
consumption
Order code
None
0.22 A
W4S1-03B
None
0.22 A
W4S1-05B
Item
Order code
Cables
Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
NETSTAR-C5E SAB 0.5 4P*1
RJ45 connectors
*1
*1
Kuramo Electric Co.
KETH-SB
SWCC Showa Cable Systems Co.
FAE-5004*1
Panduit Corporation
MPS588-C
*1
We recommend you to use above cable and connector together.
Note: Industrial switching hubs are cannot be used for EtherCAT.
Number of Power supply voltage

ports
Item
Order code
Cables
Kuramo Electric Co.
KETH-PSB-OMR*1
*1
RJ45 Assembly
connector
*1
W4S1-05C
Supported
Nihon Electric Wire&Cable Co.,Ltd.
PNET/B
OMRON
XS6G-T421-1*1
We recommend you to use above cable and connector together.
20.4 to 28.8 VDC

(24 VDC 15 to 20%)
Current
consumption
Order code
0.08 A
GX-JC03
0.17 A
GX-JC06
Note: 1 Please do not connect EtherCAT junction slave with OMRON position control unit,
Model CJ1W-NC_81/_82.
2 EtherCAT junction slaves cannot be used for EtherNet/IP and Ethernet.
Note: Connect both ends of cable shielded wires to the connector hoods.
385
ZW
Specifications
Sensor head
Item
ZW-S07
ZW-S20
ZW-S30
ZW-S40
ZW-SR07
ZW-SR20
ZW-SR40
7 mm
20 mm
30 mm
40 mm
7 mm
20 mm
40 mm
Measuring range
0.3 mm
1 mm
3 mm
6 mm
0.3 mm
1 mm
6 mm
Static resolution *1
0.25 m
0.25 m
0.25 m
0.25 m
0.25 m
0.25 m
0.25 m
0.8 m
1.2 m
4.5 m
7.0 m
1.1 m
1.6 m
9.3 m
20 m dia.
45 m dia.
70 m dia.
90 m dia.
20 m dia.
45 m dia.
90 m dia.
Linearity *2
Spot diameter *3
Near
Center
18 m dia.
40 m dia.
60 m dia.
80 m dia
18 m dia.
40 m dia.
80 m dia
Far
20 m dia.
45 m dia.
70 m dia.
90 m dia
20 m dia.
45 m dia.
90 m dia
0.6 m/C
(0.45 m/C)
1.5 m/C
(1.0 m/C)
4.8 m/C
(3.8 m/C)
Measuring cycle
500 s to 10 ms
Operating ambient illumination
Illumination on object surface 10,000 lx or less: incandescent light


IP40 (IEC60529)
10 to 150 Hz, 0.35 mm single amplitude, 80 min each in X, Y, and Z directions
*4
0.6 m/C
(0.45 m/C)
1.5 m/C
(1.0 m/C)
Materials
Case:
aluminum die-cast
Fiber cable sheat: PVC
Calibration ROM: PC
Fiber cable length
0.3 m, 2 m (Flex-resistant cable)
Fiber cable minimum bending radius
20 mm
2.8 m/C
(2.0 m/C)
4.8 m/C
(3.8 m/C)
Insulation resistance (Calibration ROM) Between case and all terminals: 20 M (by 250 V megger)
Dielectric strength (Calibration ROM)
Between case and all terminals: 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1 min
Weight
Approx. 105 g (Chassis, fiber cable total)
Accessories included with sensor head Instruction sheet, Fixing screw (M2) for Calibration ROM, Precautions for correct use
*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.
Capacity value when Omron standard mirror surface target is measured at the measurement center distance as the average of 4,096 times.
Material setting for the Omron standard mirror surface target: Error from an ideal straight line when measuring on mirror surface.
The reference values for linearity when targets to measure other than the above are as in the table below
Item
ZW-S07
ZW-S20
ZW-S30
ZW-S40
ZW-SR07
ZW-SR20
ZW-SR40
Glass
1.0 m
1.2 m
4.5 m
7.0 m
1.1 m
1.6 m
9.3 m
SUS BA
1.2 m
1.4 m
5.5 m
8.5 m
1.2 m
1.8 m
9.3 m
White ceramic
1.6 m
1.7 m
6.4 m
9.5 m
1.6 m
1.9 m
11.0 m
Capacity value defined by 1/e (13.5%) of the center optical intensity in the measured area.
Temperature characteristic at the measurement center distance when the sensor head and the target are fastened with an aluminum jig and the sensor head and the controller are set in the
same temperature environment.
Figures in parentheses are converted value obtained by subtracting the effect of expansion or contraction of the aluminum jig itself.
Automation software Sysmac Studio

System requirements
Item
Condition
Operating system (OS)*1,*2
Windows XP (Service Pack 3 or higher, 32-bit version)/Vista(32-bit version)/7(32-bit/64-bit version)
CPU
Windows computers with Celeron 540 (1.8 GHz) or faster CPU.

Core i5 M520 (2.4 GHz) or equivalent or faster recommended
Main memory
2 GB min.
Recommended video memory/video

card for using 3D motion trace
Video memory: 512 MB min.

Video card: Either of the following video cards:
NVIDIA GeForce 200 Series or higher
ATI RadeonHD5000 Series or higher
Hard disk
At least 1.6 GB of available space
Display
XGA 1024 768, 16 million colors.

WXGA 1280 800 min. recommended
Disk drive
DVD-ROM drive
Communication ports
USB port corresponded to USB 2.0, or Ethernet port*3
Supported languages
Japanese, English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, simplified Chinese, traditional Chinese, Korean
*1
*2
Sysmac Studio operating system precaution: System requirements and hard disk space may vary with the system environment.
The following restrictions apply when Sysmac Studio is used with Microsoft Windows Vista or Windows 7.
Some Help files cannot be accessed.
The Help files can be accessed if the Help program distributed by Microsoft for Windows (WinHlp32.exe) is installed. Refer to the Microsoft homepage listed below or contact Microsoft for
details on installing the file. (The download page is automatically displayed if the Help files are opened while the user is connected to the Internet.)
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/917607/en-us
*3 Refer to the hardware manual for your Controller for hardware connection methods and cables to connect the computer and Controller.
386
ZW
Setting software Smart Monitor ZW ZW-SW101

System requirements
Item
Condition
Operating System(OS)
Windows 7 (32 or 64-bit version)

Windows XP (Service Pack3 or more, 32-bit version)
CPU
Intel Pentium III, 850 MHz or more (2 GHz or more is recommended.)
Main memory
1 GB or more
Hard disk
50 MB or more
Display
1024 768 dots or more, 16 million colors or more
Supported languages
Japanese/English
Communication port
Ethernet port
Item
ZW-CE10T
ZW-CE15T
Input/Output type
NPN
PNP
Number of connected sensor heads
1 per Controller
Sensor head compatibility
Available
Light source for measurement
White LED
Segment
display
Main display
11-segment red display, 6 digits
Sub-display
11-segment green display, 6 digits
LED display
Status indicators
HIGH (orange), PASS (green), LOW (orange), STABILITY (green), ZERO (green),
ENABLE (green), THRESHOLD-H (orange), THRESHOLD-L (orange), RUN (green)
EtherCAT indicators
L/A IN (Link Activity IN) (green), L/O OUT (Link Activity OUT) (green), ECAT RUN (green), ECAT ERR (red)
External
interface
Ethernet
100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T, No-protocol communications (TCP/UDP), EtherNet/IPTM
EtherCAT
EtherCAT-specific protocol 100BASE-TX
RS-232C
115,200 bps max.
Analog
Analog voltage output
output
(OUT1V)
terminal block Analog current output
(OUT1A)
10 to 10 V, output impedance: 100
32-pole
extension
connector
Judgment output
(HIGH1/PASS1/LOW1)
BUSY output (BUSY1)
ALARM output (ALARM1)
Measurement sensors
Controller
4 to 20 mA, maximum load resistance: 300

Transistor output system
Output voltage: 21.6 to 30 VDC
Load current: 50 mA or less
Residual voltage when turning ON: 1.2 V or less
Leakage voltage when turning OFF: 0.1 mA or les
ENABLE output (ENABLE)

LED OFF input (LED OFF1)
ZERO RESET input (ZERO)
TIMING output (TIMING1)
RESET output (RESET1)
DC input system
Input voltage: 24 VDC 10% (21.6 to 26.4 VDC)
Input current: 7 mA Typ. (24 VDC)
Voltage/Current when turning ON: 19 V/3 mA or more
Voltage/Current when turning OFF: 5 V/1 mA or less
Bank Selected bank output Transistor output system

(BANK_OUT 1 to 3)
Output voltage: 21.6 to 30 VDC
Load current: 50 mA or less
Residual voltage when turning ON: 1.2 V or less
Leakage voltage when turning OFF: 0.1 mA or less
Selected bank input
(BANK_SEL 1 to 3)
Main
functions
Ratings
DC input system
Input voltage: 21.6 to 26 VDC
Input current: 7 mA Typ. (24 VDC)
Voltage/Current when turning ON: 19 V/3 mA or more
Voltage/Current when turning OFF: 5 V/1 mA or less
Exposure time
Auto/Manual
Measuring cycle
500s to 10 ms
Material setting
Standard/Mirror/Diffusion surfaces
Measurement Item
Height/Thickness/Calculation
Filtering
Median/Average/Differentiation/High pass/Low pass/Band pass
Outputs
Scaling/Different holds/Zero reset/Logging for a measured value
Display
Measured value/Threshold value/Analog output voltage or current value/Judgment result/Resolution/Exposure time
Number of configurable banks
Max. 8 banks
Task process
Multi-task (up to 4 tasks per bank)
System
Save/Initialization/Display measurement information/Communication settings/Sensor Head calibration/Key-lock/

Trigger-key input
Current consumption
600 mA max.
Across all lead wires and controller case: 20 M(by 250 V megger)
Dialectic strength
Across all lead wires and controller case: 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1 min.
Environmen- Degree of protection

tal
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
IP20 (IEC60529)
10 to 55 Hz, 0.35-mm single amplitude, 50 min each in X, Y, and Z directions
150 m/s2, 3 times each in six directions (up/down, left/right, forward/backward)
Operating: 0 to 40C
Grounding
D-type grounding (Grounding resistance of 100 or less)

Note: For conventional Class D grounding
Materials
Case: PC
387
ZW
Item
ZW-CE10T
Weight
Approx. 750 g (main unit only), approx. 150 g (Parallel cable)
ZW-CE15T
Accessories included with controller
Instruction sheet, Member registration sheet, Parallel cable ZW-XCP2E
Note: Controllers with binary outputs are also available (ZW-C10T/-C15T). Please contact your OMRON sales representative for details.
ZW series EtherCAT communications specifications

Item
Specification
IEC61158 Type12
Physical layer
100BASE-TX (IEEE802.3)
Connectors
RJ45 2
ECAT IN: EtherCAT input
ECAT OUT: EtherCAT output
Communications media
Category 5 or higher (cable with double, aluminum tape and braided shielding) is recommended.
Communications distance
Distance between nodes: 100 m max.
Process data
Variable PDO mapping
Mailbox (CoE)
Emergency messages, SDO requests, SDO responses, and SDO information
Distributed clock
Synchronization in DC mode.
LED display
L/A IN (Link/Activity IN) 1, AL/A OUT (Link/Activity OUT) 1, AECAT RUN 1, AECAT ERR 1
388
ZX-E

Smart inductive measurement sensor
ZX-E offers the best solution for the accurate measurement of metallic objects. It is
highly recommended in harsh environments such as automotive and metal working
machines.
High resolution of 1 m
High-speed response time of 150 s
Easy sensor head replacement
Modular platform concept for different sensing technologies
Easy linearity adjustment for any metal
Sensors
Shape
Dimensions
Sensing distance
Resolution*1
Order code
Cylindrical
3 dia. 18 mm
0.5 mm
1m
ZX-EDR5T
5.4 dia. 18 mm
1 mm
ZX-ED01T*2
8 dia. 22 mm
2 mm
ZX-ED02T*2
M1022 mm
2 mm
ZX-EM02T*2
M1846.3 mm
7 mm
ZX-EM07MT*2
Flat
30144.8 mm
4 mm
ZX-EV04T*2,*3
Heat-resistant, cylindrical
M1222 mm
2 mm
ZX-EM02HT*4
Screw-shaped
*1
*2
*3
*4
Measurement sensors
Sensor heads
For an average count of 4,096.

Models with protective spiral tubes are also available. Add a suffix of -S to the above model numbers when ordering. (Example: ZX-ED01T-S)
Be sure to use ZX-EDA amplifier unit version 1,200 or later with the ZX-EV04.
Be sure to use ZX-EDA amplifier unit version 1,300 or later with the ZX-EM02H.
Amplifier units
Power supply
Output type
Order code
DC
NPN
ZX-EDA11
PNP
ZX-EDA41
Note: Compatible connection with the sensor head.

Calculating unit
Calculating unit
Model
Name
Model
ZX-CAL2
ZX-SF11

+ setup software (CD-ROM)
ZX-SFW11EV3*1
ZX-SW11EV3
Amplifier mounting brackets

Remarks
Model
Attached to each sensor head
ZX-XBE1
*1
For DIN track mounting
ZX-XBE2
Cables with connectors on both ends (for extension)*

Cable length
Model
1m
ZX-XC1A
4m
ZX-XC4A
8m
ZX-XC8A
* Robot cable models are also available. The model numbers are ZX-XC_R.
Specifications
Sensor heads
Item
ZX-EDR5T
ZX-ED01T
ZX-ED02T/EM02T
ZX-EM07MT
ZX-EV04T
ZX-EM02HT
Measurement range
0 to 0.5 mm
0 to 1 mm
0 to 2 mm
0 to 7 mm
0 to 4 mm
0 to 2 mm
Sensing object
Magnetic metals
(Measurement ranges and linearities are different for non-magnetic metals. Refer to engineering data on B-67.)
Standard reference object
18 18 3 mm
30 30 3 mm
60 60 3 mm
45 45 3 mm
Material: Ferrous (S50C)

Resolution*1
1 m
Linearity*2
0.5% F.S.
Linear output range
Same as measurement range.
(including amplifier unit)
0.15% F.S./C
Ambient
Operating*5
temperature Storage*5
0 to 50C (with no icing 10 to 60C (with no icing or condensation)

or condensation)
1% F.S.*3
0.07% F.S./C
0.1% F.S./C
10 to 200C
20 to 200C
389
ZX-E
Item
ZX-EDR5T
Ambient humidity
ZX-ED01T
50 M min. (at 500 DC)
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between charged parts and case
10 to 55 Hz with 1.5-mm double amplitude for 2 h each in X, Y, and Z directions
500 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Degree of protection (sensor head)
IEC60529, IP65
Connection method
Connector relay (standard cable length: 2 m)
Approx. 120 g
Approx. 140 g
Brass
Stainless steel
Sensing
surface
Preamplifier
Accessories
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
ZX-EM07MT
ZX-EV04T
ZX-EM02HT
IEC60529, IP60*6
IEC60529, IP67
Materials
Sensor head Case
ZX-ED02T/EM02T
Approx. 160 g
Brass
Approx. 130 g
Approx. 160 g
Zinc (nickel-plated)
Brass
Heat-resistant ABS
PEEK
PES
Amplifier mounting brackets (ZX-XBE1), instruction manual
Accuracy: The resolution is the deviation (3) in the linear output when connected to the ZX-EDA amplifier unit. The above values indicate the deviations observed 30 minutes after the
power is turned ON.
(The resolution is measured with Omron's standard reference object at of the measurement range with the ZX-EDA set for the maximum average count of 4,096 per period.)
The resolution is given at the repeat accuracy for a stationary workpiece, and is not an indication of the distance accuracy. The resolution may be adversely affected under strong electromagnetic fields.
Linearity: The linearity is given as the error in an ideal straight line displacement output when measuring the standard reference object. The linearity and measurement values vary with the
object being measured.
The value given is for an ambient temperature of 25C.
Temperature characteristic: The temperature characteristic is measured with Omron's standard reference object at of the measurement range.
The ambient temperature given is only for the sensor head. It is -10 to 60C for the preamp.
Do not use in moist environments because the case is not waterproof.
Amplifier units
Item
ZX-EDA11
Measurement period
150 s
ZX-EDA41
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1,024, 2,048, or 4,096
Linear output*2
Current output: 4 to 20 mA/F.S., max. load resistance: 300

Voltage output: 4 V (5 V, 1 to 5 V *3), output impedance: 100
Judgement outputs
(3 outputs: HIGH/PASS/LOW)


Zero reset input, timing input, reset input, ON:Short-circuited with 0-V terminal or 1.5 V or less
judgement output hold input
OFF:Open (leakage current: 0.1 mA max.)
Function
Measurement value display

Linearity adjustment (materials selection)
Display reverse
Number of display digit changes
Bottom hold, peak-to-peak hold
Average hold
Initial reset
OFF-delay timer
Non-measurement setting
Automatic teaching
Reset input
Linear output correction
K-(A+B) calculation*4
Sensor disconnection detection
Key lock
ON:Supply voltage short-circuited or supply voltage within 1.5 V

OFF:Open (leakage current: 0.1 mA max.)
set value/output value/

resolution display
display OFF mode
sample hold
self-peak hold
delay hold
linearity initialization
one-shot timer
direct threshold value setting
hysteresis width setting
(A-B) calculations*4
mutual interference prevention*4
zero reset memory
Scaling
ECO mode
peak hold
self-bottom hold
zero reset
ON-delay timer
previous value comparison
position teaching
timing inputs
monitor focus
(A+B) calculations*4
zero reset indicator
Indications
Judgement indicators: High (orange), pass (green), low (yellow), 7-segment main digital display (red),
7-segment sub-digital display (yellow), power ON (green), zero reset (green), enable (green)
Voltage influence
(including sensor)
0.5% F.S. of linear output value at 20% of power supply voltage
Current consumption
140 mA max. with power supply voltage of 24 VDC (with sensor connected)
Ambient temperature
Operating and storage: 0to 50C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity
20 M min. (at 500 DC)
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min
10 to 150 Hz with 0.7-mm double amplitude for 80 min each in X, Y, and Z directions
300 m/s2, 3 times each in 6 directions (up, down, left, right, forward, backward)
Connection method
Approx. 350 g
Materials
Accessories
Instruction manual
*1
The response speed of the linear output is calculated as the measurement period x (average count setting + 1) (with fixed sensitivity).
The response speed of the judgement outputs is calculated as the measurement period x (average count setting + 1) (with fixed sensitivity).
*2
The output can be switched between a current output and voltage output using a switch on the bottom of the amplifier unit.
*3
*4
A calculating unit (ZX-CAL or ZX-CAL2) is required.
390
ZX-T

Smart contact measurement sensor
ZX-T is ideal for applications where the target object may contain oil deposits or other
micro-structures. In this case contact measurement is the most reliable way.
Modular platform concept for different sensing technologies
Air-retracting types for automated inspection
Multipoint measurement with up to 8 sensors
Pressing force alarm prevents malfunction
Strong ball bearing structure assures long life time
Sensors
Sensor heads
Size
Type
Sensing distance
Resolution (See note.)
Order code
6 dia.
Short type
1 mm
0.1 m
ZX-TDS01T
Standard type
4 mm
ZX-TDS04T
ZX-TDS04T-L
Low-load type
Standard type
10 mm
ZX-TDS10T
0.4 m
Ultra-low-load type
ZX-TDS10T-L
Air lift type
ZX-TDS10T-V
Air lift/air push type
ZX-TDS10T-VL
Measurement sensors
8 dia.
Note: The resolution refers to the minimum value that can be read when a ZX-TDA_1 amplifier unit is connected.
Amplifier units
Power supply
Output type
Order code
DC
NPN
ZX-TDA11
PNP
ZX-TDA41

Calculating unit
Calculating unit
Order code
Name
Order code
ZX-CAL2
ZX-SF11
Cables with connectors on both ends (for extension)*
Name
Order code
Cable length
Order code
ZX-SF11
1m
ZX-XC1A

+ setup software (CD-ROM)
ZX-SFW11EV3*1,*2
4m
ZX-XC4A
ZX-XC8A
ZX-SW11EV3*1
8m
*1
When using the ZX-TDA11/41 with the SmartMonitor, either the ZX-SFW11EV3 or the
ZX-SW11EV3 SmartMonitor must be used. Earlier versions cannot be used.
*2
* Robot cable models are also available. The model numbers are ZX-XC_R.
Preamplifier mounting brackets

Remarks
Order code
Attached to each sensor head
ZX-XBT1
For DIN track mounting
ZX-XBT2
Actuators
Type (material)
Screw section
Appearance
Application
Applicable sensor
(see note.)
Order code
Ball type (steel)
Female screw
M2.5x0.45
Measuring ordinary flat surfaces (standard

actuator supplied with the ZX-TDS series)
D5SN-TB1
Ball type
(carbide steel)
Female screw
M2.5x0.45
Measurements where abrasion resistance

is critical
Measured objects: Carbide (HR90) or lower.
D5SN-TB2
Ball type (ruby)
Female screw
M2.5x0.45
Measurements where abrasion resistance

is critical
Measured objects: Carbide (HR90) or higher.
D5SN-TB3
Needle type
(carbide steel)
Male screw
M2.5x0.45
Measuring the bottom of grooves and holes
D5SN-TN1
ZX-TDS_T
391
ZX-T
Type (material)
Screw section
Appearance
Application
Applicable sensor
(see note.)
Order code
Flat
(carbide steel)
Male screw
M2.5x0.45
Measuring spherical objects
D5SN-TF1
Conversion adapter
(stainless steel)
Through-hole female screw

M2.5x0.45
Mounting D5SN-TN1/-TF1 or commercially

available actuators on ZX-TDS-series sensors
D5SN-TA
ZX-TDS_T
Note:
Replacement possible
Conversion adapter required
Specifications
Amplifier units
Item
ZX-TDA11
Measurement period
1 ms
ZX-TDA41
1, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, or 1,024
Linear output*2
Current output: 4 to 20 mA/F.S., max. load resistance: 300

Voltage output: 4 V (5 V, 1 to 5 V*3), output impedance: 100
Judgement outputs
(3 outputs: HIGH/PASS/LOW)

Zero reset input, timing input, reset input, ON: Short-circuited with 0-V terminal or 1.5 V or less
Measurement value display
Display reverse
Sample hold
Self-peak hold
Initial reset
Hysteresis width setting
Judgement output hold input
(A+B) calculations (see note 4.)
Zero reset memory
Clamp value setting
Span adjustment

ON: Supply voltage short-circuited or supply voltage of 1.5 V or less
Function
present value/set value/output value display

ECO mode
number of display digit changes
peak hold
bottom hold, peak-to-peak hold
self-bottom hold
zero reset
direct threshold value setting
position teaching
timing inputs
reset input
monitor focus
(A-B) calculations*4
sensor disconnection detection
function lock
non-measurement setting
scale inversion
zero reset indicator
warming-up display
pressing force alarm
Indicators
Judgement indicators: High (orange), pass (green), low (yellow), 7-segment main digital display (red), 7-segment sub-digital
display (yellow), power ON (green), zero reset (green), enable (green)
Current consumption
140 mA max. (with sensor connected), for 24-VDC power supply voltage: 140 mA max. (with sensor connected)
Ambient temperature
Operating and storage: 0to 50C (with no icing or condensation)
0.03% F.S./C
Connection method
Approx. 350 g
Materials
*1
The response speed of the linear output is calculated as the measurement period x (average count setting + 1).
The response speed of the judgement outputs is calculated as the measurement period x (average count setting + 1).
*2
The output can be switched between a current output and voltage output using a switch on the bottom of the amplifier unit.
*3
*4 A calculating unit (ZX-CAL2) is required.
Sensor heads
Item
ZX-TDS01T
ZX-TDS04T
Measurement range
1 mm
4 mm
Maximum actuator travel distance
Approx. 1.5 mm
Approx. 5 mm
Resolution*1
0.1 m
ZX-TDS04T-L
Linearity*2
0.3% F.S.
Operating force *3
Approx. 0.7 N
Approx. 0.25 N
Degree of protection (sensor head)
IEC60529, IP67
IEC60529, IP54
Mechanical durability
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Operating and storage: 35% to 85% (with no icing or condensation)
Temperature
characteristic*4
Sensor head
0.03% F.S./C
Preamplifier
0.01% F.S./C
Approx. 100 g
Materials
Sensor head
Stainless steel
Preamplifier
Polycarbonate
Accessories
*1
Instruction manual, preamplifier mounting brackets (ZX-XBT1)
The resolution is given as the minimum value that can be read when a ZX-TDA_1 amplifier unit is connected. This value is taken 15 minutes after turning ON the power with the average
number of operations set to 256.
*2
The linearity is given as the error in an ideal straight line displacement output.
*3
These figures are representative values that apply for the measurement mid-point, and are for when the provided actuator is used, with the actuator moving downwards. If the actuator moves
horizontally or upwards, the operating force will be reduced. Also, if an actuator other than the standard one is used, the operating force will vary with the weight of the actuator itself.
*4
These figures are representative values that apply for the mid-point of the measurement range.
392
ZG2
Profile sensor
Easy profile measurement
teach&go
The ZG2 enables precise shape measurement on challenging materials and surfaces.
An easy and intuitive user interface enables efficient installation, setup and operation.
A built-in LCD monitor indicates the measurement result in real time.
Easy to use intuitive user interface
Live built-in LCD monitor for setup and immediate profile display
Versatile 18 measurement tools
Accurate 5 m resolution (3 mm / 631 pixels)
Wide profiles up to 70 mm
Sensor heads
Optical method
Sensing distance
Resolution
Order code
Heigt direction
Width direction
Hight direction
Width direction
Diffuse reflective
21048 mm
70 mm
6 m
111 m
ZG2-WDS70
Diffuse reflective
10012 mm
22 mm
2.5 m
35 m
ZG2-WDS22
Diffuse reflective
503 mm
8 mm
1 m
13 m
ZG2-WDS8T
Regular reflective
20.5 mm
3 mm
0.25 m
5 m
ZG2-WDS3VT
Measurement sensors
Note: - For details, refer the ratings and specifications table.

- Designate the cable length (0.5 m, 2 m) when ordering.
Sensor controllers
Power supply
Output type
Order code
24 VDC
NPN
ZG2-WDC11A*1
PNP
ZG2-WDC41A
*1
Setup support software for PC is attached

Real-time parallel output unit
Parallel mounting adaptor
Output type
Order code
NPN
ZG-RPD11
For 1 unit
ZS-XPM1
PNP
ZG-RPD41
For 2 units or more
ZS-XPM2
RS-232C cable
Order code
Connecting device
Order code
Item
Order code
For personal computer connection (2 m)
ZS-XRS2
ZS-XCN
For PLC/PT connection (2 m)
ZS-XPT2
Sensor head extension cable
Memory card
Capacity
Order code
Name
Order code
128 MB
F160-N1285
3 m extension cable
ZG2-XC3CR
256 MB
F160-N2565
8 m extension cable
ZG2-XC8CR
15 m extension cable
ZG2-XC15CR
25 m extension cable
ZG2-XC25CR
Digital equalizer (relay device)
ZG2-XEQ
0.2 m digital equalizer connection cable
ZG2-XC02D
393
ZG2
Profile sensor
Specifications
Sensor heads
Item
ZG2-WDS70
ZG2-WDS22
Optical system
Diffuse reflective
Diffuse
reflective
Regular
reflective
Diffuse
reflective
Regular
reflective
Regular
reflective
Measurement range Height direction
21048 mm
(In the high-precision mode)
10012 mm
9410 mm
503 mm
442 mm
22.30.5 mm 10.60.4 mm
Resolution
ZG2-WDS8T
ZG2-WDS3VT
Diffuse
reflective
Width direction (typical)
70 mm
22 mm
8 mm
3 mm
Height direction*1
6 m
2.5 m
1 m
0.25 m
Width direction
111 m
(70 mm/631 pixels)
35 m
(22 mm/631 pixels)
13 m
(8 mm/631 pixels)
5 m
(3 mm/631 pixels)
0.03% F.S./C
0.08% F.S./C
Linearity (in the height direction)*2
0.1% F.S.
0.02% F.S./C
Light source
Visible semiconductor laser
Type
Wavelength
658 nm
Output
5 mW max. output, 1 mW max. exposure (without using optical instruments)
650 nm
1 mW max.
Laser class
Class 2M of EN60825-1 / IEC60825-1

Class IIIB of FDA (21CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11)
Class 2 of EN60825-1 /
IEC60825-1
Class II of FDA (21CFR 1040.10
and 1040.11)
Beam shape (at measurement center distance)*4
120 m 75 mm (typical)
LED
STANDBY: Lights when laser irradiation preparation is complete (indication color: green)
25 m 4 mm (typical)
LD_ON: Lights when the laser is irradiating (indication color: green)

Measurement object
Environmental
resistance
Surface of non-transparent
objects
Ambient light intensity
Surface of non-transparent/transparent objects
Illumination on the photo-receiving face 7,000 lx max.: Incandescent lamp
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
IP66 (IEC60529)
10 to 150 Hz with 0.35 mm single amplitude for 80 min each in X, Y, and Z directions
IP67 (IEC60529)
150 m/s, 3 times each in 6 directions (up / down, right / left, forward / backward)
Materials
Case: Aluminum diecast, Front cover: Glass, Cable insulation : Heat-resistive polyvinyl chloride (PVC),
Connector: Zinc alloy or brass
Cable length
0.5 m, 2 m (flexible cable)
Weight
Approx. 650 g
Accessories
Laser labels (EN : 2 labels, FDA : 3 labels), Ferrite core (1), Instruction manual
*1
Approx. 500 g
Approx. 300 g
Obtained by setting an Omron standard measurement object at the measurement center distance and determing the average height of the beam line. The conditions are given in the table
below. However, satisfactory resolution cannot be attained in strong electromagnetic fields.The minimum resolution of the ZG2-WDS8T/WDS3VT is 0.25 m, even when the average number
of operations is increased. Resolution does not go any lower.
Model
CCD Mode
Average No. of operations
Measurement object
64
Omron standard white alumina ceramic object
Regular reflective
ZG2-WDS70/WDS22/WDS8T Standard mode
ZG2-WDS3VT
*2
Standard mode
Omron standard mirrored object
Omron standard diffuse reflective object
The tolerance for an ideal straight line obtained by determing the average height of an Omron standard measurement object for the beam line. The CCD high-resolution mode is used. Linearity varies depending on the measurement object.
Model
Measurement object
ZG2-WDS70/WDS22/WDS8T
Omron standard white alumina ceramic object
ZG2-WDS3VT
Omron standard mirrored object
Regular reflective
*3
*4
Diffuse reflective
Diffuse reflective
Omron standard diffuse reflective object
A value attained by using an aluminum jig to secure the distance between the Sensor head and the measurement object. The CCD standard mode is used.
Defined as 1/e2 (13.5%) of the center light intensity. This may be influenced when light leakage also exists outside the defined area and the reflectivity of the light around the measurement
object is higher than that of the measurement object.
394
ZG2
Profile sensor
Sensor controllers
Item
ZG2-WDC11/WDC11A
ZG2-WDC41/WDC41A
Input/output type
NPN
PNP
No. of connectable Sensor Heads
1 per Controller
No. of connectable Controllers
Measurement cycle *1
16 ms (high-precision mode), 8 ms (standard mode), 5 ms (high-speed mode)
Min. display unit
10 nm
Display range
Display
999.99999 to 999.99999
LCD monitor
1.8-inch TFT color LCD (557x234 pixels)
LEDs
External Input/output Analog outputs

interface signal lines
Judgment output
(ALL-PASSING/ERROR)
Trigger auxiliary output
(ENABLE/GATE)
Laser stop input (LD-OFF)
Zero reset input (ZERO)
Judgment indicators for each task (indication color: orange): T1, T2, T3, T4
Laser indicator (indication color: green): LD_ON
Zero reset indicator (indication color: green): ZERO
Trigger indicators (indication color: green): TRIG
Select voltage or current (using the sliding switch on the bottom surface)
Voltage output: 10 to 10 V, output impedance: 40
Current output: 4 to 20 mA, maximum load resistance: 300
NPN open collector
30 VDC, 50 mA max.
PNP open collector

50 mA max.
ON: O V short or 1.5 V max.

ON: Power supply voltage short or

power supply voltage 1.5 V max.
Measurement trigger input (TRIG)
Parall
output*2
Main functions
Ratings
USB2.0
RS-232C
Output
18 - terminal
No. of settings banks
16
Multi, High-speed multi, Auto, Fixed
Measurement items
Height, 2-point Step, 3-point Step, Edge position, Edge width, Angle, Intersection coordinates, Intersection angle, Sectional area
(up to eight items can be measured simultaneously)
Auxiliary functions
Filter, Laser power adjustment, Position correction (height, position, lope), Linked operation, Point of inflection measurement
Profiles saved
16 profiles (1 profile per bank)
Trigger modes
External trigger/continuous
21.6 to 26.4 VDC (including ripple current)
Current consumption
0.8 A max. (per sensor head)
20 M at 250 V between lead wires and Controller case
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC, 50 / 60 Hz for 1 min between lead wires and Controller case
Environmental resistance Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
IP20 (IEC 60529)
Vibration resistance (destruction) Vibration frequency: 10 to 150 Hz, single amplitude: 0.35 mm, acceleration: 50 m/s
150 m/s, 3 times each in 6 directions (up/down, right/left, forward/backward)
Material
Case: Polycarbonate (PC),

Cable insulation : Heat-resistive polyvinyl chloride (PCV)
Cable length
2m
Weight
Approx. 300 g (including cable) (Packed state: Approx. 450 g)
Accessories
ZG2-WDC_1: Large Ferrite Core (1 piece), Instruction Manual

ZG2-WDC_1A: Large Ferrite Core (1 piece), Small Ferrite Core (2 pieces), Instruction Manual, Setup Support Software (CD-ROM),
USB cable (1 m)
*1
The image input periods listed here are for fixed/auto sensitivity. The image input period will be longer for multi-sensitivity, high-speed multi-sensitivity, or other settings. When the highpower mode is ON, the shortest image input period is 95 ms regardless of the setting of the CCD mode. Use the eco monitor in the RUN mode to determine the actual image input period.
*2 when ZG-RPD is mounted
395
Measurement sensors
Bank switching input (BANK A, B)

Serial I/O
ZG2
Profile sensor
Data storage unit

Item
ZG2-DSU11
ZG2-DSU41
Input/output type
NPN
PNP
No. of connectable Controllers
2*1
Connectable controllers
ZG2-WDC11/WDC41
External Input/output Inputting starting/

interface signal lines
terminating logging
ON: O V short or 1.5 V max.

OFF: Open (ileakage current : 0.1 mA max.)
ON: Power supply voltage short or power supply voltage

1.5 V max.
Judgment output
(HIGH/PASS/LOW/ERROR)
NPN open collector

30 VDC, 50 mA max.
Residual voltage : 1.2 V max.
PNP open collector

50 mA max.
USB2.0
RS-232C
Serial I/O
Functions No. of logged Memory of the main unit

data*2
Memory card (256 MB)*4
Profiles saved: 5,120 profiles

Measurement values saved: 65,000 values max.*3
Profiles saved: 35,328 profiles max. (256 profiles x 138 files)
Measurement values saved: 7,150,000 values max. (65,000 values x 110 files)
Logging trigger functions
External triggers, data triggers (self-triggers), and time triggers
External banks functions
4096
Other functions
Alarm output functions
Ratings
21.6 to 26.4 VDC (including ripple current)
Current consumption
0.5 A max.
Environmental resistance Ambient temperature

Ambient humidity

Material
Case : Polycarbonate (PC)
Cable length
2m
Weight
Approx. 280 g
Accessories
Ferrite Core (1 piece), Instruction Manual
*1
*2
The controller link unit is necessary for linking.

Data is saved in the memory of the main unit during logging. The data is automatically saved in a memory card after logging is completed. The maximum number of logging differs according
to set conditions. For details, refer to the Users Manual.
*3 Measurement values for 65,000 measurements can be saved even when two sensor controllers are connected and each performs eight tasks.
*4
The value is the maximum number achieved in the following conditions:
One sensor controller performs one measurement task.
Either profiles or measurement values are logged.
396
ZX-GT
Laser micrometer
Smart laser micrometer
High accuracy: 5 to 10 m
All surfaces
Long sensing distance: < 500 mm
Line width up to 28 mm
Calculation unit for multiple heads
Fast sampling time: 0.5 ms
PC software for setup
Sensors
Type
Optical system
Measuring width
Sensing distance
Resolution Output type
Order code
Separate type
Through-beam
28 mm
0 to 500 mm
10 m
NPN
ZX-GT28S11
PNP
ZX-GT28S41
NPN
ZX-GT2840S11
PNP
ZX-GT2840S41
Integrated type
40 mm
Power supply
Output type
Order code
DC
NPN
ZX-GTC11
PNP
ZX-GTC41
Measurement sensors
Controller

Set of interface unit and setup software PCs
Calculating units
Output type
Order code
NPN
ZX-GIF11A
PNP
ZX-GIF41A
Interface unit(RS-232C/binary output)
Order code
Receiver-controller extension cable

Cable length
Quantity
Order code
Standard cable
Flexible cable
1m
ZX-XGC1A
ZX-XGC1R
2m
ZX-XGC2A
ZX-XGC2R
5m
ZX-XGC5A
ZX-XGC5R
8m
ZX-XGC8A
ZX-XGC8R
20 m
ZX-XGC20A
ZX-XGC20R
Power supply
Output type
Order code
DC
NPN
ZX-GIF11
1m
PNP
ZX-GIF41
Setup software PCs

Name
Order code
Smart monitor GT
ZX-GSW11
ZX-CAL2
Calculating unit
Up to two extension cables can be connected. However, be sure to limit the total extension
cable length between the receiver and the controller to 30 meters (including the receiver
cable).
397
ZX-GT
Laser micrometer
Specifications
Sensor
Item
ZX-GT28S11
Output type
NPN
ZX-GT2840S11
ZX-GT28S41
ZX-GT2840S41
Appearance
Separate type
Light source
Visible semiconductor laser diode (wavelength 650 nm, CLASS 1 of EN60825-1/IEC60825-1, CLASS of FDA(21CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11)
Measuring width
28 mm
Sensing distance
0 to 500 mm
40 mm
0 to 500 mm
40 mm
Minimum sensing object
0.5 mm dia.*1
0.2 mm dia.
0.5 mm dia.*1
0.2 mm dia.
Linearity
0.1% F.S.*2
Resolution
10 m (number of process values to average: 16)*3
PNP
Integrated type
Separate type
Integrated type
0.01% F.S/C*4
Indicators (emitter)
Laser ON indicator (green), laser alarm indicator (red)
Indicator (receiver)
Optical axis setting indicator (green)
Laser OFF input/sync input
ON: Short-circuited with 0 V or 1.5 V max.

ON: Short-circuited with power supply voltage or

power supply voltage -1.5 V max.
Laser deterioration alarm output
NPN open-collector output

30 VDC 20 mA max.
Residual voltage 1.2 V max.
PNP open-collector output

30 VDC 20 mA max.
Residual voltage 2 V max.
Power consumption (emitter)
30 mA max.
Power supply voltage (emitter)
24 VDC+10%, 15% ripple (p-p) 10% max.
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min
20 M (at 500 VDC megger)

(emitter)
3,000 lx (incandescent light)

(receiver)
1,000 lx (incandescent light)*5
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Vibration resistance (durability)
10 to 150 Hz single-amplitude: 0.75 mm for 80 min each in X, Y and Z directions
IEC60529 IP40
Cable length
2m
Material
Case: aluminum die-cast, Lens: glass
Approx. 550 g
Accessories
Laser warning labels, instruction sheet
Approx. 570 g
Approx. 550 g
Approx. 570 g
F.S.: 28 mm measuring range of receiver

*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
Distance between emitter and receiver: 500 mm, measurement object at 250 mm from receiver. Glass ends of chamfer 0.1 mm or more can be detected in glass edge measurement mode. (at
binary level 70%)
Linearity is given to be a typical error with respect to an ideal straight line when the distance between the emitter and receiver is 100 mm and light is blocked at a distance of 50 mm from the
receiver. (On the ZX-GT2840_, the measurement object is measured at a distance of 20 mm from the receiver.)
The amount of fluctuation (3 ) in the analog output when the distance between the emitter and receiver is 100 mm and a ZX-GTC_ is connected
Change in the light cutoff value on one side when the distance between the emitter and receiver is 100 mm and the light is half-cutoff at a distance of 50 mm from the receiver (On the
ZX-GT2840_, the measurement object is measured at a distance of 20 mm from the receiver.)
Standard mode (NORM) used
Controller
Item
ZX-GTC11
ZX-GTC41
Output type
NPN
PNP
Measurement cycle*1
1.5 ms (standard mode (NORM))

0.5 ms (high-speed mode (FAST))*2
Samples to average
1/2/4/8/16/32/64/128/256/512/1024/2048/4096
Analog output*3
For current output: 4 to 20 mA/F.S., max. load resistance 300

For voltage output: 4 V, (5 V, 1 to 5 V*4), output impedance 100
Timing input, bank switching input,

zero reset input, reset input
ON: short-circuited with 0 V or 1.5 V max.

ON: short-circuited with power supply voltage or

power supply voltage -1.5 V max.
HIGH/PASS/LOW
Judgment output*5
Sync output*6

30 VDC 50 mA max.

30 VDC 50 mA max.
Indicator
Judgment output indicator: HIGH (orange), PASS (green), LOW (orange)

Main display (red) sub-display (yellow) bank 1/2 (orange), zero reset (green)
Main
functions
398
setups
2 banks
Measurement mode
Interrupted beam width measurement, incident beam width measurement, outer diameter measurement, center position measurement, IC lead
pitch,
IC lead width judgment, specified edge measurement, wire position measurement, glass edge position measurement
Display during
measurement
Measured value, resolution, threshold, voltage output value, current output value (number of display digits can be changed)
Zero reset functions
Offset setting of zero reset value, zero reset value memory
Hold
Sample hold, peak hold, bottom hold, peak-to-peak hold, average hold, delay hold
Timer functions
ON-delay, OFF-delay, one-shot
Adjustment functions
Optical axis adjust mode/light intensityt writing mode, variable binary level, variable edge filter, analog output scaling
Calculation
2 possible on up to two controllers (calculation Unit ZX-CAL2 is required for connecting controllers to each other.) A-B, A+B, width
Other
Measurement cycle setting, threshold setting, hysteresis setting, initialization, key lock
ZX-GT
Laser micrometer
Item
ZX-GTC11
0.005% F.S./C
Current consumption
150 mA max. (including receiver)
24 VDC+10%, 15% ripple (p-p) 10% max.
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for min
ZX-GTC41
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Vibration resistance(durability)
IEC60529 IP20
Cable length
2m
Material
Approx. 330 g
Accessories
Instruction sheet
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
The first response time is measurement cycle x (number of samples to average setting + 1) + 1 ms max. For the second response time onwards, the specified measurement cycle time is
output.
The response time in the high-speed mode (FAST) for the IC lead pitch and IC lead width judgment modes is 1 ms.
Current/voltage can be switched using the switch provided on the rear of the Controller.
Can be set by the analog output scaling function.
The error (ERR) state is displayed when all HIGH/PASS/LOW outputs turn OFF.
Normally, wire the sync output wire directly to the emitter's sync input wire and run the controller in the standard mode. On an NPN type controller, use an NPN type emitter, and on a PNP
type controller, use a PNP type emitter. Wiring of the sync wires is not required when the controller is run in the high-speed mode.
(Note, however, that the controller becomes more susceptible to the influence of ambient light in this case.)
Item
ZX-GIF11/-GIF11A
ZX-GIF41/-GIF41A
Compatible controller
ZX-GTC11
ZX-GTC41
Indicator
Power ON (green), controller communications (orange), controller communications error (red), RS-232C communications (orange),
RS-232C communications error (red), binary output (orange)
Communications port
RS-232C (9-pin D-sub connector)
12-bit binary output

(D11 toD0, GATE)

30 VDC 20 mA max.
Supplied from controller (power consumption: 60 mA max.)
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min
Measurement sensors
Interface unit

30 VDC 20 mA max.
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Vibration resistance(durability)
IEC60529 IP20
Cable length
RS-232C 0.5 m, binary output 2 m
Material
ZX-GIF_1A: Approx. 550 g

ZX-GIF_1: Approx. 330 g
Accessories
ZX-GIF_1A: Setup coftware (CD-ROM), 2 clamps, instruction sheet

ZX-GIF_1: 2 clamps, instruction sheet
399
Safety
S5
NS5
Handheld
38
e 69
N539
Page 70

400
Quick Link
Control- and Signalling devices
Safety sensors

Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Standard pushbutton switches
A16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
A22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Emergency stop pushbutton switches
A165E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
A22E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Rope pull emergency stop switches
ER-series rope pulls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Signalling devices
LU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
LU7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
MP/MPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
LME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Type 4 safety light curtain
F3SJ-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
F3SJ-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
F3SJ-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Type 4/2 safety light curtain
MS4800/2800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
F3S-TGR-CL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
F3S-TGRCL_-K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
F3S-TGRCL_-K_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Muting actuators
F39-TGR-MCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Single-beam safety sensor in compact housing
E3FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Safety laser scanner
OS32C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Safety limit switch with metal housing
D4B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Safety limit switch with plastic housing
D4N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Safety door hinge switch
D4NH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Safety limit switch with manual reset
D4N-_R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Non-contact switches
F3S-TGR-N_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
F3S-TGR-N_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
F3S-TGR-N_M/-N_U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
F3S-TGR-S_A/-S_D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
F3S-TGR-N_X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
D4NS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
D4BS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
F3S-TGR-KM15/-KM16/-KH16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Guard-lock safety door switch
D4NL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
D4GL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
D4SL-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
F3S-TGR-KHL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
F3S-TGR-KHL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Compact non-contact door switch/flexible safety unit
D40A/G9SX-NS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Expandable safety relay unit
G9SA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Slim-size safety unit
G9SB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Safety relays
G9SR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Flexible safety unit
G9SX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Safety guard switching unit
G9SX-GS/A4EG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Limited speed monitoring unit
G9SX-LM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Standstill monitoring unit
G9SX-SM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Relays with forcibly guided contacts
G7SA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
G7S-_-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Standalone safety controller
G9SP-N_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Compact non-contact door switch/flexible safety unit
G9SX-NS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Safety network controller
NE1A-SCPU_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
DeviceNet safety I/O terminal block family
DST1-ID/-MD/-MRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Remote I/O
NX-series modular I/O system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
401
Safety
Content
Safety

INTERACT WITH YOUR MACHINE
Patlite Signal towers
Machines that are stopped during production are creating extra cost, our signal towers are used to show this
status and guide workers to service the machines efficiently, minimizing downtime and production loss.
LED technology
Optional sound system
30 mm, 50 mm, 60 mm and 70 mm diameter
Modular and monolithic systems
Select your signal tower in a split second:

www.omron-industrial.com/safety
Emergency stop switches
Emergency stop pushbutton

switches
Rope pull emergency stop

switches
402
Rope span
40 m
Rope span
80 m
Rope span
125 m
Rope span
200 m
22 mm
mounting
16.5 mm
mounting
ER5018
ER6022
ER1022
ER1032
A22E
A165E
S424
Page 412
S425
Page 412
S422
Page 412
S423
Page 412
P623
Page 411
P633
Page 408
Pushbutton switches
Signal towers
Standard
pushbutton switches
Monolithic system
Modular system
22 mm
mounting
16.5 mm
mounting
30 mm
60 mm
50 mm
70 mm
A22
A16
MP/MPS
LME
LU5
LU7
P622
Page 409
P632
Page 406
Y342
Page 422
Y325
Page 424
Y322
Page 415
Y323
Page 419
403
Selection table
Category
Pushbutton switch
A16
Mounting
Nut-mounting
Size
16 mm
A165E
22 mm
Plastic
Protection class
IP65
range
10 to 55C
20 to 70C
Head size
30 mm, 40 mm
30 mm, 40 mm, 60 mm
Conformity
EN 60947-5-1
Max. rope span
Yellow
Pure yellow
Green
White
LED indicator beacon
Blue
Red
Explosion proof housing
Yellow
Lighted head
Pure yellow
Push lock pull reset
Green
Push lock turn reset
White
E-Stop application
Blue
Red
General safety application
Yellow
Green
SPST (NC)
White
Blue
DPST (NC)
Black
Momentary operation
SPST (NO) + SPST (NC)
TPST (NC)
Page/Quick Link
408
411
Self-holding
Number of contacts
IP rating
IP65
Legend plate
Selection criteria
Features
125 VAC
10
250 VAC
30 VDC
10
Rated load
5 A at 125 VAC,
3 A at 250 VAC,
3 A at 30 VDC
10 A at 110 VAC,
6 A at 220 VAC
Solder
PCB
Screw-less Clamp
5 VDC
12 VDC
24 VDC
SPDT
DPDT
SPST-NO
SPST-NC
SPST-NO + SPST-NC
DPST-NO
DPST-NC
Page/Quick Link
406
409
404
A22E
Housing
Application
Incandescent
lamp-lighted
Non-lighted
LED-lighted
Pushbutton color
Features
Switch ratings [A]
Terminals
Operating
voltage
Model
Shape
Red
Form
A22
Contact configuration
Selection
criteria
Model
Category
Conduit size M20
Additional E-Stop button
Standard
Available
No/not available
Model
ER 5018
Features
Application
Contact
configuration
Housing
Metal
Protection class
IP67
range
25 to 80C
Head size
ER 6022
ER 1022
Conformity
EN60947-5-1:2004, EN60947-5-5:1997+A1:2005; EN60204-1; EN ISO 13850:2006
Max. rope span
40 m
Conduit size M20
Additional E-Stop button
80 m
125 m
ER 1032
200 m
Available
Explosion proof housing
Lighted head
Push lock pull reset
Push lock, turn reset
Push lock, lock key reset
E-Stop application
2NC+1NO
3NC
4NC+2NO
Page/Quick Link
412
LME
LU5
LU7
Category
Signalling devices
MP/MPS
System
Rope pull switches
Selection criteria
Category
monolithic
modular
Diameter
30 mm
60 mm
50 mm
70 mm
LED technology
Sound system
IP65
Maximum modules
Input voltage 24 VDC
Unit color
silver
white or silver or black
white or silver
white or silver or black
Page/Quick Link
422
424
415
419
405
A16

16 mm pushbutton switch
These sub-assembled pushbutton switches have a modular construction:
pushbutton + case + lamp (if applicable) + switch. A16 is a nut-mounted pushbutton
switch with a short mounting depth of less than 28.5 mm below panel.
Wide variety of control and signal devices: lighted, non-lighted and buzzer
Quick and easy assembly, snap-in switch
Wide range of switching capacity from standard load to micro load
High reliability, IP65
UL, cUL, CSA and VDE approved, conforms to EN60947-5-1 and IEC947-5-1
Type
Color
Order code
Degree of protection: Oil-resistant IP65
Rectangular
Square
Round
Red
A165L-JR
A165L-AR
A165L-TR
Yellow
A165L-JY
A165L-AY
A165L-TY
Pure yellow
A165L-JPY
A165L-APY
A165L-TPY
White
A165L-JW
A165L-AW
A165L-TW
Blue
A165L-JA
A165L-AA
A165L-TA
Non-lighted
Black
A165L-JB
A165L-AB
A165L-TB
LED
Green
A165L-TGY
A165L-AGY
A165L-TGY
Non-lighted/incandescent lamp
Green
A165L-JG
A165L-AG
A165L-TG
Non-lighted
LED
Incandescent lamp
Cases
Appearance Classification
Order code
Oil-resistant IP65
Momentary operation
Alternate operation
Rectangular (2-way guard)
A165-CJM
Square
A165-CAM
Round
A165-CTM
A165-CJA
Square
A165-CAA
Round
A165-CTA
Switches
Appearance
Switches with reduced voltage lighting

Classification
Order code
Lighted/
Standard load/
non-lighted microload (com(common use) mon use)
SPDT
Solder A16-1
terminal
DPDT
A16-2
Solder terminal A16-T1-1
DPDT
A16-T1-2
DPDT Screw-less
clamp
A16-T1-2S
100 V
DPDT
A16-2P
200 V
Screwless
clamp
A16-2S
Type
Color
Order code
5 VDC
12 VDC
24 VDC
LED
Red
A16-5DSR
A16-12DSR
A16-24DSR
Yellow
A16-5DSY
A16-12DSY
A16-24DSY
Green
A16-5DSG
A16-12DSG
A16-24DSG
White *1
A16-5DSW
A16-12DSW
A16-24DSW
Blue
A16-5DA
A16-12DA
A16-24DA
Type
5 VAC/VDC
12 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
Incandescent lamp
A16-5
A16-12
A16-24
Use the white LED together with white or pure yellow pushbuttons.
Order code
SPDT
PCB
A16-1P
terminal
Lamps
406
Classification
100 V Standard load/
microload
(common use)
SPDT
DPDT
*1
Appearance
A16-T2-2S
A16
Accessories
Name
Appearance
Switch guards
Classification
Remarks
Order code
For rectangular models
Cannot be used with the dust cover
A16ZJ-5050
For square and round models

Dust covers
Panel plugs
A16ZA-5050
A16ZJ-5060
Cannot be used with the switch guard
For square models
A16ZA-5060
For round models
A16ZT-5060
Used for covering the panel cutouts for future panel expansion
A16ZJ-3003
For square models
A16ZA-3003
For round models
A16ZT-3003
Specifications
Durability
Mechanical
Momentary operation: 120 operations/minute max.

Alternate operation: 60 operations/minute max.
Electrical
Mechanical
Momentary operation: 2,000,000 operations min.

Alternate operation: 200,000 operations min.
Electrical
Ambient temperature
Operating: 10 to 55C (with no icing or condensation)

Weight
Approx. 10 g (in the case of a lighted DPDT switch with solder terminals)
Size in mm (HWD)
Round/square:181828.5
rectangular:182428.5
Operating
characteristics
Pushbutton switch
Item
Screw-less clamp
Oil-resistant IP65
Recommended wire size
0.5 mm2 twisted wire or 0.8 mm dia. solid wire
Usable wires
and tensile
strength
Twisted wire
0.3 mm2
Solid wire
0.5 mm dia. 0.8 mm dia. 1.0 mm dia.
SPDT
DPDT
Operating force (OF)

max.
2.94 N
4.91 N
Releasing force (RF)

min.
0.29 N
Total travel (TT)
Approx. 3 mm
Pretravel (PT) max.
2.5 mm
Tensile strength 10 N
Length of exposed wire
0.5 mm2
20 N
0.75 mm2
30 N
1.25 mm2
Allowable operating
frequency
40 N
10 1 mm
Lock stroke (LTA) min. 0.5 mm
407
A165E

Emergency stop switch
The A165E line-up offers E-Stop switches with various head types. For flexible
application, a wide range of accessories is provided. To set up easy installation and
maintenance, various contact combinations are available.
Direct opening mechanism with minimum contact separation of 3 mm
Safety lock mechanism prevents misuse
Short mounting depth
Modular construction; easy installation using snap-in switch
Switches
Rated voltage
Pushbutton color Pushbutton size
Terminal
Contact
Order code
Standard load
(125 VAC at 5 A,
250 VAC at 3 A,
30 VDC at 3 A)
LED
None
LED
None
24 VDC
Red
30 dia.
Solder terminal
24 VDC
40 dia.
SPST-NC
A165E-LS-24D-01
DPST-NC
A165E-LS-24D-02
SPST-NC
A165E-S-01
DPST-NC
A165E-S-02
TPST-NC
A165E-S-03U
SPST-NC
A165E-LM-24D-01
DPST-NC
A165E-LM-24D-02
SPST-NC
A165E-M-01
DPST-NC
A165E-M-02
TPST-NC
A165E-M-03U
Note: The above models have a surface indication of RESET. Models with STOP indication are also available. For further information, contact your Omron representative.

Item
Type
Precautions
Order code
Yellow plate
Yellow, 45 dia.
Use this as an emergency stop nameplate.
A16Z-5070
Panel plug
Round
Used for covering the panel cutouts for future panel expansion.
A16ZT-3003
Tightening tool
Useful for repetitive mounting. Be careful not to tighten excessively.
A16Z-3004
Extractor
Convenient for extracting the switch and lamp.
A16Z-5080
Specifications
Rated voltage
Resistive load
Features
Characteristics
A165E series
A165E_-U series
Operating force (OF) max.
14.7 N
125 VAC
5A
1A
Releasing force (RF) min.
0.1 Nm
250 VAC
3A
0.5 A
Pretravel (PT)
30 VDC
3A
1A
3.50.5 mm
(30.5 mm In case of A165E_U series)
150 mA at 5 VDC
1 mA at 5 VDC
Item
Allowable operating frequency

Mechanical
Electrical
100 M min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of same polarity

2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different polarity and also between each terminal and ground
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between lamp terminals *1
Durability
Mechanical
Electrical
Ambient temperature

Class II
*1
LED not mounted. Test them with the LED removed.
408
A22

A22 comes in a wide variety of shapes and colors and is installable in 22-dia. or
25-dia. panel cutouts. The switch unit can easily be mounted. A22 is mounted using
either open-type (fork-type) or closed-type (round-type) crimp terminals.
Finger-protection mechanism on switch unit provided as standard feature
Increased wiring efficiency with three-row mounting of switch blocks
IP65 oil-resistant (non-lighted models), IP65 (lighted models)
Lighted and non-lighted, flat, projection and half- and full-guard versions
EN60947-5-1, UL and cUL approved
Pushbutton
Non-lighted Red
Lighted
Order code
Flat type
Projection type
Full-guard type Half-guard type
Square/
projection type
Square/
full-guard type
Round/
mushroom type
(30-dia. head)
Round/
mushroom type
(40-dia. head)
A22-FR
A22-TR
A22-GR
A22-HR
A22-CR
A22-DR
A22-SR
A22-MR
Green
A22-FG
A22-TG
A22-TG
A22-HG
A22-CG
A22-DG
A22-SG
A22-MG
Yellow
A22-FY
A22-TY
A22-GY
A22-HY
A22-CY
A22-DY
A22-SY
A22-MY
White
A22-FW
A22-TW
A22-GW
A22-HW
A22-CW
A22-DW
A22-SW
A22-MW
Blue
A22-FA
A22-TA
A22-GA
A22-HA
A22-CA
A22-DA
A22-SA
A22-MA
Black
A22-FB
A22-TB
A22-GB
A22-HB
A22-CB
A22-DB
A22-SB
A22-MB
Red
A22L-TR
A22L-GR
A22L-HR
A22L-CR
A22L-DR
Green
A22L-TG
A22L-GG
A22L-HG
A22L-CG
A22L-DG
Yellow
A22L-TY
A22L-GY
A22L-HY
A22L-CY
A22L-DY
White
A22L-TW
A22L-GW
A22L-HW
A22L-CW
A22L-DW
Blue
A22L-TA
A22L-GA
A22L-HA
A22L-CA
A22L-DA
29.7 dia. 12D
29.7 dia. 19D
29.7 dia. 19D 29.7 dia. 12/18.5D 29.8 mm2 18D
29.8 mm2 18D
30 dia. 32D
40 dia. 32D
Buttonsize in mm
Switches
Switch
operation
Lamp LED
Contacts
Oder code
Nonlighted
models
AC/DC
Alternate
110 VAC
Order code
Operating voltage
With voltage reduction unit
DC
220 VAC
SPST-NO
A22-10M
A22L-10M
A22L-10M-T1
A22L-10M-T2
SPST-NC
A22-01M
A22L-01M
A22L-01M-T1
A22L-01M-T2
SPST-NO +
SPST-NC
A22-11M
A22L-11M
A22L-11M-T1
A22L-11M-T2
AC
AC and DC
6V
12 V
24 V
24 V
superbright
Red
A22-6DR
Green
A22-6DG
Yellow *1
A22-6DY
Blue
A22-6DA
Red
A22-6AR
Green
A22-6AG
Yellow *1
A22-6AY
Blue
A22-6AA
Red
A22-12AR
A22-24AR
A22-24ASR
Green
A22-12AG
A22-24AG
A22-24ASG
DPST-NO
A22-20M
A22L-20M
A22L-20M-T1
A22L-20M-T2
DPST-NC
A22-02M
A22L-02M
A22L-02M-T1
A22L-02M-T2
SPST-NO
A22-10A
A22L-10A
A22L-10A-T1
A22L-10A-T2
Yellow *1
A22-12AY
A22-24AY
A22-24ASY
SPST-NC
A22-01A
A22L-01A
A22L-01A-T1
A22L-01A-T2
Blue
A22-12AA
A22-24AA
A22-24ASA
SPST-NO +
SPST-NC
A22-11A
A22L-11A
A22L-11A-T1
A22L-11A-T2
DPST-NO
A22-20A
A22L-20A
A22L-20A-T1
A22L-20A-T2
Lamp - incandescent lamp
DPST-NC
A22-02A
A22L-02A
A22L-02A-T1
A22L-02A-T2
Order code
*1
Used when the pushbutton color is yellow or white
Operating voltage
Switch blocks
Switch blocks
LED light
Lighted models
Without voltage
reduction unit
Momentary
Illumination Color
Standard load
Order code
SPST-NO
A22-10
SPST-NC
A22-01
DPST-NO
A22-20
DPST-NC
A22-02
5 VAC/VDC
12 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
A22-5
A22-12
A22-24
409
A22
Accessories
Item
Lamp sockets
Direct lighting
Voltage-reduction lighting
Remarks
Order code
Used when changing the lighting method (LED only)
A22-TN
A22-T2
220 VAC
Mounting
latches
For momentary models
Order mounting latches only when mounting switch blocks A22-3200

or lamp sockets are purchased individually
Legend plate
frames
Large size
Snap-in legend plate is acrylic
Sealing caps
For projection models
With snap-in legend plate, without text, black
A22Z-3330
Three-throw spacer
Control boxes
(enclosures)
A22Z-3333
Without snap-in legend plate
Exclusively for A22
One hole
Two holes
Used to prevent dust or water from entering the

operation unit (pushbutton, etc.), color: Opaque,
material: Silicon
A22Z-3600T
Used when mounting three non-lighted switches
A22Z-3003
Do not use DPST-NO or DPST-NC switches,

material: Polycarbonate resin
A22Z-B101
Snap-in legend Standard size

plates
Without text
White
Transparent
White text on black background
A22Z-B102
A22Z-B103
Three holes
Attached to the standard-size legend plate frame,
material: Acrylic
A22Z-3443W
A22Z-3443C
ON
A22Z-3443B-5
OFF
A22Z-3443B-6
DOWN
A22Z-3443B-8
A22Z-3443B-9
POWER ON
Attached to the large-size legend plate frame,
material: Acrylic
A22Z-3453W
EMERGENCY STOP is engraved on the plate.

Used as an emergency stop switch legend plate
A22Z-3466-1
Lamp extractor
Rubber tool used to easily replace lamps
A22Z-3901
Tightening wrench
Tool used to tighten nuts from the back of the panel
A22Z-3905
Large size
Without text
White
Transparent
For emergency 60-dia. round plate with black letters on a yellow background
stop switch
90-dia. round plate with black letters on a yellow background
A22Z-3453C
A22Z-3476-1
Specifications
LED indicators without voltage reduction unit
Recognized organization
Standards
File number
UL, cUL
UL508
E41515
Rated voltage
Rated current
Operating voltage
EN60947-5-1
6 VDC
60 mA (20 mA)
6 VDC 5%
6 VAC
60 mA (20 mA)
6 VAC/VDC 5%
12 VAC/VDC
30 mA (10 mA)
12 VAC/VDC 5%
24 VAC/VDC
15 mA (10 mA)
24 VAC/VDC 5%
Contact ratings (standard load)

Rated carry
current (A)
10
Rated voltage Rated current (A)
24 VAC
AC15
(inductive
load)
AC12
(resistive
load)
DC13
(inductive
load)
DC12
(resistive
load)
10
10
Rated voltage
Rated current
Operating voltage
15 mA
24 VAC/VDC 5%
Operating voltage
Super-bright LED indicator
110 VAC
10
24 VAC/VDC
220 VAC
Incandescent lamp
380 VAC
440 VAC
24 VDC
1,5
10
110 VDC
0,5
220 VDC
0,2
0,6
380 VDC
0,1
0,2
50 mA at 5 VDC (resistive load) 1 mA at 5 VDC
Item
Rated current
200 mA
5 VAC/VDC
14 VAC/VDC
80 mA
12 VAC/VDC
28 VAC/VDC
40 mA
24 VAC/VDC
130 VAC/VDC
20 mA
100 VAC/VDC
Contacts (microload)
Rated applicable load
Rated voltage
6 VAC/VDC
Rated voltage
Operating voltage
Applicable lamp
(BA8S/13_ gold)
110 VAC
95 to 115 VAC
LED Lamp (A22-24A_)
220 VAC
190 to 230 VAC
Pushbutton switches
Knob-type selector switches
Non-lighted Lighted
Non-lighted Lighted
Non-lighted
Key-type selector switch

Lighted
Non-lighted
Allowable
operating
frequency
Mechanical
Momentary operation:
Electrical
Durability
(number of
operations
min.)
Mechanical
5,000,000
Momentary operation: 300,000
500,000
100,000
500,000
Electrical
500,000
300,000
500,000
100,000
500,000
Ambient
temperature
Operating
20 to 70C
20 to 55C
20 to 70C
20 to 55C
20 to 70C
20 to 55C
20 to 70C
Storage
40 to 70C
40 to 70C
40 to 70C
40 to 70C
40 to 70C
40 to 70C
40 to 70C
IP65 (oil-resistant)
IP65
IP65
IP65
(oil-resistant)
Size in mm (in-panel only)
34H 34W 54.7D, 34H 34W 72.7D for DPST switches
410
Manual release: 30 operations/minute max.,

automatic release: 30 operations/minute max.
IP65
IP65
(oil-resistant)
A22E

The A22E line-up of E-Stop switches offers various head types as well as lighted
models. E-stop shrouds and control boxes as accessories provide flexibility in
application.
Direct opening mechanism with minimum contact separation of 3 mm
Safety lock mechanism prevents misuse
Easy mounting of switch block
Lighted models for easy diagnosis and maintenance
Modular design for flexibility in application
Non-lighted models
Description
Output
Color of cap
Order code
30-dia. head
Push-lock
Turn-reset
SPST-NC
Red
A22E-S-01
SPST-NO/SPST-NC
A22E-S-11
DPST-NC
A22E-S-02
40-dia. head
Push-lock
Turn-reset
SPST-NC
A22E-M-01
SPST-NO/SPST-NC
A22E-M-11
DPST-NC
A22E-M-02
60-dia. head
Push-lock
Turn-reset
SPST-NC
A22E-L-01
SPST-NO/SPST-NC
A22E-L-11
DPST-NC
A22E-L-02
Description
Output
Lighting
Rated voltage
Color of cap
Order code
40-dia. head
Push-lock
Turn-reset
SPST-NC
LED
24 VAC/VDC
Red
A22EL-M-24A-01
40-dia. head
Push-lock
Turn-reset
SPST-NO/SPST-NC
24 VAC/VDC
A22EL-M-24A-11
DPST-NC
24 VAC/VDC
A22EL-M-24A-02
SPST-NC
220 VAC
A22EL-M-T2-01
SPST-NO/SPST-NC
220 VAC
A22EL-M-T2-11
DPST-NC
220 VAC
A22EL-M-T2-02
Lighted models
Accessories (Order separately)

Item
Classification
Remarks
Order code
Control boxes
(enclosures)
One hole
Material: Polycarbonate resin
A22Z-B101
One hole, yellow box (for emergency stop)
A22Z-B101Y
Two holes
A22Z-B102
A22Z-B103
Three holes
Legend plates for
emergency stop
60-dia. black letters on yellow back-ground
EMERGENCY STOP is indicated on the plate.
Lock plate
Locks the mounting latch of the switch assembly
A22Z-3466-1
A22Z-3476-1
90-dia. black letters on yellow back-ground
Specifications
A22Z-3380
Characteristics
Contacts (standard load)
Item

Non-lighted model: A22E
Rated carry
current
Rated voltage
Rated current (A)

AC15
AC12
DC13
DC12
10
24 VAC
10
10
220 VAC
24 VDC
1.5
10
0.2
0.6
220 VDC
Note 1. Rated current values are determined according to the testing conditions. The
above ratings were obtained by conducting tests under the following conditions.
(1) Ambient temperature: 202C
(2) Ambient humidity: 65%5%
(3) Operating frequency: 20 operations/minute
2. Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 VDC
Dielectric strength
Durability
Lighted model: A22EL
2,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of same

polarity
2,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different
polarity and also between each terminal and ground
Mechanical Momentary operation: 300,000 operations min.

Electrical

IP65
(oil-resistant)
IP65
50 mA at 5 VDC (resistive load)
1 mA at 5 VDC
411
ER-series rope pulls

Tension indicator the tension indicator makes the system easy to set up and to
maintain the proper rope tension
Heavy-duty housing the die-cast housing and stainless steel eye nut makes the
ER-series rope pull switches suitable for demanding industrial applications
Vibration tolerant the snap-acting switch contacts protect against nuisance
tripping due to vibration
Integral E-stop the E-stop button provides emergency stopping capability at the
extreme end of the installation and is field serviceable
ER6022 available in stainless steel housing
ER6022, ER1022 and ER1032 available in explosion proof housing
Standard models
Aluminum die-cast housing
E-Stop
Indicator beacon
Contacts
Wiring entry
Order code
Not included
2 N/C + 1 N/O
3 M20
44506-4010 ER5018-021M
Not included
3 N/C
3 M20
44506-4030 ER5018-030M
Included
2 N/C + 1 N/O
3 M20
44506-4110 ER5018-021ME
Included
3 N/C
3 M20
44506-4130 ER5018-030ME
Not included
Not included
2 N/C + 1 N/O
3 M20
44506-5010 ER6022-021M
Not included
Not included
3 N/C + 1 N/O
3 M20
44506-5050 ER6022-031M
Not included
Included (24 VDC)
2 N/C + 1 N/O
3 M20
44506-5110 ER6022-021ML
Not included
Included (24 VDC)
3 N/C + 1 N/O
3 M20
44506-5150 ER6022-031ML
Included
Not included
2 N/C + 1 N/O
3 M20
44506-5210 ER6022-021ME
Included
Not included
3 N/C + 1 N/O
3 M20
44506-5250 ER6022-031ME
Included
Included (24 VDC)
2 N/C + 1 N/O
3 M20
44506-5410 ER6022-021MEL
Included
Included (24 VDC)
3 N/C + 1 N/O
3 M20
44506-5450 ER6022-031MEL
Included
Included (24 VDC)
4 N/C + 2 N/O
4 M20
44506-6410 ER1022-042MELL
Included
Included (24 VDC)
4 N/C + 2 N/O
4 M20
44506-6510 ER1022-042MELR
Included
Included (24 VDC)
4 N/C + 2 N/O
4 M20
44506-7410 ER1032-042MEL

E-Stop
Indicator beacon
Contacts
Wiring entry
Order code
Not included
Not included
2 N/C + 2 N/O
3 M20
44506-5810 ER6022-022MSS
Not included
Not included
3 N/C + 1 N/O
3 M20
44506-5830 ER6022-031MSS
Not included
Included
2 N/C + 2 N/O
3 M20
44506-5910 ER6022-022MLSS
Not included
Included
3 N/C + 1 N/O
3 M20
44506-5930 ER6022-031MLSS
Included
Not included
2 N/C + 2 N/O
3 M20
44506-5850 ER6022-022MESS
Included
Not included
3 N/C + 1 N/O
3 M20
44506-5870 ER6022-031MESS
Included
Included
2 N/C + 2 N/O
3 M20
44506-5950 ER6022-022MELSS
Included
Included
3 N/C + 1 N/O
3 M20
44506-5970 ER6022-031MELSS
Explosion proof models

Aluminum die-cast housing
E-Stop
Indicator beacon
Contacts
Wiring entry
Order code
Not included
Not included
1 N/C + 1 N/O
pre-wired, 3 m
44506-5600 XER6022-011C3
Not included
Not included
1 N/C + 1 N/O
pre-wired, 3 m
44506-6600 XER1022-011C3L
Not included
Not included
1 N/C + 1 N/O
pre-wired, 3 m
44506-6610 XER1022-011C3R
Not included
Not included
1 N/C + 1 N/O
pre-wired, 3 m
44506-7600 XER1032-011C3

E-Stop
Indicator beacon
Contacts
Wiring entry
Order code
Not included
Not included
1 N/C + 1 N/O
pre-wired, 3 m
44506-5610 XER6022-011C3SS
Not included
Not included
2 N/C
pre-wired, 3 m
44506-5620 XER6022-020C3SS
Accessories
Item
Applicable model
Order code
Replacement Lid
ER5018
44506-3700 SM06-SL400
ER6022
44506-5700 SM06-SL500
ER6022-SS stainless steel
44506-5730 SM06-SLXER6022SS
ER1022
44506-6710 SM06-SL710
ER1032
44506-7710 SM06-SL711
ER6022-SS stainless steel
44506-5740 SLER6022LSS
Replacement Lid/LED, 24 VDC
412
Item
Applicable model
Order code
Replacement Lid/LED
ER6022
44506-5710 SM06-SL510
Rope kit, 5 m, stainless steel
ER5018, ER6022, ER1022, ER1032
44506-2705 RK5
ER5018, ER6022, ER1022, ER1032
44506-2710 RK10
ER5018, ER6022, ER1022, ER1032
44506-2720 RK20
ER5018, ER6022, ER1022, ER1032
44506-2750 RK50
ER6022, ER1022, ER1032
44506-2780 RK80
Rope kit 100 m, stainless steel
ER6022, ER1022, ER1032
44506-2711 RK100
Rope kit 126 m, stainless steel
ER1032
44506-2726 RK126
Rope only, 5 m
ER5018, ER6022, ER1022, ER1032
44506-3705 R5M
Rope only, 10 m
ER5018, ER6022, ER1022, ER1032
44506-3710 R10M
Rope only, 20 m
ER5018, ER6022, ER1022, ER1032
44506-3720 R20M
Rope only, 50 m
ER5018, ER6022, ER1022, ER1032
44506-3750 R50M
Rope only, 100 m
ER5018, ER6022, ER1022, ER1032
44506-3711 R100M
Rope only, 126 m
ER5018, ER6022, ER1022, ER1032
44506-3726 R126M
Tensioner gripper, stainless steel
ER5018, ER6022, ER1022, ER1032
44506-4700 SM06-TG00
Eye bolt stainless steel, 8 per pack
ER5018, ER6022, ER1022, ER1032
44506-4710 SM06-EB10
Double loop clip, stainless steel, 4 per pack
ER5018, ER6022, ER1022, ER1032
44506-4720 SM06-DL20
Thimble stainless steel, 4 per pack
ER5018, ER6022, ER1022, ER1032
44506-4770 SM06-THSS
Turnbuckle, stainless steel
ER5018, ER6022, ER1022, ER1032
44506-4730 SM06-TB30
Spring, stainless steel
ER5018, ER6022, ER1022, ER1032
44506-4750 SM06-SP50
Rope pulley, stainless steel
ER5018, ER6022, ER1022, ER1032
44506-4780 SM06-RPSS
E-Stop mechanism
ER5018, ER6022, ER1022, ER1032
44506-4760 SM06-ES60
Yellow E-Stop Background Label
ER5018, ER6022, ER1022, ER1032
44506-4791 SM06-YLES
Specifications
Standard models
Com- Environpliance mental
Applicable model
ER5018
ER6022
Contact configurations
2 N/C + 1 N/O, 3 N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/O, 3N/C + 1N/O 3 N/C+1 N/O, 2 N/C+2 N/O 4 N/C + 2 N/O
ER6022SS
ER1022
ER1032
Safety contacts
2 N/C, 3 N/C
2 N/C, 3 N/C
Switching ability
AC: 120 V6 A, 240 V3 A, inductive

DC: 24 V2.5 A, inductive
Auxiliary contacts
1 N/O
4 N/C + 2 N/O
4 N/C
1 N/O, 2 N/O
Mechanical
Electrical
Item
2 N/O
Max. switching current/Volt/Amp 240 V/720 VA

Electrical life
1,000,000 minimum
24 VDC
Max. rope span
40 m
80 m
Case material
Die-cast aluminum alloy
Eye nut material
Stainless steel
Wiring entry
3 M20
Mechanical life
1,000,000 minimum
Protection
IP67 (NEMA 6)
25 to 80C
Cleaning
Water washdown
Standards
EN60947-5-1:2004, EN60947-5-5:1997+A1:2005; EN60204-1; EN ISO 13850:2006
Approvals/listings
CE marked for all applicable directives, UL and C-UL
100 m
125 m
Die-cast 316 stainless steel

casing
Die-cast aluminum alloy
125 m each side
4 M20
Explosion proof models

Item
Applicable model
Compliance
Electrical
XER6022
1 N/C + 1 N/O, 2 N/C
Safety contact
1 N/C, 2 N/C
Auxiliary contact
1 N/O
XER1022
XER1032
Rated voltage and current (AC15) 400 VAC/2 A AC, 250 VAC/4 A AC
Rated voltage and current (DC)
250 VDC/0,15 A DC
Switching ability
AC ratings
Resistive load
125 VAC/5 A, 250 VAC/5 A
Switching ability
DC ratings
Resistive load
Inductive load 125 VAC/3 A, 250 VAC/3 A

30 VDC/7 A, 250 VDC/0.15 A
Inductive load 30 VDC/5 A, 250 VDC/0.03 A
Ex-classification
II 2 G EEx d II C T6
Certification
PTB00 ATEX 1093X IBExU 01 ATEX 1007X
413
Accessories
RK rope tension kit
Installation Hardware
Tension/Gripper
Spring
Turnbuckle
Double Loop Clip
Eyebolt
Thimble
The RK rope tension kit comes with all of the required hardware for most installations.
A spring is required as shown in the installation example below.
414
Rope Pulley
Individual hardware items may be purchased for specific installation requirements.
LU5
Signalling devices
Versatile modular signal tower featuring easy assembly
and wiring designed for every need.
distributed by Omron
LU5 Series - Medium size modular system provides hybrid prism cut lens for enhanced
visibility from any direction and distance and two selectable sound patterns up to
85 dB. Main features are the interchangeable LED modules and the color coordinated
wiring for easy alignment.
Diameter: 50 mm
Base modules available in ivory white or in silver
Up to 5 LED modules can be used on the light tower
Modules of the same color operate from different terminals
Two, user - selectable, alarms integrated in the base module with adjustable
volume up to 85 dB at 1 m
LED module
Base module
LU5-E-R
LU5-02UFB
1 2 3
1 2
1. E:
LED unit
1. Rated voltage
02:
24 VDC
2. Color of LED
R:
Red
Y:
Yellow
G:
Green
B:
Blue
C:
Clear/White
2. Unit color
Blank: Ivory white
U:
Silver color
3. Type
Blank: Continuous light
FB:
Continuous or ashing light with audible alarm
Module color
Power consumption
Rated voltage
Operation voltage
Operation temperature range
Mass
Order code
Red
52 mA/1.25 W
24 VDC
Rated voltage 10% (21.6~26.4 V)
30C~+60C
44 g 10%
LU5-E-R
LU5-E-Y
Yellow
Green
LED module
LU5-E-G
42 mA/1.0 W
Blue
LU5-E-B
Clear
LU5-E-C
Base module
Typ
Alarm/Flash
Power
consumption
Rated voltage Operation voltage
Standard body
Continuous
1.2 W
24 VDC
2 Sounds/Flashlight
*1
Operation
temperature range
Rated voltage 10% -30C~+60C

(21.6 ~ 26.4 V)
Mass
Open collector Order code
182g 10%
PNP/ NPN
200g 10%
LU5-02*1
LU5-02FB*1
Ivory white: black, silver: add U
Optional parts
Typ
Material
Wall mount bracket Aluminum alloy die-cast

Upper bracket
Order code
Typ
Height
Material
Order code
SZ-017
Pole
100 mm
Aluminum
Pole-100A21
ABS resin
SZ-020
300 mm
Aluminum
Pole-300A21
Metal
SZ-60NPT
800 mm
Aluminum
Pole-800A21
SZ-60U
Mount bracket
Aluminum alloy die-cast
SZ-016A
SZ-70B
Features
LED module is stackable and reconfigurable even after installation

IP 65: Implemented o rings seal out liquids so that the tower can be used in wet conditions.
415
LU5
Signalling devices
Dimensions
LU5-02FB
24 VDC
LU5 type
15
50
Wiring diagram
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
No.6
No.7
No.8
No.9
No.10
41
LED module
Height (mm)
1 Light: 211
2 Lights: 252
3 Lights: 293
4 Lights: 334
5 Lights: 375
113
3-M3
416
Front (Buzzer)
Mounting hole
30
3-4
120
Max. panel thickness 10
Wire entry
13
Name plate
Mounting hole template
LED unit Red

LED unit Yellow
LED unit Green
LED unit Blue
LED unit Clear/White
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
COM
Flashing COM
Power supply for ashing
For continuous
light and buzzer
For ashing
<Recommended electric wire>

Solid wire: 0.8-1.2 mm dia.
Stranded wire : 0.3-1.25 mm2 (AWG 22-18)
12.5
42.6
Terminal blocko
Base module
Height
Mounting dimension
Red
Orange
Green
Blue
White
Gray
Black
Yellow
Gray
Black
(mm)
Fuse 1A
Power
supply
LU5
Signalling devices
How to order
LED units
Model
LU5-E-R
LU5-E-Y
LU5-E-G
LU5-E-B
LU5-E-C
Unit color
Rated voltage
24 VDC
Operating voltage range
Rated voltage10% (21.6~26.4 V)
Current/power consumption
52 mA/1.25 W
42 mA/1.0 W
Operating temperature range
30C~+60C
Mass
44 g10%
YELLOW
GREEN
BLUE
CLEAR/WHITE
RED
BASE units
Model
LU5-02
LU5-02FB
Color
Standard body/short body
Standard
Rated voltage
24 VDC
Rated voltage10%(21.6~26.4 V)
Buzzer
*Buzzer 1
**Buzzer 2
Current consumption
5010 mA
2410 mA
Power consumption
1.20.25 W
0.580.25 W
Sound level
Flashing cycle
Operating temperature Range
Max: 855 dB (at 1 m)

612 flashes per minutes
-30C~+60C
Mounting direction
Upright, indoor only
Protection rating
IP65
Mass
182 g10%
Open collector
200 g10%
PNP/NPN
* Buzzer 1: Continuous sound **Buzzer 2: Intermittent sound
Ivory white
Silver color (U)
Optional parts
417
LU5
Signalling devices
Optional parts
Upper bracket
SZ-60NPT (for 1/2 NPT pole)
Upper bracket
SZ-60-U
Pole
Height
Steel pole
Model
POLE-800S21
POLE-300S21
POLE-100S21
Height
800 mm
300 mm
100 mm
Aluminum pole
Model
POLE-800A21
POLE-300A21
POLE-100A21
Height
800 mm
300 mm
100 mm
21.7 mm
Mount bracket
SZ-016A
(For 21.7 mm pole)
Wall mount bracket
SZ-70-B
(For 21.7 mm aluminum pole
only)
Specifications
Size
50 mm diameter
Input voltage options
24 VDC
Functions available
Continuous only
Continuous, flashing, alarms
Mounting options
Direct mount only, includes 3 mounting nuts
Body styles
Component style, wiring terminals provided

Interchangeable and stackable after purchase
Body colors
Beige
Tiers
1-5 modules can be stacked
Module colors
Red / Yellow / Green / Blue / Clear
Alarms (FB style only)
Alarm 1: selectable, single-tone, continuous alarm, 85 dB (at 1 m)

Alarm 2: selectable, single tone, intermittent (slow beep) alarm, 85 dB (at 1 m)
Ratings
Protection
IP-65
Type 4 / 4X / 13 (indoor only)
Control options
Dry contact closure such as switches or relay contacts

Open-collector transistor (NPN or PNP) for 24 VDC
Direct voltage control for 24 VDC, continuous and alarm functions only
418
CE
UL listed (US)
UL listed (Canada)
RoHS
SZ-020
(For 21.7 mm pole)
SZ-017
(For 21.7 mm pole)
LU7
Signalling devices
Versatile modular signal tower featuring easy assembly
and wiring designed for every need.
LU7 presents ultra bright LEDs combined with an innovative prism lens design. 1 to 5
modules can be arranged in tiers.
Diameter: 70 mm
Base module in 2 sizes and 3 colors
Different modules: standard LED, strobe LED and sound
Two, user - selectable, alarms integrated in the base module with adjustable
volume up to 90 dB at 1 m.
Color-coordinated and spring-loaded terminal block
LED module
Typ
Module color
Power consumption Rated voltage Operation voltage Operation temperature range
Standard
Red
52 mA/1.25 W
24 VDC
Yellow
Green

(21.6~26.4 V)
Mass
Order code
60 g 10%
LU7-E-R
LU7-E-Y
LU7-E-G
42 mA/1.0 W
LU7-E-B
Blue
LU7-E-C
Clear/White
Strobe
Red
290 mA
24 VDC
Yellow

(21.6~26.4 V)
0,07 kg
LU7-XE-R
LU7-XE-Y
Green
140 mA
LU7-XE-G
Blue
270 mA
LU7-XE-B
Clear/White
280 mA
LU7-XE-C
Typ
Alarm/Flash
Power consumption Rated voltage Operation voltage Operation temperature Mass

range
Open collector Order code
Short body
Continuous
1.2 W
PNP/ NPN
Standard body
Continuous
24 VDC
Rated voltage
10% (21.6~26.4 V)
-30C~+60C
150 g 10%
2 Sounds/Flashlight
*1
Base module
LU7-02S*1
250 g 10%
LU7 - 02*1
280 g 10%
LU7 -02FB*1
Ivory white: blank, black: add K, silver: add U
Optional parts
Typ
Material

PBT/ ABS resin
Order code
Typ
Height
Material
Order code
SZ-017
Pole
100 mm
Aluminum
Pole-100A21
Steel
Pole-100S21
Aluminum
Pole-300A21
Steel
Pole-300S21
Aluminum
Pole-800A21
Steel
Pole-800S21
SZ-018
SZ-018U
300 mm
SZ-018K
Upper bracket
ABS resin
SZ-020
Metal
SZ - 50U
SZ - 50UU
SZ - 50KU
Mount bracket
800 mm
Voice and sound module (unique sound module in all directions)
SZ - 50NPT
Rated voltage
Power consumption
Mass
Order code
SZ-016A
24 VDC
3.5 W
0.17 kg
LU7-V1
SZ-70B
Features
LU7
Standard body
Easy alignment:
Color-coordinated terminal block:
Corresponds to the lens colors for quick
wiring verication in the base unit.
LU7-02S
Short body
70
70
Mounting dimensions
Name plate
Height (mm)
1Light : 211
2Lights : 252
3Lights : 293
4Lights : 334
5Lights : 375
LU7-02FB
Height
Height
Wire entry
hole
Mounting
hole
Height (mm)
1 Light : 118
2 Lights : 159
3 Lights : 200
4 Lights : 241
5 Lights : 282
Audible alarm
419
LU7
Signalling devices
How to order
Voice and sound module

Model
LU7-V1
Type
Voice synthesizer
Rated voltage
24 VDC
Power consumption
3.5 W
Weight
0.17 kg
LED units
Model
LU7-E-R
LU7-E-Y
LU7-E-G
LU7-E-B
LU7-E-C
Unit color
Rated voltage
24 VDC
Current/power consumption
52 mA/1.25 W
42 mA/1.0 W
Operating temperature range
30C~+60C
Mass
60 g10%
LED strobe module

Model
LU7-XE-R
LU7-XE-Y
LU7-XE-G
290 mA
290 mA
140 mA
LU7-XE-B
LU7-XE-C
270 mA
280 mA
Unit color
Rated voltage
24 VDC
Power consumption
0.07 kg
Mass
RED
YELLOW
GREEN
BLUE
CLEAR/WHITE
LU7-02
LU7-02FB
BASE units
Model
LU7-02S
Color
Standard body/short body
Short
Standard
Rated voltage
24 VDC
Standard body
Buzzer
*Buzzer 1
**Buzzer 2
Current consumption
5010 mA
2410 mA
Power Ccnsumption
1.20.25 W 0.580.25 W
Sound level
Flashing cycle
30C~+60C
Mounting direction
Upright, indoor only
Protection rating
IP65
150 g10%
Open collector
Short body
420
250 g10%
PNP/NPN
* Buzzer 1: Continuous sound **Buzzer 2: Intermittent sound

Ivory white
Optional parts
6012 flashes per minute
Operating temperature Range
Mass
Max: 905d B (at 1 m)

Min: 70 dB or Less ( at 1 m)
Silver color (U)
Black (K)
280 g10%
LU7
Signalling devices
Optional parts
Wall mount bracket

Model
SZ-18
SZ-18U
SZ-18K
Color
Ivory white
Silver color (U)
Black (K)
Upper bracket
SZ-50NPT(For 1/2 NPT pole)
Upper bracket
Pole
Model
SZ-50-U
SZ-50U-U
SZ-50K-U
Color
Ivory white
Silver color (U)
Black (K)
Model
POLE-800S21
POLE-300S21
POLE-100S21
Height
800 mm
300 mm
100 mm
Height
Steel pole
Aluminum pole
POLE-800A21
POLE-300A21
POLE-100A21
Height
800 mm
300 mm
100 mm
Model
21 mm
Mount bracket
SZ-016A
(For 21.7 mm pole)
Wall mount bracket
SZ-70-B
(For 21.7 mm Aluminum pole
only)
SZ-020
(For 21.7 mm pole)
SZ-017
(For 21.7 mm pole)
Specifications
Size
70 mm diameter
24 VDC
Functions available
Continuous only
Mounting options
Direct mount only: includes three mounting nuts
Body style
Component style, wiring terminals provided

Body color
Beige
Black
Silver
Tiers
Module colors
Red / Yellow / Green / Blue / Clear

Standard LED modules
Strobe-flash LED modules (24 V bases only)
Alarm 1: selectable, single-tone, continuous alarm, 90 dB (at 1 m)

Ratings
Protections
IP-65
Type 4/4X/13 (indoor only)
Control options

Open-collector transistor (NPN or PNP for 24 VDC)
CE
UL listed (US)
UL listed (Canada)
RoHS
421
MP/MPS
Signalling devices
Super slim 30 mm silver body signal tower ideal for small
devices
MP/MPS signal towers provide double insulation and superior UV and light translucent AS
resin lenses for enhanced durability and reliability in the application environment.
The 30mm diameter is ideal for small and mid-sized machines.
Up to 5 colored modules can be combined using a single mounting hole. Modules
can be easily added without dismounting the whole signal tower to reduce installation effort.
Special pre-wired versatile with 1 connection cable
NPN/ PNP compactible
IP65
Each color of LED module corresponds to the lead wire color.
Available colors are Red, Yellow, Green, Blue and Clear/White.
All colors as clear-lens modules available
MP-502-RYGBC-B0738
1
2 3
1. MP: Standard body

MPS: Short body
2. Stack
1~5
3. Rated voltage
02:
24 V AC/DC
4. Color of LED
R:
Red
Y:
Yellow
G:
Green
B:
Blue
C:
Clear/White
Top to bottom
5. Color of lense
Blank: Colored lens
B0738: Clear lens
Number of
stacks
Rated voltage
Power
consumption
Open collector
Order code
24 VAC/VDC
0.7 W
NPN/PNP
MP/MPS-102
1.4 W
MP/MPS-202
2.0 W
MP/MPS-302
2.6 W
MP/MPS-402
3.2 W
MP/MPS-502
Features
Patented reection system increases visibility.
Interchangeable LED modules

Changeable color sequence: Easy to add/remove up to
5 colored modules even after installation.
Note: LED modules of the same color will light
up simultaneously.
The wiring remains the same.
High intensity LED
Good visibility from

any direction
Each color of LED module corresponds to the lead

wire color.
30
Wiring diagram
Washer
MP type
Height (mm)
1 Light: 265
2 Lights: 300
3 Lights: 335
4 Lights: 370
5 Lights: 405
30
Max. panel
thickness 5
22.5
Nut (M22 x P1.5mm)

Mounting
hole
Height (mm)
1 Light: 90
2 Lights: 125
3 Lights: 160
4 Lights: 195
5 Lights: 230
2
27
10
Height
MPS type
22
MP:220
(MPS:45)
LED C White
Fuse 1A
Yellow
Nut (M8)
Lead wire length (from wire exit)

MP: 1,000mm
MPS: 1,180mm
For continuous light
LED G Green
LED B Blue
Bolt (M8)
17
LED R Red
LED Y Orange
31
Optional mounting bracket

(SZ-013)
422
4
3
35
10
Dimensions
(mm)
Power
supply
MP/MPS has no polarity.
MP/MPS
Signalling devices
Specifications
Size
30 mm diameter
24 VAC/VDC
Functions available
Continuous only
Mounting options
Direct mount only: includes M22 mounting nut and sealing gasket
Body style
pre-assembled, pre-wired
Body color
Silver
Tiers
Module colors
Red / Yellow / Green / Blue / Clear-White (for sunlight applications: clear-lense modules in all colors available)
Protection
IP-65
Control options

Open-collector transistor (NPN or PNP) for 24 VDC
Direct voltage control
CE
UL component recognition (US)
UL component recognition (Canada)
RoHS
423
LME
Signalling devices
Versatile, cost and energy efficient LED signal tower for
every need
The LME series indicating light provides the latest in LED technology. 1 to 5 modules
can be arranged in tiers. The original dual reflection system for enhanced light diffusion, creates bright distinctive illumination while saving energy (patent pending).
LME signal towers provide double insulation and superior UV resistant and light translucent AS resin lenses for enhanced durability and reliability in application environment.
Available Colors are Red, Yellow, Green, Blue and Clear/White.
All colors as clear-lense modules are available
Diameter: 60 mm
2 selectable built- in alarms with adjustable volume up to 90 dB at 1 m for FB type
Special pre-wired versatile and flexible cable connection of 3 m
NPN/ PNP compatible
IP 65
LME-502UFBW-C-RYGBC-Z
1 2 3 4 5
1. Stack
1~5
2. Rated voltage
02:
24V AC/DC
5. Mount
Blank: Pole mount
3. Body color
Blank:
N:
U:
7. Color of LED
R:
Red
Y:
Yellow
G:
Green
B:
Blue
C:
Clear/White
4. Type
Blank: Continuous light
FB:
Continuous light or ashing light with
audible alarm
lvory white
Black color
Silver color
K:
Pole mount (with SZ-020)
W:
Direct mount
8. Color of Lens
Blank:
Z:
6. Connection
C:
pre-wired cable 3 m
Colored lens
Clear lens
Number of stacks
Mount
Model
Rated voltage
Power
consumption
Open collector
Pole mount
LME-102
24 VAC/DC
2.2 W
NPN/PNP
Direct mount
2
Pole mount
24 VAC/DC
LME-202
Direct mount
3
Pole mount
Pole mount
LME-302
Pole mount
24 VAC/DC
3.8 W
24 VAC/DC
LME-402
Direct mount
5
3.4 W
24 VAC/DC
Direct mount
4
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
4.2 W
24 VAC/DC
LME-502
24 VAC/DC
4.6 W
Order code
Continuos light
Continuous light with audible alarm
LME-102-C
LME-102-FB-C
LME-102W-C
LME-102-FBW-C
LME-202-C
LME-202-FB-C
LME-202W-C
LME-202-FBW-C
LME-302-C
LME-302-FB-C
LME-302W-C
LME-302-FBW-C
LME-402-C
LME-402-FB-C
LME-402W-C
LME-402-FBW-C
LME-502-C
LME-502-FB-C
LME-502W-C
LME-502-FBW-C
Direct mount
24 VAC/DC
Material
Order code
Typ
Height
Material
Order code
SZ-017
Pole
100 mm
Aluminum
Pole-100A21
Steel
Pole-100S21
Aluminum
Pole-300A21
Steel
Pole-300S21
Aluminum
Pole-800A21
Steel
Pole-800S21
Optional parts
Typ
Mount bracket
424
ABS resin
SZ-020
PBT/ ABS resin
SZ-028
SZ-016A
SZ-010
300 mm
800 mm
LME
Signalling devices
Dimensions
Wiring diagram
LME type
LME-W type
LME(W)/LME(W)-SQ/LMS [Continuous type]
24V AC/DC type
60
12
60
24V AC/DC
For continuous light
LED, R Red
LED, Y Orange
LED, G Green
LED, B Blue
LED, C White
Height
Height
41.2
Height (mm)
1 Light: 150.0
2 Lights: 191.2
3 Lights: 232.4
4 Lights: 273.6
5 Lights: 314.8
Yellow
Fuse
Power
supply
1A
12
Bae
27
Max. thickness 5
24V AC/DC: 1400*
3-M4
*LME-U: 3000
M4 12
81
22
12
1100*
4.5
2- 11
81
66
32
31
60
35
300
21.7
20
Features
Easy to add and remove
Interchangeable LED modules
If the number of LED module is changed,

center shaft must be purchased.
The wiring remains the same

Each color of LED module corresponds to the
lead wire color.
PATLITEs original dual reection system with its exclusive

hybrid prism-cut lens and 5 color LED modules create
bright, distinctive, even illumination.
To bring more attention to
certain conditions, two,
User-selectable, Alarms
integrated in the Base
module with adjustable
volume up to 85 dB at 1m
are available.
Specifications
Size
60 mm diameter
24 VAC/VDC
Functions available
Continuous only
Mounting options
Pole mount: with 300 mm aluminum pole, plastic circular bracket

Direct mount: includes 3 mounting nuts
Body style
Pre-assembled, pre-wired
Body color
Beige (optional: Black or silver)
Tiers
Module colors
Red / Yellow / Green / Blue / Clear/White (for sunlight applications: clear-lense modules in all colors available)
Alarm 1: selectable, single-tone, intermittent (fast beep) alarm, 85 dB (at 1 m)

Ratings
Protection
IP-65 (LME, LME-W)

IP-54 (LME-FB, LME-FBW)
Type 4/4X/13 (indoor, direct-mount only)
Control options

Open-collector transistor (NPN or PNP for 24 VDC)
CE
UL component recognition (US)
UL component recognition (Canada)
RoHS
425
Changeable color sequence: Easy to add /

remove up to 5 colored modules even after
installation.
Note: LED modules of the same color within a
signal tower will light up simultaneously.
Dual reection system

PRECISE MONITORING OF GUARD POSITION
Detect linear or rotational movement of guards: D4N
Guards and covers on machines protect workers. They limit access to the dangerous parts of the machine.
Our safety limit switches guarantee that the guards and covers are in place before the machine is started.
426
Wide variety of actuators to fit wide range of applications
Gold-plated contacts for reliable operation with micro loads
General purpose
limit switches
Hinge
operation
Metal housing
heavy duty
EN 50041
Plastic housing
EN50047
Plastic housing
Manual reset
Plastic housing
D4B
D4N
D4N-_R
D4NH
S232
Page 429
S238
Page 431
S239
S242
Page 433
427
Selection table

Selection criteria
Model
D4B
D4N
D4NH
Housing
Metal
Plastic
Plastic
D4N-_R
Plastic
M12 Plug connector
Protection class
IP67
Operating Temperature
Range
40 to 80C
30 to 70C
30 to 70C
30 to 70C
Conformity
EN50047, EN1088
Conduit size M20
Gold clad contacts
Application
Features
Actuators
Resin roller, resin lever
Resin roller, metal lever
Metal roller, metal lever
Bearing lever, metal lever
Adj. resin roller, metal lever
Adj. Rubber roller,

metal lever
Adj. Rod lever
Top plunger
Top roller plunger
Horizontal roller arm lever
Vertical roller arm lever
Cat whisker
Plastic Rod
Fork lever lock

(right operation)
Fork lever lock

(left operation)
Hinge operation
Position monitoring
1NC/1NO snap action
2NC snap action
1NC/1NO slow action
2NC slow action
2NC/1NO slow action
3NC slow action
1NC/1NO (MBB slow action)
2NC/1NO (MBB slow action)
Page/Quick Link
431
433
S239
429
428
Standard
No/not available
D4B

Limit switch with metal housing
The D4B series of limit switches in a rugged metal housing is suitable for both safety
and non-safety applications due to its direct opening mechanism and TV approval.
Furthermore with the increased temperature range and enhanced mechanical switching lifetime, the D4B is first choice for all applications from standard to demanding environments and for highest flexibility in mounting and connectivity preferences.
Rugged metal housing and extended mechanical switching lifetime
(snap action models)
Terminal block for direct wiring
Connection method
Order code*1
1NC/1NO (snap-action)
2NC (slow-action)
Terminal block with

M20 conduit
D4B-4111N
D4B-4511N
D4B-4A11N
Adjustable roller lever
D4B-4116N
D4B-4516N
D4B-4A16N
Adjustable rod lever
D4B-4117N
D4B-4517N
D4B-4A17N
Actuator type
Roller lever*2
D4B-4170N
D4B-4570N
D4B-4A70N
D4B-4171N
D4B-4571N
D4B-4A71N
Coil spring
D4B-4181N*3
Plastic rod
D4B-4187N*3
*1
*2
*3
For models with stainless steel rollers and temperature resistance of 40C refer to WL-_-TC.
No direct opening mechanism
Plain
Roller
Specifications
Item
Durability*1
Snap-action
Slow-action
Mechanical
Electrical
500,000 operations min. (at a 250 VAC, 10 A resistive load)
Operating speed
Operating frequency
1 mm/s to 0.5 m/s

Mechanical
120 operations/min
Electrical
30 operations/min
Rated frequency
50/60 Hz
Contact resistance
25 m max. (initial value)
3 (EN60947-5-1)
100 A (EN60947-5-1)
Conventional enclosed thermal current (Ith)
20 A (EN60947-5-1)
Ambient temperature
*1
*2
Operating
IP67 (EN60947-5-1)
The values are acquired for an ambient temperature of 5 to 35C and an ambient humidity of 40 to 70%.
25 to 80C for the flexible-rod actuator.
429
D4B
Movable contact
Safety cam directly
pushes up the
movable contact
blade.
Movable contact
blade
Plunger
Safety cam
Fixed contact (NC)
Fixed contact (NC)
Fixed contact (NC)
Contact spring
Contact spring
Movable contact
Return spring
Plunger
Fixed contact (NO)

being pushed in.
430
Return spring
Movable contact
Plunger
D4N

Limit switch with plastic housing
The D4N series of limit switches in plastic housing is the ideal switch for all standard
mechanical position detection applications both for safety and non-safety applications.
Rugged plastic housing with double insulation
Wide range of actuators
M12 connectors or terminal block with M20 conduit
Actuator type
Connection method
Order code*1
2NC (slow-action)
M20
D4N-4120
D4N-4A20
D4N-4B20
D4N-4C20
M12 connector
D4N-9120
D4N-9A20
D4N-9B20
Plunger
M20
D4N-4131
D4N-4A31
D4N-4B31
M12 connector
D4N-9131
D4N-9A31
D4N-9B31
M20
D4N-4132
D4N-4A32
D4N-4B32
D4N-4C32
M12 connector
D4N-9132
D4N-9A32
D4N-9B32
M20
D4N-4162
D4N-4A62
D4N-4B62
D4N-4C62
M12 connector
D4N-9162
D4N-9A62
D4N-9B62
One-way roller arm lever (vertical)
M20
D4N-4172
D4N-4A72
D4N-4B72

(metal lever, resin roller)
M20
D4N-412G
D4N-4A2G
D4N-4B2G
M12 connector
D4N-912G
D4N-9A2G
D4N-9B2G

(metal lever, rubber roller)
M20
D4N-412H
D4N-4A2H
D4N-4B2H
M12 connector
D4N-912H
D4N-9A2H
D4N-9B2H
Roller plunger
1NC/1NO (snap-action) 1NC/1NO (slow-action)

Roller lever
Switches with MBB contacts

MBB (Make Before Break) contacts have an overlapping structure, so that before the normally closed (NC) contact opens the normally open (NO) contact closes.
Actuator type
Order code*1
Roller lever
M20
D4N-4E20
D4N-4F20
M12 connector
D4N-9E20
Roller plunger
M20
D4N-4E32
D4N-4F32
M12 connector
D4N-9E32
M20
D4N-4E62
D4N-4F62
M12 connector
D4N-9E62

*1
Connection method
431
D4N
Specifications
Durability*1
Operating speed
Mechanical
Electrical

Roller lever
1 mm/s to 0.5 m/s
Operating frequency
3 (EN60947-5-1)
Contact gap
Snap-action: 2x0.5 mm min

Slow-action: 2x2 mm min
100 A (EN60947-5-1)
10 A (EN60947-5-1)
Ambient temperature
30C to 70C with no icing
Operating
*1
*2
IP67 (EN60947-5-1)
The durability is acquired for an ambient temperature of 5C to 35C and an ambient humidity of 40 to 70%.
10,000,000 operations min. for fork lever actuator.
Movable contact
Safety cam directly
pushes up the
movable contact
blade.
Movable contact
blade
Plunger
Safety cam
Fixed contact (NC)
Fixed contact (NC)
Fixed contact (NC)
Contact spring
Contact spring
Movable contact
Return spring
Plunger
Fixed contact (NO)

being pushed in.
432
Return spring
Movable contact
Plunger
D4NH

Safety door hinge switch
D4NH safety-door hinge switches are available with one or two built-in contacts, shaft
or arm lever actuator and various conduit types, e.g. M20.
Direct opening mechanism
Shaft or arm lever actuator
Wide temperature range
Metric conduit and M12 connector types are available
Switches
Actuator
Conduit size
Shaft
1-conduit
Arm lever
1-conduit
Actuator
Conduit size
Shaft
1-conduit
Arm lever
1-conduit
Built-in switch mechanism

2NC (slow-action)
M20
D4NH-4AAS
D4NH-4BAS
D4NH-4CAS
M12 connector
D4NH-9AAS
D4NH-9BAS
M20
D4NH-4ABC
D4NH-4BBC
D4NH-4CBC
M12 connector
D4NH-9ABC
D4NH-9BBC
Built-in switch mechanism

3NC (slow-action)
1NC/1NO MBB (slow-action)
2NC/1NO MBB (slow-action)
M20
D4NH-4DAS
D4NH-4EAS
D4NH-4FAS
M12 connector
D4NH-9EAS
M20
D4NH-4DBC
D4NH-4EBC
D4NH-4FBC
M12 connector
D4NH-9EBC
Mechanical
Electrical

Specifications
Durability
IP67 (EN60947-5-1)
Operating speed
2 to 360/s
Operating frequency
3 (EN60947-5-1)
Contact gap
Snap-action:
Slow-action:
100 A (EN60947-5-1)
10 A (EN60947-5-1)
Ambient temperature
Operating: 30C to 70C with no icing
2 9.5 mm min
2 2 mm min
433

BREAK CONVENTIONAL BARRIERS IN SAFETY DESIGN
Flexibility selecting best fit control device for non-contact switch application: F3S-TGR-N
Omron has introduced a series of magnetic coded contactless switches for interlocking machine guard doors.
The switches feature a built-in control function, thus saving the cost and space required for an external controller.
The non-contact switches offer advantages in applications where a precise approach of the guard and lock is not
possible. Applications with a large amount of dirt or high hygienic standards can also be addressed.
Operates with all Omron safety relay units and safety bus interfaces
Operates behind stainless steel fittings
Non-contact no abrasion no particles
Conforms to safety categories up to 4 acc. EN 954-1 and PLe acc. EN ISO 13849-1
Plastic and metal housing
Metal housing
Standalone sensors
RFID sensors
Highest vibration
tolerance
Explosion proof
sensors
F3S-TGR-N_R
F3S-TGRS_A/-S_D
F3S-TGRN_M/-N_U
D40A/
G9SX-NS
F3S-TGR-N_X
S629
Page 442
S637
Page 447
S635
Page 445
S222, S362
Electronic
outputs
Reed
contacts
F3S-TGR-N_C
S628
Page 439
434
Plastic housing
S636
Page 450
Key operated switches
Safety switch
Plastic housing
Stainless steel
head
Safety guard lock switch
Metal housing
Plastic housing
Plastic or metal
head
Plastic housing
Stainless steel
housing
Square size
1300 N
Slim size
1000 N
Slim size
1300 N
Standard size
1600 N
Slim size
2000 N
D4NS
F3S-TGR-KM15
F3S-TGR-KM16
D4BS
F3S-TGR-KH16
D4NL
D4GL
D4SL-N
F3S-TGR-KHL1
F3S-TGR-KHL3
S244
Page 452
S638, S639
Page 454
S234
Page 453
S639
Page 454
S243
Page 456
S236
Page 457
S245
Page 458
S649
Page 460
S652
Page 461
435
Selection table
F3S-TGR-N_C
F3S-TGR-N_R
F3S-TGR-N_M/-N_U
F3S-TGR-S_A/-S_D
F3S-TGR-N_X
D40A/G9SX-NS
Plastic/Metal
Plastic/Metal
Plastic
Plastic/Metal
Metal
Plastic
Protection class
IP67/IP69K
IP67/IP69K
IP67/IP69K
IP67/IP69K
IP67
IP67
Conformity
EN ISO 13849-1,
EN60947-5-3
EN ISO 13849-1,
EN60947-5-3
EN ISO 13849-1,
EN60947-5-3
EN ISO 13849-1,
EN60947-5-3
EN ISO 13849-1,
EN60947-5-3
EN ISO 13849-1
Contact configuration Application
Features
Model
Selection criteria
Non-contact safety door switches
436
Housing
Cable length 2 m
Cable length 5 m
Cable length 10 m
Connector type M12
High temperature sensor
Operates with G9SA, G9SB
Operates with G9SX
Operates with programmable

safety units G9SP and NE1A
Door monitoring
1NC/1NO
2NC
2NC/1NO
Force guided relays
Page/Quick Link
439
442
445
447
450
S222, S362

D4NS
F3S-TGRKM15
F3S-TGRKM16
D4BS
F3S-TGRKH16
D4NL
D4GL
D4SL-N
Housing
Plastic
Plastic body
Metal head
Plastic body
Metal head
Metal
Stainless steel Plastic
Plastic
Plastic/metal Stainless steel Stainless steel

head available
Head mounting
4 directions
2 directions
2 directions
4 directions
2 directions
4 directions
4 directions
4 directions
2 directions
Actuation
Straight
Straight
Straight
Straight
Straight
Straight
Straight
Straight
Straight
Straight
Key holding force
1,300 N
1,000 N
1,300 N
1,600 N
2,000 N
Features
Application
F3S-TGRKHL3
4 directions
Protection class
IP67
IP67
IP67
IP67
IP69k
IP67
IP67
IP67
IP69k
IP69k
Conformity
EN50047,
EN1088
EN1088
EN1088
EN50047,
EN1088
EN1088
EN1088
EN1088
EN1088
EN1088
EN1088
Conduit size M20
PG 13.5
Screw terminal
Connector terminal
Operation key horizontal
F3S-TGRKHL1
Operation key vertical
Operation key
adjustable horizontal
Operation key
adjustable horizontal
and vertical
Mechanical lock/
24 VDC solenoid release
Mechanical lock/
110 VAC solenoid release
Mechanical lock/
230 VAC solenoid release
24 VDC solenoid lock/

mechanical release
110 VAC solenoid lock

mechanical release
240 VAC solenoid lock

mechanical release
High temperature
sensor
Operates with G9SR
Operates with G9SA,

G9SB
Operates with G9SX
Operates with
programmable safety
units G9SP and NE1A
Door monitoring
Door locking
2 contact models
3 contact models
4 contact models
5 contact models
6 contact models
Slow action contacts
Page/Quick Link
452
454
454
453
454
456
457
458
460
461
Standard
Selection criteria
Model
Safety door lock switches
No/not available
437
438
F3S-TGR-N_C

Hall coded non-contact for monitoring the status of
guarding doors
Hall coded non-contact switches monitor the status of guarding doors. Stainless steel
housing for high hygiene demands in the food industry are available.
Based on hall technology
Connect up to 3 switches in series
LED supports easy diagnosis
Operates with all OMRON safety controllers
Compensation of mechanical tolerances
Suitable for high pressure cleaning, CIP/SIP processes due IP69K (pre-wired types)
Conforms to safety categories up PLe acc. EN ISO13849-1
Polyester housing
Type
Cable connection
Order code
Elongated sensors
5 m pre-wired
2NC/1NO
F3S-TGR-NLPC-21-05
Miniature sensors
F3S-TGR-NLPC-21-10
M12, 8-pin
F3S-TGR-NLPC-21-M1J8
5 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-NSPC-21-05
10 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-NSPC-21-10
M12, 8-pin
F3S-TGR-NSPC-21-M1J8
5 m pre-wired*1
F3S-TGR-NMPC-21-05
10 m pre-wired*1
F3S-TGR-NMPC-21-10
M12, 8-pin
Barrel sensors
*1
*1
F3S-TGR-NMPC-21-M1J8
5 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-NBPC-21-05
10 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-NBPC-21-10
M12, 8-pin
F3S-TGR-NBPC-21-M1J8
Small sensors
10 m pre-wired
Optional cable exit to the right side is available for F3S-TGR-NMPC-types. Please add -R to the order code (i.e. F3S-TGR-NMPC-21-05-R)

Type
Cable connection
Order code
Elongated sensors
5 m pre-wired
2NC/1NO
F3S-TGR-NLMC-21-05
Small sensors
Barrel sensors
10 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-NLMC-21-10
M12, 8-pin
F3S-TGR-NLMC-21-M1J8
5 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-NSMC-21-05
10 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-NSMC-21-10
M12, 8-pin
F3S-TGR-NSMC-21-M1J8
5 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-NBMC-21-05
10 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-NBMC-21-10
M12, 8-pin
F3S-TGR-NBMC-21-M1J8
439
F3S-TGR-N_C
Hygienic and food types

Type
Cable connection
Order code
Small sensors
5 m pre-wired
2NC/1NO
F3S-TGR-NSHC-21-05
Small sensors (Special food type)
Miniature sensors
*1
10 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-NSHC-21-10
M12, 8-pin
F3S-TGR-NSHC-21-M1J8
5 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-NSFC-21-05
10 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-NSFC-21-10
M12, 8-pin
F3S-TGR-NSFC-21-M1J8
5 m pre-wired*1
F3S-TGR-NMHC-21-05
10 m pre-wired*1
F3S-TGR-NMHC-21-10
M12, 8-pin*1
F3S-TGR-NMHC-21-M1J8
Optional cable exit to the right side is available forF3S-TGR-NMHC-types. Please add -R to the order code (i.e. F3S-TGR-NMHC-21-05-R)
Specifications
Mechanical data
Item
Model
Serial switching
Polyester types
Indicator LED
LED green - Indication of safety circuit closed
Operating distance*1
OFF ON (Sao)
Min. 8 mm/max. 10 mm
ON OFF (Sar)
Min. 12 mm/max. 22 mm
Actuator approach speed
Min.
Max.
4 mm/s
1,000 mm/s
25 to 80C
Enclosure protection
Flying lead
M12 connector
IP69K
IP67
Material cable
Material housing
*1
Stainless steel types
up to 3 pcs.
25 to 105C
Flying lead
PVC, 6 mm o.d.
M12 connector
250 mm, PVC, 6 mm o.d.
Black polyester
Stainless steel 316
Stainless steel types
Depends on type. Please see online data sheet.
Electrical data
Item
Model
Polyester types
Sensor technology
Hall
Power supply
24 VDC15%
Power consumption
Max.
50 mA
Switching current
Min.
10 mA, 10 VDC
Rated loads
Max.
200 mA, 24 VDC

200 mA, 24 VDC
Electronic output (potential-free optocoupler output)
NC contacts
NO contact
Output type
Approved standards
EN standards certified by TV Rheinland
EN ISO13849-1
EN 62061
EN ISO 14119
EN 60204-1
EN/IEC 60947-5-3
UL 508, CSA C22.2
BS 5304
EN 1088-1 conformance
440
F3S-TGR-N_C
Accessories
Order code
Cables 8-pin
T-connector connection cable
Actuators
Mounting screws
2m
Y92E-M12PURSH8S2M-L
5m
Y92E-M12PURSH8S5M-L
10 m
Y92E-M12PURSH8S10M-L
25 m
M12 T-connector for M12 connector-types
F39-TGR-NT
0.6 m, M12-8pin
Y92E-M12FSM12MSPURSH806M-L
2 m, M12-8pin
5 m, M12-8pin
10 m, M12-8pin
for F3S-TGR-NLPC
F39-TGR-NLPC-A
for F3S-TGR-NSPC
F39-TGR-NSPC-A
for F3S-TGR-NMPC
F39-TGR-NMPC-A
for F3S-TGR-NCPC
F39-TGR-NCPC-A
for F3S-TGR-NWPC
F39-TGR-NWPC-A
for F3S-TGR-NBPC
F39-TGR-NBPC-A
for F3S-TGR-NLMC
F39-TGR-NLMC-A
for F3S-TGR-NSMC
F39-TGR-NSMC-A
for F3S-TGR-NBMC
F39-TGR-NBMC-A
for F3S-TGR-NSHC
F39-TGR-NSHC-A
for F3S-TGR-NSFC
F39-TGR-NSFC-A
for F3S-TGR-NMHC
F39-TGR-NMHC-A
Set of Torx safety screws

(M4, 4 30 mm, 4 20 mm, 4 10 mm; incl. washers and Torx bit)
F39-TGR-N-SCREWS
Wiring examples (Single head connection)

G9SA
Single sensor application with G9SA-301
(up to PLe acc. EN ISO 13849-1)
+24 V
GND
Start
A2
A1
T31
Magnetic
actuator
F3S-TGR-NxxC
Sensor
red
blue
black
white
yellow
green
brown
orange
KM1
Feedbackloop
G9SA-301
KM2
T32
T11
T12
T22
T21
NO
contact
KM1
13
14
33
34
KM2
KM1
+Us
KM2
GND
441
F3S-TGR-N_R

Reed non-contact switches for monitoring the status of
guarding doors
Reed non-contact switches monitor the status of guarding doors. Stainless steel
housing for high hygiene demands in the food industry are available.
Based on reed technology
Operates with all Omron safety controllers
Suitable for high pressure cleaning, CIP/SIP processes due IP69K (pre-wired types)
Polyester housing
Type
Cable connection
Order code
Elongated sensors
5 m pre-wired
2NC/1NO*1
F3S-TGR-NLPR-21-05
Small sensors
Miniature sensors
10 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-NLPR-21-10
M12, 8-pin
F3S-TGR-NLPR-21-M1J8
5 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-NSPR-21-05
10 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-NSPR-21-10
M12, 8-pin
F3S-TGR-NSPR-21-M1J8
5 m pre-wired*2
2NC/1NO*3
10 m pre-wired*2
M12, 8-pin
Barrel sensors
*1
*2
*3
F3S-TGR-NMPR-21-05
F3S-TGR-NMPR-21-10
*2
F3S-TGR-NMPR-21-M1J8
5 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-NBPR-21-05
10 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-NBPR-21-10
M12, 8-pin
F3S-TGR-NBPR-21-M1J8
2NC: 1 A, 250 VAC/1NC: 0.2 A, 24 VDC

Optional cable exit to the right side is available for F3S-TGR-NMPR-types. Please add -R to the order code (i.e. F3S-TGR-NMPR-21-05-R)
2NC: 0.5 A, 24 VDC/1NC: 0.2 A, 24 VDC

Type
Cable connection
Order code
Elongated sensors
5 m pre-wired
2NC/1NO*1
F3S-TGR-NLMR-21-05
Small sensors
Barrel sensors
*1
*2
2NC: 1 A, 250 VAC/1NC: 0.2 A, 24 VDC

2NC: 0.5 A, 24 VDC/1NC: 0.2 A, 24 VDC
442
10 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-NLMR-21-10
M12, 8-pin
F3S-TGR-NLMR-21-M1J8
5 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-NSMR-21-05
10 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-NSMR-21-10
M12, 8-pin
F3S-TGR-NSMR-21-M1J8
5 m pre-wired
2NC/1NO*2
F3S-TGR-NBMR-21-05
10 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-NBMR-21-10
M12, 8-pin
F3S-TGR-NBMR-21-M1J8
F3S-TGR-N_R
Hygienic and food types

Type
Cable connection
Order code
Small sensors
5 m pre-wired
2NC/1NO*1
F3S-TGR-NSHR-21-05
Small sensors (Special food type)
F3S-TGR-NSHR-21-10
M12, 8-pin
F3S-TGR-NSHR-21-M1J8
5 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-NSFR-21-05
10 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-NSFR-21-10
M12, 8-pin
F3S-TGR-NSFR-21-M1J8
5 m pre-wired*2
Miniature sensors
*1
*2
*3
10 m pre-wired
2NC/1NO*3
F3S-TGR-NMHR-21-05
10 m pre-wired*2
F3S-TGR-NMHR-21-10
M12, 8-pin*2
F3S-TGR-NMHR-21-M1J8
2NC: 1 A, 250 VAC/1NC: 0.2 A, 24 VDC

Optional cable exit to the right side is available for F3S-TGR-NMHR-types. Please add -R to the order code (i.e. F3S-TGR-NMHR-21-05-R
2NC: 0.5 A, 24 VDC/1NC: 0.2 A, 24 VDC
Specifications
Mechanical data
Model
Serial switching
Operating distance
Plastic housing
up to 6 pcs.
OFF ON (Sao)
10 mm Close
ON OFF (Sar)
20 mm* Open
Min.
Max.
4 mm/s
1,000 mm/s
25 to 80C
Flying lead
M12 connector
IP69K
IP67
Material cable
Flying lead
PVC, 6 mm o.d.
M12 connector
Black polyester
Stainless steel 316
Plastic housing
Material housing
25 to 105C
Item
* max. 22 mm, depends on the type
Electrical data
Item
Model
Indicator LED
none
Contact release time
Max.
Initial contact resistance
Max.
2 ms
500 m
Switching current
Min.
1 mA, 10 VDC
Approved standards
EN ISO13849-1
EN 60204-1
EN 62061
EN/IEC 60947-5-3
UL 508, CSA C22.2
BS 5304
443
F3S-TGR-N_R
Accessories
Order code
Cables 8-pin
Actuators
Mounting screws
Spacer (8 mm, Set of 2pcs.)*1
*1
2m
Y92E-M12PURSH8S2M-L
5m
Y92E-M12PURSH8S5M-L
10 m
25 m
for F3S-TGR-NLPR
F39-TGR-NLPR-A
for F3S-TGR-NSPR
F39-TGR-NSPR-A
for F3S-TGR-NMPR
F39-TGR-NMPR-A
for F3S-TGR-NCPR
F39-TGR-NCPR-A
for F3S-TGR-NWPR
F39-TGR-NWPR-A
for F3S-TGR-NBPR
F39-TGR-NBPR-A
for F3S-TGR-NLMR
F39-TGR-NLMR-A
for F3S-TGR-NSMR
F39-TGR-NSMR-A
for F3S-TGR-NBMR
F39-TGR-NBMR-A
for F3S-TGR-NSHR
F39-TGR-NSHR-A
for F3S-TGR-NSFR
F39-TGR-NSFR-A
for F3S-TGR-NMHR
F39-TGR-NMHR-A

F39-TGR-N-SCREWS
for elongated sensors
F39-TGR-NLR-SPACER
for small sensors
F39-TGR-NSR-SPACER
for miniature sensors
F39-TGR-NMR-SPACER
for long sensors
F39-TGR-NLR-SPACER
for wide sensors
F39-TGR-NWR-SPACER
Spacers are needed to prevent influences if switch is mounted on ferromagnetic background (e. g. reduced switching distance, EMC influences)

G9SA
+24V
GND
Start
Magnetic
actuator
F3S-TGR-NxxR
Sensor
Auxiliary output
for indication
(option)
A1
A2
T31
KM1
Feedbackloop
G9SA-301
yellow
green
black
white
red
blue
T22
T21
T12
T11
KM2
T32
KM1
13
14
33
34
KM2
KM1
+Us
GND
444
KM2
F3S-TGR-N_M/-N_U

RFID non-contact switches
RFID Non-contact switches are designed to monitor hinge, sliding or removal guard
doors.
Based on RFID technology (code) and hall technology (distance check)
The RFID-design covers two operation models with very high anti-tamper level:
M-types (Master coded): Any sensor works with any actuator, like traditional switches
U-types (Unique coded): Each sensor and actuator use a unique code. This is a
solution for applications that requires even a higher anti-tamper level
LED supports easy diagnosis
Operates with all OMRON safety controllers
Suitable for CIP/SIP processes and high pressure cleaning due IP69K (pre-wired types)
Conforms to safety categories up to PLe acc. EN ISO 13849-1
Master coded: Any actuator will operate with any sensor (Power down - power up re-teach needed if exchange of actuator)
Unique coded: Only one actuator fits to the code of the sensor
Elongated sensors
Type
Cable connection
5 m pre-wired
2NC/1NO
Order code
Master coded
Unique coded
F3S-TGR-NLPM-21-05
F3S-TGR-NLPU-21-05
10 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-NLPM-21-10
F3S-TGR-NLPU-21-10
M12, 8-pin
F3S-TGR-NLPM-21-M1J8
F3S-TGR-NLPU-21-M1J8
Small sensors
Cable connection
5 m pre-wired
2NC/1NO
Order code
Master coded
Unique coded
F3S-TGR-NSPM-21-05
F3S-TGR-NSPU-21-05
10 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-NSPM-21-10
F3S-TGR-NSPU-21-10
M12, 8-pin
F3S-TGR-NSPM-21-M1J8
F3S-TGR-NSPU-21-M1J8
Type
Specifications
Mechanical data
Item
Serial switching
up to 20 pcs.
Indicator LED
LED green - Indication of safety circuit closed
Operating distance
OFF ON (Sao)
10 mm Close
ON OFF (Sar)
20 mm Open
Min.
4 mm/s
Max.
1,000 mm/s
Material cable
25 to 80C
Flying lead
IP69K
M12 connector
IP67
Flying lead
PVC, 6 mm o.d.
M12 connector
Material
UL approved Polyester
Electrical data
Item
F3S-TGR-N_M
Code
Master coded: Every switch same code (Power down - Power up Unique coded: 32 x 166 different codes
re-teach needed, if actuator interchanged)
Technology
RFID (code) and Hall (distance check)
Power supply
24 VDC15%
Power consumption
Max.
0.2 A
Switching current
Min.
1 mA, 10 VDC
NC contacts
Max.
0.2 A, 24 VDC
NO contact
Max.
0.2 A, 24 VDC
Rated loads
Output type
F3S-TGR-N_U
Electronic output (potential-free optocoupler output)
445
F3S-TGR-N_M/-N_U
Approved standards
EN 62061
EN/IEC 60947-5-3
EN ISO 14119
UL 508, CSA C22.2
EN ISO13849-1
BS 5304
EN 60204-1
Accessories
Order code
Cables 8-pin
T-Connector connection cable
Actuators (only for master coded types)

Mounting screws
2m
Y92E-M12PURSH8S2M-L
5m
Y92E-M12PURSH8S5M-L
10 m
25 m
T-Connector for M12 connector
F39-TGR-NT
0.6 m, M12-8pin
2 m, M12-8pin
5 m, M12-8pin
10 m, M12-8pin
for F3S-TGR-NLPM
F39-TGR-NLPM-A
for F3S-TGR-NSPM
F39-TGR-NSPM-A

(M4, 4 30 mm, 4 20 mm, 4 10 mm;
incl. washers and Torx bit)
F39-TGR-N-SCREWS

G9SA
+24 V
GND
Start
A1
Magnetic
actuator
A2
T31
F3S-TGR-N_M
F3S-TGR-N_U
Sensor
red
blue
black
white
yellow
green
brown
orange
KM1
Feedbackloop
G9SA-301
KM2
T32
T11
T12
T22
T21
Aux. Output
KM1
13
14
33
34
KM2
KM1
+Us
GND
446
KM2
F3S-TGR-S_A/-S_D
Standalone non-contact safety switches
Standalone non-contact switches support applications like guarding doors or position
monitoring in machines. They are using the proven Omron non-contact technology
allowing to cover mechanical tolerances and vibrations
Models with single or dual actuator available (For one or two door systems in e.g.)
Based on hall technology
LED for easy diagnosis
Suitable for high pressure cleaning, CIP and SIP processes due IP69K
(pre-wired types)
Conforms to safety categories up to PLe acc. EN ISO 13849-1
Switches
Polyester housing
Type
Cable connection
Order code
Single actuator sensing
5 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-SPSA-05
10 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-SPSA-10
M12, 8-pin
F3S-TGR-SPSA-M1J8
5 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-SPSD-05
10 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-SPSD-10
M12, 8-pin
F3S-TGR-SPSD-M1J8
Type
Cable connection
Order code
Single actuator sensing
5 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-SMSA-05
10 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-SMSA-10
M12, 8-pin
F3S-TGR-SMSA-M1J8
5 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-SMSD-05
10 m pre-wired
F3S-TGR-SMSD-10
M12, 8-pin
F3S-TGR-SMSD-M1J8
Dual actuator sensing
Dual actuator sensing
Accessories
Order code
Cables 8-pin
Actuators (only for master coded types)

Mounting screws
2m
Y92E-M12PURSH8S2M-L
5m
Y92E-M12PURSH8S5M-L
10 m
25 m
for F3S-TGR-SPSA and -SPSD
F39-TGR-SPS-A
for F3S-TGR-SMSA and -SMSD
F39-TGR-SMS-A
Set of Torx safety screws (M4, 4 30 mm, 4 20 mm, 4 10 mm; incl. washers and Torx bit)
F39-TGR-N-SCREWS
447
F3S-TGR-S_A/-S_D
Specifications
Mechanical data
Item
Model
Polyester Sensor
Indicator
Green LED: Indication of safety circuits closed (Guard closed, actuator present, feedback circuit checked)
Stainless steel sensor
Operating distance
OFF ON (Sao)
Yellow LED: Indication of safety circuits open (Actuator removed)
15 mm Open
Min.
4 mm/s
Max.
1,000 mm/s
Material cable
10 mm Close
ON OFF (Sar)
25 to 45C
Flying lead
IP69K
M12 connector
IP67
Flying lead
PVC, 6 mm o.d.
M12 connector
Material housing
UL approved Polyester
Stainless steel 316
Stainless steel sensor
Electrical data
Item
Model
Polyester sensor
Sensing technology
Hall
Serial connection
up to 20 switches
Power supply
24 VDC10%
Power consumption
Max.
0.1 A
Switching current
Min.
10 mA, 5 VDC
Safety outputs
Max.
3 A, 250 VAC/3A, 24 VDC
Auxiliary output
Max.
0.2 A, 24 VDC
Rated loads
Approved standards
EN ISO13849-1
EN 62061
EN ISO 14119
EN 60204-1
EN/IEC 60947-5-3
UL 508, CSA C22.2
BS 5304
448
F3S-TGR-S_A/-S_D
Wiring example (serial connection with manual restart)

Safety Circuit 1 (Black/White) utilises internally checked force guided relay contacts and is connected in series with the corresponding Safety Circuit 2 (Yellow/Green) of the next switch. Allows minimal wiring and higher current switching to K1 and K2 contactors.
A manual start and contactor feedback check is achieved by connecting K1(Aux) and K2(Aux)
feedback contacts and momentary start button through the orange and brown feedback check.
24 VDC
24 V 0 V
+
RED
BLUE
START
BLACK
YELLOW
ORANGE
BROWN
GREEN
WHITE
GREY
AUX
K1 (Aux)
24 V 0 V
RED
K2 (Aux)
BLUE
BLACK
YELLOW
GREY
AUX
ORANGE
BROWN
GREEN
WHITE
FUSE
K1
K2
0V
449
F3S-TGR-N_X

Explosion proof non-contact switches
Explosion proof reed non-contact switches monitor the status of guarding doors in
petro-chemical and food applications with explosive atmospheres.
Based on reed technology
Operates with all Omron safety controllers
Suitable for high pressure cleaning, CIP/SIP processes
For use in hazardous areas IECEx and ATEX EExd IIC T6 (Gas and Dust). Designed for
Petro-chemical and food applications where explosive atmospheres are present.
Elongated sensors
Type
Cable connection
Order code
5 m pre-wired
2NC/1NO
F3S-TGR-NLMX-21-05
10 m pre-wired
2NC/1NO
F3S-TGR-NLMX-21-10
Cable connection
Order code
5 m pre-wired
2NC/1NO
F3S-TGR-NBMX-21-05
10 m pre-wired
2NC/1NO
F3S-TGR-NBMX-21-10
Barrel sensors
Type
Specifications
Mechanical data
Elongated sensors
Serial switching
Barrel sensors
up to 6 pcs.
Indicator
None
Operating distance
OFF ON (Sao)
10 mm close
ON OFF (Sar)
22 mm open
Min.
Max.
4 mm/s
1000 mm/s
20C to +60C
Flying lead
IP 67 Certification for IP67 but can be used for SIP/CIP and high pressure cleaning like IP69K)
Material
Stainless steel 316
Electrical data
Elongated sensors
Sensor technology
Reed
Power supply
24 VDC15%
Switching current
Min.
1 mA, 10 VDC
Max.
0.6 A, 230 VAC/24 VDC (internally fused)

0.2 A, 230 VAC/24 VDC
Rated loads
450
NC contacts
NO contact
Barrel sensors
F3S-TGR-N_X
Ex specification
Approved standards
II 2G Ex mb IIC T6Gb, II 2D Ex mb IIC T80 Db IP67*

(*Product is fully encapsulated which is considered to provide Ingress Protection to at least
IP67)
EN ISO 13849-1
EN 60204-1
EN 62061
Zones 0, 1, 2 (Gas), Zones 20, 21, 22 (Dust)

(An area where Gas and Dust is likely to occur in use)
EN ISO 14119
EN/IEC 60947-5-3
IEC/EN 60079-0, IEC/EN 60079-18
UL 508, CSA C22.2

BS 5304
EN 1088-1
Accessories
Order code
Actuators
for F3S-TGR-NLMX
F39-TGR-NLMX-A
for F3S-TGR-NBMX
F39-TGR-NBMX-A
Mounting screws
F39-TGR-N-Screws
Spacer (8 mm, Set of 2pcs.)*1
for F3S-TGR-NLMX
*1
F39-TGR-NLR-SPACER
Spacers are needed to prevent influences if switch is mounted on ferromagnetic background (e. g. reduced switching distance, EMC influences)

G9SA
+24V
GND
Start
A1
A2
T31
KM1
F3S-TGR-N_X
Sensor
black
white
red
blue
brown
orange
green (Earth)
Feedbackloop
G9SA-301
T11
T12
T22
T21
KM2
T32
NO
contact
Magnetic
actuator
KM1
13
14
33
34
KM2
KM1
+Us
KM2
GND
451
D4NS

Safety door switch with plastic housing
The D4NS line-up includes three-contact models with 2NC/1NC and 3NC contact forms
in addition to the previous contact forms, 1NC/1NO and 2NC. All models have a M20
conduit opening.
Line-up with three contacts: 2NC/1NC and 3NC contact forms
Line-up with two contacts 1NC/1NO and 2NC
Standardised gold-clad contacts for high contact reliability
Applicable for standard loads and micro loads
Switches (with approved direct opening contacts)
Type
1-conduit
Slow-action
Slow-action MBB contact
Conduit opening/connector
Order code
1NC/1NO
M20
D4NS-4AF
2NC
M20
D4NS-4BF
2NC/1NO
M20
D4NS-4CF
3NC
M20
D4NS-4DF
1NC/1NO
M20
D4NS-4EF
2NC/1NO
M20
D4NS-4FF
Operation keys (order separately)

Type
Order code
Type
Order code
Horizontal mounting
D4DS-K1
Adjustable mounting (horizontal)
D4DS-K3
Vertical mounting
D4DS-K2
Adjustable mounting
(horizontal/vertical)
D4DS-K5
Specifications
Durability *1
IP67 (EN60947-5-1) (This applies for the switch only. The degree of protection for the key hole is IP00.)
Mechanical
Electrical

Operating speed
0.05 to 0.5 m/s
Operating frequency
Direct opening force *2
60 N min.
Direct opening travel *2
10 mm min.
3 (EN60947-5-1)
Contact gap
22 mm min
100 A (EN60947-5-1)
10 A (EN60947-5-1)
Ambient temperature
Operating:
*1
*2
The durability is for an ambient temperature of 5C to 35C and an ambient humidity of 40 to 70%. For more details, consult your Omron representative.
These figures are minimum requirements for safe operation.
Note: The above values are initial values.
452
D4BS

Safety door switch with metal housing
The D4BS line-up includes two-contact models with 1NC/1NO and 2NC in a robust
metal housing with 1 PG 13.5 conduit opening.
Robust metal housing
Line-up with two contacts: 1NC/1NO and 2NC
Standardised gold-clad contacts for high contact reliability
Applicable for standard loads and micro loads
Switches
Type
Mounting direction
Conduit size
1-conduit
Front-side mounting
Pg13.5
Order code
2NC (slow-action)
D4BS-15FS
D4BS-1AFS
Type
Order code
Horizontal mounting
D4BS-K1
Vertical mounting
D4BS-K2
Adjustable mounting
(horizontal)
D4BS-K3
Specifications
Degree of protection*1
IP67 (EN60947-5-1)
Durability*2
Mechanical:
Electrical:
Operating speed
0.1 m/s to 0.5 m/s
Operating frequency
30 operations/min max.
Rated frequency
50/60 Hz

500,000 operations min. (10 A at 250 VAC, resistive load)
Contact gap
22 mm min.
Direct opening force*3
19.61 N min. (EN60947-5-1)
Direct opening travel*3
20 mm min. (EN60947-5-1)
Full stroke
23 mm min.
Conventional enclosed thermal

current (Ith)
20 A (EN60947-5-1)
100 A (EN60947-5-1)
Pollution degree
(operating environment)
3 (EN60947-5-1)
Ambient temperature
Operating:
*1
Although the switch box is protected from dust, oil, or water penetration, do not use the D4BS in places where dust, oil, water, or chemicals may penetrate through the key hole on the head,
otherwise switch damage or malfunctioning may occur.
*2 The durability is for an ambient temperature of 5C to 35C and an ambient humidity of 40 to 70%. Contact your Omron sales representative for more detailed information on other operating
environments.
*3
453
F3S-TGR-KM15/-KM16/-KH16

Safety door switches with stainless steel head or full
stainless steel body
This safety door switches use a stainless steel head or even a full stainless steel body
to increase the robustness.
2NC/1NO or 3NC contacts

Key entry turnable to back side
4 key insertion positions
3 M20 conduit entries
Positive break contacts (to IEC 60947-5-1)
Switches
Type
Housing
Conduit
Contacts
Order code
Plastic body with metal head
M20
2NC/1NO
Slow action
F3S-TGR-KM15-21
3NC
Slow action
F3S-TGR-KM15-30
2NC/1NO
Slow action
F3S-TGR-KM16-21
3NC
Slow action
F3S-TGR-KM16-30
2NC/1NO
Slow action
F3S-TGR-KH16-21
3NC
Slow action
F3S-TGR-KH16-30
Plastic body with metal head
Full stainless steel body
Keys (order separately)

Type
Order code
for metal head
F39-TGR-KAM
Horizontal mounting
F39-TGR-KF
plastic flexible
F39-TGR-KPF
heavy flexible
F39-TGR-KHF
hygienic flexible
F39-TGR-KHFH
Accessories
Item
Remarks
Order code
M20 Gland
Stainless steel 316 for F3S-TGR-KH16 types
F39-TGR-M20
Mounting screws
Set of Torx safety screws (M4, 4 30 mm, 4 20 mm, 4 10 mm; incl. washers and Torx bit)
F39-TGR-N-SCREWS
454
F3S-TGR-KM15/-KM16/-KH16
Specifications
Item
F3S-TGR-KM15
Standards
EN1088, IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60204-1, UL508

EN ISO 13849-1: up to PLe*1
EN 62061: up to SIL3*1
Mechanical reliability B10d
2.5 106 operations at 100mA load
F3S-TGR-KM16
F3S-TGR-KH16
58 103.5 39.5 mm
PFHd
3.44 108
Proof test interval (Life)
35 years
MTTFd
356 years
Utilization category
AC15 A300 3 A
Thermal current (Ith)
5A
Rated insulation/Withstand voltages
500 VAC/2,500 VAC
Rated travel for positive opening
8 mm
Actuator entry minimum radius
175 mm standard, 100mm flexible
Maximum approach/Withdrawal speed
600 mm/s
Body dimensions (W H D)
54 88.4 34.5 mm
58 100.4 34.5 mm
Fixing
2 M5, 40 mm distance
Conduit entry
Material
M20
Body
Polyester
Head
Stainless steel 316
Enclosure Protection
IP67
Temperature Range
25 to 80C
Vibration
IEC 68-2-6, 10-55 Hz +1 Hz, Excursion: 0.35 mm, 1 octave/min
Depending upon system architecture
*1
Stainless steel 316
455
D4NL

The D4NL guard-lock safety-door switches are available with four or five built-in
contacts. When locked, they have a key holding force of up to 1300 N. Mechanical
lock/solenoid release types and vice versa set up the complete range.
Safety-door switch with electromagnetic lock or unlock mechanism
Models with four or five built-in contacts
Strong key holding force: 1300 N
For standard loads and micro loads
Keys are compatible with D4GL and D4NS
For 110 V and 230 V version ask your local Omron representative
Lock and release
types
Contact configuration Conduit opening
Order code
Lock and release

types
Mechanical lock
solenoid release
1NC/1NO + 1NC/1NO
M20
D4NL-4AFA-B
1NC/1NO + 2NC
M20
D4NL-4BFA-B
2NC + 1NC/1NO
M20
D4NL-4CFA-B
Solenoid lock
mechanical
release
2NC + 2NC
M20
2NC/1NO + 1NC/1NO
Contact configuration Conduit opening
Order code
1NC/1NO + 1NC/1NO
M20
D4NL-4AFG-B
1NC/1NO + 2NC
M20
D4NL-4BFG-B
2NC + 1NC/1NO
M20
D4NL-4CFG-B
D4NL-4DFA-B
2NC + 2NC
M20
D4NL-4DFG-B
M20
D4NL-4EFA-B
2NC/1NO + 1NC/1NO
M20
D4NL-4EFG-B
2NC/1NO + 2NC
M20
D4NL-4FFA-B
2NC/1NO + 2NC
M20
D4NL-4FFG-B
3NC + 1NC/1NO
M20
D4NL-4GFA-B
3NC + 1NC/1NO
M20
D4NL-4GFG-B
3NC + 2NC
M20
D4NL-4HFA-B
3NC + 2NC
M20
D4NL-4HFG-B
Note Conduit sizes of G1/2 and Pg 13,5 are also available.

Solenoid: 24 VDC, Orange LED: 10 to 115 VAC/VDC

Type
Order code
Type
Order code
Horizontal mounting
D4DS-K1
Adjustable mounting
(horizontal)
D4DS-K3
Vertical mounting
D4DS-K2
Adjustable mounting
D4DS-K5
Specifications
Durability*1
IP67 (EN60947-5-1) (This applies for the switch only. The degree of protection for the key hole is IP00.)
Mechanical
Electrical
Operating speed
0.05 to 0.5 m/s
Operating frequency
Rated frequency
50/60 Hz
Contact gap
2x2 mm min
60 N min. (EN60947-5-1)
10 mm min. (EN60947-5-1)
Holding force
1,300 N min.
10 A (EN60947-5-1)
100 A (EN60947-5-1)
3 (EN60947-5-1)
Ambient temperature
Operating:
*1
*2
10C to 55C (with no icing or condensation)
456
D4GL

The D4GL guard-lock safety-door switches are available with four or five built-in contacts. When locked, they have a key holding force of up to 1000 N.
Mechanical lock/solenoid release types and vice versa set up the complete range.
Slim safety-door switch with electromagnetic lock or unlock mechanism
Models with four or five built-in contacts
For standard loads and micro loads
Keys are compatible with D4NL and D4NS
Lock and release
types
Conduit
size
Order code
Lock and release

types
Conduit
size
Order code
Mechanical lock
solenoid release
1NC/1NO + 1NC/1NO
M20
D4GL-4AFA-A
M20
D4GL-4AFG-A
M20
D4GL-4BFA-A
1NC/1NO + 2NC
M20
D4GL-4BFG-A
2NC + 1NC/1NO
M20
D4GL-4CFA-A
Solenoid lock
mechanical
release
1NC/1NO + 1NC/1NO
1NC/1NO + 2NC
2NC + 1NC/1NO
M20
D4GL-4CFG-A
2NC + 2NC
M20
D4GL-4DFA-A
2NC + 2NC
M20
D4GL-4DFG-A
2NC/1NO + 1NC/1NO
M20
D4GL-4EFA-A
2NC/1NO + 1NC/1NO
M20
D4GL-4EFG-A
2NC/1NO + 2NC
M20
D4GL-4FFA-A
2NC/1NO + 2NC
M20
D4GL-4FFG-A
3NC + 1NC/1NO
M20
D4GL-4GFA-A
3NC + 1NC/1NO
M20
D4GL-4GFG-A
3NC + 2NC
M20
D4GL-4HFA-A
3NC + 2NC
M20
D4GL-4HFG-A
Note conduit sizes of G1/2 and Pg13,5 are also available.

solenoid: 24 VDC, orange/green LED: 24 VDC
Type
Order code
Type
Order code
Horizontal mounting
D4DS-K1
Adjustable mounting
(horizontal)
D4DS-K3
Vertical mounting
D4DS-K2
Adjustable mounting
D4DS-K5
Specifications
Durability *1
IP67 (EN60947-5-1)
(This applies for the switch only. The degree of protection for the key hole is IP00.)
Mechanical
Electrical
500,000 operations min. for a resistive load of 4 mA at 24 VDC;

150,000 operations min. for a resistive load of 1 A at 125 VAC in 2 circuits and 4 mA at 24 VDC in 2 circuits
Operating speed
0.05 to 0.5 m/s
Operating frequency
Rated frequency
50/60 Hz
Contact gap
2x2 mm min.
60 N min. (EN60947-5-1)
10 mm min. (EN60947-5-1)
Holding force
1,000 N min.
2.5 A (EN60947-5-1)
100 A (EN60947-5-1)
3 (EN60947-5-1)
Ambient temperature
Operating:
*1
*2
*3
457
D4SL-N

The D4SL-N guard-lock safety door switches safety door switches provides a wide
range of models for the safe monitoring of entries and positions of guards.
Key holding force 1,300 N
4, 5 and 6 contact types
Terminal block type and connector type
Drive solenoid directly from the controller
Turning key insertion point without detaching head
Contact model
Built-in Switch
Contact model
4-contact model
Door monitor and Lock monitor are connected in series internally.

A:
1NC/1NO + 1NC/1NO
B:
1NC/1NO + 2NC
C:
2NC + 1NC/1NO
D:
2NC + 2NC
5-contact model
Built-in Switch
E:
F:
G:
H:
2NC/1NO + 1NC/1NO
2NC/1NO + 2NC
3NC + 1NC/1NO
3NC + 2NC
6-contact model
N:
P:
Q:
R:
2NC/1NO + 2NC/1NO
2NC/1NO + 3NC
3NC + 2NC/1NO
3NC + 3NC
Door monitor and Lock monitor are NOT connected in series internally.
S:
1NC/1NO + 1NC/1NO
T:
1NC/1NO + 2NC
U:
2NC + 1NC/1NO
V:
2NC + 2NC
Models
Housing
Release
key type
Wiring method Solenoid voltage/

Indicator
Lock and release

type
(door open/closed detection switch and lock
monitor switch contacts)
Head Resin/
Body Resin*2
Standard
(metal)*3
Connector
Mechanical lock
Solenoid release
6-contact Model
M20
Insert the built-in switch (N, P, Q or R) into the blank _.
D4SL-N4_FA-DN
5-contact Model
M20
Insert the built-in switch (E, F, G or H) into the blank _.
D4SL-N4_FA-DN
4-contact Model
M20
Insert the built-in switch (A, B, C, D, S, T, U or V) into the
blank _.
D4SL-N4_FA-N
6-contact Model
M20
D4SL-N4_FA-D
5-contact Model
M20
D4SL-N4_FA-D
4-contact Model
M20
blank _.
D4SL-N4_FA
24 VDC
(Orange)
24 VDC
(without indicator)
Terminal block 24 VDC
(Orange)
24 VDC
(without indicator)
Connector
24 VDC
(Orange)
24 VDC
(without indicator)
Terminal block 24 VDC
(Orange)
24 VDC
(without indicator)
*1
*2
*3
Types also with G1/2 and 1/2-14NPT available - see online data sheet
'Head metal/Body resin' also available - see online data sheet
Release key type also resin available - see online data sheet
458
Conduit Order code

size*1
Solenoid lock
6-contact Model
M20
Mechanical release Insert the built-in switch (N, P, Q or R) into the blank _.
D4SL-N4_FG-DN
5-contact Model
M20
D4SL-N4_FG-DN
4-contact Model
M20
blank _.
D4SL-N4_FG-N
6-contact Model
M20
D4SL-N4_FG-D
5-contact Model
M20
D4SL-N4_FG-D
4-contact Model
M20
blank _.
D4SL-N4_FG
D4SL-N

Type
Order code
Type
Order code
Horizontal mounting
D4SL-NK1
Vertical mounting
D4SL-NK2
Horizontal mounting
(Short)
D4SL-NK1S
Vertical mounting
(Cushion rubber)
D4SL-NK2G
Horizontal mounting
(Cushion rubber)
D4SL-NK1G
Adjustable
(Horizontal)
D4SL-NK3
Connector cables for connector types

Cable length
Order code
1m
D4SL-CN1
3m
D4SL-CN3
5m
D4SL-CN5
Specifications
Degree of protection*1
IP67 (EN60947-5-1)
Mechanical
Electrical

150,000 operations min. (1 A resistance at 125 VAC)*3
Operating speed
0.05 to 1 m/s
Operating frequency
5 operations minute max.
Direct opening force*4
60 N min. (EN60947-5-1)
Direct opening travel*4
15 mm min. (EN60947-5-1)
Holding force
1,300 N min.
1 mA resistive load at 5 VDC (N-level reference value)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
150 V (EN60947-5-1)
Rated frequency
50/60 Hz
Class II(double insulation)
3 (EN60947-5-1)
100 A (EN60947-5-1)
Conventional free air thermal current (Ith)
2.5 A (11-42, 21-52, 21-22)

1 A (Others)
Ambient operations humidity
95% max.
*1
*2
*3
*4
Durability*2
This applies for the switch only. The degree of protection for the key hole is IP00.
The durability is for an ambient temperature of 5 to 35C and an ambient humidity of 40% to 70%. For more details, consult your OMRON representative.
Do not pass the 1 A, 125 VAC load through more than 3 circuits.
Note 1. The above values are initial values.

2. The switch contacts can be used with either standard loads or microloads.
459
F3S-TGR-KHL1

Stainless steel guard-lock safety door switch
The F3S-TGR-KHL1 safety-door switch keeps medium to large guard doors closed until
hazards have been removed. It has a stainless steel body and is designed to cope with
the rigorous applications of the food processing and chemical industries.
Safety-door switch with electromagnetic lock and unlock mechanism
(mechanical lock/solenoid unlock)
2NC (safety), 1NO (Guard open), 1NO (Lock open)
LED for diagnosis
IP69K suitable for SIP and CIP processes
Positive break contacts to IEC 60947-5-1
Switches
Type
Housing
Conduit
Contacts
Order code
Stainless steel 316
M20
2NC safety contacts

2NO Auxiliary contact (guard open, lock status)
F3S-TGR-KHL1

Type
Order code
for metal head
F39-TGR-KAM
Horizontal mounting
F39-TGR-KF
heavy flexible
F39-TGR-KHF
hygienic flexible
F39-TGR-KHFH
Accessories
Item
Remarks
Order code
M20 Gland
Stainless steel 316
F39-TGR-M20
Specifications
Item
F3S-TGR-KHL1
Standards
EN1088, IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60204-1, UL508

Lock principle
Mechanical lock/solenoid unlock
Indicator LED
Status of solenoid
AC15 A300 3 A
5A
500 VAC/2,500 VAC
10 mm
175 mm standard, 100mm flexible
600 mm/s
63 143 41.5 mm
Fixing
Conduit entry
M20
Material
Stainless steel 316
IP69K
Temperature Range
25 to 55C
Vibration
IEC 68-2-6, 10 to 55 Hz +1 Hz, Excursion: 0.35 mm, 1 octave/min
*1
460
F3S-TGR-KHL3

Stainless steel guard-lock safety door switch
The F3S-TGR-KHL3 safety-door switch keeps medium to large guard doors closed until
hazards have been removed. It has a stainless steel body and is designed to cope with
the rigorous applications of the food processing and chemical industries.
Safety-door switch with electromagnetic lock and unlock mechanism
(mechanical lock/solenoid unlock)
4NC (safety), 1NO (Guard open), 1NO (Lock open)
LED for diagnosis
IP69K suitable for SIP and CIP processes
Positive break contacts to IEC 60947-5-1
Switches
Type
Housing
Conduit
Contacts
Order code
Stainless steel 316
M20
2NC safety contacts

2NO Auxillary contact (guard open, lock status)*1
F3S-TGR-KHL3
F3S-TGR-KHL3R
Stainless steel 316

with rear push button manual
release
1NO lock status if LED2 Lock Status Indicator not used
Accessories
Type
Order code
Item
Remarks
Order code
for metal head
F39-TGR-KAM
M20 Gland
Stainless steel 316
F39-TGR-M20
Key
Manual release key
F39-TGR-MRK
Horizontal mounting
F39-TGR-KF
heavy flexible
F39-TGR-KHF
hygienic flexible
F39-TGR-KHFH
*1
Specifications
F3S-TGR-KHL3
Standards
EN1088, IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60204-1, UL508

Lock principle
Mechanical lock/solenoid unlock
Indicator LEDs
LED1: Status of solenoid

LED2: Lock status indication (if 1NO Auxiliary contact not used)
AC15 A300 3 A
5A
500 VAC/2,500 VAC
10 mm
175 mm standard, 100 mm flexible
600 mm/s
48 177 47 mm
Fixing
4 M5, mounted from backside
Conduit entry
M20
Material
Stainless steel 316
IP69K
Temperature Range
25 to 55C
Vibration
IEC 68-2-6, 10-55 Hz +1 Hz, Excursion: 0.35 mm, 1 octave/min
*1
461
Safety sensors
PROTECT OPERATORS AND PRODUCTION
Total consistency across the board
Safety Sensors are the first choice in safeguarding workplaces where persons and machines cooperate. Built-in intelligence stops the machine in
conditions that are dangerous for the worker. Our F3S-TGR-CL and F3SJ range offers safety light curtains with included safe control functions for finger-,
hand- and body protection.
Finger- and Hand and body protection models
Control functions
X-, T- and L-muting
fixed and floating blanking
single and double break operation
pre-reset access control
Easy mounting and common wiring for all types for simple design and installation
Certified acc. EN61496 and EN ISO 13849-1.
Safety sensors
Finger Detection
462
Hand detection
Type 2 & Type 4
Type 2 & Type 4
Type 4
Type 4
Type 4
Type 4
Type 2 & Type 4
Type 2 & Type 4
Robust
housing
Robust
housing
Slim
housing
Slim
housing
Slim
housing
Slim
housing
Robust
housing
Robust
housing
F3S-TGR-CL_014
MS_800_14
F3SJ-A_P14
F3SJ-E_P25
F3SJ-B_P25
F3SJ-A_P30
F3S-TGR-CL_035
MS_800_30
S626
Page 482
S633
Page 480
S634
Page 474
S634
Page 466
S634
Page 470
S634
Page 474
S626
Page 482
S633
Page 480
Safety sensors
Human body detection and Muting applications
Presence sensing
Sensing distance
up to 50 m
Sensing distance
up to 12 m
active/passive system
Muting actuators
(only for
F3S-TGR-CL series)
Sensing distance
up to 10 m
Sensing distance
up to 4 m
Type 2 & Type 4
Type 2 & Type 4
Type 2 & Type 4
Type 2 & Type 4
Type 2
Type 3
Robust
housing
Robust
housing
Robust
housing
Robust
housing
M18
housing
Plastic head
metal body
F3S-TGRCL_-070
F3S-TGRCL_-K_
F3S-TGRCL_-K_C
F39-TGR-MCL
E3FS +
Controller
OS32C
S626
Page 482
S627
S627
S644
Page 487
S223, S623
Page 488
S224
Page 489
463
Selection table
Safety Sensors
In- and Outputs
Supply
voltage
Application
Features
Selection criteria
Model
464
F3SJ-E
F3SJ-B
F3SJ-A
Safety category
Type 4
Type 4
Type 4
MS2800 and MS4800

Type 2 & 4
Safety integrity level

(IEC 61508)
SIL 3
Protective height
185 to 1,105 mm
185 to 2,065 mm
245 to 2,495 mm
280 to 2,120 mm
Resolution
25 mm
25 mm
14, 30 mm
14, 30 mm
Reaction time
15 ms
15 ms
10 to 25 ms
14 to 59 ms
Temperature range
10 to 55C
10 to 55C
10 to 55C
10 to 55C
IP class
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
Blanking function
internal
internal
Muting function
option
EDM function
internal
internal
internal
internal
Interlock function
internal
internal
internal
Series connection
up to 3 sets
up to 4 sets
up to 4 sets
inclusive
Mounting kits
option
option
inclusive
Parameter setting
option (software incl., console)
internal DIP switch
External control unit
Finger protection
Hand protection
Arm protection
Body protection
Presence detection
Muting application
Blanking application
24 VDC
Safety outputs
2 PNP OSSD transistor outputs
Auxiliary output
1 PNP (non safety)
2 PNP (non safety)
1 PNP (non safety)
Test input
EDM input
Reset input
Muting sensor input
Page/Quick Link
466
470
474
480
Safety sensors
Safety Sensors
F3S-TGR-CL
F3S-TGR-CL_-K_ / -K_C
E3FS + F3SP-U3P
Safety category
Type 2 & 4
Type 2 & 4
Type 2
OS32C
Type 3

(IEC 61508)
SIL 2
Protective height
150 to 2,400 mm
500 to 1,200 mm
Sensing range 4 m
Resolution
14, 35, 70 mm
Beam pitch
300, 400, 500 mm
Reaction time
13 to 103 ms
13 ms
32 ms
80 ms
Temperature range
10 to 55C
10 to 55C
10 to 55C
10 to 50C
IP class
IP65
IP65
IP67
IP65
Blanking function
internal
Muting function
internal
internal
option
EDM function
internal
internal
option
internal
Interlock function
internal
internal
option
internal
Series connection
option
Mounting kits
inclusive
inclusive
option
Parameter setting
internal DIP switch
internal DIP switch
Software (included)
External control unit
Finger protection
Hand protection
Arm protection
Body protection
Presence detection
Muting application
Blanking application
24 VDC
Safety outputs
Auxiliary output
Test input
EDM input
Reset input
Muting sensor input
EtherNet/IP
Page/Quick Link
482
S627
488
489
Safety sensors
In- and Outputs
Supply
voltage
Application
Features
Selection criteria
Model
465
F3SJ-E
Safety sensors
Easy type for simple and affordable hand protection
The F3SJ-E-family is a type 4 safety light curtain with an optical resolution of 25 mm.
An operation range of up to 7 m and a protective height up to 1,105 mm are provided
with no dead zone
Detection height = sensor height
Small housing
Simple and affordable hand protection
Reduced wiring, quick mount brackets and easy-to-view-alignment beams reduce
mounting time
Type 4 sensor complying with EN 61496-1 and up to PLe according EN ISO 13849
Application
Detection capability
Beam gap
Operating range
Protective height (mm)
Order code
Hand protection
Dia. 25 mm
20 mm
0.2 to 7 m
185 to 1,105
F3SJ-E____P25
Note: F3SJ-E uses a 3 m prewired discrete cable.

Number of beams
Protective height (mm)*1
Order code
185
F3SJ-E0185P25
10
225
F3SJ-E0225P25
14
305
F3SJ-E0305P25
18
385
F3SJ-E0385P25
22
465
F3SJ-E0465P25
26
545
F3SJ-E0545P25
30
625
F3SJ-E0625P25
34
705
F3SJ-E0705P25
38
785
F3SJ-E0785P25
42
865
F3SJ-E0865P25
46
945
F3SJ-E0945P25
50
1,025
F3SJ-E1025P25
54
1,105
F3SJ-E1105P25
*1
Protective height (mm) = Total sensor length
466
F3SJ-E
Safety sensors

Sensor mounting bracket
Specifications
Application
Remarks
Order code
Top/bottom bracket
Top/bottom bracket for F3SJ-E/B
2 for an emitter,
2 for a receiver,
total of 4 per set
F39-LJB1
Intermediate bracket
In combination use with top/bottom bracket

for F3SJ-E/B
Can be used as free-location bracket.
1 set with 2 pieces
F39-LJB2*1 *2
Quick mount bracket
Quick mount bracket for F3SJ-E/B

Supports M6 slide nut for aluminum frame.
1 set with 2 pieces
F39-LJB3-M6*1
F39-LJB3-M8*2

Quick mount M6 brack- Bracket to mount an intermediate bracket to the aluminum frame
et
with a single touch.
Quick mount M8 bracket
Hexagon socket head F39-LJB3-M6K*1

cap screws
(M6 10) are included.
Compatible mounting
bracket
2 for an emitter,
2 for a receiver,
total of 4 per set
F39-LJB4
2 for an emitter,
2 for a receiver,
total of 4 per set
F39-LJB5
Mounting bracket used when replacing existing area sensors

(F3SJ-A or F3SN) with the F3SJ-E/B.
Contact mount bracket Bracket to closely contact the back side of the sensor.
*1
*2

cap screws
Safety sensors
Appearance
Combining F39-LJB2 and F39-LJB3-M6K makes F39-LJB3-M6.

Laser pointer
Appearance
Output
Order code
Laser pointer for F3SJ
F39-PTJ
467
F3SJ-E
Safety sensors
Specifications
Model
F3SJ-E____P25
Sensor type
Setting tool connection*1
Parameter settings: Not available
Safety category
Safety purpose of category 4, 3, 2, 1, or B
Opaque objects 25 mm in diameter
Beam gap (P)
20 mm
Number of beams (n)
8 to 54
Protective height (PH)
185 to 1,105 mm
Lens diameter
Diameter 5 mm
Operating range*2
Response time (under
stable light incident
condition)
0.2 to 7 m
ON to OFF
15 ms max.
OFF to ON
70 ms max.
Startup waiting time
2 s max.
Power supply voltage (Vs)
SELV/PELV 24 VDC20% (ripple p-p 10% max.)
Consumption current (no load)
Emitter: Up to 22 beams: 41 mA max., 26 to 42 beams: 57 mA max., 46 to 54 beams: 63 mA max.

Receiver: Up to 22 beams: 42 mA max., 26 to 42 beams: 47 mA max., 46 to 54 beams: 51 mA max.
Light source (emitted wavelength)
Effective aperture angle (EAA)
Based on IEC 61496-2. Within 2.5 for both emitter and receiver when the detection distance is 3 m or over
Safety outputs (OSSD)
Two PNP transistor outputs, load current 200 mA max., residual voltage 2 V max. (except for voltage drop due to cable extension), Leakage current 1
mA max., load inductance 2.2 H max.*3, Maximum capacity load 1 F*4
Output operation mode
Safety output: On when receiving light
Input voltage
ON voltage: Vs-3 V to Vs, OFF voltage: 0 V to 1/2 Vs or open*5

function
Mutual interference prevention algorithm prevents interference in up to 3 sets.
Test function
Self test (at power-ON and at power distribution)

External test (emission stop function by test input)
Protection circuit
Output short-circuit protection, and power supply reverse polarity protection
Ambient temperature
Operating: 10 to 55C (non-freezing), Storage: 25 to 70C
Ambient humidity
Operating: 35% to 85% (no condensation), Storage: 35% to 95% RH
Operating ambient light intensity
Incandescent lamp: 3,000 lx max., Sunlight: 10,000 lx max.
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC 50/60 Hz, 1 min
IP65 (IEC 60529)
Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, Multiple amplitude of 0.7 mm, 20 sweeps in X, Y, and Z directions
Shock resistance
Malfunction: 100 m/s2, 1,000 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Pollution degree
Pollution degree 3 (IEC 60664-1)
Power cable
Connection method: Pull-out type, cable length 3 m

Number of wires: Emitter: 5 wires, receiver: 6 wires
Cable diameter: Dia. 6 mm
Allowable bending radius: R5 mm
Extension cable
30 m max.*6
Material
Case: Aluminum
Cap: ABS resin, PBT
Optical cover: PMMA resin (acrylic)
Cable: Oil resistant PVC
Weight (g) = (protective height) 2.6 + 800
Accessories
Test rod, Instruction Manual, User's Manual (CD-ROM)*7
IEC 61496-1, EN 61496-1 UL 61496-1, Type 4 ESPE (Electro-Sensitive Protective Equipment)

IEC 61496-2, CLC/TS 61496-2, UL 61496-2, Type 4 AOPD (Active Opto-electronic Protective Devices)
IEC 61508-1 to -3, EN 61508-1 to -3 SIL3
IEC 13849-1: 2006, EN ISO 13849-1: 2008 (PLe, Cat.4)
UL 508, UL 1998, CAN/CSA C22.2 No.14, CAN/CSA C22.2 No.0.8
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
Do not use the support software and setting console for F3SJ-A. Operation cannot be guaranteed.
Use of the spatter protection cover causes a 10% maximum sensing distance attenuation.
The load inductance is the maximum value when the safety output frequently repeats ON and OFF. When you use the safety output at 4 Hz or less, the usable load inductance becomes larger.
These values must be taken into consideration when connecting elements including a capacitive load such as capacitor.
The Vs indicates a voltage value in your environment.
To extend a cable of the F3SJ-E, refer to the user's manual (SCHG-733/732).
Mounting brackets are sold separately.
468
F3SJ-E
Safety sensors
Connections
Basic wiring diagram
Emitter
Receiver
Minimum wiring required to check the operation of the F3SJ-E
0 V (Blue)
Open
Safety output 2 (White)
24 VDC
0V
Power
supply
Safety sensors
Safety output 1 (Black)

Open
24 V (Brown)
24 V (Brown)
Test input (Black)

Open
0 V (Blue)
(Gray) Communication line (+)

(Pink)
Communication line ()
469
F3SJ-B
Safety sensors
Basic type with a combination of performance and
functionality
The F3SJ-B-family is a type 4 safety light curtain with an optical resolution of 25 mm.
An operation range of up to 7 m and a protective height up to 2,065 mm are provided
with no dead zone
Detection height = sensor height
Simple hand protection
Muting function available
Series connection up to three sets
Type 4 sensor complying with EN 61496-1 and up to PLe according EN ISO 13849
Application
Beam gap
Operating range
Order code
Hand protection
Dia. 25 mm
20 mm
0.2 to 7 m
185 to 2,065
F3SJ-B____P25
Number of beams
Order code
185
F3SJ-B0185P25
10
225
F3SJ-B0225P25
14
305
F3SJ-B0305P25
18
385
F3SJ-B0385P25
22
465
F3SJ-B0465P25
26
545
F3SJ-B0545P25
30
625
F3SJ-B0625P25
34
705
F3SJ-B0705P25
38
785
F3SJ-B0785P25
42
865
F3SJ-B0865P25
46
945
F3SJ-B0945P25
50
1,025
F3SJ-B1025P25
54
1,105
F3SJ-B1105P25
58
1,185
F3SJ-B1185P25
62
1,265
F3SJ-B1265P25
66
1,345
F3SJ-B1345P25
70
1,425
F3SJ-B1425P25
74
1,505
F3SJ-B1505P25
78
1,585
F3SJ-B1585P25
82
1,665
F3SJ-B1665P25
86
1,745
F3SJ-B1745P25
90
1,825
F3SJ-B1825P25
94
1,905
F3SJ-B1905P25
98
1,985
F3SJ-B1985P25
102
2,065
F3SJ-B2065P25
*1
470
F3SJ-B
Safety sensors

Sensor mounting bracket
Specifications
Application
Remarks
Order code
Top/bottom bracket
Top/bottom bracket for F3SJ-E/B
2 for an emitter,
2 for a receiver,
total of 4 per set
F39-LJB1
Intermediate bracket
In combination use with top/bottom bracket

for F3SJ-E/B
Can be used as free-location bracket.
1 set with 2 pieces
F39-LJB2*1 *2
Quick mount bracket

1 set with 2 pieces
F39-LJB3-M6*1
F39-LJB3-M8*2

Quick mount M6 brack- Bracket to mount an intermediate bracket to the aluminum frame
et
with a single touch.
Quick mount M8 bracket

cap screws
Compatible mounting
bracket
2 for an emitter,
2 for a receiver,
total of 4 per set
F39-LJB4
2 for an emitter,
2 for a receiver,
total of 4 per set
F39-LJB5
Mounting bracket used when replacing existing area sensors

(F3SJ-A or F3SN) with the F3SJ-E/B.
Contact mount bracket Bracket to closely contact the back side of the sensor.
*1
*2

cap screws
Safety sensors
Appearance

Laser pointer
Appearance
Output
Order code
F39-PTJ
471
F3SJ-B
Safety sensors
Specifications
Model
F3SJ-B____P25
Sensor type
Setting tool connection*1
Parameter settings: Not available
Safety category
Beam gap (P)
20 mm
Number of beams (n)
8 to 102
185 to 2,065 mm
Lens diameter
Diameter 5 mm
Operating range*2
Response time (under
stable light incident
condition)
0.2 to 7 m
ON to OFF
15 ms max. (response time at 1 set connection, series connection of 2 sets or 3 sets)
OFF to ON
70 ms max. (response time at 1 set connection, series connection of 2 sets or 3 sets)
2 s max.
SELV/PELV 24 VDC20% (ripple p-p 10% max.)
Consumption current (no load)
Emitter: Up to 22 beams: 52 mA max., 26 to 42 beams: 68 mA max., 46 to 62 beams: 75 mA max.,

66 to 82 beams: 88 mA max., 86 to 102 beams: 101 mA max.
Receiver: Up to 22 beams: 45 mA max., 26 to 42 beams: 50 mA max., 46 to 62 beams: 56 mA max.,
Based on IEC 61496-2. Within 2.5 for both emitter and receiver when the detection distance is 3 m or over
Two PNP transistor outputs, load current 200 mA max., residual voltage 2 V max. (except for voltage drop due to cable extension), Leakage current
1 mA max., load inductance 2.2 H max.*3, Maximum capacity load 1 F*4
Auxiliary output 1
One PNP transistor outputs, load current 100 mA max., residual voltage 2 V max. (except for voltage drop due to cable extension), leak current 1 mA
max.
Safety output: On when receiving light

Auxiliary output:
Reverse output of safety output for a basic system
ON when muting/override for a muting system
Input voltage
ON voltage: Vs-3 V to Vs, OFF voltage: 0 V to 1/2 Vs or open*5

function
Mutual interference prevention algorithm prevents interference in up to 3 sets.
Series connection
Time division emission by series connection

Number of connections: up to 3 sets (between F3SJ-Bs only)Other models cannot be connected.
Total number of beams: up to 192 beams
Maximum cable length for 2 sets: no longer than 7 m
Test function

Safety-related functions
Interlock (basic system)

External device monitoring (basic system)
Muting (muting system)
Override (muting system)
Connection type
Connector method (M12, 8-pin)
Protection circuit
Ambient temperature
Operating: 10 to 55C (non-freezing), Storage: 25 to 70C
Ambient humidity
Operating: 35% to 85% (no condensation), Storage: 35% to 95% RH
Incandescent lamp: 3,000 lx max., Sunlight: 10,000 lx max.
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC 50/60 Hz, 1 min
IP65 (IEC 60529)
Shock resistance
Pollution degree
Pollution degree 3 (IEC 60664-1)
Power cable
Connection method: Prewired connector cable, cable length 0.3 m, connector type (M12, 8-pin), connector: IP67 rated (when mated)
Number of wires: 8 wires
Cable diameter: Dia. 6 mm
Allowable bending radius: R5 mm
Extension cable
30 m max.
Material
Case: Aluminum
Cap: ABS resin, PBT
Optical cover: PMMA resin (acrylic)
Cable: Oil resistant PVC
Weight (g) = (protective height) 2.7 + 500
Accessories
Test rod, Instruction manual, User's manual (CD-ROM)*6
IEC 61496-1, EN 61496-1 UL 61496-1, Type 4 ESPE (Electro-sensitive protective equipment)

IEC 61496-2, CLC/TS 61496-2, UL 61496-2, Type 4 AOPD (Active opto-electronic protective devices)
IEC 61508-1 to -3, EN 61508-1 to -3 SIL3
IEC 13849-1: 2006, EN ISO 13849-1: 2008 (PLe, Cat.4)
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
Do not use the support software and setting console for F3SJ-A. Operation cannot be guaranteed.
Use of the spatter protection cover causes a 10% maximum sensing distance attenuation.
The load inductance is the maximum value when the safety output frequently repeats ON and OFF. When you use the safety output at 4 Hz or less, the usable load inductance becomes larger.
These values must be taken into consideration when connecting elements including a capacitive load such as capacitor.
The Vs indicates a voltage value in your environment.
Mounting brackets are sold separately.
472
F3SJ-B
Safety sensors
Connections
Basic Wiring Diagram
Emitter
Receiver
Wiring when using manual reset mode, external device monitoring (F3SJ-B____P25) (PNP output)
F39-JD_A-L
F39-JD_A-D
Shield
0 V (Blue)
Safety output 2 (White)
Safety output 1 (Black)
Auxiliary output (Yellow)
24 V (Brown)
External device
monitoring input (Red)
24 V (Brown)
Reset input (Yellow)
Test input (Black)
Interlock select input (White)
Not used (Red)
0 V (Blue)
KM1
S1
S2
K1
KM1
KM2
KM2
24 VDC
Power
supply
0V
S1
S2
KM1, KM2
K1
: External test switch (connect to 0 V if a switch is not required)

: Interlock/lockout reset switch
: Safety relay with force-guided contact (G7SA) or magnetic contactor
: Load or PLC, etc. (for monitoring)
Safety sensors
Shield

(Pink)
Communication line ()
473
F3SJ-A
Safety sensors
Advanced type for complex safety solutions
The F3SJ-A-family is a type 4 safety light curtain with a optical resolution of 14 mm
and 30 mm. An operating range of up to 9 m and protective heights up to 2,495 mm
are provided with no dead zone.
Detection heigth = sensor height
Muting and blanking function available
Series connection up to 4 Sets
LED bar for easy alignment and diagnosis
Type 4 sensor complying with EN 61496-1 and up to
PLe according EN ISO 13849-1
Application
Beam gap
Operating range
Order code
Finger protection
Dia. 14 mm
9 mm
0.2 to 9 m
245 to 1,631
F3SJ-A____P14
Hand/arm protection
Dia. 30 mm
25 mm
0.2 to 9 m
245 to 1,620
F3SJ-A____P30
0.2 to 7 m
1,745 to 2,495
Safety light curtain model list

F3SJ-A14 series (9 mm gap), F3SJ-A14 TS series (9 mm gap)
F3SJ-A30 series (25 mm gap)
Number of beams
Order code
Number of beams
Order code
26
245
F3SJ-A0245P14
10
245
F3SJ-A0245P30
28
263
F3SJ-A0263P14
12
295
F3SJ-A0295P30
34
317
F3SJ-A0317P14
16
395
F3SJ-A0395P30
42
389
F3SJ-A0389P14
19
470
F3SJ-A0470P30
50
461
F3SJ-A0461P14
21
520
F3SJ-A0520P30
60
551
F3SJ-A0551P14
22
545
F3SJ-A0545P30
68
623
F3SJ-A0623P14
23
570
F3SJ-A0570P30
76
695
F3SJ-A0695P14
25
620
F3SJ-A0620P30
80
731
F3SJ-A0731P14
29
720
F3SJ-A0720P30
88
803
F3SJ-A0803P14
32
795
F3SJ-A0795P30
96
875
F3SJ-A0875P14
35
870
F3SJ-A0870P30
108
983
F3SJ-A0983P14
37
920
F3SJ-A0920P30
116
1,055
F3SJ-A1055P14
38
945
F3SJ-A0945P30
124
1,127
F3SJ-A1127P14
41
1,020
F3SJ-A1020P30
132
1,199
F3SJ-A1199P14
44
1,095
F3SJ-A1095P30
140
1,271
F3SJ-A1271P14
45
1,120
F3SJ-A1120P30
48
1,195
F3SJ-A1195P30
51
1,270
F3SJ-A1270P30
56
1,395
F3SJ-A1395P30
65
1,620
F3SJ-A1620P30
70
1,745
F3SJ-A1745P30
75
1,870
F3SJ-A1870P30
80
1,995
F3SJ-A1995P30
90
2,245
F3SJ-A2245P30
95
2,370
F3SJ-A2370P30
100
2,495
F3SJ-A2495P30
*1
*1
474
F3SJ-A
Safety sensors

Single-end connector cable (2 cables per set, for emitter and receiver)
For wiring with safety circuit such as single safety relay, safety relay unit, and safety controller.
Appearance
Cable length
Specifications
Order code
0.5 m
M12 connector (8-pin)
F39-JCR5A
3m
F39-JC3A
7m
F39-JC7A
10 m
F39-JC10A
15 m
F39-JC15A
20 m
F39-JC20A
Setting Tools
Appearance
Type
Remarks
Order code
SD Manager
Setting support software
for the F3SJ
Accessories:
SD Manager CD-ROM (1),
F39-CN1 branch connector (1),
Connector cap (1),
2-m Dedicated cable (1),
0.3-m Dedicated cable with plug (1),
Instruction manual
F39-GWUM
Specifications
Application
Appearance
Remarks
Order code
2 for an emitter,
2 for a receiver,
total of 4 per set
F39-LJ1
Use these small-sized brackets when perform- 2 for an emitter,

ing side mounting with standard mounting
2 for a receiver,
brackets, so that they do not protrude from the total of 4 per set
detection surface.
F39-LJ2
Standard mounting bracket (provided with the F3SJ)

(for top/bottom)
Flat side mounting bracket
Free-location mounting
Use these brackets for mounting on any place Two brackets
bracket
without using standard bracket.
per set
(also used as standard intermediate bracket)
F39-LJ3
F3SN Intermediate bracket

Replacement spacers
When replacing the F3SN with the F3SJ, the

1 set with
mounting hole pitches in the Intermediate
2 pieces
Brackets are not the same. This Spacer is placed
between the mounting holes to mount the
F3SJ.
F39-LJ3-SN
Top/bottom bracket B
(mounting hole pitch 19
mm)
Mounting bracket used when replacing exist- 2 for an emitter,

ing area sensors (other than F3SN or F3WN)
2 for a receiver,
with the F3SJ.
total of 4 per set
For front mounting.
Suitable for mounting hole pitch of 18 to 20
mm.
F39-LJ4
Bracket for replacing

short-length F3SN
Mounting bracket used when an F3SN with

2 for an emitter,
protective height of 300 mm or less is replaced 2 for a receiver,
by an F3SJ.
total of 4 per set
F39-LJ5
Space-saving mounting
bracket
Use these brackets to mount facing inward.

Length is 12 mm shorter than the standard
F39-LJ1 bracket.
F39-LJ8
Top/bottom bracket C
(mounting hole pitch
13 mm)
Mounting bracket used when replacing exist- 2 for an emitter,

ing area sensors having a mounting pitch of 2 for a receiver,
13 mm with the F3SJ.
total of 4 per set
2 for an emitter,
2 for a receiver,
total of 4 per set
Safety sensors
Sensor Mounting Brackets (Sold separately)
F39-LJ11
475
F3SJ-A
Safety sensors
Laser pointer
Appearance
Output
Order code
F39-PTJ
Specifications
F3SJ-A____P14/P30
Model
F3SJ-A____P14
Sensor type
Version
Ver. 2
Setting tool connection
Connectable
Safety category
Beam gap (P)
9 mm
25 mm
Number of beams (n)
26 to 180
10 to 100
245 to 1,631 mm
245 to 2,495 mm
Lens diameter
Diameter 5 mm
Operating range
0.2 to 9 m (protective height 1,640 mm max.), 0.2 to 7 m (protective height 1,655 mm min.)
(Depending on the setting tool, the detection distance can be shortened to 0.5 m.)
Response time
(under stable light incident
condition)
ON to OFF
1 set, 0245 to 983: 11 ms to 17.5 ms max.

1,055 or higher: 20 ms to 25 ms max.
1 set: 10 ms to 17.5 ms max.
OFF to ON
1 set, 0245 to 983: 44 ms to 70 ms max.

1,055 or higher: 80 ms to 100 ms max.
1 set: 40 ms to 70 ms max.
2 s max. (2.2 s max. for series connection)

Current consumption
(no load)
F3SJ-A____P30
24 VDC20% (ripple p-p10% max.)

Emitter
To 50 beams: 76 mA max., 51 to 100 beams: 106 mA max., 101 to 150 beams: 130 mA max.,
Receiver
To 50 beams: 68 mA max., 51 to 100 beams: 90 mA max., 101 to 150 beams: 111 mA max.,
Based on IEC 61496-2.Within2.5 for both emitter and receiver when the detection distance is 3 m or over
Two PNP transistor outputs, load current 300 mA max., residual voltage 2 V max. (except for voltage drop due to cable extension),
allowable capacity load 2.2 F, leak current 1 mA max.
(This can be different from traditional logic (ON/OFF) because safety circuit is used.)
Auxiliary output 1
(Non-safety output)
One PNP transistor output, load current 300 mA max., residual voltage 2 V max. (except for voltage drop due to cable extension),
leak current 1 mA max.
Auxiliary output 2
(Non-safety output. Function for Basic System.)
One PNP transistor output, load current 50 mA max., residual voltage 2 V max. (except for voltage drop due to cable extension),
leak current 1 mA max.
External indicator output

(Non-safety output)
Available indicators
Incandescent lamp: 24 VDC, 3 to 7 W
LED lamp: Load current 10 mA to 300 mA max., leak current 1 mA max.
(To use an external indicator, an F39-JJ3N universal indicator cable or an F39-A01P-PAC dedicated external indicator kit is required.)
476
Receiver
Safety output 1, 2: ON when receiving light

Auxiliary output 1: Inverse of safety output signals (Operation mode can be changed with the setting tool.)
External indicator output 1: Inverse of safety output signals for a basic system (Operation mode can be changed with the setting tool.),
ON when muting/override for a muting system (Operation mode can be changed with the setting tool.)
Emitter
Auxiliary output 2: Turns ON when the point of 30,000 operating hours is reached (Operation mode can be changed with the setting
tool.)
External indicator output 2: ON when lock-out for a basic system (Operation mode can be changed with the setting tool.)
ON when muting/override for a muting system (Operation mode can be changed with the setting tool.)
F3SJ-A
Safety sensors
Model
F3SJ-A____P14
Input voltage
Test input, interlock selection input, reset input, and muting input are all
ON voltage: 9 to 24 V (Vs) (sink current: 3 mA max.), OFF voltage: 0 to 1.5 V, or open
External device monitoring input
ON voltage: 9 to 24 V (Vs) (sink current: 5 mA max.), OFF voltage: 0 to 1.5 V, or open
Emitter
Light intensity level indicators (green LED 2, orange LED 3): ON based on the light intensity
Error mode indicators (red LED 3): Blink to indicate error details
Power indicator (green LED 1): ON while power is on
Interlock indicator (yellow LED 1): ON while under interlock, blinks at lockout.
External device monitoring indicator (muting input 1 indicator), Blanking/test indicator (muting input 2 indicator) (green LED 2):
ON/flash according to function
Receiver
Light intensity level indicators (green LED 2, orange LED 3): ON based on the light intensity
Error mode indicators (red LED 3): Blink to indicate error details
OFF output indicator (red LED 1): ON when safety output is OFF, blinks at lockout.
ON output indicator (green LED 1): ON while safety output is ON
Muting error indicator, Blanking/test indicator (green LED 2): ON/flash according to function
Mutual interference prevention function
Interference light prevention algorithm, sensing distance change function
Series connection
Time division emission by series connection

Number of connections: up to 4 sets (F3SJ-A only) F3SJ-E, F3SJ-B and F3SJ-TS cannot be connected.
Total number of beams: up to 400 beams
Maximum cable length for 2 sets: no longer than 15 m
Test function

Start interlock, restart interlock (Must be set with a setting tool when the muting function is used.)
External device monitor
Muting (Lamp burnout detection, override function included. F39-CN6 key cap for muting is required.)
Fixed blanking (must be set by a setting tool)
Floating blanking (must be set by a setting tool)
Connection method
Connector method (M12, 8-pin)
Protection circuit
Ambient temperature
Operating: 10 to 55C (no icing), Storage: 30 to 70C
Ambient humidity
Operating: 35% to 85% (no condensation), Storage: 35% to 95%
Incandescent lamp: receiving-surface light intensity of 3,000 lx max., Sunlight: receiving-surface light intensity of 10,000 lx max.
Withstand voltage
1,000 VAC 50/60 Hz, 1 min
IP65 (IEC 60529)
Shock resistance
Material
Casing (including metal parts on both ends): Aluminum, zinc die-cast

Cap: ABS resin, Optical cover: PMMA resin (acrylic), Cable: Oil resistant PVC
Weight (packaged)
Calculate using the following expressions:

(1) For F3SJ-A____14, weight (g) = (protective height) x 1.7 +
(2) F3SJ-A____30, weight (g) = (protective height) x 1.5 +
The values for are as follows:
Protected height 245 to 596 mm: = 1,100 protected height 1,660 to 2,180 mm: = 2,400
Protected height 600 to 1,130 mm: = 1,500 protected height 2,195 to 2,500 mm: = 2,600
Protected height 1,136 to 1,658 mm: = 2,000
Accessories
Test rod (*1), instruction manual, standard mounting bracket (F39-LJ1 bracket for top/bottom mounting), mounting brackets
(intermediate) (*2), error mode label, User's Manual (CD-ROM)
*1. The F3SJ-A@@@@55 is not included.
*2. Number of intermediate brackets depends on protective height of F3SJ.
For protective height from 600 to 1,130 mm: 1 set for each of the emitter and receiver is included
For protective height from 1,136 to 1,658 mm: 2 sets for each of the emitter and receiver are included
IEC 61496-1, EN 61496-1 UL 61496-1, Type 4 ESPE (Electro-Sensitive Protective Equipment)

IEC 61496-2, CLC/TS 61496-2, UL 61496-2, Type 4 AOPD (Active Opto-electronic Protective Devices)
IEC 61508-1 to -3, EN 61508-1 to -3 SIL3
IEC 13849-1: 2006, EN ISO 13849-1: 2008 (PLe, Cat.4)
Safety sensors
Indicator
F3SJ-A____P30
477
F3SJ-A
Safety sensors
Response Time
Model
Protected height (mm)
Number of beams
F3SJ-A____14 Series
245 to 263
26 to 28
11
44
281 to 389
30 to 42
12
48
F3SJ-A____30 Series
Response time ms (ON to OFF) Response time ms (OFF to ON)
407 to 497
44 to 54
13
52
515 to 605
56 to 66
14
56
60
623 to 731
68 to 80
15
767 to 983
84 to 108
17.5
70
1,055 to 1,271
116 to 140
20
80
1,343 to 1,559
148 to 172
22.5
90
1,631
180
25
100
245 to 395
10 to 16
10
40
420 to 720
17 to 29
11
44
48
745 to 1,045
30 to 42
12
1,070 to 1,295
43 to 52
13
52
1,395 to 1,620
56 to 65
14
56
1,745 to 1,995
70 to 80
15
60
2,120 to 2,495
85 to 100
17.5
70
Note: Use the following expressions for series connection.

For 2-set series connection:
Response time (ON to OFF): Response time of the 1st unit + Response time of the 2nd unit 1 (ms), Response time (OFF to ON): Response time calculated by the above 4 (ms)
Response time (ON to OFF):
Response time of the 1st unit + Response time of the 2nd unit + Response time of 3rd unit 5 (ms), Response time (OFF to ON): Response time calculated by the above 5 (ms)
For models with the -TS suffix, multiply the response time obtained by the above 5 (ms), or use 200 ms, whichever is less.)
Response time (ON to OFF): Response time of the 1st unit + Response time of the 2nd unit + Response time of the 3rd unit + Response time of the 4th unit 8 (ms)
Response time (OFF to ON): Response time calculated by the above 5 (ms)
Cable extension length

Total cable extension length must be no greater than the lengths described below.
When the F3SJ and an external power supply are directly connected, or when the F3SJ is connected to a G9SA-300-SC.
Condition
1 set
2 sets
3 sets
4 sets
Using incandescent lamp for auxiliary output and external

indicator output
45 m
40 m
30 m
20 m
Not using incandescent lamp
100 m
60 m
45 m
30 m
4 sets
When connected to the F3SP-B1P

Condition
1 set
2 sets
3 sets
Using incandescent lamp for external indicator output 2
40 m
30 m
25 m
20 m
Using incandescent lamp for external indicator output 1
60 m
45 m
30 m
20 m
100 m
60 m
45 m
30 m
Using incandescent lamp for auxiliary output 1

Not using incandescent lamp
Note: Keep the cable length within the rated length. Failure to do so is dangerous as it may prevent safety functions from operating normally.
478
F3SJ-A
Safety sensors
Connections
Basic Wiring Diagram
PNP Output
Wiring when using manual reset mode, external device monitoring.

: External test switch (connect to 0 V if a switch is not required)
: Interlock/lockout reset switch
: Safety relay with force-guided contact (G7SA) or magnetic
contactor
K1, K2
: Load or PLC, etc. (for monitoring)
*1. Use a switch for small loads (input specifications: 24 V, 1.8 mA).
*2. F3SJ operates even when K1 and K2 are not connected.
Emitter
Receiver
S1
S2
KM1, KM2
*2
S1
*1
Shield
0 V (Blue)
Safety output 2
(White)
Safety output 1
(Green)
Auxiliary output 1
(Yellow)
+24 V (Brown)
External device
monitoring input (Red)
+24 V (Brown)
Reset input (Yellow)
S2
*1
(Pink)
Communication
line ()
KM1
K1
KM2
KM1
KM2
*2
+24 VDC
Power
supply
0V
Safety sensors
K2
Test input (Green)
Interlock select input (White)
Auxiliary output 2 (Red)
0 V (Blue)
Shield
479
MS4800/2800
Safety sensors
Category 4 / 2 safety light curtain
The MS4800 and MS2800 family of safety light curtain provides simplicity in
mounting, configuring, daily use and maintenance by providing a:
Sensing distance up to 20m for 30mm resolution and 7 m for 14mm resolution
LED bar for easy alignment and diagnosis
DIP-switch setup for blanking, muting and optical coding
Category 4 / 2 sensor complying with EN 61496-1
All-in-one M12 connection and mounting concept with robust housing
Multicascadable up to 3 sets
MS2800 Safety Category 2
Connection features
Standard
Master
Slave
Standard
Standalone operation
Master
Series connection, muting
Slave
Series connection only
MS2800SFunction Set
Basic
MS2800FSAdvanced
Basic
MS2800FAdvanced
Basic
Interlock, restart, EDM,
2 optical channels,
integrated alignment tool
Advanced
Muting, blanking (fixed/floating)
MS2800S-EBResolution
14 mm finger protection
14 mm
MS2800S-EA-
30 mm
14 mm
30 mm
MS2800FS-EB14 mm
MS2800FS-EA-
30 mm
14 mm
30 mm
MS2800F-E14 mm
30 mm
30 mm hand protection
MS2800S-EB- MS2800S-EB- MS2800S-EA- MS2800S-EA- MS2800FS-EB- MS2800FS-EB- MS2800FS-EA- MS2800FS-EA- MS2800F-E014030014030014030014030014-
MS2800F-E030-
Length
280 1800
280 2120
280 2120
280 1800
280 2120
280 1800
280 2120
280 1800
280 2120
240 1280
240 mm 2120 mm in
40 mm increments
MS4800 Safety Category 4

Connection features
Standard
Master
Slave
Standard
Master
Series connection, muting
Slave
Series connection only
MS4800SFunction Set
Basic
MS4800FSAdvanced
Basic
MS4800FAdvanced
Basic
Interlock, restart, EDM,
2 optical channels,
integrated alignment tool
Advanced
Muting, blanking (fixed/floating)
MS4800S-EBResolution
14 mm finger protection
30 mm hand protection
Length
14mm
30mm
MS4800S-EA14mm
30mm
MS4800FS-EB14mm
30mm
280 ... 1800
280 ... 2120
280 ... 1800
280 ... 2120
280 ... 1800
280 ... 2120
40 mm increments
480
30mm
MS4800F-E14mm
MS4800S-EB- MS4800S-EB- MS4800S-EA- MS4800S-EA- MS4800FS-EB- MS4800FS-EB- MS4800FS-EA- MS4800FS-EA- MS4800F-E014030014030014030014030014-
240 mm 2120 mm in
Examples
MS4800FS-EA14mm
MS2800S-EB-030-1000
Basic function set
30 mm resolution
1000 mm protective height
MS4800FS-EA-014-1200
Series connection model
Advanced function set
14 mm resolution
MS4800F-E-014-600
Slave operation
14 mm resolution
280 ... 1800
280 ... 2120
240 ... 1280
30mm
MS4800F-E030280 ... 2120
MS4800/2800
Safety sensors
Specifications
Model
MS4800_ -E_ -_ _ _ -_ _ _ _
MS2800_ -E_ -_ _ _ -_ _ _ _
Sensor type
Type 4
Type2
Normal operating range

Reduced range (DIP-switch 6)
14 mm resolution: 0.3 - 7 m, 30 mm resolution: 0.3 - 20 m

14 mm resolution: 0.3 - 3 m, 30 mm resolution: 0.3 - 8 m
Beam pitch
14 mm resolution: 10 mm; 30 mm resolution: 20 mm
Protective height
14 mm resolution: 280 - 1800 mm; 30 mm resolution: 240 - 2120 mm
14 mm resolution: 14 mm non-transparent; 30 mm resolution: 30 mm non-transparent
Within 2,5
Within 5,0
for the emitter and receiver at a detection distance of at least 3m according to IEC61496-2
Light source
Infrared LED's (880 nm), Power dissipation: 180 mW, Class 1 per EN60825-1
Supply voltage (Vs)
24 VDC 20%, according EN/IEC60204, able to cover a drop of voltage of at least 20 msec
OSSD
Two safety related PNP transistor output, load current 625 mA max.*1, short circuit protection
Auxiliary output (non safety output)
One PNP output sourcing 100mA @ 24VDC. This output follows the OSSD's
OSSD output: Light-ON
Test functions
Self-test (after power ON and during operation)
All versions: Auto reset/interlock with manual reset, EDM (external device monitoring) advanced versions only: fixed blanking,
floating blanking, muting
Response time
ON to OFF: 14 to 59 ms
Incandescent lamp: 3000 lx max. (light intensity on the receiver surface)
Ambient temperature
Operating: -10C to +55C, storage: -25C to +70C (without icing or condensation)
IP65 (IEC60529)
Connection method
Flexible cable with M 12 connection: receiver: 8 pins, transmitter: 5 pins
Materials
Case: Polyurethane powder painted aluminum, cap: polycarbonate, front window: acrylic, mounting brackets: cold rolled steel
Size (cross section)
39 x 50 mm
Receiver indicator lights
Individual Beam Indicator (IBI), interlock, blanking activ, RUN and STOP state, error codes
Transmitter indicator lights
ON, OFF, failure
AOPD (ESPE)
Type4 acc. IEC 61496-1
Type2 acc. IEC 61496-1
Suitable for safety control systems
Cat. 4 acc. EN954-1, PLe acc. EN ISO 13849-1
Cat. 2 acc. EN954-1, PLc acc. EN ISO 13849-1
Safety Integrity Level
SIL 3 according IEC 61508
PFH
5,9 x 10-8
*1
Up to 12 m we recommend to use the F39-JMR cables, to use longer cables and a current of 625 mA the F39-JMR cables are necessary.
Connection example
Using a manual restart and an external device monitoring
Power supply
Safety sensors
Fuse
+24VDC
GND
Protective earth
K2
*1
MTS requires a NC contact. If
MTS is not used, please connect
MTS and MTS Ret. Directly.
K1
K2
*1
*2
The K1 and K2 coils must be
suppressed. Please refer to the
documentation of the relays or
contactors for further reference.
Earth
GND
+24V
DC
MTS
Ret.
MS4800/MS2800
Transmitter
MTS
Earth
GND
+24V
DC
*2
K1
*2
EDM
Start
Aux.
OSSD1
OSSD2
MS4800/MS2800
Receiver
K1 and K2 forcibly guided relays expected
481
F3S-TGR-CL
Safety sensors
Multi-beam, finger- and hand protection safety sensor
The F3S-TGR-CL multi-beam, finger- and hand protection safety sensors satisfying
with integrated safety control functions selectable via built-in dip-switches.
Type 2 or type 4 acc. EN61496-1
PL c or PL e acc. ISO13849
Family concept in wiring and mounting
All models with dip-switch setup for external device monitoring, interlock
function, range setting (short and long range) and optical or wired coding
Advanced models with pre-reset function, T-, L-or X- muting function and muting
lamp integrated
Multi-beam safety sensors
F3S-TGR-CL2_-K_ (Type 2)
System
Active/passive
Active/active
Active/active,
long distance
Sensing distance
Order code
Basic feature set*1
Advanced feature set*2
0.5 m to 12 m
500
F3S-TGR-CL2B-K2C-500
F3S-TGR-CL2A-K2C-500
0.5 m to 8 m
400
0.5 m to 7 m
300
400
500
F3S-TGR-CL2B-K2-500
F3S-TGR-CL2A-K2-500
400
F3S-TGR-CL2B-K3-800
F3S-TGR-CL2A-K3-800
300
F3S-TGR-CL2B-K4-900
F3S-TGR-CL2A-K4-900
400
F3S-TGR-CL2B-K4-1200
F3S-TGR-CL2A-K4-1200
500
F3S-TGR-CL2B-K2-500-LD
F3S-TGR-CL2A-K2-500-LD
400
300
400
Order code
0.5 m to 40 m
25 m to 50 m
F3S-TGR-CL4_-K_ (Type 4)
System
Sensing distance
Basic feature set*1
Advanced feature set*2
Active/passive
0.5 m to 12 m
500
0.5 m to 8 m
400
0.5 m to 7 m
300
400
500
F3S-TGR-CL4B-K2-500
F3S-TGR-CL4A-K2-500
400
F3S-TGR-CL4B-K3-800
F3S-TGR-CL4A-K3-800
300
F3S-TGR-CL4B-K4-900
F3S-TGR-CL4A-K4-900
400
F3S-TGR-CL4B-K4-1200
F3S-TGR-CL4A-K4-1200
500
400
300
400
Active/active
Active/active,
long distance
*1
*2
0.5 m to 40 m
25 m to 50 m
Basic feature set: Manual/automatic restart, coding

Advanced feature set: Basic + Muting + integrated Muting lamp + Pre-reset
482
F3S-TGR-CL
Safety sensors
Safety sensors
F3S-TGR-CL2_ (Type 2)
Feature set
Master/Slave
Sensing distance
Detection
capability
Length
Order code
Basic*1
Standalone
0.2 m to 6 m
14 mm
150 mm to 2,400 mm*3
F3S-TGR-CL2B-014-_
0.2 m to 14 m
35 mm
F3S-TGR-CL2B-035-_
0.2 m to 6 m
14 mm
F3S-TGR-CL2A-014-_
0.2 m to 14 m
35 mm
0.2 m to 6 m
14 mm
0.2 m to 14 m
35 mm
F3S-TGR-CL2A-035-_M
0.2 m to 6 m
14 mm
F3S-TGR-CL2A-014-_S
0.2 m to 14 m
35 mm
Advanced*2
Standalone
Master
Slave
F3S-TGR-CL2A-035-_
150 mm to 2,250 mm*3
F3S-TGR-CL2A-014-_M
F3S-TGR-CL2A-035-_S
70 mm
300 mm to 2,100 mm
F3S-TGR-CL2A-070-_S
F3S-TGR-CL4_ (Type 4)
Feature set
Master/Slave
Sensing distance
Detection
capability
Length
Order code
Basic*1
Standalone
0.2 m to 6 m
14 mm
150 mm to 2,400 mm*3
F3S-TGR-CL4B-014-_
0.2 m to 14 m
35 mm
F3S-TGR-CL4B-035-_
0.2 m to 6 m
14 mm
F3S-TGR-CL4A-014-_
0.2 m to 14 m
35 mm
0.2 m to 6 m
14 mm
0.2 m to 14 m
35 mm
F3S-TGR-CL4A-035-_M
0.2 m to 6 m
14 mm
F3S-TGR-CL4A-014-_S
0.2 m to 14 m
35 mm
Advanced*2
Standalone
Master*4
Slave*4
F3S-TGR-CL4A-035-_
150 mm to 2,250 mm*3
F3S-TGR-CL4A-035-_S
70 mm
*1
*2
*3
*4
F3S-TGR-CL4A-014-_M
300 mm to 2,100 mm
F3S-TGR-CL4A-070-_S
Basic feature set:Manual/automatic restart, coding

Advanced feature set:Basic + Muting + integrated Muting lamp + Pre-reset
Available length (in mm):150, 300, 450, 600, 750, 900, 1,050, 1,200, 1,350, 1,500, 1,650, 1,800, 1,950, 2,100, 2,250, (2,400 mm, only standalone versions)
Master/slave system:A master/slave system cannot exceed the total length of 2,400 mm
F3S-TGR-CL-_-_M/S Master-Slave Series

A Master-Slave cascade system is made of one master segment and one slave
segment.
The length of the total protective field can vary from minimum 300 mm till
maximum 2,400 mm.
The interconnect cable length limitation between master and slave segment is in
total max. 0,9 m.
Possible combinations of master and slave are in this table:
1,350
1,500
1,650
1,800
1,950
2,150
2,250
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
450
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
600
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
750
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
900
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
1,050
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
1,200
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
1,350
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
1,500
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
1,650
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
1,800
OK
OK
OK
OK
1,950
OK
OK
OK
2,100
OK
OK
2,250
OK
2,100
1,200
OK
OK
1,800
1,050
OK
OK
1,500
900
OK
OK
1,200
750
OK
OK
900
600
OK
300
600
450
150
300
300
70 mm resolution
150
Master models
(14 mm or 35 mm resolution)
14 mm or 35 mm resolution
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
483
Safety sensors
Slave models
F3S-TGR-CL
Safety sensors
Accessories
Receiver cables (M12-8pin, shielded, flying leads)
Shape
Description
Remark
Order code
Sensor connector with open cable end M12-8pin, outer Receiver cable, 2 m length
shielding layer
Receiver cable, 5 m length
Y92E-M12PURSH8S2M-L
Y92E-M12PURSH8S5M-L
Remark
Order code
Transmitter cables (M12-4pin, shielded, flying leads)

Shape
Description
Sensor connector with open cable end M12-4pin, outer Transmitter cable, 2 m length
shielding layer
Transmitter cable, 5 m length
Y92E-M12PURSH4S2M-L
Y92E-M12PURSH4S5M-L
Description
Remark
Order code
Mounting bracket
Mounting bracket 1,
SLC mounting screws 1 set
F39-TGR-ST-SB*1
Adjustable bracket
Adjustable bracket 1,
Bracket mounting screws 1 set
F39-TGR-ST-ADJ
Remark
Order code
Mounting brackets
Shape
*1
Brackets amount included in shipment is shown in table of Dimensions
Master-Slave accessories
Shape
Description
Male-male extension connector M12-8pin, outer shield- Connection cable, 0.3 m length
ing layer
Connection cable, 0.9 m length
Y92E-M12MSM12MSPURSH80.3M-L
Alignment kit end cap
To support alignment of a Master-Slave system
F39-TGR-CL-MSA
(included in slave system)
Description
Remark
Order code
Laser alignment kit
Scanning range: 60 m
Batteries: 2 1.5 V Micro/AAA
Laser Class 2 (IEC 60825)
F39-TGR-CL-LLK
Y92E-M12MSM12MSPURSH80.9M-L
(included in slave system)
Laser alignment kit

Shape
Mounting systems and mirrors

Adjustable stands
Order code
Adjustable stand, 1,200 mm high
Safety sensors, Mirror systems
F39-TGR-AS-B1200
Adjustable stand, 1,600 mm high
Safety sensors, Mirror systems, Muting applications
F39-TGR-AS-B1600
Mirror system for multi-beam safety sensors (F3S-TGR-CL_-K_)

Order code
Mirror mounting plate
Adjustable mirror kit
2-, 3- and 4-beam systems 900 mm
F39-TGR-AS-MM1
4-beam system 1,200 mm
F39-TGR-AS-MM2
Use 1 pcs F39-TGR-AS-AM1 for each beam of the safety sensor F39-TGR-AS-AM1
Muting accessories
Order code
For L-muting
F39-TGR-AS-MA-MBL
For X- and T-muting
F39-TGR-AS-MA-MBXT
Mounting bracket for muting sensors
For OMRON E3Z and E3G-family
F39-TGR-AS-MA-MSM
Mounting bracket for reflectors
For OMRON E39-R1S
F39-TGR-AS-MA-MRM
Mounting system for muting sensors
Cable cover
Order code
Cable cover
484
For 1,200 mm stand
F39-TGR-AS-MA-CC12
For 1,600 mm stand
F39-TGR-AS-MA-CC16
F3S-TGR-CL
Safety sensors
Specifications
Multi-beam safety sensors
Item
F3S-TGR-CL2_-0__
F3S-TGR-CL4_-0__
Sensor type
Type 2
Type 4
Protective height
500 mm, 800 mm, 900 mm or 1,200 mm
Operating range
F3S-TGR-CL__-K_
F3S-TGR-CL__-K_-___-LD
F3S-TGR-CL__-K2C-500
F3S-TGR-CL__-K3C-800
F3S-TGR-CL__-K4C-____
0.5 to 20 m or 20 to 40 m (Dip switch option)

25 to 50 m
0.5 to 12 m
0.5 to 8 m
0.5 to 7 m
Beam pitch
F3S-TGR-CL__-K2_-500:
F3S-TGR-CL__-K3_-800:
F3S-TGR-CL__-K4_-900:
F3S-TGR-CL__-K4_-1200:
2 beams, 500 mm
3 beams, 400 mm
4 beams, 300 mm
4 beams, 400 mm
Within 5
Within 2.5
for the emitter and receiver at a detection distance of at least 3 m according to IEC 61496-2
Light source
Infrared LED (880 nm), power dissipation <3 mW, Class 1 per EN 60825-1
Supply voltage
24 VDC20%, according EN 60204-1 able to cover a drop of voltage of at least 20 ms
OSSD
2 PNP transistor outputs, load current 2 250 mA max
Test functions
Self test (after power ON and during operation)
All models with dip-switch setup for external device monitoring, interlock function, range setting (short and long range) and optical or
wired sync.
Advanced models with selectable pre-reset function, T-, L-or X- muting function (timeout or infinite muting dip switch option) and muting
lamp integrated (only for the non master-slave systems)
Response time
ON to OFF: Maximum: 13 ms
Ambient temperature
Operating: 10 to 55C, Storage: 25 to 70C (no icing, no condensation)
Ambient humidity
95% not condensing
IP 65 (IEC 60529)
Materials
Housing:
Front Window:
Red end cap:
Transparent end cap:
Sealing Gasket:
Mounting Bracket:
PLc (ISO 13849-1)
PLe (ISO 13849-1)
Category
Categorie 2
Categorie 4
PFHd
Proof test interval
2.5 10-9
every 20 years
Painted aluminum, Yellow, RAL 1018

Acrylic Lexan
PA6 (Standalone models),
PC (Advanced standalone models),
EPDM
Cold rolled Steel
Item
F3S-TGR-CL2_-0__
F3S-TGR-CL4_-0__
Sensor type
Type 2
Type 4
Protective height
150 mm to 2,400 mm
Operating range
(short setting or long setting)
F3S-TGR-CL__-014:
F3S-TGR-CL__-035:
F3S-TGR-CL__-070:
0.2 m to 3 m or 3 m to 6 m (Dip switch option)

0.2 m to 7 m or 7 m to 14 m (Dip switch option)
0,2 m to 7 m or 7 m to 14 m (Dip switch option)
F3S-TGR-CL__-014:
F3S-TGR-CL__-035:
F3S-TGR-CL__-070:

Within 5
Safety sensors
Finger- and hand safety protection sensors
Within 2.5
for the emitter and receiver at a detection distance of at least 3 m according to IEC 61496-2
Light source
Infrared LED (880 nm), power dissipation <3 mW, Class 1 per EN 60825-1
Supply voltage
24 VDC20%, according EN 60204-1 able to cover a drop of voltage of at least 20 ms
OSSD
2 PNP transistor outputs, load current 2 250 mA max
Series connection
Number of connections: One master and one slave safety light curtain
Total number of beams 336
Maximum interconnect cable length: 900 mm
Test functions
Self test (after power ON and during operation)
All models with dip-switch setup for external device monitoring, interlock function, range setting (short and long range) and optical or
wired sync.
Advanced models with selectable pre-reset function, T-, L-or X- muting function (timeout muting), blanking, single / double brake function
and muting lamp integrated (only for the non master-slave systems)
Response time
ON to OFF: 14 ms to 103 ms
Ambient temperature
Operating: 10 to 55C, Storage: 25 to 70C (no icing, no condensation)
Ambient humidity
95% not condensing
IP 65 (IEC 60529)
Materials
Housing:
Front Window:
Red end cap:
Transparent end cap:
Sealing Gasket:
Mounting Bracket:
Painted aluminum, Yellow, RAL 1018

Acrylic Lexan
PA6 (Standalone models),
PC (Advanced standalone models),
Die cast aluminum (Master-, Slave models)
EPDM
Cold rolled Steel
PLc (ISO 13849-1)
PLe (ISO 13849-1)
Category
Categorie 2
Categorie 4
PFHd
Proof test interval
2,5 10-9
every 20 years
485
F3S-TGR-CL
Safety sensors
F3S-TGR-CL and GSB-301-D in manual reset

TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER
Shield
24 VDC (Brown)
0 VDC
Test (White)
Shield
24 VDC (Brown)
0 VDC (Blue)
Test/restart (White)
Mut. A (Green)
Mut. B (Yellow)
Mut. Lamp (Red)
OSSD1 (Pink)
OSSD2 (Gray)
F3S-TGR-CL
Feedback loop
S2
KM2
KM1
KM1
S1
KM2
A1
T11
T12
T21
T22
T31
K1
24 VDC
+
G9SB-301-D
K2
T32
13
33
41
K1
CONTROL
CIRCUIT
M
K2
A2
14
KM1
486
23
24
34
KM2
42
Note: This circuit achieves up to PLe according to

EN ISO 13849-1 with F3S-TGR-CL4 and up to PLc
according to EN ISO 13849-1 with F3S-TGR-CL2.
F39-TGR-MCL
Safety sensors
Muting actuators
The F39-TGR-MCL-_ muting actuators are plug-and-play accessories for the
F3S-TGR-CL Safety Sensors. Easy wiring of the entire muting system is provided by
connection boxes managing all connections needed.
Active/active and active/passive systems supported
T- and L- shape muting by using same parts
Selectable muting sensor sequence
Pre-installed mounting brackets
Pre-wired connection cables
Supporting Type 2 and Type 4 applications
Muting actuators (mounting brackets are included)
Order code
Transmitter + Receiver set
active/active
F39-TGR-MCL
Receiver only
active/active
F39-TGR-MCL-D
Transmitter only
active/active
F39-TGR-MCL-L
Transceiver + Reflector set
active/passive
F39-TGR-MCL-R
Transceiver only
active/passive
F39-TGR-MCL-R-A
Reflector only
active/passive
F39-TGR-MCL-R-P
Connection boxes
Order code
Connection box for Receivers and Transceivers
F39-TGR-MCL-CMD
Connection box for Transmitters
F39-TGR-MCL-CML
Mounting brackets
Order code
F39-TGR-MCL-ST
Mounting bracket for one muting actuator
Power supply
24 VDC20%
Consumption
5 W max (F39-TGR-MCL-_ only)
Ambient temperature
Safety sensors
Specifications
During operation; -10 to + 55C (with no dew condensation)
Cable connector
Length
30 cm pre-wired
RX
M12 5-pin female
TX
M12 5-pin female
IP65
Distance between muting beams
250mm
F39-TGR-MCL
Optical data
Through-beam system
Operating distance
0 7 m; max. 0 8,4 m
Light source
Red emitting LEDs, Wavelength 630 nm
Optical data
Polarized retro-reflective system
Operating distance
0 4 m; max. 0 4,8 m
Light source
Red emitting LEDs, Wavelength 660 nm
F39-TGR-MCL-R
Configuration examples
L-muting, active/active
1) Safety sensor (e.g. F3S-TGR-CL4A-K2-500)
2) Muting actuators F39-TGR-MCL
3) Connector box F39-TGR-MCL-CML
4) Connector box F39-TGR-MCL-CMD
L-muting, active/passive
1) Safety Sensor (e.g. F3S-TGR-CL4A-K2C-500)
2) Muting actuators F39-TGR-MCL-R
3) Connection box F39-TGR-MCL-CMD
3
2
487
E3FS
Safety sensors
Single-beam safety sensor in compact housing
The slender M18-sized E3FS is a type 2 safety single beam with an operating range of
up to 10 m. Plastic and metal housing, cable and M12-connector offer flexibility in
application together with a control unit such as F3SP-U3P or F3SP-U5P.
Sensing distance up to 10 m
LEDs for easy alignment and diagnosis
Cable and M12 plug categories
Plastic and metal housing
Type 2 sensor complying with EN 61496-1
Safety single beam sensors (Type 2)
Controller for safety single beam sensors
Case material
Operation distance
Order code
Plastic
0 to 10 m
Cable type
E3FS-10B4
Plug type
E3FS-10B4-P1
Cable type
E3FS-10B4-M
Plug type
E3FS-10B4-M1-M
Nickel brass
Sensors
Output contacts
Width
Order code
1 to 2
Safety single beam sensors
2 NO 2.5 A
22.5 mm
F3SP-U3P-TGR
45 mm
F3SP-U5P-TGR
1 to 4
Safety single beam sensors
Specifications
Sensors
Sensing method
Through-beam
Controller
F3SP-U3P-TGR, F3SP-U5P-TGR
Supply voltage (Vs)
24 VDC 10% (ripple p-p 10% max.)
5 (at 3 m)
Current consumption
Emitter:50 mA max.
Receiver:25 mA max.
Sensing distance
10 m
Standard sensing object
Opaque object: 11 mm min. in diameter
Response time
2.0 ms (E3FS only)
Control output
PNP transistor output, load current: 100 mA max.
Test input (emitter)
21.5 to 24 VDC: Emitter OFF (source current: 3 mA max.)

Open or 0 to 2.5 V: Emitter ON (leakage current: 0.1 mA max.)
Incandescent lamp: 3.000 lx max. (light intensity on the receiver surface)

Sunlight: 10,000 lx max. (light intensity on the receiver surface)
Ambient temperature
Operating: -20C +55C, storage: -30C +70C (with no icing or condensation)
IP67 (IEC 60529)
Light source
Infrared LED
Protection
Output short-circuit protection, reverse polarity protection
Controllers
Item
F3SP-U3P
F3SP-U5P
Number of sensors
1 to 2 safety single beam sensor
1 to 4 safety single beam sensor
Width
22.5 mm
45 mm
Muting input
2 Inputs
4 Inputs
Safety related function
Override function
Muting lamp connection
Interlock system (automatic and manual reset)
24 VDC 10%
Power consumption
420 mA max.
Output contacts
2 NO 2.5 A (protected by fuse), 115 VAC max.
Indicators
6 LED for status and diagnostics
IP20 (IEC 60529)
Terminal
16 screw terminals,
detachable blocks with 4pin
Response time
30 ms
Ambient temperature
Operation: 10C +55C
Housing material
Plastic; DIN rail mounting
488
2 NO 2.5 A (protected by fuse), 250 VAC max.
32 screw terminals,
detachable blocks with 4pin
OS32C
Safety sensors
OS32C Safety laser scanner
Type 3 safety laser scanner complies with IEC61496-1/-3
70 sets of safety zone and warning zone combinations are available, supporting
complicated changes in working environments
A safety radius up to 4 m and warning zone(s) radius up to 10 m can be set
8 Individual sector indicators and various LED indications allow the user to
determine scanner status at a glance
Reference boundary monitoring function prevents unauthorized changes in the
scanner position
Configurable minimum object resolution of 30, 40, 50 or 70 mm, for hand and arm
detection applications
Description
Max. operating range
Order code
Description
Remarks
Order code
OS32C with back location cable entry
3m
OS32C-BP
Configuration tool
included
4m
OS32C-BP-4M
CD-ROM
OS supported:
Windows 2000, XP, Vista, Windows 7
OS32C with side location cable entry*1
3m
OS32C-SP1
4m
OS32C-SP1-4M
OS32C with back location cable entry

EtherNet/IP capable for status measurement data reporting
3m
OS32C-BP-DM
4m
OS32C-BP-DM-4M
OS32C with side location cable entry*1

EtherNet/IP capable for status measurement data reporting
3m
OS32C-SP1-DM
4m
OS32C-SP1-DM-4M
*1
Each connector is located on the left as viewed from the back of the I/O block.
Specifications
Sensor type
Type 3 safety laser scanner
Safety category
Category 3, performance level d (ISO13849-1: 2006)
Configurable; Non-transparent with a diameter of 30, 40, 50 or 70 mm (1.8% reflectivity or greater)
Monitoring zone
Monitoring zone set count: (Safety zone + 2 warning zones) 70 sets
Operating range
Safety Zone:
Detection angle
270
Response time
Response time from ON to OFF: From 80 ms (2 scans) to 680 ms (up to 17 scans)*1

Response time from OFF to ON: Response time from ON to OFF + 100 ms to 60 s (configurable)
Line voltage
24 VDC +25%/30% (ripple p-p 2.5 V max.)
Power consumption
Normal operation: 5 W max., 4 W typical (without output load)*2

Standby mode: 3.75 W (without output load)
Safety output (OSSD)
PNP transistor 2, load current of 250mA max., residual voltage of 2 V max., load capacity of 2.2 f max., leak current of 1 mA max.*2,*3,*4
4.0 m (min. obj. resolution of 70mm, only OS32C-_-4M types)

3.0 m (min. obj. resolution of 50 mm or 70 mm)
2.5 m (min. obj. resolution of 40 mm)
1.75 m (min. obj. resolution of 30 mm)
Warning Zone: 10.0 m (15.0 m for OS32C-_-4M types)
Auxiliary output (Non-safety)
NPN/PNP transistor 1, load current of 100 mA max., residual voltage of 2 V max., leak current of 1 mA max.*3,*4,*5
Warning output (Non-safety)
NPN/PNP transistor 1, load current of 100 mA max., residual voltage of 2 V max., leak current of 1 mA max.*3,*4,*5
Auto start, start interlock, start/restart interlock
Input
Safety sensors
Sensors
External Device Monitoring (EDM) ON: 0 V short (input current of 50 mA), OFF: Open
Start
ON: 0 V short (input current of 20 mA), OFF: Open
Zone select
Stand-by
Connection type
Power cable: 18-pin mini-connector (pigtail)

Communication cable: M12, 4-pin connector
Connection with PC
Communication: EtherNet/IP
Indicators
RUN indicator: Green, STOP indicator: Red, Interlock indicator: Yellow, Warning output indicator: Orange,
Status/diagnostic display: 2 7-segment LEDs, Intrusion indicators: Red LED 8
Enclosure rating
IP65 (IEC60529)
Dimensions (W H D)
133.0 104.5 142.7 mm (except cable)
Weight (Main Unit only)
1.3 kg
Approvals
Certified by: TV Rheinland, UL

Major standards: IEC61496-1/-3 (Type 3), IEC61508 (SIL2), ISO13849-1:2008 (Category 3, performance level d), UL508, UL1998
*1
*2
Pollution Tolerance will add 6 ms to each scan time.

Rated current of OS32C is 1.025 A max. (OS32C 210 mA + OSSD A load + OSSD B load + auxiliary output load + warning output load + functional Inputs). Where functional inputs are:
EDM input ... 50 mA, Start input ... 20 mA, Standby input ... 5 mA, Zone X input ... 5 mA 8 (eight zone set select inputs).
*3
Output voltage is input voltage 2.0 VDC.
*4 Total consumption current of 2 OSSDs, auxiliary output, and warning output must not exceed 700 mA.
*5
Output polarity (NPN/PNP) is configurable via the configuration tool.
489
OS32C
Safety sensors

Power cable
Appearance
Description
Remarks
Order code
Cable length: 3 m
One cable is required per sensor
OS32C-CBL-03M
Cable length: 10 m
OS32C-CBL-10M
Cable length: 20 m
OS32C-CBL-20M
Cable length: 30 m
OS32C-CBL-30M
Ethernet cable
Appearance
Description
Remarks
Order code
Cable length: 2 m
Required for configuration and monitoring
OS32C-ECBL-02M
Cable length: 5 m
OS32C-ECBL-05M
Cable length: 15 m
OS32C-ECBL-15M
Note: An ethernet cable with an M12, 4-pin connector is required.
Mounting brackets
Appearance
Description
Remarks
Order code
Bottom/side mounting bracket
Bottom/side mounting bracket 1,

unit mounting screws 4 sets
OS32C-BKT1
XY axis rotation mounting bracket
XY axis rotation mounting bracket 1,

unit mounting screws 6 sets,
bracket mounting screws 1 set
OS32C-BKT2
(must be used with OS32C-BKT1)
Simple mounting bracket
Simple mounting brackets 2,

unit mounting screws 4 sets*1
OS32C-BKT4
Protective cover for window
Mounting stand
OS32C-BKT3
When using a mounting stand, use an OS32C

with side location cable entry (OS32C-SP1).
OS32C-MT
The OS32C with back location cable entry (OS32C-BP)

cannot be mounted.
Use with mounting brackets (OS32C-BKT1 and OS32C-BKT2).
Hardware kit for mounting stand
Mounting screws 3 sets

Use this when mounting a bracket to the mounting stand.
*1
There are eight OS32C mounting screws: four screws for singular use, and four screws for protective cover for window.
490
OS32C-HDT
OS32C
Safety sensors
Miscellaneous
Appearance
Description
Remarks
Order code
Scan window
Spare for replacement
OS32C-WIN-KT
Sensor block without I/O block

Max. operating range: 3 m
OS32C-SN
OS32C-SN-4M
Sensor block without I/O block

Sensor block without I/O block for EtherNet/IP
Spare replacement for EtherNet/IP
OS32C-SN-DM-4M
Sensor block without I/O block for EtherNet/IP

I/O block
OS32C-SN-DM
With cable access

from the back
OS32C-CBBP
With cable access

from the left side
OS32C-CBSP1
Accessory
WIN-CLN-KT
Window cleaning kit, anti-static cleaner
Safety sensors
Connection
Basic connection with single OS32C unit
Category 3, performance level d (ISO13849-1)
E1
PE
0V
Functional earth (Green)
+24V
24 VDC (White)
0 VDC (Brown)
S3
Standby input (Violet)

Zone select 1 (Orange/White)
*4
S2
Zone select 2 (Orange/Black)
*4
S2
Zone select 3 (Gray)
*4
S2
Zone select 4 (Pink)
*4
S2
Zone select 5 (White/Black)
*4
S2
Zone select 6 (Tan)
*4
S2
Zone select 7 (Orange)
*4
S2
Zone select 8 (Blue/White)
*4
S2
Start (Black)
*3
S1
Auxiliary output (Blue)
ED1
*2
Warning output (Red/Black)
S1 : Start input
S2 : Zone select switch
S3 : Standby switch
ED1, ED2: Forced guided relay
M1 : 3-Phase motor
E1 : 24 VDC Power
ED2
EDM (Brown/White)
ED1
Safety output B (Yellow)

*1
Safety output A (Red)
*1
ED1
ED2
ED2
M1
*1.
*2.
OS32C configuration
External Device Monitoring enabled
Start/restart interlock
External devices (ED1, ED2) are forced guide relays. (G7Z, G7SA, G7S, etc)
If the External Device Monitoring is not used, connect brown/white wires to 0 V, and then turn OFF the
External Device Monitoring with the configuration software.
*3.
Use NC-contact for a start input.
*4.
For zone select switch setting, refer to OS32C Series user's manual.
Note: This wiring example is for category 3.
491

BREAK THROUGH BARRIERS IN SAFETY DESIGN
Configurable, flexible and simple
Omron safety controllers offer transparent standalone operation and scalability in safety networking applications for all sizes of machine
safety control systems. The G9SP safety controller is simple to configure and setup and overcomes limitations of hard-wired solutions by
adding flexibility of a software - based solution. Total cost of ownership is reduced by having user-defined function blocks and an
integrated simulation tool for debugging or the application program.
EN ISO 13849-1 (PLe) and IEC 61508 (SIL3) certification for future-proof design of the safety system
Predefined function blocks for simple configuration and self-explanatory validation
Equipped with Ethernet and serial interface for transparent diagnosis
Safety controllers and relays
Safety Relay units up to PLe
492
Expansion of contacts
Small size
17.5 mm,
22.5 mm
Expandable
more contacts/
time delay
17.5/22.5 mm,
expandable
in- and outputs
Flexible
safety unit
solid state
outputs
Safety
relay
Safety
relay
Expansion
unit
Safe on-/off
delay
G9SB
G9SA
G9SR
G9SX
G7SA
G7S-_-E
G9SA
G9SR
S355
Page 497
S354
Page 496
S364
Page 498
S357
Page 499
S353
Page 505
S352
Page 506
S354
Page 496
S364
Page 498
Dedicated safety function
Programmable safety controllers
Monitoring of
D40A
non-contact
switch
Monitoring of
enabling devices
A4EG and guard
switching
Limited
speed
monitoring
Stand
still
monitoring
Standalone
operation, up to
20 inputs
and 16 outputs
Standalone
operation, up to
32 safety slides
Safety network
controllers up
to 1024 inputs and
512 outputs
Safety I/O
terminals
Integrated Safety,
up to 1024 in-/
outputs, up to 256
nodes
G9SX-NS
G9SX-GS
G9SX-LM
G9SX-SM
G9SP
NX-S
NE1ASCPU0_
DST1
NX
S362
S358
Page 500
S359
Page 502
S363
Page 504
S356
Page 507
H249
Page 48
S322
S324, S325, S326
H249
Page 48
493
Selection table
Safety relay units
In- and outputs
Supply
voltage
Application
Features
Selection criteria
Model
494
G9SA
G9SB
Performance level
up to PLe acc. EN ISO 13849-1 depending on application

(IEC 61508)
Safety relays
G9SR
G9SX
SIL 3
SIL 3
Reaction time
max. 10 ms
max. 10 ms
depend on safety application
15 ms
DeviceNet safety
Bus interface
Standard DeviceNet Bus

interface
EDM function
Interlock function
Logical AND connection
Relay expansion units
Housing
Plastic
Plastic
Plastic
Plastic
25 to 55C
25 to 55C
10 to 55C
10 to 55C
Flux-tight
Number of poles
Gold clad contacts
Relay socket
Detachable cage clamp

terminals
Screw terminals
optional
Safe timing functions
on-delay and off-delay
USB-interface
Programming software
E-Stop application
Door switch monitoring
Safety light curtain

monitoring
EDM monitoring
Interlock function
Logic function blocks
Safe ON delay timer
Safe OFF delay timer
Two-Hand control
Manual/
automatic reset
monitoring
Guard switching/
enabling function
limited speed monitoring
standstill monitoring
24 VDC
100 VAC to 240 VAC
Safety inputs
Test signal output
Solid state
safety outputs
Safety relay outputs
3PST-NO, 5PST-NO
DPST-NO, 3PST-NO
DPST-NO, 3PST-NO
Auxiliary outputs
SPST-NC
SPST-NC
Solid state, SPST-NO
4PST-NO + DPST-NC
3PST-NO + 3PST-NC
3PST-NO + SPST-NC
DPST-NO + DPST-NC
5PST-NO + SPST-NC
Page/Quick Link
496
497
498
499

Safety relays
In- and outputs
Supply
voltage
G7SA
G7S-_-E
G9SP
Performance level
up to PLe acc. EN ISO 13849-1 depending on application
NE1A-SCPU0_

(IEC 61508)
SIL 3
DST1
Reaction time
dependent on safety application program
DeviceNet safety
Bus interface
Standard DeviceNet Bus

interface
Diagnosis via Ethernet

and Serial interface (option)
EDM function
Interlock function
Logical AND connection
Relay expansion units
Housing
Plastic
Plastic
Plastic
Plastic
Plastic
40 to 85C
25 to 70C
10 to 55C
10 to 55C
10 to 55C
Flux-tight
Number of poles
4 pole and 6 pole
6 pole
Gold clad contacts
Relay socket
Detachable cage clamp

terminals
Screw terminals
Safe timing functions
USB-interface
Programming software
E-Stop application
Door switch monitoring
Safety light curtain

monitoring
EDM monitoring
Interlock function
Logic function blocks
Safe ON delay timer
Safe OFF delay timer
Two-Hand control
Manual/
automatic reset
monitoring
Guard switching/
enabling function
limited speed monitoring
standstill monitoring
24 VDC
100 VAC to 240 VAC
Safety inputs
Test signal output
Solid state
safety outputs
Safety relay outputs
Auxiliary outputs
4PST-NO + DPST-NC
3PST-NO + 3PST-NC
3PST-NO + SPST-NC
DPST-NO + DPST-NC
Application
Features
Selection criteria
Model
Programmable safety system
5PST-NO + SPST-NC
Page/Quick Link
505
506
507
S322
S324, S325, S326
Standard
No/not available
495
G9SA
Safety relay units

Expandable safety relay unit
G9SA-family offers a complete line-up of compact and expandable safety relay units.
Modules with safe OFF-delay timing are available as well as a two-hand controller.
Simple multiplication of safety contacts is possible by using the connection on the
front.
45 mm-wide housing, expansion units are 17.5 mm wide
Safe OFF-delay timer
Simple expansion connection
Certification up to PLe according to EN ISO 13849-1 depending on the application
Emergency-stop units
Main contacts
Auxiliary contact Number of input channels
Rated voltage
Order code
3PST-NO
SPST-NC
24 VAC/VDC
G9SA-301
1 channel or 2 channels possible
100 to 240 VAC

5PST-NO
SPST-NC
1 channel or 2 channels possible
G9SA-501
24 VAC/VDC
100 to 240 VAC
Emergency-stop OFF-delay units

Main contacts
OFF-delay
contacts
Auxiliary
contact
Number of
input channels
OFF-delay time
Rated voltage
Order code
3PST-NO
DPST-NO
SPST-NC
1 channel or
2 channels
possible
7.5 s
24 VAC/VDC
G9SA-321-T075
100 to 240 VAC

15 s
G9SA-321-T15
24 VAC/VDC
100 to 240 VAC
30 s
G9SA-321-T30
24 VAC/VDC
100 to 240 VAC
Two-hand controller
Main contacts
Auxiliary contact Number of input channels
Rated voltage
Order code
3PST-NO
SPST-NC
24 VAC/VDC
G9SA-TH301
2 channels
100 to 240 VAC
Expansion unit
The expansion unit connects to a G9SA-301, G9SA-501, G9SA-321, or G9SA-TH301.
Expansion units with OFF-delay outputs

The expansion unit connects to a G9SA-301, G9SA-501, G9SA-321, or G9SA-TH301.
Main contacts
Auxiliary contact Category
Order code
Order code
SPST-NC
G9SA-EX301
Main contact
form
Auxiliary contact OFF-delay time
3PST-NO
3PST-NO
SPST-NC
7.5 s
G9SA-EX031-T075
15 s
G9SA-EX031-T15
30 s
G9SA-EX031-T30
Specifications
Power input
Inputs
Item
G9SA-301/TH301 / G9SA-501 / G9SA-321-T_
Item
G9SA-301/321-T_/TH301 G9SA-501
Power supply
voltage
24 VAC/VDC: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, or 24 VDC

100 to 240 VAC:100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Input current
40 mA max.
Operating voltage 85 to 110% of rated power supply voltage

range
Contacts
Item
G9SA-301/501/321-T_/TH301/EX301/EX031-T_
Resistive load (cos= 1)
Rated load
250 VAC, 5 A
Rated carry current
5A
Characteristics
Item
G9SA-301/TH301 / G9SA-501/321-T_ / G9SA-EX301/EX031-T_
Operating time
30 ms max. (not including bounce time)
Response time *1
10 ms max. (not including bounce time)
Durability
Mechanical
5,000,000 operations min. (at approx. 7,200 operations/hr)
Electrical
100,000 operations min. (at approx. 1,800 operations/hr)
Minimum permissible load

(reference value)
5 VDC, 1 mA
Ambient temperature
Operating:
Storage:
*1

The response time is the time it takes for the main contact to open after the input is turned OFF.
496
60 mA max.
G9SB
Safety relay units

Slim-size safety unit
G9SB is a family of slender safety relay units, providing two safety contacts in
a 17.5 mm- and three safety contacts in a 22.5mm-wide housing.
17.5 mm- and 22.5 mm-wide housing
1- and 2-input channel units
Manual and automatic reset units
Certification up to PLe according to EN ISO 13849-1 depending on the application
Main contacts
Auxiliary contact
Number of input
channels
Reset mode
Input type Rated voltage Size (HWD)
Order code
DPST-NO
2 safety
contacts
None
2 channels
Auto-reset
Inverse
G9SB-2002-A
1 channel or
2 channels
2 channels
Manual-reset
1 channel or
2 channels
3PST-NO
3 safety
contacts
SPST-NC
24 VAC/VDC
100 mm 17.5 mm 112 mm
+ common
G9SB-200-B
Inverse
G9SB-2002-C
+ common
G9SB-200-D
24 VDC
100 mm 17.5 mm 112 mm
G9SB-3010
2 channels
Inverse
24 VAC/VDC
100 mm 22.5 mm 112 mm
G9SB-3012-A
1 channel or
2 channels
+ common
G9SB-301-B
None
(direct breaking)
2 channels
Auto-reset
Inverse
G9SB-3012-C
1 channel or
2 channels
Manual-reset
+ common
G9SB-301-D
G9SB-3010
G9SB-301_-_
1.7 W max.
1.7 VA/1.7 W max.
Specifications
Power input
Item
G9SB-200_-_
24 VAC/VDC: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, or 24VDC

24 VDC: 24 VDC
85 to 110% of rated power supply voltage
Power consumption
1.4 VA/1.4 W max.
Inputs
Item
G9SB-200_-_
G9SB-3010
G9SB-301_-_
Input current
25 mA max.
60 mA max. (See note.)
30 mA max.
G9SB-3010
G9SB-301_-_
G9SB-3010
G9SB-301_-_
Note: Indicates the current between terminals A1 and A2.
Contacts
Item
G9SB-200_-_
Resistive load (cos= 1)
Rated load
250 VAC, 5 A
Rated carry current
5A
Characteristics
Item
G9SB-200_-_
Response time *1
10 ms max.
Durability
Mechanical
Electrical
100,000 operations min. (at approx. 1,800 operations/hr)
Minimum permissable load (reference value)
5 VDC, 1 mA
25C +55C (with no icing or condensation)
*1
The response time is the time it takes for the main contact to open after the input is turned OFF.
497
G9SR
Safety controllers
Compact safety relay unit family
G9SR family modules operate standalone and as a system with input and output extension. All modules are simple to set up using DIP-switches and provide clear diagnosis via LEDs on the front.
Three modules for all safety relay unit applications
Solid-state outputs for long life and high current safety relay outputs
Detailed LED indications enable easy diagnosis
Safe on- and off-delay function up to PLe
Up to PLe according to EN ISO 13949-1 and SIL 3 according to EN 61508
Advanced unit
Safety outputs
Auxiliary outputs
No. of input channels
Rated voltage
Terminal block type
Order code
1 PNP transistor
outputs
1 or 2 channels
24 VDC
removable cage clamp

terminals
G9SR-AD201-RC
Auxiliary outputs
No. of input channels
Rated voltage
Terminal block type
Order code
1 PNP transistor
output
1 or 2 channels
24 VDC

terminals
G9SR-BC201-RC
Auxiliary outputs
Rated voltage
Terminal block type
Order code
1 (solid state) PNP transistor outputs
24 VDC

terminals
G9SR-EX031-T90-RC
Instantaneous
2 PST-NO (contact)
Basic unit
Safety outputs
Instantaneous
2 P channel MOS FET transistor output
Expansion unit
Safety outputs
Instantaneous
ON/OFF-delayed
3 PST-NO (contact)*1
*1
The ON/OFF delay time can be set in 16 steps as follows: 0/0.1/0.2/0.5/1/1.5/2/2.5/5/10/20/30/45/60/75/90 s
Specifications
Power input
Inputs
Item
G9SR-AD_
G9SR-BC_
19.2 to 28.8 VDC (24 VDC 20%)
G9SR-EX_
Item
G9SR-AD_
Safety input
Operating voltage: 19.2 VDC to 28.8 VDC,

internal impedance: Approx. 3 k
Feedback/reset input
G9SR-BC_
Outputs
Item
G9SR-BC_
Instantaneous safety output
P channel MOS FET transistor output
Load current (Using 2 outputs): 2 A DC max.
G9SR-AD_
Auxiliary output
PNP transistor output

Load current: 500 mA max.
Rated load
250 VAC, 5 A AC15 (inductive load)
Rated carry current
5A
Maximum switching voltage
250 VAC
G9SR-AD_
G9SR-EX_
Characteristics
Item
G9SR-BC_
Operating time (OFF to ON)
150 ms max.
Response time (ON to OFF)
50 ms max.
Durability
Electrical
100,000 cycles min.
Mechanical
10,000,000 cycles min.
Ambient temperature
498
G9SR-EX_
G9SR-EX_
G9SX

G9SX-family modules can be connected by a logical AND function to implement partial/global stopping of a machine. Solid-state outputs, detailed LED diagnosis and
clever feedback signals help to keep maintenance easy. The line-up is completed by
expansion units with safe timing functions.
Clear and transparent segmentation of safety functions by use
of unique AND connection
Solid-state outputs for long life and relay outputs in extension box available
Detailed LED indications enable easy diagnosis
Clever feedback signals for easy maintenance
PLe according to EN ISO 13849-1 and SIL 3 according to EN 61508
Advanced unit
Safety outputs
Auxiliary outputs
No. of input
channels
Max. OFF-delay
time *1
Rated
voltage
2 P channel MOS-FET
transistor output
2 PNP transistor
outputs
1 or 2 channels
0 to 15 sec in
16 steps
24 VDC
2 P channel MOS-FET
transistor output
2 PNP transistor
outputs
1 or 2 channels
0 to 150 sec in
16 steps
24 VDC
0 to 15 sec in
16 steps
24 VDC
0 to 150 sec in
16 steps
24 VDC
Instantaneous
OFF-delayed
3 P channel MOS-FET
transistor output
2 P channel MOS-FET
transistor output
*1
Terminal block type
Order code
Screw terminals
G9SX-AD322-T15-RT
Cage clamp terminals
G9SX-AD322-T15-RC
Screw terminals
G9SX-AD-322-T150-RT
G9SX-AD-322-T150-RC
Screw terminals
G9SX-ADA-222-T15-RT
G9SX-ADA-222-T15-RC
Screw terminals
G9SX-ADA-222-T150-RT
G9SX-ADA-222-T150-RC
The OFF-delay time can be set in 16 steps as follows: T15: 0/0.2/0.3/0.4/0.5/0.6/0.7/1/1.5/2/3/4/5/7/10/15 s, T150: 0/10/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100/110/120/130/140/150 s.
Safety outputs
Instantaneous
OFF-delayed
2 P channel MOS FET

transistor output
Auxiliary outputs
No. of input
channels
Rated voltage
2 PNP transistor
output
1 or 2 channels
24 VDC
Auxiliary outputs
OFF-delay time
Rated voltage
2 (solid state) PNP

transistor outputs
24 VDC
Terminal block type
Order code
Screw terminals
G9SX-BC202-RT
G9SX-BC202-RC
Terminal block type
Order code
Basic unit
Expansion unit
Safety outputs
Instantaneous
OFF-delayed
4 PST-NO (contact)
4 PST-NO (contact)
Synchronized with
G9S-X-AD - unit
Screw terminals
G9SX-EX401-RT
G9SX-EX401-RC
Screw terminals
G9SX-EX041-T-RT
G9SX-EX041-T-RC
Specifications
Power input
Inputs
Item
G9SX-AD_
G9SX-BC202-_
20.4 to 26.4 VDC (24 VDC -15% +10%)
G9SX-EX-_
Item
G9SX-AD_
Safety input
Operating voltage: 20.4 VDC to 26.4 VDC,

internal impedance: Approx. 2.8 k
G9SX-BC202-_
Outputs
Item
G9SX-AD_
G9SX-BC202-_

OFF-delayed safety output

Load current:Using 2 outputs or less: 1 A DC max.
Using 3 outputs or more: 0.8 A DC max.

Load current:Using 1 output: 1 A DC max.
Using 2 outputs: 0.8 A DC max.
Auxiliary output

Expansion unit
Item
G9SX-EX-_
Rated load
250 VAC, 3A/30 VDC, 3A (resistive load)
Rated carry current
3A
250 VAC, 125 VDC
Characteristics
Item
G9SX-AD_
Operating time (OFF to ON state)
50 ms max. (Safety input: ON)

50 ms max. (Safety input: ON)
100 ms max. (Logical AND connection input: ON)
30 ms max.
Response time (ON to OFF state)
15 ms max.
10 ms max.
Durability
Electrical
100,000 cycles min.
Mechanical
5,000,000 cycles min.
Ambient temperature
G9SX-BC202-_
G9SX-EX-_
10C +55C (with no icing or condensation)
499
G9SX-GS/A4EG

Safety guard switchting unit
The safety controller to support maintenance mode of machinery in the safe way.
Two operation modes to support:
Auto switching for applications where machine and worker co-operate.
Manual switching for applications with limitation in operation like
maintenance.
Clear and transparent segmentation of safety functions by use of unique
AND connection
Clear LED diagnosis of all in- and output signals for easy maintenance
PLe according to EN ISO 13849-1 and SIL 3 according to EN 61508.
Enabling grip switches
Contact form
Order code
Enabling switch
Monitor switch
Pushbutton switch
Two contacts
1NC (grip output)
None
A4EG-C000041
Two contacts
None
Emergency stop switch (2NC)
A4EG-BE2R041
Two contacts
None
Momentary operation switch (2NO)
A4EG-BM2B041
Logical AND
connection output
Max. OFF
delay time *3
Rated
voltage
Terminal block type
Order code
15 s
24 VDC
Screw terminals
G9SX-GS226-T15-RT
Spring-cage terminals
G9SX-GS226-T15-RC
Safety guard switching units

Safety outputs *1
Instantaneous
OFF-delayed *4
Auxiliary
outputs *2
Logical AND
connection input
2 (Semiconductors)
2 (Semiconductors)
6 (Semi-con- 1
ductors)
*1
*2
*3

The OFF-delay time can be set in 16 steps as follows:
T15: 0, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10 or 15 s
*4
The OFF-delayed output becomes an instantaneous output by setting the OFF-delay time to 0 s.
Specifications
Ratings of guard switching unit
Power input
Item
G9SX-GS226-T15-_
24 VDC
G9SX-EX-_
Inputs
Item
G9SX-GS226-T15-_
Safety input
Operating voltage: 20.4 VDC to 26.4 VDC, internal impedance: approx. 2.8 k
Mode selector input
Outputs
Item
G9SX-G9SX-GS226-T15-_

OFF-delayed safety output

Load current: 0.8 A DC max.
Auxiliary output

External indicator outputs
P channel MOS FET transistor outputs

Connectable indicators
Incandescent lamp: 24 VDC, 3 W to 7 W
LED lamp:
10 to 300 mA DC
500
G9SX-GS/A4EG
Application example
Automatic switching mode
Manual switching mode
Worker is loading and unloading the machine manually. When loading is finished, robot cycle is
started manually by the worker. When robots return to their home position, loading cycle is selected automatically.
Loading condition: Safety sensor B is not active, safety sensor A is active because the robots are
not allowed to move to the loading area while the worker loads the machine. So the worker is
safe because safety sensor A is active.
Robot work condition: Safety sensor B is active, safety sensor A is not active because the worker
is not allowed to move to the loading area when the robots work. So the worker is safe because
safety sensor B stops the machine if he moves to the loading area.
Worker has to do maintenance in this machine. While maintenance, it is necessary to move the
machine in a limited way. The worker has to select automatic mode or manual mode manually
by using the mode selector switch.
Operation steps:
1) Select maintenance mode by using the mode selector
2) Open the door to do the maintenance while the machine still is able to operate in a limited
way (monitoring of limited movement by using the safety limit switch).
3) Close the cover after finishing maintenance
4) Select automatic mode by using the mode selector
E-Stop conditions:
Safety sensor A
Safety sensor B
a) open the door while not in maintenance mode

b) the machine actuates the limit switch (breaks the limit).
c) the Enabling grip switch A4EG is actuated to stop the machine in emergency condition.
Safety limit switch
Emergency
stop switch
Mode selector
Safety
door switch
Emergency
stop switch
501
G9SX-LM

Limited speed monitoring unit
Safe limited speed monitoring unit for complete support of maintenance mode in machinery.
Preset of limited speed frequency by using integrated preset switches
Easy integration in G9SX-Systems by using unique logical AND connection
Applicable up to PLd according to EN ISO 13849-1 using Omron proximity sensors
Proximity sensors
Classification
Proximity sensor
Order code
Shielded
Unshielded
M8
E2E-X1R5F1
M12
E2E-X2F1
M18
E2E-X5F1
M8
E2E-X2MF1
M12
E2E-X5MF1
M18
E2E-X10MF1
Ratings of limited speed monitoring unit

Safety outputs *1
Instantaneous
Auxiliary
outputs *2
Logical AND
connection input
Rated
voltage
Sensor power supply

terminals
4 (Semi-conductors)
4 (Semi-conductors)
24 VDC
*1
*2
P channel MOS FET output

Specifications
Ratings of limited speed monitoring unit
Power input
Item
G9SX-LM224-F10-_
24 VDC
Inputs
Item
G9SX-LM224-F10-_
Safety input
Operating voltage: 20.4 VDC to 26.4 VDC

Internal impedance: approx. 2.8 k
Mode selector input
Rotation detection input
Operating voltage 20.4 VDC to 26.4 VDC

Internal impedance: approx. 2.8 k
Input frequency: 1 kHz max.
Outputs
Item
G9SX-LM224-F10-_
Safety solid state output

Safety speed detection output

External indicator output

502
Terminal block type
Order code
Screw terminals
G9SX-LM224-F10-RT
G9SX-LM224-F10-RC
G9SX-LM
Application example
Safe limited speed
S5
Lock release
switch
E1
S2
Guard safety-door
switch
E2
Motor Controller
42
KM1
41
12
KM2
Feedback loop
11
KM1
S6
Enable
switch
M1
Guard
open
S7
Selector
switch
KM2
11
S1
12
S4
Reset
switch
S3
Stop
signal
+24V
+24V
NC
T11 T12 T21
T22
Y1
M1
M2
T61 T62 T71 T72
Devices
Y2
T31
G9SX-LM224-F10
Control circuit
T32 T33
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
KM1, KM2
M1
T41 T42
AND
OFF
A2
S14 S24
ES1
ES2
L1
X1
X2
X3
X4
D11
brown
+24V
KM1 KM2
Lamp
D12
black
brown
D21
D22
: Safety limit switch

:Guard lock safety-door switch
:Stop signal
:Reset switch
:Lock release switch
:Enable switch
:Selector switch
:Contactor
:3-phase motor
black
blue
A1
NC
Normal operating mode (M1:ON, M2:OFF) Timing chart

Guard open
close
Guard close
open
Safety limit switch S1

Guard lock safety-door switch S2
GND
rotator (M1 interlocking with M1)
This example is corresponding to category 3 (EN954-1 or PL=d (EN ISO13849-1)
Enable switch S6
Reset switch S4
KM1,KM2 N.C. contact
KM1,KM2 N.O. contact
(Signal for motor)
Motor rotation
Lock release signal
(safety speed detection) ES1
Lock release switch S5
High speed state
Able to open the guard
Maintenance mode (M1:OFF, M2:ON) Timing chart
Safety limit switch S1

Guard lock Safety-door switch S2
Enable switch S6
Reset switch S4
KM1,KM2 N.C. contact
KM1,KM2 N.O. contact
Inverter operation
(signal for motor)
Motor rotation
Lock release signal
(safety speed detection) ES1
Low speed state
Low speed state
High speed state
503
G9SX-SM

Standstill monitoring unit
Safe standstill monitoring unit based on Back-EMF operation for two- and threephase systems.
Ready to use covering all standard applications without additional setup
Easy integration in star- and delta wiring
Applicable up to PLe according to EN ISO 13849-1
Safety standstill monitoring unit
Safety outputs *1
Auxiliary outputs *1
Power input
2 (Semi-conductors)
24 VDC
Instantaneous
3 (Semi-conductors)
*1
Terminal block type
Order code
Screw terminals
G9SX-SM032-RT
G9SX-SM032-RC
Specifications
Ratings of standstill monitoring unit
Power input
Item
G9SX-SM032-_
24 VDC
Inputs
Item
G9SX-SM032-__
Input voltage
Standstill detection input (Z1-Z2/Z3-Z4) AC 415 Vrms + 10% max.
Maximum power supply frequency

for AC induction motor
60 Hz max.
Internal impedance
Standstill detection input: approx, 660 k

EDM input: approx. 2.8 k
Outputs
Item
G9SX-SM032-_
Safety standstill detection output
Sourcing output (PNP)

Load current: 300 mA DC max.
Auxiliary output
Sourcing output (PNP)

Load current: 100 mA DC max.
Application example
3-phase motor
3-phase motor with star-delta wiring

Feedback loop
KM1
EDM input
KM1/KM2
KM1
KM2
KM1
+24V
A1
KM2
T31
T32
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z2
+24V
KM2
Z4
G9SX-SM032
A1
Inverter
FUSE
Control circuit
T31
T32
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z2
Z4
FUSE
G9SX-SM032
U2 V2 W2
Control circuit
U
A2
ES1
ES2
ES3
X1
lamp
PLC
X2
etc.
U1 V1 W1
M
A2
ES1
ES3
X1
X2
lamp
PLC
etc.
KM3
Standstill detected
Standstill detected
504
ES2
KM4
G7SA
Safe relays
The slim G7SA relay family with forcibly guided contacts is available as a fouror six-pole type in various contact combinations and offers reinforced insulation.
Terminals are arranged for easy PCB layout. It can be soldered directly to a PCB or used
together with the P7SA sockets.
Forcibly guided contacts
Conforms to EN 50205
6 A at 240 VAC and 6A at 24 VDC for resistive loads
Reinforced insulation between inputs and outputs and poles
4- and 6-pole relays available
Sockets
Type
Sealing
Poles
Contacts
Rated voltage Order code
Standard
Flux-tight
4 poles
3PST-NO,
SPST-NC
24 VDC*1
6 poles
*1
Type
LED indicator Poles
G7SA-3A1B
DPST-NO,
DPST-NC
G7SA-2A2B
5PST-NO,
SPST-NC
G7SA-5A1B
4PST-NO,
DPST-NC
G7SA-4A2B
3PST-NO,
3PST-NC
G7SA-3A3B
Track-mount- Track mount- Yes

ing
ing and screw
mounting
possible
4 poles
Back-mounting
4 poles
PCB terminals No
Rated
voltage
Order code
24 VDC
P7SA-10F-ND
P7SA-14F-ND
6 poles
6 poles
P7SA-10P
P7SA-14P
12 VDC, 21 VDC, 48 VDC are available on request.
Specifications
Rated voltage
Rated current
Coil resistance
Must-operate voltage
Must-release voltage
Max. voltage
Power consumption
24 VDC
4 poles: 15 mA
6 poles: 20.8 mA
4 poles: 1,600
6 poles: 1,152
75% max. (V)
10% min. (V)
110% (V)
4 poles: Approx. 360 mW

6 poles: Approx. 500 mW
Coil
Note: Refer to datasheet for details
Contacts
Load
Resistive load (cos = 1)
Load
Resistive load (cos = 1)
Rated load
6 A at 250 VAC, 6 A at 30 VDC
Max. switching current
6A
Rated carry current
6A
1,500 VA, 180 W
Max. switching voltage
250 VAC, 125 VDC
Max. switching capacity

(reference value)

Contact resistance
100 m max. (The contact resistance was measured with 1 A at 5 VDC using the voltage-drop method.)
Operating time *1
20 ms max.
Response time *1
10 ms max.
(The response time is the time it takes for the normally open contacts to open after the coil voltage is turned OFF.)
Release time *1
20 ms max.
100 M min. (at 500 VDC) (The insulation resistance was measured with a 500 VDC megger at the same places that the dielectric strength was
measured.)
Dielectric strength *2 *3
Between coil contacts/different poles: 4,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min

(2,500 VAC between poles 3-4 in 4-pole Relays or poles 3-5, 4-6, and 5-6 in 6-pole Relays.)
Between contacts of same polarity: 1,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min
Durability
Mechanical
Electrical
100,000 operations min. (at the rated load and approx. 1,800 operations/hr)
Min. permissible load*4
5 VDC, 1 mA (reference value)
Ambient temperature *5
Ambient humidity
Operating: 35 to 85%
Approved standards
EN61810-1 (IEC61810-1), EN50205, UL508, CSA22.2 No. 14
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
These times were measured at the rated voltage and an ambient temperature of 23C. Contact bounce time is not included.
Pole 3 refers to terminals 31-32 or 33-34, pole 4 refers to terminals 43-44, pole 5 refers to terminals 53-54, and pole 6 refers to terminals 63-64.
When using a P7SA socket, the dielectric strength between coil contacts/different poles is 2,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min.
Min. permissible load is for a switching frequency of 300 operations/min.
When operating at a temperature between 70C and 85C, reduce the rated carry current (6 A at 70C or less) by 0.1 A for each degree above 70C.
Note: The values listed above are initial values.
Please check Omron in the Internet for updated information on product reliability data and the SISTEMA libraries: http://industrial.omron.eu/safety
505
G7S-_-E
Safe relays
The slim G7S-_-E relay family with forcibly guided contacts is available as a six-pole
type in two different contact combinations. Terminals are arranged for easy PCB
layout. It can be soldered directly to a PCB or used together with the P7SA sockets.
Forcibly guided contacts
Conforms to EN 50205
NO contacts: 10 A at 250 VAC and 10 A at 30 VDC
NC contacts: 6 A at 250 VAC and 6 A at 30 VDC
(for resistive loads)
Reinforced insulation between inputs and outputs and poles
4- and 6-pole relays available
Sockets
Type
Sealing
Poles
Contacts
Rated voltage Order code
Standard
Flux-tight
6 poles
4PST-NO,
DPST-NC
24 VDC
G7S-3A3B-E
3PST-NO,
3PST-NC
Type
G7S-4A2B-E
LED indicator Rated

voltage
Order code
Trackmounting
Track mounting and

screw mounting
possible
Yes
24 VDC
P7S-14F-END
Backmounting
PCB terminals
No
P7S-14P-E
Specifications
Ratings
Coil
Rated voltage
Rated current (mA)*1
Coil resistance ()*1
Max. voltage (V)*2
Power consumption (W)
24 VDC
30
800
110%
Approx. 0.8
*1
*2
The rated current and coil resistance are measured at a coil temperature of 23C with tolerances of 15%.
The maximum voltage is based on an ambient operating temperature of 23C maximum.
Contacts
Item
Rated load
Rated carry current
Resistive load
Item
NO contact
10 A at 250 VAC, 10 A at 30 VDC
Resistive load
250 VAC, 30 VDC
NC contact
NO contact
10 A
NO contact
10 A
Maximum switching
current
NC contact
6A
NC contact
6A
G7S-_-E Characteristics of Sockets

Model
P7S-14F-END
Continuous current
10 A
Dielectric strength
2000 VAC for 1 min. between terminals
1000 MW min. *1
25 to 85%
*1
P7S-14P-E
5 to 85%
Measurement conditions: Measurement of the same points as for the dielectric strength at 500 VDC.
Characteristics
Contact resistance*1
100 m max.
Operating time*2
50 ms max.
Release time*2
Maximum operating frequency
50 ms max.
Mechanical
18,000 operations/h
Rated load
1,800 operations/h
Durability*3
Inductive load switching
capability*4 (IEC60947-5-1)
100 M min.
Mechanical
10,000,000 operations min. (at approx. 18,000 operations/h)
Electrical
100,000 operations min. (at the rated load and approx. 1,800 operations/h)
NO Contact
AC15 AC240V 5A, DC13 DC24V 2A
NC Contact
AC15 AC240V 3A, DC13 DC24V 2A
5% to 85%
*1
*2
*3
*4
Measurement conditions: 5 VDC, 10 mA, voltage drop method.

Measurement conditions: Rated voltage operation, ambient operating temperature: 23C, contact bounce time is not included.
The durability is for an ambient temperature of 15 to 35C and an ambient humidity of 25% to 75%.
AC15: cos = 0.3, DC13: L/R = 96-ms
Note: The values listed above are initial values.
Please check Omron in the Internet for updated information on product reliability data and the SISTEMA libraries: http://industrial.omron.eu/safety
506
G9SP-N_

The G9SP safety controller provides all local safety based in- and outputs and controls
the safety application.
Three CPU-types to suit different applications
Clear diagnosis and monitring via Ethernet or serial connection
Memory cassette for easy duplication of configuration
Unique programming software to support easy design, verfication, standardization
and reusage of the program.
Certified according to PLe (EN ISO 13849-1) and SIL 3 (IEC 61508)
Appearance
Appearance description
Order code
G9SP-N10S
Standalone
10 PNP safety inputs
safety controller 4 PNP safety outputs
4 test outputs
4 PNP standard outputs
16 PNP safety outputs
6 test outputs
G9SP-N10D

8 PNP safety outputs
6 test outputs
G9SP-N20S
G9SP configuration
Safety controller G9SP
Expansion I/O Units
Memory cassette
Compact non-contact door switch
Safety mats
CJ1/PLC
Congurator
Software
Media
Applicable OS
G9SP
configurator
Setup disk 1 license

Windows 2000
Setup disk 10 licenses Windows XP
Windows Vista
Setup disk 50 licenses Windows 7
Setup disk Site license
Order code
WS02-G9SP01-V1
WS02-G9SP10-V1
WS02-G9SP50-V1
WS02-G9SPXX-V1
Appearance
Expansion units (standard I/O)

Appearance
Type
Number of I/O
In
Out
Expansion I/O
unit
Sinking
12
8 (solid state) CP1W-20EDT
Sourcing
12
8 (solid state) CP1W-20EDT1
Sinking
32 (solid state) CP1W-32ET
Sourcing
32 (solid state) CP1W-32ET1
Model
I/O Connecting cable, 80 cm long
CP1W-CN811
Option units
Appearance
Order code
RS-232 option board
CP1W-CIF01
Ethernet option board (Ver. 2.0 or later)
CP1W-CIF41
Memory cassette
CP1W-ME05M
G9SP Status Display Touchscreen with 1.8 m cable
82614-0010 H-T40M-P
G9SP-N10S Display Kit (G9SP, Touchscreen, cable, CP1W-CIF01)
82612-0010 G9SP-N10S-SDK
G9SP-N10D Display Kit (G9SP, Touchscreen, cable, CP1W-CIF01)
82612-0020 G9SP-N10D-SDK
G9SP-N20S Display Kit (G9SP, Touchscreen, cable, CP1W-CIF01)
82612-0030 G9SP-N20S-SDK
G9SP-N10S kit with EtherNet/IP module
82608-0010 G9SP-N10S-EIP
G9SP-N10D kit with EtherNet/IP module
82608-0020 G9SP-N10D-EIP
G9SP-N20S kit with EtherNet/IP module
82608-0030 G9SP-N20S-EIP
507
G9SP-N_
Specifications
Consumption
current
Safety output specifications

20.4 to 26.4 VDC
(24 VDC -15% +10%)
G9SP-N10S
400 mA
(V1: 300 mA, V2: 100 mA)
G9SP-N10D
500 mA
(V1: 300 mA, V2: 200 mA)
G9SP-N20S
500 mA
(V1: 400 mA, V2: 100 mA)
Output type
Sourcing outputs (PNP)
Rated output
current
0.8 A max. per output*
Residual voltage
1.2 V max. between each output terminal and V2
Test output specifications

Output type

0.3 A max. per output*
1.2 V max. between each output terminal and V1
Mounting method
35-mm DIN track
Rated output
current
0C to 55C
Residual voltage
20C to 75C
IP20 (IEC 60529)
Standard output specifications (G9SP-N10S)

Output type
Safety input specifications
ON Residual voltage 1.5 V max. (between each output terminal and V2)
Input type
Sinking inputs (PNP)
ON voltage
11 VDC min. between each input terminal and G1
OFF voltage
5 VDC max. between each input terminal and G1
OFF current
1 mA max.
Input current
6 mA
Rated output
current
100 mA max.*
*For details on the rated output current, please refer to the user manual of G9SP.
Control system integration

Safety - I/O-status becomes transparent
The standalone safety controller offers diagnosis information in 3 ways:
1) via parallel wiring
2) via serial RS232C interface (option)
3) via Ethernet interface (option).
Information of all safety in- and outputs on the standard control system ensure minimum downtime of the machine.
Machine control
Safety control
I/O wiring
G9SP
CP1L PLC
Serial RS232C
Ethernet
Safety door
switch
Safety light
curtain
508
Contactor
Emergency
stop
Contactor
G9SP-N_
G9SP configuration tool
Integrated Simulator
All functions can be tested and simulated in the Configuration
Tool, so theres no unnecessary additional workload for the
engineer. In addition, on-line diagnosis reduces debug time
to a minimum during implementation in the machine control
system.
Designing
Reusing
Simulating
Packaging
User-defined function blocks

Approved configuration elements such as a tested door
monitoring solution can be easily stored as a user defined
function block and re-used in future projects. This minimises
the time it takes to create a new system configuration.
Knowledge-building
Existing configurations are the basis for new projects. The
G9SP Configuration Tool supports re-use of existing and
proven know-how in safety control, as well as user-defined
function blocks. Which means no more repetition of effort,
instead a growing library of safety solutions.
509
Easy setup and configuration is provided by a setup wizard

supporting the hardware selection.
Control components
S5
NS5
Handheld
38
e 69
N539
Page 70

510
Quick Link
Counters

Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Basic temperature controllers
E5C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
E5CSV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
E5CB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
K8AK-TH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
E5L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
E5L-A/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
E5_L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
General purpose temperature controllers
E5_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Advanced and Multi-Loop controllers
E5_C-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
E5_N-H/E5_N-HT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
E5_R/E5_R-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
CelciuX (EJ1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Temperature sensors
E52-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Auxiliaries
PRT1-SCU11/ES1B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
ES1C/EJ1N-HFU-ETN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537

Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Totalisers
H7EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
H7ET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
H7ER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Pre-set counters
H8GN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
H7CX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Cam positioners
H8PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Programmable relays
Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Programmable relays
ZEN-10C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
ZEN-20C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
ZEN-8E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
ZEN-PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

Power supplies
Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Single-phase
S8VK-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
S8VK-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
S8JC-ZS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
S8JX-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
S8JX-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
S8EX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
DC Backup
S8TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
S8T-DCBU-01/-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Three-phase
S8VK-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Digital multi circuit protector
S8M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Redundancy unit
S8VK-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
1/32 DIN multi-function
K3GN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
1/8 DIN standard indicators
K3MA-J, -L, -F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
1/8 DIN advanced indicators
K3HB-X, -H, -V, -S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
K3HB-C, -P, -R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Control components
Content
Control components
Timers
Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Analog solid state timers
H3DS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
H3DK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
H3YN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
H3CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Digital timers
H5CX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
H8GN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Motor timers
H2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
511
E5_C THE NEW STANDARD
in temperature control
Omron has been an active innovator in temperature control since introducing its rst temperature controller in 1967.
Now temperature control has taken a giant leap forward with Omrons next generation of controllers the E_C,
which set new global standards in the crucial areas of precision, user friendliness and control performance.
The E_C series will save you time and eort in set-up and operation, while enabling faster and more accurate
monitoring/control of your process. The high visibility display of the new series is also extremely easy to read
and virtually eliminates any possibility for human error.
Always the latest news on:

industrial.omron.eu/en/news/product-news
Single loop
Basic/standard applications
Relay
Voltage (pulsed)/relay
Single digital display
Compact design
In-Panel/(On-Panel E5C2)
512
Non-Programmable/On-Panel
K8AK-TH*1
E5C2
E5L
E5CSV
E5CB
E5_L*2
R639
Page 661
M229
Page 517
M428
M227
Page 519
M426
Page 520
Please contact your

local representative.
Multi-loop
Advanced
Voltage (pulsed)/relay/mA linear
Dual/triple digital display
Temperature
sensors
Modular design
Non-/Programmable (T)/On-Panel (E5DC In-Panel)
*1
*2
Programmable/
In-Panel
applicable for
all temperature
controller
E5_C/E5_C-T
E5_NH/E5_NH-T
E5_R/E5_R-T
CelciuX (EJ1)
E52-E
M425, M436
Page 521, 527
M225
Page 529
M424
Page 531
M422
Page 533
M433
Page 535
Temperature limiter
Only available in Africa, Middle East and Russia
513
Selection table
Category
Thermocouple
RTD
Input type
Input type
linear
Control
output
Comms
Supply
voltage
Features
Control mode
Selection criteria
Model
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
Analog temperature
controller
Analog/digital
temperature controller
Digital temperature controller
E5C2
E5L-A/C
E5CSV
E5CB
E5_L
1/16 DIN
1/16 DIN
1/16, 1/32 DIN
||
||
||
||
H/C
H/C
H/C
H/C
Accuracy
1C
0.5%
0.5%
0.5%
Auto-/Self-/Gradient-tuning
||
||
Transfer output
Remote input
Number of alarms
Heater alarm
IP rating front panel
IP40
IP40
IP66
IP66
IP50
Display
Analog (A)/3 digit (C)
Single 3.5 digit
Dual 4 digit
Dual 4 digit
110/240 VAC
24 VAC/VDC
RS-232 | RS-485
Event IP
QLP port
*4
Type
Lite line
Panel
On-panel/In-Panel
In-Panel
On-panel
Loops
Size
1/16 DIN
45 35 mm
ON/OFF | PID | 2-PID*1
/P | |
Operation*2
H/C
Valve Control*3
DeviceNet
Modbus
PROFIBUS
Modbus TCP
ProfiNet
Relay | SSR
Voltage (pulse)
Linear voltage
Linear current
mA
mV
PLII
Pt100 | JPt100 | THE
||
| | *5
||
||
||
Page/Quick Link
517
Please contact your

519
520
Please contact your

2-PID is Omrons easy to use high performance PID algorithm

H = heat, H/C = heat or cool, H & C = heat and/or cool
Valve control = relay up and down
QLP: Quick Link Port to connected TC to PC using the smart USB cable E58-CIFQ2
SP sensor provided
514
Digital temperature
controller
Digital programmable
temperature controller
Digital (programmable) temperature controller
Digital temperature/
Gradient controller
E5_C
E5_C-T
E5_NH/E5_NH-T
CelciuX (EJ1/-G)
Pro line
Proplus (Lite) line

Programmable (T)
Proplus line Programmable (T)
Pro line
On-panel
In-panel
On-panel/In-Panel
1
1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, 22,5 mm 1/4, 1/8, 1/16 DIN
E5_R/E5_R-T
2/4
2/4
1/4, 1/8, 1/16 DIN
1/4, 1/8 DIN
31 95.5 109 mm
||
||
||
||
||
H&C
H&C
H&C
H&C
H&C
0.3%
0.3%
0.1%
0.1%
0.5%
| |
||
||
||
| | (only G)
(only EJ1)
0-4
3-4
2-3
2-3
*6
*6
*6
*6
IP66
IP66
IP66
IP66
IP20
Dual/triple 4 digit
Dual/triple 4 digit
Dual/triple 5 digit
Triple 5 digit
24 VDC
*7
*7
*10
*10
*8
*8
*8
*8
*8
*9
*9
*9
*9
*9
*9
*9
*9
*9
*9
(only EJ1)
||
||
||
||
||
521
527
529
531
533
*6
*7
*8
*9
*10
Heater alarm = heater burnout & SSR failure detection

Quick link port using comm. cable E58-CIFQ2
PROFIBUS-DP communication option via PRT1-SCU11
EJ1N-HFU-ETN Serial gateway
QLP: Quick Link Port to connected TC to PC using the smart USB cable E58-CIFQ1
515
516
E5C2

Easy-to-use, basic temperature controller with analog
dial setting
Omron's basic ON/OFF or PD controller features an analog setting dial. This compact,
low-cost controller has a setting accuracy of 2% of full scale. It incorporates a plug-in
socket allowing for DIN-rail or flush mounting.
Compact, cost-effective controller
Control mode: ON/OFF or P
Control output: relay
Power supply: 100 to 240 VAC
Thermocouple K: 0 to 1200C, J: 0 to 400C, Pt100: 50 to 400C
Standard models (Power supply: 100 to 240 VAC)
Input/ standard
scale (C)
Thermocouple
K (CA) Chromel vs. Alumel
J (IC) Iron versus Constantan
Resistance thermometer Platinum resistance thermometer
Thermistor
THE (replaceable element)
Control method
On/OFF
Output/Indication method
Relay/No indication
Proportional (P)
0 to 200 C
E5C2-R20K AC100-240 0-200
E5C2-R40K AC100-240 0-200
0 to 300 C
E5C2-R40K AC100-240 0-300
0 to 400 C
E5C2-R20K AC100-240 0-400
E5C2-R40K AC100-240 0-400
0 to 600 C
E5C2-R20K AC100-240 0-600
E5C2-R40K AC100-240 0-600
0 to 800 C
E5C2-R20K AC100-240 0-800
E5C2-R40K AC100-240 0-800
0 to 1000 C
E5C2-R20K AC100-240 0-1000
0 to 1200 C
E5C2-R20K AC100-240 0-1200
0 to 200 C
E5C2-R20J AC100-240 0-200
0 to 300 C
E5C2-R20J AC100-240 0-300
0 to 400 C
E5C2-R20J AC100-240 0-400
50 to 50 C
E5C2-R20P-D AC100-240 -50-50
0 to 50 C
E5C2-R20P-D AC100-240 0-50
0 to 100 C
E5C2-R20P-D AC100-240 0-100
0 to 200 C
E5C2-R20P-D AC100-240 0-200
0 to 300 C
E5C2-R20P-D AC100-240 0-300
0 to 400 C
E5C2-R20P-D AC100-240 0-400
0 to 100 C
E5C2-R20G AC100-240 0-100
100 to 200 C
E5C2-R20G AC100-240 100-200
150 to 300 C
E5C2-R20G AC100-240 150-300
Input ranges
Thermocouple *1
K (CA) chromel vs. alumel
J (IC) iron vs. constantan
Pt100
THE
0 to 200 (5),
0 to 400 (10),
0 to 600 (20),
0 to 800 (20),
0 to 1,000 (25),
0 to 1,200 (25)
0 to 200 (5),
0 to 300 (10),
0 to 400 (10)
50 to 50 (2),
0 to 50 (1),
0 to 100 (2),
0 to 200 (5),
0 to 300 (10),
0 to 400 (10)
0 to 100 (2) (6 k at 0C),

100 to 200 (2) (550 @ 200C)
150 to 300 (2) (4 k @ 200C)
*1
*2
Platinum resistance thermometer
Input
Thermistor *2
Values in ( ) are the minimum unit.

Values in ( ) are the thermistor resistive value.
Accessories
Functions
Order code
Front connecting socket with finger protection
P2CF-08-E
Back connecting socket (for flush mounting)
P3G-08
Finger protection cover (for P3G-08)
Y92A-48G
Protective front cover (IP66)
Y92A-48B
517
E5C2
Specifications
Supply voltage
100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Thermocouple input type
K, J (with sensor break detection)
RTD input type
Pt100, THE
Control mode
ON/OFF or P control
Setting method
analog setting
Output
Relay, SPDT, 3 A at 250 VAC
Life expectancy
Electrical: 100,000 operations min.
Setting accuracy
2% FS max.
Hysteresis
Approx. 0.5% FS (fixed)
Proportional band
3% FS (fixed)
Reset range
5 1% FS min.
Control period
20 s
IP Rating front panel
IP40 (IP66 cover available)
IP rating terminals
IP00
Ambient temperature
10 to 55C
Size in mm (HxWxD)
484896
518
E5CSV

The easy way to perfect temperature control
This multi-range 1/16 DIN controller with alarm function offers field-selectable PID
control or ON/OFF control. The large, single display shows process value, direction of
deviation from set point, output and alarm status.
All setting fields configurable with switches
Multi-input (Thermocouple/Pt100)
Clearly visible 3.5 digit display with character height of 13.5 mm
Control output: relay, voltage (for driving SSR)
ON/OFF or 2-PID control with auto-tuning and self-tuning
Size in mm
Supply voltage
Number of alarm
points
1/16 DIN
48H48W78D
100 to 240 VAC
24 VAC/VDC
Control output
Order code
Relay
E5CSV-R1T-500
Voltage (for driving SSR)
E5CSV-Q1T-500
Relay
E5CSV-R1TD-500
E5CSV-Q1TD-500
Note: Other models are available on request.
Accessories
Type
Order code
Hard protective cover
Y92A-48B
Specifications
Item
E5CSV
Supply voltage
100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz or 24 VAC/VDC (depending on model)
85 to 110% of rated supply voltage
Power consumption
5 VA
Control output
Multi-input (thermocouple/platinum resistance thermometer): K, J, L, T, U, N, R, Pt100, JPt100

Relay output
SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load)
Voltage output (for driving

SSR)
12 VDC, 21 mA (with short-circuit protection circuit)
Control method
ON/OFF or 2-PID (with auto-tune and self-tune)
Alarm output
SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 1 A (resistive load)
Setting method
Digital setting using front panel keys (functionality set-up with DIP switch)
Indication
7-segment digital display (character height: 13.5 mm) and deviation indicators
Ambient temperature
10 to 55C (with no condensation or icing)
Setting/indication accuracy
0.5% of indication value or 1 C, whichever is greater 1 digit max.
Hysteresis (for ON/OFF control)
0.2% FS (0.1% FS for multi-input (thermocouple/platinum resistance thermometer) models)
Proportional band (P)
1 to 999C (automatic adjustment using AT/ST)
Integral time (I)
0 to 1,999 s (automatic adjustment using AT/ST)
Derivative time (D)
0 to 1,999 s (automatic adjustment using AT/ST)
Control period
2/20 s
Sampling period
500 ms
Electrical life expectancy
100,000 operations min. (relay output models)
Weight
Approx. 120 g (controller only)
Front panel: Equivalent to IP66; rear case: IP20; terminals: IP00
Memory protection
EEPROM (non-volatile memory) (number of writes: 1,000,000)
Size in mm (HWD)
484878
Sensor input
519
E5CB

Best price performance ratio and user-friendliness
combined with ergonomic design
Thanks to a clear and easy-to-use menu structure, the E5CB General Purpose
Controller is extremely user friendly. But despite very simply layered, the E5CB still offers a high performance inherited from the E5CN series. Even if no power is available,
the E5CB can be powered and parameterized with only a few clicks using the free
ThermoMini remote software.
Set up your configuration in only 30 s
Large display (16.2 mm) legible up to 5 m
Built to last and regulate precisely with Omron unique 2-PID algorithm
Easy and quick remote parameterization via free ThermoMini software
Speed up your application with a sampling period time of 250 ms
Size
Input type
Alarm output
Control output
Order code
E5CB
48 48 mm
100 to 240 VAC
Thermocouple
Relay output
E5CB-R1TC
E5CB-R1P
E5CB-Q1TC
Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
Thermocouple
Relay output
E5CB-R1TCD
Thermocouple
24 VAC/VDC
E5CB-R1PD

Thermocouple
Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
Accessories
E5CB-Q1P
E5CB-Q1TCD
E5CB-Q1PD
Software
Option
Order code
Description
Features
USB-Serial conversion cable
E58-CIFQ2
ThermoMini
Freeware/Parameter copying and cloning tool

Parameter export (.csv), self-expressing
Specifications
Item
E5CB
100 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VAC 50/60 Hz, or 24 VDC
85% to 110% of rated supply voltage
Power consumption
Approx. 3.5 VA (100 to 240 VAC)

Approx. 3.5 VA (24 VAC)
Approx. 2.5 W (24 VDC)
Sensor input
Models with thermocouple inputs

Thermocouple: K, J, T, R, or S (JIS C 1602-1995, IEC60584-1)
Models with platinum resistance thermometer inputs
Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100 (JIS C 1604-1997, IEC60751)
Control output
SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations,

minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA
Output voltage: 12 VDC 25%/15% (PNP), max. load current: 21 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit
Alarm output
SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 1 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations, minimum load: 5 V, 10 mA
Control method
ON/OFF control or 2-PID control (with auto-tuning)
Setting method
Digital setting using front panel keys
Indication method
7-segment digital display and individual indicators

Character height: 16.2 mm (PV)
Other functions
Temperature input shift, run/stop, protection functions, etc.
Ambient operating
temperature
10 to 55C (with no condensation or icing)/With a three-year guarantee: 10 to 50C
Ambient operating humidity 25% to 85%

Storage temperature
Size in mm (H W D)
484865
Note: Other models (E5C_L/E5EW) with similar features but without USB communication are only available for Emerging Countries. Please ask you local Sales representative for further information.
520
E5_C

High performance & simplicity
The next generation E5_C temperature controller is setting a new global standard in
terms of precision and user-friendly design. Best control performance, easy set-up and
outstanding visibility of the white IP66 LCD display have been integrated into a spacing-saving housing with only 60 mm of depth.
Fast and precise regulation: 50 ms sampling loop period time
Easy to set up, and operate intuitively via CX-Thermo without power supply
Best contrasty display using white LCD technology which is visible from a far
distance and from any angle
Useful alarm and diagnosis functions for secure operation
Practical timer and logic operation functions eliminating the need of a PLC
E5CC (all models 3 auxiliary outputs)
Option No.
Fixed option
110-240 VAC
24 VAC/VDC
Out1: Relay
Out2: non
E5CC-RX3A5M-000
E5CC-RX3D5M-000
001
Event input 2,
Heater burnout SSR defect detection
E5CC-RX3A5M-001
E5CC-RX3D5M-001
003
Communication 3-phase heater alarm
E5CC-RX3A5M-003
E5CC-RX3D5M-003
005
Event input 4
E5CC-RX3A5M-005
E5CC-RX3D5M-005
006
Event input 2,
Transfer output
E5CC-RX3A5M-006
E5CC-RX3D5M-006
007
Event input 2,
Remote SP
E5CC-RX3A5M-007
E5CC-RX3D5M-007
E5CC-QX3A5M-000
E5CC-QX3D5M-000
001
Event input 2,
E5CC-QX3A5M-001
E5CC-QX3D5M-001
003
E5CC-QX3A5M-003
E5CC-QX3D5M-003
005
Event input 4
E5CC-QX3A5M-005
E5CC-QX3D5M-005
006
Event input 2,
Transfer output
E5CC-QX3A5M-006
E5CC-QX3D5M-006
007
Event input 2,
Remote SP
E5CC-QX3A5M-007
E5CC-QX3D5M-007
E5CC-QQ3A5M-000
E5CC-QQ3D5M-000
001
Event input 2,
E5CC-QQ3A5M-001
E5CC-QQ3D5M-001
003
E5CC-QQ3A5M-003
E5CC-QQ3D5M-003
005
Event input 4
E5CC-QQ3A5M-005
E5CC-QQ3D5M-005
006
Event input 2,
Transfer output
E5CC-QQ3A5M-006
E5CC-QQ3D5M-006
007
Event input 2,
Remote SP
E5CC-QQ3A5M-007
E5CC-QQ3D5M-007
E5CC-CX3A5M-000
E5CC-CX3D5M-000
004
Event input 2,
Communication
E5CC-CX3A5M-004
E5CC-CX3D5M-004
005
Event input 4
E5CC-CX3A5M-005
E5CC-CX3D5M-005
006
Event input 2,
Transfer output
E5CC-CX3A5M-006
E5CC-CX3D5M-006
007
Event input 2,
Remote SP
E5CC-CX3A5M-007
E5CC-CX3D5M-007
E5CC-CQ3A5M-000
E5CC-CQ3D5M-000
001
Event input 2,
E5CC-CQ3A5M-001
E5CC-CQ3D5M-001
003
E5CC-CQ3A5M-003
E5CC-CQ3D5M-003
005
Event input 4
E5CC-CQ3A5M-005
E5CC-CQ3D5M-005
006
Event input 2,
Transfer output
E5CC-CQ3A5M-006
E5CC-CQ3D5M-006
007
Event input 2,
Remote SP
E5CC-CQ3A5M-007
E5CC-CQ3D5M-007
Out1: Voltage (pulse)

Out2: non

Out1: Linear current

Out2: non

Order code
Output
Note: As well as these models other models are available on request. Please contact the local sales office for special requests.
521
E5_C
E5EC/E5AC (all models 4 auxiliary outputs)

Output
Option No
Fixed option
110-240 VAC
24 VAC/VDC
Out1: Relay
Out2: non
E5_C-RX4A5M-000
E5_C-RX4D5M-000
009
Event input 2,
E5_C-RX4A5M-009
E5_C-RX4D5M-009
010
Event input 4,
E5_C-RX4A5M-010
E5_C-RX4D5M-010
011
Event input 6,
Remote SP Heater burnout SSR defect detection,
Transfer output
E5_C-RX4A5M-011
E5_C-RX4D5M-011
E5_C-QX4A5M-000
E5_C-QX4D5M-000
009
Event input 2,
E5_C-QX4A5M-009
E5_C-QX4D5M-009
010
Event input 4,
E5_C-QX4A5M-010
E5_C-QX4D5M-010
011
Event input 6,
Transfer output
E5_C-QX4A5M-011
E5_C-QX4D5M-011
E5_C-RR4A5M-000
E5_C-RR4D5M-000
009
Event input 2,
E5_C-RR4A5M-009
E5_C-RR4D5M-009
010
Event input 4,
E5_C-RR4A5M-010
E5_C-RR4D5M-010
011
Event input 6,
Transfer output
E5_C-RR4A5M-011
E5_C-RR4D5M-011
E5_C-QQ4A5M-000
E5_C-QQ4D5M-000
009
Event input 2,
E5_C-QQ4A5M-009
E5_C-QQ4D5M-009
010
Event input 4,
E5_C-QQ4A5M-010
E5_C-QQ4D5M-010
011
Event input 6,
Transfer output
E5_C-QQ4A5M-011
E5_C-QQ4D5M-011
E5_C-QR4A5M-000
E5_C-QR4D5M-000
009
Event input 2,
E5_C-QR4A5M-009
E5_C-QR4D5M-009
010
Event input 4,
E5_C-QR4A5M-010
E5_C-QR4D5M-010
011
Event input 6,
Transfer output
E5_C-QR4A5M-011
E5_C-QR4D5M-011
E5_C-CX4A5M-000
E5_C-CX4D5M-000
004
Event input 2,
Communication
E5_C-CX4A5M-004
E5_C-CX4D5M-004
005
Event input 4
E5_C-CX4A5M-005
E5_C-CX4D5M-005
013
Event input 6,
Remote SP,
Transfer output
E5_C-CX4A5M-013
E5_C-CX4D5M-013
014
Event input 4,
Communication Remote SP,
Transfer output
E5_C-CX4A5M-014
E5_C-CX4D5M-014
E5_C-CC4A5M-000
E5_C-CC4D5M-000
004
Event input 2,
Communication
E5_C-CC4A5M-004
E5_C-CC4D5M-004
005
Event input 4
E5_C-CC4A5M-005
E5_C-CC4D5M-005
013
Event input 6,
Remote SP Transfer output
E5_C-CC4A5M-013
E5_C-CC4D5M-013
014
Event input 4,
Transfer output
E5_C-CC4A5M-014
E5_C-CC4D5M-014
E5_C-CQ4A5M-000
E5_C-CQ4D5M-000
009
Event input 2,
E5_C-CQ4A5M-009
E5_C-CQ4D5M-009
010
Event input 4,
E5_C-CQ4A5M-010
E5_C-CQ4D5M-010
011
Event input 6,
Transfer output
E5_C-CQ4A5M-011
E5_C-CQ4D5M-011

Out2: non
Out1: Relay
Out2: Relay


Out2: Relay

Out2: non


Out1: Relay*1
Out2: Relay*1
*1
E5_C-PR4A5M-000
E5_C-PR4D5M-000
004
Event input 2,
Communication
E5_C-PR4A5M-004
E5_C-PR4D5M-004
014
Event input 4,
Transfer output
E5_C-PR4A5M-014
E5_C-PR4D5M-014
Position proportional control model
522
Order code
E5_C
E5GC (models with 0, 1 or 2 auxiliary outputs)

Terminal type
Option No
Fixed option
Out 1: Relay
Screw terminals
(with cover)
015
Screwless clamp terminal
Screw terminals
(with cover)
Screw terminals
(with cover)
E5GC-RX106M-OOO
E5GC-RX2A6M-OOO
E5GC-RX206M-OOO
E5GC-RX1A6M-015
E5GC-RX106M-015
E5GC-RX2A6M-015
E5GC-RX206M-015
E5GC-RX206M-016
023
Heater Burnout SSR defect detection
E5GC-RX2A6M-023
E5GC-RX206M-023
024
Event input 2
E5GC-RX1A6M-024
E5GC-RX106M-024
E5GC-RXOACM-OOO
E5GC-RXODCM-OOO
E5GC-RX1ACM-OOO
E5GC-RX1DCM-OOO
E5GC-RX2ACM-OOO
ESGC-RX2DCM-OOO
E5GC-RX1ACM-015
E5GC-RX1DCM-015
ESGC-RX2ACM-015
E5GC-RX2DCM-015
Communication
016
Event input 1
ESGC-RX2ACM-016
ESGC-RXZDCM-016
023
ESGC-RX2ACM-023
ESGC-RXZDCM-023
024
Event input 2
ESGC-RX1ACM-024
ESGC-RX1DCM-024
E5GC-OXOA6M-OOO
E5GC-OXOD6M-OOO
E5GC-OX1A6M-OOO
E5GC-OX106M-OOO
E5GC-OX2A6M-OOO
E5GC-OX206M-OOO
E5GC-OX1A6M-015
E5GC-OX106M-015
E5GC-OX2A6M-015
E5GC-OX206M-015
Communication
016
Event input 1
E5GC-OX2A6M-016
E5GC-OX206M-016
023
E5GC-OX2A6M-023
E5GC-OX206M-023
024
Event input 2
E5GC-OX1A6M-024
E5GC-OX106M-024
E5GC-OXOACM-OOO
E5GC-OXODCM-OOO
E5GC-OX1ACM-OOO
E5GC-OX1DCM-OOO
ESGC-OX2ACM-OOO
ESGC-OX2DCM-OOO
E5GC-OX1ACM-015
E5GC-OX1DCM-015
E5GC-OX2ACM-015
E5GC-OX2DCM-015
Communication
016
Event input 1
ESGC-OX2ACM-016
ESGC-OX2DCM-016
023
ESGC-OX2ACM-023
ESGC-OX2DCM-023
024
Event input 2
ESGC-OX1ACM-024
ESGC-OX1DCM-024
E5GC-CXOA6M-OOO
E5GC-CXOD6M-OOO
E5GC-CX1A6M-OOO
E5GC-CX106M-OOO
E5GC-CX2A6M-OOO
E5GC-CX206M-OOO
E5GC-CX1A6M-015
E5GC-CX106M-015
E5GC-CX2A6M-015
E5GC-CX206M-015
015
E5GC-RXOD6M-OOO
E5GC-RX1A6M-OOO
E5GC-RX2A6M-016
015
Out 1: Liner current
24 VAC/VDC
E5GC-RXOA6M-OOO
Event input 1
015
110-240 VAC
016
015
Out 1: Voltage (pulse)
Communication
Order code
Communication
016
Event input 1
E5GC-CX2A6M-016
E5GC-CX206M-016
024
Event input 2
E5GC-CX1A6M-024
E5GC-CX106M-024
ESGC-CXOACM-000
ESGC-CXODCM-000
E5GC-CX1ACM-OOO
E5GC-CX10CM-OOO
E5GC-CX2ACM-OOO
E5GC-CX20CM-OOO
E5GC-CX1ACM-015
E5GC-CX10CM-015
E5GC-CX2ACM-015
E5GC-CX20CM-015
015
Communication
016
Event input 1
E5GC-CX2ACM-016
E5GC-CX20CM-016
024
Event input 2
E5GC-CX1ACM-024
E5GC-CX10CM-024
Output
E5DC (models with 0 or 2 auxiliary outputs)

Output
Option No
Fixed option
110-240 VAC
24 VAC/VDC
Out1: Relay
E5DC-RX2ASM-000
E5DC-RX2DSM-000
002
Communication,
E5DC-RX2ASM-002
E5DC-RX2DSM-002
015
Communication
E5DC-RX0ASM-015*1
E5DC-RX0DSM-015*1
017
Event Input 1,
E5DC-RX2ASM-017
E5DC-RX2DSM-017
E5DC-QX2ASM-000
E5DC-QX2DSM-000
002
Communication,
E5DC-QX2ASM-002
E5DC-QX2DSM-002
Out1: Linear curent
*1
Order code
015
Communication
E5DC-QX0ASM-015*1
E5DC-QX0DSM-015*1
017
Event Input 1,
E5DC-QX2ASM-017
E5DC-QX2DSM-017
E5DC-CX2ASM-000
E5DC-CX2DSM-000
015
Communication
E5DC-CX0ASM-015*1
E5DC-CX0DSM-015*1
015
Communication
E5DC-CX2ASM-015
E5DC-CX2DSM-015
016
Event Input 1
E5DC-CX2ASM-016
E5DC-CX2DSM-016
Auxiliary outputs are not possible for these models.
523
E5_C
E5_C optional tools

Option
Order code
USB based configuration cable
E58-CIFQ2, E58-CIFQ2-E (for E5AC, E5DC, E5EC and E5GC)
PC based configuration and tuning software
EST2-2C-MV4
Specifications
E5CC/E5EC/E5AC
Item
E5CC
A in model number: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz

D in model number: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 24 VDC
Power consumption
6.5 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and

4.1 VA max. at 24 VAC or
2.3 W max. at 24 VDC
Sensor input
Temperature inputs
Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W, or PL II
Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100 or JPt100
Infrared temperature sensor (ES1B): 10 to 70C, 60 to 120C, 115 to 165C, or 140 to 260C
Analog inputs
Current input (mA): 4 to 20 or 0 to 20
Voltage input (V): 1 to 5, 0 to 5, or 0 to 10
Input impedance
Current input: 150 max., Voltage input: 1 M min.

(Use a 1:1 connection when connecting the ES2-HB/THB.)
Control method
Indication accuracy
Thermocouple input: (0.3% of indicated

value or 1C, whichever is greater)
1 digit max.
Platinum resistance thermometer input:
(0.2% of indicated value or 0.8C,
whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
Analog input: 0.2% FS 1 digit max.
CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max.
Auto-Tuning
Yes, 40%/100% MV output limit selection. When using Heat/Cool: Automatic cool gain adjustment
Self-Tuning
Control outputs
Auxiliary outputs
Event inputs
E5EC

E5AC

Thermocouple input: (0.3% of indicated value or 1C, whichever is greater)

1 digit max.
Platinum resistance thermometer input: (0.2% of indicated value or 0.8C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
Potentiometer input: 5% FS 1 digit max.
Yes
Relay output
SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load),

electrical life: 100,000 operations,
Voltage output (for driving SSR)
Output voltage: 12 VDC 20% (PNP), max. Output voltage: 12 VDC 20% (PNP),
load current: 21 mA, with short-circuit
max. load current: 40 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit
protection circuit
(The maximum load current is 21 mA for models with two control outputs.)
SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 5 A (resistive load),

Linear current output
4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 20 mA DC, load: 500 max., resolution: approx. 10,000
Number of outputs
N.O. relay outputs, 250 VAC,

Models with 3 outputs: 2 A (resistive
load), electrical life: 100,000 operations,
N.O. relay outputs, 250 VAC,

Models with 4 outputs: 2 A (resistive load),
Number of inputs
2 or 4 or 6 max (depends on the model)
External contact input specifications
Contact input: ON: 1 k max., OFF: 100 k min.

Non-contact input: ON: Residual voltage: 1.5 V max., OFF: Leakage current: 0.1 mA max.
Current flow: approx. 7 mA per contact
Setting method
Digital setting using front panel keys or via Remote Software CX-Thermo V4.5
Indication method
11-segment digital display and individual indicators
Multi SP
Up to eight set points (SP0 to SP7) can be saved and selected using event inputs, key operations, or serial communications.
Other functions
Manual output, heating/cooling control, loop burnout alarm, SP ramp, other alarm functions, heater burnout detection (including SSR failure detection), 40% AT, 100% AT, MV limiter, input digital filter, self-tuning, temperature input shift, run/stop, protection functions, extraction of square root, MV change rate limit, logic operations, PV/SV status display, simple program,
automatic cooling coefficient adjustment
25% to 85%
Storage temperature
Front panel: IP66, Rear case: IP20, Terminals: IP00
Sampling period
50 ms
Size in mm (HWD)
484864
524
489664
969664
E5_C
E5GC
Item
E5GC

Sensor input
Temperature input
Analog input
Current input: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA
Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V
Control method
Control output
Auxiliary output

Relay output
SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 2 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations, minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA (reference value)
Output voltage 12 VDC 20% (PNP), max. Load current: 21 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit
4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 20 mA DC, load: 500 max., resolution: Approx. 10,000
Number of outputs
1 or 2 (depends on model)
SPST-NO relay outputs, 250 VAC, 2 A (resistive load),

Electrical life: 100,000 operations, Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 V (reference value)
Indication method
11-segment digital displays and individual indicators

Character height: PV: 10.5 mm, SV: 5.0 mm
Multi SP
Up to eight set points (SP0 to SP7) can be saved and selected using the event inputs, key operations, or serial communications.*1
Other functions
Manual output, heating/cooling control, loop burnout alarm, SP ramp, other alarm functions, heater burnout (HB) alarm (including SSR failure (HS) alarm), 40% AT, 100% AT, MV limiter, input digital filter, self tuning, robust tuning, PV input shift, run/stop,
protection functions, extraction of square root, MV change rate limit, logic operations, temperature status display, simple programming, moving average of input value, display brightness setting, simple transfer output, and work bit message.*2
Size in mm (HWD)
244893
*1
*2
Only four set points are selectable for event inputs.

Simple transfer output and work bit message are only for E5GC.
Item
E5DC

Power consumption

2.8 VA max. at 24 VDC or
Sensor input
Temperature inputs
Analog inputs
Current input (mA): 4 to 20 or 0 to 20
Voltage input (V): 1 to 5, 0 to 5, or 0 to 10
Input impedance
Current input: 150 max., Voltage input: 1 M min. (Use a 1:1 connection when connecting the ES2-HB/THB.)
Control method
Indication accuracy
Thermocouple input: (0.3% of PV or 1C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.

Platinum resistance thermometer input: (0.2% of PV or 0.8C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
Auto-Tuning
Yes, 40%/100% MV output limit selection. When using Heat/Cool: Automatic cool gain adjustment
Self-Tuning
Yes
Control outputs
Auxiliary outputs
Event inputs
Relay output
SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations, minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA
Output voltage: 12 VDC 20% (PNP), max. load current: 20 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit
4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 20 mA DC, load: 500 max., resolution: approx. 10,000
Number of outputs
2 (depends on model)
SPST-NO relay outputs: 250 VAC, 2 A (resistive load),

Electrical life: 100,000 operations, minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA
Number of inputs
1 (depends on model)
External contact input specifications
E5DC
Contact input: ON: 1 k max., OFF: 100 k min.

Non-contact input: ON: Residual voltage: 1.5 V max., OFF: Leakage current: 0.1 mA max.
Current flow: approx. 7 mA per contact
Setting method
Digital setting using front panel keys
Indication method
11-segment digital displays and individual indicators

Character height: PV 8.5 mm, SV: 8.0 mm
Multi SP
Other functions
Up to eight set points (SP0 to SP7) can be saved and selected using event inputs, key operations, or serial communications.*1
Manual output, heating/cooling control, loop burnout alarm, SP ramp, other alarm functions, heater burnout (HB) alarm (including SSR failure (HB) alarm), 40% AT, 100% AT, MV limiter, input digital filter, self tuning, robust tuning, PV input shift, run/stop,
protection functions, extraction of square root, MV change rate limit, simple calculations, temperature status display, simple programming, moving average of input value, and display brightness setting
10 to 55C (with no condensation or icing), for 3-year warranty: 10 to 50C (with no condensation or icing)
25% to 85%
Storage temperature
Main unit: IP20, Terminal unit: IP00
Sampling period
50 ms
Size in mm (HWD)
9622.585
*1
Only two set points are selectable for event inputs.
525
E5_C
USB communication cable E58-CIFQ2

Item
E5AC
E5CC
E5DC
E5EC
E5GC
E58-CIFQ2
E58-CIFQ2-E
E58-CIFQ2
E58-CIFQ2-E
Exchange this head for
E5AC/E5DC/E5EC/E5GC adaptation.
526
E5_C-T

Compact and intelligent Ramp/Soak controller
The E5_C-T Ramp/Soak temperature controllers expands the E5_C family to handle
process applications. Capable of addressing up to 6 event inputs and up to 4 auxiliary
outputs all in a compact 60 mm (depth) housing, makes this controller series one of
Omron's most powerful and versatile temperature controllers.
Set up to 8 programs with 32 segments totaling 256 program segments simply via
CX-Thermo software.
The three-level display is visible simultaneously so each process status can be easily
identified.
Segment Jump allows users to move directly to the specified segment reducing
programming time and increase production throughput.
E5CC-T
Output
Alarms
HB*1 alarm & SSR*2 Comm. (RS-485)

defect detection
Event Input
Transfer Order code

output 100 to 240 VAC
Temperature sensor/
analog
Out 1: Relay
Out 2: None
1
2*3

Out 2: None
1
2*3
Out 1: Current linear

Out 2: None

E5CC-TRX3D5M-001
E5CC-TRX3A5M-003
E5CC-TRX3D5M-003
E5CC-TRX3A5M-004
E5CC-TRX3D5M-004
E5CC-TRX3A5M-005
E5CC-TRX3D5M-005
E5CC-TRX3A5M-006
E5CC-TRX3D5M-006
E5CC-TQX3A5M-000
E5CC-TQX3D5M-000
E5CC-TQX3A5M-000
E5CC-TQX3D5M-000
E5CC-TQX3A5M-003
E5CC-TQX3D5M-003
E5CC-TQX3A5M-004
E5CC-TQX3D5M-004
E5CC-TQX3A5M-005
E5CC-TQX3D5M-005
E5CC-TQX3A5M-006
E5CC-TQX3D5M-006
E5CC-TCX3A5M-000
E5CC-TCX3D5M-000
E5CC-TCX3A5M-004
E5CC-TCX3D5M-004
E5CC-TCX3A5M-005
E5CC-TCX3D5M-005
*1
*2
*3
E5CC-TRX3A5M-001

E5CC-TRX3D5M-000
1
2*3
24VAC/VDC
E5CC-TRX3A5M-000
E5CC-TCX3A5M-006
E5CC-TCX3D5M-006
E5CC-TQQ3A5M-000
E5CC-TQQ3D5M-000
E5CC-TQQ3A5M-001
E5CC-TQQ3D5M-001
E5CC-TQQ3A5M-003
E5CC-TQQ3D5M-003
E5CC-TQQ3A5M-004
E5CC-TQQ3D5M-004
E5CC-TQQ3A5M-005
E5CC-TQQ3D5M-005
E5CC-TQQ3A5M-006
E5CC-TQQ3D5M-006
E5CC-TCQ3A5M-000
E5CC-TCQ3D5M-000
E5CC-TCQ3A5M-004
E5CC-TCQ3D5M-004
E5CC-TCQ3A5M-005
E5CC-TCQ3D5M-005
E5CC-TCQ3A5M-006
E5CC-TCQ3D5M-006
Input
HB = Heater burnout
SSR = Solid state relay
3-Phase heater burnout alarm
E5AC-T/E5EC-T
Input
Output
Alarms

defect detection
Event Input
Transfer Order code*3

output Model: 100 to 240 VAC
Temperature sensor/
analog
Out 1: Relay
Out 2: None

Out 2: None

Out 2: None
E5_C-TRX4D5M-000
E5_C-TRX4A5M-008
E5_C-TRX4D5M-008
E5_C-TRX4A5M-010
E5_C-TRX4D5M-010
E5_C-TRX4A5M-019
E5_C-TRX4D5M-019
E5_C-TQX4A5M-000
E5_C-TQX4D5M-000
E5_C-TQX4A5M-008
E5_C-TQX4D5M-008
E5_C-TQX4A5M-010
E5_C-TQX4D5M-010
E5_C-TQX4A5M-019
E5_C-TQX4D5M-019
E5_C-TCX4A5M-000
E5_C-TCX4D5M-000
E5_C-TCX4A5M-004
E5_C-TCX4D5M-004
E5_C-TCX4A5M-005
E5_C-TCX4D5M-005
1
*1
*2
*3
Model: 24VAC/VDC
E5_C-TRX4A5M-000
E5_C-TCX4A5M-021
E5_C-TCX4D5M-021
E5_C-TCX4A5M-022
E5_C-TCX4D5M-022
HB = Heater burnout
Replace _ with A for E5AC or E for E5EC
527
E5_C-T
E5AC-T/E5EC-T
Input
Output
Alarms

defect detection
Event Input
Transfer Order code*3

output Model: 100 to 240 VAC
Temperature sensor/
analog

Out 1: Relay
Out 2: Relay


Out 2: Relay

Out 1: Relay
Out 2: Relay
(Valve control)
*1
*2
*3
E5_C-TCC4D5M-004
E5_C-TCC4A5M-005
E5_C-TCC4D5M-005
E5_C-TCC4A5M-021
E5_C-TCC4D5M-021
E5_C-TCC4A5M-022
E5_C-TCC4D5M-022
E5_C-TRR4A5M-000
E5_C-TRR4D5M-000
E5_C-TRR4A5M-008
E5_C-TRR4D5M-008
E5_C-TRR4A5M-010
E5_C-TRR4D5M-010
E5_C-TRR4A5M-019
E5_C-TRR4D5M-019
E5_C-TQQ4A5M-000
E5_C-TQQ4D5M-000
E5_C-TQQ4A5M-008
E5_C-TQQ4D5M-008
E5_C-TQQ4A5M-010
E5_C-TQQ4D5M-010
E5_C-TQQ4A5M-019
E5_C-TQQ4D5M-019
E5_C-TQR4A5M-000
E5_C-TQR4D5M-000
E5_C-TQR4A5M-008
E5_C-TQR4D5M-008
E5_C-TQR4A5M-010
E5_C-TQR4D5M-010
E5_C-TCC4A5M-004
Y
E5_C-TCC4D5M-000
2
6
Model: 24VAC/VDC
E5_C-TCC4A5M-000
E5_C-TQR4A5M-019
E5_C-TQR4D5M-019
E5_C-TCQ4A5M-000
E5_C-TCQ4D5M-000
E5_C-TCQ4A5M-008
E5_C-TCQ4D5M-008
E5_C-TCQ4A5M-010
E5_C-TCQ4D5M-010
E5_C-TCQ4A5M-019
E5_C-TCQ4D5M-019
E5_C-TPR4A5M-000
E5_C-TPR4D5M-000
E5_C-TPR4A5M-004
E5_C-TPR4D5M-004
E5_C-TPR4A5M-022
E5_C-TPR4D5M-022
2
4
HB = Heater burnout
Replace _ with A for E5AC or E for E5EC
Specifications
E5CC-T/E5AC-T/E5EC-T
E5CC-T
E5EC-T
E5AC-T
Sizes in mm (W H D)
484860
489660
969660
Supply voltage
100 to 240 VAC 50/60Hz or 24 VAC/VDC
Sensor input
Temperature input Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W, or PL II Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100 or JPt100 Infrared temperature
sensor (ES1B): 10 to 70C, 60 to 120C, 115 to 165C, or 140 to 260C Analog input Current input: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA Voltage input: 1 to 5 V,
0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V
Control mode
2-PID control (with auto-tuning) or ON/OFF control
Accuracy
Thermocouple: (0.3% of indication value or 1C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. /Platinum resistance thermometer: (0.2% of indication
value or 0.8C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.Analog input: 0.2% FS 1 digit max.CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max.Potentiometer input:
5% FS 1 digit max.
Functions
Manual output, heating/cooling control, loop burnout alarm, other alarm functions, heater burnout (HB) alarm (including SSR failure (HS) alarm),
40% AT, 100% AT, MV limiter, input digital filter, robust tuning, PV input shift, protection functions, extraction of square root, MV change rate
limit, logic operations, temperature status display, moving average of input value, and display brightness setting
Programs / segments
8/32
PID sets
Communication
RS-485 (multi-drop), CompowayF or Modbus RTU
Event inputs
2-6
QLP (Quick link port)
Yes, via USB and E58-CIFQ2 conversion cable
Ambient temperature
10 to 55 C
IP rating of front panel
IP66
Sampling period time
50 ms
E5CC-T/E5AC-T/E5EC-T series optional tools

USB PC based configuration cable
E58-CIFQ2 for E5CC-T

E58-CIFQ2 (& E58-CIFQ2-E) for E5AC-T and E5EC-T
E5CC-T/E5AC-T/E5EC-T series software

CX-Thermo >4.62
528
Professional parameterization and cloning software, data-logging, Fine-Tuning, logic operations, easy setting of process steps
Operation system: Microsoft Windows XP (Service Pack 3 or higher)/Vista/7/8
E5_N-H/E5_N-HT

Universal compact digital process controllers
The E5_N-H series of process controllers take the proven concept of the general purpose E5_N series to a process level. Main features of the E5_N-H series are universal
inputs, process outputs and options such as transfer output, remote setpoint and setvalue programmer.
Control mode: ON/OFF or 2-PID, Valve control on EN-H/AN-H
Control output: relay, voltage (pulse), SSR, linear current and voltage
Power supply: 100/240 VAC or 24 VDC/VAC
Easy PC connection for parameter cloning, setting and tuning
Clear and intuitive set-up and operation
Type
Input
Output
Fixed option
Alarms
On-panel
Universal
TC/Pt/mV
mA/V
Relay output
3 software alarms
2 SUB outputs
Order code
48x48 mm model (includes supply voltage indication)
E5CN-HR2M-500 AC100-240
E5CN-HR2MD-500 AC/DC24
E5CN-HQ2M-500 AC100-240
E5CN-HQ2MD-500 AC/DC24
Current output
E5CN-HC2M-500 AC100-240
E5CN-HC2MD-500 AC/DC24
Linear voltage output
E5CN-HV2M-500 AC100-240
E5CN-HV2MD-500 AC/DC24
E5CN-HTR2M-500 AC100-240
E5CN-HTR2MD-500 AC/DC24
E5CN-HTQ2M-500 AC100-240
E5CN-HTQ2MD-500 AC/DC24
E5CN-HTC2M-500 AC100-240
E5CN-HTC2MD-500 AC/DC24
E5CN-HTV2M-500 AC100-240
E5CN-HTV2MD-500 AC/DC24
Voltage (pulse)
Relay output
Voltage (pulse)
Current output
SV programmer
(8 programs of
32 segments)
Linear voltage output

Note: - Output and Alarm Relays: 3 A/250 VAC, electrical life: 100,000 operations
- Output voltage (pulse): 12 V, 21 mA (ie. to drive solid state relays)
- Linear current: 0(4) to 20 mA
- Linear voltage output: 0 to 10 V
Accessories
E5CN-H option boards
(One slot available in each instrument)
Option
Order code
E53-CNBN2
Event inputs
E53-CNQBN2
Control output 2
Event inputs
Heater burnout/SSR failure/Heater

overcurrent detection
Event inputs
Communications RS-232C
Transfer output
E53-CNBFN2
E53-CN01N2
Control output 2
E53-CNQ01N2

Communications RS-485
E53-CNHBN2
E53-CNH01N2
E53-CN03N2
E53-CNQO3N2
Control output 2

E53-CNH03N2
3-phase heater burnout/SSR failure/

Heater overcurrent detection
E53-CNHH03N2
Control output 2
Event inputs
E53-CNQFN2
Transfer output
Control output 2

E53-CNQHN2
Control output 2
3-phase heater burnout/SSR failure/

Heater overcurrent detection
E53-CNQHHN2
529
E5_N-H/E5_N-HT
Control method
Auxiliary output
Control output 1/2 Heater burnout
Basic
2 alarm relays
none fitted, 2 slots
Valve controller
2 alarm relays
48 96 mm model
E5AN-HAA2HBM-500 AC100-240
E5EN-HAA2HBM-500 AC100-240
E5AN-HAA2HBMD-500 AC/DC24
E5EN-HAA2HBMD-500 AC/DC24
2 SSR output fitted
E5AN-HSS2HBM-500 AC100-240
E5EN-HSS2HBM-500 AC100-240
2 SSR output fitted
E5AN-HSS2HBMD-500 AC/DC24
E5EN-HSS2HBMD-500 AC/DC24
E5AN-HAA2HHBFM-500 AC100-240
E5EN-HAA2HHBFM-500 AC100-240
E5AN-HAA2HHBFMD-500 AC/DC24
E5EN-HAA2HHBFMD-500 AC/DC24
2 SSR output fitted
E5AN-HSS2HHBFM-500 AC100-240
E5EN-HSS2HHBFM-500 AC100-240
2 SSR output fitted
E5AN-HSS2HHBFMD-500 AC/DC24
E5EN-HSS2HHBFMD-500 AC/DC24
E5AN-HAA3BFM-500 AC100-240
E5EN-HAA3BFM-500 AC100-240
E5AN-HAA3BFMD-500 AC/DC24
E5EN-HAA3BFMD-500 AC/DC24
2 SSR output fitted
E5AN-HSS3BFM-500 AC100-240
E5EN-HSS3BFM-500 AC100-240
2 SSR output fitted
E5AN-HSS3BFMD-500 AC/DC24
E5EN-HSS3BFMD-500 AC/DC24
2 relay output fitted
E5AN-HPRR2BM-500 AC100-240
E5EN-HPRR2BM-500 AC100-240
E5AN-HPRR2BMD-500 AC/DC24
E5EN-HPRR2BMD-500 AC/DC24
E5AN-HPRR2BFM-500 AC100-240
E5EN-HPRR2BFM-500 AC100-240
E5AN-HPRR2BFMD-500 AC/DC24
E5EN-HPRR2BFMD-500 AC/DC24
E5AN-HTAA2HBM-500
E5EN-HTAA2HBM-500 AC100-240
E5AN-HTAA2HBMD-500
E5EN-HTAA2HBMD-500 AC/DC24
E5AN-HTAA2HHBFM-500
E5EN-HTAA2HHBFM-500
E5AN-HTAA2HHBFMD-500
E5EN-HTAA2HHBFMD-500
E5AN-HTAA3BFM-500
E5EN-HTAA3BFM-500
E5AN-HTAA3BFMD-500
E5EN-HTAA3BFMD-500
E5AN-HTPRR2BM-500
E5EN-HTPRR2BM-500
E5AN-HTPRR2BMD-500
E5EN-HTPRR2BMD-500
E5AN-HTPRR2BFM-500
E5EN-HTPRR2BFM-500
E5AN-HTPRR2BFMD-500
E5EN-HTPRR2BFMD-500
1-phase
3-phase
4 to 20 mA output
4 to 20 mA output
SV programmer
(8 programs of
32 segments
2 alarm relays
1-phase
3-phase
4 to 20 mA output
3 alarm relays
SV programmer and 2 alarm relays
valve controller
Order code (includes supply voltage indication)

96 96 mm model
3 alarm relays
Transfer output
2 relay output fitted

4 to 20 mA output
Note: - All E5EN-H/AN-H have 2 event inputs

- All E5EN-H/AN-H have Remote Setpoint 4 to 20 mA input
E5AN-H/EN-H output option boards
Specifications E5CN-H/EN-H/AN-H
E5CN-H(T)
E5EN-H(T)
E5AN-H(T)
(2 slots available in E5_N-HAA__-500 models: SS models have 2 fixed SSR output modules)
Supply voltage
100 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz or 24 VAC, 50/60Hz; 24 VDC
Option
Order code
Sensor input
Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W or PL II
Relay
E53-RN
Voltage (pulse) PNP 12 VDC
E53-QN
Current input: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA
Voltage (pulse) NPN 24 VDC
E53-Q3
Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V or 0 to 10 V
Voltage (pulse) PNP 24 VDC
E53-Q4
Control mode
ON/OFF, 2-PID and valve (PRR)
Linear 4 to 20 mA
E53-C3N
Accuracy
Thermocouple: ( 0.1% of indicated value or 1C, whichever is

greater) digit max.
Platinum resistance thermometer: ( 0.1% of indicated value or
0.5C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
Linear 0 to 20 mA
E53-C3DN
Linear 0 to 10 V
E53-V34N
Linear 0 to 5 V
E53-V35N
E5AN-H/EN-H option boards
Auto-tuning
yes, 40% and 100% MV output limit selection. When using

Heat/Cool: automatic cool gain adjustment
Self-tuning
yes
Option
Order code
RS-232C/RS-422/RS-485
optional, CompowayF or Modbus selectable
RS-232C communications (CompoWay/F/Modbus)
E53-EN01
Event input
Optional (Standard 2 event input in EN-H/AN-H)
RS-422 communications (CompoWay/F/Modbus)
E53-EN02
QLP port
(USB connection PC)
yes
RS-485 communications (CompoWay/F/Modbus)
E53-EN03
Event input
E53-AKB
Ambient temperature
10 to 55C
IP Rating front panel
IP66
Sampling period
60 ms
Sizes*1 in mm (W H D) 484876.5
*1
(one slot available in each instrument)
E5AN-H/EN-H series optional tools

489677.2
969677.2
Option
Order code
USB PC based configuration cable
E58-CIFQ1
PC based configuration and tuning software CX-Thermo
EST2-2C-MV4
With mounted terminal cover
530
E5_R/E5_R-T

Fast, accurate and equipped for
application specific needs
The E5_R series provides you with high accuracy inputs (0.01C for Pt100) and
a 50 ms sample and control cycle for all four loops. Its unique Disturbance Overshoot
Reduction Adjustment ensures solid, robust control.
Easy and clear read-out thanks to bright Liquid Crystal Display
Exceptional versatility multi-loop control, cascade control, and valve control
Easy integration with DeviceNet, PROFIBUS or Modbus
SV programmer optional, 32 programs with up to 256 segments
Function
Loops Input
analog
Event
Inputs
Number of Outputs
outputs
AUX
Communication
outputs
Order code (96 96 mm)

100 to 240 VAC
24 VAC/DC
standard
QC,Q
4R
E5AR-Q4B AC100-240
E5AR-Q4B AC/DC24
standard
QC,Q
4R
RS-485
E5AR-Q43B-FLK AC100-240V
standard
QC,Q
4R
RS-485
E5AR-Q43DB-FLK AC100-240V
standard
QC,Q,C,C
4R
RS-485
E5AR-QC43DB-FLK AC100-240
standard
max 2 2
QC,Q
4R
RS-485
E5AR-Q43DW-FLK AC100-240V
max 2 2
QC,Q,QC,Q
4R
RS-485
E5AR-QQ43DW-FLK AC100-240
max 4 4
QC,Q,QC,Q
4R
RS-485
E5AR-QQ43DWW-FLK AC100-240V
E5AR-QQ43DW-FLK AC/24
standard
C,C
4R
E5AR-C4B AC100-240
standard
C,C
4R
RS-485
E5AR-C43B-FLK AC100-240V
E5AR-C4B AC/DC24
standard
C,C
4R
RS-485
E5AR-C43DB-FLK AC100-240V
standard
max 2 2
C,C
4R
RS-485
E5AR-C43DW-FLK AC100-240V
standard
max 4 4
C,C,C,C
4R
RS-485
E5AR-CC43DWW-FLK AC100-240
E5AR-CC43DWW-FLK AC/DC24
valve
1 + pot
R,R
4R
E5AR-PR4DF AC100-240
E5AR-PR4DF AC/DC24
valve
1 + pot
R,R,QC,Q
4R
RS-485
E5AR-PRQ43DF-FLK AC100-240
E5AR-PRQ43DF-FLK AC/DC24
standard
QC,Q
4R
DeviceNet
E5AR-Q4B-DRT AC100-240V
E5AR-Q4B-DRT AC24V
standard
QC,Q,C,C
4R
DeviceNet
E5AR-QC4B-DRT AC100-240V
E5AR-QC4B-DRT AC24V
standard
max 2 2
QC,Q,QC,Q
4R
DeviceNet
E5AR-QQ4W-DRT AC100-240V
E5AR-QQ4W-DRT AC24V
standard
C,C
4R
DeviceNet
E5AR-C4B-DRT AC100-240V
E5AR-C4B-DRT AC24V
standard
max 4 4
C,C,C,C
4R
DeviceNet
E5AR-CC4WW-DRT AC100-240V
valve
1 + pot
R,R
4R
DeviceNet
E5AR-PR4F-DRT AC100-240V
E5AR-PR4F-DRT AC24V
valve
1 + pot
R,R,QC,Q
4R
DeviceNet
E5AR-PRQ4F-DRT AC100-240V
E5AR-PRQ4F-DRT AC24V
SV programmer
QC,Q
4R
E5AR-TQ4B AC100-240
E5AR-TQ4B AC/DC24
SV programmer
C,C
4R
E5AR-TC4B AC100-240
E5AR-TC4B AC/DC24
SV programmer
QC,Q
4R
RS-485
E5AR-TQ43B-FLK AC100-240
SV programmer
C,C
4R
RS-485
E5AR-TC43B-FLK AC100-240
SV programmer
10
QC,Q
10T
RS-485
E5AR-TQE3MB-FLK AC100-240
SV programmer
10
C,C
10T
RS-485
E5AR-TCE3MB-FLK AC100-240
SV programmer
10
QC,Q,C,C
10T
RS-485
E5AR-TQCE3MB-FLK AC100-240V
SV programmer
max 2 2
QC,Q
4R
RS-485
E5AR-TQ43DW-FLK AC100-240
E5AR-TQCE3MB-FLK AC/DC24
SV programmer
max 2 2
C,C
4R
RS-485
E5AR-TC43DW-FLK AC100-240
SV programmer
max 2 2
QC,Q,QC,Q
10T
RS-485
E5AR-TQQE3MW-FLK AC100-240
E5AR-TQQE3MW-FLK AC/DC24
SV programmer
max 4 4
C,C,C,C
10T
RS-485
E5AR-TCCE3MWW-FLK AC100-240
E5AR-TCCE3MWW-FLK AC/DC24
SV programmer
max 4 4
QC,Q,QC,Q
10T
RS-485
E5AR-TQQE3MWW-FLK AC100-240
SV programmer + valve 1
1 + pot
R,R
4R
E5AR-TPR4DF AC100-240
E5AR-TPR4DF AC/DC24
1 + pot
R,R,QC,Q
10T
RS-485
E5AR-TPRQE3MF-FLK AC100-240
E5AR-TPRQE3MF-FLK AC/DC24
Note
standard
standard
E5AR-QC43DB-FLK AC/DC24
Standard = heat and/or cool PID control, valve = valve positioning (relay up/down) (PRR)
max 2 = 2 loops heat and/or cool or 1 loop cascade, ratio or remote SP
max 4 = 4 loops heat and/or cool
1, 2 or 4 = number of analog universal input 1 + pot = 1 universal and 1 slide wire feedback from valve
QC = voltage (pulse) or current (switch), Q = voltage (pulse), C = current, 4R = 4 two pole relay, 2T = two transistor output NPN
531
E5_R/E5_R-T
Function
Loops Input
analog
Event
Inputs
Number of Outputs
outputs
AUX
Communication
outputs
Order code (48 96 mm)

100 to 240 VAC
24 VAC/DC
standard
QC+Q
4R
E5ER-Q4B AC100-240
E5ER-Q4B AC/DC24
standard
QC+Q
4R
RS-485
E5ER-Q43B-FLK AC100-240V
standard
QC+Q+C+C 4R
RS-485
E5ER-QC43B-FLK AC100-240
standard
QC+Q
RS-485
E5ER-QT3DB-FLK AC100-240V
2T
E5ER-QC43B-FLK AC/DC24
standard
max 2 2
QC+Q
2T
RS-485
E5ER-QT3DW-FLK AC100-240
E5ER-QT3DW-FLK AC/DC24
standard
C+C
4R
E5ER-C4B AC100-240
E5ER-C4B AC/DC24
standard
C+C
4R
RS-485
E5ER-C43B-FLK AC100-240V
standard
C+C
2T
RS-485
E5ER-CT3DB-FLK AC100-240V
standard
max 2 2
C+C
2T
RS-485
E5ER-CT3DW-FLK AC100-240
E5ER-CT3DW-FLK AC/DC24
valve
1 + pot
R+R
2T
E5ER-PRTDF AC100-240
E5ER-PRTDF AC/DC24
valve
1 + pot
R+R+QC+Q 4R
RS-485
E5ER-PRQ43F-FLK AC100-240
E5ER-PRQ43F-FLK AC/DC24
standard
QC+Q
2T
DeviceNet
E5ER-QTB-DRT AC100-240V
E5ER-QTB-DRT AC24V
standard
max 2 2
QC+Q
2T
DeviceNet
E5ER-QTW-DRT AC100-240V
E5ER-QTW-DRT AC24V
standard
C+C
2T
DeviceNet
E5ER-CTB-DRT AC100-240V
E5ER-CTB-DRT AC24V
standard
max 2 2
C+C
2T
DeviceNet
E5ER-CTW-DRT AC100-240V
E5ER-CTW-DRT AC24V
valve
1 + pot
R+R
2T
DeviceNet
E5ER-PRTF-DRT AC100-240V
E5ER-PRTF-DRT AC24V
SV programmer
QC+Q
4R
E5ER-TQ4B AC100-240
E5ER-TQ4B AC/DC24
SV programmer
C+C
4R
E5ER-TC4B AC100-240
E5ER-TC4B AC/DC24
SV programmer
QC+Q
4R
RS-485
E5ER-TQC43B-FLK AC100-240
E5ER-TQC43B-FLK AC/DC24
SV programmer
max 2 2
QC+Q
2T
RS-485
E5ER-TQT3DW-FLK AC100-240
E5ER-TQT3DW-FLK AC/DC24
SV programmer
max 2 2
C+C
2T
RS-485
E5ER-TCT3DW-FLK AC100-240
E5ER-TCT3DW-FLK AC/DC24
1 + pot
R+R
2T
E5ER-TPRTDF AC100-240
E5ER-TPRTDF AC/DC24
1 + pot
R+R+QC
4R
RS-485
E5ER-TPRQ43F-FLK AC100-240
E5ER-TPRQ43F-FLK AC/DC24
Note
Standard = heat and/or cool PID control, valve = valve positioning (relay up/down) (PRR)
max 2 = 2 loops heat and/or cool or 1 loop cascade, ratio or remote SP
max 4 = 4 loops heat and/or cool
1, 2 or 4 = number of analog universal input 1 + pot = 1 universal and 1 slide wire feedback from valve
QC = voltage (pulse) or current (switch), Q = voltage (pulse), C = current, 4R = 4 two pole relay, 2T = two transistor output NPN
Accessories
Terminal covers
Order code
Terminal cover for E5AR
E53-COV14
Terminal cover for E5ER
E53-COV15
E5_R/E5_R-T optional tools

Option
Order code
EST2-2C-MV4
Specifications
Item
Thermocouple input type
K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W
RTD input type
Pt100
Linear input type
mA, V
Control mode
2-PID or ON/OFF control
Accuracy
0.1% FS
Auto-tuning
yes
RS-485
optional
Event input
optional
Ambient temperature
10 to 55C
IP rating front panel
IP66
Sampling period
50 ms
Size in mm (HWD)
E5ER: 9648110
E5AR: 9696110
532
CelciuX (EJ1)

CelciuX (EJ1) - Multi-Loop temperature control
Control and Connectivity
CelciuX (EJ1) is designed to handle complex temperature profiles thanks to Omrons
unique Gradient temperature Control (GTC) algorithm and to offer easy program-less
communication with Omron and third-party PLCs and HMI. Above all, CelciuX (EJ1)
incorporates all simple to use clever temperature control technology, like 2-PID, disturbance control and various ways of tuning.
Interfaces to a wide range of industrial networks
Reduced engineering due to Program-less communications, Smart Active Parts and
Function Block Libraries
Available with screw terminals and screw-less clamp terminals
One unit handling various types of input, such as Pt, Thermocouple, mA, and V
input
Gradient Temperature Control (GTC)
Type
Control points
Control outputs
Auxiliary outputs
Other functions
Basic unit
2 voltage (pulse)
2 transistor (NPN) *1
2 CT input *2 + 2 event input M3 screws
Terminal
Order code
EJ1N-TC2A-QNHB
Basic unit
2 voltage (pulse)
2 CT input *2 + 2 event input Screw-less clamp
EJ1N-TC2B-QNHB
Basic unit
2 current
2 event input
M3 screws
EJ1N-TC2A-CNB
Basic unit
2 current
2 event input
Screw-less clamp
EJ1N-TC2B-CNB
Basic unit
4 voltage (pulse)
M3 screws
EJ1N-TC4A-QQ
Basic unit
4 voltage (pulse)
Screw-less clamp
EJ1N-TC4B-QQ
High function unit
4 transistor (NPN)
4 event input
M3 screws
EJ1N-HFUA-NFLK
High function unit
4 transistor (NPN)
4 event input
Screw-less clamp
EJ1N-HFUB-NFLK
DeviceNet unit
Screw connector
EJ1N-HFUB-DRT
Ethernet unit*3
3 x RJ45
EJ1N-HFU-ETN
*4
2 transistor (NPN)
M3 screws
EJ1C-EDUA-NFLK
End unit *4
2 transistor (NPN)
Removable Connector
EJ1C-EDUC-NFLK
End unit
*1
Type
Control points
Control outputs
Other functions
Terminal
Order code
Basic unit
2 (GTC)
2 voltage (pulse)*1 2 transistor (NPN)
2 CT input*2
M3 screws
EJ1G-TC2A-QNH
Basic unit
2 (GTC)
2 voltage (pulse)*1 2 transistor (NPN)
2 CT input*2
Screw-less clamp
EJ1G-TC2B-QNH
Basic unit
4 (GTC)
4 voltage (pulse)*1
M3 screws
EJ1G-TC4A-QQ
Basic unit
4 (GTC)
4 voltage (pulse)*1
Screw-less clamp
EJ1G-TC4B-QQ
High function unit (GTC)
4 transistor (NPN)
M3 screws
EJ1G-HFUA-NFLK
High function unit (GTC)
4 transistor (NPN)
Screw-less clamp
EJ1G-HFUB-NFLK
End unit*3
2 transistor (NPN)
M3 screws
EJ1C-EDUA-NFLK
*3
2 transistor (NPN)
Removable Connector
EJ1C-EDUC-NFLK
End unit
*1
*2
*3
Auxiliary outputs
For heating/cooling control applications, the auxiliary outputs on the 2-point models are used for cooling control.
On the 4-point models, heating/cooling control can be performed for two input points only.
*2 When using the heater burnout alarm, purchase a Current Transformer (E54-CT1 or E54-CT3) separately.
*3
This unit mounts to the left of the CelciuX (EJ1) configuration and enables PROFINET or Modbus/TCP network connection. Combine the HFU-ETN with an EDU_-NFLK end unit to use with
other devices supporting Modbus-RTU like E5_N temperature controllers and MX2 Inverters.
*4 An End unit is always required for connection to a Basic unit or an HFU. An HFU cannot operate without a Basic unit.
Heating/cooling control is not supported for gradient temperature control.

When using the heater burnout alarm, use a Current Transformer (E54-CT1 or E54-CT3) (sold separately).
An End-unit (EDU) is always required to connect an HFU and or a Basic TC unit for Communications and Power supply.
A GTC (Gradient Temperature Control) basic TC unit always requires a GTC HFU unit.
Accessories
Current transformer
Diameter
Order code
5.8 dia.
E54-CT1
12.0 dia.
E54-CT3
Communications and cables

Description
Order code
G3ZA connecting cable 5 meter
EJ1C-CBLA050
E58-CIFQ1
EST2-2C-MV4
PROFIBUS Gateway
PRT1-SCU11
533
CelciuX (EJ1)
Specifications
Item
Type
EJ1_-TC2
24 VDC
85% to 110% of rated voltage
EJ1_-TC4
Power consumption
4 W max. (at maximum load)
Input (see note)*1
Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W, PLII
ES1B Infrared Thermosensor: 10 to 70C, 60 to 120C, 115 to 165C, 140 to 260C.
Analog input: 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V
Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100, JPt100
Input impedance
Current input: 150max., voltage input: 1 M min.
Control outputs
Voltage output
5 W max. (at maximum load)
Output voltage: 12 VDC 15%, max. load current: 21 mA (PNP models with short-circuit protection circuit)
Transistor output Max. operating voltage: 30 V, max. load current: 100 mA
Event inputs
Current output
Current output range: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA DC

Load: 500 max. (including transfer output)
(Resolution: Approx: 2,800 for 4 to 20 mA DC,
approx. 3,500 for 0 to 20 mA DC)
Input points
Contact input
ON: 1 k max., OFF. 100 k min.
Non-contact input ON: Residual voltage: 1.5 V max.,

OFF: Leakage current: 0.1 mA max.
Outflow current: approx. 4 mA per point
Number of input and control points
Input points: 2, control points: 2
Input points: 4, control points: 4
Setting method
Via communications
Control method
ON/OFF control or 2-PID (with autotuning, selftuning, Heat & Cool autotuning and non-linear cool output selection)
Other functions
Two-point input shift, digital input filter, remote SP, SP ramp, manual manipulated variable, manipulated variable limiter, interference overshoot adjustment, loop burnout alarm, RUN/STOP, banks, I/O allocations, etc.
Alarm output
2 points via End unit
Communication
RS-485, PROFIBUS, Modbus, DeviceNet
Size in mm (WHD)
3196109
Weight
180 g
Operating 10C to 55C, Storage 25C to 65C (with no icing or condensation)
Operating 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
*1
RS-485, PROFIBUS, Modbus, DeviceNet
Inputs are fully multi-input. Therefore, platinum resistance thermometer, thermocouple, infrared thermosensor, and analog input can be selected.
Dimensions
Item
Size in mm (HWD)
EJ1N-HFU_-NFL_
95.431.0104.9/109.0
EJ1N-HFUB-DRT
90.931.082.2
EJ1C-EDU
95.415.776.2/79.7
534
E52-E
Temperature sensors
Temperature sensors for standard applications
E52-E temperature sensors and thermocouples provide accurate temperature sensing
for standard and challenging environments and include a wide range of mounting and
connection options.
For best control results, the E52-E series is optimized to operate perfectly with suitable
E5_ temperature controllers.
Thermocouples and PT100 elements
Wide range of housing, mounting and connection options
Best performance match with temperature controllers from the E5_ portfolio
PRO-Line
Series
Smooth tube
Technology Sub-Type
t/c
*1
Min
[C]
Max
[C]
Dia.
[mm]
Length
[mm]
Material
Type
Fixing
80
400
100
SUS 316
2-wire
pre-wired with 2
cable end shoes
6
J
600
Length
[m]
400
80
1100
E52-ETJ1-100-2-A
E52-ETJ2-100-2-A
E52-ETJ3-100-2-A
4.5
E52-ETJ4.5-100-2-A
E52-ETJ6-100-2-A
E52-ELTJ4-100-2-A
SUS 304
E52-ELTJ5-100-2-A
E52-ELTJ6-100-2-A
E52-ELTJ8-100-2-A
E52-ETK1-100-2-A
INCONEL 600
E52-ETK2-100-2-A
E52-ETK3-100-2-A
4.5
E52-ETK4.5-100-2-A
E52-ETK6-100-2-A
6
Lite-Line
400
E52-ELTK4-100-2-A
SUS 304
E52-ELTK5-100-2-A
E52-ELTK6-100-2-A
E52-ELTK8-100-2-A
8
Pro-Line
PT100
class B
50
500
250
SUS 316
50
SUS 304
100
3-wire
6
Lite-Line
400
E52-EP3-250-2-B
pre-wired with
open cable ends
E52-EP6-250-2-B
E52-ELP4-50-2-A
E52-ELP5-100-2-A
E52-ELP6-100-2-A
E52-ELP8-100-2-A
8
Pro-Line
Bayonet mounting
50
Enclosed terminals,
smooth tube
35
500
200
400
15
200
2-wire
Enclosed terminals,
smooth tube
1150
720
SUS 316
Enclosed terminals,
G1/2"g; mounting
1150
INCONEL 600
720
SUS 316
PT100
class B
50
Enclosed terminals,
clamp mounting
1.5"
E52-EP6-35-2-BG1/4G-B
SUS 316
Bayonet mounting t/c*1
INCONEL 600
500
enclosed screw
terminals
E52-ETJ6-15-2-BG1/4G-B
enclosed screw
terminals
E52-ETK6-200-T2-B
E52-ETJ6-200-T2-B
E52-ETK6-200-T2-CG1/2G-B
E52-ETJ6-200-T2-CG1/2G-B
E52-EP6-200-T2-CG1/2G-B
3-wire
200
E52-EP6-100-T2-CC1.5-B
100
E52-EP6-100-T2-CC2-B
t/c*1
250
10
dia
Cu
(tin plated)
2-wire
pre-wired with 2
open cable ends
E52-ETJS1-B
Environmental
temperature
PT100
class B
40
80
Aluminium
3-wire
enclosed screw
terminals
E52-EPE1-B
Non-contact
IR*2
pre-wired with 3
open cable ends 2
PVC
up to 60 mm
10
up to 1000 mm 0
*1
*2
E52-EP6-200-T2-B
pre-wired with 2
open cable ends
Enclosed terminals,
clamp mounting 2"
Proplus-Line Surface temperature
E52-ETT6-100-2-A
8
Pro-Line
E52-ETT3-100-2-A
6
Lite-Line
Order code
260
400
M18
44.5
ABS
4-wire
120
SUS 304
5-wire
E52-EPE2-B
ES1B
ES1C-A40
t/c = Thermocouple
IR = Infrared Sensor
Note: Further types with different dia., tube & cable lengths and other confectioning are available on request.
535
Line-Type
PRT1-SCU11
Auxiliaries
Omrons intelligent PROFIBUS and
CompoWay/F gateway
This gateway supports all CompoWay/F equipped products, including
temperature controllers, digital panel indicators, etc. It can also be used for
connecting MCW151-E and E5_K series.
Cost-effectively integrates basic instruments into a PROFIBUS network
Requires no complex protocol conversion writing
Has function blocks for drag-and-drop configuration
Connects up to 15 instruments to a single PROFIBUS point
Specifications
Name
Order code
Item
PRT1-SCU11
PROFIBUS remote terminal serial communications unit
PRT1-SCU11
Storage temperature
20 to +75C
Ambient temperature
0 to 55C
Ambient humidity
10 to 90% (non-condensing)
EMC compliance
EN 50081-2, EN 61131-2
Power supply
+24 VDC (+10%/15%)

Current consumption 80 mA (typical)
Weight
125 g (typical)
Communication interface
RS-485 based PROFIBUS-DP

RS-422A Host link
RS-485 CompoWay/F
RS-232C Peripheral
Port supporting connection to thermotools
Size in mm (HWD)
904065
Supports all CompoWay/F equipped units,

but has drag-and-drop function blocks for
E5AN/E5EN/E5CN/E5GN
E5ZN and CelciuX (EJ1)
E5AR/E5ER
E5AK/E5EK
ES1B
Achieve low-cost measurements with an infrared
thermosensor
This infrared thermosensor provides an accurate, stable and cost-effective way to
measure the temperature of objects. It behaves just like a standard K-type thermocouple, which enables it to operate with any temperature controller or alarm unit.
Cost-effective infrared thermosensor
Contactless, meaning no deterioration, unlike thermocouples
4 temperature ranges available: 10-70C, 60-120C, 115-165C and 140-260C
Response speed 300 ms
Specifications
Appearance and sensing

characteristics
2 mm 20 mm
2 dia.
20 dia.
Specification
40 mm
40 dia.
60 mm
60 dia.
Order code
Current consumption
20 mA max.
60 to 120C
ES1B 60-120C
Accuracy
5C
2% PV or 2C, whichever is larger
115 to 165C
ES1B 115-165C
10C
140 to 260C
ES1B 140-260C
30C
40C
3,000
ABS resin
Polyolen tube
14.2 dia.
17.8
15
536
12/24 VDC
ES1B 10-70C
Green, output +
White, output
36.5
ES1B

10 to 70C
Dimensions (unit: mm)

44.5
6.5
Item
Screw M181.0
PVC-covered
(25C to 70C)
Orange, power +
Shield, power
Reproducibility
Temperature drift
0.4C/C max.
Receiver element
Thermopile
Response speed
Approximately 300 ms at response rate of 63%
Allowable ambient humidity
35 to 85%
IP65
Size in mm
head: 17.8 dia.44.5 (screw M181.0),

cable 3,000
ES1C
Auxiliaries
Achieve Superior Environmental Resistance and a Wide
Measurement Range of 0 to 400C.
This infrared thermosensor provides an fast, accurate and very stable way to measure
the temperature of objects. Its output provides a universal 4-20 mA, which enables it
to operate with many temperature controllers or PLCs.
Flexible placement with slim cylindrical shape and long focus with a distance of
500 mm and area diameter of 80 mm.
The SUS body and silicon lens resist ambient operating temperatures of up to 70C
and resist dust and water to the equivalent of IP67.
Fast measurement with high-speed response of 100 ms/90%.
Strong resistance to noise with output of 4 to 20 mA.
Ratings and Characteristics
Specification (measuring temperature range)
Order code
Item
0 to 400C
ES1C-A40
12 to 24 VDC
90% to 110% of rated voltage
Current consumption
70 mA max.
Dimensions (unit: mm)
Model
ES1C
Measuring temperature range 0 to 400C
12 dia. (lens diameter)

M18P1.0
60
(threaded section)
24
120
2,000
(cable length)
Measurement accuracy
0 to 200C: 2C, 201 to 400C: 1% (emissivity: 0.95)
Response time
100 ms/90%
Reproducibility
1C of reading value
Emissivity
0.95 fixed
Current output
4 to 20 mA DC, Load: 250 max.

(destruction)
1.5-mm amplitude at 10 to 55 Hz for 2 hours each

in the X, Y, and Z directions
Weight
180 g
Equivalent to IP67
EJ1N-HFU-ETN
The EJ1N-HFU-ETN provides the solution to connect a CelciuX (EJ1) in-panel multiloop PID controller to PROFINET and Modbus/TCP. Although built on the CelciuX (EJ1)
platform, this unit can be used as a gateway for discrete Modbus units when only
using the EJ1N-EDU endplate.
Connects Modbus serial slaves to PROFINET and Modbus/TCP
Built for integration into the CelciuX (EJ1)
Usable as a gateway for discrete units like E5_N-series temperature controllers
and MX2 inverters.
Flexible implementation with standard .gsd files
Specifications
Name
Order code
Item
EJ1N-HFU-ETN
ETHERNET to Serial Gateway
EJ1N-HFU-ETN
PROFINET
IO Device
Conformance
Class A
Supported RT
Class 1
Minimum Update Rate
8 ms
Number of Modbus RTU nodes 31

Ambient operating
temperature
10C to 55C
25% to 85%
Storage temperature
20C to 65C
Weight
170 g
537
Connect Modbus slaves to ETHERNET
Power supplies
RELIABLE AND EASY OPERATION WORLDWIDE
S8VK-G The right power supply for your application
The S8VK-G offers a wide product range (from 15 W up to 480 W), in a very compact size.
It is 13% smaller than comparable power supplies and the smallest on the market of its type.
Wide operating temperature range (40 to +70C) to guarantee operation stability
Double set of DC output terminals (three for the negative) to provide easy wiring
High efficiency (90%) to reduce energy consumption
Power Boost functionality (120%)
Improved DIN-rail mounting clip to provide better vibration resistance and allow for easy installation
Which type of Power Supply you are looking for?
Book type
Metal frame
Supply input voltage?
Application field?
Single phase
Three phase
Main purpose?
538
Buildings & Residential

areas
Industrial areas
Main purpose?
For most suitable usage

with derating of specs
For a perfect fit in

industrial area
S8VK-C
S8VK-G
P236
Page 542
P234
Page 543
For most suitable usage

with derating of specs
For a perfect fit in

industrial area
S8VK-T
S8JC-ZS
S8JX-G
S8JX-P
P238
Page 544
P235
Page 545
P228
Page 546
P233
Page 548
DC Backup
Redundancy unit
Additional unit
Open frame
Power supplies
Application purpose?
Power supply device
Battery backup
Buffer module
S8TS
S8T-DCBU-01
S8T-DCBU-02
S8VK-R
S8M
S8EX
P243
Page 549
P244
Page 551
P245
Page 551
P237
Page 552
P227
Page 553
P239
Page 550
539
Selection table
Book type power supply
Model
Power
Selection
Criteria
Category
Metal frame power supply
S8VK-G
S8VK-C
S8VK-T
S8JX-P
Type
Pro line
Lite line
Pro line
Pro plus line
Phases
Single phase
Three phases
Single phase
Rated voltage
100 V to 240 VAC (90 to 350 VDC)
100 V to 240 VAC
3 320 V to 576 VAC
100 V to 240 VAC
Voltage
5V
12 V
24 V
48 V
15 W
3A
1.2 A
0.65 A
25 W
2.5 A
1.3 A
4.5 A
2.5 A
2.5 A
5A
5A
30 W
5A
35 W
50 W
60 W
90 W
100 W
120 W
150 W
180 W
240 W
300 W
350 W
480 W
600 W
960 W
1,500 W
Conformes to
EN61000-3-2
DC back-up
Capacitor back-up
Undervoltage alarm
24 V
5V
12 V
24 V
48 V
10 A
4.2 A
2.1 A
1.1 A
20 A
8.5 A
4.5 A
2.1 A
13 A
6.5 A
3.3 A
27 A
14 A
7A
53 A
27 A
13 A
30 A
10 A
5A
10 A
60 A
20 A
10 A
20 A
120 A
40 A
Features
Overvoltage protection
540
Overload protection
DIN-rail mounting
Screw mounting
(with bracket)
EMI Class B
UL Class 2
15 W, 30 W, 60 W only
N+1 Redundancy
Parallel operation
by 2 units
by 2 units
300 W, 600 W only by 5 units
Power Boost
120%
120%
300 W, 600 W at 24 V 115%
Page/Quick Link
543
542
544
548
Power supplies
Metal frame power supply
S8JX-G
S8JC-ZS
Pro line
Lite line
Modular
Open frame power supply
S8TS
S8EX
Single phase
100 V to 240 VAC
200 V to 240 VAC
5V
12 V
15 V
24 V
48 V
5V
3A
1.3 A
1.0 A
0.65 A 0.35 A 3 A
100 V to 240 VAC
12 V
24 V
5V
1.3 A
0.7 A
1.3 A
0.65 A
10 A
4.3 A
2.1 A
1.1 A
5A
2.5 A
7.5 A
20 A
8.5 A
4.3 A
2.1 A
10 A
5A
30 A
12.5 A
6.3 A
3.2 A
10 A
6.7 A
5A
10 A
4.2 A
2.1 A
1.1 A
4.2 A
2.1 A
4.5 A
30 A
13 A
6.5 A
3.3 A
30 A
12.5 A 6.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
60 A
0.32 A
2A
8.5 A
48 V
2.5 A
1.5 A
20 A
36 V
0.7 A
6A
3.0 A
2.1 A
24 V
1.0 A
0.75 A 7 A
4.5 A
15 V
1.3 A
2.5 A
1.5 A
12 V
3A
2.4 A
8.5 A
5V
3A
20 A
100 to 240 VAC (85 to 264 VAC)

24 V
5A
7A
10 A
12 V
27 A
14 A
7A
60 A
29 A
14.6 A
120 A
53 A
27 A
13 A
300 W, 600 W only by 5 units
1 unit
546
Power supplies
545
549
550
Standard
Available
No/not available
541
S8VK-C
Single-phase
The cost effective book type power supply
The S8VK-C Lite family is an ideal choice for cost-sensitive applications that require a
dependable high-quality power supply. The S8VK-C have an universal 100 to 240 V
50/60 Hz input capability (DC input (90 to 350 VDC) also possible) and they are available with power ratings from 60 to 480 W.
Operating temperature range of 25 to 60C
Double set of DC output terminals (three for the negative) provide easy wiring
Overload and overvoltage protection
Conforms to EN61204-3, EN55011 Class A
Type
Power ratings
Input voltage
Output voltage Output current Size (W H D) [mm]
Order code
Power supply
Single-phase
60 W
Single phase 100 to 240 VAC
24 V
2.5 A
32 90 110
S8VK-C06024
24 V
5A
40 125 113
S8VK-C12024
24 V
10 A
60 125 140
S8VK-C24024
24 V
20 A
95 125 140
S8VK-C48024
120 W
240 W
480 W
Allowable range:
85 to 264 VAC,
90 to 350 VDC
Specifications
Item
60 W
120 W
240 W
480 W
Efficiency (Typ. at 230 VAC)
88%
89%
89%
92%
Input
Output
Rated input voltage
100 to 240 VAC
Allowable range
85 to 264 VAC, 90 to 350 VDC
Voltage adjustment
range (with V.ADJ)
10% to 15%
Input variation influence 0.5% max. (at 85 to 264 VAC input, 100% load)
Load variation Influence 1.5% max, at 0% to 100% load
Temperature variation
influence
0.05%/C max.
Overload protection
Yes
Yes
Operating ambient temperature
25 to 60C (13 to 140F)
Series operation
Yes, up to 2 units
Parallel operation
No
EMI
Conforms to EN 61204-3, EN 55011 Class A
EMS
Conforms to EN 61204-3 high severity levels
Approved standards
UL: UL 508 (Listing), UL 60950-1, cUL: CSA C22.2 No. 107.1 and No. 60950-1,
EN/VDE: EN 50178 (=VDE0160), EN 60950-1 (=VDE0805)
IP20 by EN/IEC 60529
542
S8VK-G
Single-phase
The standard book type power supply
The standard S8VK-G Pro line is our install and forget option, offering longer
lifetime, higher protection and more features.The S8VK-G offers a wide product range
(from 15 up to 480 W), in a very compact package. There are models available for
5, 12, 24 and 48 VDC output voltage. DC input (90 to 350 VDC) is also available through
the whole range.
Wide operating temperature range (40 to 70C) that guarantees stable operation
Double set of DC output terminals (three for the negative) provide easy wiring
High efficiency 90% to reduce the energy consumption
Power boost functionality (120%) for the right start of the application
Improved DIN-rail mounting clip provides a better resistance to vibrations and
allows easy installation (using one hand to mount in a flash)
Type
Power ratings
Input voltage
Output voltage
Output current
Size (W H D) [mm] Order code
Power supply
Single-phase
15 W
100 to 240 VAC
5V
3A
22.5 90 90
12 V
1.2 A
24 V
0.65 A
5V
5A
12 V
2.5 A
24 V
1.3 A
12 V
4.5 A
24 V
2.5 A
120 W
24 V
5A
40 125 113
S8VK-G12024
240 W
24 V
10 A
60 125 140
S8VK-G24024
48 V
5A
24 V
20 A
48 V
10 A
30 W
Allowable range:
85 to 264 VAC,
90 to 350 VDC,
2 phases less than
240 VAC
60 W
480 W
S8VK-G01505
S8VK-G01512
S8VK-G01524
32 90 90
S8VK-G03005
S8VK-G03012
S8VK-G03024
32 90 110
S8VK-G06012
S8VK-G06024
S8VK-G24048
95 125 140
S8VK-G48024
S8VK-G48048
Specifications
Item
15 W
30 W
60 W
120 W
240 W
480 W
80% (24 V)
86% (24 V)
88% (24 V)
89% (24 V)
92% (24 V)
93% (24 V)
Input
Rated input voltage
100 to 240 VAC
Allowable range
85 to 264 VAC, 90 to 350 VDC. 2 phases less than 240 VAC
Output
Voltage adjustment
range (with V.ADJ)
10% to 15%
Input variation influence 0.5% max. (at 85 to 264 VAC input, 100% load)
Load variation Influence 3.0% max. (5 V), 2.0% max. (12 V), 1.5% max. (24, 48 V), at 0% to 100% load
0.05%/C max.
Overload protection
Yes, 130% of rated current typ.
Power Boost
120% of rated current
Yes
40 to 70C (40 to 158F)
Series operation
Yes, up to 2 units
Parallel operation
Yes, up to 2 units
EMI
Conforms to EN 61204-3, EN 55011 Class B
EMS
Harmonic current emissions
Conforms to EN 61000-3-2
Approved standards
UL 1310 Class 2 output for 15 W, 30 W, 60 W
EN/VDE: EN 50178 (=VDE0160), EN 60950-1 (=VDE0805),
Lloyds Register
Fulfilled standards
SELV (EN 60950-1/EN 50178/UL 60950-1), PELV(EN 60204-1,EN 50178),

Safety of power transformers (EN 61558-2-16), EN 50274 for terminal parts
IP20 by EN/IEC 60529
Power supplies
influence
543
S8VK-T
Three-phase
Compact 3-phase input power supply
The S8VK-T has an exceptionally wide operating temperature range from 40 to 70C
as well as S8VK-G, single phase power supply. These models have also good endurance
against hard vibration and guarantee the stable operation even in the harshest of environments.
Input range: 3 320 to 576 VAC, 2 340 to 576 VAC
Safety standard, UL 508, ANSI 12.12.01, EN 50178, EN 60950-1, UL 60950-1,
CSA No. 60950-1, EN 60204-1 PELV, EN 61558-2-16 Safety transformer. Lloyds
Register
Protection IP20 by EN/IEC 60529
EMI Class B
120% boost function
Type
Power ratings
Input voltage
Output current
Size (W H D) [mm] Order code
Power supply three-phase
120 W
3 380 to 480 VAC,

24 V
2 380 to 480 VAC
450 to 600 VDC (Excluding 960 W)
5A
40125113
S8VK-T12024
10 A
60125140
S8VK-T24024
Allowable range:
3 320 to 576 VAC,
2 340 to 576 VAC,
450 to 810 VDC (Excluding 960 W)
20 A
95125140
S8VK-T48024
40 A
135125170
S8VK-T96024
240 W
480 W
960 W
Output voltage
Specifications
Item
120 W
240 W
480 W
960 W
89%
89%
91%
92%
Input
Rated Input Voltage
3 380 to 480 VAC, 2 380 to 480 VAC, 450 to 600 VDC
3 380 to 480 VAC,

2 380 to 480 VAC
Allowable range
3 320 to 576 VAC, 2 340 to 576 VAC, 450 to 810 VDC
3 320 to 576 VAC,

2 340 to 576 VAC
Output
Voltage adjustment range (with V.ADJ) 22.5 to 29.5 V

Input variation influence
0.5% max. (at 3 320 to 576 VAC input, 100% load)
Load variation Influence
1.5% max. at 0 to 100% load
Temperature variation influence
0.05%/C max.
Overload protection
Yes, 125% of rated current typ.
Power Boost
120% of rated current
Yes
40 to 70C (40 to 158F)
Series Operation
Yes, Up to 2 units
Parallel Operation
Yes, Up to 2 units
EMI
EMS
Approved Standards
UL: UL 508 (Listing),

ANSI/ISA 12.12.01
EN/VDE: EN 50178,
Lloyds Register
UL: UL 508 (Listing), ANSI/ISA 12.12.01, UL 60950-1, CSA: C22.2 No.60950-1,

EN/VDE: EN 50178, EN 60950-1,
Lloyds Register
Fulfilled Standards
SELV (EN 50178), PELV

(EN 60204-1, EN 50178),
Safety of Power Transformers
(EN 61558-2-16), EN 50274 for
Terminal parts
SELV (EN 60950-1/EN 50178/UL 60950-1), PELV (EN 60204-1, EN 50178),

Safety of Power Transformers (EN 61558-2-16), EN 50274 for Terminal parts
IP20 by EN / IEC 60529
544
S8JC-ZS
Single-phase
Cost effective range with CE marking
The S8JC-ZS Lite family of metal framed power supplies is our best standard power
supply for material cost reduction. The range covers 15 W, 35 W, 50 W, 100 W, 150 W
and 350 W models and all are available with 5, 12 or 24 VDC output voltages.
CE marking
Overload and over voltage protection
Power ratings
Output voltage
Output current
Size in mm (H W D)
Order code
15 W
5V
3.0 A
97 36 79.5
S8JC-ZS01505CD-AC2
12 V
1.3 A
24 V
0.7 A
5V
7A
12 V
3.0 A
24 V
1.5 A
5V
10 A
12 V
4.2 A
24 V
2.1 A
5V
20 A
98 50 159
S8JC-ZS10005CD-AC2
12 V
8.5 A
97.6 38 159
S8JC-ZS10012CD-AC2
24 V
4.5 A
5V
30 A
98 43 199
S8JC-ZS15005CD-AC2
12 V
12.5 A
98 50 159
S8JC-ZS15012CD-AC2
24 V
6.5 A
5V
60 A
12 V
29 A
24 V
14.6 A
35 W
50 W
100 W
150 W
350 W
S8JC-ZS01512CD-AC2
S8JC-ZS01524CD-AC2
S8JC-ZS03505CD-AC2
98.3 38 129
S8JC-ZS03512CD-AC2
S8JC-ZS03524CD-AC2
S8JC-ZS05005CD-AC2
98.3 38 129
S8JC-ZS05012CD-AC2
S8JC-ZS05024CD-AC2
S8JC-ZS10024CD-AC2
S8JC-ZS15024CD-AC2
S8JC-ZS35005CD-AC2
115 50 193.6
S8JC-ZS35012CD-AC2
S8JC-ZS35024CD-AC2
115 50 194.8
Item
15 W
35 W
50 W
100 W
150 W
350 W
Efficiency (Typ.)
80% (24 V)
84% (24 V)
83% (24 V)
87% (24 V)
87% (24 V)
84% (24 V)
Input
Rated input voltage
200 to 240 VAC
Allowable range
185 to 264 VAC
Voltage adjustment
range(with V.ADJ)
10%
Output
Overload protection
Yes, 105% of rated current
Yes
20 to 60C (4 to 140F)
Series operation
No
Parallel operation
No
Fulfilled standards
EN 50178 (CE mark by self declaration)
Power supplies
Specifications
545
S8JX-G
Single-phase
Slim and economic power supply
The S8JX-G is Omrons cost effective power supply delivering Omrons quality and reliability. The range of this Power Supply covers up to 600 W, the output voltages are 5,
12, 15, 24 or 48 VDC. The low profile and multiple mounting options help you reduce
panel space. With a minimum life expectancy of 10 years and protection against overvoltage, over-current and short circuiting, the S8JX-G has the reliability you expect
from Omron.
Wide range in DC-output voltage (5 V, 12 V, 15 V, 24 V and 48 V) and wattage
(15 to 600 W)
LED indication power ON
Over-voltage, over-current, and short circuit protection
Vibration resistance 4,5 g
All models can be DIN-rail mounted
Approvals: UL, cUL, UL508 Listed, SEMI F47, VDE
Power ratings
Output voltage
Output current
Size in mm (H W D)
Order code
15 W
5V
3A
91 40 90
S8JX-G01505CD
12 V
1.3 A
S8JX-G01512CD
15 V
1A
S8JX-G01515CD
24 V
0.65 A
S8JX-G01524CD
48 V
0.35 A
S8JX-G01548CD
5V
7A
S8JX-G03505CD
12 V
3A
S8JX-G03512CD
15 V
2.4 A
S8JX-G03515CD
24 V
1.5 A
S8JX-G03524CD
48 V
0.75 A
5V
10 A
12 V
4.2 A
S8JX-G05012CD
24 V
2.1 A
S8JX-G05024CD
48 V
1.1 A
5V
20 A
12 V
8.5 A
S8JX-G10012CD
24 V
4.5 A
S8JX-G10024CD
48 V
2.1 A
5V
30 A
12 V
13 A
24 V
6.5 A
48 V
3.3 A
5V
60 A
12 V
27 A
24 V
14 A
48 V
7A
5V
120 A
12 V
53 A
S8JX-G60012C
24 V
27 A
S8JX-G60024C
48 V
13 A
S8JX-G60048C
35 W
50 W
100 W
150 W
300 W
600 W
546
S8JX-G03548CD
92 40 100
S8JX-G05005CD
S8JX-G05048CD
92 50 150
S8JX-G10005CD
S8JX-G10048CD
92 60 178
S8JX-G15005CD
S8JX-G15012CD
92 50 150
S8JX-G15024CD
S8JX-G15048CD
92 110 164.5
S8JX-G30005CD
S8JX-G30012CD
92 110 167
S8JX-G30024CD
S8JX-G30048CD
92 150 160
S8JX-G60005C
S8JX-G
Single-phase
Specifications
Item
15 W
35 W
50 W
100 W
150 W
300 W
600 W
81% (24 V)
84% (24 V)
86% (24 V)
88% (24 V)
90% (24 V)
88% (24 V)
84% (24 V)
Input
Rated input voltage
100 to 240 VAC
100 to 120 VAC/200 to 240 VAC,

Switchable
Allowable range
85 to 264 VAC, 80 to 370 VDC (DC is not applicable for the safety standards.)
85 to 132 VAC/170 to 264 VAC
Output
Voltage adjustment range 10% to 15% for 5 V to 24 V, 10% for 48 V (with V.ADJ)
(with V.ADJ)
0.4% max. (at 85 to 264 VAC input, 100% load)
0.8% max. at 0% to 100% load
influence
0.05%/C max.
Overload protection
Yes, 105% to 160% of rated current
Yes
10 to 60C (14 to 140F)
Series operation
Yes, up to 2 units
Yes, up to 2 units
Parallel operation
No
Yes, up to 5 units
EMI
EMS
Approved standards
EN/VDE: EN 50178 (=VDE0160), EN 60950-1 (=VDE0805)
Fulfilled standards
EN 50274 for terminal parts
UL: UL 508 (Recognition), UL 60950-1,

cUR: CSA C22.2 No. 107.1 and No. 60950-1,
EN/VDE: EN 50178 (=VDE0160), EN 60950-1
(=VDE0805)
Power supplies
547
S8JX-P
Single-phase
EMI Class B and Power Factor Correction
The main improvements provided by the S8JX-P models are harmonic current
suppression/PFC (Power Factor Correction) and EMI EN55011 Class B compliant. In addition, further functionalities have been implemented (applies only to 300 and 600 W
models):
Remote sensing, to compensate for voltage drops on the load lines
Remote control, using an external signal allows to turn the output ON and OFF
without removing the input voltage
Alarm output, informing about PS errors, such as fan failure or insufficient voltage
Power ratings
Output voltage
Output current
Size in mm (H W D)
Order code
50 W
5V
10 A
92 42 129
S8JX-P05005CD
12 V
4.2 A
S8JX-P05012CD
24 V
2.1 A
S8JX-P05024CD
48 V
1.1 A
5V
20 A
12 V
8.5 A
S8JX-P10012CD
24 V
4.5 A
S8JX-P10024CD
48 V
2.1 A
5V
30 A
12 V
13 A
S8JX-P15012CD
24 V
6.5 A
S8JX-P15024CD
48 V
3.3 A
5V
60 A
12 V
27 A
S8JX-P30012CD
24 V
14 A
S8JX-P30024CD
48 V
7A
5V
120 A
12 V
53 A
S8JX-P60012CD
24 V
27 A
S8JX-P60024CD
48 V
13 A
S8JX-P60048CD
100 W
150 W
300 W
600 W
S8JX-P05048CD
92 42 159
S8JX-P10005CD
S8JX-P10048CD
92 42 159
S8JX-P15005CD
S8JX-P15048CD
92 71 165
S8JX-P30005CD
S8JX-P30048CD
92 110 165
S8JX-P60005CD
Specifications
Item
50 W
100 W
150 W
300 W
600 W
82% (24 V)
87% (24 V)
88% (24 V)
87% (24 V)
85% (24 V)
Input
Rated input voltage
100 to 240 VAC
Allowable range
85 to 264 VAC, 80 to 370 VDC (DC is not applicable for the safety standards.)
Output
Voltage adjustment range 10% to 15% for 5 V to 24 V,

(with V.ADJ)
10% for 48 V (with V.ADJ)
0.8% max. at 0% to 100% load
influence
0.05%/C max.
Overload protection
Yes, 105% to 160% of rated current
Power Boost
Yes
10 to 70C (14 to 158F)
Series operation
Yes, up to 2 units
Parallel operation
No
EMI
EMS
Conforms to EN61000-3-2
Approved standards
UL: UL508 (Listing), UL60950-1, cUL: CSA C22.2 No. 107.1 and No. 60950-1,
EN/VDE: EN 50178 (=VDE0160), EN 60950-1 (=VDE0805),
Fulfilled standards
EN 50274 for Terminal parts
548
10% to 15% for 12 V and 24 V,

10% for 5 V and 48 V
115% of rated current for 24 V only
Yes, up to 5 units
S8TS
DC Backup
Industrial use, modular power supply for multiple
configurations
The S8TS is an expandable power supply; standard units can easily be snapped
together in parallel to provide you with ultimate flexibility. Expandable up to 4 units,
it can deliver a total power of 240W at 24VDC or a multi-output configuration.
Improves system reliability by building up N+1 redundancy
Standard unit; 60 W at 24 VDC, 30 W at 12 VDC and 25 W at 5 VDC
Battery back-up unit protects against power outage (see accessories)
Buffer unit protects against power glitches and outage (see accessories)
EMI Class B, UL Class 2, UL Class 1 division 2
Basic block
Order code
Output
voltage
Output current
24 V
Screw terminal type
Connector terminal type
With bus line connectors*1
Without bus line connectors*2
With bus line connectors*1
Without bus line connectors*2
2.5 A
S8TS-06024-E1*3
S8TS-06024
S8TS-06024F-E1
S8TS-06024F
12 V
2.5 A
S8TS-03012-E1
S8TS-03012
S8TS-03012F-E1
S8TS-03012F
5V
5A
S8TS-02505
S8TS-02505F
*1
*2
*3
One S8T-BUS01 connector and one S8T-BUS02 connector are included as accessories.
Bus line connectors can be ordered separately if necessary.
Conforms to EMI class B with DC minus terminal ground.
Accessories
Bus line connector
Type
Number of connectors
Order code
AC line + DC line bus

(For parallel operation)
1 connector
S8T-BUS01
10 connectors*1
S8T-BUS11
AC line bus (For series operation

or isolated operation)
1 connector
S8T-BUS02
10 connectors*2
S8T-BUS12
*1
*2
One package contains 10 S8T-BUS01 connectors.

One package contains 10 S8T-BUS02 connectors.
Specifications
5 V models
24/12 V models
Single operation
Single operation
Efficiency
62% min.
24 V models: 75%, 12 V models: 70% min.
Parallel operation
Power factor
0.8 min.
24 V models: 0.9 min., 12 V models: 0.8 min.
Input voltage
100 to 240 VAC, (85 to 264 VAC), single-phase
Output
voltage
Voltage adjustment
5 V 10% min.
24 V models: 22 to 28 V, 12 V models: 12 V 10% min.
Ripple
2% (p-p) max.
2% (p-p) max.
2% (p-p) max.
Input variation
0.5% max.
Temperature influence
0.05%/C max. (with rated input, 10 to 100% load)
Overcurrent protection
105 to 125% of rated load current, inverted L drop, automatic reset
yes
yes
Output indicator
yes (green)
yes (green)
yes (green)
Weight
450 g max.
450 g max.
450 g max.
Series operation
yes
yes
yes
Parallel operation
no
yes
yes
Size in mm (HxWxD)
120x43x120
Power supplies
Item
yes
549
S8EX
Single-phase
Open frame power supply, the best to build-in small
equipment
The S8EX is a open frame power supply to mount on small equipment directly. The
wide variation of output voltage and Power boost function 200% can contribute the
down sizing of equipment and the standardization of power supply
200% Power boost function
Connector terminals
Various installations are possible.
Wide operation temperature range: 10 to 70C
Power ratings
Input voltage
Output voltage
Output current
Size (W H D) [mm]
Order code
15 W
100 to 240 VAC
5V
3A
50 22 105
S8EX-N01505
12 V
1.3 A
S8EX-N01512
15 V
1A
S8EX-N01515
24 V
0.7 A
S8EX-N01524
48 V
0.32 A
5V
6A
12 V
2.5 A
S8EX-N03012
15 V
2A
S8EX-N03015
24 V
1.3 A
S8EX-N03024
48 V
0.65 A
5V
10 A
12 V
4.3 A
S8EX-BP05012
24 V
2.1 A
S8EX-BP05024
48 V
1.1 A
5V
20 A
12 V
8.5 A
S8EX-BP10012
24 V
4.3 A
S8EX-BP10024
48 V
2.1 A
5V
30 A
12 V
12.5 A
S8EX-BP15012
24 V
6.3 A
S8EX-BP15024
48 V
3.2 A
24 V
10 A
36 V
6.7 A
S8EX-BP24036
48 V
5A
S8EX-BP24048
30 W
50 W
100 W
150 W
240 W
S8EX-N01548
S8EX-N03005
50 27 105
S8EX-N03048
S8EX-BP05005
50 28.5 132
S8EX-BP05048
S8EX-P10005
62 35.5 155
S8EX-BP10048
S8EX-P15005
75 37.5 160
S8EX-BP15048
S8EX-BP24024
84 42.5 180
Specifications
Specification
15 W
30 W
50 W
100 W
150 W
240 W
Efficiency (Typ at 200 VAC)
78% (24 V)
86% (24 V)
85% (24 V)
86% (24 V)
87% (24 V)
90% (24 V)
Input
Rated Input Voltage
100 to 240 VAC
Allowable range
85 to 264 VAC
Output
Voltage adjustment range (with V.ADJ) 10%

2.0% max. (5 V), 1.5% max. (12, 24, 36, 48 V), at 0 to 100% load
Temperature variation influence
0.05%/C max.
Overload protection
Yes, 105 to 160% of rated current
Power Boost
Yes
10 to 70C (14 to 158F)
EMI
Conforms to EN 61204-3, EN55011 Class B
EMS
Approved Standards
UL: UR 60950-1, cUR: CSA C22.2 No.60950-1,

EN/VDE: EN 50178 (=VDE 0160), EN 60950-1 (=VDE 0805)
550
150% of rated current (5 V of 50 W, 12 V)

200% of rated current (24 V, 36 V, 48 V)
S8T-DCBU-01/-02
DC Backup
S8T-DCBU-01
The S8T-DCBU-01 battery backup block supplies 24 VDC for a fixed period of time during AC input outages to considerably improve system reliability.
Supplies 24 VDC for a long period of time during AC input outages
For system reliability improvement
Block power supply basic block is connected by the bus line connector
Simple system configuration
Alarms indicated on main unit and via alarm signal output
Product
Input voltage
Output voltage
Output current
Order code
DC back-up block
24 to 28 VDC
24 V
3.7 A/8 A
S8T-DCBU-01
Battery holder
Product
Input voltage
Output voltage
Output current
Type
Basic block
(use together with the DC
back-up block)
100 to 240 VAC
24 V
2.5 A
Screw
terminal type
With bus line connectors
S8TS-06024-E1
Without bus line connectors
S8TS-06024
Connector
terminal type
With bus line connectors
S8TS-06024F-E1
Without bus line connectors
S8TS-06024F
S82Y-TS01
Order code
Product
Back-up time
Overcurrent protection
operating point selector
Order code
Battery
8 min./3.7 A
5.7 A (typ.)
LC-R122R2PG
4 min./8.0 A
5.7 A (typ.)
11.7 A (typ.)
LC-R123R4PG
Note: The S8TS DC back-up block is for S8TS power supplies only.
Specifications
Item
Size in mm (HxWxD)
S8T-DCBU-01
120x43x130
Battery holder
82x185.7x222.25
Prevents equipment stoppage, data loss and other problems resulting from
momentary power failures. One S8T-DCBU-02 buffer block provides a back-up time of
500 ms at an output current of 2.5 A. Can be wired to the 24 VDC output from any
switch mode power supply.
Connects to all Omron power supplies: S8TS, S8VS, S82J, S82K, S8VM, S8PE
Connects to both single-phase and three-phase power supplies
Connects to an S8TS power supply via an S8T-BUS03 bus line connector
Parallel connection up to 4 units to increase back-up time and capacity
Complies with Semi F47-0200 standard
Input voltage
Output voltage (during back-up operation)
Output current
Order code
24 VDC (24 to 28 VDC)
22.5 V
2.5 A
S8T-DCBU-02
Type
Number of connectors
Order code
DC bus line connector (for use with S8TS only)
1 connector
S8T-BUS03
10 connectors
S8T-BUS13
Accessories
Specifications
Item
Size in mm (HWD)
S8T-DCBU-02
12043120
551
Power supplies
S8T-DCBU-02
S8VK-R
Redundancy unit
Redundancy Unit, contributes to build high reliable
systems
The S8VK-R is a redundancy unit used with S8VK Power Supply series. This unit
consists of 2 main diodes and additional function to build the redundancy of Power
supply and can save your design time by the combination of S8VK series with high reliability.
Redundancy operating LED for the status confirmation
A signal output for failure detection of power supplies
By adjusting the power supply voltage to light up Balance LED the lifetime of power
supplies will be more than twice.
Wide operation temperature range: 40 to 70C
Input voltage
Output current
Size (W H D) [mm]
Order code
5 to 30 VDC
10 A
32 90 110
S8VK-R10
10 to 60 VDC
20 A
40 125 113
S8VK-R20
Specifications
Type
S8VK-R10
Rated Input Voltage
5 to 30 V
S8VK-R20
10 to 60 V
Output Current
10 A
20 A
Voltage Drop
0.7 V max at 10 A
0.9 V max at 20 A
Operation Temperature range
40 to 70C
40 to 70C
Safety Standard
UL 60950-1, UL 508, cURus, cULus, EN 50178, EN 60950-1
Signal output
30 VDC 50 mA max by Photo MOS Relay
Redundancy OK Indicator
LED (Green), The function to know the both of PS operate normally.
Voltage Balance Indicator
LED (Green), The function to help to get the balance of 2 unit PS output voltage
Grounding terminal
552
Yes, One for Chassis grounding
S8M
Digital multi circuit protector

Digital multi circuit protector for DC output of power
supply
The S8M turns your machine directly into UL Class 2 compliant, maximum tripping current is 3,8 A per channel (adjustable). This unit controls up to 4 circuits. On top of this
you will get startup/shutdownsequence control, display and alarm functions, like
voltage, output current, runtime, and over temperature and external reset. These
functions can be set by using the front buttons or with the free support tool software.
These settings can be protected.
4 circuit protection up-to 4 A per channel
UL Class 2 (max. 3.8 A)
Emergency stop by external signal
Optimize use of available power through start-up sequence
Maintenance control
Input voltage
Communications
UL class 2 output
Size (W H D) [mm]
Order code
24 VDC
75 115 94
S8M-CP04
RS-232C
S8M-CP04-R
Compliant
S8M-CP04-RS
Specifications
Input characteristics
Approved Standards
S8M-CP04
Rated input voltage
S8M-CP04-R
S8M-CP04-RS
24 VDC (19.2 to 26.4 VDC)
Allowable input current
17.0 A max.
16.0 A max
Power consumption
10 W max
15 W max
Number of branches
Max tripping current
4.0 A
Adjustable tripping range
0.5 to 4.0 A in 0.1 A units
3.8 A
0.5 to 3.8 A in 0.1 A units
Internal voltage drop
0.5V max at 4 A
0.7V max at 3.8 A
UL: UL508(Listing), UR 60950-1

cUL, cUR: CSA C22.2 No. 107.1 and No.60950-1
UL: UL508(Listing, Class 2 per UL 1310), UR 60950-1

cUL, cUR: CSA C22.2 No. 107.1 and No.60950-1
Power supplies
Type
553
Timers
WHEN TIMING ACCURACY MATTERS!
H5CX The most complete digital timer
The H5CX series offers multiple-functions and -timing ranges for precise timing control, as well as
real twin-timing and memory function. These and other added-value features ensure that the H5CX
covers almost every possible user requirement in timers.
15 different time functions
Three color display value, red, orange or green
Models with instantaneous contact outputs
0.001 s to 9999 h, 10 ranges
Analog
Which mounting method is required?
DIN-rail
Plug/front
Which size is required?
554
17.5 mm
22.5 mm
H3DS
H3DK
H3YN
H3CR
T328
Page 558
T335
Page 559
T324
Page 560
T323
Page 561
Which type of timer is needed?
Digital
Timers
Motor timer
4824 mm
4848 mm
H8GN
timer/counter
H5CX
H2C
T429
Page 571
T322
Page 562
T338
Page 563
555
Selection table
Analog solid state timer
Model
H3DS-M
Outputs
Inputs
Selection criteria
Category
Mounting
Size
17.5 mm
Type
Multi-functional
Features
Functions
Remarks
H3DS-A
H3DS-F
H3DS-G
H3DS-X
Twin timer
Star-delta
Two-wired
H3DK-M
H3DK-S
H3DK-F
H3DK-G
H3DK-H
Multi-functional
Twin
timer
Star-delta
Power
OFF-delay
22.5 mm
Time limit
Instantaneous
Programmable
contacts
14 pins
11 pins
8 pins
Screw terminals
Screw-less clamp
terminals
Screw-less clamp
sockets
Voltage input
Transistor
Relay
SCR
Relay
output
type
Time
range
556
H3DS-S
DIN-rail
SPDT
(2x)
SPST-NO
(2)
DPDT
4PDT
Total time
range
0.1 s to 120 h 1 s to 120 h
2 s to 120 h
0.1 s to 12 h 1 s to 120 s
0.1 s to 120 h 0.1 s to

1,200 h
0.1 s to
1,200 h
0.1 s to
1,200 h
1 s to 120 s
0.1 s to 120 s
Number of
sub ranges
12
2 (model
dependent)
12
Supply voltage
24 to
24 to
24 to
24 to
24 to
24 to
24 to
24 to
24 to
24 to
230 VAC or 230 VAC or 230 VAC or 230 VAC or 230 VAC or 230 VAC or 240 VAC/DC 240 VAC/DC 240 VAC/DC 240 VAC/
24 to 48 VDC 24 to 48 VDC 24 to 48 VDC 24 to 48 VDC 24 to 48 VDC 24 to 48 VDC or 12 VDC
or 12 VDC
or 12 VDC
DC, 240 to
440 VAC,
12 VDC
100 to
120 VAC, 200
to 240 VAC, 24
to
48 VAC/DC
Number of operating
modes
ON-delay
Flicker OFF start
Flicker ON start
Signal
ON-/OFF-delay
Signal OFF-delay
Interval (signal or
power start)
One-shot output
(ON-delay)
ON-delay (fixed)
Independent
ON/OFF time setting
Star-delta
Transistor
Page/Quick Link
558
559
Timers
Analog solid state timer
Model
H3YN
Features
Functions
H3CR-F
H3CR-G
H3CR-H
H5CX
Multifunctional
Twin timer
Star-delta
Power
OFF-delay
Multifunctional
Mounting
Socket/on panel
Size
21.5 mm
1/16 DIN
Type
Miniature
Time limit
Instantaneous
Programmable
contacts
Motor timer
H8GN
H2C
1/32 DIN
1/16 DIN
Preset counter/
timer
Motor timer
14 pins
11 pins
8 pins
Screw terminals
Screw-less clamp
terminals
Screw-less clamp
sockets
Voltage input
Transistor
Relay
SCR
Relay
output
type
SPDT
SPST-NO
(2x)
DPDT
4PDT
Total time
range
0.1 s to 10 h
(model
dependent)
0.05 s to 300 h, 0.1 0.05 s to 30 h or 1.2 0.5 s to 120 s

s to 600 h (model s to 300 h (model
dependent)
dependent)
0.05 s to 12 s, 1.2 s 0.001 s to 9999 h

to 12 min
(configurable)
0.000 s to 9999 h
(configurable)
0.2 s to 30 h
Number of
sub ranges
14
10
15
Supply voltage
24, 100 to 120, 200

to 230 VAC,
12, 24, 48, 100 to
110, 125 VDC
100 to 240 VAC,

100 to 125 VDC,
24 to 48 VAC,
12 to 48 VDC
100 to 240 VAC,

12 VDC,
24 VAC/DC, 48 to
125 VDC
100 to 120 VAC,

200 to 240 VAC
100 to 120 VAC,

200 to 240 VAC,
24 VAC/DC,
48 VDC, 100 to
125 VDC
100 to 240 VAC,

24 VAC,
12 to 24 VDC
24 VDC
24, 48, 100, 110,

115, 120, 200, 220,
240 VAC
Number of operating
modes
6 (model
dependent)
15
Time
range
Remarks
H3CR-A
Digital timer
ON-delay
Flicker OFF start
Flicker ON start
Signal
ON-/OFF-delay
Signal OFF-delay
Interval (signal or
power start)
One-shot output (ONdelay)
ON-delay (fixed)
Independent
ON/OFF time setting
Star-delta
Transistor
Page/Quick Link
560
561
562
571
563
Standard
Available
Timers
Outputs
Inputs
Selection criteria
Category
No/not available
557
H3DS

DIN-rail mounted, standard 17.5 mm wide solid state
timer range
This broad range of timers includes many functionalities and has a wide AC/DC power
supply range. Models with screwless clamp connection available.
17.5 mm width, modular 45 mm
DIN-rail mounting
24-48 VDC and 24-230 VAC
0.1 s to 120 h, 7 ranges
Type
Supply voltage
Control output
Time setting
range
Operating modes
0.1 s to120 h
Order code
Screw
terminal type
Screw-less
clamp type
ON-delay, flicker OFF start, flicker ON start,

signal ON/OFF-delay, signal OFF-delay,
interval, one-shot
H3DS-ML
H3DS-MLC
Standard timer
ON-delay, flicker ON start, interval, oneshot
H3DS-SL
H3DS-SLC
Single function timer
ON-delay
H3DS-AL
H3DS-ALC
Multi-functional timer
24 to 230 VAC
(50/60 Hz)/
24 to 48 VDC
SPDT
Twin timer
Relay SPDT
0.1 s to 12 h
Flicker OFF start, flicker ON start
H3DS-FL
H3DS-FLC
Star-delta timer
2 Relay SPST-NO
1 s to 120 s
Star-delta
H3DS-GL
H3DS-GLC
SCR output
0.1 s to 120 h
ON-delay
H3DS-XL
H3DS-XLC
Two-wired timer
24 to 230 VAC/VDC
(50/60 Hz)
Specifications
Terminal block
Screw terminal type: Clamps two 2.5 mm2 max. bar terminals without sleeves
Screw-less clamp type: Clamps two 1.5 mm2 max. bar terminals without sleeves
Mounting method
DIN-rail mounting
Power reset
Minimum power-off time: 0.1 s, 0.5 s for H3DS-G
Reset voltage
2.4 VAC/VDC max., 1.0 VAC/VDC max. for H3DS-X
Voltage input
Max. permissible capacitance between input lines (terminals B1 and A2): 2,000 pF
Load connectable in parallel with inputs (terminals B1 and A1)
H-level: 20.4 to 253 VAC/20.4 to 52.8 VDC
L-level: 0 to 2.4 VAC/VDC
Control output
Contact output: 5 A at 250 VAC with resistive load (cos = 1)
Ambient temperature
Operating: -10 to 55C (with no icing)
5 A at 30 VDC with resistive load (cos = 1)

Storage: -25 to 65C (with no icing)
Accuracy of operating time
1% max. of FS (1% 10 ms max. at 1.2 s range)
Setting error
10% 50 ms max. of FS
Influence of voltage
0.7% max. of FS (0.7% 10 ms max. at 1.2 s range)
Influence of temperature
5% max. of FS (5% 10 ms max. at 1.2 s range)
Life expectancy (not H3DS-X)
Mechanical: 10 million operations min. (under no load at 1,800 operations/h)

Electrical: 100,000 operations min. (5 A at 250 VAC, resistive load at 360 operations/h)
Size in mm(HxWxD)
558
80x17.5x73
H3DK

DIN-rail mounted, standard 22.5 mm wide solid state
timer range
The H3DK series of timers provides a wide AC/DC power supply and time range to reduce the number of items.
Size in mm (HWD): 7922.5100
DIN-rail mounting
12 VDC and 24-240 VAC/VDC (except -H). 240-440 VAC for -G
Wide time setting range: 0.10 s - 1,200 h (except -H and -G), 12 ranges
(for -M and -S)
Type
Supply voltage
Control output
Time setting range
Operating modes
Order code
Multi-functional
standard timers
12 VDC
SPDT
0.1 s to 1200 h
H3DK-M1A DC12
DPDT

signal ON/OFF-delay, signal OFF-delay, interval, one-shot
SPDT
ON-delay, flicker ON start, interval, one-shot
H3DK-S1A DC12
H3DK-S2A DC12 *1
DPDT
24 to 240 VAC/VDC

signal ON/OFF-delay, signal OFF-delay, interval, one-shot
H3DK-M1 AC/DC24-240
DPDT
SPDT
SPDT
ON-delay, flicker ON start, interval, one-shot
H3DK-S1 AC/DC24-240
12 VDC
SPDT
0.1 s to 12 h
Flicker OFF start, flicker ON start
2 SPDT
1 to 120 s
Star-delta
12 VDC
H3DK-GE AC/DC240-440
240 to 440 VAC

SPDT
100 to 120 VAC

200 to 240 VAC
*1
H3DK-GA DC12
H3DK-G AC/DC24-240
24 to 240 VAC/VDC
Power OFF-delay timer 24 to 48 VAC/VDC
H3DK-FA DC12
H3DK-F AC/DC24-240
24 to 240 VAC/VDC
Star-delta timer
H3DK-M2 AC/DC24-240 *1
H3DK-S2 AC/DC24-240 *1
DPDT
Twin timer
H3DK-M2A DC12 *1
1 to 120 s
Signal OFF-delay
H3DK-HBL AC/DC24-48
0.1 to 12 s
H3DK-HBS AC/DC24-48
1 to 120 s
H3DK-HCL AC100-120V
0.1 to 12 s
H3DK-HCS AC100-120V
1 to 120 s
H3DK-HDL AC200-240V
0.1 to 12 s
H3DK-HDS AC200-240V
One output can be set to instantaneous.
85 to 110% of rated supply voltage (90 to 110% for the 12 VDC models).
Power reset
Minimum power-off time: H3DK-M/S, H3DK-F: 0.1 s, H3DK-G: 0.5 s. (Not for H3DK-H)
Reset voltage
10% of rated voltage. (Not for H3DK-H)
Voltage input (H3DK-M/-S)
24 to 240 VAC/DC: H-level 20.4 to 264 VAC/VDC, L-level 0 to 2.4 VAC/VDC.
Timers
Specifications
12 VDC: H-level 10.8 to 13.2 VDC, L-level 0 to 1.2 VDC.

Control output
Contact output: 5 A at 250 VAC with resistive load (cos = 1), 5 A at 24 VDC (30 VDC for -M/-S) with resistive load (not for H3DK-GE)
Ambient temperature
Operating: -20 to 55C (with no icing), storage: -40 to 70C (with no icing)
1% of FS max. (1% 10 ms max. at 1.2 s range)
Setting error
10% of FS 0.05 s max.
Minimum input signal width
50 ms (start input) (Only for H3DK-M/S)
0.5% of FS max. (0.5% 10 ms max. at 1.2 s range). For H3DK-G: 0.5% of FS max.
2% of FS max. (2% 10 ms max. at 1.2s range). For H3DK-G: 2% of FS max.
Life expectancy
Mechanical: 10 million operations min. (under no load at 1,800 operations/h)

Electrical: 100,000 operations min. (5 A at 250 VAC, resistive load at 360 operations/h)
IP30 (terminal block: IP20)
Terminal block
Clamps two 2.5 mm2 max. bar terminals without sleeves
Size in mm (HWD)
7922.5100
559
H3YN

Miniature timer with multiple time ranges and multiple
operating modes
H3YN features 4 multi-operating modes: ON-delay, interval,
flicker ON start and flicker OFF start.
Size in mm (HWD): 2821.552.6
Plug-in
All supply voltages available
0.1 s to 10 h
DPDT (5A) or 4PDT (3A)
Supply voltage
Functions
Time-limit contact
12 VDC
ON-delay
Interval
Flicker ON
Flicker OFF
DPDT
Order code
Short-time range model (0.1 s to 10 min)
Long-time range model (0.1 min to 10 h)
H3YN-2 12DC
H3YN-21 12DC
H3YN-2 24AC
H3YN-21 24AC
H3YN-2 24DC
H3YN-21 24DC
100 to 120 VAC
H3YN-2 100-120AC
H3YN-21 100-120AC
200 to 230 VAC
H3YN-2 200-230AC
H3YN-21 200-230AC
H3YN-4 12DC
H3YN-41 12DC
24 VAC
H3YN-4 24AC
H3YN-41 24AC
24 VDC
H3YN-4 24DC
H3YN-41 24DC
100 to 120 VAC
H3YN-4 100-120AC
H3YN-41 100-120AC
200 to 230 VAC
H3YN-4 200-230AC
H3YN-41 200-230AC
24 VAC
24 VDC
12 VDC
4PDT
Accessories
Connecting socket
Timer
Hold-down clips
DIN-rail mounting/
front-connecting socket
Back-connecting socket
Applicable socket
Order code
PCB terminal
Y92H-3 (pair)
H3YN-2/-21
PYF08A, PYF08A-N, PYF08A-E
PY08-02
PYF08A, PYF08A-N, PYF08A-E,

H3YN-4/-41
PY14-02
PY08, PY08-02, PY14-02
Y92H-4
Specifications
Item
H3YN-2/-4
H3YN-21/-41
Time ranges
0.1 s to 10 min (1 s, 10 s, 1 min, or 10 min max. selectable)
0.1 min to 10 h (1 min, 10 min, 1 h, or 10 h max. selectable)
24, 100 to 120, 200 to 230 VAC (50/60 Hz)

12, 24, 48, 100 to 110, 125 VDC
Pin type
Plug-in
Operating mode
ON-delay, interval, flicker OFF start, or flicker ON start (selectable with DIP switch)
85 to 110% of rated supply voltage (12 VDC: 90 to 110% of rated supply voltage)
Reset voltage
10% min. of rated supply voltage
Control outputs
DPDT: 5 A at 250 VAC, resistive load (cos = 1), 4PDT: 3 A at 250 VAC, resistive load (cos = 1)
1% FS max. (1 s range: 1% 10 ms max.)
Setting error
10% 50 ms FS max.
Reset time
Min. power-opening time: 0.1 s max. (including halfway reset)
2% FS max.
2% FS max.
Ambient temperature
Operating: 10 to 50C (with no icing), storage: 25 to 65C (with no icing)
IP40
Size in mm (HWD)
2821.552.6
560
H3CR

DIN 48 48 mm multi-functional timer series
This elaborate range of solid state timers provides you with a multi-functional timer,
twin timer, star-delta timer and a power OFF-delay timer.
48 48 mm front-panel/plug-in
High-/low-voltage models (except -H and -G)
0.05 s to 300 h (except -H and -G)
DPDT, 5 A at 250 VAC
Transistor 100 mA at 30 VDC
Output
Number of pins
Supply voltage
Time range
Operating mode
Relay DPDT
11
100 to 240 VAC/100 to 125 VDC
0.05 s to 300 h
ON-delay, flicker OFF start, H3CR-A 100-240AC/100-125DC

flicker ON start, signal ON/ H3CR-A 24-48AC/12-48DC
OFF-delay, signal OFF-delay,
H3CR-AS 24-48AC/12-48DC
interval
24 to 48 VAC/12 to 48 VDC
Transistor
Relay DPDT
0.05 s to 300 h
100 to 240 VAC/100 to 125 VDC
0.05 s to 300 h
Transistor
Relay SPDT
100 to 240 VAC/100 to 125 VDC
ON-delay, flicker ON start,

interval, one-shot
11
8
100 to 240 VAC
H3CR-A8E 24-48AC/DC
0.05 s to 30 h
Flicker OFF start
H3CR-F 24AC/DC
100 to 240 VAC
H3CR-F8 100-240AC
100 to 240 VAC
H3CR-F8 24AC/DC
0.05 s to 30 h
Flicker ON start
H3CR-FN 24AC/DC
100 to 240 VAC
H3CR-F8N 100-240AC
H3CR-F8N 24AC/DC
Star-delta
100 to 120 VAC
0.05 to 12 s
Power OFF-delay
H3CR-H8LS 100-120AC
H3CR-H8LS 200-240AC
200 to 240 VAC
H3CR-H8LS 24AC/DC
24 VAC/VDC
100 to 120 VAC
H3CR-G8EL 100-120AC
H3CR-G8EL 200-240AC
200 to 240 VAC

8
H3CR-FN 100-240AC
24 VAC/VDC
100 to 120 VAC
DPDT
H3CR-F 100-240AC
24 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
Time-limit contact and
instantaneous contact
H3CR-A8 24-48AC/12-48DC
H3CR-A8E 100-240AC/100-125DC
24 VAC/VDC
11
H3CR-A8 100-240AC/100-125DC
H3CR-A8S 24-48AC/12-48DC
0.05 s to 300 h
24 to 48 VAC/VDC
Relay DPDT
Order code
H3CR-H8LM 100-120AC
0.05 to 12 m
200 to 240 VAC
H3CR-H8LM 200-240AC
24 VAC/VDC
H3CR-H8LM 24AC/DC
Name/specifications
Order code
Name/specifications
Flush-mounting adapter
Y92F-30
Time setting ring
Protective cover
Y92A-48B
Front connecting socket 8-pin, finger-safe P2CF-08-E

type, DIN-rail
Panel cover
Timers
Accessories
Order code
Setting a specific time
Y92S-27
Limiting the setting range
Y92S-28
Light grey (5Y7/1)
Y92P-48GL
Black (N1.5)
Y92P-48GB
Front connecting socket 11-pin, finger-safe P2CF-11-E

type, DIN-rail
Back connecting socket 8-pin
11-pin
P3G-08
P3GA-11
Specifications
0.2% FS max. (0.2% 10 ms max. in a range of 1.2 s)
0.2% FS max. (0.2% 10 ms max. in a range of 1.2 s)
1% FS max. (1% 10 ms max. in a range of 1.2 s)
Ambient temperature
Operating: 10 to 55C (with no icing),

storage: 25 to 65C (with no icing)
Life expectancy
Mechanical
20,000,000 operations min. (under no load at 1,800 operations/h)
Electrical
100,000 operations min. (5 A at 250 VAC, resistive load at 1,800 operations/h)
Size in mm (HWD)
484866.6 (H3CR-A, -F), 484878 (H3CR-G, -H)
Setting error
5% FS 50 ms
IP40 (panel surface)
Weight
Approx. 90 g
561
H5CX
Digital timers
The most complete digital standard timer on the market
H5CX offers you the most complete series of products on the market today.
Based on extensive customer research, these new timers have been designed with
value added features that users both need and appreciate.
Size in mm (HWD): 484859 to 78 mm
Three color display value, red, green or orange
Models with Instantaneous Contact Outputs
0.001 s to 9999 h, 10 ranges
Input NPN, PNP and contact
Output type
Supply voltage
Functions
External connection
Size in mm (HWD) Inputs
Contact output
100 to 240 VAC
484884
100 to 240 VAC
Signal ON-delay
Signal ON-delay 2
Power ON-delay 1
Power ON-delay 2
Repeat cycle 1
Repeat cycle 2
Signal OFF-delay
Interval
Cumulative
ON/OFF-duty adjustable flicker
Screw terminals
Transistor output
A:
A-1:
A-2:
A-3:
b:
b-1:
d:
E:
F:
Z:
toff:
ton:
Twin timer OFF start

Twin timer ON start
12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC
12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC
Contact output
100 to 240 VAC
Transistor output
100 to 240 VAC
12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC
12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC
Contact output
100 to 240 VAC

12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC
Transistor output
484865
484884
H5CX-AS-N
H5CX-ASD-N
484865
11-pin socket
484869.7
Signal, Reset, Gate H5CX-A11-N

(NPN/PNP inputs) H5CX-A11D-N
H5CX-A11S-N
H5CX-A11SD-N
8-pin socket
484869.7
Signal, Reset
(NPN inputs)
100 to 240 VAC
12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC
Transistor output
12 to 24 VDC
H5CX-L8-N
H5CX-L8D-N
H5CX-L8S-N
100 to 240 VAC
H5CX-L8SD-N
12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC
Contact output
Models with instantaneous contact outputs
Order code
Signal, Reset, Gate H5CX-A-N

(NPN/PNP inputs) H5CX-AD-N
A-2:
b:
E:
Z:
Power ON-delay 1
Repeat cycle 1
Interval
ON/OFF-duty adjustable flicker
toff:
ton:
Twin timer OFF start 1

Twin timer ON start 1
A:
F:
Signal ON-delay 1
Cumulative
H5CX-L8E-N
H5CX-L8ED-N
Screw terminals
484865
Signal, Reset, Gate H5CX-BWSD-N

(NPN/PNP inputs)
Accessories
Name
Order code
Y92F-30
Waterproof packing
Y92S-29
P2CF-08-E
Front-connecting socket 8-pin, finger safe type

11-pin, finger safe type
P2CF-11-E
8-pin
P3G-08
11-pin
P3GA-11
Y92A-48
Hard cover
Y92A-48F1
Soft cover
Front panels
(4-digit models)
Light gray
Y92P-CXT4G
White
Y92P-CXT4S
Specifications
Item
H5CX-A_
Display
7-segment, negative transmissive LCD
H5CX-A11_
H5CX-L8_
Present value: 12 mm high characters

red, orange or green (programmable)
red
Set value: 6 mm high characters, green

Digits
4 digits
Total time range
0.001 s to 9,999 h (configurable)
Timer mode
Elapsed time (Up), remaining time (Down) (selectable)
Input signals
Signal, reset, gate
Key protection
Yes
Memory backup
EEPROM (overwrites: 100,000 times min.) that can store data for 10 years min.
Ambient temperature
Operating: 10 to 55C (no icing or condensation), side-by-side mounting: 10 to 50C
Case color
Black (N1.5)
562
Signal, reset
H2C
Motor timers
DIN-sized (4848) motor timer with
variable time ranges
This motor timer series provides you with many features, such as ON-delay,
time indicator, moving pointer and synchronous motor. Moreover, the LED indicator
shows the time operation, time range and the rated voltage.
DIN-sized 48 48mm
Front-panel/plug-in/DIN-rail
All supply voltages available
0.2 s to 30 h
SPDT, 6A at 250VAC
Operation/resetting system Internal connection
Terminal
Time-limit
contact
Instantaneous Time range code

contact
Order code
Time-limit operation/
electric resetting
11-pin socket
SPDT
SPDT
H2C-RSA 110AC
Separate motor and clutch connection
1.25 s to 30 h
in 5 ranges
H2C-RSA 220AC
H2C-RSA 24AC
0.2 s to 6 h
in 5 ranges
H2C-RSB 110AC
H2C-RSB 220AC
H2C-RSB 24AC
0.5 s to 12 h
in 5 ranges
H2C-RSC 110AC
H2C-RSC 220AC
H2C-RSC 24AC
Time-limit operation/
self-resetting
Separate motor and clutch connection
11-pin socket
SPDT
SPDT
1.25 s to 30 h
in 5 ranges
H2C-SA 110AC
H2C-SA 220AC
H2C-SA 24AC
0.2 s to 6 h
in 5 ranges
H2C-SB 110AC
H2C-SB 220AC
H2C-SB 24AC
0.5 s to 12 h
in 5 ranges
H2C-SC 110AC
H2C-SC 220AC
H2C-SC 24AC
Note: Other voltages available on request
Accessories
Order code
Name/specifications
DIN-rail mounting/
front-connecting socket
P2CF-08-E
Hold-down clip (pair)
Order code
P2CF-11-E
8-pin, screw terminal
P3G-08
Flush mounting adapter
Y92F-30
11-pin
P3GA-11
Time setting ring
Y92A-Y1
For PL08 and PL11 sockets
Y92H-1
For PF085A socket
Y92H-2
Timers
Name/specifications
Specifications
Reset voltage
10% max. of rated supply voltage
Reset time
Min. power-opening time: 0.5 s, min. pulse width: 0.5 s
Control outputs
6 A at 250 VAC, resistive load (cos = 1)
Mounting method
Flush mounting (except for H2C-F/-FR models), surface-mounting, DIN-rail mounting
Life expectancy
Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations min.

Motor life expectancy
20,000 h
Accuracy of operating time 0.5% FS max. (1% max. at 0.2 to 6 s for the time range code B or at 0.5 to 12 s for the time range code C)
Setting error
2% FS max.
Reset time
0.5 s max.
1% FS max.
2% FS max.
Ambient temperature
Operating: 10 to 50C
Case color
Light grey (Munsell 5Y7/1)
IP40 (panel surface)
Size in mm (HWD)
484877.5
563
Counters
MULTIFUNCTIONAL PRESET COUNTER
H7CX Designed with value added features
The H7CX series offers the ultimate in versatility and intuitive programming.
7 basic functions in one
Switching color on threshold, green, orange & red
Twin counter mode
12 different outputs modes
Display 6 digits from -100 K +1 up to 1 M -1
Totalising
48 24 mm
(1/32 DIN)
Which type of application?
564
Totalising
Timer
Speed
H7EC
H7ET
H7ER
T423
Page 568
T424
Page 569
T425
Page 570
Pre-set counter
time count
Cam positioner
48 24 mm
(1/32 DIN)
48 48 mm
(1/16 DIN)
96 96 mm
(1/4 DIN)
H8GN
counter/timer
H7CX
H8PS
T429
Page 571
T422
Page 572
F424
Page 573
Counters
What is the type of counting application?
565
Selection table
Self-powered total
Self-powered timer
Self-powered tachometer
Model
H7EC
H7ET
H7ER
Color
Functions
Supply
voltage
Terminals
Features
Inputs
Outputs
Selection
criteria
Category
566
Display
LCD
Size
1/32 DIN
Control outputs
5 stage
Total
Time
Preset
Batch
Dual
Tachometer
Control inputs
No-voltage, PNP/NPN, DC-voltage,

AC/DC multi-voltage
No-voltage, PNP/NPN, DC-voltage,

AC/DC multi-voltage
No-voltage,
PNP/NPN
Dual operation
Number of digits
4 or 5
NPN/PNP switch
Back-lit
External reset
Manual reset
Number of banks
Built-in sensor power supply
IP rating
IP66
IP66
IP66
Screw terminals
PCB terminals
11-pin socket
100 to 240 VAC
12 to 24 VDC
24 VDC
Comms
Up
Down
Up/down
Reversible
Speed
0 to 30 Hz or 0 to 1 kHz
1 or 10 kHz
Counting range
0 to 99999999
0.0 h to 999999.9 h <-->

0.0 h to 3999 d 23.9 h or
0 s to 999 h 59 min 59 s <-->
0.0 min to 9999 h 59.9 min
1000 s-1 or 1000 min-1; 1000 s-1 or

1000 min-1 <--> 10000 min-1
Beige
Black
Page/Quick Link
568
569
570
Counters
Pre-set counter/timer
Pre-set counter
Cam positioner
Model
H8GN
H7CX
H8PS
Color
Display
LCD negative transmissive
Size
1/32 DIN
1/16 DIN
LCD negative transmissive

1/4 DIN
Control outputs
1 relay (SPDT)
1 relay (SPDT), transistor
NPN or PNP, cam outputs 8/16/32, run out,

tachometer
5 stage
Total
Time
Preset
Batch
Dual
Tachometer
Control inputs
No-voltage
No-voltage,
PNP/NPN
Encoder
Dual operation
Number of digits
PV: 4, SV: 4
PV: 4, SV: 4
or PV: 6, SV: 6
NPN/PNP switch
Back-lit
External reset
Manual reset
8 (16- and 32-output models only)
Number of banks
Built-in sensor power supply
IP rating
IP66
IP66
IP40
Screw terminals
PCB terminals
11-pin socket
100 to 240 VAC
12 to 24 VDC
24 VDC
Comms
Up
Down
Up/down
Reversible
Speed
Counting range
-999 to 9999
-99999 to 999999
Beige
Black
Page/Quick Link
571
572
573
Standard
Available
Counters
Functions
Supply
voltage
Terminals
Features
Inputs
Outputs
Selection
criteria
Counter type
No/not available
567
H7EC
Totalisers
Self-powered LCD totaliser
The H7E series is available with large display with 8.6 mm character height.
It includes models with backlight for improved visibility in dimly lit places.
The H7E family includes total counters, time counters, tachometers and
PCB mounted counters.
Size in mm (HWD): 244855.5, 1/32 DIN size housing
8 digits, 8.6 mm character height
Black or light-grey housing
Dual input speed: 30 Hz <-> 1 kHz
Short body: all models have a depth of 48.5 mm
Count input
Max. counting speed
Display
Order code
Light grey body
Black body
No-voltage
30 Hz <-> 1 kHz (switchable)
7-segment LCD
H7EC-N
H7EC-N-B
PNP/NPN universal DC
voltage input
30 Hz <-> 1 kHz (switchable)
7-segment LCD
H7EC-NV
H7EC-NV-B
7-segment LCD with backlight
H7EC-NV-H
H7EC-NV-BH
AC/DC multi-voltage input
20 Hz
7-segment LCD
H7EC-NFV
H7EC-NFV-B
H7EC-NFV-_
H7EC-N-_
Specifications
Item
H7EC-NV-_/H7EC-NV-_H
Operating mode
Up type
Mounting method
Flush mounting
External connections
Screw terminals, optional wire-wrap terminals
Number of digits
Display
7-segment LCD with or without backlight, zero suppression (character height: 8.6 mm)
Max. counting speed
30 Hz/1 kHz
Case color
Light grey or black (-B models)
Attachment
Waterproof packing, flush mounting bracket
Supply voltage
Backlight model: 24 VDC (0.3 W max.)

(only for backlight)
No-backlight model: Not required
(powered by built-in battery)
Not required (powered by built-in battery)
Count input
High (logic) level: 4.5 to 30 VDC

Low (logic) level: 0 to 2 VDC
(input impedance: Approx. 4.7 k)
High (logic) level:

24 to 240 VAC/VDC, 50/60 Hz
Low (logic) level:
0 to 2.4 VAC/VDC, 50/60 Hz
Reset input
20 Hz
No voltage input
Maximum short-circuit impedance:
10 k max.
Short-circuit residual voltage: 0.5 V max.
Minimum open impedance: 750 k min.
30 Hz/1 kHz
No voltage input
10 k max.
Minimum signal width
20 Hz: 25 ms, 30 Hz: 16.7 ms, 1 KHz: 0.5 ms
Reset system
External reset and manual reset: Minimum signal width of 20 ms
Ambient temperature
Operating: 10 to 55C (with no condensation or icing), storage: 25 to 65C (with no condensation or icing)
Front-panel: IP66, NEMA4, terminal block: IP20
Battery life (reference)
7 years min. with continuous input at 25C (lithium battery)
Size in mm (HWD)
244855.5
568
H7ET
Totalisers
Self-powered time counter
Size in mm (HWD) 244855.5, 1/32 DIN size housing
Dual time range 999999.9 h <-> 3999 d 23.9 h
or 999 h 59 m 59 s <-> 9999 h 59.9m
Timer input
Display
Order code
Time range 999999.9h <-> 3999d23.9h (switchable) Time range 999h59m59s <-> 9999h59.9m
Light grey body
Black body
Light grey body
Black body
No-voltage input
7-segment LCD
H7ET-N
H7ET-N-B
H7ET-N1
H7ET-N1-B
PNP/NPN universal
DC voltage input
7-segment LCD
H7ET-NV
H7ET-NV-B
H7ET-NV1
H7ET-NV1-B
H7ET-NV-H
H7ET-NV-BH
H7ET-NV1-H
H7ET-NV1-BH
AC/DC multi-voltage input
7-segment LCD
H7ET-NFV
H7ET-NFV-B
H7ET-NFV1
H7ET-NFV1-B
H7ET-NFV_-_
Specifications
H7ET-NV_-_/H7ET-NV_-_H
Accumulating
Mounting method
Flush mounting
Screw terminals
Display
Number of digits
Case color
Light grey or black (-B models)
Attachment
Waterproof packing, flush mounting bracket, time unit labels
Supply voltage
Backlight model: 24 VDC (0.3 W max.) Not required (powered by built-in battery)
(for backlight)
No-backlight model: Not required
(powered by built-in battery)
Timer input

(Input impedance: Approx. 4.7 k)
Reset input
High (logic) level:

24 to 240 VAC/VDC, 50/60 Hz
Low (logic) level:
0 to 2.4 VAC/VDC, 50/60 Hz
No voltage input
10 k max.
H7ET-N_-_
No voltage input
10 k max.
Minimum pulse width
1s
Reset system
External reset and manual reset: Minimum signal width of 20 ms
Ambient temperature
Time accuracy
100 ppm (25C)
Front-panel: IP66, NEMA4 with waterproof packing, terminal block: IP20
Size in mm (HWD)
244855.5
Counters
Item
Operating mode
569
H7ER
Totalisers
Self-powered tachometer
Size in mm (HWD) 244853.5, 1/32 DIN size housing
Dual revolution display
Count input
Display
Order code
Max. revolutions displayed (applicable encoder resolution)
1,000 s-1 (1 pulse/rev.)
1,000 min-1 (60 pulse/rev.)
1,000.0 s-1 (10 pulse/rev)

1,000.0 min-1 (600 pulse/rev) <->
10,000 min-1 (60 pulse/rev) (switchable)
Light grey body
Black body
No-voltage input
7-segment LCD
H7ER-N
H7ER-N-B
Light grey body
Black body
PNP/NPN universal
DC voltage input
7-segment LCD
H7ER-NV
H7ER-NV-H
H7ER-NV-B
H7ER-NV1
H7ER-NV1-B
H7ER-NV-BH
H7ER-NV1-H
H7ER-NV1-BH
H7ER-NV-_/H7ER-NV-_H
Specifications
Item
H7ER-NV1-_/H7ER-NV1-_H
Operating mode
Up type
Mounting method
Flush mounting
Screw terminals, wire-wrap terminals
Display
Number of digits
Max. revolutions displayed
1,000.0 s-1 (when encoder resolution 1,000 s-1 (when encoder resolution of 1 pulse/rev is used)
of 10 pulse/rev is used)
1,000 min-1 (when encoder resolution of 60 pulse/rev is used)
1,000.0 min-1 (when encoder resolution of 600 pulse/rev is used)
<-> 10,000 min-1 (when encoder resolution of 60 pulse/rev is used)
(switchable with switch)
Attachment
Waterproof packing, flush mounting bracket, revolution unit labels
Supply voltage
Backlight model: 24 VDC (0.3 W max.) (for backlight lit)

No-backlight model: Not required (powered by built-in battery)
Not required (powered by built-in battery)
Count input

(Input impedance: Approx. 4.7 k)
No voltage input
10 k max.
Max. counting speed
10 kHz
Minimum signal width
10 kHz: 0.05 ms, 1 kHz: 0.5 ms
Ambient temperature
Front-panel: IP66, NEMA4 with waterproof packing, terminal block: IP20
Size in mm (HWD)
244853.5
570
H7ER-N-_
1 kHz
H8GN
Pre-set counters
Worlds smallest compact preset counter/timer
The H8GN is a 1/32 DIN timer and counter in one. It is simple to switch between the
timer and counter functions. During operation it is also possible to switch the display
to monitor the totalising count value in 8 digits. Many sophisticated functions come
as standard with H8GN.
Size in mm (HWD) 244883, 1/32 DIN size housing
8 digit display, 4 value and 4 set value
Front mounting
999 to 9999
24 VDC
Functions
Supply voltage Output
Order code
Communications
Counter
Timer
Counter: Up/down/reversible,
4 digits, N, F, C or K output modes
Total counter: 8 digits
A: ON-delay
B: Flicker
D: Signal OFF-delay
E: Interval
F: Accumulative
Z: ON/OFF-duty adjustable flicker
24 VDC
Contact output (SPDT)
No communications
RS-485
H8GN-AD
H8GN-AD-FLK
24 VDC
Power consumption
1.5 W max. (for max. DC load) (inrush current: 15 A max.)
Mounting method
Flush-mounting
Screw terminals (M3 screws)
Terminal screw tightening torque
0.5 Nm max.
Attachment
Waterproof packing, flush-mounting bracket
Display
7-segment, negative transmissive LCD; time display (h, min, s); CMW, OUT, RST, TOTAL
Present value (red, 7 mm high characters); set value (green, 3.4 mm high characters)
Digits
PV: 4 digits, SV: 4 digits, when total count value is displayed: 8 digits (zeros suppressed)
Memory backup
EEPROM (non-volatile memory) (number of writes: 100,000 times)
Counter
Maximum counting speed
30 Hz or 5 kHz
Counting range
999 to 9,999
Input modes
Increment, decrement, individual, quadrature inputs
Timer
Timer modes
Elapsed time (up), remaining time (down)
Inputs
Input signals
For counter: CP1, CP2, and reset

For timer: Start, gate, and reset
Input method
No-voltage input (contact short-circuit and open input)

Short-circuit (ON) impedance: 1 k max. (approx. 2 mA runoff current at 0 )
Short-circuit (ON) residual voltage: 2 VDC max.
Open (OFF) impedance: 100 k min.
Applied voltage: 30 VDC max.
Start, reset, gate
Minimum input signal width: 1 or 20 ms (selectable)
Power reset
Minimum power-opening time: 0.5 s
Control output
SPDT contact output: 3 A at 250 VAC/30 VDC, resistive load (cos = 1)
Minimum applied load
10 mA at 5 VDC (failure level: P, reference value)
Reset system
External, manual, and power supply resets (for timer in A, B, D, E, or Z modes)
Sensor waiting time
260 ms max.
(inputs cannot be received during sensor wait time if control outputs are turned OFF)
Timer function
Accuracy of operating time and setting error

(including temperature and voltage effects)
Signal start: 0.03% 30 ms max.

Power-ON start: 0.03% 50 ms max.
Ambient
temperature
Operating storage
Counters
Specifications
Case color
Rear section: Grey smoke; front section: N1.5 (black)
Panel surface: IP66 and NEMA Type 4X (indoors); rear case: IP20, terminal block: IP20
Size in mm (HWD)
244883
571
H7CX
Pre-set counters
The most complete digital standard counter on the
market
H7CX offers you the most complete series of products on the market today.
Based on extensive customer research, these new counters have been designed with
value added features that users both need and appreciate.
Size in mm (HWD) 484859 to 78 mm 1/16 DIN size housing
Three color display value, red, green or orange
Twin counter mode
6 digit model 99,999 to 999,999, set value 99,999 to 999,999 or 0 to 999,999
Input contact, NPN or PNP
Type
External
connection
Sensor power
supply
Supply voltage
Output type
Digits Size in mm (HWD) Order code
1-stage counter
1-stage counter with total counter
2-stage counter
1-stage counter with batch counter
Dual counter (addition/subtraction)
Tachometer
Twin counter
Screw terminal
12 VDC
100 to 240 VAC
Contact and transistor

output
1-stage counter
1-stage counter with total counter
11-pin socket
12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
484884
H7CX-AUD1-N
Transistor output (2)
H7CX-AUSD1-N
Contact output (2)
H7CX-AW-N
H7CX-AWD1-N
12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC
12 VDC
100 to 240 VAC
Contact output
484869.7
H7CX-A11S-N
Transistor output
H7CX-A11SD1-N
12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC
Screw terminal
H7CX-A11-N
H7CX-A11D1-N
12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
H7CX-AU-N
100 to 240 VAC
Contact output
100 to 240 VAC
Transistor output
484884
H7CX-A-N
H7CX-AS-N
Accessories
Name
Order code
Y92F-30
Y92S-29
Waterproof packing
DIN-rail mounting/front-connecting socket
P2CF-11-E
11-pin
P3GA-11
Finger safe terminal cover for P3GA-11
Y92A-48G
Y92A-48
Hard cover
Y92A-48F1
Soft cover
Front panels
(4-digit models)
Light gray
Y92P-CXC4G
White
Y92P-CXC4S
Front panels
(6-digit models)
Light gray
Y92P-CXC6G
White
Y92P-CXC6S
Specifications
Display
7-segment, negative transmissive LCD
Digits
6-digits: 99,999 to 999,999, SV range: 99999 to 999999 or 0 to 999999
Max. counting speed
30 Hz or 5 kHz (selectable, ON/OFF ratio 1:1)
Input modes
Increment, decrement, increment/decrement (UP/DOWN A (command input), UP/DOWN B (individual inputs), or UP/DOWN C (quadrature inputs))
Control output
Contact output: 3 A at 250 VAC/30 VDC, resistive load (cos= 1)

Minimum applied load: 10 mA at 5 VDC
Transistor output:
NPN open collector, 100 mA at 30 VDC
Residual voltage: 1.5 VDC max. (approx. 1V)
Leakage current: 0.1 mA max.
Key protection
Yes
Decimal point adjustment
Yes (rightmost 3 digits)
Sensor waiting time
290 ms max.
Memory backup
EEPROM (overwrites: 100,000 times min.) stores data 10 years min.
Ambient temperature
Operating: 10 to 55C (10 to 50C when mounted side by side)
Case color
Black (N1.5) (Optional Front Panels are available to change the Front Panel color to light gray or white.)
Life expectancy

Electrical: 100,000 operations min. (3 A at 250 VAC, resistive load)
572
Panel surface: IP66, NEMA 4 (indoors), and UL Type 4X (indoors)
H8PS
Cam positioners
Compact, easy-to-use cam positioner
The H8PS provides high speed operation at 1,600 r/min and high-precision settings
to 0.5 ensuring widespread application. H8PS features a highly visible display with
back-lit negative transmissive LCD. Advance angle compensation function compensates for output delays.
96 to 121.2H96W60.6 to 67.5D mm
Front-panel / DIN-rail
24 VDC
8-, 16- and 32-outputs
NPN/PNP 100 mA at 30 VDC
Number of
outputs
Mounting method
Bank function
Size in mm (HWD)
Order code
8-outputs
Flush-mounting
NPN transistor output
No
969667.5
H8PS-8B
H8PS-8BP

Front-mounting/DIN-rail mounting
969660.6
16-outputs
Flush-mounting
Yes
969667.5
121.29660.6
Flush-mounting
969667.5
121.29660.6
H8PS-32BF
H8PS-32BFP
Encoders
H8PS-32B
H8PS-32BP

H8PS-16BF
H8PS-16BFP

32-outputs
H8PS-16B
H8PS-16BP

H8PS-8BF
H8PS-8BFP
Accessories
Type
Resolution
Cable length
Order code
Name
Specification
Order code
Economy
256
2m
E6CP-AG5C-C 256 2M
Discrete wire output cable
2m
Y92S-41-200
Standard
256
1m
E6C3-AG5C-C 256 1M
Connector-type output cable
2m
E5ZE-CBL200
2m
E6C3-AG5C-C 256 2M
Support software
CD-ROM
H8PS-SOFT-V1
360
E6C3-AG5C-C 360 2M
USB cable
A miniB, 2 m
Y92S-40
720
E6C3-AG5C-C 720 2M
Parallel input adapter
Two units can operate in parallel
Y92C-30
E6F-AG5C-C 256 2M
Protective cover
Y92A-96B
360
E6F-AG5C-C 360 2M
Watertight cover
Y92A-96N
720
E6F-AG5C-C 720 2M
DIN-rail mounting base
Y92F-91
Rigid
256
2m
Name
Specification
Order code
Shaft coupling for the E6CP
Axis: 6 mm dia.
E69-C06B
Shaft coupling for the E6C3
Axis: 8 mm dia.
E69-C08B
Shaft coupling for the E6F
Axis: 10 mm dia.
E69-C10B
Extension cable
5 m (same for E6CP, E6C3, and E6F) E69-DF5
Counters
Encoder accessories
Specifications
24 VDC
Inputs
8-output models: None; 16-/32-output models: Bank inputs 1/2/4, origin input, start input
Encoder input
External inputs
Input signals
8-output models: None; 16-/32-output models: Bank inputs 1/2/4, origin input, start input
Input type
No voltage inputs: ON impedance: 1 k max. (leakage current: Approx. 2 mA at 0 )

ON residual voltage: 2 V max., OFF impedance: 100 k min., applied voltage: 30 VDC max.
Minimum input signal width: 20 ms
Number of banks
8 banks (for 16-/32-output models only)
Display method
7-segment, negative transmissive LCD (main display: 11 mm (red), sub-display: 5.5 mm (green))
Memory backup method
EEPROM (overwrites: 100,000 times min.) that can store data for 10 years min.
Storage temperature
Ambient humidity
25 to 85%
Panel surface: IP40, rear case: IP20
Case color
Light grey (Munsell 5Y7/1)
573
Programmable relays
ZEN SIMPLICITY AT ITS BEST
The ZEN series offers simple logic control for a wide variety of applications.
With many on-board functions like season and weekly timers, counters, analog
inputs and using the ladder logic, you can automate the application very quickly.
Adjustments and maintanance is easy using the models with an LCD.
RS-485 communication
Expandable I/O
Memory Data backup
Display type with

buttons, calendar
and clock
How many I/O points?
574
10 (6 I, 4 O)
expandable
up to 33 I/O
with
communication
10 (6 I, 4 O)
expandable
up to 34 I/O
20 (12 I, 8 O)
expandable
up to 44 I/O
10 (6 I, 4 O)
fixed I/O
20 (12 I, 8 O)
fixed I/O
ZEN-10C1
ZEN-20C1
ZEN-10C3
ZEN-20C3
ZEN-10C4
H233
Page 578
H244
Page 579
H233
Page 578
H244
Page 579
H233
Page 578
Expansion
unit
LED type
How many I/O points?
Programmable relays
What functionality is required?
Power supply
How many extra

I/O points?
10 (6 I, 4 O)
expandable
up to 34 I/O
20 (12 I, 8 O)
expandable
up to 44 I/O
8 I/O
(4 I, 4 O)
ZEN-10C2
ZEN-20C2
ZEN-8E
ZEN-PA
H233
Page 578
H244
Page 579
H267
Page 580
H268
Page 581
575
576
Selection table
Programmable relays
Model
ZEN-10C
ZEN-20C
Type
CPU unit
CPU unit
Features C1
With LCD Display,

program/control buttons,
calendar and real-time clock
With LCD display,

program/control buttons,
calendar and real-time clock
Features C2
With LED indication

Logic control
Programming by software
With LED indication

Logic control
Programming by software
Features C3
Same as C1 but not expandable.
Same as C1 but not expandable.
Features C4
Same as C1 but instead of one output

relay you get RS-485 communication.
Features Starter kits
Complete set with C1 CPU including

software, cable and manual
Number of I / O points
10 expandable up to 34 I/O
(C4 up to 33 I/O)
Inputs
12
Inputs/power supply
100 to 240 VAC or 12 to 24 VDC
100 to 240 VAC or 12 to 24 VDC
Outputs
4 relays (C4 = 3 relays) or

4 transistors
8 relays or 8 transistors
Page/Quick Link
578
579
Programmable relays
20 expandable up to 44 I/O
No/not available
577
ZEN-10C
Programmable relays
Flexible automation
The ZEN-10C offers simple logic control in a choice of four CPU units. Expansion is possible on three of these CPU's of up to 34 I/O whereas the fourth (C3 Units) is fixed at
10 I/O. All DC models have analog input and a high-speed counter input up to 150 Hz.
DC input/supply units have analog input + high speed counter
The ZEN-10C4 has RS-485 communication
Expansion available with relay output or transistor output
ZEN-Kits the best choice to start!
Name
Number of Inputs (I)/

I/O points power supply
CPU units 10
Expandable up to
34 I/O
100 to 240 VAC 4
Relays
LCD, buttons Analog

(B), calendar input/
and clock
comparators
(A)
8-digit
No. of bits 16
counter (F)/
comparators
(G)
No. of bits 8
Size in mm
(HWD)
ZEN-10C1AR-A-V2
yes
LCD
yes
yes / 4
yes / 4
LED
yes / 4
yes / 4
Transistors
LCD
yes
yes / 4
yes / 4
LED
yes / 4
yes / 4
Relays
LCD
yes
yes / 4
ZEN-10C3AR-A-V2
12 to 24 VDC
LCD
yes
yes / 4
yes / 4
ZEN-10C3DR-D-V2
100 to 240 VAC 3
LCD/
yes
Comm. yes
yes / 4
ZEN-10C4AR-A-V2
yes / 4
yes / 4
ZEN-10C4DR-D-V2
12 to 24 VDC
Work bits (M)

Holding timers 907056
Holding bits (H)
(#)
Timers (T)
Button input (B)
Counters (C)
Weekly timers (@)
LCD display (D)
Timer/counter
comparator (P)
Order code
LCD
100 to 240 VAC
10
Expandable up to
33 I/O
Type
LED
12 to 24 VDC
Fixed I/O
ZEN kit
Outputs (Q)
ZEN-10C2AR-A-V2
ZEN-10C1DR-D-V2
ZEN-10C2DR-D-V2
ZEN-10C1DT-D-V2
ZEN-10C2DT-D-V2
Set containing CPU unit (ZEN-10C1AR-A-V2), connecting cable,

ZEN support software and manual.
ZEN-KIT01-EV4
Set containing CPU unit (ZEN-10C1DR-D-V2), connecting cable,

ZEN support software and manual.
ZEN-KIT02-EV4
Specifications
Item
Specifications
ZEN-10C_AR-A-V2
ZEN-10C_D_-D-V2
100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
12 to 24 VDC (DC ripple rate: 5%)
Rated power supply voltage
85 to 264 VAC
10.8 to 28.8 VDC
Power consumption
9 VA max.
4 W max.
30 A max.
Inrush current
3 A max.
Ambient temperature
0C to 55C (25C to 55C for ZEN-10C2 models (LED))
Ambient storage
Control method
Stored program control
I/O control method
Cyclic scan
Programming language
Ladder diagram
Program capacity
96 lines (3 input conditions and 1 output per line)
LCD display
12 characters x 4 lines, with backlight (LCD-type CPU unit only)
Operation keys
8 (4 cursor keys and 4 operation keys) (LCD-type CPU unit only)
Super-capacitor holding time
2 days min. (25C)
Battery life (ZEN-BAT01)
10 years min. (25C)
Calendar & Clock function
Accuracy: 15 s/month (at 25C)
Accessories
Name
Description
Order code
Memory Cassette
EEPROM (for data security and copying)
ZEN-ME01
Battery unit
Battery (keeps time, date and bit values for 10 years at 25C)
ZEN-BAT01
Connecting Cable
For the programming software, RS-232C cable, 9-way `D' connector for PC
ZEN-CIF01
USB-Serial conversion cable (to be used in combination with ZEN-CIF01)
CS1W-CIF31
ZEN support software
Runs on Windows ME, 2000, XP, NT4.0 Service Pack 3, Vista
ZEN-SOFT01-V4
578
ZEN-20C
Programmable relays
Extended flexible automation
Ideal for small-scale control applications, the ZEN-20C provides an economical alternative to discrete timers, counters and general purpose relays. With 12 Inputs and 8
relay or transistor Outputs, and expansion possibilities of up to 44 I/O on C1 and C2
models, the ZEN-20C offers extended flexibility, with features such as calendar and
real time clock functionality.
ZEN-20C1/C2 expandable up to 44 I/Os
ZEN DC units have analog input 0-10 VDC
DC models have as well high speed counter 150 Hz
Expansion available with relay output or transistor output
Name
Number of Inputs (I)/

I/O points power supply
CPU units 20
Outputs (Q)
12 100 to 240 VAC 8
Expandable up to
44 I/O
Fixed I/O
LCD, buttons Analog

(B), calendar input/
and clock
comparators
(A)
8-digit
No. of bits 16
counter (F)/
comparators
(G)
LCD
yes
LED
No. of bits 8
Size in mm
(HWD)
Order code
Transistors
LCD
yes
yes / 4
yes / 4
LED
yes / 4
yes / 4
Relays
LCD
yes
yes / 4
Work bits (M)

Holding timers 90122.556 ZEN-20C1AR-A-V2
Holding bits (H)
(#)
ZEN-20C2AR-A-V2
Timers (T)
Button input (B)
ZEN-20C1DR-D-V2
Counters (C)
ZEN-20C1DR-D-V2
Weekly timers (@)
LCD display (D)
ZEN-20C1DT-D-V2
Timer/counter
ZEN-20C2DT-D-V2
comparator (P)
ZEN-20C3AR-A-V2
LCD
yes
yes / 4
yes / 4
ZEN-20C3DR-D-V2
Relays
12 to 24 VDC
100 to 240 VAC
Type
12 to 24 VDC
LCD
yes
yes / 4
yes / 4
LED
yes / 4
yes / 4
Specifications
Item
Specifications
100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
12 to 24 VDC (DC ripple rate: 5%)
85 to 264 VAC
10.8 to 28.8 VDC
ZEN-20C_D_-D-V2
Power consumption
11 VA max.
5 W max.
Inrush current
4 A max.
30 A max.
Ambient temperature
Ambient storage
Control method
Stored program control
I/O control method
Cyclic scan
Programming language
Ladder diagram
Program capacity
96 lines (3 input conditions and 1 output per line)
LCD display
12 characters x 4 lines, with backlight (LCD-type CPU unit only)
Operation keys
8 (4 cursor keys and 4 operation keys) (LCD-type CPU unit only)
Super-capacitor holding time
2 days min. (25C)
Battery life (ZEN-BAT01)
10 years min. (25C)
Calendar & Clock function
Accuracy: 15 s/month (at 25C) if applicable
Programmable relays
ZEN-20C_AR-A-V2
Accessories
Name
Description
Order code
Memory Cassette
EEPROM (for data security and copying)
ZEN-ME01
Battery unit
Battery (keeps time, date and bit values for 10 years at 25C)
ZEN-BAT01
Connecting Cable
For the programming software, RS-232C cable, 9-way `D' connector for PC
ZEN-CIF01
USB-Serial conversion cable (to be used in combination with ZEN-CIF01)
CS1W-CIF31
ZEN support software
Runs on Windows ME, 2000, XP, NT4.0 Service Pack 3, Vista
ZEN-SOFT01-V4
579
ZEN-8E
Programmable relays
ZEN Expansion units
To scale-up your ZEN application we provide three different expansion units in
only 35 mm width ZEN housing. All expansion units have standard 4 inputs and
4 outputs. You can add maximum 3 expansion units to one CPU.
4 inputs, 100 to 240 VAC or 12 to 24 VDC
4 outputs, either relays or transistors (only DC models)
DIN-rail mounting
Size in mm (HWD): 903556
Name
Number of I/O points
Inputs (X)/power supply
Outputs (Y)
Size in mm (HWD)
Order code
Expansion I/O units
903556
ZEN-8E1AR
100 to 240 VAC
Relays
ZEN-8E1DR
12 to 24 VDC
Transistors
Specifications
Item
Specifications
ZEN-8E1AR
ZEN-8E1D_
100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
12 to 24 VDC (DC ripple rate: 5% max.)
Rated power supply voltage 85 to 264 VAC
10.8 to 28.8 VDC
Power consumption
4 VA max.
2 W max.
Inrush current
1.5 A max.
15 A max.
Ambient temperature
Ambient storage
580
ZEN-8E1DT
ZEN-PA
Programmable relays
ZEN Power Supply
The ZEN Power Supply has the same compact housing as our 10 I/O CPU units.
With a current/wattage output of 1.3 A/30 W it covers enough power to supply
the DC ZEN itself and the eventually used sensors. If needed parallel operation is possible.
Output voltage 24 VDC
Output current 1.3 A
Capacity 30 W
Allows parallel operation
Size in mm (HWD): 907056
Power rating
Inputs voltage
Output current
Order code
30 W
100 to 240 VAC
1.3 A
ZEN-PA03024
Specifications
Specifications
30 W
Efficiency
80% min. (24 V)
Input voltage
100 to 240 VAC (85 to 264 VAC), single-phase
Output voltage
Voltage adjustment
10% to 15% (with V. ADJ) min. of rate output voltage
Ripple
2% (p-p) max. (25C to 10C: 4% max.)
Input variation
0.5% max.
Temperature
0.05% / C max.
Overload protection
105% to 135% of rated load current, inverted L drop, intermittent
yes
Input Current
100 V
0.8 A max.
200 V
0.45 A max.
Output indicator
yes (green)
Weight
240 g max.
10C to 60C
Parallel operation
yes (2 units max.)
Programmable relays
Item
Power rating
581

LOOKING FOR PERFECT MEASURING & READ-OUT?
K3HB-V For perfect weighing
With our K3HB series we cover a wide range of applications. One of them is the
weighing indicator which performs perfect measurement in any weighing application.
The instrument can be equipped with a load-cell power supply of 10 V/100 mA.
Several option boards for communication, contact output boards or event inputs
are also available. On top of these you can get direct DeviceNet communication.
High speed sampling 20 ms
Equipped with position meter
Two color display for easy recognition
48 24 mm
1/32 DIN
multi function
Process/
frequency/
rate
Standard
Which application is required?
582
Process
Temperature
Frequency/
rate
K3GN
K3MA-J
K3MA-L
K3MA-F
X325
Page 586
X324
Page 587
X329
Page 587
X323
Page 587
96 48 mm
(1/8 DIN)
Advanced
Process
Temperature
Weighing
Linear sensor
Up/down
counting pulse
Time interval
Rotary pulse
K3HB-X
K3HB-H
K3HB-V
K3HB-S
K3HB-C
K3HB-P
K3HB-R
X334
Page 588
X333
Page 588
X326
Page 590
X327
Page 590
X328
Page 590
X335
Page 588
X332
Page 588
583
Selection table
Category
Multifunctional digital
panel indicator
Process indicator
Temperature indicator
Frequency/rate indicator
Process indicator
Model
K3GN
K3MA-J
K3MA-L
K3MA-F
K3HB-X
Size
1/32 DIN
1/8 DIN
Number of digits
Leading zero suppression
Forced zero function
Min./max. hold function
Average processing
User selectable inputs
Start-up compensating time
Key protection
Decimal point position setting
Accuracy
0.1% of full scale
0.1% of full scale
0.1% of full scale
0.1% of full scale
0.1% of full scale

(DC voltage & DC current),
0.5% of full scale
(AC voltage & AC current)
Input range
0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
or 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V,
-5 to 5 V, -10 to 10 V or
0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
or 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V,
-5 to 5 V, -10 to 10 V
Pt100, JPt100 or
thermocouple K, J, T, E, L, U,
N, R, S, B
Sample rate
250 ms
250 ms
500 ms
20 ms
Features
Remote/local processing,
parameter initialisation,
programmable output
configuration,
process value hold
Teaching, comparative
output pattern selection,
parameter initialisation,
programmable output
configuration,
process value hold
Programmable output
configuration,
process value hold
Teaching, comparative
output pattern selection,
programmable output
configuration,
process value hold
Scaling, teaching,
averaging, output
hysteresis, output
OFF-delay, output test,
bank selection, reset,
comparative output
Sensor power supply
IP rating
IP66
IP66
IP66
IP66
IP66
Supply voltage
24 VDC
24 VAC/VDC or
100 to 240 VAC
24 VAC/VDC or
100 to 240 VAC
24 VAC/VDC or
100 to 240 VAC
100 to 240 VAC or

24 VAC/VDC
Outputs
Inputs
Front
protection
Features
Color change display
584
0.000 to 10.000 A, 0.0000 to

19.999 mA, -199.99 to
199.99 mA, 4.000 to 20.000
mA, 0.0 to 400.0 V, 0.0000 to
1.999 V,
-199.99 to 199.99 V, 1.0000
to 5.0000 V
NPN
PNP
Temperature
Contact
Voltage pulse
Load cell
DC voltage
DC current
AC voltage
AC current
Relay
NPN
PNP
Linear
BCD
Comms
Page/Quick Link
586
587
588

Weighing indicator
Linear sensor indicator
Up/down counting pulse

indicator
Time interval indicator
Rotary pulse indicator
K3HB-H
K3HB-V
K3HB-S
K3HB-C
K3HB-P
K3HB-R
1/8 DIN
Thermocouple: 0.3%
of full scale,
Pt-100: 0.2% of full scale
0.1% of full scale
One input: 0.1%

of full scale,
two inputs: 0.2%
of full scale
0.08% rgd 1 digit
0.006% rgd 1 digit

0.02% rgd 1 digit
Pt100, thermocouple K, J, T, E, 0.00 to 199.99 mV,

L, U, N, R, S, B, W
0.000 to 19.999 mV,
100.00 mV, 199.99 mV
0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA,
0 to 5 V, -5 to 5 V,
-10 to 10 V
No voltage contact:
30 Hz, voltage pulse:
50 kHz, open collector:
50 kHz
No voltage contact:
50 kHz
No voltage contact:
50 kHz
20 ms
0.5 ms
Scaling, teaching, averaging,

output hysteresis, output
OFF-delay, output test, bank
selection, reset, comparative
output
Scaling, teaching, averaging,

output hysteresis, output
OFF-delay, output test, bank
selection, reset, comparative
output
Scaling, 2-input calculation,

teaching, averaging, output
hysteresis, output OFF-delay,
output test, bank selection,
reset, comparative output
Scaling, measurement
operation selection, output
output test, display value
selection, display color
selection, key protection, bank
selection, display refresh
period, maximum/minimum
hold, reset
operation selection, output
output test, teaching, display
value selection, display color
period, maximum/minimum
hold, reset
operation selection,
averaging, previous average
value comparison, output
hysteresis, output
OFF-delay, output test,
teaching, display value
selection, display color
period, maximum /minimum
hold, reset
IP66
IP66
IP66
IP66
IP66
IP66
100 to 240 VAC or

24 VAC/VDC
100 to 240 VAC or

24 VAC/VDC
100 to 240 VAC or

24 VAC/VDC
100 to 240 VAC or

24 VAC/VDC
100 to 240 VAC or

24 VAC/VDC
100 to 240 VAC or

24 VAC/VDC
588
20 ms
590
Standard
Available
No/not available
585
K3GN
1/32 DIN multi-function

Compact and intelligent digital panel meter
The K3GN is able to cover a wide variety of applications with its 3 main functions:
process meter, RPM processor/tachometer and digital data display for PC/PLC.
Configuration is easy and the design is advanced and compact.
Process indicator DC voltage/current
RPM process/tachometer
Digital data display for PC/PLC
Very compact 1/32 DIN housing: Size in mm (HxWxD): 24x48x83mm
5-digit display with programmable display color, in red or green
Input type
Supply voltage
Output
No communications
RS-485
DC voltage/current, NPN
24 VDC
Dual relays (SPST-NO)
K3GN-NDC 24 DC
K3GN-NDC-FLK 24 DC
Three NPN open collector
K3GN-NDT1 24 DC
K3GN-NDT1-FLK 24 DC
Dual relays (SPST-NO)
K3GN-PDC 24 DC
K3GN-PDC-FLK 24 DC
Three PNP open collector
K3GN-PDT2 24 DC
K3GN-PDT2-FLK 24 DC
DC voltage/current, PNP
Order code
Specifications
Supply voltage
24 VDC
85 to 110% of the rated supply voltage
Power consumption
2.5 W max. (at max. DC load with all indicators lit)
Ambient temperature
Operating: 10 to 55C (with no condensation or icing)

Storage: 25 to 65C (with no condensation or icing)
Display refresh period
Sampling period (sampling times multiplied by number of averaging times if average processing is selected)
Max. displayed digits
5 digits (19999 to 99999)
Display
7-segment digital display, character height: 7.0 mm
Polarity display
- is displayed automatically with a negative input signal
Zero display
Leading zeros are not displayed
Scaling function
Programmable with front-panel key inputs (range of display: -19999 to 99999).

The decimal point position can be set as desired.
External controls
HOLD: (measurement value held)

ZERO: (forced-zero)
Hysteresis setting
Programmable with front-panel key inputs (0001 to 9999)
Other functions
Programmable color display

Selectable output operating action
Teaching set values
Average processing (simple average)
Lockout configuration
Communications writing control (communications output models only)
Output
Relays:
Transistors:
2 SPST-NO
3 NPN open collector
3 PNP open collector
Combinations:
Communications output (RS-485) + relay outputs
Communications output (RS-485) + transistor outputs
Communications output (RS-485) + transistor outputs (3 PNP open collector)
Communications
Communications function: RS-485
Delay in comparative outputs (transistor outputs)
750 ms max.
Front-panel: NEMA4X for indoor use (equivalent to IP66)

Rear case: IEC standard IP20
Terminals: IEC standard IP20
Memory protection
Non-volatile memory (EEPROM) (possible to rewrite 100,000 times)
Size in mm (HWD)
244880
586
K3MA-J, -L, -F
1/8 DIN standard indicators

Highly visible LCD display with
2 color (red and green) LEDs
The K3MA series comes with a process meter, a frequency/rate meter and a temperature meter of either 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC/VDC. All are equipped with the same
quality display and have the same short depth of 80 mm.
1/8 DIN size housing
Highly visible, negative transmissive backlit LCD display
14.2 mm high characters
5 digits (19,999 to 99,999), K3MA-L: 4 digits
Front-panel IP66
Indicator
Supply voltage
Input type & ranges
Output
Order code
Process meter
100 to 240 VAC
DC voltage: 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, -5 to 5 V, -10 to 10 V
DC current: 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
2 relay contact outputs (SPST-NO)
K3MA-J-A2 100-240VAC
K3MA-J-A2 24VAC/VDC
Platinum-resistance thermometer: Pt100, JPt100

or thermocouple K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B
1 relay contact output (SPDT)
K3MA-L-C 100-240VAC
1 relay contact output (SPDT)
K3MA-L-C 24VAC/VDC
Rotary pulse: No voltage: 0.05 to 30.00 Hz;

open collector: 0.1 to 5000.0 Hz
K3MA-F-A2 100-240VAC
K3MA-F-A2 24VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
Temperature meter
100 to 240 VAC

24 VAC/VDC
Frequency/rate meter
100 to 240 VAC

24 VAC/VDC
Accessories
Type
Order code
Splash-proof soft cover
K32-49SC
Hard cover
K32-49HC
Specifications
Item
100-240 VAC models
24 VAC/VDC models
Supply voltage
100 to 240 VAC
24 VAC (50/60 Hz), 24 VDC
85 to 110% of the rated supply voltage

6 VA max.
Operating: 10 to 55C (with no condensation or icing)
Storage: 25 to 65C (with no condensation or icing)
4.5 VA max. (24 VAC) 4.5 W max. (24 VDC)
Weight
Approx. 200 g
Display
7-segment digital display, character height: 14.2 mm
Polarity display
- is displayed automatically with a negative input signal
Zero display
Leading zeros are not displayed
Hold function
Max. hold (maximum value), min. hold (minimum value)
Hysteresis setting
Programmable with front-panel key inputs (0001 to 9,999)
Delay in comparative outputs
1 s max.
Front-panel: NEMA4X for indoor use (equivalent to IP66)

Rear case: IEC standard IP20
Terminals: IEC standard IP00 + finger protection (VDE 0106/100)
Memory protection
Non-volatile memory (EEPROM) (possible to rewrite 100,000 times)
Size in mm (HWD)
489680
Power consumption (under maximum load)

Ambient temperature
587
K3HB-X, -H, -V, -S

Process, temperature, weighing and linear sensor
indicators
These indicators with analog input feature a clear and easy-to-use color change display. All models are equipped with an IP66 housing. K3HB series is high speed, with a
sample rate of 50 Hz, and even 2,000 Hz for K3HB-S
Position meter indication for easy monitoring
Optional DeviceNet, RS-232C, RS-485
Double display, with 5 digits, in two colors
Type of indicator
Input sensor type and range
Supply voltage
Order code
Process indicator
K3HB-X
AC current input, from 0.000 to 10.000 A, 0.0000 to 19.999 mA
100 to 240 VAC
K3HB-XAA 100-240VAC
24 VAC/VDC
K3HB-XAA 24VAC/VDC
100 to 240 VAC
K3HB-XAD 100-240VAC
24 VAC/VDC
K3HB-XAD 24VAC/VDC
100 to 240 VAC
K3HB-XVA 100-240VAC
24 VAC/VDC
K3HB-XVA 24VAC/VDC
100 to 240 VAC
K3HB-XVD 100-240VAC
24 VAC/VDC
K3HB-XVD 24VAC/VDC
100 to 240 VAC
K3HB-HTA 100-240VAC
24 VAC/VDC
K3HB-HTA 24VAC/VDC
DC current input, from 199.99 mA, to 4.000 to 20.000 mA

AC voltage input, from 0.0 to 400.0 V to 0.0000 to 1.999 V
DC voltage input, from 199.99 V to 1.0000 to 5.0000 V
K3HB-H
Temperature input Pt100, thermocouple K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W
Weighing indicator
K3HB-V
Load cell input (DC low voltage input), 0.00 to 199.99 mV, 0.000 to 19.999 mV,
100.00 mV, 199.999 mV
100 to 240 VAC
K3HB-VLC 100-240 VAC
24 VAC/VDC
K3HB-VLC 24VAC/VDC
Linear sensor indicator

K3HB-S
DC process input, 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 5 to 5 V, 10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
24 VAC/VDC
K3HB-SSD AC/DC24
100 to 240 VAC
K3HB-SSD AC100-240
Option boards
Sensor power supply/output boards
Slot
Output
Relay
PASS: SPDT
Sensor power supply
Communications
Applicable indicator types
Order code
12 VDC 10%, 80 mA
K3HB-X, -H, -S
Linear current
K33-CPA *1
DC0(4) - 20 mA
K3HB-X, -H, -S
K33-L1 A *2
Linear voltage
DC0(1) - 5 V, 0 to 10 V
K3HB-X, -H, -S
K33-L2A *2
K3HB-X, -H, -S
K33-A *2
RS-232C
K3HB-X, -H, -S
K33-FLK1 A *2
RS-485
K3HB-X, -H, -S
K33-FLK3A *2
Relay
PASS: SPDT
K3HB-V
K33-CPB *1
Linear current
DC0(4) - 20 mA
K3HB-V
K33-L1B *2
Linear voltage
DC0(1) - 5 V, 0 to 10 V
K3HB-V
K33-L2B *2
K3HB-V
K33-B *2
RS-232C
K3HB-V
K33-FLK1B *2
RS-485
K3HB-V
K33-FLK3B *2
Communications
Order code
H/L: SPDT each
K34-C1
HH/H/LL/L: SPST-NO each
K34-C2
NPN open collector: HH/H/PASS/L/LL
K34-T1
PNP open collector: HH/H/PASS/L/LL
K34-T2
DeviceNet
K34-DRT *2
10 VDC 5%, 100 mA
Relay/transistor output boards

Slot
Output
Relay
Transistor
Event input boards

Slot
Input type
Number of points
Communications
Order code
NPN open collector
M3 terminal blocks
K35-1
10-pin MIL connector
K35-2
M3 terminal blocks
K35-3
K35-4
PNP open collector

*1
*2
CPA/CPB can be combined with relay outputs only.

Only one of the following can be used by each digital indicator: RS-232C/RS-485 communications, a linear output, or DeviceNet communications.
K3HB has got three slots for option boards: Slot B, slot C and slot D.
Accessories
Type
Order code
Special cable (for event inputs with 8-pin connector)
K32-DICN
588
K3HB-X, -H, -V, -S
Specifications
100 to 240 VAC (50/60 Hz), 24 VAC/VDC, DeviceNet power supply: 24 VDC
Allowable power supply voltage range
85 to 110% of the rated power supply voltage, DeviceNet power supply: 11 to 25 VDC
Power consumption
100 to 240 V: 18 VA max. (max. load), 24 VAC/DC: 11 VA/7 W max. (max. load)
Display method
Negative LCD (backlit LED) display 7-segment digital display

(character height: PV: 14.2 mm (green/red); SV: 4.9 mm (green))
Display range
19,999 to 99,999
Weight
Approx. 300 g (base unit only)
Front-panel
Conforms to NEMA 4X for indoor use (equivalent to IP66)
Rear case
IP20
Terminals
IP00 + finger protection (VDE0106/100)

EEPROM (non-volatile memory), number of rewrites: 100,000
Event input ratings
Output ratings
Transistor output
Contact output
(resistive load)
Linear output
Size in mm (HWD)
Contact
ON: 1 k max., OFF: 100 k min.
No-contact
ON residual voltage: 2 V max., OFF leakage current: 0.1 mA max., load current: 4 mA max.
Maximum applied voltage: 30 VDC max.
Maximum load voltage
24 VDC
Maximum load current
50 mA
Leakage current
100 A max.
Rated load
Rated through current
5A
Mechanical life expectancy
100,000 operations
Allowable load impedance
500 max. (mA); 5 k min. (V)
Resolution
Approx. 10,000
Output error
0.5% FS
4896100
Memory protection
589
K3HB-C, -P, -R

Rotary pulse, timer interval and
up/down counting pulse indicators
These indicators with analog input feature a clear and easy-to-use color change display. All models are equipped with an IP66 housing. K3HB-R and -C are high-speed,
with a sample rate up to 50 kHz.
Position meter indication for easy monitoring
Optional DeviceNet, RS-232C, RS-485
Double display, with 5 digits, in two colors
Type of indicator
Input ranges
Rotary pulse indicator K3HB-R
No voltage contact: 30 Hz max. 100 to 240 VAC

Voltage pulse: 50 kHz max.
24 VAC/VDC
Open collector: 50 kHz max.
100 to 240 VAC
Supply voltage
Input sensor
Order code
NPN input/voltage pulse
K3HB-RNB 100-240VAC
K3HB-RNB 24VAC/VDC
PNP input
Timer interval indicator K3HB-P

Up/down counting pulse indicator K3HB-C
K3HB-RPB 100-240VAC
K3HB-RPB 24VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
100 to 240 VAC
NPN
K3HB-PNB 100-240VAC
100 to 240 VAC
PNP
K3HB-PPB 100-240VAC
24 VAC/VDC
PNP
K3HB-PPB 24VAC/VDC
100 to 240 VAC
NPN
K3HB-CNB 100-240VAC
24 VAC/VDC
NPN
K3HB-CNB 24VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
PNP
K3HB-CPB 24VAC/VDC
Sensor power supply
Communications
Order code
12 VDC 10%, 80 mA
K33-CPA *1
K33-L1 A *2
Option boards
Sensor power supply/output boards
Slot
Output
Relay
PASS: SPDT
Linear current
DC0(4) - 20 mA
Linear voltage
DC0(1) - 5 V, 0 to 10 V
K33-L2A *2
K33-A *2
RS-232C
K33-FLK1 A *2
RS-485
K33-FLK3A *2
Communications
Order code
H/L: SPDT each
K34-C1
HH/H/LL/L: SPST-NO each
K34-C2
K34-T1
PNP open collector: HH/H/PASS/L/LL
K34-T2
DeviceNet
K34-DRT *2
K34-BCD
Relay/transistor output boards

Slot
Output
Relay
Transistor
BCD + transistor
Event input boards

Slot
Input type
Number of points
Communications
Order code
NPN open collector
M3 terminal blocks
K35-1
K35-2
M3 terminal blocks
K35-3
K35-4
PNP open collector
*1
*2
CPA can be combined with relay outputs only.

Only one of the following can be used by each digital indicator: RS-232C/RS-485 communications, a linear output, or DeviceNet communications.
K3HB has got three slots for option boards: Slot B, slot C and slot D.
Accessories
Type
Order code
Special cable (for event inputs with 8-pin connector)
K32-DICN
Special BCD output cable
K32-BCD
590
K3HB-C, -P, -R
Specifications
100 to 240 VAC (50/60 Hz), 24 VAC/VDC, DeviceNet power supply: 24 VDC
Allowable power supply voltage range
85 to 110% of the rated power supply voltage, DeviceNet power supply: 11 to 25 VDC
Power consumption
100 to 240 V: 18 VA max. (max. load), 24 VAC/DC: 11 VA/7 W max. (max. load)
Display method
Negative LCD (backlit LED) display 7-segment digital display

(character height: PV: 14.2 mm (green/red); SV: 4.9 mm (green))
Display range
19,999 to 99,999
Weight
Approx. 300 g (base unit only)
Front-panel
Conforms to NEMA 4X for indoor use (equivalent to IP66)
Rear case
IP20
Terminals
IP00 + finger protection (VDE0106/100)

EEPROM (non-volatile memory), number of rewrites: 100,000
Event input ratings
Output ratings
Transistor output
Contact output
(resistive load)
Linear output
Size in mm (HWD)
Contact
ON: 1 k max., OFF: 100 k min.
No-contact
ON residual voltage: 2 V max., OFF leakage current: 0.1 mA max., load current: 4 mA max.
Maximum applied voltage: 30 VDC max.
Maximum load voltage
24 VDC
Maximum load current
50 mA
Leakage current
100 A max.
Rated load
Rated through current
5A
Mechanical life expectancy
100,000 operations
Allowable load impedance
500 max. (mA); 5 k min. (V)
Resolution
Approx. 10,000
Output error
0.5% FS
4896100
Memory protection
591
S5
NS5
Handheld
38
e 69
N539
Page 70

592
Quick Link
Monitoring products

Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Industrial plug-in relays
G2RV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
G2R-_-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
MY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
LY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
MKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
MKS(X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Industrial high power relays
G7J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
G7L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
G7Z. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
1-phase control
K8AK-AS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
K8AK-AW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
K8AK-VS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
K8AK-VW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
3-phase control
K8AK-PH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
K8DS-PH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
K8AK-PM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
K8DS-PM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
K8AK-PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
K8DS-PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
K8DS-PZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
K8DS-PU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
K8AK-PW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Level Control
61F-GP-N8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
61F-GPN-BT/-BC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
K8AK-LS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
K7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Temperature monitor
K8AK-TS/-PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
K8AK-TH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
Solid state relays

Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Panel mounted
G3RV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
G3R-I/-O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
G3NA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
G3PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
G3PE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
G3PH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
G3PF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
G3PW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
G3ZA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609

Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Mini contactor relays
J7KNA-AR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Mini motor contactors
J7KNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Motor contactors
J7KN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Thermal overload relays
J7TKN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Motor protection circuit breakers
J7MN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Pushbutton switches
Selection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Pushbutton switches
A16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
A22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Indicators
M16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
M22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Content
593
UNIQUE!
G2RV-SL 1-6 mm relay with lockable test switch
At the heart of the industrial G2RV relay is a strong mechanical pin with a large contact surface that ensures reliable
connection and high conductivity between the socket and relay. The patented switch design with rotating protection
cover is (almost) impossible to achieve in an adapted PCB relay.
Benefits lockable test switch:
Test panel, machine or system functionality, or simulate an actuator when one or more modules are offline or have
been removed
Rotating protection cover stops accidental operation
See from distance that the switch is protected eg, in a hazardous environment
Plug-in industrial relay

switching capacity up to 15 A
General purpose/Power
Interface/Power
1-pole
SPDT
2-pole
DPDT
1-pole
SPDT
2-pole
DPDT
10 A
Standard type:
6A
Input type:
50 mA
10 A
5A
15 A
Mech. flag
LED indicator
Mech. flag
LED indicator
Mech. flag
LED indicator
Mech. flag
LED indicator
LED indicator
Lockable
test switch
Slim outline
6 mm width
Lockable
test button
Lockable
test button
G2RV
G2RV (-AP)
G2RS1
G2RS2
LY1
R226
Page 599
R226
Page 599
R225
Page 601
R225
Page 601
R224
Page 605
594
Mech. flag
LED indicator
Mech. flag
LED indicator
Lockable
test button
Lockable
test button
LY2
MKS2
MY2
R224
Page 605
R235
Page 606
R223
Page 603
LED indicator
High power relays

up to 40 A
DC-switching
3-pole
3PDT
4-pole
4PDT
Mech. flag
LED indicator
LED indicator
1/2-pole
SPST/DPDT
30 A
10 A
5A
10 A
LED indicator
Mech. flag
LED indicator
Operation
indicators
Lockable
test button
Lockable
test button
Momentary
test button
G7L
Lockable
test button
MKS3
LY3
LY4
MY4
MKS(X)
R235
Page 606
R224
Page 605
R224
Page 605
R223
Page 603
R234
4-pole, 4PST-NO
3PST-NO/SPST-NC
DPST-NO/DPST-NC
25 A
40 A
10 A
SPST-NO,
SPST-NO/
SPST-NC
R227
Mirror
contact
G7J
R233
Page 607
G7Z
R228
595
Selection table
Interface/Power
Family
G2RV
Wiring to
socket
Features
Selection criteria
Category
G2R-_-S
2-pole
3-pole
4-pole
SPDT
SPDT
SPDT
DPDT
DPDT
4PDT
4PDT bifurcated
Contact material
AgSnIn
AgSnIn +
gold plating
AgSnIn
AgSnIn
Ag
AgNi + Au
AgNi + Au
6A
50 mA
10 A
5A
10 A
5A
5A
Min. switching current
10 mA at 5 VDC 1 mA at
100 mVDC
100 mA at 5 VDC
10 mA at 5 VDC
1 mA at 5 VDC
1 mA at 1 VDC
0.1 mA at 1 VDC
Gold clad/plate
Width max. (Relay only)
5.2 mm
5.2 mm
13.0 mm
13.0 mm
21.5 mm
21.5 mm
21.5 mm
LED indication
Mechanical flag
Momentary testbutton
Momentary/
Lockable testbutton (/switch)
Label
Diode (DC coil)
Varistor (AC coil)
CR network (AC coil)
Screw (plate clamp)
Screw (box clamp)
Screw-less clamp
Page/Quick Link
599
601
Family
G7J
Relay
terminals
Selection criteria
High power relays
Mounting
MY
1-pole
Category
596
603
G7L
G7Z
1-pole
2-pole
3-pole
4-pole
Contact
configuration
4PST-NO
4PST-NO
3PST-NO/
SPST-NC
DPST-NO/
DPST-NC
SPST-NO
DPST-NO
4PST-NO
3PST-NO/
SPST-NC
DPST-NO/
DPST-NC
25 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
30 A
25 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
Min. permissible load
100 mA at
24 VDC
100 mA at
24 VDC
100 mA at
24 VDC
100 mA at
24 VDC
100 mA at
5 VDC
100 mA at
5 VDC
2 A at 24 VDC
2 A at 24 VDC
2 A at 24 VDC
Auxilary contact block

mirror contact
Screw
Quick-connect
PCB terminals
Screw
DIN rail
Clip (screw)
Flange (screw)
DIN rail (adapter)
Page/Quick Link
607
R227
R228
Family
LY
MKS
MKS(X)
1-pole
2-pole
3-pole
4-pole
SPDT
DPDT
DPDT
bifurcated
3PDT
4PDT
DPDT
3PDT
SPST-NO
SPST-NO/SPSTNC
Contact material
AgSnIn
AgSnIn
AgSnIn
AgSnIn
AgSnIn
AgSnIn
AgSnIn
AgSnIn
AgSnIn
15 A
10 A
7A
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A, 220 VDC; 5 A, 220 VDC;

15 A, 250 VAC 15 A, 250 VAC
Min. switching current
100 mA at
5 VDC
100 mA at
5 VDC
10 mA at 5 VDC 100 mA at
5 VDC
100 mA at
5 VDC
10 mA at 1 VDC 10 mA at 1 VDC 10 mA at
24 VDC
Gold clad/plate
Width max. (Relay only)
21.5 mm
21.5 mm
21.5 mm
31.5 mm
41.5 mm
34.5 mm
34.5 mm
34.5 mm
34.5 mm
LED indication
Mechanical flag
Momentary/
Lockable testbutton
Label
Diode (DC coil)
Optional
for socket
Optional
for socket
Varistor (AC coil)
CR network (AC coil)
Screw (plate clamp)
Screw (box clamp)
Screw-less clamp
Page/Quick Link
605
606
10 mA at
24 VDC
R234
Wiring to
socket
Features
Selection criteria
Category
Standard
Available
No/not available
597
598
G2RV

The only truly industrial 6 mm relay
Having been designed from first principles, instead of being adapted from a PCB relay,
Omrons G2RV series is the only genuine slim industrial relay on the market. As a result, the G2RV offers a wide array of benefits to machine manufacturers and panel
builders. Just 6mm wide, the relay is ideal for compact panels and equipment, yet it
offers all of the durability and reliability required for industrial applications.
Lockable test switch models available
Large plug-in pins excellent connection
LED/mechanical flag check operation
Transparent housing check condition
Slim outline space saving
Push-in/accessories simple wiring
Special input type with gold plated contacts
G3RV compatible
Relay
Input voltage
Screw terminals
Push-in terminals
Standard type without lockable test switch
12 VDC
G2RV-SL700 DC12
G2RV-SL500 DC12
24 VDC
G2RV-SL700 DC24
G2RV-SL500 DC24
24 VAC/VDC
G2RV-SL700 AC/DC24
G2RV-SL500 AC/DC24
48 VAC/VDC
G2RV-SL700 AC/DC48
G2RV-SL500 AC/DC48
110 VAC
G2RV-SL700 AC110
G2RV-SL500 AC110
230 VAC
G2RV-SL700 AC230
G2RV-SL500 AC230
24 VDC
G2RV-SL701 DC24
G2RV-SL501 DC24
24 VAC/VDC
G2RV-SL701 AC/DC24
G2RV-SL501 AC/DC24
12 VDC
G2RV-SL700-AP DC12
G2RV-SL500-AP DC12
24 VDC
G2RV-SL700-AP DC24
G2RV-SL500-AP DC24
24 VAC/VDC
G2RV-SL700-AP AC/DC24
48 VAC/VDC
110 VAC
G2RV-SL700-AP AC110
G2RV-SL500-AP AC110
230 VAC
G2RV-SL700-AP AC230
G2RV-SL500-AP AC230
Standard type with lockable test switch

Input type
Order code
Type
Description
Order code
Cross bar
2-pole
P2RVM-020_
Cross bar
3-pole
P2RVM-030_
Cross bar
4-pole
P2RVM-040_
Cross bar
10-pole
P2RVM-100_
Cross bar
20-pole
P2RVM-200_
PLC interface
Connect 8 relays and PLC output
P2RVC-8-O-F
PLC interface
Connect 8 relays and PLC input
P2RVC-8-I-F
Label
Plastic, for mounting on socket
R99-15 for G2RV
Label (Sticker)
Paper for mounting on socket or relay
R99-16 for G2RV
Separating plate
Provides isolation between adjacent relays to achieve 400 V isolation
P2RV-S
Relay only
Maintenance part for G2RV-SL_00-series 12 VDC
G2RV-1-S DC11
Relay only
Maintenance part for G2RV-SL_00-series 24 VDC and 24 VAC/VDC
G2RV-1-S DC21
Relay only
Maintenance part for G2RV-SL_00-series 48 VAC/VDC and 110, 230 VAC
G2RV-1-S DC48
Relay only
Maintenance part for G2RV-SL_01-series 24 VDC and 24 VAC/VDC
G2RV-1-SI SC21
Relay only
Maintenance part for G2RV-SL-AP series 12 VDC
G2RV-1-S-AP DC11
Relay only
Maintenance part for G2RV-SL-AP series 24 VDC and 24 VAC/VDC
G2RV-1-S-AP DC21
Relay only
Maintenance part for G2RV-SL-AP series 48 VAC/VDC and 110, 230 VAC
G2RV-1-S-AP DC48
Accessories
Note: _ Select color: R=Red, S=Blue, B=Black
599
G2RV
Interface cables
PLC brand
PLC type
Number of I/O
I/O type
Cable length
Order code
Omron
CJ1
32
Digital Output (MIL)
1.0 m
P2RV-4-100C
2.0 m
P2RV-4-200C
3.0 m
P2RV-4-300C
5.0 m
P2RV-4-500C
1.0 m
P2RV-4-100IFC
2.0 m
P2RV-4-200IFC
3.0 m
P2RV-4-300IFC
5.0 m
P2RV-4-500IFC
1.0 m
P2RV-4-100IMC
2.0 m
P2RV-4-200IMC
3.0 m
P2RV-4-300IMC
5.0 m
P2RV-4-500IMC
0.5 m
P2RV-A050C-OMR GRT1
1.0 m
P2RV-A100C-OMR GRT1
0.5 m
P2RV-A050IC-OMR GRT1
1.0 m
P2RV-A100IC-OMR GRT1
0.5 m
P2RV-A050C-OMR NX
1.0 m
P2RV-A100C-OMR NX
0.5 m
P2RV-A050IC-OMR NX
1.0 m
P2RV-A100IC-OMR NX
2.0 m
P2RV-200C-SIM S7/300
2.5 m
3.0 m
5.0 m
2.0 m
2.5 m
3.0 m
5.0 m
1.0 m
P2RV-A100C
2.0 m
P2RV-A200C
3.0 m
P2RV-A300C
5.0 m
P2RV-A500C
Digital Input (Fujitsu)
Digital Input (MIL)
GRT1 SmartSlice
Digital Output
Digital Input
NX
Digital Output
Digital Input
Siemens
S7/300
S7/400
Multi purpose (flying leads)
All
32
32
Digital Input and Digital Output
Specifications
Coil ratings
Input type*1
Item
Standard type
Contact form
SPDT
Input voltage
12, 24 VDC, 24, 48 VAC/VDC, 110, 230 VAC
Rated load
6 A at 250 VAC
6 A at 30 VDC
400 VAC, 125 VDC
30 VAC, 36 VDC
6A
50 mA
Max. switching power
1,500 VA/180 W (resistive load)
Min. permissible load
10 mA at 5 VDC
Mechanical durability
5 Million operations min.
Electrical durability
(rated load)
100 K operations (typical)
Dielectric strength
4,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between coil and contacts;

1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between contacts of same polarity
Ambient temperature
40 to 55C
Approved standards
UL, IEC/VDE, Lloyd's, and CE marking
Size in mm (HWD)
92.7106.36.2 (push-in type)

97.4106.36.2 (screw type)
*1
If a gold layer is destroyed, contact ratings of standard type are applicable
600
50 mA at 30 VAC
50 mA at 36 VDC
1 mA at 100 mVDC
5 Million operations min.
G2R-_-S

Plug-in relay with enhanced features covers a wide range
of applications
G2RS series, which comes as standard with a mechanical indicator and nameplate covering a wide range of interface applications.
Optionally available with gold clad contacts and diode, whilst the socket and crossbar
range are offering a maximum of flexibility during installation.
SPDT type 10A / DPDT type 5 A
Mechanical Flag, LED indicator and momentary / lockable testbutton optional
Transparent housing
Screwless clamp terminal sockets available
Space saving 16 mm width (including sockets)
Contact form
Diode
LED indicator
Test button
Gold clad 3 m
Order code
( _ _ _ = coil voltage + AC/DC)
SPDT (1-pole)
no
no
no
DC
AC
G2R-1-S_ _ _ (S)
24
230
G2R-1-SN_ _ _ (S)
12, 24
24, 110, 230
G2R-1-SNI_ _ _ (S)
12, 24
12, 24, 110, 230
yes
G2R-1-SNI-AP3_ _ _ (S)
230
no
G2R-1-SND_ _ _ (S)
12, 24
G2R-1-SNDI_ _ _ (S)
24
yes
G2R-1-SNDI-AP3_ _ _ (S)
24
no
G2R-2-S_ _ _ (S)
24
24, 110, 240
G2R-2-SN_ _ _ (S)
12, 24, 48
24, 110, 230
yes
G2R-2-SN-AP3_ _ _ (S)
24
no
G2R-2-SNI_ _ _ (S)
12, 24
12, 24, 110, 230
yes
G2R-2-SNI-AP3_ _ _ (S)
230
no
G2R-2-SD_ _ _ (S)
G2R-2-SND_ _ _ (S)
12, 24
yes
G2R-2-SND-AP3_ _ _ (S)
24
no
G2R-2-SNDI_ _ _ (S)
12, 24
yes
G2R-2-SNDI-AP3_ _ _ (S)
24
no
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
DPDT (2-pole)
no
no
no
yes
yes
yes
no
no
yes
yes
*1
Common coil voltages *1
Other coil voltages available. Please see specifications.
Sockets & accessories

Order code
DIN rail
PCB
Screwless clamp
Screw
(plate clamp)
Screw (box clamp)
Soldering
Socket
Clip
Cross bar
AC type
Cross bar
DC type
Name plate
Socket
Socket
Clip
Name plate
Socket
G2R-1-S
P2RF-05-S
P2CM-S
P2RM-SR
P2RM-SB
R99-11
P2RF-05-E
P2RF-05-ESS
P2CM-ESS
PYC-TR
P2R-05P
G2R-2-S
P2RF-08-S
P2CM-S
P2RM-SR
P2RM-SB
R99-11
P2RF-08-E
P2RF-08-ESS
P2CM-ESS
PYC-TR
P2R-08P
Specifications
Coil ratings
Rated voltage
Must operate voltage
Must release voltage
Max. voltage
Power consumption (approx.)
% of rated voltage
AC
24 V, 110 V, 120 V, 230 V, 240 V
80% max.
30% max.
110%
0.9 VA (60 Hz)
DC
6 V, 12 V, 24 V, 48 V
70% max.
15% max.
110%
0.53 W
Contact ratings
Number of poles
1-pole
Load
Resistive load
(cos = 1)
Inductive load
(cos = 0.4; L/R = 7)
2-pole
Resistive load
(cos = 1)
Inductive load
(cos = 0.4; L/R = 7)
Rated load
10 A at 250 VAC
10 A at 30 VDC
7.5 A at 250 VAC

5 A at 30 VDC
5 A at 250 VAC
5 A at 30 VDC
2 A at 250 VAC
3 A at 30 VDC
Rated carry current
10 A
5A
440 VAC, 125 VDC
380 VAC, 125 VDC
10 A
2,500 VA, 300 W
Failure rate (reference value)
100 mA at 5 VDC
Mechanical life
AC: 10,000,000 operations min., DC: 20,000,000 operations min.
Electrical life
5A
1,875 VA, 150 W
1,250 VA, 150 W
500 VA, 90 W
10 mA at 5 VDC
601
For type
G2R-_-S
Technical data
Item
1-pole
Contact material
AgSnIn
Operating time
15 ms max.
15 ms max.
Release time
AC: 10 ms max., DC: 5 ms max.
Dielectric strength
5,000 VAC (coil-contact)
Ambient temperature
Operating: 40 to 70C (no icing or condensation)
Size in mm (HWD)
35.51329
602
2-pole
MY

Versatile plug-in relay that sets the standard
Over 1 billion pieces of this mini power relay have been manufactured since
its introduction and have successfully been used in many different applications.
Bifurcated contacts optionally are available to achieve reliable low current switching
during the entire electrical life. Full range of sockets covering mounting by screw,
box clamp and screw-less clamp method.
DPDT type 10 A / 4PDT type 5 A
Mechanical flag, LED indicator and momentary / lockable testbutton optional
Transparent housing
Low power switching (1 mA at 5 VDC) / Bifurcated 4PDT (0.1 mA at 1 VDC)
Screw-less clamp terminal sockets available
Contact form
Diode
LED
indicator
Lockable test
button
Order code ( _ _ _ = coil voltage + AC/DC)

13
A1
DPDT
no
DPDT
no
no
yes
DPDT
yes
DPDT
no
yes
DPDT
DPDT
yes
DPDT
4PDT
no
4PDT
no
no
yes
4PDT
yes
4PDT
no
yes
4PDT
4PDT
yes
4PDT
*1
14
A2
13
A1
DC
AC
14
A2
MY2_ _ _ (S)
12, 24
12, 24, 48/50, 110/120, 220/

240
MY2N_ _ _ (S)
12, 24
24, 110/120, 220/240
MY2N-D2_ _ _ (S)
24
MY2IN_ _ _ S)
12, 24, 48
12, 24, 110/120, 220/240
MY2IN1_ _ _ (S)
12, 24
MY2IN-D2_ _ _ (S)
24
MY2IN1-D2_ _ _ (S)
24
MY4_ _ _ (S)
12, 24, 48, 100/110, 125
12, 24, 48/50, 110/120, 220/

240
MY4N_ _ _ (S)
12, 24, 48, 100/110
24, 110/120, 220/240
MY4N-D2_ _ _ (S)
12, 24
MY4IN_ _ _ (S)
12, 24, 48
12, 24, 48/50, 110/120, 220/

240
MY4IN1_ _ _ (S)
12, 24, 48
MY4IN-D2_ _ _ (S)
24
MY4IN1-D2_ _ _ (S)
24, 48
Note MY4 also available with bifurcated contacts => example MY4Z
MY2 and MY4 AC 110/120, 220/240 types also available with suppression => example MY4N-CR

Input terminals separated from output terminals
Order code
Box clamp
Socket
Clip
Cross bar
AC type
Cross bar
DC type
Name plate
Socket
Metal spring clip Plastic holding

clip
Label
MY2
PYF08S
PYCM-08S
PYDM-08SR
PYDM-08SB
R99-11
PYF14-ESS
PYC-0
PYC-35
PYCTR1
MY4
PYF14S
PYCM-14S
PYDM-14SR
PYDM-14SB
R99-11
PYF14-ESS
PYC-0
PYC-35
PYCTR1
Screw-less clamp
For type
Combined input/output terminals

Order code
Screw terminal
Box clamp
Order code
Socket
Clip
(set = 2 pcs)
Clip for MY2IN

(set = 2 pcs)
Socket
Metal spring clip Plastic holding

clip
Label
MY2
PYF08A-N
PYC-A1
PYC-E1
PYF14-ESN
PYC-0
PYC-35
PYCTR1
MY4
PYF14A-N
PYC-A1
PYF14-ESN
PYC-0
PYC-35
PYCTR1
603
MY
Specifications
Coil ratings
Rated voltage
Max. voltage
30% min.
110%
% of rated voltage
AC 6 V, 12 V, 24 V, 48/50 V
80% max
110/120 V, 220/240 V
1.0 to 1.2 VA (60 Hz)

0.9 to 1.1 VA (60 Hz)
DC 6 V, 12 V, 24 V, 48 V, 100/110 V
10% min.
0.9 W
Contact ratings
Item
2-pole
Resistive load
(cos = 1)
Rated load
4-pole
Inductive load
(cos = 0.4; L/R = 7)
4-pole (bifurcated)
Resistive load
(cos = 1)
Inductive load
(cos = 0.4; L/R = 7)
Resistive load
(cos = 1)
Inductive load
(cos = 0.4; L/R = 7)
5 A at 250 VAC
2 A at 250 VAC
3 A at 250 VAC
0.8 A at 250 VAC
3 A at 250 VAC
0.8 A at 250 VAC
5 A at 30 VDC
2 A at 30 VDC
3 A at 30 VDC
1.5 A at 30 VDC
3 A at 30 VDC
1.5 A at 30 VDC
500 VA, 150 W
1,250 VA, 150 W
500 VA, 150 W
Rated carry current
10 A
5A
250 VAC, 125 VDC
250 VAC, 125 VDC
10 A
2,500 VA, 300 W
5 VDC at 1 mA
5A
1,250 VA, 300 W
1,250 VA, 150 W

1 VDC at 1 mA
1 VDC at 100 A
Mechanical life
Electrical life
Technical data
Dimension relay + socket
Item
2-pole
4-pole
Type
Size in mm (HWD)
Contact Material:
Ag
AgNi + Au
PYF08S + MYS
9023.238.2
Operating time
20 ms max.
PYF08A-E + MYS
762331
Release time
20 ms max.
PYF08A-N + MYS
732230
Dielectric strength
2,000 VAC
PYF14S + MYS
89.23136.5
Ambient temperature
Operating: 55 to 70C (no icing)
PYF14A-E + MYS
7629.531
Size in mm (HWD)
2821.536
PYF14A-N + MYS
7329.530
PYF14-ESN + MYS
822780 (incl. plastic holding clip PYC-35)
PYF14-ESS + MYS
832782 (inc. plastic holding clip PYC-35)
604
LY

Miniature 15 A power relay
LY-series comes in SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT and 4PDT types covering depending on
the number of poles 10 or even 15A rated load. Bifurcated contacts available for DPDT
configuration only, whilst the optional Diodes for DC and CR circuit for AC coils are
available for all plug-in types.
SPDT type 15 A / DPDT, 3PDT and 4PDT type 10 A
Led indicator optional
Transparent housing
Suppression by optional Built-in Diodes (DC only) or CR network (AC-types)
DIN rail mounting by socket. PCB and Flange mounting available
Contact form
LED indicator
Diode
Plug-in/solder PCB
Order code *1
Common coil voltages*2
( _ _ _ = coil voltage + AC/DC) DC
UpperAC
mounting
plug-in/solder
yes
no
Terminals
SPDT (1 pole)
no
no
LY1_ _ _
24
SPDT (1 pole)
yes
yes
LY1N-D2_ _ _
24
DPDT (2 pole)
no
no
LY2_ _ _
12, 24, 100/110
24, 100/110, 110/120, 220/240
DPDT (2 pole)
DPDT (2 pole)
yes
yes
3PDT (3 pole)
no
no
no
no
yes
LY2F_ _ _
220/240
yes
no
LY2N-D2_ _ _
24
LY3_ _ _
24
LY4_ _ _
12, 24, 100/110, 125 24, 100/110, 230
LY4N-D2_ _ _
24
4PDT (4 pole)
4PDT (4 pole)
*1
*2
yes
yes
For other options like CR suppression, please see specifications.

Dimension relay & socket
Order code
Type
Size in mm (HWD)
DIN rail
PCB
PTF08A-E + LY
78.528.571
Screw
Soldering
PTF11A-E + LY
78.53771
PTF14A-E + LY
78.545.571
For type
Socket
Clip (set = 2 pcs) Socket
Clip (set = 2 pcs.)
LY1/LY2
PTF08A-E
PYC-A1
PT08-0
PYC-P
LY2 CR-type
PTF08A-E
Y92H-3
PT08-0
PYC-1
LY3
PTF11A-E
PYC-A1
PT11-0
PYC-P
LY4
PTF14A-E
PYC-A1
PT14-0
PYC-P
Specifications
Poles
Technical data
Rated voltage
Must
operate
voltage
Must
release
voltage
Max.
voltage
Power consumption
(approx.)
% of rated voltage
1 or 2
AC 6 V, 12 V, 24 V, 50 V
80% max.
30% min.
110%
100/110 V, 110/120 V, 200/220 V, 220/240 V
0.9 to 1 VA (60 Hz)
DC 6 V, 12 V, 24 V, 48 V, 100/110 V
3
10% min.
AC 6 V, 12 V, 24 V, 50 V, 100/110 V, 200/220 V
80% max.
DC 6 V, 12 V, 24 V, 48 V, 100/110 V
4
1.0 to 1.2 VA (60 Hz)
30% min.
0.9 W
110%
10% min
AC 6 V, 12 V, 24 V, 50 V, 100/110 V, 200/220 V
80% max.
DC 6 V, 12 V, 24 V, 48 V, 100/110 V
30% min.
Contact material
AgSnIn
Operating time
25 ms max.
Release time
25 ms max.
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC
Ambient temperature *1
25 to 70C
*1
Coil ratings
See datasheet for more details.
1.6 to 2.0 VA (60 Hz)

1.4 W
110%
10% min
1.95 to 2.5 VA (60 Hz)

1.5 W
Contact ratings
Relay
Single contact 1-pole
Load
Resistive load
(cos = 1)
Inductive load
(cos = 0.4; L/R = 7)
Single contact 2-, 3- or 4-pole
Bifurcated contacts 2-pole
Resistive load
(cos = 1)
Resistive load
(cos = 1)
Rated load
110 VAC at 15 A
110 VAC at 10 A
110 VAC at 10 A
110 VAC at 7.5 A
110 VAC at 5 A
110 VAC at 4 A
24 VDC at 15 A
24 VDC at 7 A
24 VDC at 10 A
24 VDC at 5 A
24 VDC at 5 A
24 VDC at 4 A
Inductive load
(cos = 0.4; L/R = 7)
Rated carry current
15 A
10 A
7A
250 VAC, 125 VDC
250 VAC, 125 VDC
250 VAC, 125 VDC
10 A
Inductive load
(cos = 0.4; L/R = 7)
15 A
1,700 VA
1,100 VA
1,100 VA
825 VA
550 VA
440 VA
360 W
170 W
240 W
120 W
120 W
100 W
100 mA at 5 VDC
100 mA at 5 VDC
Mechanical life
Electrical life
1-, 3-, 4-pole: 200,000 operations min., 2-pole: 500,000 operations min.
7A
10 mA at 5 VDC
605
MKS

Exceptionally reliable general purpose relay
with 8 or 11 plug-in pins for round sockets
MK relay breaks compared to its size relatively large currents. The AgSnIn contacts
ensure long electrical lifetime (min. 100,000 operations). Wide switching range from
10 mA at 1 VDC upto 10 A at 250 VAC.
8-pin DPDT and 11-pin 3PDT contact types
Switching current up to 10 A
Lockable test button for easy testing
Temperature rating from 40C up to 60C
Contact form
Mechanical indicator & lockable

test button
LED indicator
Diode
Order code *1

DC
AC
DPDT (2-pole)
yes
no
no
MKS2PI
12, 24, 110
24, 110, 230
yes
MKS2PIN
24
24, 230
no
MKS3PI-5
12, 24, 48, 110
12, 24, 110, 230
yes
MKS3PI-D-5
24
N/A
no
MKS3PIN-5
12, 24
24, 110, 230
yes
MKS3PIN-D-5
24
N/A
3PDT (3-pole)
yes
*1
*2
Many various terminal arrangements possible, please see specifications.


For type
Order code
DIN rail
Screw
Box clamp
Socket
Clip (set= 2 pcs.)
Socket
MKS2
PF083A-E
PFC-A1
PF083A-D
MKS3
PF113A-E
PFC-A1
PF113A-N
PF113A-D
Max. voltage
6 V, 12 V, 24 V, 100 V, 110 V, 120 V, 200 V, 80% max.

220 V, 230 V, 240 V
30% min.
110%
6 V, 12 V, 24 V, 48 V, 100 V, 110 V
15% min.
Specifications
Coil ratings
Rated voltage
% of rated voltage
AC
DC
Contact ratings
Load
2- or 3-pole
Resistive load
(cos = 1)
Contact material
AgSnIn
Rated load
NO: 10 A at 250 VAC

NC: 5 A at 30 VDC
Rated carry current
10 A
250 VAC, 250 VDC
10 A
2,500 VA/ 300 W
Mechanical life
Electrical life
100.000 operations min.
Inductive load
(cos = 0.4; L/R = 7)
7 A at 250 VAC
1,250 VA/150 W
Technical data
Operating time
Release time
20 ms max. (40 ms max. for built-in Diode relays)
Dielectric strength
Ambient temperature
Size in mm (HWD)
34.534.553.3
Dimension relay & socket

Type
Size in mm (HWD)
PF083A-E + MKS
564177.8 (incl. clip)
PF113A-E + MKS
5642.887.8 (incl. clip)
PF_ __ A-D + MKS
653880.3
606
Power consumption
(approx.)
2.3 VA (60 Hz)
2.7 VA (50 Hz)
1.4 W
G7J
Industrial high power relays

High capacity, high dielectric strength
4 pole power relay
G7J series developed for switching resistive, inductive as well as motor loads.
No contact chattering for momentary voltage drops up to 50% of rated voltage.
High dielectric strength (4KV) between coil and contacts as well as between different
polarity contacts.
25 A Rated current
4PST-NO, 3PST-NO / SPST-NC or DPST-NO / DPST-NC
Bifurcated contacts optional
Terminals: Screw, Quick-connect or PCB pins
Mounting by insertion into a clip or just by screws (flange type)
Contact form
Mounting
PCB
4PST-NO
Quick-connect Screw
Order code *1
PCB
DC
AC
no
Terminal
W-bracket
mounting
yes
no
yes
no
yes
no
no
G7J-4A-P_ _ _
12, 24
200/240
yes
G7J-4A-B_ _ _
24
no
G7J-4A-T_ _ _
12, 24
200/240
G7J-3A1B-P_ _ _
24
yes
G7J-3A1B-B_ _ _
24
no
G7J-3A1B-T_ _ _
24
200/240
no
G7J-2A2B-P_ _ _
24
Max. voltage
yes
3PST-NO/SPST-NC
yes
no
yes
no
yes
no
DPST-NO/SPST-NC
DPST-NO/DPST-NC
*1
*2
no
yes
yes
no
yes
For other options like bifurcated contacts, please see specifications.

Accessories
For type
Order code
W-bracket
G7J Screw terminal type
R99-04 for G5F
G7J Quick Connect type
Specifications
Coil ratings
Rated voltage
Must operate
voltage
% of rated voltage
AC
24, 50, 100 to 120, 200 to 240
DC
6, 12, 24, 48, 100
75% max.
15% min.
10% min.
110%
1.8 to 2.6 VA
2.0 W
Contact ratings
4-pole
Resistive load
cos = 1
Inductive load
cos = 0.4
Rated load
NO: 25 A at 220 VAC

(24 A at 230 VAC)
NC: 8 A at 220 VAC
(7.5 A at 230 VAC)
Rated carry current
NO: 25 A (1 A), NC: 8 A (1 A)
250 VAC
NO: 25 A (1 A), NC: 8 A (1 A)
Mechanical life
Electrical life
Resistive load
Item
NO: 25 A at
30 VDC
NC: 8 A at
30 VDC
125 VDC
Note: Values between () indicate bifurcated contact specification.
Technical data
Contact material
Ag alloy
Operating time
50 ms max.
Release time
50 ms max.
Dielectric strength
4,000 VAC
Ambient temperature
Operating: -25 to 60C (no icing)
607
Solid state relays

COMPACT SOLID STATE RELAYS
G3_ series Reliable interfacing and power switching
With a wide variety of output currents and voltages, our control-panel mounted types of power switching SSRs
are available with (G3PE & G3PH) and without (G3NA) built-in heat-sink. The compact SSRs for I/O Interfacing
G3RV & G3R offer high-speed models (G3R).
Industrial 6 mm slim SSR which is G2RV compatible (G3RV)
G2RS compatible high-speed interface solutions (G3R-I/O)
G3NA with 5-90 A output current, G3PB up to 45 A
Output voltages up to 480 VAC / 200 VDC available on G3NA
Effectively absorbing of external surge thanks to the built-in varistor
Type of application
Power switching (up to 90 A)
Interfacing
Single-phase
Type and size?
608
Socket
mounted I/O
6 mm slim
Socket
mounted I/O
Compact
hockey puck style
up to 90A
Integrated heat sink

replaceable
powercartridge
up to 60 A
Integrated
heat sink
up to 45 A
Integrated
heatsink 75 or
150A
Integrated heater
burnout and
SSR short-circuit
failure detection
G3RV
G3R-I/O
G3NA
G3PA
G3PE
G3PH
G3PF
R427
Page 612
R428
Page 613
R422
Page 614
R423
Page 616
R425
Page 617
R438
R447
Power controlling
Three-phase
Single phase
Integrated
heat sink
up to 45 A
Integrated
heat sink
up to 60 A
G3PE
G3PW
G3ZA
R425
Page 617
R442
R426
Solid state relays
Multi channel up to 8
solid state relays
609
Selection table
Category
Control panel mounting type
Model
G3RV
G3R-I/O
Output module (interface)
Input Module (interface)
Output Module (interface)
G3NA
G3PA
Normal resistive heaters

Motor control
1-phase control
2-phase control
3-phase control
Function
Signal switching
Signal switching
Signal switching
Heater control, motor

control
Heater control
Max. current rating
2 A (AC); 3 A (DC)
100 mA
2A
90 A
60 A
24 to 240
100 to 240
200 to 480
5 to 200
3 to 26.4
4 to 32
5 to 24 VDC
12 to 24 VDC
12 VDC 10%; 24 VDC 10%
24 VAC
24 VAC/DC 10%
100 to 120 VAC
110 VAC 10%
200 to 240 VAC
230 VAC 10%
Mounting
Features
Input voltages
[VDC or VAC]
Load voltage/
current [VDC]
Load voltage/
current [VAC]
Selection criteria
Type of load
610
Analog input
Built-in heat sink
Zero-cross
Built-in varistor
LED operation indicator
Protective cover
NA
NA
NA
3-phase loads via

3 single-phase SSRs
NA
NA
NA
Replaceable
power cartridge
Alarm output
NA
NA
NA
Built-in failure detection
NA
NA
NA
SSR open circuits detection
NA
NA
NA
SSR short circuits detection
NA
NA
NA
DIN-rail
Screw
Mounting socket
Page/Quick Link
612
613
614
616
Solid state relays

Control panel mounting type
Power regulator
G3PE
G3PE
G3PH
G3PF
G3PW
G3ZA
Normal resistive & lamp

heaters
Normal resistors
Alloy heater
Pure metal heater, nonmetal
heater (Constant-current
models recommended.)
Depends on the SSR used

Distributes loop/control
output levels (mV%) to SSRs
Heater control
Heater control
(Lamp) heater control
Heater control and diagnostics Single-phase power control
45 A
45 A
150 A
35 A
60 A
(180 to 480)
400 to 480
(100 to 240 VAC)
(100 to 240 VAC)
4 to 20 mA DC, 1 to 5 VDC
617
R438
R447
R442
R426
Standard
Available
No/not available
Solid state relays
Intelligent power control
NA Not applicable
611
G3RV
Panel mounted
Industrial 6 mm slim SSR which is G2RV compatible
As well as being slim and thus saving panel space, G3RV relays are very strong, have a
large contact area and non-bendable pins. Connection to a PLC is easy and achieved
faultlessly in a few seconds via click connectors. In addition, power switching in G3RV
relays with DC outputs is managed by a MOSFET in the output, which has ideal heat
dissipation characteristics.
G2RV compatible
LED indicator built in SSR
Push-in terminals and accessories for easy wiring
Zero
Input
cross
Rated voltage
function (operating voltage)
Output
Rated current
AC
50 Hz
DC
Must operate Must release

voltage
voltage
Rated load
voltage (load
voltage range)
Load current Inrush current
60Hz
Type of
Order code
connection
24 VAC/DC
10.7 mA 11.1 mA 4.3 mA
(21.6 to 26.4 VAC/DC)
21.6 V
1V
5 to 24 VDC
(3 to 26.4 VDC)
100 A to 3 A 30 A
(60 Hz, 1 cycle)
Screw
G3RV-SL700-D AC/DC24
24 VAC/DC
10.7 mA 11.1 mA 4.3 mA
(21.6 to 26.4 VAC/DC)
21.6 V
1V
5 to 24 VDC
(3 to 26.4 VDC)
100 A to 3 A 30 A
(60 Hz, 1 cycle)
Push-in
G3RV-SL500-D AC/DC24
Yes
24 VAC/DC
20 mA
(21.6 to 26.4 VAC/DC)
21 mA
11 mA
21.6 V
1V
100 to 240 VAC 0.1 A to 2 A

(75 to 264 VAC)
30 A
(60 Hz, 1 cycle)
Screw
G3RV-SL700-A AC/DC24
Yes
24 VAC/DC
20 mA
(21.6 to 26.4 VAC/DC)
21 mA
11 mA
21.6 V
1V
100 to 240 VAC 0.1 A to 2 A

(75 to 264 VAC)
30 A
(60 Hz, 1 cycle)
Push-in
G3RV-SL500-A AC/DC24
230 VAC
(207 to 253 VAC)
6.8 mA
8.1 mA
207 V
1V
5 to 24 VDC
(3 to 26.4 VDC)
100 A to 3 A 30 A
(60 Hz, 1 cycle)
Screw
G3RV-SL700-D AC230
230 VAC
(207 to 253 VAC)
6.8 mA
8.1 mA
207 V
1V
5 to 24 VDC
(3 to 26.4 VDC)
100 A to 3 A 30 A
(60 Hz, 1 cycle)
Push-in
G3RV-SL500-D AC230
Note: Ratings at an ambient temperature of 25C
Accessories
Type
Description
Order code
Cross bar
2-pole
P2RVM-020_
Cross bar
3-pole
P2RVM-030_
Cross bar
4-pole
P2RVM-040_
Cross bar
10-pole
P2RVM-100_
Cross bar
20-pole
P2RVM-200_
PLC interface
Connect 8 relays and PLC output
P2RVC-8-O-F
Label
Plastic, for mounting on socket
R99-15 for G2RV
Label (Sticker)
Paper for mounting on socket or relay
R99-16 for G2RV
Separating plate
Provides isolation between adjacent relays to achieve 400 V isolation
P2RV-S
Note: _ Select color: R=Red, S=Blue, B=Black
Specifications
Order code
G3RV-SL700/500-A
G3RV-SL700/500-D
Isolation
Triac
Mosfet
Output ON voltage drop
1.6 V rms max.
0.9 V max.
Leakage current
5 mA max. (at 200 VAC 50/60 Hz)
10 A max. (at 24 VDC)
Operating indicator
Yes
Ambient temperature
612
Storage
30~+100C (with no icing or condensation)
Operating
30~+55C (with no icing or condensation)
G3R-I/-O
Panel mounted
Compact SSR for I/O interface with high dielectric
strength requirements
High-speed models with optimum input ratings for a variety of sensors are available,
as well as input and output modules that can be used instead of the G2RS. Use a coupler conforming to VDE 0884 and assuring an I/O dielectric strength of 4,000V.
1.5 and 2A output current
5 to 200VDC/100 to 240VAC output voltages
Compatible with G2RS electromechanical relays
DIN-rail mounting via sockets
Operation indicator to confirm input
Input module
Response speed Input
Output
Rated voltage
Input current
(operating voltage)
Must operate
voltage
Must release
voltage
Logic level supply

voltage
Logic level supply

current
Size in mm
(HxWxD)
100 to 240 VAC

(60 to 264 VAC)
15 mA max.
60 VAC max.
20 VAC min.
4 to 32 VDC
0.1 to 100 mA
High-speed
(1 kHz)
5 VDC
(4 to 6 VDC)
8 mA max.
4 VDC max.
1 VDC min.
12 to 24 VDC
(6.6 to 32 VDC)
6.6 VDC max.
3.6 VDC min.
29x13x28
G3R-IAZR1SN-UTU
(90.5x16x61
in combination with G3R-IDZR1SN-UTU
P2RF-05-E mounting
socket)
5 VDC
(4 to 6 VDC)
4 VDC max.
1 VDC min.
12 to 24 VDC
(6.6 to 32 VDC)
6.6 VDC max.
3.6 VDC min.
Low-speed
(10 Hz)
Order code
G3R-IDZR1SN-1-UTU

Output module
Zero cross
function
Input
Rated voltage
Input current
(operating voltage)
Must operate
voltage
Must release
voltage
Rated load voltage Load

Inrush
(load voltage
current*1 current
range)
Size in mm
(HxWxD)
Yes
5 to 24 VDC
(4 to 32 VDC)
4 VDC max.
1 VDC min.
100 to 240 VAC

(75 to 264 VAC)
0.05 to
2A
30 A
(60 Hz,
1 cycle)
5 to 48 VDC
(4 to 60 VDC)
0.01 to
2A
8A
(10 ms)
29x13x28
G3R-OA202SZN-UTU
(90.5x16x61
G3R-OA202SLN-UTU
in combination with
P2RF-05-E mounting G3R-ODX02SN-UTU
socket)
48 to 200 VDC
(40 to 200 VDC)
0.01 to
1.5 A
8A
(10 ms)
No
Output
15 mA max.
8 mA max.
Order code
G3R-OD201SN-UTU

*1
The minimum current value is measured at 10C min.
Socket & accessories

Order code
PCB
Screwless clamp
Screw
Soldering
Socket
Clip
Cross bar AC type
Cross bar DC type
Name plate
Socket
Socket
P2RF-05-S
P2CM-S
P2RM-SR
P2RM-SB
R99-11
P2RF-05-E
P2R-05P
Solid state relays
DIN rail
Specifications
Input module
Output module
Order code
G3R-IAZR1SN-UTU G3R-IDZR1SN-UTU G3R-IDZR1SN-1UTU
G3R-OA202SZNUTU
Isolation
Photocoupler
Operate time
20 ms max.
0.1 ms max.
15 ms max.
G3R-OA202SLNUTU
G3R-ODX02SN-UTU G3R-OD201SN-UTU
Phototriac
Photocoupler
1/2 of load power 1 ms max.

source cycle + 1 ms
max.
1 ms max.
1 ms max.
Release time
20 ms max.
0.1 ms max.
15 ms max.
1/2 of load power source cycle + 1 ms max. 2 ms max.
2 ms max.
Response frequency
10 Hz
1 kHz
10 Hz
20 Hz
100 Hz
1.6 V max.
1.6 V max.
1.6 V max.
1.6 V max.
1.6 V max.
1.6 V max.
2.5 V max.
Leakage current
5 A max.
5 A max.
5 A max.
1.5 mA max.
1.5 mA max.
1 mA max.
1 mA max.
Operation indicator
Yes
Ambient temperature
Operating: -30 to 80C (with no icing)
20 Hz
100 Hz
613
G3NA
Panel mounted
Hockey puck style SSR with 5-90 A output currents
All models feature the same compact dimensions to provide a uniform mounting
pitch. A built-in varistor effectively absorbs external surges. The operation indicator
enables monitoring operation.
5-90 A output current
24-480 VAC/5-200VDC output voltages
Built-in varistor
Operation indicator (red LED)
Protective cover for greater safety
Applicable output load
Zero cross Isolation

function
Rated input
voltage
24 to 240 VAC
Yes
5 to 24 VDC
5A
Phototriac
Phototriac
Phototriac
Phototriac
200 to 240 VAC
150 VAC max.
40 VAC min.
5 to 24 VDC
4 VDC max.
1 VDC min.
75 VAC max.
20 VAC min.
200 to 240 VAC
150 VAC max.
40 VAC min.
5 to 24 VDC
4 VDC max.
1 VDC min.
75 VAC max.
20 VAC min.
200 to 240 VAC
150 VAC max.
40 VAC min.
5 to 24 VDC
4 VDC max.
1 VDC min.
Photocoupler 100 to 120 VAC

50 A
Phototriac
75 VAC max.
20 VAC min.
200 to 240 VAC
150 VAC max.
40 VAC min.
5 to 24 VDC
4 VDC max.
1 VDC min.

75 A
75 VAC max.
20 VAC min.
200 to 240 VAC
150 VAC max.
40 VAC min.
5 to 24 VDC
4 VDC max.
1 VDC min.
75 VAC max.
20 VAC min.
Phototriac
4 VDC max.
1 VDC min.
75 VAC max.
20 VAC min.
Photocoupler 5 to 24 VDC
4 VDC max.
1 VDC min.
100 to 240 VAC
75 VAC max.
20 VAC min.
5 to 24 VDC
4 VDC max.
1 VDC min.
100 to 240 VAC
75 VAC max.
20 VAC min.
5 to 24 VDC
4 VDC max.
1 VDC min.
100 to 240 VAC
75 VAC max.
20 VAC min.
5 to 24 VDC
4 VDC max.
1 VDC min.
100 to 240 VAC
75 VAC max.
20 VAC min.
5 to 24 VDC
4 VDC max.
1 VDC min.
100 to 240 VAC
75 VAC max.
20 VAC min.
5 to 24 VDC
4 VDC max.
1 VDC min.
100 to 240 VAC
75 VAC max.
20 VAC min.
Phototriac
90 A
5 to 200 VDC
10 A
No
200 to 480 VAC
10 A
Yes
0.1 to 5 A/0.1 to 3 A
1 VDC min.
20 VAC min.

40 A
Load current with/

Size in mm Order code
without heatsink at 40 C (HWD)
4 VDC max.

20 A
Must release
voltage
75 VAC max.

10 A
Must operate
voltage
25 A
50 A
75 A
90 A
5 to 24 VDC
584327 G3NA-205B-UTU DC5-24

G3NA-205B-UTU AC100-120
G3NA-205B-UTU AC200-240
0.1 to 10 A/0.1 to 4 A
584327 G3NA-210B-UTU DC5-24

G3NA-210B-UTU AC100-120
G3NA-210B-UTU AC200-240
0.1 to 20 A/0.1 to 4 A
584327 G3NA-220B-UTU DC5-24

G3NA-220B-UTU AC100-120
G3NA-220B-UTU AC200-240
0.1 to 40 A/0.1 to 6 A
584327 G3NA-240B-UTU DC5-24

G3NA-240B-UTU AC100-120
G3NA-240B-UTU AC200-240
0.1 to 50 A/0.1 to 6 A
584327 G3NA-250B-UTU DC5-24

G3NA-250B-UTU AC100-120
G3NA-250B-UTU AC200-240
1 to 75 A/1 to 7 A
584330 G3NA-275B-UTU-2 DC5-24
1 to 90 A/1 to 7 A
584330 G3NA-290B-UTU-2 DC5-24
0.1 to 10 A/0.1 to 4 A
584327 G3NA-D210B-UTU DC5-24
0.2 to 10 A/0.2 to 4 A
584327 G3NA-410B-UTU DC5-24
0.2 to 20 A/0.2 to 4 A
584327 G3NA-425B-UTU-2 DC5-24
0.2 to 40 A/0.2 to 6 A
584330 G3NA-450B-UTU-2 DC5-24
1 to 75 A/1 to 7 A
584330 G3NA-475B-UTU-2 DC5-24
1 to 90 A/1 to 7 A
584330 G3NA-490B-UTU-2 DC5-24
G3NA-275B-UTU-2 AC100-240
G3NA-290B-UTU-2 AC100-240
G3NA-D210B-UTU AC100-240
G3NA-410B-UTU AC100-240
G3NA-425B-UTU-2 AC100-240
G3NA-450B-UTU-2 AC100-240
G3NA-475B-UTU-2 AC100-240
G3NA-490B-UTU-2 AC100-240
Accessories
Name
Applicable SSRs
Size in mm (HWD)*1
Order code
One-touch mounting plates
NA
R99-12 FOR G3NA
Mounting bracket
G3NA-240B-UTU
NA
R99-11 FOR G3NA
Slim heat sink enabling DIN-rail mounting
G3NA-205B-UTU, G3NA-210B-UTU,
G3NA-D210B-UTU, G3NA-410B-UTU
1004751
Y92B-N50
G3NA-220B-UTU, G3NA-425B-UTU(-2)
10075100
Y92B-N100
G3NA-240B-UTU, G3NA-250B-UTU
100104100
Y92B-N150
G3NA-450B-UTU(-2)
190.5130.5100
Y92B-P250
G3NA-275B-UTU(-2), G3NA-290B-UTU(-2),
G3NA-475B-UTU(-2), G3NA-490B-UTU(-2)
172110150
Y92B-P250NF
G3NA-205B-UTU, G3NA-210B-UTU,
G3NA-D210B-UTU, G3NA-220B-UTU,
G3NA-410B-UTU, G3NA-425B-UTU(-2)
10010260
Y92B-A100
G3NA-240-B-UTU
15010260
Y92B-A150N
Low-cost heat sink
*1
Size includes heat sink + G3NA SSR
614
G3NA
Panel mounted
5 to 24 VDC: 4 to 32 VDC
100 to 120 VAC: 75 to 132 VAC
200 to 240 VAC: 150 to 264 VAC
G3NA-2: 1.6 V (RMS) max.

G3NA-4: 1.8 V (RMS) max.
G3NA-D2: 1.5 V max.
Leakage current
5 mA (100 V)/10 mA (200 V)

G3NA-D2: 5 mA max. (200 VDC)
Load voltage range
200 to 480 VAC: 180 to 528 VAC

24 to 240 VAC: 19 to 264 VAC
5 to 200 VDC: 4 to 220 VDC
Ambient temperature
Operate & release time
1/2 of load power source cycle + 1 ms max. (DC input)

1/2 of load power source cycle + 1 ms max. (DC input)
G3NA-D2
1 ms max. (DC input; release 5 ms),

30 ms max. (AC input)
Solid state relays
Specifications
615
G3PA
Panel mounted
Solid State Relays with exchangeable power cartridge
Optimum design of the heat sink has contributed to the downsizing of this product.
The power element cartridges of the G3PA are easily replaceable for easy maintenance. G3PA can be mounted on a DIN-rail or using screws.
10-60 A output current
24-480 VAC output voltages
Applicable with 3-phase loads
Replaceable power element cartridges
Rated output load
24 to 240 VAC
Zero cross
function
Rated input
voltage
Operating
voltage range
Input
current
impedance
Voltage level
Must operate
voltage
Must release
voltage
Yes
5 to 24 VDC
4 to 30 VDC
7 mA max.
4 VDC max.
1 VDC min.
200 to 480 VAC
Order code
10027100
G3PA-210B-VD DC5-24
20 A
10037100
G3PA-220B-VD DC5-24
40 A
10047100
G3PA-240B-VD DC5-24
60 A
100110100
G3PA-260B-VD DC5-24
10027100
G3PA-210B-VD AC24
20 A
10037100
G3PA-220B-VD AC24
40 A
10047100
G3PA-240B-VD AC24
60 A
100110100
G3PA-260B-VD AC24
10037100
G3PA-420B-VD DC12-24
30 A
10047100
20 A
10037100
G3PA-420B-VD-2 DC12-24
30 A
10047100
G3PA-430B-VD-2 DC12-24
50 A
100110100
G3PA-450B-VD-2 DC12-24
10 A
10 A
180 to 400 VAC
Size in mm
(HWD)
24 VAC
20 A
12 to 24 VDC
19.2 to 26.4 VAC 1.4 k 20%
9.6 to 30 VDC
7 mA max.
19.2 VAC max.
9.2 VDC max.
4.8 VAC min.
1 VDC min.
Accessories
Replacement parts: Power device cartridges
G32A-D_ _ enables 2 line switching of 3 phase configurations
Load voltage
range
Carry
Applicable SSR
current
Order code
19 to 264 VAC
10 A
G3PA-210B-VD DC5-24
G32A-A10-VD DC5-24
G3PA-210B-VD AC24
G32A-A10-VD AC24
G3PA-220B-VD DC5-24
G32A-A20-VD DC5-24
30 A
G3PA-220B-VD AC24
G32A-A20-VD AC24
40 A
G3PA-240B-VD DC5-24
G32A-A40-VD DC5-24
G3PA-240B-VD AC24
G32A-A40-VD AC24
G3PA-260B-VD DC5-24
G32A-A60-VD DC5-24
G3PA-260B-VD AC24
G32A-A60-VD AC24
150 to 440 VAC 20 A
G32A-A420-VD DC12-24
30 A
G32A-A430-VD DC12-24
180 to 528 VAC 20 A
G3PA-420B-VD-2 DC12-24
G32A-A420-VD-2 DC12-24
30 A
G3PA-430B-VD-2 DC12-24
G32A-A430-VD-2 DC12-24
50 A
G3PA-450B-VD-2 DC12-24
G32A-A450-VD-2 DC12-24
20 A
40 A
60 A
Specifications
Isolation
Phototriac coupler
Indicator
Yes
Ambient temperature
Load voltage range
200 to 480 VAC: 180 to 528 VAC

24 to 240 VAC: 19 to 264 VAC
180 to 400 VAC: 150 to 440 VAC
Output ON drop
1.6 V (RMS) max.
Operate time
0.5 of load power source cycle + 1 ms max. (DC input, -B models)

1.5 of load power source cycle + 1 ms max. (AC input)
1 ms max. (-BL models)
Release time
0.5 of load power source cycle + 1 ms max. (DC input)

1.5 of load power source cycle + 1 ms max. (AC input)
616
Current flow
Applicable SSR
10 A
G3PA-210B-VD, G3PA-210BL-VD, G32A-D20

G3PA-220B-VD, G3PA-220BL-VD,
G3PA-420B-VD, G3PA-420B-VD-2
20 A
Order code
G3PA-430B-VD, G3PA-430B-VD-2, G32A-D40

G3PA-240B-VD, G3PA-240BL-VD
G3PE
Panel mounted
Omrons G3PE compact industrial SSR with outstanding
surge endurance
The G3PE features an original surge-pass circuit that gives outstanding surge endurance and protects the semiconductor device against voltages in excess of 30 kV.
Single and three phase, 15-45 A output current
100-240 VAC and 200-480 VAC output voltages
Models available without zero cross
Improved surge dielectric strength for output circuits
Terminal cover with finger protection
Mount to DIN track or with screws
Phases Rated voltage
(operating voltage)
1
100 to 240 VAC

(75 to 264 VAC)
Rated output Permissible I2t

load
(half 60 Hz wave)
Applicable heater capacity

AC1: resistive load)
Size in mm (HWD)
Number of poles
Order code
15 A (at 40C) 121 A s
3 kW (at 200 VAC)
10022.5100
G3PE-215B DC12-24
25 A (at 40C) 260 A2s
5 kW (at 200 VAC)
G3PE-225B DC12-24
G3PE-235B DC12-24
G3PE-245B DC12-24
G3PE-515B DC12-24
G3PE-525B DC12-24
10044.5100
G3PE-535B DC12-24
G3PE-545B DC12-24
10080155
G3PE-515B-3N DC12-24
G3PE-515B-2N DC12-24
12080155
G3PE-525B-3N DC12-24
10080155
G3PE-525B-2N DC12-24
29 kW (at 480 VAC)
14080155
G3PE-535B-3N DC12-24
12080155
G3PE-535B-2N DC12-24
37.4 kW (at 480 VAC)
140110155
G3PE-545B-3N DC12-24
14080155
G3PE-545B-2N DC12-24
35 A
200 to 480 VAC

(180 to 528 VAC)
200 to 480 VAC

(180 to 528 VAC)
1,260 A s
7 kW (at 200 VAC)
45 A
9 kW (at 200 VAC)
15 A (at 40C) 128 A2s
6 kW (at 400 VAC)
25 A (at 40C) 1,350 A2s
10 kW (at 400 VAC)
35 A
14 kW (at 400 VAC)
45 A
3
6,600 A2s
15 A (at 40C) 260 A2s
25 A (at 40C)
35 A
45 A
10022.5100
18 kW (at 400 VAC)

12.5 kW (at 480 VAC)
20.7 kW (at 480 VAC)

1,260 A2s
10044.5100
Rated input voltage
12 to 24 VDC
9.6 to 30 VDC
Rated input current (impedance)
7 mA max. (zero cross models); 15 mA max. (models without zero cross)
Zero cross function
Yes
9.6 VDC max.
1 VDC min.
Isolation method
Phototriac coupler
Operation indicator
Yes (yellow)
Load voltage range
200 to 480 VAC models: 180 to 528 VAC

100 to 240 VAC models: 75 to 264 VAC
Operate time
1/2 of load power source cycle +1 ms max.
Release time
1/2 of load power source cycle +1 ms max.
Leakage current
10 mA (at 200 VAC)
Ambient temperature
Solid state relays
Specifications
617

J7KN MOTOR CONTACTOR
J7KN Motor contactors
The popular J7KN series offers many outstanding benefits, such as space-saving, small footprint, great reliability, and an ambient temperature rating up to
+90C. But now weve replaced it with a completely new design that extends its application range and will make your life even easier.
The new J7KN 10D to 22D series has the same footprint and severe ambient temperature rating, but has an improved design affording better protection,
easier maintenance plus an integrated auxiliary double contact suitable for switching electronic circuits (17 V, 5 mA).
Basic units can be combined with auxiliary contacts (top/side mounting)
3-main-pole and 4-main-pole versions are possible
The power range covers 4 to 500 kW
Different coil voltages (AC and DC)
J7KN-10D to J7KN-22D models have integrated auxiliary contact for electronic circuits (3-pole versions)
Which type of application is required?
Control switches
Motor switching
Current rating required?
618
Low
up to 12 A, 5.5 kW
High
up to 860 A, 500 kW
Mini contactor
relays
(10 A)
Mini motor
contactor
Motor contactor
J7KNA-AR
J7KNA
J7KN
R724
Page 625
R723
Page 626
R722
Page 627
Motor protection
Protection
with fuse
Fuseless
Thermal overload
relays
(0.12 to 180 A)
Motor protection
circuit breakers
(0.16 to 100 A)
J7TKN
J7MN
R726
Page 629
R725
Page 631
Which kind of protection is needed?
619
Selection table
Motor protection circuit breaker
MPCB
Category
Type
J7MN-3P/3R
0.16 - 32 A
Number of ranges
16
Auxiliary contact external
front 1 NO and 1 NC or 2 NO,

side 1 NO and NC or 2 NO or 2 NC
Page/Quick Link
631
Category
Contactors
Contactors
Setting range current
Type
J7KNA-AR
J7KNA-09/12
J7KN(G)-10(D)
J7KN(G)-14(D)
J7KN(G)-18(D)
J7KN(G)-22(D)
Maximum power
AC3-380/415 V
4 kW or 5 kW
4 kW
5.5 kW
7.5 kW
11 kW
Rated current
AC3-380/415 V
10 A th
9/12 A
10 A
14 A
18 A
22 A
Main contacts
Auxiliary contacts
4 in 4 configurations
3 or 4
3 or 4
Included
1 NO or 1 NC
External
4 in different combinations
4 contacts*1
625
627
626
Category
Thermal overload
Thermal overload
Page/Quick Link
Type
J7TKN-A
J7TKN-B
Setting range D.O.L.
0.12 - 14 A
0.12 - 32 A
Number of ranges
13
16
Auxiliary contacts included
1 NO and 1 NC
1 NO and 1 NC
Page/Quick Link
629
629
*1
Using J7KN with DC double wiring coils results in 1 aux. less
620
627

Motor protection circuit breaker
J7MN-6R
Over lapping area
J7MN-3P/3R
J7MN-6R
J7MN-9R
26 - 63 A
63 - 100 A
front 1 NO and 1 NC or 2 NO,

side 1 NO and NC or 2 NO or 2 NC
631
Contactors
J7KN(G)-24
J7KN(G)-32
J7KN(G)-40
J7KN-50
J7KN-62
J7KN-74
J7KN-90
J7KN-115
11 kW
15 kW
18.5 kW
22 kW
30 kW
37 kW
45 kW
55 kW
24 A
32 A
40 A
50 A
62 A
74 A
90 A
115 A
front and side 8-contacts*1
front and side 8-contacts*1
front and side 11-contacts
627
627
627
J7TKN-C
J7TKN-D
J7TKN-E
28 - 42 A
40 - 74 A
60 - 120 A
Thermal overload
1 NO and 1 NC
1 NO and 1 NC
1 NO and 1 NC
629
629
629
Using J7KN with DC double wiring coils results in 1 aux. less
*1
621
Category
Contactors
Contactors
Selection table
Type
J7KN-151
J7KN-176
J7KN-210
J7KN-260
Maximum power
AC3-380/415 V
75 kW
90 kW
110 kW
132 kW
Rated current
AC3-380/415 V
150 A
175 A
210 A
260 A
Main contacts
Auxiliary contacts
Included
External
627
Category
Thermal overload
Thermal overload
Page/Quick Link
3 or 4
Type
J7TKN-E
J7TKN-F
Setting range D.O.L.
60 - 120 A
120 - 180 A
144 - 320 A
Number of ranges
Auxiliary contacts included
1 NO and 1 NC
1 NO and 1 NC
1 NO and 1 NC
Page/Quick Link
629
622
J7TKN-G
Contactors
J7KN-316
J7KN-450-22
J7KN-550-22
J7KN-700-22
J7KN-860-22
160 kW
250 kW
300 kW
400 kW
500 kW
315 A
450 A
550 A
700 A
860 A
front 4-contacts
front 4-contacts
front 4-contacts
front 4-contacts
627
Thermal overload
J7TKN-G
J7TKN-H
144 - 320 A
240 - 800 A
1 NO and 1 NC
1 NO and 1 NC
629
623
624
J7KNA-AR
Mini contactor relays

Main mini contactor relay, 4-pole
Three basic units can be combined with different additional auxiliary contacts.
4-pole, 6-pole and 8-pole versions in different configurations are possible as well as
different coil voltages (AC and DC). Accessories such as suppressors are available.
Mirror contacts
Screw fixing and snap fitting (35 mm DIN-rail)
Rated current = 10 A (Ith)
Suitable for electronic devices (DIN 19240)
Finger proof (BGV A2)
Operation
Contacts
NO
NC
Distinctive number
according to
DIN EN 50011
Ratings
AC15
230 V
A
400 V
A
Ith, A
Coil voltage *1,

replace _ _ _ with:
Thermal rated Order code

current
4-pole, with screw terminals

AC
DC solenoid
DC solenoid
with diode
*1
VAC
VDC
40 E
10
J7KNA-AR-40_ _ _
24
110
230
31 E
10
J7KNA-AR-31 _ _ _
24
110
230
22 E
10
J7KNA-AR-22 _ _ _
24
110
230
40 E
10
J7KNA-AR-40 _ _ _
24D
110D
31 E
10
J7KNA-AR-31 _ _ _
24D
110D
22 E
10
J7KNA-AR-22 _ _ _
24D
110D
40 E
10
J7KNA-AR-40 _ _ _ _
24VS
31 E
10
J7KNA-AR-31 _ _ _ _
24VS
22 E
10
J7KNA-AR-22 _ _ _ _
24VS
Other coil voltages available on request
Accessories
Contacts
NO
NC
Ratings
Thermal rated current
AC15
230 V
A
Ith, A
400 V
A
Order code
10
J73KN-A-11
10
J73KN-A-02
10
J73KN-A-40
10
J73KN-A-22
10
J73KN-A-04
Specifications
24
Voltage marking at the coil for
Rated control voltage Us range for
50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
min. V
max. V
min. V
max. V
24
24
22
24
24
24
60 Hz
110
110 to 115
120 to 125
110
115
120
125
230
220 to 230
240
220
230
240
250
Suffix to contactor type

e.g. J7KNA-09-10-24
625
J7KNA
Mini motor contactors

Motor contactors from 4 to 5.5 kW for normal duty
switching
This modular system consists of main contactors and additional contact blocks.
The basic units can be combined with auxiliary contacts (top mounting).
Reversed versions, including integrated mechanical interlock, are available as well
as 3-main-pole and 4-main-pole versions.
4 kW and 5.5 kW versions are available
Mini and normal-size versions are available
The contactors can be mounted with screw fixing and snap fitting on a DIN-rail
All components are finger proof
Operation
AC/DC
solenoid
Poles
Rating AC2, AC3
Rated current
380 V
400 V
415 V
kW
AC3
AC1
500 V
kW
660 V
690 V
kW
400 V
A
690 V
A
20
5.5
DC solenoid
with diode
DC solenoid
with diode
*1
5.5
12
20
Coil voltage*1 ,
replace _ _ _ with:
Overload
relay
Size in mm
(HWD)
Order code
57.54549
J7KNA-09-10_ _ _
24
110
230
400
24D
NO
NC
J7TKN-A
VAC
VDC
J7TKN-A
J7KNA-09-01_ _ _
24
110
230
400
24D
J7TKN-A
J7KNA-12-10_ _ _
24
110
230
400
24D
J7TKN-A
J7KNA-12-01_ _ _
24
110
230
400
24D
20
J7TKN-A
J7KNA-09-4_ _ _
24
110
230
400
24D
20
J7TKN-A
J7KNA-09-10_ _ _
24VS
J7TKN-A
J7KNA-09-01_ _ _
24VS
J7TKN-A
J7KNA-12-10_ _ _
24VS
J7TKN-A
J7KNA-12-01_ _ _
24VS
J7KNA-09-01 R_ _ _
24
110
230
400
24D
5.5
AC/DC
solenoid
5.5
Auxiliary
contact
3
reversing
contactors
5.5
5.5
12
20
20
J7TKN-A
57.594.550
5.5
5.5
5.5
12
20
J7TKN-A
J7KNA-12-01 R_ _ _
24
110
230
400
24D
20
J7TKN-A
J7KNA-09-01 R_ _ _
24VS
5.5
5.5
5.5
12
20
J7TKN-A
J7KNA-12-01 R_ _ _
24VS
Accessories
Auxiliary contacts
Contacts
Rated current
NO
NC
AC15
230 V
Order code
400 V
3A
2A
J73KN-AM-11
3A
2A
J73KN-AM-02
3A
2A
J73KN-AM-22
Auxiliary contacts for reversing contactors

1
3A
2A
J73KN-AM-11V
3A
2A
J73KN-AM-11X
Link modules between MPCB & contactors

J77MN-VKA-3
For MPCB J7MN-3P/J7MN-3R

Insulated wiring system for J7KNA-09-01-R...(D) and J7KNA-12-01-R...(D)
J74-WKR-A
Reversing Starter Connector for Mini Reversing Contactors, mechanical interlocked
Specifications
Suffix to contactor type e.g. Voltage marking
J7KNA-09-10-24
at the coil for
Rated control voltage Us

range for
50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
min. V
max. V
min. V
max. V
24
24
24
22
24
24
24
110
110 to
115
120 to
125
110
115
120
125
220 to
230
240
220
230
60 Hz
230
240
250
Main contacts
J7KNA-09-_ _ _
J7KNA-12-_ _ _
Rated insulation voltage Ui
690 VAC
690 VAC
Making capacity Ieff
at Ue = 690 VAC
165 A
165 A
Breaking
capacity Ieff
cos = 0,65
400 VAC
100 A
100 A
500 VAC
90 A
90 A
690 VAC
80 A
80 A
Mechanical life AC operated
5 106
5 106
DC operated
15 106
15 106
96 A
120 A
Short time current
626
10 s current
J7KN
Motor contactors
Motor contactors from 4500 kW for normal and heavyduty switching
This modular system consists of main contactors and additional contact blocks.
The basic units can be combined with auxiliary contacts. DC-DC versions, integrated
mechanical interlock, are available as well as 3-main-pole and 4-main-pole versions.
Basic units can be combined with auxiliary contacts (top/side mounting)
3-main-pole and 4-main-pole versions are possible
The power range covers 4 to 500 kW
J7KN-10D to J7KN-22D models have integrated auxiliary contact for electronic
circuits (3-pole versions)
AC or DC
Poles
AC3
400 V
rated
motor
current
10 A
660 V
690 V
kW
AC1
690 V
A
Size in mm
(H W D)
Order code
Coil voltage*1, replace _ _ _ with:
VAC
NO
VDC
NC
5.5
5.5
25
J7KN-10D-10_ _ _
24
110
230
400
24D
110D
5.5
5.5
25
J7KN-10D-01_ _ _
24
110
230
400
24D
110D
5.5
7.5
7.5
25
J7KN-14D-10_ _ _
24
110
230
400
24D
110D
5.5
7.5
7.5
25
J7KN-14D-01_ _ _
24
110
230
400
24D
110D
7.5
10
10
32
J7KN-18D-10_ _ _
24
110
230
400
24D
110D
7.5
10
10
32
J7KN-18D-01_ _ _
24
110
230
400
24D
110D
11
10
10
32
J7KN-22D-10_ _ _
24
110
230
400
24D
110D
11
10
10
32
J7KN-22D-01_ _ _
24
110
230
400
24D
110D
24 A
11
15
15
50
J7KN-24_ _ _
24
110
230
400
24D
110D
32 A
15
18.5
18.5
65
J7KN-32_ _ _
24
110
230
400
24D
110D
40 A
18.5
18.5
18.5
80
J7KN-40_ _ _
24
110
230
400
24D
110D
50 A
22
30
30
110
J7KN-50_ _ _
24
110
230
400
24D
110D
62 A
30
37
37
120
J7KN-62_ _ _
24
110
230
400
24D
110D
74 A
37
45
45
130
J7KN-74_ _ _
24
110
230
400
24D
110D
90 A
45
55
55
160
J7KN-90_ _ _ * 2
24
110
230
400
24
110
115 A
55
75
55
200
J7KN-115_ _ _ * 2
24
110
230
400
24
110
150 A
75
75
75
230
J7KN-151_ _ _ * 2
24
110
230
400
24
110
175 A
90
90
90
250
J7KN-176_ _ _ * 2
24
110
230
400
24
110
210 A
110
160
160
350
J7KN-210_ _ _ * 2
24
110
230
400
24
110
260 A
132
210
210
450
J7KN-260_ _ _ * 2
24
110
230
400
24
110
315 A
160
250
250
500
J7KN-316_ _ _ * 2
24
110
230
400
24
110
450 A
250
375
375
600
J7KN-450-22_ _ _ * 2
24
110
230
400
24
110
550 A
300
475
475
760
J7KN-550-22_ _ _ * 2
24
110
230
400
24
110
700 A
400
630
630
1000
310 280 291
J7KN-700-22_ _ _ * 2
24
110
230
400
24
110
860 A
500
700
700
1100
361 280 291
J7KN-860-22_ _ _ * 2
24
110
230
400
24
110
10 A
5.5
5.5
25
67 45 82.5
J7KNG-10-10_ _ _
24D
110D
5.5
5.5
25
J7KNG-10-01_ _ _
24D
110D
5.5
7.5
7.5
25
J7KNG-14-10_ _ _
24D
110D
5.5
7.5
7.5
25
J7KNG-14-01_ _ _
24D
110D
7.5
10
10
32
J7KNG-18-10_ _ _
24D
110D
7.5
10
10
32
J7KNG-18-01_ _ _
24D
110D
11
10
10
32
J7KNG-22-10_ _ _
24D
110D
11
10
10
32
J7KNG-22-01_ _ _
24D
110D
24 A
11
15
15
50
J7KNG-24_ _ _
24D
110D
32 A
15
18.5
18.5
65
J7KNG-32_ _ _
24D
110D
40 A
18.5
18.5
18.5
80
J7KNG-40_ _ _
24D
110D
22 A
14 A
18 A
22 A
*1
*2
500 V
kW
Overload
relay
18 A
DC
operated
solenoid
motor
contactor
380 V
400 V
415 V
kW
Rated
Auxiliary
current contact
4
14 A
AC and DC*2
Rating AC2, AC3
J7TKN-B
J7TKN-C
J7TKN-D
J7TKN-E
J7TKN-F
J7TKN-G
J7TKN-H
J7TKN-B
J7TKN-B
J7TKN-C
67 45 82.5
78 45 104.5
112 60 113
155 90 136
290 110 162
200 145 208
258 220 225
78 45 104.5

Universal current (AC and DC)
627
Operation
J7KN
Operation
AC
Motor contactors
Poles
DC
solenoid motor contactor
AC and DC*2
*1
*2
AC3
400 V
rated
motor
current
Rating AC2, AC3

380 V
400 V
415 V
kW
AC1
400 V
kW
Rated
current
Auxiliary
contact
AC1
690 V
A
NO
Overload
relay
Size in mm
(H W D)
Coil voltage *1, replace _ _ _ with:
Order code
VAC
VDC
NC
10 A
17.5
25
J7KN-10D-4_ _ _
24
110
230
400
14 A
5.5
17.5
25
67 45 82.5
J7KN-14D-4_ _ _
24
110
230
400
18 A
7.5
22
32
J7KN-18D-4_ _ _
24
110
230
400
22 A
11
22
32
J7KN-22D-4_ _ _
24
110
230
400
10 A
17.5
25
J7KNG-10-4_ _ _
24D
110D
14 A
5.5
17.5
25
J7KNG-14-4_ _ _
24D
110D
18 A
7.5
22
32
J7KNG-18-4_ _ _
24D
110D
22 A
11
22
32
J7KNG-22-4_ _ _
24D
110D
150 A
75
159
230
170 110 162 J7KN-151-4_ _ _ * 2
24
110
230
400
24
110
175 A
90
173
250
J7KN-176-4_ _ _ * 2
24
110
230
400
24
110
67 45 82.5

Universal current (AC and DC)
Accessories
Auxiliary contact
blocks
Rated operational current Contacts
Suitable for:
AC15
230 V
A
AC15
400 V
A
AC1
690 V
A
NO
10
J73KN-B-10
10
J73KN-B-01
10
J73KN-B-10U
10
J73KN-B-01U
25
J73KN-B-10A
25
J73KN-B-01A
J7KN-10D to -74
Order code
NC
J7KNA(-AR)
10
J73KN-C-11S
10
J73KN-D-11F
10
J73KN-D-22F
10
J73KN-D-11S
J7KN-450 to -860 3
10
J73KN-E-22F
Time
range
Contacts
Pneumatic
timers
Function
Type
Suitable for
contactors
J7KN-151 to -316 3
J7KN-24 to -115
Suppressor units
AC/DC
AC/DC
RC-unit snap-on
contactor
AC/DC
AC/DC
Order code
Order code
12 to 48 V
J74KN-D-RC24
48 to 127 V
J74KN-D-RC110
110 to 250 V J74KN-D-RC230
AC/DC
J7KN-10D to -74
Applicable
coil
voltage
RC-unit snap-on
contactor
12 to 48 V
J74KN-C2-RC24
48 to 127 V
J74KN-C2-RC110
AC/DC
110 to 230 V J74KN-C2-RC230
AC/DC
230 to 415 V J74KN-C2-RC400
Additional terminals
single pole
Cable cross-sections
to clamp (mm2)
Order code
Suitable for contactors
Solid or
Flexible
stranded
J7KN-50 to -74
4 to 35
6 to 25
4 to 25
J74KN-LG-9030
J7KN-151 to -176
16 to 120
16 to 95
J74KN-LG-11224
Specification
Flexible
with
multi-core
cable end
Suitable for:
J7KN-10D to -74
J7KN-24 to -115
10
J73KN-B-10
Terminal covers
10
J73KN-B-01
Suitable for contactors
10
J73KN-B-10U
J7KN-151 to -176
J7KN-210 to -316
One unit for 3 terminals, 2 units for J74KN-LG-10404

one contactor
J74KN-LG-11457
Marking systems
Specification
10
J73KN-B-01U
25
J73KN-B-10A
25
J73KN-B-01A
10
J73KN-C-11S
J7KN-151 to -316 3
10
J73KN-D-11F
10
J73KN-D-22F
10
J73KN-D-11S
J7KN-450 to -860 3
10
J73KN-E-22F
Interlocks contactor with contactor
Mounting
Order code + Order code
Horizontal
J7KN(G)-10D to -40 + J7KN(G)-10D to -40
J74KN-B-ML
J7KN-24 to -74 + J7KN-24 to -74
J74KN-C-ML
J7KN-90 to -115 + J7KN-90 to -115
J74KN-D2-ML
J7KN-151 to -316 + J7KN-151 to -316
J74KN-E-ML
Order code
Description
Marking plate
2-section without marking, divisible J74KN-P487-1
Marking plate
4-section without marking, divisible J74KN-P245-1
Insulated wiring systems
Suitable for
contactors
Function
Mechanical
interlocks
Order code
22
J74-WKR-B2
J7KN-24 to -40
40
J74-WKR-C
J7KN-10D to -22D
22
J74-WKSD-B2
J7KN-24 to -40
40
J74-WKSD-C
For reversing contactors (2 parts) J7KN-10D to -22D
Order code
For star-delta combination

(4 parts)
Max. current Order code

(A)
Specifications
Coil voltages
Suffix to contactor type:
Contactor type
24
48
110
180
230
400
500
J7KN-10D to J7KN-74
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
J7KN-90 to J7KN-860
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
628
J7TKN

Thermal overload relays for J7KN(A) contactors
J7TKN relays protect motors against thermal overload. They can be mounted on the
contactor or separately. The relays comply with IEC 60947 (single-phase sensitivity).
Series of overload relays covering a setting range from 0.12 A to 800 A (D.O.L.)
Manual and/or auto reset models available
Star-delta (A)
Size in mm (H W D)
(incl. standard J7KN[A] contactor)
Order code
D.O.L. (A)
0.12 to 0.18
95 48.5 77
J7TKN-A-E18
0.18 to 0.27
J7TKN-A-E27
0.27 to 0.4
J7TKN-A-E4
0.4 to 0.6
J7TKN-A-E6
0.6 to 0.9
J7TKN-A-E9
0.8 to 1.2
J7TKN-A-1E2
1.2 to 1.8
J7TKN-A-1E8
1.8 to 2.7
J7TKN-A-2E7
2.7 to 4
J7TKN-A-4
4 to 6
7 to 10.5
J7TKN-A-6
6 to 9
10.5 to 15.5
J7TKN-A-9
8 to 11
14 to 19
J7TKN-A-11
10 to 14
18 to 24
0.12 to 0.18
0.18 to 0.27
0.27 to 0.4
J7TKN-B-E4
0.4 to 0.6
J7TKN-B-E6
0.6 to 0.9
J7TKN-B-E9
0.8 to 1.2
J7TKN-B-1E2
1.2 to 1.8
J7TKN-B-1E8
1.8 to 2.7
J7TKN-B-2E7
2.7 to 4
J7TKN-B-4
4 to 6
7 to 10.5
J7TKN-B-6
6 to 9
10.5 to 15.5
J7TKN-B-9
8 to 11
14 to 19
J7TKN-B-11
10 to 14
18 to 24
J7TKN-B-14
13 to 18
23 to 31
J7TKN-B-18
17 to 24
30 to 41
J7TKN-B-24
23 to 32
40 to 55
J7KN-24 to J7KN-40
28 to 42
48 to 73
136 67 96.5
J7TKN-C-42
J7KN-50 to J7KN-74
40 to 52
70 to 90
180 69 108
J7TKN-D-52
52 to 65
90 to 112
60 to 74
104 to 128
60 to 90
104 to 156
80 to 120
140 to 207
J7KN-151 to J7KN-176
120 to 180
208 to 312
290 110 162
J7TKN-F-180
144 to 216
250 to 374
362 145 208
J7TKN-G-216
216 to 320
374 to 554
240 to 360
416 to 623
360 to 540
623 to 935
540 to 800
935 to 1385
J7KNA-09, J7KNA-12
J7KN-10D to J7KN-40
J7KN-90 to J7KN-115
Setting range
J7TKN-A-14
126.5 45 70 (J7KN-10D to J7KN-22D); J7TKN-B-E18
141.5 45 87.5 (J7KN-24 to J7KN-40) J7TKN-B-E27
J7TKN-B-32
Applicable contactors
J7TKN-D-65
J7TKN-D-74
260 107 120
J7TKN-E-90
J7TKN-E-120
J7TKN-G-320
372 1246 1225 (J7KN-450)
395 1246 1225 (J7KN-550)
487 1280 1291 (J7KN-700)
540 1280 1291 (J7KN-860)
J7TKN-H-360
J7TKN-H-540
J7TKN-H-800
629
J7TKN
Accessories
Sets for single mounting
For overload relays
Cable cross-section to clamp (mm2)
Order code
Solid or stranded
Flexible
Flexible with multi-core cable
J7TKN-AB
0.75 to 6
0.75 to 4
0.5 to 4
J74TK-M-AB
J7TKN-B
0.75 to 6
0.75 to 4
0.5 to 4
J74TK-SM
Busbar sets for thermal overload relays

For overload relays
For motor contactors
Order code
J7TKN-H-360/540
J7KN-450/550
J74TK-SU-550
J7TKN-H-540/800
J7KN-700/860
J74TK-SU-860
Specifications
Type
J7TKN-A
690 VAC
Permissible ambient
temperature
Operation
25 to 60C
Storage
50 to 70C
Trip class according to IEC 947-4-1
J7TKN-B
J7TKN-C
J7TKN-D
J7TKN-E
J7TKN-F
750 VAC
1000 VAC
J7TKN-G
J7TKN-H
25 to 55C
40 to 70C
10 A
20 A
10 A
Without terminals, suitable for

bushing one
connector
70 mm
(stranded) per
phase
Busbar
184
Screw
M8
Busbar
256
Screw
M10
See accessories
Solid or stranded mm2
0.75 to 6
0.75 to 2.5
0.75 to 6
0.75 to 10
4 to 35
Flexible mm2
0.75 to 4
0.5 to 2.5
1 to 4
0.75 to 6
6 to 25
Flexible with multi-core

cable end mm2
0.5 to 2.5
0.5 to 1.5
0.75 to 4
0.75 to 6
4 to 25
Cables per clamp
Number
1+1
Auxiliary connector
Solid mm2
0.75 to 2.5
1 to 2.5
Flexible mm2
0.5 to 2.5
1 to 2.5
Flexible with multi-core

cable end mm2
0.5 to 1.5
1 to 2.5
Number
same potential
690 VAC
different potential
440 VAC
24 V
5A
230 V
400 V
Cable cross-section
Main connector
Cables per clamp

Auxiliary contacts
Rated operational current Ie
Utilization category AC15
Rated operational current Ie

Utilization category DC13
Short circuit protection (without
welding 1 kA)
500 VAC
250 VAC
440 VAC
3A
4A
5A
3A
4A
3A
2A
2.5 A
2.5 A
3A
2A
2.5 A
2A
1A
1.5 A
1.5 A
2A
1A
1.5 A
690 V
0.6 A
0.5 A
0.6 A
0.5 A
0.6 A
1A
1.2 A
4A
6A
4A
6A
24 V
1.2 A
110 V
0.15 A
220 V
0.1 A
Highest fuse rating gL (gG)
6A
500 VAC
Setting range
to 23 A
All
28 to 42 A
52 to 65 A
All
Power loss per current path (max.) Minimum setting value
1.1 W
1.1 W
1.3 W
2.9 W
1.1 W
Maximum setting value
2.3 W
2.3 W
3.3 W
4.5 W
2.5 W
630
J7MN

J7MN motor protection circuit breakers
from 0.10 A to 100 A
J7MN starters protect motors against thermal overload and short circuit.
The J7MN can be equipped with additional auxiliary contacts, tripping indicator
(alarm), undervoltage release and/or shunt release. All models can be locked
for safe maintenance.
Rated operational currents of 32 A for the rocker type
Rated operational currents of 32 A, 63 A and 100 A for the rotary types
Switching capacity is 100 kA/415 V up-to 13 A and 50 kA/415 V up-to 100 A
Electrical/mechanical link modules available up-to 11 kW motor protection units
All components are finger proof
Suitable for motors
3 ~ 400 V kW
Current setting range

Thermal
overload release A
Instantaneous
short-circuit release A
Short-circuit breaking
capacity at 3 ~ 400 V kA
Size in mm (H W D)
Order code
98 45 75
J7MN-3P-E16
0.16
0.10 0.16
2.1
100
0.25
0.06
0.160.25
3.3
100
J7MN-3P-E25
0.4
0.09
0.250.4
5.2
100
J7MN-3P-E4
0.63
0.18
0.40.63
8.2
100
J7MN-3P-E63
0.25
0.631
13
100
J7MN-3P-1
1.6
0.55
11.6
20.8
100
J7MN-3P-1E6
2.5
0.75
1.62.5
32.5
100
J7MN-3P-2E5
1.5
2.54
52
100
J7MN-3P-4
2.2
46
78
100
J7MN-3P-6
58
104
100
J7MN-3P-8
10
610
130
50
J7MN-3P-10
13
5.5
913
169
50
J7MN-3P-13
17
7.5
1117
221
20
J7MN-3P-17
22
7.5
1422
286
15
J7MN-3P-22
26
11
1826
338
15
J7MN-3P-26
32
15
2232
416
15
0.16
0.100.16
2.1
100
0.25
0.06
0.160.25
3.3
100
J7MN-3R-E25
0.4
0.09
0.250.4
5.2
100
J7MN-3R-E4
0.63
0.18
0.40.63
8.2
100
J7MN-3R-E63
0.25
0.631
13
100
J7MN-3R-1
1.6
0.55
11.6
20.8
100
J7MN-3R-1E6
2.5
0.75
1.62.5
32.5
100
J7MN-3R-2E5
1.5
2.54
52
100
J7MN-3R-4
2.2
46
78
100
J7MN-3R-6
58
104
100
J7MN-3R-8
10
610
130
100
J7MN-3R-10
13
5.5
913
169
100
J7MN-3R-13
17
7.5
1117
221
50
J7MN-3R-17
22
7.5
1422
286
50
J7MN-3R-22
26
11
1826
338
50
J7MN-3R-26
32
15
2232
416
50
26
12.5
1826
338
50
32
15
2232
416
50
J7MN-6R-32
40
18.5
2840
520
50
J7MN-6R-40
50
22
3450
650
50
J7MN-6R-50
63
30
4563
819
50
63
30
4563
819
50
75
37
5575
975
50
J7MN-9R-75
90
45
7090
1170
50
J7MN-9R-90
100
80100
1300
50
J7MN-9R-100
J7MN-3P-32
98 45 100
J7MN-3R-E16
Rated
current
in A
J7MN-3R-32
140 55 144
J7MN-6R-26
J7MN-6R-63
165 70 171
J7MN-9R-63
631
J7MN
Accessories
Description
Version
For circuit breaker
Order code
1 NO + 1 NC
All
J77MN-11F
Transverse auxiliary contact block

Contact block
2NO
J77MN-20F
2NC
J77MN-02F
Auxiliary contact block for left hand side mounting (max. 2 pc. per circuit breaker)
Contact block (9 mm)
1 NO + 1 NC
All
J77MN-11S
2NO
J77MN-20S
2NC
J77MN-02S
Signalling switch for left hand side mounting (max. 1 pc. per circuit breaker)
Signalling switch (18 mm)
1 NO + 1 NC any tripping condition

1 NO + 1 NC short circuit tripping condition
J7MN-3P/-3R
J77MN-TA-11S
J7MN-6R/-9R
J77MN-TB-11S
All
J77MN-T-11S
All
J77MN-U-24
Undervoltage releases for right hand side mounting (max 1 pc. per circuit breaker)
AC 50 Hz
Trips the circuit breaker when the voltage is interrupted. Pre- 24 V
vents the motor from being restarted accidentally when the 110127 V
voltage is restored, suitable for EMERGENCY STOP according to
220230 V
VDE 0113
240 V
AC 60 Hz
28 V
120 V
J77MN-U-110
240260 V
J77MN-U-230
277 V
J77MN-U-240
380400 V
440460 V
J77MN-U-400
415440 V
460480 V
J77MN-U-415
Shunt releases for right hand side mounting (max 1 pc. per circuit breaker)
Trips the circuit breaker when the
release coil is energized
AC 50 Hz
AC 60 Hz
24 V
28 V
110127 V
120 V
J77MN-S-110
220230 V
240260 V
J77MN-S-230
240 V
277 V
J77MN-S-240
380400 V
440460 V
J77MN-S-400
415440 V
460480 V
J77MN-S-415
All
J77MN-S-24
Terminal block
Up to 600 V according to UL 489 not for transverse auxiliary
contact block
J7MN-3R
J77MN-TB32
J7MN-9R
J77MN-TB100
Description
Connection type
Version
For Units (MPCB)
Order code
3-phase busbars;
modular spacing = 45 mm
Spade
for 2 units
J7MN-3P; J7MN-3R
J77MN-CPM-3-45-2S
Terminal block
Insulated 3-Phase Busbar System IP20
for 3 units
J77MN-CPM-3-45-3S
for 4 units
J77MN-CPM-3-45-4S
for 5 units
J77MN-CPM-3-45-5S
Line side terminal 3-pole,

connection from above;
conductor cross-section solid or stranded 625 mm
with end sleeve 416 mm
Spade
acc. IEC/EN 60947-1, 60947-2, J7MN-3P; J7MN-3R

60947-4-1 and VDE 0660
J77MN-BTC-63-SE
Line side terminal 3-pole,

connection from above;
conductor cross-section solid or stranded 625 mm
with end sleeve 416 mm
Spade
up to 600 V acc. UL 489
J7MN-3P; J7MN-3R
J77MN-BTC-63-SEV
Shrouds for unused terminals on busbar system
Spade
J7MN-3P; J7MN-3R
J77MN-TA-63S
632
J7MN
Specifications
Type
J7MN-3P
J7MN-3R
J7MN-6R
Number of poles
32
63
100
IP20
IP20
IP20
Max. rated current Inmax

(= max. rated operational
current Ie)
32
Permissible ambient
temperature
Storage/transport
50 to 80C
Operation
20 to 60C
Rated operational voltage Ue V
690
Rated frequency
Hz
50/60
690
Rated impulse withstand

voltage Uimp
kV
J7MN-9R
IEC 60 947-2 (circuit breaker) A

IEC 60 947-4-1 (motor starter) AC-3
Class
According to IEC 60 947-4-1
According to IEC 60 529
10
IP20
Phase failure sensitivity
According to IEC 60 947-4-1
Yes
Explosion protection
According to EC Directive
94191EC
Yes
Isolator characteristics
According to IEC 60 947-3
Yes
Main and EM. STOP switch

characteristics
According to IEC 60 204-1

(VDE113)
Yes
Safe isolation between main Up to 400 V + 10%

and auxiliary circuits
Up to 415 V + 5%
According to DIN VDE 0106
Part 101
Yes
Mechanical endurance
100,000
100,000
50,000
50,000
Electrical endurance
100,000
100,000
25,000
25,000
Max. operating frequency per 1/h

hour (motor starts)
25
25
25
25
Operating cycles
Yes
633
Monitoring products
THE COMPLETE MONITORING RANGE
K8 series The smart way to protect your system
The K8 series offers you a flexible and complete one-stop shopping solution!
This monitoring range can be split into models for single-phase current and single-phase voltage,
three-phase voltage, conductive level and a temperature alarm unit.
1-phase: full-span of range setting, all models with timer function
3-phase: wide range of global voltage settings
Temperature monitoring relay: wide temperature range with precision increased
Easy-to-set parameters
What type of monitoring is required?
Single-phase
Current
Three-phase
Over/under
634
Voltage
Voltage
Phase-sequence and loss
Phase-sequence, loss and over/under
Phase-sequence, loss and asymmetry
K8AK-AS
K8AK-AW
K8AK-VS
K8AK-VW
K8AK-PH
K8DS-PH
K8AK-PM
K8DS-PM
K8AK-PA
K8DS-PA
R634, R635
Page 641, 642
R642, R646
Page 643, 644
R638, R645
Page 645, 646
R643, R648
Page 647, 648
R637, R649
Page 649, 650
Temperature
Over/under
Thermistor,
phase-sequence
and loss
Thermistor
Monitoring products
Phase-sequence, loss asymmetry

and over/under
Level control
Thermo-couple
and PT
see page 636
K8DS-PZ
K8DS-PU
K8AK-PW
K8AK-PT
K8AK-TS
K8AK-TH
R653, R652
Page 651, 652
R644
Page 653
R647
Page 660
R647
Page 660
R639
Page 661
635
Monitoring products
What type of monitoring is required?
Single-phase
Three-phase
see page 634
636
Temperature
Level control
Single- or two-point
Leakage
Which mounting method is required?

Which function is required?
DIN-rail
AC power supply
DC power supply
61F-GP-N8
61F-GPN-BT/
-BC
X425
Page 654
X426
Page 656
Standard
Disconnection
detection
K8AK-LS
K7L-AT50
K7L-AT50D
R636
Page 657
X423
Page 659
X423
Page 659
Monitoring products
Plug-in
637
Selection table
1-phase current
Model
K8AK-AS
Features
Control
output
Supply
voltage DC
Supply voltage AC
Selection criteria
Category
638
1-phase voltage
K8AK-AW K8AK-VS
3-phase voltage
phase-sequence/phase-loss
K8AK-VW K8AK-PH
K8DS-PH
3-phase voltage
phase-sequence/phase-loss
over/under
K8AK-PM
K8DS-PM
Specialty
Ideal for current

monitoring for
industrial heaters and
motors.
Ideal for voltage

Ideal for phase-sequence and phase-loss
monitoring for
monitoring for industrial facilities and
industrial facilities and equipment.
equipment.
Ideal for monitoring 3-phase power supplies

for industrial facilities and equipment.
Sensing range
(configurable)
20 mA to 8 A,
100 or 200 A with
current transformer
1 to 600 V
24 VAC
100 VAC
110 VAC
115 VAC
120 VAC
200 VAC
220 VAC
230 VAC
240 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
200 to 480 VAC
Same as supply voltage
200 to 240 VAC
(-PM1, 3-wire)
115 to 138 VAC
(-PM1, 4-wire)
380 to 480 VAC
(-PM2, 3-wire)
220 to 277 VAC
(-PM2, 4-wire)
24 VDC
12 to 24 VDC
Transistor NPN
Transistor PNP
Relay
(1 SPDT)
(2 SPDT)
(1 SPDT)
(2 SPDT)
(1 DPDT)
(1 SPDT)
(2 SPDT)
(1 SPDT)
LED operation indicator
Adjustable sensitivity
Electrode types
Page/Quick Link
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
Monitoring products
3-phase voltage
phase-sequence, loss and asymmetry
3-phase voltage
phase-sequence, loss, asymmetry
and over/under
3-phase voltage
over/under
Temperature
thermistor, phasesequence and loss
Temperature
thermistor
Temperature
thermo-couple
and PT
K8AK-PA
K8DS-PZ
K8AK-PW
K8AK-PT
K8AK-TS
K8AK-TH
K8DS-PA
Ideal for 3-phase voltage asymmetry

monitoring for industrial facilities and
equipment.
K8DS-PU
Ideal for monitoring 3-phase power supplies

for industrial facilities and equipment
Ideal for monitoring Monitor temperature rise through

3-phase power
internal motor
supplies for industrial
facilities and
equipment.
Same as supply voltage
Compact and slim

relay ideal for
temperature alarms
and monitoring
100 to 240 VAC

24 VAC/DC
100 to 240 VAC

24 VAC/DC
(-PA1, 3-wire)
(-PW1, 3-wire)
(-PA1, 4-wire)
(-PW1, 4-wire)
(-PA2, 3-wire)
(-PW2, 3-wire)
(-PA2, 4-wire)
(-PW2, 4-wire)
(1 SPDT)
(1 SPDT)
(1 SPDT)
(1 SPDT)
(2 SPDT)
(1 SPDT)
(1 SPDT)
(1 SPDT)
650
651
652
653
660
660
661
Monitoring products
649
Standard
Available
No/not available
639
Selection table
Monitoring products
Conductive level controller
Liquid leakage sensor amplifier
61F-GP-N8
61F-GPN-BT
Single or two-point
AC sine wave between

AC sine wave between
Ideal for level control for
electrodes for stable detection electrodes for stable detection industrial facilities and
with no electrolysis
with no electrolysis
equipment
61F-GPN-BC
K8AK-LS
Sensor amplifier, AC sine wave Sensor amplifier with

between electrodes for stable disconnection detection
detection with no electrolysis function
4 to 50 k
0 to 100 k
1 to 100 k
10 to 100 k
0 to 50 M
1 to 50 M
K7L-AT50
K7L-AT50D
(1 SPDT)
Electrode holder: PS-_S, PS-31, BF-1 and BS-1
Liquid leakage sensor band F03-16PE
654
657
659
656
640
Standard
Available
No/not available
K8AK-AS
1-phase control
Single-phase current relay
These single-phase current relays monitor over- and undercurrents. Manual resetting
and automatic resetting are supported by one relay. The start-up lock and operating
time can be set separately. The relay warning status is easily monitored with the LED
indicator.
Single-phase current relay
In 22.5 mm wide industrial housing
Under or over control
Supply voltages: 24 VAC/DC, 100 to 240 VAC
Easy wiring with ferrules
Measuring current
Supply voltage
Order code
2 to 20 mA AC/DC,
10 to 100 mA AC/DC,
50 to 500 mA AC/DC
24 VAC/DC
K8AK-AS1 24 VAC/DC
100 to 240 VAC
K8AK-AS1 100-240 VAC
24 VAC/DC
K8AK-AS2 24 VAC/DC
100 to 240 VAC
24 VAC/DC
K8AK-AS3 24 VAC/DC
100 to 240 VAC
0.1 to 1 A AC/DC,
0.5 to 5 A AC/DC,
0.8 to 8 A AC/DC
10 to 100 A AC,
20 to 200 A AC
Accessories
Current transformer
Input range
Applicable relay
Order code
10 to 100 A AC, 20 to 200 A AC
K8AK-AS3
K8AC-CT200L
Note: The K8AK-AS3 is designed to be used in combination with the K8AC-CT200L (direct input not possible)
Specifications
Storage temperature
85% to 110% of rated operating voltage
Rated power supply frequency
50/60 Hz5 Hz (AC power supply)
Output relays
(1 SPDT, normally
closed operation)
Resistive load
5 A at 250 VAC or at 30 VDC
Maximum contact voltage
250 VAC or 30 VDC
Maximum contact current
5A
Maximum switching capacity
1,250 VA, 150 W
Mechanical life
Electrical life
50,000 operations at 5 A, 250 VAC or 30 VDC
Terminal section: IP20
Case material
PC and ABS
Approx. 150 g
Operating power
Isolated power supply
2.0 VA/1.1 W max. at 24 VAC/DC, 4.6 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC
Operate (SV)
Operating value setting range
10% to 100% of maximum measuring current
Operating value
100% operation at set value
Hysteresis
5% to 50% of operating value
Resetting method
Manual reset/automatic reset (switchable)

Manual reset: Turn OFF operating power for 1 s or longer
Reset (HYS.)
Operating time (T)
0.1 to 30 s
Operating power ON lock (LOCK)
0 to 30 s (The startup lock timer starts when the input has reached approximately 30% or more of the set value.)
Note: Enabled only for overcurrent operation
Repeat error
Operating value
0.5% full scale (at 25C and 65% humidity, rated power supply voltage, DC or 50/60 Hz sine wave input)
Operating time
50 ms (at 25C and 65% humidity, rated power supply voltage)
Input frequency
range
K8AK-AS1/-AS2
DC input or AC input (45 to 65 Hz)
K8AK-AS3
AC input (45 to 65 Hz)
Overload capacity
K8AK-AS1/-AS2
Continuous input at 120% of maximum input, 1 s at 150%
K8AK-AS3
Continuous input at 120%, 30 s at 200%, and 1 s at 600% with an OMRON CT (K8AC-CT200L)
Indicators
Power (PWR): Green LED, relay output (RY): Yellow LED, alarm outputs (ALM): Red LED
Applicable standards Conforming standards
EN 60947-5-1
Installation environment (pollution level 2, installation category III)
Size in mm (H W D)
EMC
EN 60947-5-1
Safety standards
UL 508 (Recognition), Korean Radio Waves Act (Act 10564), CSA and CCC
Monitoring products
Weight
90 22.5 100
641
K8AK-AW
1-phase control
Single-phase current relay, window type
These single-phase current relays monitor over- and undercurrents. Manual resetting
and automatic resetting are supported by one relay. The start-up lock and operating
time can be set separately. The relay warning status is easily monitored with the LED
indicator.
Single-phase current window relay
Under and over control
Measuring current
Supply voltage
Order code
2 to 20 mA AC/DC,
10 to 100 mA AC/DC,
50 to 500 mA AC/DC
24 VAC/DC
K8AK-AW1 24 VAC/DC
100 to 240 VAC
K8AK-AW1 100-240 VAC
0.1 to 1 A AC/DC,
0.5 to 5 A AC/DC
10 to 100 A AC,
20 to 200 A AC
24 VAC/DC
K8AK-AW2 24 VAC/DC
100 to 240 VAC
24 VAC/DC
K8AK-AW3 24 VAC/DC
100 to 240 VAC
Accessories
Current transformer
Input range
Applicable relay
Order code
10 to 100 A AC, 20 to 200 A AC
K8AK-AW3
K8AC-CT200L
Note: The K8AK-AW3 is designed to be used in combination with the K8AC-CT200L (direct input not possible)
Specifications
Storage temperature
Output relays
(1 SPDT, normally
closed operation)
Resistive load
250 VAC or 30 VDC
5A
1,250 VA, 150 W
Mechanical life
Electrical life
Case material
PC and ABS
Weight
Approx. 150 g
Operating power
Operate (SV)
10% to 100% of maximum measuring current
Operating value
Hysteresis
5% of operating value (fixed)
Resetting method

Reset (HYS.)
Operating time (T)
0.1 to 30 s
Operating power ON lock (LOCK)
0 to 30 s (The startup lock timer starts when the input has reached approximately 30% or more of the set value.)
Note: Enabled only for overcurrent operation
Repeat error
Operating value
Operating time
Input frequency
range
K8AK-AW1/-AW2
DC input or AC input (45 to 65 Hz)
K8AK-AW3
AC input (45 to 65 Hz)
Overload capacity
K8AK-AW1/-AW2
Continuous input at 120% of maximum input, 1 s at 150%
K8AK-AW3
Continuous input at 120%, 30 s at 200%, and 1 s at 600% with an OMRON CT (K8AC-CT200L)
Indicators
Power (PWR): Green LED, relay output (RY): Yellow LED, alarm outputs (ALM): Red LED
EN 60947-5-1
Size in mm (H W D)
642
EMC
EN 60947-5-1
Safety standards
90 22.5 100
K8AK-VS
1-phase control
Single-phase voltage relay
These single-phase voltage relays are for monitoring over- and undervoltages.
Manual resetting and automatic resetting are supported by one relay. Relay warning
status can easily be monitored using the LED indicator.
Single-phase voltage relay
Under or over control
Measuring current
Supply voltage
Order code
1 to 10 VAC/DC,
3 to 30 VAC/DC,
15 to 150 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
K8AK-VS2 24 VAC/DC
100 to 240 VAC
K8AK-VS2 100-240 VAC
20 to 200 VAC/DC,
30 to 300 VAC/DC,
60 to 600 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
K8AK-VS3 24 VAC/DC
100 to 240 VAC
K8AK-VS3 100-240 VAC
Specifications
Storage temperature
50/60 Hz5 Hz ( AC power supply)
Output relays
(1 SPDT, normally
closed operation)
Resistive load
250 VAC or 30 VDC
5A
1,250 VA, 150 W
Mechanical life
Electrical life
Case material
PC and ABS
Approx. 150 g
Operating power
2.0 VA/1.1 W max. at 24 VAC/DC, 4.6 VA max. at 100 to 240 VA
Operate (SV)
10% to 100% of maximum measuring voltage
Operating value
Hysteresis
5% to 50% of operating value
Resetting method

Reset (HYS.)
Operating time (T)
0.1 to 30 s
Power ON lock (LOCK)
1 s or 5 s (Switched using DIP switch)

(value when input rapidly changes from 0 to 100%. The operating time is the shortest at this point)
Repeat accuracy
Operating value
Operating time
Input frequency
40 to 500 Hz
Overload capacity
Continuous input at 115% of maximum input, 10 s at 125% (up to 600 VAC)
Indicators
Size in mm (H W D)
Monitoring products
Weight
LED power (PWR): Green LED, relay output (RY): Yellow LED, alarm output (ALM): Red LED
Conforming standards
EN 60947-5-1
EMC
EN 60947-5-1
Safety standards
90 22.5 100
643
K8AK-VW
1-phase control
Single-phase voltage relay, window type
For monitoring over- and undervoltages simultaneously. Manual resetting and
automatic resetting are supported by one relay. Separate settings and outputs
are supported for over- and undervoltages. Relay warning status can easily be
monitored with the LED indicator.
Single-phase voltage window relay
Under and over, low/low or high/high control
Measuring current
Supply voltage
Order code
1 to 10 VAC/DC,
3 to 30 VAC/DC,
15 to 150 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
K8AK-VW2 24 VAC/DC
100 to 240 VAC
K8AK-VW2 100-240 VAC
20 to 200 VAC/DC,
30 to 300 VAC/DC,
60 to 600 VAC/DC
24 V AC/DC
K8AK-VW3 24 VAC/DC
100 to 240 VAC
K8AK-VW3 100-240 VAC
Specifications
Storage temperature
Output relays
(2 SPDT, normally
closed operation)
Resistive load
250 VAC or 30 VDC
5A
1,250 VA, 150 W
Mechanical life
Electrical life
Case material
PC and ABS
Weight
Approx. 150 g
Operating power
Operation
(AL1 and AL2)
10% to 100% of maximum measuring voltage
Operating value
Reset (HYS.)
Hysteresis
Resetting method

Operating time (T)
0.1 to 30 s
1 s or 5 s (Switched using DIP switch)
Indicators
Repeat accuracy
Power (PWR): Green LED, relay output (RY): Yellow LED, alarm outputs (ALM 1/2): Red LED
Operating value
Operating time
Input frequency
40 to 500 Hz
Overload capacity
Size in mm (H W D)
644

EN 60947-5-1
EMC
EN 60947-5-1
Safety standards
90 22.5 100
K8AK-PH
3-phase control
3-phase sequence, phase loss relay
The K8AK-PH1 monitoring relay is designed to monitor 3-phase 3-wire supplies. It
simultaneously monitors phase sequence and phase loss during start up as well as
phase loss during operation. The output relay releases when alarm conditions are
detected, and the warning status can easily be monitored using the LED indicator.
Suitable for industrial facilities and equipment.
Monitors phase sequence and phase-loss simultaneously
Measuring range: 200 to 480 VAC
Power supply voltage is the same as measuring voltage
Operation reaction time: 0.1 s maximum
Rated input voltage
Order code
200 to 480 VAC
K8AK-PH1
Specifications
Storage temperature
Altitude
2,000 m max.
Input frequency
50/60 Hz (AC power supply)

Resistive load
250 VAC or 30 VDC
5A
1,250 VA, 150W
Mechanical life
Electrical life
Case material
PC and ABS
Weight
Approx. 130 g
Rated input voltage
Three-phase, three-wire mode, 200 to 480 VAC
Reversed phase and phase loss operating time
0.1 s max.
Resetting method
Automatic reset
Overload capacity
Continuous input: 528 VAC
Indicators
Size in mm (H W D)
Power (PWR): Green LED, relay output (RY): Yellow LED

EN 60947-5-1
EMC
EN 60947-5-1
Safety standards
90 22.5 100
Monitoring products
Output relays
(1 DPDT, normally
closed operation)
645
K8DS-PH
3-phase control
3-phase voltage, phase-sequence/phase loss relay
The K8DS-PH1 is a monitoring relay designed at 17.5 mm slim by simplified functions
for 3-phase 3 wire supplies. It simultaneously monitors phase sequence and phase loss
during start up as well as phase loss during operation. The output relay releases when
alarm conditions are detected, and the warning status can easily be monitored using
the LED indicator.
Monitors phase sequence and phase-loss simultaneously
Measuring range: 200 to 480 VAC
Power supply voltage is the same as measuring voltage
Operation reaction time: 0.1 s maximum
Rated input voltage
Order code
200 to 480 VAC
K8DS-PH1
Specifications
Storage temperature
Altitude
2,000 m max.
Input frequency
Output relays
(1 SPDT, normally
closed operation)

Resistive load
250 VAC or 30 VDC
5A
1,250 VA, 150 W
Mechanical life
Electrical life
Case material
PC UL 94 V-0
Weight
Approx. 60 g
Rated input voltage
Three-phase, three-wire mode, 200 to 480 VAC
Reversed phase and phase loss operating time
0.1 s max.
Resetting method
Automatic reset
Overload capacity
Continuous input: 500 VAC
Indicators
Size (H W D)
646
Power (PWR): Green LED, relay output (RY): Yellow LED

EN 60947-5-1
EMC
EN 60947-5-1
Safety standards
80 17.5 74 mm
K8AK-PM
3-phase control
3-phase voltage, phase sequence, phase loss relay
K8AK-PM monitors overvoltages, undervoltages, phase sequence and phase loss
for 3-phase, 3-wire or 4-wire power supplies, in one unit. This relay features a switch
setting for 3-phase, 3-wire or 3-phase, 4-wire power supply.
Worldwide power specifications supported by one unit
Phase sequence, phase loss: Operation reaction time 0.1 s maximum
Overvoltages or undervoltages: Operation time setting from 0.1 to 30 s
Relay warning status can easily be monitored using the LED indicator
Rated input
Order code
3-phase 3-wire mode
200, 220, 230, 240 VAC
3-phase 4-wire mode
115, 127, 133, 138 VAC
3-phase 3-wire mode
380, 400, 415, 480 VAC
3-phase 4-wire mode
220, 230, 240, 277 VAC
K8AK-PM1
K8AK-PM2
Specifications
Storage temperature
Input frequency

Resistive load
250 VAC or 30 VDC
5A
1,250 VA, 150 W
Mechanical life
Electrical life
Case material
PC and ABS
Weight
Rated input voltage
Approx. 150 g
K8AK-PM1
3-phase, 3-wire mode: 200, 220, 230, 240 VAC, 3-phase, 4-wire mode: 115, 127, 133, 138 VAC
K8AK-PM2
Operation (overvoltage
or undervoltage)
Overvoltage = 30% to 25% of maximum rated input voltage*1

Undervoltage = 30% to 25% of maximum rated input voltage*1
Operating value
Reset (HYS.)
Hysteresis
Resetting method
Automatic reset
Overvoltage/undervoltage
0.1 to 30 s
Phase-sequence, phase-loss
0.1 s max.
Operating time (T)

1 s or 5 s (Changed with the DIP switch)
Overload capacity
Repeat accuracy

Operating value
0.5% full scale (at 25C and an ambient humidity of 65% at the rated power supply voltage, DC or 50/60 Hz sine wave input)
Operating time
Indicators
EN 60947-5-1
EMC
EN 60947-5-1
Safety standards
Size in mm (H W D)
*1
Monitoring products
Output relays
(2 SPDT, normally
closed operation)
90 22.5 100
The rated input voltage is switched with a switch
647
K8DS-PM
3-phase control
3-Phase voltage, phase sequence, phase-loss and over-/
undervoltage relay
The K8DS-PM is the simplified 3-phase monitoring relay, 3-wire circuits with one unit.
It can monitor undervoltages, overvoltages, phase sequence and phase-loss.
Greater resistance to inverter noise
One SPDT output relay, 5 A at 250 VAC (resistive load)
World-wide power specifications supported by one unit (Set with a rotary switch)
Relay status can be monitored using LED indicator
Rated input
Order code
3-phase 3-wire mode
200, 220, 230, 240 VAC
K8DS-PM1
3-phase 3-wire mode
380, 400, 415, 480 VAC
K8DS-PM2
Specifications
Storage temperature
Input frequency
Output relays
(1 SPDT, normally
closed operation)

Resistive load
250 VAC or 30 VDC
5A
1,250 VA, 150 W
Mechanical life
Electrical life
50,000 operations at 5 A, 250 VAC
Case material
PC UL94 V-0
Weight
Rated input voltage
Approx. 65 g
K8DS-PM1
3-phase, 3-wire mode: 200, 220, 230, 240 VAC
K8DS-PM2
or undervoltage)
Overvoltage = 30% to 25% of maximum rated input voltage

Undervoltage = 30% to 25% of maximum rated input voltage
Operating value
Reset (HYS.)
Hysteresis
Resetting method
Automatic reset
0.1 to 30 s
0.1 s max.
Operating time (T)

1 s 0.5 s
Overload capacity
Repeat accuracy
Continuous input: 500 V

Operating value
0.5% full scale (at 25C and an ambient humidity of 65% at the rated power supply voltage, 50/60 Hz sine wave input)
Operating time
Indicators
Size in mm (H W D)
648
Power (PWR): Green, Relay output (RY): Yellow LED, OVER/UNDER: Red
EN 60947-5-1
EMC
EN 60947-5-1
Safety standards
80 17.5 74
K8AK-PA
3-phase control
3-phase asymmetry, phase sequence, phase loss relay
Monitors voltage asymmetry, phase sequence and phase loss for 3-phase 3-wire
or 4-wire power supplies, in one unit.
Worldwide power specifications supported by one unit
Phase sequence, phase loss: Operation reaction time 0.1 s maximum
Asymmetry: Operation time setting from 0.1 to 30 s
Reset method: Automatic
Power ON lock: 1 s or 5 s
Rated input
Order code
3-phase 3-wire mode
200, 220, 230, 240 VAC
3-phase 4-wire mode
115, 127, 133, 138 VAC
3-phase 3-wire mode
380, 400, 415, 480 VAC
3-phase 4-wire mode
220, 230, 240, 277 VAC
K8AK-PA1
K8AK-PA2
Specifications
Storage temperature
Altitude
2,000 m max.
Input frequency

Resistive load
250 VAC or 30 VDC
5A
1,250 VA, 150 W
Mechanical life
Electrical life
Case material
PC and ABS
Weight
Rated input voltage
Approx. 130 g
K8AK-PA1
K8AK-PA2
Asymmetry operation
(ASY.)
Asymmetry rate: 2% to 22%
Operating value

Asymmetry operating value = rated input voltage x asymmetry set value [%]
The asymmetry operation will function when the difference between the highest and lowest voltage phases equals or exceeds
the asymmetry operating value
Reset (HYS.)
Hysteresis
Resetting method
Automatic reset
Asymmetry
0.1 s to 30 s
0.1 s max.
Operating time (T)

Overload capacity
Repeat accuracy

Operating value
Operating time
Indicators
Size in mm (H W D)
EN 60947-5-1
EMC
EN 60947-5-1
Safety standards
90 22.5 100
649
Monitoring products
Output relays
(1 SPDT, normally
closed operation)
K8DS-PA
3-phase control
3-Phase voltage, phase sequence, loss and asymmetry
The K8DS-PA is the simplified 3-phase monitoring relay, 3-wire circuits with one unit.
It can monitor voltage asymmetry with 3-phase sequence and loss at the same time.
Rated input
Order code
3-phase 3-wire mode
200, 220, 230, 240 VAC
K8DS-PA1
3-phase 3-wire mode
380, 400, 415, 480 VAC
K8DS-PA2
Specifications
Storage temperature
Altitude
2,000 m max.
Input frequency
Output relays
(1 SPDT, normally
closed operation)

Resistive load
250 VAC or 30 VDC
5A
1,250 VA, 150 W
Mechanical life
Electrical life
Case material
PC UL94 V-0
Weight
Rated input voltage
Approx. 65 g
K8DS-PA1
K8DS-PA2
Asymmetry operation
(ASY.)
Operating value

Reset (HYS.)
Hysteresis
Resetting method
Automatic reset
Asymmetry
0.1 to 30 s
Phase-sequence
0.1 s 0.5 s
Phase-loss
0.1 s max.
Operating time (T)
1 s 0.5 s
Overload capacity
Repeat accuracy

Operating value
Operating time
Indicators
Size (H W D)
650
Power (PWR): Green, Relay output (RY): Yellow, Alarm outputs (ALM): Red
EN 60947-5-1
EMC
EN 60947-5-1
Safety standards
UL 508 (Recognition), Korean Radio Waves Act (Act 10564), CSA: C22.2 No. 14, CCC: GB14048.5
80 17.5 74 mm
K8DS-PZ
3-phase control
3-Phase asymmetry, phase sequence, phase-loss and
over-/undervoltage relay
The K8DS-PZ is the simplified 3-phase monitoring relay, 3-wire circuits with one unit.
It can monitor undervoltages, overvoltages, voltage asymmetry, phase sequence and
phase-loss.
Rated input
Order code
3-phase 3-wire mode
200, 220, 230, 240 VAC
K8DS-PZ1
3-phase 3-wire mode
380, 400, 415, 480 VAC
K8DS-PZ2
Specifications
Storage temperature
Altitude
2,000 m max.
Input frequency
Output relays
(1 SPDT, normally
closed operation)

Resistive load
250 VAC or 30 VDC
5A
1,250 VA, 150 W
Mechanical life
Electrical life
Case material
PC UL94 V-0
Weight
Approx. 65 g
K8DS-PZ1
K8DS-PZ2
or undervoltage)
Overvoltage/undervoltage: 2% to 30% of rated input voltage
Operating value
Asymmetry operation
(ASY.)
Operating value

Reset (HYS.)
Hysteresis
Resetting method
Automatic reset
Asymmetry
0.1 to 30 s
0.1 to 30 s
0.1 s 0.05 s, 0.1 s max.
Operating time (T)
1 s 0.5 s
Overload capacity
Repeat accuracy

Operating value
Operating time
EN 60947-5-1
EMC
EN 60947-5-1
Safety standards
UL 508 (Recognition), Korean Radio Waves Act (Act 10564), CSA: C22.2 No.14
Indicators
Size in mm (H W D)
Monitoring products
Rated input voltage
Power (PWR): Green, Relay output (RY): Yellow LED, Alarm output: Red LED
80 17.5 74
651
K8DS-PU
3-phase control
3-phase voltage asymmetry, phase-sequence, phase-loss
and undervoltage relay
The K8DS-PU is the simplified 3-phase monitoring relay, 3-wire circuits with one unit.
It can monitor undervoltages, asymmetry, phase sequence and phase loss.
Rated input
Order code
3-phase 3-wire mode
200, 220, 230, 240 VAC
K8DS-PU1
3-phase 3-wire mode
380, 400, 415, 480 VAC
K8DS-PU2
Specifications
Storage temperature
Altitude
2,000 m max.
Voltage fluctuation range (UNDER)
Undervoltage 30 to 25% of rated input voltage
Input frequency
Output relays
(1 SPDT, normally
closed operation)
Resistive load
250 VAC or 30 VDC
5A
1,250 VA, 150 W
Mechanical life
Electrical life
Case material
PC UL94 V-0
Weight
Rated input voltage
Approx. 65 g
K8DS-PU1
K8DS-PU2
or undervoltage)
Undervoltage = 30% to 25% of maximum rated input voltage
Operating value
Reset (HYS.)
Hysteresis
Resetting method
Automatic reset
Asymmetry
0.1 to 30 s
Phase-sequence
0.1 s 0.5 s
Phase-loss
0.1 s 0.05 s
Operating time (T)
0.1 s 0.5 s
Overload capacity
Repeat accuracy

Operating value
Operating time
Indicators
Size in mm (H W D)
652
Power (PWR): Green LED, relay output (RY): Yellow LED, UNDER: Red
EN 60947-5-1
EMC
EN 60947-5-1
Safety standards
80 17.5 74
K8AK-PW
3-phase control
3-phase voltage relay
Monitors overvoltages and undervoltages for 3-phase 3-wire or 4-wire power supplies, in one
unit. Switch setting for 3-phase 3-wire or 3-phase 4-wire power supply.
Overvoltages or undervoltages: Operation time setting from 0.1 to 30 s
Relay warning status can easily be monitored using the LED indicator
Separate outputs possible for overvoltages and undervoltages
Reset method: Automatic
Power ON lock: 1 s or 5 s
Rated input
Order code
3-phase 3-wire mode
200, 220, 230, 240 VAC
3-phase 4-wire mode
115, 127, 133, 138 VAC
3-phase 3-wire mode
380, 400, 415, 480 VAC
3-phase 4-wire mode
220, 230, 240, 277 VAC
K8AK-PW1
K8AK-PW2
Specifications
Storage temperature
Altitude
2,000 m max.
Voltage fluctuation rang
85% to 110% of rated input voltage
Input frequency

Resistive load
250 VAC or 30 VDC
5A
1,250 VA, 150 W
Mechanical life
Electrical life
Case material
PC and ABS
Weight
Rated input voltage
Approx. 150 g
K8AK-PW1
K8AK-PW2
and undervoltage)
Overvoltage = 30% to 25% of maximum rated input voltage*1

Undervoltage = 30% to 25% of maximum rated input voltage*1
Operating value
Reset (HYS.)
Hysteresis
Resetting method
Automatic reset
0.1 to 30 s
Operating time (T)

Overload capacity
Repeat accuracy

Operating value
Operating time
Indicators
EN 60947-5-1
EMC
EN 60947-5-1
Safety standards
Size in mm (H W D)
*1
90 22.5 100
The rated input voltage is switched with a switch
653
Monitoring products
Output relays
(2 SPDT, normally
closed operation)
61F-GP-N8
Level Control
Compact plug-in (8-pin) level controller
The 61F-GP-N8 can be used for single- or two-point level control of conductive
materials, both liquids and solids. These products are equipped with a red LED
operation indicator.
Low-voltage (AC) electrodes (8 VAC or 24 VAC)
Operation range: 4 to 15 k, 70 to 300 k
Detection method: Conductive
Probes need to be ordered separately
Conforms to EMC and LVD directives, UL/CSA approved
Application
Type
Order code
Ordinary purified water or sewage water
General purpose type
61F-GP-N8 24AC
61F-GP-N8 110AC
61F-GP-N8 230AC
Ordinary purified water, where the distance between sewage pumps and water tanks or
between receiver tanks and supply tanks is long or where remote control is required
Long-distance type
2 km
61F-GP-N8L 24AC 2KM

61F-GP-N8L 110AC 2KM
4 km
61F-GP-N8L 24AC 4KM

Liquids with high specific resistance such as distilled water
61F-GP-N8H 24AC
High sensitivity type
61F-GP-N8H 110AC
61F-GP-N8H 230AC
Liquids with low specific resistance such as salt water, sewage water, acid chemicals,
alkali chemicals
Low sensitivity type
Ordinary purified or sewage water, with two-wired-type electrode holder

(incorporating a resistor of 6.8 k)
Two-wired type
61F-GP-N8D 24AC
61F-GP-N8D 110AC
61F-GP-N8D 230AC
61F-GP-N8R 24AC
61F-GP-N8R 110AC
61F-GP-N8R 230AC
DIN-rail mounting socket
PF083A-E
PL08
Accessories
Electrode holders
Applications
Mounting
style
Insulator
material
Max. temperature
Number of
electrodes
Order code
For city water and other general use.

Easy-to-replace separate versions for maintenance.
Flange
Phenol resin
70C
PS-3S
When mounting space is limited.

Special 3pole holder of small size and light weight.
Screw
Phenol resin
3, 300 mm
3, 1,000 mm
PS-31-300MM
PS-31-1000MM
Use for sewage, sea water, etc.,

having a low specific resistance.
Flange
PPS
150C (without water drips or vapour on the 1

electrode holder surface)
BF-1
For resistance to high pressure.

Use in tanks with high temperature or pressure.
Screw
PFA

surface of the electrode holder)
BS-1
Electrode separators
Number of
electrodes
Order code
F03-14 1P
F03-14 3P
Electrodes, connecting, and lock nuts

Applicable liquids
Material
Component
Indication mark
Inscription
Order code
Purified city water, industrial water, sewage
Equivalent
to SUS 304
(AISI-304)
Electrode (1 m long)
1 line
F03-01 SUS201
Connecting nut
F03-02 SUS201
Lock nut
F03-03 SUS201
2 lines
F03-01 SUS316
Connecting nut
F03-02 SUS316
Lock nut
316
F03-03 SUS316
Purified city water, industrial water, sewage,

dilute alkaline solution
654
SUS316
(AISI-316)
61F-GP-N8
Level Control
Specifications
61F-GP-N8
24, 100, 110, 120, 200, 220, 230 or 240 VAC; 50/60 Hz
61F-GP-N8L
61F-GP-N8H
61F-GP-N8D
85 to 110% of rated voltage
Interelectrode voltage
Interelectrode current
8 VAC
24 VAC
8 VAC
Approx. 1 mA AC max.
Approx. 0.4 mA AC max.
Power consumption
Approx. 3.5 VA max.
Approx. 1 mA AC max.
Response time
Operate: 80 ms max., release: 160 ms max.
Cable length
1 km max.
Control output
1 A, 250 VAC (inductive load: Cos = 0.4), 3 A, 250 VAC (resistive load)
50 m max.
1 km max.
Ambient temperature
Operating: -10 to 55C
Life expectancy
Electrical: 100,000 operations min., mechanical: 5,000,000 operations min
Size in mm (HxWxD)
49.9x38x70
2 km max. 4 km max.
61F-GP-N8R
800 m max.
Monitoring products
Item
Supply voltage
655
61F-GPN-BT/-BC
Level Control
Compact plug-in (11-pin) level controller (DC supply)
This controller is for single- or two-point level control. 24 VDC supply allows for usage
in locations without AC power supply. Relay contact chattering usually caused by
waves has been eliminated by using open collector output, reducing contact wear.
Adjustable sensitivity: Operation range: 0 to 100 k
Red LED for operation indicator
Conforms to EMC and LVD directives
UL/CSA approved
Probes need to be ordered separately
Product name
Output
Order code
Conductive level controller
Open collector (NPN)
61F-GPN-BT 24VDC
Relay contact (SPST-NO)
61F-GPN-BC 24VDC
PF113A-E
Front socket
Accessories
Electrode holders
Applications
Mounting style
Insulator
material
Max. temperature
Number of
electrodes
Order code

Flange
Phenol resin
70C
PS-3S

Special 3-pole holder of small size and light weight.
Screw
Phenol resin
3, 300 mm
3, 1000 mm
PS-31-300MM
PS-31-1000MM

Flange
PPS

BF-1

Screw
PFA

BS-1
Number of
electrodes
Order code
F03-14 1P
F03-14 3P
Indication mark
Inscription
Order code
1 line
F03-01 SUS201
F03-02 SUS201
F03-03 SUS201
2 lines
F03-01 SUS316
Connecting nut
F03-02 SUS316
Lock nut
316
F03-03 SUS316

Applicable liquids
Material
Equivalent to SUS Electrode (1 m long)

304
Connecting nut
(AISI-304)
Lock nut

SUS316
(AISI-316)
Component
Specifications
Item
61F-GPN-BT
Rated voltage
24 VDC
Allowable voltage range
85 to 110% of the rated voltage
Interelectrode voltage
5 VAC max.
Error
For scale of 0: +10 k, for scale of 100: 10 k
Release resistance
200% max. of the operation resistance
61 F-GPN-BC
Switching between supply and drainage
Terminals 7 and 8 open: Automatic drainage operation; terminals 7 and 8 shorted: Automatic supply operation
Open collector (NPN) 30 VDC, 100 mA max.
SPST-NO; 5 A, 240 VAC (resistive load)

2 A, 240 VAC (inductive load: cos = 0.4)
Life expectancy

Wiring distance
100 m max.
10 to 55C
Response time
Operating: 1.5 s max., releasing: 3.0 s max.
Size in mm (HxWxD)
49.9x38x70
656
K8AK-LS
Level Control
22.5 mm wide conductive level controller
The K8AK-LS1 is a conductive level controller in a 22.5 mm wide industrial housing.
Via DIP switches its function (supply or drainage) can be selected. This product is for
single- or two-point level control.
Time delay function up to 10 s
Supply voltages: 24 VAC/DC and 100 to 240 VAC
Control output: Relay 5 A at 250 VAC resistive load
Probes cable length: Max. 100 m from controller
LED indicator: Green for power ON, yellow for output relay
Supply voltage
Order code
24 VAC/VDC
K8AK-LS1 24VAC/DC
100 to 240 VAC
K8AK-LS1 100-240 VAC
Accessories
Electrode holders
Applications
Mounting style
Insulator material
Max. temperature
Number of
electrodes
Order code

Flange
Phenol resin
70C
PS-3S

Special 3-pole holder of small size and light weight.
Screw
Phenol resin
3, 300 mm
3, 1000 mm
PS-31-300MM
PS-31-1000MM

Flange
PPS

BF-1

Screw
Fluoro resin

BS-1
Number of
electrodes
Order code
F03-14 1P
F03-14 3P
Applicable liquids
Material
Component
Inscription
Order code
Equivalent to
SUS304
(AISI-304)
Electrode (1 m long) 1 line
F03-01 SUS201
Connecting nut
F03-02 SUS201
Lock nut
F03-03 SUS201
SUS316
(AISI-316)
Electrode (1 m long) 2 lines
F03-01 SUS316
Connecting nut
F03-02 SUS316
Lock nut
316
F03-03 SUS316

Indication mark
Monitoring products
657
K8AK-LS
Level Control
Specifications
Item
K8AK-LS
Storage temperature
Output relays
Resistive load
250 VAC or 30 VDC
5A
1,250 VA, 150 W
Mechanical life
Electrical life
Case material
PC and ABS
Weight
Approx. 150 g
Operating resistance
10 k to 100 k (variable)
Reset resistance
250 k max.
Response time
Approx. 0.1 to 10 s (variable)
Cable length
100 m max. with completely insulated (600 V) cabtire cable with 3 conductors (0.75 mm2)
Indicators
Green LED: Power, Yellow LED: Control output
EN 61010-1
Installation environment (pollution level 2, installation category II)
Size in mm (H W D)
658
EMC
EN 61326-1
Safety standards
EN 60664-1UL 508 (Recognition), Korean Radio Waves Act (Act 10564), CSA and CCC
90 22.5 100
K7L
Level Control
Ultra-miniature liquid leakage sensor amplifier
This very compact plug-in leakage controller fits into Omron's
G2R 8-pin sockets (P2RF-08-E). K7L detects a wide variety of liquids, ranging from water to liquid chemicals with low conductivity.
Operation range: Up to 50 M
Four sensing ranges available
Detection method: Conductive
Two LEDs: Green for power supplied, red for output indication
Conforms to EMC and LVD Directives, UL/CSA approved
Product name
Characteristics
Order code
Product name
Characteristics
Order code
Liquid leakage sensor

amplifier
Standard
K7L-AT50
Sensors
Standard model (material: Polyethylene)
F03-16PE 5M
With disconnection function set
K7L-AT50D
For temperature and chemical resistance

(material: Polyethylene PTFE)
F03-16PT 5M
For flexibility and superior workability

(material: Plastic fiber braided cable)
F03-16SF 5M
For flexibility and visual confirmation

of leakage
(material: Plastic fiber braided cable)
F03-16SFC 5M
Sensing
band
With disconnection function sensor am- K7L-AT50D-S

plifier only
Point
sensor
Easier to wipe off than the band type
F03-16PS
Electrodes have PTFE coating to

resist chemicals
F03-16PS-F
Accessories
Product name
Characteristics
Terminal blocks (10 pcs)

DIN-rail mounted
socket
Order code
Product name
Characteristics
Order code
F03-20
Mounting
brackets
and
stickers
Used for F03-16SF(C)
F03-25
Used for F03-16PE

(adhesive tape)
F03-26PES
Used for F03-16PE (screws)

(30 pcs)
F03-26PEN
Used for F03-16PT (screws)
F03-26PTN
With finger protection
P2RF-08-E
Without finger protection
P2RF-08
Sensing
band
stickers
Point sen- Used for F03-16PS

sor
mounting
brackets
F03-26PS
12 to 24 VDC (allowable voltage fluctuation range: 10 to 30 VDC)
Operate resistance
0 to 50 M, variable
Range 0: 0 to 250 k
Range 1: 0 to 600 k
Range 2: 0 to 5 M
Range 3: 0 to 50 M
Release resistance
105% min. of operate resistance
NPN open-collector transistor output with 100 mA at 30 VDC max.
Wiring distance
Connecting cable: 50 m max.

Sensing band length: 10 m max.
Ambient temperature
Power consumption
1 W max.
Response time
Operate: 800 ms max., release: 800 ms max.
Weight
Approx. 14 g
Disconnection detection function

(K7L-AT50D & K7L-AT50D-S only)
Detection signal: 10 VDC max., 200 ms, detection time: 10 s max.

Release: By resetting the power supply
Size in mm (HWD)
28.812.846
Monitoring products
Specifications
659
K8AK-TS/-PT
Temperature monitor
Thermistor motor protection relay
The K8AK-TS is the temperature monitoring relay based on the thermistor detection
and can protect the motor from overheating.
The K8AK-PT gives further functionalities such as temperature, 3-phase sequence and
loss monitoring and contributes to the overall safety 3-phase motors operation.
DIN 22.5-mm-sized K8AK-PT relays
Side-by-side mounting of K8AK-PT relays
Specially designed for internal motor monitoring, no setting required
Test/Reset button for confirmation of output operation
Monitoring also performed for thermistor disconnections and short circuits
Manual or automatic resetting with the same relay
Rated input
Order code
Temperature monitoring
24 VAC/DC
K8AK-TS1 24 VAC/DC
Phase sequence, phase loss and temperature monitoring
100 to 240 VAC
K8AK-PT1 100-240 VAC

K8AK-TS1 100-240 VAC
Specifications
Storage temperature
Input frequency
Output relays
(2 SPDT, normally
closed operation)

Resistive load
250 VAC or 30 VDC
5A
1,250 VA, 150 W
Mechanical life
Electrical life
50,000 operations at 250 VAC or 30 VDC
Case material
PC and ABS UL94 V-0
Weight
Approx. 150 g
Rated input voltage
3-phase, 3-wire mode: 200 to 480 VAC

Manual reset/automatic reset (switchable)*1
Reset method
Operating time (T)
Phase-sequence on three-phase
voltage input
0.1 s 0.05 s
Phase loss on three-phase voltage 0.1 s max. (when the voltage changes rapidly from 100 to 0% of rated voltage)
input
PTC thermistor input
Overload capacity
Indicators
Power (PWR): Green, PH alarm outputs (ALM): Red, TS alarm outputs (ALM): Red
EN 60947-5-1
EMC
EN 60947-5-1
Safety standards
Size in mm (H W D)
*1
Manual reset method: Press the TEST/RESET button.
660
0.2 s max.
90 22.5 100
K8AK-TH
Temperature monitor
Protect your heating application
This temperature monitoring relay was designed specially for monitoring abnormal
temperatures to prevent excessive temperature increase and to protect equipment.
K8AK-TH provides temperature monitoring in a slim design with a width of just
22.5 mm.
Simple function settings using DIP switch
Selectable alarm latch and SV setting protection
Multi-input support for thermocouple or Pt100 and Pt1000 sensor input
Changeover relay: fail-safe selectable
Alarm status identification with LED
Input type
Temperature setting range
Setting unit
Supply voltage
Size in mm (HWD)
Order code
Thermocouple/
Pt100 and Pt1000
0 to 999C/F
1C/F
100 to 240 VAC
9022.5100
K8AK-TH11S AC100-240
Thermocouple
0 to 1,800C
0 to 3,200 F *1
*1
10C/F
24 VAC/VDC
K8AK-TH11S AC/DC24
100 to 240 VAC
K8AK-TH12S AC100-240
24 VAC/VDC
K8AK-TH12S AC/DC24
Setting range depending on sensor type selected
Specifications
Item
100 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
Allowable voltage range
85 to 110% of power supply voltage
Power consumption
Sensor inputs
5 VA max.
2 W max. (24 VDC), 4 VA max. (24 VAC)
K8AK-TH11S
Thermocouple: K, J, T, E; platinum-resistance thermometer: Pt100, Pt1000
K8AK-TH12S
Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, B, R, S, PLII
Output relay
External inputs
(for latch setting)
24 VAC 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC
One SPDT relay (5 A at 250 VAC, resistive load)

Contact input
ON: 1 k max., OFF: 100 kmin.
Non-contact input
ON residual voltage: 1.5 V max., OFF leakage current: 0.1 mA max.

Leakage current: Approx. 10 mA
Setting method
Rotary switch setting (set of three switches)
Indicators
Power (PWR): Green LED, relay output (ALM): Red LED
Other functions
Alarm mode (upper limit/lower limit), output normally ON/OFF selection, output latch, setting protection,
fail-safe operation selectable, temperature unit C/F
Storage temperature
Setting accuracy
1% of full scale
Output relays
(1 SPDT, normally closed
operation)
2C
Resistive load
250 VAC or 30 VDC
5A
1,250 VA, 150 W
Mechanical life
Electrical life
Sampling cycle
100 ms
Weight
160 g
IP20
Memory protection
Safety standards
Crimp terminals
Case material
Monitoring products
Hysteresis width
Non-volatile memory (number or writes: 1,000,000)

Approved standards
EN 61010-1 (Pollution level 2, overvoltage category II)
Application standards
EN 61326-1, UL 61010-1, Korean Radio Waves Act (Act 10564), CSA:CAN/CSA C22.2 No.14, CCC: GB14048.5
Two solid wires of 2.5 mm2 or two ferrules of 1.5 mm2 with insulation sleeves can be tightened together
PC and ABS
Mounting
Mounted to DIN-rail
Size in mm (HWD)
9022.5100
661
Pushbutton switches
16 MM SUBASSEMBLED PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES
A165 Full range with IP65 rating
All our 16 mm pushbuttons are upgraded to IP65 rating. This will increase the reliability
of your application. The pushbuttons are very easy to assemble due to their modular
construction: Pushbutton + case + lamp (if applicable) + switch.
Wide range of models: rectangular, square & round
With or without lamp
Easy assembly and installation
Pushbutton switches
Indicator
Panel cutout dimensions?
16 dia.
22 dia.
16 dia.
22 dia.
Illumination?
662
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
A16L
A16
A22L
A22
M16
M22
P632
Page 666
P632
Page 666
P622
Page 668
P622
Page 668
P636
Page 670
P627
Page 671
663
Pushbutton switches
664
Selection table
Category
Pushbutton switch
A16
Mounting
Nut-mounting
Size
16 mm
Indicator
A22
M16
M22
22 mm
16 mm
22 mm
Shape
Red
Yellow
Pure yellow
Green
White
Blue
Red
Yellow
Pure yellow
Green
White
Blue
Red
Yellow
Green
White
Blue
Black
Momentary operation
Self-holding
Number of contacts
IP rating
IP65
Legend plate
125 VAC
10
250 VAC
30 VDC
10
Rated load
5 A at 125 VAC,
3 A at 250 VAC,
3 A at 30 VDC
10 A at 110 VAC,
6 A at 220 VAC
Solder
PCB
Screw-less Clamp
5 VDC
12 VDC
24 VDC
SPDT
DPDT
SPST-NO
SPST-NC
SPST-NO + SPST-NC
DPST-NO
DPST-NC
Page/Quick Link
666
668
670
671
Standard
Available
Pushbutton switches
Operating
voltage
Terminals
Switch ratings [A]
Features
Non-lighted
LED-lighted
Pushbutton color
Incandescent
lamp-lighted
Selection
criteria
Model
Form
Pushbutton switches
No/not available
665
A16
Pushbutton switches
These sub-assembled pushbutton switches have a modular construction:
pushbutton + case + lamp (if applicable) + switch. A16 is a nut-mounted pushbutton
switch with a short mounting depth of less than 28.5 mm below panel.
Wide variety of control and signal devices: lighted, non-lighted and buzzer
Quick and easy assembly, snap-in switch
Wide range of switching capacity from standard load to micro load
UL, cUL, CSA and VDE approved, conforms to EN60947-5-1 and IEC947-5-1
Type
Color
Order code
Degree of protection: Oil-resistant IP65
Rectangular
Square
Round
Red
A165L-JR
A165L-AR
A165L-TR
Yellow
A165L-JY
A165L-AY
A165L-TY
Pure yellow
A165L-JPY
A165L-APY
A165L-TPY
White
A165L-JW
A165L-AW
A165L-TW
Blue
A165L-JA
A165L-AA
A165L-TA
Non-lighted
Black
A165L-JB
A165L-AB
A165L-TB
LED
Green
A165L-JGY
A165L-AGY
A165L-TGY
Non-lighted/incandescent lamp
Green
A165L-JG
A165L-AG
A165L-TG
Non-lighted
LED
Incandescent lamp
Cases
Appearance Classification
Order code
Oil-resistant IP65
Momentary operation
Alternate operation
A165-CJM
Square
A165-CAM
Round
A165-CTM
A165-CJA
Square
A165-CAA
Round
A165-CTA
Switches
Appearance
Switches with reduced voltage lighting

Classification
Order code
Lighted/
Standard load/
non-lighted microload (com(common use) mon use)
SPDT
Solder A16-1
terminal
DPDT
A16-2
Solder terminal A16-T1-1
DPDT
A16-T1-2
DPDT Screw-less
clamp
A16-T1-2S
100 V
DPDT
A16-2P
200 V
Screwless
clamp
A16-2S
Type
Color
Order code
5 VDC
12 VDC
24 VDC
LED
Red
A16-5DSR
A16-12DSR
A16-24DSR
Yellow
A16-5DSY
A16-12DSY
A16-24DSY
Green
A16-5DSG
A16-12DSG
A16-24DSG
White *1
A16-5DSW
A16-12DSW
A16-24DSW
Blue
A16-5DA
A16-12DA
A16-24DA
Type
5 VAC/VDC
12 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
Incandescent lamp
A16-5
A16-12
A16-24
Use the white LED together with white or pure yellow pushbuttons.
Order code
SPDT
PCB
A16-1P
terminal
Lamps
666
Classification
100 V Standard load/
microload
(common use)
SPDT
DPDT
*1
Appearance
A16-T2-2S
A16
Pushbutton switches
Accessories
Name
Appearance
Switch guards
Classification
Remarks
Order code
Cannot be used with the dust cover
A16ZJ-5050
For square and round models

Dust covers
Panel plugs
A16ZA-5050
A16ZJ-5060
Cannot be used with the switch guard
For square models
A16ZA-5060
For round models
A16ZT-5060
Used for covering the panel cutouts for future panel expansion
A16ZJ-3003
For square models
A16ZA-3003
For round models
A16ZT-3003
Specifications
Durability
Mechanical
Momentary operation: 120 operations/minute max.

Alternate operation: 60 operations/minute max.
Electrical
Mechanical
Momentary operation: 2,000,000 operations min.

Alternate operation: 200,000 operations min.
Electrical
Ambient temperature

Weight
Size in mm (HWD)
Round/square: 181828.5
rectangular: 182428.5
Operating characteristics
Pushbutton switch
Item
Screw-less clamp
Oil-resistant IP65
Recommended wire size
0.5 mm2 twisted wire or 0.8 mm dia. solid wire
Usable wires
and tensile
strength
Twisted wire
0.3 mm2
Solid wire
0.5 mm dia. 0.8 mm dia. 1.0 mm dia.
SPDT
DPDT
Operating force (OF) max.
2.94 N
4.91 N
Releasing force (RF) min.
0.29 N
Total travel (TT)
Approx. 3 mm
Pretravel (PT) max.
2.5 mm
Lock stroke (LTA) min.
0.5 mm
Tensile strength 10 N
Length of exposed wire
0.5 mm2
20 N
0.75 mm2
30 N
1.25 mm2
40 N
10 1 mm
Pushbutton switches
Allowable operating
frequency
667
A22
Pushbutton switches
The A22 comes in a wide variety of shapes and colors and is installable in 22-dia. or
25-dia. panel cutouts. The switch unit can be easily mounted. A22 is mounted using
either open-type (fork-type) or closed-type (round-type) crimp terminals.
Finger-protection mechanism on the switch unit are provided
as a standard feature
Increased wiring efficiency with three-row mounting of switch blocks
IP65 oil-resistant (non-lighted models), IP65 (lighted models)
Lighted and non-lighted, flat, projection and half- and full-guard versions
EN60947-5-1, UL and cUL approved
Pushbutton
Illumination Color
Non-lighted Red
Lighted
Order code
Flat type
Projection type
Full-guard type Half-guard type
Square/
projection type
Square/
full-guard type
Round/
mushroom type
(30-dia. head)
Round/
mushroom type
(40-dia. head)
A22-FR
A22-TR
A22-GR
A22-HR
A22-CR
A22-DR
A22-SR
A22-MR
Green
A22-FG
A22-TG
A22-GG
A22-HG
A22-CG
A22-DG
A22-SG
A22-MG
Yellow
A22-FY
A22-TY
A22-GY
A22-HY
A22-CY
A22-DY
A22-SY
A22-MY
White
A22-FW
A22-TW
A22-GW
A22-HW
A22-CW
A22-DW
A22-SW
A22-MW
Blue
A22-FA
A22-TA
A22-GA
A22-HA
A22-CA
A22-DA
A22-SA
A22-MA
Black
A22-FB
A22-TB
A22-GB
A22-HB
A22-CB
A22-DB
A22-SB
A22-MB
Red
A22L-TR
A22L-GR
A22L-HR
A22L-CR
A22L-DR
Green
A22L-TG
A22L-GG
A22L-HG
A22L-CG
A22L-DG
Yellow
A22L-TY
A22L-GY
A22L-HY
A22L-CY
A22L-DY
White
A22L-TW
A22L-GW
A22L-HW
A22L-CW
A22L-DW
Blue
A22L-TA
A22L-GA
A22L-HA
A22L-CA
A22L-DA
29.7 dia. 12D
29.7 dia. 19D
29.7 dia. 19D 29.7 dia. 12/18.5D 29.8 mm2 18D
29.8 mm2 18D
30 dia. 32D
40 dia. 32D
Buttonsize in mm
Switches
Switch
operation
Lamp LED
Contacts
Oder code
Nonlighted
models
AC/DC
Without voltage
reduction unit
Momentary
Alternate
110 VAC
668
Order code
Operating voltage
With voltage reduction unit
DC
220 VAC
SPST-NO
A22-10M
A22L-10M
A22L-10M-T1
A22L-10M-T2
SPST-NC
A22-01M
A22L-01M
A22L-01M-T1
A22L-01M-T2
SPST-NO +
SPST-NC
A22-11M
A22L-11M
A22L-11M-T1
A22L-11M-T2
DPST-NO
A22-20M
A22L-20M
A22L-20M-T1
A22L-20M-T2
DPST-NC
A22-02M
A22L-02M
A22L-02M-T1
A22L-02M-T2
AC
AC and DC
6V
12 V
24 V
24 V
superbright
Red
A22-6DR
Green
A22-6DG
Yellow *1
A22-6DY
Blue
A22-6DA
Red
A22-6AR
Green
A22-6AG
Yellow *1
A22-6AY
Blue
A22-6AA
Red
A22-12AR
A22-24AR
A22-24ASR
Green
A22-12AG
A22-24AG
A22-24ASG
A22-12AY
A22-24AY
A22-24ASY
A22-12AA
A22-24AA
A22-24ASA
SPST-NO
A22-10A
A22L-10A
A22L-10A-T1
A22L-10A-T2
Yellow *1
SPST-NC
A22-01A
A22L-01A
A22L-01A-T1
A22L-01A-T2
Blue
SPST-NO +
SPST-NC
A22-11A
A22L-11A
A22L-11A-T1
A22L-11A-T2
DPST-NO
A22-20A
A22L-20A
A22L-20A-T1
A22L-20A-T2
Lamp - incandescent lamp
DPST-NC
A22-02A
A22L-02A
A22L-02A-T1
A22L-02A-T2
Order code
*1
Used when the pushbutton color is yellow or white
Operating voltage
Switch blocks
Switch blocks
LED light
Lighted models
Standard load
Order code
SPST-NO
A22-10
SPST-NC
A22-01
DPST-NO
A22-20
DPST-NC
A22-02
5 VAC/VDC
12 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
A22-5
A22-12
A22-24
A22
Pushbutton switches
Accessories
Item
Lamp sockets
Direct lighting
Remarks
Order code
Used when changing the lighting method (LED only)
A22-TN
A22-T2
220 VAC
Mounting
latches
For momentary models
Order mounting latches only when mounting switch blocks A22-3200

or lamp sockets are purchased individually
Legend plate
frames
Large size
Snap-in legend plate is acrylic
Sealing caps
For projection models
With snap-in legend plate, without text, black
A22Z-3330
Three-throw spacer
Control boxes
(enclosures)
A22Z-3333
Without snap-in legend plate
Exclusively for A22
One hole
Two holes
Used to prevent dust or water from entering the

operation unit (pushbutton, etc.), color: Opaque,
material: Silicon
A22Z-3600T
Used when mounting three non-lighted switches
A22Z-3003
Do not use DPST-NO or DPST-NC switches,

material: Polycarbonate resin
A22Z-B101
Snap-in legend Standard size

plates
Without text
White
Transparent
White text on black background
A22Z-B102
A22Z-B103
Three holes
Attached to the standard-size legend plate frame,
material: Acrylic
A22Z-3443W
A22Z-3443C
ON
A22Z-3443B-5
OFF
A22Z-3443B-6
DOWN
A22Z-3443B-8
A22Z-3443B-9
POWER ON
Attached to the large-size legend plate frame,
material: Acrylic
A22Z-3453W
EMERGENCY STOP is engraved on the plate.

Used as an emergency stop switch legend plate
A22Z-3466-1
Lamp extractor
Rubber tool used to easily replace lamps
A22Z-3901
Tightening wrench
Tool used to tighten nuts from the back of the panel
A22Z-3905
Large size
Without text
White
Transparent
For emergency 60-dia. round plate with black letters on a yellow background
stop switch
90-dia. round plate with black letters on a yellow background
A22Z-3453C
A22Z-3476-1
Specifications
LED indicators without voltage reduction unit
Standards
File number
UL, cUL
UL508
E41515
Rated voltage
Rated current
Operating voltage
EN60947-5-1
6 VDC
60 mA (20 mA)
6 VDC 5%
6 VAC
60 mA (20 mA)
6 VAC/VDC 5%
12 VAC/VDC
30 mA (10 mA)
12 VAC/VDC 5%
24 VAC/VDC
15 mA (10 mA)
24 VAC/VDC 5%
Contact ratings (standard load)
10
Rated voltage Rated current (A)
24 VAC
AC15
(inductive
load)
AC12
(resistive
load)
DC13
(inductive
load)
DC12
(resistive
load)
10
10
Rated voltage
Rated current
Operating voltage
15 mA
24 VAC/VDC 5%
Operating voltage
110 VAC
10
24 VAC/VDC
220 VAC
Incandescent lamp
380 VAC
440 VAC
24 VDC
1,5
10
110 VDC
0,5
220 VDC
0,2
0,6
380 VDC
0,1
0,2
50 mA at 5 VDC (resistive load) 1 mA at 5 VDC
Item
Durability
(number of
operations
min.)
Ambient
temperature
Mechanical
Rated voltage
Rated current
6 VAC/VDC
200 mA
5 VAC/VDC
14 VAC/VDC
80 mA
12 VAC/VDC
28 VAC/VDC
40 mA
24 VAC/VDC
130 VAC/VDC
20 mA
100 VAC/VDC
Allowable
operating
frequency
Super-bright LED indicator
Rated voltage
Operating voltage
Applicable lamp
(BA8S/13_ gold)
110 VAC
95 to 115 VAC
LED Lamp (A22-24A_)
220 VAC
190 to 230 VAC
Pushbutton switches
Knob-type selector switches
Non-lighted Lighted
Non-lighted Lighted
Non-lighted
Key-type selector switch

Lighted
Manual release: 30 operations/minute max.,

automatic release: 30 operations/minute max.
Non-lighted
Electrical
Mechanical
5,000,000
Momentary operation: 300,000
500,000
100,000
500,000
Electrical
500,000
300,000
500,000
100,000
500,000
Operating
20 to 70C
20 to 55C
20 to 70C
20 to 55C
20 to 70C
20 to 55C
20 to 70C
Storage
40 to 70C
40 to 70C
40 to 70C
40 to 70C
40 to 70C
40 to 70C
40 to 70C
IP65
IP65
IP65
(oil-resistant)
IP65
IP65
(oil-resistant)
Size in mm (in-panel only)
34H 34W 54.7D, 34H 34W 72.7D for DPST switches
Pushbutton switches
Rated carry
current (A)
669
M16
Indicators
Indicators with a mounting aperture
of 16 mm
The M16 series of nut-mounted indicators comes in rectangular, square and
round versions. Due to its modular construction, assembly is quick and easy.
M16 comes in a wide variety of control and signal devices with a wide range of switching capacities, from general load to micro load.
LED, incandescent and neon lamp
Snap-in switch unit
Short mounting depth, less than 28.5 mm below panel
UL, CSA and VDE approved, conforms to EN60947-5-1
Pushbutton
Type
Display color
Order code
IP65 oil-resistant
LED
Incandescent lamp
LED
Incandescent lamp
Rectangular
Square
Round
Red
A165L-JR
A165L-AR
A165L-TR
Yellow
A165L-JY
A165L-AY
A165L-TY
Pure yellow
A165L-JPY
A165L-APY
A165L-TPY
White
A165L-JW
A165L-AW
A165L-TW
Blue
A165L-JA
A165L-AA
A165L-TA
Green
A165L-JGY
A165L-AGY
A165L-TGY
Green
A165L-JG
A165L-AG
A165L-TG
Lamp
Type
Case
Color
Order code
Classification
Operating voltage
IP65 oil-resistant
5 VDC
LED
12 VDC
Order code
Rectangular
A165-CJM
24 VDC
Square
A165-CAM
Round
A165-CTM
Red
A16-5DSR
A16-12DSR
A16-24DSR
Yellow
A16-5DSY
A16-12DSY
A16-24DSY
Green
A16-5DSG
A16-12DSG
A16-24DSG
Socket
White
A16-5DSW
A16-12DSW
A16-24DSW
Classification
Blue
A16-5DA
A16-12DA
A16-24DA
Solder terminals
M16-0
Type
5 VAC/VDC
12 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
PCB terminals
M16-0P
Incandescent lamp
A16-5
A16-12
A16-24
Screw-less clamp
Solder terminals
Screw-less clamp
Order code
M16-S
Voltage-reduction
lighting
100 V
M16-T1
100 V
M16-T1-S
200 V
M16-T2-S
Specifications
Allowable
operating
frequency
Mechanical
Momentary operation: 120 operations/minute max., alternate operation: 60 operations/minute max.
Electrical
Durability
Mechanical
Momentary operation: 2,000,000 operations min.,

alternate operation: 200,000 operations min.
Electrical
Degree of contamination
3 (IEC947-5-1)
Ambient temperature
Storage: 25 to 65C
Agency
Standards
File number
UL, cUL
UL508
E41515
Ratings
Superbright LED
Rated voltage
Rated current
Operating voltage Built-in limiting

resistance
5 VDC
30 mA (15 mA)
5 VDC 5%
12 VDC
15 mA
12 VDC 5%
270 (560 )
24 VDC
10 mA
24 VDC 5%
1,600 (2,000 )
Weight
Incandescent lamp
Size in mm
Round/square:18Hx18Wx28.5D
rectangular:18Hx24Wx28.5D
Rated voltage
Rated current
Operating voltage
6 VAC/VDC
60 mA
5 VAC/VDC
14 VAC/VDC
40 mA
12 VAC/VDC
28 VAC/VDC
24 mA
24 VAC/VDC
670
33 (68 )
M22
Indicators
Nut-mounted, 22 mm indicator,
with high visibility, illuminated buttons
The M22 series of indicators comes in 22 or 25 mm-diameter round versions.
They can be easily mounted and removal of the socket unit is also easy.
The finger protection mechanism on the lamp is provided as a standard feature.
M22 indicators can be equipped with an LED or incandescent lamp.
Available in 5 colors
Super-bright LEDs for all versions
Lamp sockets with or without transformers
UL and cUL approved
Display
Appearance
Round/flat
Square/projection
Lamp
IP65 oil-resistant
AC/DC
LED
light
Operating voltage
6V
12 V
24 V
24 V
superbright
Red
A22-6DR
Green
A22-6DG
M22-FW
Yellow
A22-6DY
Blue
M22-FA
Blue
A22-6DA
Red
M22-CR
Red
A22-6AR
Green
M22-CG
Green
A22-6AG
Yellow
M22-CY
Yellow
A22-6AY
White
M22-CW
Blue
A22-6AA
Red
A22-12AR
A22-24AR
A22-24ASR
Color of display
Order code
Red
M22-FR
Green
M22-FG
Yellow
M22-FY
White
Blue
M22-CA
AC
DC
AC and DC
Green
A22-12AG
A22-24AG
A22-24ASG
Socket unit
Yellow
A22-12AY
A22-24AY
A22-24ASY
Order code
Blue
A22-12AA
A22-24AA
A22-24ASA
Voltage-reduction circuits
Without voltage reduction unit
With voltage reduction unit (220 VAC)
M22-00
M22-00-T2
Incandescent lamp
6 VAC/VDC
12 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
100 VAC/VDC
A22-5
A22-12
A22-24
A22-H1
Accessories
M22 uses the same accessories as A22. Please refer to the relevant information in the corresponding section for the A22.
Specifications
Standards
File number
UL, cUL
UL508
E41515
Rated voltage
Rated current
Operating voltage
6 VDC
60 mA (20 mA)
6 VDC 5%
6 VAC
60 mA (20 mA)
6 VAC 5%
12 VAC/VDC
30 mA (10 mA)
12 VAC/VDC 5%
24 VAC/VDC
15 mA (10 mA)
24 VAC/VDC 5%
LED lamp
Incandescent lamp
Rated voltage
Rated current
Operating voltage
6 VAC/VDC
200 mA
5V
14 VAC/VDC
80 mA
12 V
28 VAC/VDC
40 mA
24 V
130 VAC/VDC
20 mA
100 V
Superbright LED indicator

Rated voltage
Rated current
Operating voltage
24 VAC/VDC
15 mA
24 VAC/VDC 5%
Pushbutton switches
Rated voltage
Rated current
Operating voltage
110 VAC
95 to 115 VAC
LED lamp (A22-24_)
220 VAC
190 to 230 VAC
Ambient temperature
Operating: 20 to 55C, storage: 40 to 70C
IP65
Electric shock protection class
Class II
PTI (tracking characteristic)
175
Degree of contamination
3 (IEC947-5-1)
Size in mm
Button: 29.7 dia. 16D, switch: 34H 34W 54.7D
671
Software
S5
NS5
Handheld
38
e 69
N539
Page 70

672
Quick Link
Software
Software
CX-One . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
CX-Supervisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
CX-Server OPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
CX-Server LITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Sysmac Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
Software
Content
Software
673
Software
ONE SOFTWAREONE CONNECTIONONE MINUTE
One software for all your automation needs
One Software is a key component of the overall architecture of Omron software. Whether for our Compact & Modular range or our new Sysmac platform,
integration of software technologies brings value direct to the customer. These softwares integrate configuration, programming and monitoring in
packages designed for those platforms. Integrated software gives you the power and efficiency to develop and create like never before.
Software
Configuration & Programming
Sysmac Studio
One Software
Compact
Modular
A single software for programming controllers, HMIs, networks, motion controllers, drives,
control units, switches and sensors
L422
Page 676
674
Machine control
True Integrated Development Environment (IDE) for motion, sequence, safety, vision,
networking and 3D simulation
L432
Page 679
CX-Supervisor
CX-Server LITE
CX-Server OPC
L429
Page 677
L434
Page 678
L426
Page 678
Software
Visualisation
675
CX-One
Software
Integrated One software that covers all your
requirements for complete machine automation
This single programming and configuration environment is an integrated software
management tool called CX-One that enables the user to build, configure and program
networks, PLCs, HMIs, motion control systems, drives, temperature controllers and
sensors. The result of a single software is to reduce complexity of the configuration
and allow automation systems to be programmed or configured with minimal training.
By registering a licence number at www.omron-industrial.com, users can benefit from
free updates to their version of CX-One for 12 months free of charge. An automatic update service can notify users as soon as relevant updates are available.
CX-One is available as two types. FULL supporting all PLCs or LITE designed for our
compact PLC range. Thus our integrated One Software applies to our complete portfolio.
CX-One FULL
Media
Order code
Single licence
Licence Only
CXONE-AL01-EV_
Three user licence
Licence Only
CXONE-AL03-EV_
Ten user licence
Licence Only
CXONE-AL010-EV_
Thirty user licence
Licence Only
CXONE-AL030-EV_
Fifty user licence
Licence Only
CXONE-AL050-EV_
Site licence
Licence Only
CXONE-AL0XX-EV_
Software on CDs
CD
CXONE-CD-EV_
Software on a DVD
DVD
CXONE-DVD-EV_
CX-One LITE
Media
Order code
Single user licence
Licence Only
CXONE-LT01-EV_
Software on CD
CD
CXONE-LTCD-EV_
Specifications
Subject
Indicator
Description
Programming
CX-Programmer
CX-Programmer provides one common PLC software platform for all types of Omron PLC controllers from micro PLC's up to
Duplex processor systems. It allows easy conversion and re-use of PLC code between different PLC types, and the full re-use of
control programs created by older generation PLC programming software.
CX-Simulator
A debugging environment equivalent to the actual PLC system environment can be achieved by simulating the operation of a
CS/CJ Series PLC with a virtual PLC in the computer. CX-Simulator makes it possible to evaluate program operation, check the
cycle time and reduce debugging time before the actual equipment is assembled.
CX-Designer
CX-Designer is used to create screen data for NS-series Programmable Terminals. CX-Designer can also check the operation of
the created screen data on the computer. CX-Designer enables efficient development process for screen creation, simulation
and project deployment. Users can develop screens more efficiently with Easy-to-use Support Software. CX-Designer has about
1,000 standard functional objects with associated graphics and advanced functions, so even first-time users can create screens
easily just by arranging functional objects in a screen.
CX-Integrator
CX-Integrator is the main configuration software for CX-One. It enables easy performance of many operations, such as monitoring the connection status of various networks, setting parameters, and diagnosing networks.
CX-ConfiguratorFDT
Based on FDT/DTM technology, CX-ConfiguratorFDT can be used to configure devices from any vendor connected to a PROFIBUS
network. This concept will later be expanded to support many more networks using this technology.
CX-Motion
CX-Motion can be used to create, edit, and print the various parameters, position data, and motion control programs (G code)
required to operate Motion Controllers, transfer the data to the Motion Control units, and monitor operation of the Motion Control units. Increase productivity in every step of the motion control process, from development of the motion control program
to system operation.
CX-Drive
The complete current range of Omron Yaskawa inverters and servos is covered in this software with full access to all parameters
(with 3 different operator levels available). An easy overview of parameters is also included which includes filters to show values
that are: different from default, different from inverter, invalid setting. Graphical overviews are available to further assist with
configuration of some more detailed parameters such as jump frequencies, v/f profiles and analog setting.
CX-Position
CX-Position simplifies every aspect of position control, from creating/editing the data used in Position Control units (NC units)
to communicating online and monitoring operation. The software is equipped with functions that can improve productivity,
such as automatically generating project data and reusing existing data.
CX-Thermo
Omrons CX-Thermo support software has been specially developed for use with the companys E5CN, E5EN, E5GN, E5AN, E5CNH, E5EN-H, E5AN-H, E5ZN, E5AR, E5ER and CelciuX temperature controllers. CX-Thermo enables faster parameter set-up, easier
device adjustment and simpler maintenance. It dramatically reduces the time and effort needed to set and manage temperature
control parameters.
CX-Process
CX-Process simplifies every aspect of loop control, from creating/transferring function blocks to running the Boards/units and
debugging (tuning PID parameters, etc.) operation. Function block programs can be created easily by pasting function blocks in
the window and making software connections with the mouse.
CX-Sensor
CX-Sensor allows configuration and monitoring of Omron's ZX range of sensors via a series of easy to use displays. The graphing
dialog allows the outputs from several sensors to be reviewed and compared simultaneously, allowing configuration of complex
processes. The software also includes a driver that allows sensor data to be accessed via an Omron serial control unit (SCU) and
from other Omron applications such as CX-Supervisor. With the aid of Omron's CX-Server OPC application it is even possible to
monitor sensor data in real time from Microsoft Excel.
Networks
Motion & Drives
Regulation and Switching
Sensing
676
CX-Supervisor
Software
Powerful Machine Visualisation
CX-Supervisor is dedicated to the design and operation of PC visualisation and machine control. It is not only simple to use for small supervisory and control tasks, but
also offers a wealth of power for the design of the most sophisticated applications.
CX-Supervisor boasts powerful functions for a wide range of PC based HMI requirements. Simple applications can be created rapidly with the aid of a large number of
predefined functions and libraries, and even very complex applications can be generated with a powerful programming language or VBScript. CX-Supervisor has an extremely simple, intuitive handling and high user friendliness. Importing ActiveX
components makes it possible to create flexible applications and extend functionality.
CX-Supervisor now comes in two editions:

CX-Supervisor Machine Edition is the perfect choice for almost all machine visualization requirements. Supporting connection of up to 15 devices and up to
500 user definable points (array = 1 point), it is flexible and powerful enough for the
control and supervision of a complete machine or an entire manufacturing process.
And its easy-to-use Windows Explorer-style development environment makes building the most sophisticated graphic interfaces simple.
CX-Supervisor PLUS is for those exceptional cases where an application demands

a higher number of devices or points than can be handled by CX-Supervisor Machine
Edition. It otherwise shares all of the same power and features.
Description
Media
Order code
Developer & runtime (no protection included)
CD
CX-SUPERVISOR-V_ _
Developer upgrade (no protection included, requires licence of previous version) CD
CX-SUPERVISOR-UPGR-V_ _
Machine Edition runtime including USB dongle protection
CD
CX-SUPERVISOR-RUN-ME-V_ _
PLUS Edition runtime including USB dongle protection
CD
CX-SUPERVISOR-RUN-PLUS-V_ _
Specifications
Supervisor
Machine Edition
Plus
ActiveX
Yes
Yes
VBScript
Yes
Yes
Recipes
Yes
Yes
Alarms
300
3000
Animation
Yes
Yes
Max Devices (PLCs etc)
20
256
OPC Connections
Yes
Yes
Max Points
500
8000
Max Regular Interval Scripts
10
100
Max Num Pages
100
500
Databases supported
MS Access
MS Access SQL, ODBC, MS Access, MS Excel. dBase, CSV
Software
Feature
677
CX-Server OPC
Software
Omrons devices meet Open Integration
CX-Server OPC provides a connection between the industry standard OPC interface
specification and Omron's network architecture and controllers. CX-Server OPC allows
any OPC compliant client software to interface easily with Omron.
The multi-vendor connectivity and information exchange capability of CX-Server OPC
eliminates driver development issues.
CX-Server OPC includes an ActiveX OPC client control and a set of graphical components. Linking the graphical controls can be done without a single line of script. No
programming knowledge is required!
Description
Media
Order code
CX-Server OPC
CD & Licence
CX-OPC-EV_
CX-Server LITE
Simple but effective connectivity
As a pair to our OPC product, CX-Server LITE is designed to meet a wide variety of programmers' needs from the simple to the advanced. Used to create PC-based simple
HMI projects, CX-Server LITE allows designers of custom programs to send and receive
PLC data and manipulate controllers within Omron networks.
Based on ActiveX technology, it is easy to add a communications control to a VB project or an Excel spreadsheet. Live data can be updated directly into a cell or range of
cells.
CX-Server LITE includes a set of graphical components designed to connect to the
communications control. Linking the graphical controls can be done without a single
line of script. No programming knowledge is required!
Description
Media
Order code
CX-Server LITE
CD & Licence
CX-LITE-EV_
678
Sysmac Studio
Software
Sysmac Studio for machine creators
The Sysmac Studio provides one design and operation environment for configuration,
programming, simulation and monitoring.
One software for servo, inverter, vision and I/O
Fully compliant with open standard IEC 61131-3
Supports Ladder, Structured text and In-Line ST programming with a rich
instruction set
CAM editor for easy programming of complex motion profiles
One simulation tool for sequence and motion in a 3D environment
Advanced security function with 32 digit security password
Automation software
Please purchase a DVD and licenses the first time you purchase the Sysmac Studio. DVDs and licenses are available individually.
The license does not include the DVD.
Product
Specifications
Order code
Description
Sysmac Studio Standard Edition Ver. 1.@@
Number of licenses
DVD*1
SYSMAC-SE200D
SYSMAC-SE201L
SYSMAC-SE203L
10 licenses
SYSMAC-SE210L
30 licenses
SYSMAC-SE230L
50 licenses
SYSMAC-SE250L
The Sysmac Studio provides an integrated development environ (Media only)

ment to set up, program, debug and maintain NJ-series controllers 1 license
and other machine automation controllers, as well EtherCAT slaves
3 licenses
Sysmac Studio runs on the following OS:
Windows XP (Service Pack 3 or higher, 32-bit version)/
Vista (32-bit version)/7 (32-bit/64-bit version)
Media
Sysmac Studio Vision Edition

Ver. 1.@@*2
Sysmac Studio Vision Edition is a limited license that provides select- 1 license
ed functions required for FQ-M series vision sensor settings
SYSMAC-VE001L
Sysmac Studio
Measurement Sensor
Edition Ver. 1.@@*3,*4
Sysmac Studio Measurement Sensor Edition is a limited license that 1 license

provides selected functions required for ZW-series displacement
3 licenses
sensor settings
SYSMAC-ME001L
SYSMAC-ME003L
*1
*2
*3
*4
The same media is used for both the Standard Edition and the Vision Edition.
With the Vision Edition, you can use only the setup functions for FQ-M series vision sensors.
With the Measurement Sensor Edition, you can use only the setup functions for ZW-series displacement sensors.
This product is a license only. You need the Sysmac Studio Standard Edition DVD media to install it.
Note: Site licenses are available for users who will run Sysmac Studio on multiple computers. Ask your OMRON sales representative for details.
Components
DVD (SYSMAC-SE200D)
Components
Details
Introduction
An introduction about components, installation/uninstallation, user registration and auto update of the Sysmac Studio is provided
Setup disk (DVD-ROM)
License (SYSMAC-SE2@@L/VE0@@L/ME0@@L)
Components
Details
License agreement
The license agreement gives the usage conditions and warranty for the Sysmac Studio
License card
A model number, version, license number and number of licenses are described
User registration card
Two cards are contained. One is for users in Japan and the other is for users in other countries
Included support software

DVD media of Sysmac Studio includes the following support software:
Outline
Ver. 3.@@
The CX-Designer is used to create screens for NS-series PTs
CX-Integrator
Ver. 2.@@
The CX-Integrator is used to set up FA networks
CX-Protocol
Ver. 1.@@
The CX-Protocol is used for protocol macros for serial communications units
Network Configurator
Ver. 3.@@
The Network Configurator is used for tag data links on the built-in EtherNet/IP port
Software
Included support software

CX-Designer
679
Outline of Major Standards
International Standards
International standards consist of the IEC standards related to electricity and the ISO standards
related to other areas (e.g., machines and management.)
IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission)
The IEC is a standardization commission founded in 1908 to promote unification and coordination of
international standards relating to electricity. It is headquartered in Geneva, Switzerland.
Based on reports from member nations on the latest science technologies in those nations, IEC
standards are issued as technological standards relating to electricity. Established international
safety standards provided by various countries and accepted worldwide are based on IEC standards.
The IEC standards committees includes the CISPR (International Special Committee on Radio
Interference) that makes standards for EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility).
To simplify certification procedures for electrical devices and promote smooth international trade,
there is an international scheme called CB Scheme (Certification Body Scheme), which is authorized
by IEC standards. Based on the CB Scheme, safety tests on electrical devices are conducted and
certificates are issued if the devices are proved to meet IEC standards.
ISO (International Organization for Standardization)
ISO is a standardization organization that started official activities in 1947 to promote international
standards in all areas (e.g., machines and management) except for electricity, which is covered by
the IEC, by issuing ISO standards. It is headquartered in Geneva, Switzerland.
For detailed information please refer to:

http://www.ia.omron.com/support/models/outline
680
North America
UL Standards (Underwriters Laboratories INC.)
A nonprofit organization established in 1894 by the American association of fire
insurance companies. Underwriters Laboratories (abbreviated to UL hereafter)
conducts certification testing on all kinds of electrical products. In many U.S.
cities and states, UL certification is legally required on all electrical items sold. To
obtain UL certification on an electrical product, all major internal components
also require UL certification. UL offers two classifications of certification, the
listing mark and the recognition mark.
A Listing Mark constitutes the entire certification of a product. Products display
the Listing Mark shown below.
The Recognition Mark applies to the components used in a product, and therefore
constitutes a more conditional approval of a product. Use of the Recognition Mark
is not required for non-specified parts (e.g., specified parts such as
microswitches) Products display the Recognition Mark shown below.
Since October 1992, UL has been recognized as a CO (council organization) and TO
(test organization) by the SCC (Standard Council of Canada). This authorizes UL to
conduct safety tests and certify products conforming to Canadian standards. The
above marks are UL marks for products certifying that the products meet
Canadian standards.
The designs of the listing marks and recognition marks have been revised as
shown below. These marks have been effective since January 1998. The previous
marks are valid until November 2007.
Standards (Canadian Standards Association)
This association descended from a nonprofit, non-government standardization
organization established in 1919. In addition to industrial standardization, the
association now carries out safety testing on electrical products.
Standard development: The Canadian Standards Association
Product testing and certification: CSA International
This process is known as "certification," and consequently, CSA-certified
equipment displays the mark shown below.
Europe
EN (European Norm) Standards
Of the EN standards related to electricity, standards beginning with "EN6" are based on IEC
standards and those beginning with "EN55" are based on IEC-CISPR standards. Standards
beginning with "EN5" are unique EU standards that do not exist in the IEC standards.
The following marks of recognition are used by the Certification Bodies in European countries
in accordance with EN standards.
EC (European Communities) Directives

In the EU (European Union), EC Directives are announced to instruct the creation of
laws in the EU member countries. A product can display the CE Marking only when it
conforms to all of the directives applicable to it, such as the New Approach Directives,
which cover the Machinery Directive, Low Voltage Directive, and the EMC Directive.
As a rule, EN standards announced as Harmonized Standards in the Official Journal of
the European Communities are used to evaluate directive compliance.
China
Germany
VDE (Prf- und Zertifizierungsinstitut GmbH)
TV Rheinland (Industrie Service GmbH)
TV product services
Denmark
DEMKO (Danmarks Elektriske Materielkontrol)
Norway
NEMKO (Norges Elektriske Materiellkontroll)
Finland
FIMKO (Finlands Material Kontroll)
United Kingdom
CCC (China Compulsory Certication) Mark

As a result of China joining the WTO (World Trade Organization) in 2001, the previous
Safety License System for Import Commodities and the Compulsory Supervision
System for Product Safety Certification were combined to form the CCC. The change
was announced on 3 December 2001 and implemented from 1 May 2002. Starting 1
August 2003, any products that have not received the CCC Mark are prohibited from
import to or sale in China.
Products Subject to CCC Mark: 19 product sections consisting of 132 product
categories
Applicable Standards: National Standards (GB: Guojia Biaozhun) (Standards related to
electricity were based on IEC standards.)
CCC Mark: Display of the CCC Mark is legally required.
Japan
Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law of Japan
Accompanying revisions to laws related to electrical appliances, the Electrical
Appliance and Material Safety Law was switched to on 1 April 2001 and the previous
Electrical Appliance and Material Control Law was abolished. New marks were also
created for the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law.
The law covers 112 specified electrical appliances and materials and 340 non-specified
electrical appliances and materials.
Article 2 of the Ordinance Concerning Technical Requirements for Electrical Appliances
and Materials specifies technical requirements (IEC-J standards) harmonized with IEC
standards.
BSI (British Standards Institution, applicable to industrial products)
BEAB (British Electrotechnical Approvals Board, applicable to home electronics

products)
ASTA (ASTA Certification Services, applicable to general products)

The Netherlands
KEMA (Keuring van Electrotechnische Materialen Nederland B. V.)
France
UTE (Union Technique De Electricite)
Italy
IMQ (Istituto Italiano del Marchio di Qualita)
Russia
GOST-R
TR CU certificate and declaration

Sweden
Intertek
Switzerland
SEV (Schweizerischer Electrotechnischer Verein)
Industry specic certications

Marine Standards
There are more than 20 classification societies worldwide that individually work to create
regulations and certify compliance. The IACS (International Association of Classification Societies)
works as an international body currently consisting of 10 member classification societies plus 2
associate classification societies. The classification societies in the IACS certify and register 90% of
the world's ships. The option to be classified is made by the owner of the ship; classification
certification is undertaken by the shipyard at the request of the owner.
Classification certification has a close relationship to maritime insurance. Insurance underwriters
will as a rule insure only ships that have been classified and refuse those without a certified
classification. Therefore, automation devices used on ships must conform to classification standards
of individual countries if so requested by the owner.
Although classification societies will often recognize portions of inspection data that have the same
requirement from other classification societies, requirements and standards differ among the
classification societies. Classification societies therefore they do not recognize certification from
other classification societies. It is thus necessary to comply with the classification standards of the
required classification society. If registration is required in more than one classification, then
certification is required for both.
IACS Member Classication Societies
ABS (American Bureau of Shipping), BV (Bureau Veritas, France's classification society), CCS (China
Classification Society), DNV (Det Norske Veritas, Norway's classification society), GL (Germanischer
Lloyd, Germany's classification society), KR (Korean Register of Shipping), LR (Lloyd's Register of
Shipping, Britain's classification society), NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai, Japan's classification society),
RINA (Registro Italiano Navale, Italy's classification society), RS (Russian Maritime Register of
Shipping)
IACS Associate Classication Societies
IRS (Indian Register of Shipping)
Other Classication Societies
CR (China Corporation Register of Shipping, Taiwan's classification society)
Food, Beverage and Pharma

For more information on standards used in the food, beverage and pharmaceutical industries
refer to industrial.omron.eu.
681
682
683
684
685
686
Index
#
61F-GP-N8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
61F-GPN-BC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
61F-GPN-BT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
A
A16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A165E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A22E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories fiber optic sensors . .
Accessories NS . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories photoelectric sensors
Accurax G5
Servo drives . . . . . . . . . .
Servo motors . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
406, 666
. . . 408
409, 668
. . . 411
. 82, 310
. . . 261
. . . . 67
. . . 210
. . . . . . 106
. . . . . . 125
C
Cable connectors . . . . . . . . . . . .
CelciuX (EJ1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CJ1W-NC_3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CJ1W-NC_4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CJ1W-NC_71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CJ1W-NC_8_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CJ-Series
Analog I/O and control units . .
Communication units . . . . . .
CPU units . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital I/O units . . . . . . . . . .
Motion/position control units .
Power supplies, expansions . . .
Compact I/O CRT1 . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact I/O DRT2 . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact I/O GX-series . . . . . . . . .
Compact I/O SRT2 . . . . . . . . . . .
CP1E CPU units . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP1H CPU units . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP1L CPU units . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP1W expansion units . . . . . . . . .
CPM2C CPU units . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPM2C expansion units . . . . . . . .
CS-Series
Analog and process I/O units . .
Communication units . . . . . .
CPU units . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital I/O units . . . . . . . . . .
Position/motion control units .
Power supplies, backplanes . . .
CX-One . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CX-Server LITE . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CX-Server OPC . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CX-Supervisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
306
533
100
101
. 99
. 95
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
. 40
. 43
. 37
. 39
. 42
. 38
676
678
678
677
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 434
288, 429
. . . 453
. . . 292
. . . 283
. . . 457
. . . 283
286, 431
. . . 427
. . . 433
. . . 456
. . . 452
. . . 458
. . . 285
. . . 493
32
36
28
31
34
30
54
53
52
55
22
26
24
27
20
21
D
D40A/G9SX-NS
D4B . . . . . .
D4BS . . . . . .
D4C . . . . . . .
D4E . . . . . . .
D4GL . . . . . .
D4MC . . . . .
D4N . . . . . .
D4N-_R . . . .
D4NH . . . . .
D4NL . . . . . .
D4NS . . . . . .
D4SL-N . . . .
D5B . . . . . .
DST1 . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
E
E2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
E2A3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
E2A-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
E2AU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
E2B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
E2C-EDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
PROX E2E Small Diameter . . . . . . . . . . .272
E2E-_-U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
E2EH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
E2FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
E2FQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
E2Q5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
E2S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
E32 Fibers
Area monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Chemical resistant . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Heat resistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Longer distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Miniature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Precision detection . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Robot application . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Special application . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Square shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Standard cylindrical . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Vacuum resistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
E39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
E3F_-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
E3F_-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
E3F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
E3FA/E3FB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
E3FC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
E3FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
E3G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
E3G-M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
E3H2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
E3JK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
E3JM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
E3NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
E3NX-FA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
E3S-CL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
E3S-DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
E3S-LS3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
E3T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
E3T-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
E3X-DACLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
E3X-DAC-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
E3X-DAH-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
E3X-HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
E3X-MDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
E3X-NA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
E3X-NA_F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
E3X-SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
E3Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
E3Z-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
E3Z-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
E3Z-Laser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
E3ZM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
E3ZM-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
E3ZM-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
E3ZM-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
E5_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
E5_C-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
E5_N-H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
E5_N-HT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
E5_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
E5_R-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
E52-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
E5C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
E5CB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
E5CSV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
E5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
E5L-A/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
E6A2-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
E6B2-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
E6C2-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
E6C3-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
E6C3-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
E6F-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
E6F-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
E6H-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
EE_SX67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
EE-SX47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
EJ1N-HFU-ETN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537

ER1022 . . . .
ER1032 . . . .
ER5018 . . . .
ER6022 . . . .
XER1022 . . . .
XER1032 . . . .
XER6022 . . . .
ES1B . . . . . . . . .
ES1C . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet cables . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.412
.412
.412
.412
.412
.412
.412
.536
.537
. 81
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . .487
. . . . .226
. . . . .228
. . . . .225
. . . . .474
. . . . .470
. . . . .466
. . . . .482
. . . . .463
. . . . .463
. . . . .454
. . . . .460
. . . . .461
. . . . .454
. . . . .454
. . . . .439
. . . . .445
. . . . .442
. . . . .445
. . . . .450
. . . . .447
. . . . . 56
. . . . . 57
. . . . .214
. . . . .315
. . . . .311
. . . . .221
. . . . .311
. . . . .311
. . . . .311
. . . . .325
. . . . .214
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
F
F39-TGR-MCL . . .
F3E . . . . . . . . . .
F3EM2 . . . . . . . .
F3ET2 . . . . . . . .
F3SJ-A . . . . . . . .
F3SJ-B . . . . . . . .
F3SJ-E . . . . . . . .
F3S-TGR-CL . . . . .
F3S-TGRCL_-K_ . .
F3S-TGRCL_-K_C .
F3S-TGR-KH16 . . .
F3S-TGR-KHL1 . . .
F3S-TGR-KHL3 . . .
F3S-TGR-KM15 . . .
F3S-TGR-KM16 . . .
F3S-TGR-N_C . . .
F3S-TGR-N_M . . .
F3S-TGR-N_R . . .
F3S-TGR-N_U . . .
F3S-TGR-N_X . . .
F3S-TGR-S_A/-S_D
Field I/O DRT2-_C_
Field I/O SRT2-_C_
FQ . . . . . . . . . .
FQ2 . . . . . . . . .
FQ2-CH . . . . . . .
FQ2-CLR . . . . . . .
FQ2-S4 . . . . . . .
FQ-CR1 . . . . . . .
FQ-CR2 . . . . . . .
FQ-M . . . . . . . .
FZ . . . . . . . . . .
G
G2R-_-S . . . . . .
G2RV . . . . . . .
G3NA . . . . . . .
G3PA . . . . . . .
G3PE . . . . . . . .
G3PF . . . . . . . .
G3PH . . . . . . .
G3PW . . . . . . .
G3R-I . . . . . . .
G3R-O . . . . . . .
G3RV . . . . . . .
G3ZA . . . . . . . .
G7J . . . . . . . . .
G7L . . . . . . . .
G7S-_-E . . . . . .
G7SA . . . . . . . .
G7Z . . . . . . . .
G9SA . . . . . . . .
G9SB . . . . . . . .
G9SP-N_ . . . . .
G9SR . . . . . . . .
G9SX . . . . . . . .
G9SX-GS/A4EG . .
G9SX-LM . . . . .
G9SX-NS . . . . .
G9SX-SM . . . . .
G-Series
Servo drives .
Servo motors
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.601
.599
.614
.616
.617
.608
.608
.609
.613
.613
.612
.609
.607
.595
.506
.505
.595
.496
.497
.507
.498
.499
.500
.502
.493
.504
H
H2C .
H3CR
H3DK
H3DS
H3YN
H5CX
H7CX
H7EC .
H7ER
H7ET .
H8GN
H8PS
HL . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 563
. 561
. 559
. 558
. 560
. 562
. 572
. 568
. 570
. 569
. 571
. 573
. 283
I
I/O cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
I/O terminal blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
J
J7KN . . . .
J7KNA . . .
J7KNA-AR .
J7MN . . .
J7TKN . . .
JX . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 627
. 626
. 625
. 631
. 629
. 166
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . 586
. . . . 590
. . . . 588
. . . . 590
. . . . 590
. . . . 588
. . . . 588
. . . . 588
. . . . 587
. . . . 587
. . . . 587
. . . . 659
. . . . 641
. . . . 642
. . . . 657
. . . . 649
. . . . 645
. . . . 647
. . . . 660
. . . . 653
. 512, 661
. . . . 660
. . . . 643
. . . . 644
. . . . 650
. . . . 646
. . . . 648
. . . . 652
. . . . 651
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
K
K3GN . . .
K3HB-C . .
K3HB-H . .
K3HB-P . .
K3HB-R . .
K3HB-S . .
K3HB-V . .
K3HB-X . .
K3MA-F . .
K3MA-J . .
K3MA-L . .
K7L . . . .
K8AK-AS .
K8AK-AW .
K8AK-LS .
K8AK-PA .
K8AK-PH .
K8AK-PM .
K8AK-PT .
K8AK-PW .
K8AK-TH .
K8AK-TS .
K8AK-VS .
K8AK-VW .
K8DS-PA .
K8DS-PH .
K8DS-PM .
K8DS-PU .
K8DS-PZ .
L
LME
LU5
LU7
LX .
LY .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 424
. 415
. 419
. 150
. 605
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
687
(continued)
M
M16 . . .
M22 . . .
MKS . . .
MKS(X) . .
MP . . . .
MPS . . .
MS2800 .
MS4800 .
MX2 . . .
MY . . . .
T
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
670
671
606
595
422
422
480
480
160
603
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
. 62
. 62
. 62
. 62
. 68
493
. 14
. 64
. 64
. 64
. 65
. 66
. 64
. 70
. 71
. 48
493
493
N
NA12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NA15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NA7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NA9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NB series . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NE1A-SCPU0_ . . . . . . . . .
NJ-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NS10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NS12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NS15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NS5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NS5 handheld . . . . . . . . . .
NS8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NT11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NT2S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NX-S . . . . . . . . . . . .
V
V400-H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
V680S series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
W
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
O
OS32C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
P
PRT1-SCU11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
R
RX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
S
S8EX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S8JC-ZS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S8JX-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S8JX-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S8M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S8T-DCBU-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S8T-DCBU-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S8TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S8VK-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S8VK-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S8VK-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S8VK-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SHL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SmartSlice I/O system . . . . . . . . . .
SmartStep 2 servo drive . . . . . . . . .
SX (400 V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SX (690 V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sysmac Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
688
TL-W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Trajexia 2.5 axes motion controller . . . . . . 93
Trajexia stand-alone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Trajexia-PLC CJ1W-MC472 . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Trajexia-PLC CJ1W-MCH72 . . . . . . . . . . . 97
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
550
545
546
548
553
551
551
549
542
543
552
544
283
. 51
120
151
151
679
WE70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
WL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
WL-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
X
X ......
Xpectia FH .
Xpectia FZ5
Xpectia lite
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
283
333
333
215
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
296
294
578
579
580
581
393
376
384
371
373
389
397
381
391
Z
Z ....
ZC . . . .
ZEN-10C
ZEN-20C
ZEN-8E .
ZEN-PA .
ZG2 . . .
ZS-HL .
ZW . . .
ZX1 . . .
ZX2 . . .
ZX-E . .
ZX-GT .
ZX-L . .
ZX-T . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Discover it by yourself!
Just lift up this page and discover these DVDs!
Extended technical information, product brochures and
magazines. For online updated information visit
industrial.omron.eu
Note:
Although we do strive for perfection, Omron Europe BV and/or its subsidiary and affiliated companies
do not warrant or make any representations regarding the correctness or completeness of information described in this catalogue. Product information in this catalogue is provided as is without
warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, or non-infringement. In a jurisdiction where the
exclusion of implied warranties is not valid, the exclusion shall be deemed to be replaced by such
valid exclusion, which most closely matches the intent and purpose of the original exclusion. Omron
Europe BV and/or its subsidiary and affiliated companies reserve the right to make any changes to the
products, their specifications, data at its sole discretion at any time without prior notice. The material
contained in this catalogue may be out of date and Omron Europe BV and/or its subsidiary and affiliated companies make no commitment to update such material.
<
Extended information needed?

Check out these DVDs!
Extended technical information, product brochures and magazines.
For online updated information visit industrial.omron.eu
Would you like to know more?

OMRON EUROPE
+31 (0) 23 568 13 00
industrial.omron.eu
omron.me/socialmedia_eu
Sales & Support Offices

Austria
Tel: +43 (0) 2236 377 800
industrial.omron.at
Germany
Tel: +49 (0) 2173 680 00
industrial.omron.de
Portugal
Tel: +351 21 942 94 00
industrial.omron.pt
Turkey
Tel: +90 212 467 30 00
industrial.omron.com.tr
Belgium
Tel: +32 (0) 2 466 24 80
industrial.omron.be
Hungary
Tel: +36 1 399 30 50
industrial.omron.hu
Russia
Tel: +7 495 648 94 50
industrial.omron.ru
United Kingdom
Tel: +44 (0) 1908 258 258
industrial.omron.co.uk
Czech Republic
Tel: +420 234 602 602
industrial.omron.cz
Italy
Tel: +39 02 326 81
industrial.omron.it
South Africa
Tel: +27 (0)11 579 2600
industrial.omron.co.za
Denmark
Tel: +45 43 44 00 11
industrial.omron.dk
Netherlands
Tel: +31 (0) 23 568 11 00
industrial.omron.nl
Spain
Tel: +34 902 100 221
industrial.omron.es
Finland
Tel: +358 (0) 207 464 200
industrial.omron.fi
Norway
Tel: +47 (0) 22 65 75 00
industrial.omron.no
Sweden
Tel: +46 (0) 8 632 35 00
industrial.omron.se
France
Tel: +33 (0) 1 56 63 70 00
industrial.omron.fr
Poland
Tel: +48 22 458 66 66
industrial.omron.pl
Switzerland
Tel: +41 (0) 41 748 13 13
industrial.omron.ch
Y205-EN2-08+IndAutoGuide2015
More Omron representatives

industrial.omron.eu

Omron Industrial Automation Guide 2015

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Omron Industrial Automation Guide 2015

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Omron Industrial Automation Guide 2015

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the 'targeted technologies' concept?

What is the 'targeted technologies' concept?

What information can be found on Omron's website?

What information can be found on Omron's website?

Industrial Automation Guide 2015

Industrial Products & Systems

Welcome to our world

Industrial Automation Guide 2015

Motion & Drives

Quality control & Inspection

To the machine the work of the machine,

200.000 products ranging

Investment in Research & Development

11.000 + issued and pending patents

Working for the

Sysmac Automation Platform

The 361 Approach

Your needs, our focus

361 in one view

designed for spe

Three distinct lines

The extra degree of advantage

Quality refers to the

Line-up refers to the

Application indicates the

Specs refers to the choice

Product selection table

Motion & Drives

Mark and color sensors

Quality control &

Inspection & Ident systems

Control- and Signalling

Safety limit switches

Human machine interfaces

Lightcurtains and area

Fiber optic sensors and

Safety door switches

Solid state relays

Low voltage switchgear

Cables and accessories

Safety control systems

Digital panel indicators

Find information fast!

Quick Links shortens your search. Quick Links are

Machine automation controller

Human machine interfaces (HMI)

Programmable logic controllers (PLC)

Cables and accessories

Machine automation controller

Please find our full online catalogue on: http://omron.me/iag2015EU

Machine automation controller

Type of CPU needed?

H248, H246, H252

Machine automation controller

Machine automation controller

NJ5 with Database connection

NJ5 series Machine Controller with

NJ5 series Machine Controller with

NJ5 series Machine Controller with

NJ3 series Machine Controller with